trf %
Dr. John Henderson
mm l,q
'"'OLLENDORFF'S NEW METHOD
OF LEARNING TO
READ, WRITE, AND SPEAK
THE
[TALIAN LANGUAGE
ADAPTED FOB
THE USE OF SCHOOLS AND PRIVATE TEACHERS
WITH ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS
By FELIX FORESTI, LL. D.
UOFESSOR OP THE ITALIAN LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE IN COLUMBIA COLLEGE
AND IN THE UNIVERSITY OF THE CITY OF NEW YORK
NEW YORK • : • CINCINNATI • : • CHICAGO
AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY
PC
Ok
Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1846, by
D. APPLETON & CO.,
In the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the United .States for the Southern
District of New York.
w. p. 8
NOTICE.
A Key to the Exercises of this Grammar is published in a
separate volume.
OSSERVAZIONE
PEL PROFESSORE ITALIANO
L'autore di questo metodo non ha ll minimo dubbio di
renir criticato nella scelta delle frasi e dei vocaboli di uii si
servl nell corso delP opera : la lingua italiana, ricca di tante
bellezze fornitele da una letteratura di piu di sei secoli, offre
una scelta d* espressioni qnalche volta imbarazzante per lo
studioso ; ma V autore, attenendosi a solido appoggio, prefer
il Manzoni, fra i moderni scrittori il piu unanimemente
stimato in fatto di precisione e di buon gusto.
EXPLANATION OF SOME SIGNS USED IN THIS BOOK
Expressions which vary either in their construction or idiom from
he English are marked thus : f
A hand (Itf"; denotes a rule of syntax or construction.
PREFACE.
My system of acquiring a living language is founded on tne
principle, that each question nearly contains the answei
which une ought ur which one wishes to make to it The
slight difference between the question and the answer is
always explained before the question : so that the learne:
does not find it in the least difficult, either to answer it, or to
make similar questions for himself. Again, the question
containing the same words as the answer, as soon as the
master pronounces it, it strikes the pupil's ear, and is there
fore easily reproduced by his speaking organs. This prin
ciple is so evident, that it is impossible to open the book
without being struck by it.
Neither the professor nor the pupils lose an instant oi
time. When the professor reads the lesson, the pupil an
swers ; when he examines the lesson written by the pupii
he speaks again, and the pupil answers; also when he
examines the exercise which the pupil has translated, he
speaks and the pupil answei s: thus both are, as it were,
continually kept in exercise.
Tl PREFACE.
The phrases are so arranged that, from the beginning to
the end of the method, the pupil's curiosity is excised by the
want of a word or an expression : this word or expression is
always given in the following lesson, but in such a mannei
as to create a desire for others that render the phrase still
more complete. Hence, from one end of the book to the
other, the pupil's attention is continually kept alive, till at
.ast he has acquired a thorough knowledge of the language
which he studies.
The numerous and pressing demands for this, the English
\nd Italian part of my Method, make me hope that my
endeavours towards facilitating the study of foreign lan-
guages in England will on this, as on former occasions, be
crowned with success; and should it meet with as extensive
favour as all my other publications have found at the hands
of the public, 1 shall be amply rewarded for the many years
of labour it has cost me.
61 Rje db Richelieu, Paris
July 25 1846.
PREFACE TC THE AMERICAN EDITION.
The thanks of all who are interested in the cultivation of the
Italian language and literature in the United States are justly due
lo the enterprising publishers of this American edition of Ollen-
dorff's New Method. Teachers and scholars are now, for the
first time, provided with a clear, philosophical, and well-digested
Grammar, by means of which a thorough and correct knowledge
of Italian maybe gained with comparatively little labour, and in a
space of time that will be deemed incredibly short by those who
have confined themselves to the tedious systems heretofore in use.
My experience in teaching long since convinced me that a work
of this description was needed in America ; and, after a careful
perusal of Ollendorff's Method, I do not hesitate to commend it
to the public, as in every respect worthy of the great and well-
deserved fame of its author.
Scarcely a week passes among us that is not marked by the
advent of one or more new books to facilitate the acquisition of
foreign languages. Grammars, Manuals, and Treatises, fall
rapidly from the press, flutter for a moment, and disappear,
like snow-flakes upon a river. Each claims to be superior, in
its method of teaching to all its predecessors, if not absolutely infal-
lible in every important detail. Pedantic vanity and the desire
of gain crowd the republic of letters with eager aspirants, the
character of whose productions unerringly corresponds to the
meanness of the motives that gave them birth. Hence the faint
hope of any important improvement at the present day, particu-
arly in those favoured countries where freedom of the press if
enjoyed.
X PREFACE TO THE AMERICAN EDITION.
Now it will be found upon examination that all the detail* of
these different modes of teaching languages are resolvable into the
two following methods : —
1. The classical, scholastic, or scientific method. In this the
practice is almost entirely subordinated to abstract, formal rules,
which are prominently brought forward and hold the first place.
2. The empirical or practical method. Here a commencement
m made with the concrete tongue : almost exclusive attention is
given to the living practice, the grammatical principles of the
language being either postponed or subordinated, or perhaps
altogether neglected.
Of the first method I had harsh experience in the happy days
of my youth, as did also, probably, all my cotemporaries. We
studied, alas ! in the old-fashioned colleges. In the beautiful
land of my native Italy I applied myself to the Latin, Italian, and
French ; and oh, what days of vexation and toil ; what slow and
tedious progress ! It could not be otherwise, for the method did
violence to every process of nature. It had nothing in it to excite
the attention or engage the sympathies of the pupils. In speaking
a foreign language we enjoy the pleasing satisfaction of expressing
our own thoughts and feelings in a form at once novel and attrac-
tive ; but the method of which I am speaking can never afford this
advantage but in the slightest degree, as a slowly-piled, granite-
faced Cyclopean substructure of grammatical rules is considered
an indispensable preliminary to any attempt at speaking. And
while the student reluctantly submits his understanding and
memory to the task of encountering these barren formulas and
abstract rules, he is never called to make an attempt to connect
the sound of his written, though rarely spoken words, with the
objects to which they belong ; but instead thereof is obliged to
work out the connection in the slowest and most painful manner
possible, by means of his mother tongue and a dictionary. To
leant foreign languages by such a system in a pleasing, rapid,
and practically useful manner, is obviously impossible. Question
the hopeful youths in European colleges who are compelled to
pursue by this method the study of Greek and Latin — the sup-
posed principal foundations of human knowledge ; question them,
and you will find that after four or five years of tedious drilling
PREFACE TO THE AMERICAN EDITION. JB
ihey are unable, in every thing that constitutes a practical know.
ledge of these languages, to get beyond an awkward and painful
crawl. Iron energy and vaulting ambition will now and then
?pur on a solitary individual ; but the many flag, and flagging, in
the study of languages, is equivalent to retrogression.
I came to the United States strongly impressed with the
absurdity of this classical method. Exiled by long and sorrowful
political misfortunes from my native land, and compelled to engage
in the humble occupation of teaching my mother tongue, I felt
awaken within me my ancient disgust for such a method, anc
immediately commenced, as my pupils well know, with an oral
system resembling that of Professor Ollendorff.
The empirical or practical system is in accordance with nature.
It may be that experimental philosophy, which, since the days of
Bacon and Galileo, has for ever dethroned the ancient jargon of
the schools of logic and metaphysics, has also contributed to the
improvement of the method of teaching languages ; or it may be
that the two constant facts, that a child learns so easily its mothei
tongue, and an adult so readily a foreign language, by residence
n a country where it is spoken, could not be forgotten. But
whatever may have been the immediate cause of the improve-
ment, it is certain that books of practical oral teaching have sup-
plied a deficiency that was deeply and extensively felt in this
country, as is -evidenced by the welcome reception and rapid sale
of Mr. Arnold's Latin Lessons, and the French and German
Grammars of Professor Ollendorff.
Ollendorff's Method possesses the distinctive characteristic of
commencing with the concrete practice on the simplest elements.
The grammatical forms and syntactical rules are gradually
developed by means of this practice, which consists mainly of
common and familiar conversations on the most orainary subjects.
In a word, it is the grammar put Into a conversational form .
it thereby serves its purpose admirably — because,
1. There is a direct appeal to the ear, the natural organ by
which a language is acquired.
2. This appeal is made under circumstances in which a direct
relation is established between the sound and the thing signified
ao painful series of steps is to be taken through the grammar
ill PREFACE TO THE AMERICAN EDITION.
dictionary, and the idiom of another language, before the connec-
tion is made.
8. The appeal is made with such familiar phrases as cannot
Jail to excite strongly the attention and engage the sympathies
of the scholar.
It is, in short, a very close imitation of the method by which
a child learns its mother tongue, or an adult the language of a
foreign country in which he resides.
An English and Italian Grammar of this description has been
hitherto unknown in this country. Teachers of Italian have been
under the necessity of supplying, by their own ingenuity, the
deficiency of a well-ordered method. By availing themselves of
Ollendorff's Grammar they will therefore lighten their own labour,
and at the same time cheer and encourage their pupils, and hasten
their progress. By this means they will also pay a well-deserved
compliment to those who, by their enterprise in this publication,
have expressed a feeling of sympathy and veneration for the lan-
guage and literature of our beloved Italy.
In order to increase the advantages to be derived from studying
Italian by Ollendorff's Method, a Reading Book, with the title,
Crestomazia Italians has also been issued by the publishers of
this Grammar. Such a work, as every teacher of languages
knows, is always needed by pupils. The Crestomazia TtaKana
contains interesting extracts selected from the best Italian profes-
sors of modern times. The most involved passages and the
idioms are explained by means of a glossary at the end of each
piece, so that the work may serve at the s*me time for exercises
m reading, translating, and committing o memory.
P F
QUttmbia College, September, 1846.
FIRST LESSON.
Lezione Prima.
DEFINITE ARTICLE.
MASCULINE SINGULAR.
When the word begins with any consonant except *, followed by anoth*
consonant.)
Nominative, the. Nominativo il.
Genitive,
of the.
Dative,
to the.
Accusative,
the.
Ablative,
from the.
rfa*e you?
Genitivo,
Dativo,
Accusativo,
Ablotivo,
| Avete 1 Ha Ella 7»
del.
al.
il.
dal.
' To Professors. — Each lesson should be dictated to the pupils who
should pronounce each word as soon as dictated. The professor should also ex-
ercise his pupils by putting the questions to them in various ways. Each lesson
includes three operations : the teacher, in the first place, looks over the exer-
cises of the most attentive of his pupils, putting to them the questions
contained in the printed exercises ; he then dictates to them the next lesson ;
and, lastly, puts fresh questions to them on all the preceding lessons. The
teacher may divide one lesson into two, or two into three, or even make two
into one, according to the degree of intelligence of his pupils.
8 It is, perhaps through an abuse of civilzation that the use of the
second person plural you has been introduced into modern languages. The
Italians, however, go still further, and use, as the pronoun of address, even ic
speaking to a man, the third person singular feminine, Ella, which they begin
with a large letter, out of deference for the person they speak to, and to distin-
guish it from the third person feminine. It relates to Vottra Signoria (con
tracted : Vo—ignaria, abridged V. S.t your worship), which is understood.
There are, however, three ways of addressing a person, viz. : —
1. Dor del tu, to ,»ay thou.
2. Dor del vox, to t> \y you.
3. Dor del Lei, (b • ,, nominative,) to speak in the third person.
Weil-educated persons use the second person singular tu, thou, only in
FIEST LESSON.
Tea, Sir, I hare. '
The,
The hat.
Have you the hat!
fee, Sir, I have the hat
The bread.
The salt.
The soap.
Si, Signore,* l'ho.
U (before *, followed by a eonjonani
lo ; and before a vowel
II cappello.
Ha Ella il campello 1
Si, Signort. v.) \\
II pane.
II sale.
II sapone.
DEFINITE ARTICLE, MASCTJL:
When the word begins with *, followed b
Norn.
the.
Gen.
of the.
Dot.
to the.
Aee.
the.
AM.
from the.
The looking-glass.
The boot.
The sugar.
with t\
atlo.
lo,
dailo.
speaking to their intimate frl
second person plural, voi, j
persons it is a mark of familiarity
ally used as the pronoun of
in using it, either towards your -
how to speak to our sen ant
we have in the course of on
times of the other, and
always the preference to Ella.
In speaking in the third pi
native ; Lei, La, Le, for the
to more than one person, tr.
nz., EUe or E'leno, for the
cases,
them.
II sorts of poetry. I»j«
.ins, but towards ctnei
in, ella, she, is most gener-
,iay be sure never to give offence
■feriors. But as we must know
nds, as well as to other persons,
ise sometimes of the one, some-
wdys of expression, giving, however,
r, EUa is used for the subject or nomi-
and in speaking in the same manner
iiose pronouns must be made use of,
. ; nominative, and Loro, Le, for the other
These pronouns b< nine, the adjective must needs agree with
Ex.: E* EUa eontenia? or simply: £ contenta? are you satisfied i
(literally: is she satisfied'?) Come eta EUa? or simply: Come eta? how do
you do? (literally: how is she ?) Lcparb, I speak to you (literally: I speak
to her). Sono siw (or U di Let) devotissimo servo, I am your most devoted ser-
vant (literally : I am her most devoted servant). Ho veduto il di Lei (or il euo)
rignor fratello, or else UfratcUo di V. S., I have seen your brother (literacy ;
I have seen her Mr. brother), i. e. the brother of your worship.
* When Signor is followed by a noun, it has no e dt the end, except when it
begins with *, followed by a consonant. Ex. : il Signor Alessandro, Mr. Alex*
ander ; il Signor Conic, Count : il Signor Abate, * bbct ; il Signor* Stefan*
Mr. Stephen.
FIRST LESSON.
Obe. A. When the word begins with a vowel the same article Is made u*
ȣ, with this difference only, that for the letter o an apostrophe (') is substi
rated, as:
Norn
the.
Nam. V.
Gen.
of the.
Gen. dell'
Dot.
to the.
Dot. all'.
Ace.
the.
Ace P.
AbL
from the.
AbL dalT
The coat
L' abito, il vestito
The man.
L' uomo.
My hat. | II mio cappello.
Obe. B. In Italian the definite article precedes the possessive pronoun
Your bread.
Have you my hat!
Fes, Sir, I have your hat
Have you your bread 1
Yes, Sir, I have my bread.
Have you my sugar?
Yes, Sir, I have your sugar.
Obi. C. When the word beginning
nant, is preceded by another word, the
cap
c II di Lei pane. II suo pane.4
I II vostro pane.
( Ha Ella il mio cappello ?
( Avete il mio cappello 1
SL Signore, ho il \
( vostro
pello.8
( Ha Ella il di Lei pane?
( Avete il vostro pane ?
Si, Signore, ho il mio pane.
< Ha Ella ) ., . . „
< . > il mio zucchero ?
Si, Signore, ho il di Lei zucchero.
with z, or with «, followed by a conso-
article is not to, but il.
Which or what ? Quale ? or Che ?
Obt. D. Which or what is more generally rendered by che, when the noui
follows immediately, and by quale (plural quali) when it is separated from it.
But what is preferably rendered by che, and which by quale (abridged
qual).
Which hat have yon 1
I have my hat
Qual cappello ha Ella?
Ho il mio cappello.
• The first of these expressions is generally used by well-educated persona.
• That is to say, il cappello di V. S.t the hat of your worship.
• Ex : Ecco dueepade: quale volete? Here are two swords, which will yoi
have ? Quali fra queeti libri tono i mid ? Which of these books are mine ?
rauerr LEsaom.
Which bread lure youf
I hare your bread.
Which soap hare you 1
1 hare my soap.
Which coat hate yomf
I hare your coat
Che pane ha Ella I
Ho il di Lei pane.
Q,ual sapone ha Ella 1
Ho il mio sapone.
Che abito ha Ella?
Ho il di Lei abito.
EXERCISE.
1.
Have you the bread f — Yes, Sir, I have the bread. — Have you
your bread ? — I have my bread. — Have you the salt ? — I have
the salt. — Have you my salt ? — I have your salt. — Have you the
soap. — Yes, Sir, I have the soap. — Have you your soap ? — I have
my soap. — Which soap have you ? — I have your soap. — Have
you the sugar ? — I have the sugar. — Have you your sugar ? —
I have my sugar. — Which sugar have you ? — I have your sugar ?
— Which boot have you ? — I have my boot. — Have you my boot ?
— I have your boot. — Which bread have you ? — I have my bread.
— Which salt have you? — I have your salt. — Have you the
looking-glass ? — I have the looking-glass. — Which looking-glass
have you ? — I have my looking-glass. — Have you my looking-
glass ? — I have your looking-glass. — Have you the coat 1 — Yes,
Sir, I have the coat. — Which coat have you ? — I have my coat.
— Have you my coat ?— I have your coat.7
t Pupils desirous of making rapid progress may compose a great many
phrases, in addition to those we have given them in the exercises ; but they
must pronounce them aloud, as they write them. They should also make
separate lists of such substantives, adjectives, pronouns, and verbs, as they
meet with in the course of the tessons. in order to be able to find those wordi
nore easily, when they require to refer to them in writing their lessons.
SECOND LESSON.
Lezione Second*.
A.
Lo (sometimes il).
Have you my hat ?
Ha Ella il mio cappello 1
Fes, Sir, I have it.
Si, Signore, 1' ho.
Good.
Buono.1
Bad.
Cattivo.
Pretty.
Vezzoso, leggiadro; vago, grazioso, Mi
lino.
Handsome, fine or beautiful.
Bello.*
Ugly.
Brutto.
Old.
Vecchio.
The cloth.
11 panno.
The wood.
11 legno.»
The thread.
11 refe.
The handkerchief.
11 fazzoletto, il moccichino
The waistcoat.
11 giubbetto.
The cotton.
11 cotone.
The dog.
11 cane.
The horae.
11 cavallo.
Hate you the fine dog?
Ha Ella il bel cane?
Tea, Sir, I hare it.
Si, Signore, 1' ho.
Not
Non.
I hare not.
Non ho.
I have not the bread.
Non ho il pane.
No, Sir.
No, Signore
Have you my old hat ?
Avete il mio vecchio cappello I
No, Sir, I have it not
No, Signore, non 1' ho.
1 Whore two words happen to finish with the same vowel, we generally
suppress, for the sake of euphony, that of the first word, as : biton panno, good
doth ; biton giorno, good morning ; instead of: buono panno, buono giorno. But
the suppression does not take place when the second word begins with $ fol-
lowed by a consonant.
* Before a consonant (not before * followed by a consonant) bd is employed
1 Wood for fuel is feminine, and ia rendered by la Ugna.
SECOND LESSON.
Which dog hare you 1
I have my pretty dog.
Which handkerchief have yon?
I have your pretty cottcn handker-
chief.
dual cane ha Ella 7
Ho 11 mio bel cane.
Qual fazzoletto ha Ella?
Ho il di Lei bel fazzoletto
tone.
di co.
Of.
Tbe cloth coat
Di.
4 L' abito di panno.
\ H vestito di panno.
Ob$. A. The preposition di (like de in French) Is always put between the
name of the thing and the name of the matter of which it is made, and this is
in Italian always the last.
The cotton handkercnief.
The gun.
The leather.
The gold.
The lead.
The iron.
The candlestick.
The wooden gun.
The leaden horse.
The golden candlestick.
II fazzoletto di cotone.
Lo schioppo.
II cuoio.
L' oro.
II piombo.4
II ferro.
II candeliere.
Lo schioppo di legno.
II cavallo di piombo.
II candeliere d' oro.
Obs. B. The preposition di loses its » before a vowel, as may be seen iron
:he example above.
Which gun have you 7
I have the iron gun.
Which candlesticK have you 7
I have the fine goiden candlestick.
Have you my fine wooden horse 7
No, sir, I have it not.
Che schioppo ha Ella 1
He lo schioppo di ferro.
Che candeliere ha Ella?
Ho il bel candeliere d' oro.
Ha Ella il mio bel cavallo di legno 7
No, Signore, non 1' ho.
* It will not be amiss for those who are acquainted with the French and
Latin languages to notice, that whenever the letter Us found in those- language?
■iter *,/, p, it is in Italian changed into ». Ex. : —
Lead, French, plomb; Italian, piombo.
Flower, . . fleur, . . fiore.
ww««. •• fiTL '■' u*^
^ (blanche, biancm.
Full, plein, jpieno.
Temple, . . temple, tempio.
THIRD LESSON. I
EXERCISE.
2.
Have you my fine horse ? — Yes, Sir, I have it. — Have you my
aid waistcoat ? — No, Sir, I have it not. Which dog have you ? —
I have your pretty dog. — Have you my ugly handkerchief?—
No, Sir, I have it not. — Have you the good cloth ? — Yes, Sir, 1
have it. — Have you my ugly gun ? — No, Sir, I have it not.—
Which gun have you ? I have your fine gun. — Which candle-
stick have you 1 — I have the gclden candlestick. — Have you my
golden candlestick ? — I have not your golden candlestick. — Which
boot have you ? — I have the leathern boot. — Have you my wooden
gun ? — No, Sir, I have it not. — Have you the good bread ? — I
have not the good bread. — Which waistcoat have you ? — I have
my fine cotton waistcoat. — Which soap have you ? — I have my
old soap. — Which sugar have you ? — I have your good sugar.—
Which salt have you ? — I have the bad salt. — Which coat have
you ? — I have my old cloth coat. — H«ve you my ugly wooden
candlestick ? — No, Sir, I have it not. — Have you my leaden
gun ? — No, Sir, I have it not. — Have you my pretty coat ? — No,
Sir, I have it not. — Which horse have you ? — I have your iron
horse. — Ha^e you my fine hat 1 No, Sir, I have it not.
THIRD LESSON.
Lezione Terza.
>.omethi7ig, any thing.
Rare vou any thing ?
Ih» i something.
2
( Qualche cosa.
( Alcuna cosa.
c Ha Ella qualche cosal
{ Ha Ella alcuna cosal
\ Ho qualche cosa.
. Ho alcuna cosa.
9 THIRD LESSON.
Nothing, or not any thing.
Nothing, not any thing.
1 hare nothing.
nente.
mlla.
Or simply :
Nulla (before the verb).
Non ho niente.
Non ho nulla.
Nulla ho.
Ob*, A. NvUa may simply be used for nothing, not any thing; but
»tand» before the verb.
a»» I
The wine.
My money (cash).
The silver (metal).
Of silver.
The silver candlestick.
The string.
The ribbon, the tape,
rhe golden ribbon.
The button
The coffee.
The cheese.
Are vou hungry 1
I am hungry.
I am not hungry.
Are you thirsty ?
1 am thirsty.
I am not thirsty.
Are you sleepy ?
I am sleepy.
I am not sleepy.
Something, or any thing good.
Have you any thing good ?
Nothing, or not any thing bad.
Nothing, or not any thing bad.
I have nothing good.
II vino.
II mio denaro (or diinare*
L'argento.
D'argento
II candeliere d'argentc
II cordone.
II nastro.
II nastro d'oro.
II bottone.
II cafie*.
\A II cacio.
(■ II formaggio.
t Ha Ella fame *
t Avete fame ?
t Ho fame,
t Non ho fame,
t Ha Ella sete 1
t Avete sete ?
t Ho sete.
t Non ho sete.
t Ha Ella sonno 1
t Avete sonno ?
t Ho sonno.
t Non ho sonno.
Qualche cosa di buonc
**a Ella \ qualche cosa di buono 1
Avete >
SNon — niente di cattivo.
Non — nulla di cattivo.
Ok 8implt:
Nulla di cattivo (before th#
verb).
r Non ho niente di buono.
< Non ho nulla di buono,
( Nulla ho di buono.
THIRD LESSON.
Oba. B. Qvydkhi ctmoy non — nientc, non — nulla, nienU or nulla, require <4
when they are before an adjective.
Have you any thing pretty 7
! have nothing pretty.
What?
What have you 7
What have you good 1
I have the good coffee.
Are you afraid 7
I am afraid.
I am not afraid.
Are you warm 7
I am warm.
I am not warm
Are you cold 7
I am not cold.
5 Ha Ella )
I Avete \ qualche cosa di vago
Non ho niente di vago.
Nulla ho di leggiadro.
C Che?
\ Che cosa ?
( Cosa ?
r Che ha Ella 7
< Che cosa ha Ella 7
( Cosa ha Ella1 7
Che ha Ella di buono7
Ho del (some) buon caflfe.
<t HaEUapaura7
c 1 Avete paura7
f Ho paura.
t Non ho paura.
(Ha Ella caldo 7
t Avete caldo 7
t Ho caldo.
t Non ho caldo.
tHaEllafreddo7
t Non ho freddo.
EXERCISE.
3.
Have you my good wine ? — I have it. — Have you the good gold ?
— I have it not. — Have you the money ? — I have it. — Have you the
gold ribbon ? — No, Sir, I have it not. — Have you your silver can-
dlestick ? — Yes, Sir, I have it. — What have you ? — I have the
good cheese. I have my cloth coat. — Have you my silver button 7
— I have it not. — Which button have you ? — I have your beautiful
gold button. — Which string have you ? — I have the gold string-
— Have you any thing ? — I have something. — What have you ?
—I have the good bread. I have the good sugar. — Have you
any thing good ? — I have nothing good. — Have you any thing
handsome ? — I have nothing handsome. I have something ugly.
— What have you ugly ? I have the ugly dog. — Have you an*
i The third expresaion is the leaat correct, and used onlv in conversation.
10
FOURTH LESSON.
■:
thing pretty ? — I have nothing pretty. I have something old. —
What have you old ? — I have the old cheese. — Are you hungry 1
— I am hungry. — Are you thirsty ? — I am not thirsty. — Are you
sleepy ? — I am not sleepy. — What have you beautiful ? — I have
your beautiful dog. — What have you bad ? — I have nothing bad.
— Are you afraid ? — I am not afraid. — Are you cold ? — I am cold,
— Are you warm ? — I am not warm. — Which thread have you •
— I have your good thread. — Have you the fine horse ? — No, Sir,
I have it not. — Which boot have you ? — I have my old leathei
boot. — Which handkerchief have you ? — I have your fine cotton
handkerchief. — Which waistcoat have you ? — I have my pretty
cloth waistcoat. — Which gun have you ? — I have your fine silver
gun. — Have you any thing pretty 1 — I have nothing pretty.— Have
you any thing ? — I have nothing.
bOURTH LESSON.
Lezione Quarts
( Quel.
That. < Quello.
( QueW.
Obs. ifuel is used before a consonant, quello before $ followed by a consonant,
ind quell before a vowel. Ex. : —
That book. Quel libro.
That looking-glass. Quello epecchio.
That coat. Quell' abito.
Of the.
Of the doc
' Del (genitive before a conso-
nant).
Dello ( before s, followed
by a consonant).
DelV ( before a vowel \
Dei cane
FOURTH LESSON.
U
Of the boot.
Of the coat.
Of the man.
Of the tailor.
Of the baker.
Of the neighbour.
That or the one.
Che neighbour's, or that of the neigh-
bour.
The baker's, or that of the baker.
The man's, or that of the man.
Or.
Have you my book or the neigh-
bour's?
I have the neighbour's.
Have you my bread or that of the
baker 7
I have yours.
[ have not the baker's.
Mine or my own.
( Nominative.
( Accusative.
Of mine. Genitive.
From mine. Ablative.
Yours.
Nom.
Accus.
Of yours. Gen.
From yours. Abl.
The friend.
Of the friend.
Chat of the friend.
The stick.
The thimble.
The coal.
My brother.
Dello stivale.
Dell' abito.
Dell' uomo.
Del sartore.
Del fornaio.
Del vicino.
QueUo.
duello del vicino.
Quello del fornaio.
Quello dell' uomo.
o.
{ Ha Ella ) il mio libro, o quello tier
( Avete > vicino?
Ho quello del vicino.
S Ha Ella ) il mio pane, o quello de'
< Avete J fornaio?
Ho il di Lei. Ho il vostro. Fo il
8UO.
Non ho quello del fornaio.
II mio.
Del mio.
Dal mio.
II vostro. II suo. II di Lei.
Del vostro. Del suo. Del di Let
Dal vostro. Dal suo. Dal di Lei.
L' amico.
Dell' amico.
Quello dell' amico.
II bastone.
II uitale.
II carbone.
Mio fratello.
Rule. There is no article before the possessive prefwrcm in the singula!
•rhen it Is immediately followed by a noun of quality or kindred.
My dear brother i II mio caro fratello.
My brother's, or that of my brother. Quello di mio fratello.
Your friend's, or that of your friend. | Quello del vostro (di Lei) amico
13 FOURTH LESSON.
EXERCISES.
4.
Have you that book ? — No, Sir, I have not. — Which book have
you ?— -I have that of the neighbour. — Have you my stick, or '.ha1
of my friend ? — I have that of your friend. — Have you my breae.
or the baker's ? — I have the baker's. I have not yours. — flax •
you the neighbour's horse. — No, Sir, I have it not. — Whicn norse
have you ? — I have that of the baker. — Have you your thimble
or the tailor's. — I have my own. — Have you the pretty gold string
of my dog? — I have it not. — Which string have you ? — I have
my silver string. — Have you my gold button or the tailor's ? — 1
have not yours ; I have the tailor's. — Have you my brother's coal
or yours ? — I have your brother's. — Which coffee have you ? — 1
have the neighbour's. — Have you your dog or the man's ? — I have
the man's. — Have you your friend's money ? — I have it not. —
Are you cold ? — I am cold. — Are you afraid ? — I am not afraid
— Are you warm ? — I am not warm. — Are you sleepy ? — I an
not sleepy ; I am hungry. — Are you thirsty ? — I am not thirsty.
5.
Have you my coat or the tailor's ? — I have the tailor's. — Have
you my gold candlestick or that of the neighbour? — I have yours.
— Have you your coal or mine ? — I have mine. — Have you your
cheese or the baker's ? — 1 have my own. — Which cloth have
you ? — I have that of the tailor. — Which boot have you ? — I have
my own — Have you the old wood of my brother ? — I have it not.
— Which soap have you ? — I have my brother's good soap. — Have
you my wooden gun, or that of my brother ? — I have yours. —
Which waistcoat have you ? — I have my friend's cloth waistcoat.
— Have you your leather boot or mine ? — I have not yours ; 1
nave my own. — What have you ? — I have nothing. — Have you
any thing ? — I have nothing. — Have you any thing good ? — I have
nothing good. — Have you any thing old ? — I have nothing old. —
What have you pretty ? — I have my friend's pretty dog. — Have
you my handsome or my ugly stick ? — I have your ugly stick.—
Are you hungry or thirsty ?
FIFTH LESSON
Leztone Quinta.
Th3 merchant.
Of the shoemaker.
The boy.
The knife.
The spoon.
II mercante.
Del calzolaio.
II ragazzo.
II coltello.
II cucchiaio.
riave you the merchant's stick or
yours.
Neither.
Nor.
I have neither the merchant's stick
nor mine.
Are you hungry or thirsty 7
( am neither hungry nor thirsty.
Arc you warm or cold 7
I am neither warm nor cold.
Have you the wine or the bread ?
I have neither the wine nor the
bread.
i have neither yours nor mine.
I have neither my thread not the
tailor i.
Avete il bastone del mercante, « I!
vostro 7
Non — ne.
Ne.
Non ho il bastone del mercante, n& il
mio.
t Avete fame, o sete 7
t Non ho fame, ne* sete.
t Avete caldo, o freddo7
t Non ho caldo, ne* freddo.
Avete il vino, o il pane 7
Non ho il vino, ne il pane.
Non ho il vostro, ne1 il mlo.
Non ho il mio refe, nd quello del
sartore.
The cork.
The corkscrew.
The umbrella.
The honey.
The nail.
The iron nail.
The hammer.
The carpenter.
The Frenchman.
What have you 7
or,
What it/ the matter with you 7
II tnracciolo.
II tiraturacciolo.
L' ombrello, 1' ombrella (masc foiu
II miele.
II chiodo.
II chiodo di ferro.
II martello.
II legnaiuolo.
II Francese.
t Che cosa avete ?
< Cosa avete 7
<Che avete 7
14
FIFTH LESSON.
Nothing.
I have nothing, or
Nothing is the matter with me.
Is any thing the matter with yon ?
Nothing is the matter with me.
{ Non — mente (nients).
I Non — nulla (nulla).
< t Non ho niente.
I I Non ho nulla.
t Avete qualche cosa?
i t Non ho niente.
( Non ho nulla (nulla ho)
EXERCISES.
6-
I am neither hungry nor thirsty. — Ha\ e you my boot or th«
shoemaker's ? — I have neither yours nor the shoemaker's. — Have
you your knife or the boy's ? — I have neither mine nor the boy's. —
Which knife have you ? — I have that of the merchant. — Have you
my spoon or the merchant's ? — I nave neither yours nor the mer
chant's ; I have my own. — Have you the honey or the wine ? — ]
have neither the honey nor the wine. — Have you your thimble 01
the tailor's ? — I have neither mine nor the tailor's. — Have you youi
sorkscrew or mine ? — I have neither yours nor mine ; I have the
merchant's. — Which cork have you ? — I have the neighbour's. —
Have you the iron or the silver nail ? — I have neither the iron nor
the silver nail ; I have the golden nail. — Are you warm or cold ?
— I am neither warm nor cold ; I am sleepy. — Are you afraid ?—
I am not afraid. — Have you my hammer or the carpenter's ? — I
have neither yours nor the carpenter's. — Which nail have you ? —
i have the iron nail. — Which hammer have you ? — I have the
wooden hammer of the carpenter. — Have you any thing ? — I hav«
something. — What have you ? — I have something fine. — What
have you fine ? — I have the Frenchman's fine umbrella. — Have
you the cotton or the thread tape ? — I have neither the cotton nor
the thread tape.
7.
Have you your gun or mine ? — I have neither yours nor mine
-Which gun have you ? — I have my friend's. — Have you my
cotton handkerchief or that of my brother ? — I have neither yours
nor your brother's. — Which string have you ? — I have my neigh
hour's thread string. — Have you the book of the Frenchman oi
that of the merchant ? — I have neither the Frenchman's nor thf
SIXTH LBSSON.
1&
merchant's. — Which book have you ? — I have my own. — What
in the matter with you ? — Nothing. — Is any thing the matter with
you ? — Nothing is the matter with me. — Are you cold ? — I am not
cold ; I am warm. — Have you the cloth or the cotton ? — I have
neither the cloth nor the cotton. — Have you any thing good or bad 3
—I have neither any thing good nor bad. — What have you ? — I
*ave nothing.
SIXTH LESSON
Lezione Sesta.
The beef, the wt.
The biscuit.
Of the captain
Of the cook.
Havel?
You have.
You have not.
Am I hungry ?
You are hungry,
You are not hungry.
Am I afraid ?
You are afraid.
You are not afraid.
Am I ashamed ?
You are not ashamed
Are you ashamed ?
I am ashamed.
Am I wrong?
You are wrong.
You are not wrong.
Am I right ?
Yon are right
You are not right
II manzo, il bue
II biscotto.
Del capitano
Del cuoco.
Hoio?
Avete. Ella ha.
Non avete. Ella non ha.
t Ho fame io ?
t Avete fame. Ella ha fame,
t Non avete fame. Ella non ha fame
t Ho paura io 1
t Avete paura. Ella ha paura.
t Non avete paura. Ella non hi
paura.
t Ho vergogna io ?
t Non avete vergogna.
t Ella non ha vergogna.
t Ha Ella vergogna?
t Avete vergogna.
t Ho vergogna.
t Ho torto io ?
t Avete torto. Ella ha torto
t Ella non ha torto.
t Non avete torto.
t Ho io ragione ?
1 Ella ha ragione.
1 Avete ragione.
t Ella non ha ragione.
t Non avete ragione.
16
SIXTH LESSON.
Hare I the nail?
Yon have it.
You have it not
Have I any thing good 7
Yon have nothing good.
Vou have neither any thing good nor
bad.
What haveH
Have I the carpenter's hammer?
You have it not.
Have you it 7
I have it not
Have I it?
The butter.
The mutton.
The milk.
The penknife.
Which one ?
That of the captain, or the captain's.
That of the cook, or the cook's.
The fine one.
The ugly one.
*m I right or wrong 7
fou are neither right nor wrong.
Ton are neither hungry nor thirsty.
/on are neither afraid nor ashamed.
Hare I your butter or mine ?
f oi have neither yours nor mine.
Ho io ilchiodo?
L' avete. Ella lo ha (lo ha or P ha)
Non 1' avete. Ella non lo ha (c
non 1' ha).
Ho io qualche cosa di buono 7
{ Ella non ha ) niente (nulla) di buo>
I Non avete j no.
< Ella non ha ) niente d
( Non avete >
cattivo.
Che ho io 7
Che cosa ho io 7
Ho io il martello del legnaiuolo 7
Non P avete. Non 1' ha.
L' avete voi 7 Lo ha Ella?
Non 1' ho.
L' hoio?
II burro, il butirro.
II castrato (montone).
11 latte.
II temperino.
Quale ?
duello del capitano.
Quello del cuoco.
II bello.
11 brutto.
t Ho ragione, o torto 7
t Ella non ha n£ ragione, nS torto.
t Non avete nS ragione, nS torto.
t Ella non ha nS fame, nS sete.
t Non avete nS fame, ne* sete.
t Ella non ha ne" paura, nS yergogna
t Non avete nd paura, n6 vergogna
Ho il vostro butirro, o il mio 7
( Ella non ha ne il di Lei, ne4 il mio.
( Non avete n£ il vostro, n£ il mio.
EXERCISES.
8.
f have neither the baker's dog nor that of my friend. — Are you
tshamed ?— I am not ashamed. — Are you afraid or ashamed ? — I
SIXTH LSSSON. 17
am neither afraid nor ashamed. — Have you my knife ? — Which ?
— The fine one. — Have you my beef or the cook's? — I have
neither jours nor the cook's. — Which have you ? — I have that o!
the captain. — Have I your biscuit ? — You have it not. — Am I
hungry or thirsty ? — You are neither hungry nor thirsty. — Am I
warm or cold ? — You are neither warm nor cold. — Am I afraid *
— You are not afraid. You are neither afraid nor ashamed.-
Have I any thing good? — You have nothing good. — What ha\t
I ? — You have nothing. — Which penknife have I ? — You have thai
of the Frenchman. — Have 1 your thimble or that of the tailor ?—
You have neither mine nor that of the tailor. — Which one have I ?
— You have your friend's. — Which umbrella have I? — You have
mine. — Have I the baker's good bread ? — You have it not. —
Which money have I ? — You have your own. — Have you my iron
gun ? — I have it not. — Have I it 1 — You have it. — Have I your
mutton or the cook's ? — You have neither mine nor the cook's. —
Have I your knife ? — You have it not. Have you it ? — I have it.
— Which biscuit have I ? — You have that of the captain. — Which
cloth have I ? — You have the merchant's. — Have you my coffee
or that of my boy ? — I have that of your good boy. — Have you
vour cork or mine ? — I have neither yours nor mine. — What have
you ? — I have my brother's good candlestick.
9.
Am I right ? — You are right. — Am I wrong 1 — You are not
wrong. — Am I right or wrong ? — You are neither right nor wrong ;
you are afraid. — You are not sleepy. — You are neither warm nor
cold. — Have I the good coffee or the good sugar ? — You have
neither the good coffee nor the good sugar. — Have I any thing
good or bad ? — You have neither any thing good nor bad. — What
have I ? — You have nothing. — What have 1 pretty ? — You have my
friend's pretty dog. — Which butter have I ? — You have that oi
your cook. — Have I your corkscrew or the merchant's? — You
have neither mine nor the merchant's. — Which milk have you 1
—I have that of the Frenchman. — Which penknife have you ? —
I have the silver penknife of my neighbour. — Which have I ? —
You have that of the old baker. — Which have you ? — I have thai
•f my old tailor. — What is the matter with you ? — I am afraid. —
Have I any thing ? — You have nothing.
SEVENTH LESSON
Lezione Settima.
Who?
Who has?
Who has the knife ?
The man has the knife.
The man has not the knife.
Who has it?
The boy has it.
The boy has it not.
The chicken.
The chest, the trans.
The bag, the sack.
The ship.
The young man.
The youth.
CM?
Chi ha?
Chi ha il coltello 7
L' uomo ha il coltello.
L' uomo non ha il coltello
Chiloha?
Lo ha il ragazzo.
II ragazzo non 1' ha.
II pollastro (il polio).
II baule (il forziere).
II sacco.
11 bastimento.
II giovane (il glevine).
L' adolescente (il giovinetto).
He.
and foi
' Egli (for persons).
Esso (for persons
things).
Ei or e' (also for persons).
Obs. A. Egli is used for persons, esso for persons and for things, and ex or *
or persons, but not generally before a vowel or before s followed by a conso
aaot.
He has.
He has the chest.
He has not the chest
He has it.
Ho has it not
Egli ha (esso ha, egli a l)
Egli ha il baule.
Ei (e') non ha il baule.
( Egli (esso) 1* ha
X Ei (e') T ha.
Ei (e') non 1' ha.
1 The letter h is never pronounced in Italian. What proves this is, that it
.nay be entirely omitted, and a grave accent be put in its stead on the three first
persons singular and third person plural of the verb arere, to have ; and in-
stead of ho, I haw hai, thou hast ; ha, he (she) has ; hanno, they have, we may
write : d, hi, h, hnno. This kind of orthography has been followed by Metae
tasio. bnt is not generally approved.
SEVENTH LESSON.
19
Has he 1
Has he the knife 1
Has the man 7
Has the friend 7
Has the baker 7
Has the young man 7
The Englishman.
Haegli?
Ha esso?
Ha?
Haegli il coltellol
Ha 1' uomo 7
Ha 1' amico?
Ha il fornaio 7
Ha il giovane 7
L' Inglese.
Is the man hungry 7
He is hungry.
He is not hungry.
He is neither hungry nor thirsty,
is your brother warm or cold 7
Is the man afraid or ashamed 7
Is the man right or wrong 7
Has the boy the hammer of the car-
penter 7
He has it.
He has it not.
Has the baker it 7
What has my friend ?
The rice.
The countryman, the peasant.
The servant.
His or her penknife.
His or her dog.
The bird.
His or her foot.
His or her eye.
His money.
The tea.
His, her, hers.
das the servant his trunk or mine 7
He has his own.
Somebody or any body,
tome one or any one (indefinite
pronouns).
Has any body my book 7
Somebody hat it
Who has my stick 7
t Ha fame 1' uomo 7
t Ha fame.
t Non ha fame.
t Non ha n£ fame, ne* sete.
t Ha caldo o freddo ii di Lei fratello \
t Ha paura o vergogna 1' uomo ?
t Ha rag.one o torto 1' uomo 7
Ha il ragazzo il martello del 'e
gnaiuolo 7
L' ha.
Non 1' ha.
L' ha il fornaio 7
Che ha il mio amico 7
II riso.
II contadino, il paesano, il rustico
II servitore. il servo, il domestlco
II suo temperino.
II suo cane.
L' uccello.
II suo piede (pie1).
II suo occhio.
II suo denaro.
lit*.
II suo.
Ha il servitore il suo forziere, o II
mio 7
Ha il suo (ha il suo proprio).
Qualcheduno, qualcuno, or
alcuno, talvno.
Ha qualcuno il mio libro 7
Quuicheduno 1' ha.
Chi ha il mio bastone 1
JO
SEVENTH LESSON.
No one, nobody, not any body.
Nobody has your stick.
Nobody has it
Nessuno, niuno, veruno,
Nessuno ha il vostro bastone.
Nessuno 1' ha.
Niuno 1' ha.
Veruno 1' ha.
Ob*. B. In using alcuno for no one, nobody, not any body, it must always
accompanied by non ; but nessuno^ niuno, and veruno, require nan only wb£T
they follow the verb.
Who has your gun 1
Nobody has it.
Chi ha il di Lei schioppo?
' Alcuno non 1' ha.
Non Y ha nessuno.
Non 1' ha niuno.
Non 1' ha veruno.
Non P ha aucuno
Nessuno 1' ha.
EXERCISES.
10.
Who has my trunk ? — The boy has it. — Is he thirsty or hungry ?
— He is neither thirsty nor hungry. — Has the man the chicken 1
— He has it. — Who has my waistcoat ? — The young man has it. —
Has the young man my ship ? — The young man has it not. —
Who has it ? — The captain has it. — What has the youth ? — He
has the fine chicken. — Has he the knife ? — He has it not. — Is h*
afraid ? — He is not afraid. — Is he afraid or ashamed ? — He is
neither afraid nor ashamed. — Is the man right or wrong * — He is
neither right nor wrong. — Is he warm or cold ? — He is neither
ivarm nor cold. — Who has the countryman's rice ? — My servant
has it. — Has your servant my penknife or his ? — He has neither
yours nor his. — Which penknife has he ? — He has that of his neigh-
bour ? — Who has my old boot ? — Your shoemaker has it. — What
has your friend ? — He has his good money. — Has he my gold ? —
He has it not. — Who has it ? — The baker has it. — Has the baker
my bird or his? — He has his. — Who has mine ? — The carpenter
has it. — Who is cold ? — Nobody is cold. — Is any body warm ?—
Nobody is warm. — Has any body my chicken ? — Nobody has it
— Has your servant your waistcoat or mine ? — He has neithei
yours nor mine. — Which has he ? — He has his own.
8IVENTH LESSON. 21
11.
Had any one my gun ? — No one has it. — Has the youth my
oook ? — He has it not. — What has he ? — He has nothing. — Has
he the hammer or the nail ? — He has neither the hammer nor the
nail. — Has he my umbrella or my stick ? — He has neither youi
umbrella nor your stick. — Has he my coffee or my sugar ? — He
*ias neither your coffee nor your sugar ; he has your honey.-—
Elas the boy my brother's biscuit or that of the Frenchman ?-—
He has neither that of your brother nor that of the Frenchman ;
he has his own. — Have I your bag or that of your friend 1 — You
have neither mine nor my friend's ; you have your own. — Who
has the peasant's bag ? — The good baker has it. — Who is afraid ?
—The tailor's boy is afraid. — Is he sleepy ? — He is not sleepy. —
Is he cold or hungry ? — He is neither cold nor hungry. — What is
the matter with him ? — Nothing. — Has the peasant my money ?
— He has it not. — Has the captain (got) it ? — He has it not ? —
Who has it ? — Nobody has it. — Has your neighbour any thing
good ? — He has nothing good. — What has he ugly ? — He has no-
thing ugly. — Has he any thing 1 — He has nothing.
12.
Has the merchant my cloth or his ? — He has neither yours noi
his. — Which cloth has he ? — He has that of my brother. — Which
thimble has the tailor ? — He has his own. — Has your brother hit
wine or the neighbour's ? — He has neither his nor the neighbour's.
— Which wine has he? — He has his own. — Has any body m\
gold ribbon ? — Nobody has it. — Who has my silver string ? —
Your good boy has it. — Has he my wooden or my leaden horse ?
— He has neither your wooden nor your leaden horse ; he has his
friend's leathern horse. — Is any body wrong ? — Nobody is wrong.
—Who has the Frenchman's good honey ? — The merchant has it.
—Has he it ? — Yes, Sir, he has it. — Are you afraid or ashamed ?
— I am neither afraid nor ashamed. — Has your cook his mutton ?
— He has it. — Have you my bread or my cheese ? — I have neither
your bread nor your cheese. — Have I your salt or your butter ? —
You have neither my salt nor my butter. — What have I ? — You
Nive your mutton. — Has any body my gold button ? — No one has
it. — Who has the tea ? — Which ? — Mine — Your servant has it
— Which tea has the Englishman ? — He has his own.
EIGHTH LESSON
Lezione Ottava.
rho sailor
Th.- tree.
Hi* looking-glass.
His matlrass.
The s. ranger (the foreigner).
The foreigner.
The garden.
The glove.
This or that ox.
This or that hay.
This or that boot.
This or that friend.
This or that man.
This or that ass.
This book.
That book.
Have you this or that book 1
i have this one, I have not that one.
II marinaio.
L' albero.
II suo specchio.
II suo materasso.
Lo straniero, lo stranieri
II forestiero.
II giardino.
11 guanto.
Questo, o quel bue.
Questo, o quel fieno.
Questo, o quello stivale.
Questo, o quell' amico.
Questo, o quell' uomo.
Questo, o quell' asino.
Questo libro (cotesto libro'.
Quel libro.
Ha Ella questo libro o quello 1
Ho questo, non ho quello.
DECLENSION OF THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS
Questo (cotesto)t quello.
Questo,
Not*.
Ace
Gen. Di questo,
Dai. A questo,
Abl. Da questo,
MASCULINE SINGULAR.
Quello,
this.
of this.
to this.
from this.
Di quello,
A quello,
Da quello, from that.
that.
of that
to that.
Obs. A. Demonstrative pronouns are never preceded by an article, prep«i
sons being the words employed before them.
BIOHTH LBSSOft.
as
This one, Questo (cotesto).
That one. Quello
Obt. B. Questo designates the object near the person who speaks, eottde
the object distant from the person who speaks, and near the person spoken to ;
iut quello designates at the same time the object distant from both the person
«roo speaks and that spoken to.
Hare I this or that 7
Vou have this, you have not that.
Has the iran this hat or that 7
Ho io questo o quello 7
Ella ha questo, non quello.
Ha 1' uomo questo cappello,
quello 7
But.
He has not this, but that.
He has th s, but not that.
Ma.
Non ha questo, ma quello.
Ha questo, ma non quello.
The no», the billet or the ticket.
The granary.
The com.
II biglic w ^ (viglietto).
II granaio.
II grano.
Have you this note or that 7
I have not this, but that.
I have this, but not that.
Has the neighbour this looking-glass
or that 7
He has this, but not that.
Ha Ella questo biglietto, o quello V
Non ho questo, ma ho quello.
Ho questo, ma non ho quello.
Ha il vicino questo specchio.
quello 7
Ha questo, ma non ha quello.
The horse-shoe. | II ferro da cavallo.
Ob$. C. The preposition da is made use of between two substantives
when the latter expresses the use of the former.
The wine-bottle.
The oil-bottle.
The milk-pot.
The bottle of wine.
The bottle, the oil.
II fiasco* da vino
II fiasco da olio.
II vaso da latte.
II fiasco di vino.
II fiasco, 1' olio.
That
pro-
or which (relative
noun).
Have you the note which my brother j
has?
2 have not the note which your bro-
ther has 7
Have you the horse which I have 1
I have the horse which you have.
kChe,
} II quale.
Ha Ella il biglietto che ha mio fra
teHol
Non ho il biglietto che ha il di Lei
fratello.
Ha Ella il cavallo che io ho ?
Ho il cavallo che ha V. S, o che vol
aveto.
[* N. B The word boUiglia is used also instead of Mateo, i
3
34 EIGHTH LESSON.
That which, the one which.
I have not that which you have.
[ have not that which Ae has.
Have I the glove which you have ?
Yoifi have not the one which I have.
!Quel che,
Quello che.
Non ho quello che ha Rlla
Non ho quello che egli ha.
Ho io il guanto che ha Vossigao: U 1
Non avete quello che ho io.
EXERCISES.
13.
Which hay has the stranger ? — He has that of the peasant. —
Has the sailor my looking-glass ? — He has it not. — Have you this
glove or that ? — I have this. — Have you the hay of my garden or
that of yours ? — I have neither that of your garden nor that of
mine, but I have that of the stranger. — Which glove have you ?
— I have that of the sailor. — Have you his mattrass ? — I have it.
— Which thread has the sailor ? — He has his own. — Who has my
good note ? — This man has it. — Who has that gun ? — Your friend
•has it. — Have you the corn of vour granary or that of mine ? — I
have neither that of your granary nor that of mine, but I have that
of my merchant. — Who has my glove ? — That servant has it. —
What has your servant ? — He has the tree of this garden. — Has
he that man's book ? — He has not the book of that man, but he
has that of this boy. — Has the peasant this or that ox 1 — He has
neither this nor that, but he has the one which his boy has. — Has
this ass his hay or that of the horse ? — He has neither his nor that
of the horse. — Which horse has this peasant ? — He has that of
your neighbour. — Have I your note or his ? — You have neither
m.ne nor his, but you have that of your friend. — Have you this
oorse's hay ? — I have not his hay, but his shoe. — Has your brother
my note or his ? — He has neither yours nor his own, but he has
the sailor's. — Has the foreigner my bird or his own ? — He has
that of the captain. — Have you the tree of this garden ? — I have
it not. — Are you hungry or thirsty ? — I am neither hungry uoi
thirsty, but I am sleepy.
14.
Has the sailor this bird or that? — He has not this but that.—
Has your servant this stick or that ? — He has this, but not that —
EIGHTH LESSON. 2fi
Has your cook this chicken or that ? — He has neither this no?
that, but he has that of his neighbour. — Am I right or wrong ?—
You are neither right nor wrong, but your good boy is wrong. —
Have I this knife or that ? — You have neither this nor that. —
What have I ? — You have nothing good, but you have something
bad. — Have you the chest which I have ? — I have not that which
you have. — Which horse have you ? — I have the one which youi
brother has. — Have you the ass which my friend has 1 — I have
lot that which he has, but I have that which you have. — Has youi
friend the looking-glass which you have or that which 1 have ? —
He has neither that which you have nor that which I have, but he
has his own.
15.
Which bag has the peasant 1 — He has the one which his boy
has. — Have I your golden or your silver candlestick ? — You have
neither my golden nor my silver candlestick, but you have my
iron candlestick. — Have you my waistcoat or that of the tailor ?
— I have neither yours nor that of the tailor. — Which have you ?
— I have that which my friend has. — Are you cold or warm ? —
{ am neither cold nor warm, but I am thirsty. — Is your friend
afraid or ashamed ? — He is neither afraid nor ashamed, bu* he is
sleepy. — Who is wrong ? — Your friend is wrong. — Has any one
my umbrella ? — No one has it. — Is any one ashamed ? — No one
is ashamed, but my friend is hungry. — Has the captain the ship
which you have or that which I have ? — He has neither that which
you have, nor that which I have. — Which has he ? — He has that
of his friend. — Is he right or wrong? — He is neither right nor
wrong. — Has the Frenchman any thing good or bad ? — He has
neither any thing good nor bad, but he has something pretty. —
What has he pretty ? — He has the pretty looking-glass.— Has he
the good biscuit ? — He has it not, but his neighbour has it. — Has
the Englishman the wine-bottle ? — He has the wine-bottle, but he
has not the bottle of wine. — Which shoe (ilferro) has your baker 1
—He has that of the horse. — Has he my oil. bottle ? — He has no
your oil bottle, but he has your milk-pot.
^INTH LESSON
Lezione Nona.
;)fcCI£NSION OP THE DEFINITE ' ARTlCLfc
THE PLURAL
MASCULINE US
wheu ihe word begins with a consonant, except * followed by anothei
consonant).
PLURAL.
PLVHALE.
.
Mascolino
Nom.
the.
Nam.
I.
Gen.
of the.
Gen.
Dei orde'.
Dot.
to the.
Dai.
Ai or a\
Ace.
the.
Ace.
I.
AM.
from the.
Abl.
Dai or da'
THE POBMATIOi* OP THE PLUHAL.
inn w u b ax a 1 iwr u* inn ri<uuib>
f?u/e Masculine nouns and adjectives, whatever may be their ending
rhange it in the plural into t. Ex.
The hats.
The books.
The good books.
Of the books.
The sticks.
Of the sticks.
The thimbles.
The dogs.
The brothers.
The merchants.
The horses.
The neighbours.
The good neighbours
Of the neighbours.
The peasants
The servants
I cappelli.
I libri.
I buoni libri.
Dei libri.
I bastoni.
Dei bastoni
I ditali.
I cani.
I fratelli.
I mercanti.
I cavalli.
I vicini.
I buoni vicini.
Dei vicini.
I rustici, contadini
I domestici, i send
NINTH LESSON.
*)
DECLENSION OF THE DEFINITE ARTICLE MASCULINE IN THE PLUBA1
(when the word begins with t followed by a consonant, or with a vowel).
Nom.
Gen.
Dot.
Ace.
Abl.
PLURAL.
the.
of the.
to the.
the.
from the.
PLUHALB MABCOLIWO
Norn. gli
Gen. degli.
Dot. agli.
Ace. gli.
Abl. dagli.
The guns.
Gli schioppi.
The boots.
Gli stivali.
The good boots.
I buoni stivali.
The friends.
Gli amici.
The umbrellas.
Gli ombrelli, le ombrelle.
The coats.
Gli abiti, i vestiti, le vestirt 3nta
Obs A. When the word begins with i, an apostrophe is substituted in tht
article gliy for the letter i, thus :
Nom- { the Englishmen.
Ace. S
Gen. of the \
Dot. to the > Englishmen.
AM. from the J
Nom.
Ace.
Gen.
Dot.
Abl.
i Gl' Inglesi.
Degl' Inglesi.
Agl' Inglesi.
Dagl' Inglesi.
Fibst Exception. — All nouns ending in the singular in e, monosyllable*,
and nouns having the accent on the last vowel, as also words ending in i«, dc
not change their termination in the plural. Ex.
Sing.
Plur.
Singulars.
Plurale.
The king.
The kings.
lire.
Ire.
The foot.
The feet.
11 pie\
Iptt,
The tea.
Teas.
11 te\
Ite\
The coffee.
Coffees.
11 cafR.
IcafB.
The bailiff
The bailiffs.
11 podesta.
I podesta.
Second Exception.— Nouns ending in co and go, generally insert in ttu
f^tsral the letter h. Ex.
The cook
The bag.
The inn.
The dialogue
The German
The Pole.
The fire.
The cooks.
The bags.
The inns.
The dialogues.
The Germans.
The Poles
The fires.
llcuoco.
II sacco.
L'albergo.
II dialogo.
II Tedesco.
II Polacco
II fuoco.
I cuochi.
I sacchi.
Gli alberghi.
I dialoghi.
I Tedeschi.
I Polacchi
I fuochi.
NINTH LESSON.
Third Exception. — Nouns ending in to, preceded by a vowel, low m» letm
* in the plural, and those in which io is preceded by a consonant, change if
the plural io into ii.1 Ex.
The baker.
The bakers.
11 fornaio
I fornai.
The spoon.
The spoons.
11 cucchiaio.
I cucchiai.
The shoemaker
The shoemakers.
11 calzolaio.
I calzolai
The bookseller.
The booksellers.
11 libraio.
I librai.
Th3 uncle.
The uncles.
Lo zio.
Gli zii.
The temple.
The temples.
11 tempio.
I tempii.
Fhs principle,
The principles.
11 principio.
I principii
Ob*. B. When, however, the final syllable io is preceded by c, cr, g, g^ u
m\j in the plural be changed merely into i. Ex.
The looking-glass.
The eye.
The cheese.
The son
The looking-
glasses.
The eyes.
The cheeses.
The sona
Lo specchio.
L' occhio.
II formaggio
11 figlio.
jli srecchi.
Gn ocshi.
I formaggi.
I figli-
Fourth Exception.
gularly, viz.
The man.
God.
The ox.
-The following few words form their plural quite lire
The men- L' uomo. Gli uomini
The gods. Dio. Gli* Dei.
The oxen. 1 bue. I buoi.
Ob*. There are some masculine nouns terminated in o, which in the pluiai
take the feminine termination a, together with the feminine article,* and others
also in o, which in the plural may take either the masculine article and termi
nation, or the feminine ; we shall speak of them hereafter.4
1 Formerly these nouns took j in the plural, but the generality of modern
luthors have entirely rejected this letter from the alphabet. The reason is thai
it is pronounced like £, and whenever it occurs in the formation of the plural, two
Vb are substituted for it.
8 Dio is the only word in Italian beginning with a consonant, which in the
3'tural takes the article gli instead of i.
* Nouns terminated in a, t, u, with a few exceptions (of which hereafter), and
»hen they do not represent male individuals, or dignities, or professions »e
*Qngi~g to male individuals, are feminine ; all others are generally masculne.
4 The principal are :—
II centinaio, the hundred.
II ciglio,
II migliaio,
II migiio,
II moggio,
Lo staio,
Ilpaio,
L' ttovo
the eye-lid.
the thousand,
the mile,
a measure,
the bushel.
the pair,
the egg.
Plvr.
Le centinaia.
Le ciglia.
Le migliaia.
Le miglia.
Le moggia.
Le staia.
Le paia.
IjO uova
NINTH LESSON.
25
My looking-glasses.
Your looking-glasses.
Hare you my small loojting-glasses ?
i have not your small looking-glasses,
but I have your large looking-
glaase*.
I mici specchl.
I vostri specchl.
Ha Klla i miei piccoli5 specchl 7
f Non ho 1 di Lei piccoli, ma 1 di La
J grandi specchi.
I Non ho i di Lei piccoli spechi, n»*
[ ho bensi, i grandi.
Great, large. , Grande.
Little, small. Piccolo
Obi. C. Grande, great, loses the syllable de before a consonant (not Before •
followed by a consonant), and for the letter e before a vowel an apostrophe ii
substituted. Before a noun in the plural, beginning with a vowel, grandi must
be used.
The large hat.
11 gran cappello.
The large coat.
11 grand' ab
ito.
Matcolino.
/ — " — ™-
Singulare.
PluraU.
My or mine.
11 mio.
I miei.
Your— yours.
11 vostro.
I vostri.
His.
11 suo.
I suoi5.
Our— ours.
11 nostro.
I nostri.
Your — yours.
11 vostro
I vostri.
Their— theirs.
11 loro.
I loro.
His books, looking-glasses, coats.
Our books, looking-glasses, coats.
Their books, looking-glasses, coats.
I suoi libri, specchi, abiti.
I nostri libri, specchi, abiti.
I loro libri, specchi, abiti.
Which books, looking-glasses, coats ? Quali (quai, qua'), libri, specchi
abiti 7
Which 7 auali (quai, qua') 7
These or those books.
These or those coats.
These or those looking-glasses.
Quei (or que') libri.
ftuegli abiti.
Quegli specchi.
• There is in Italian fnat particularity, that the signification of nouns can bt
augmented or diminished by the addition of certain syllables called augmenta-
Sivea and diminutives (of which hereafter ; see Lesson X.). But in the presem
instance we cannot make use of them, on account of the contradictory answer.
• To avoid ambiguity, we say, in the third person, di lui, instead of il suo, i
tuoi. Ex. : Paul loves Peter and his children, Paolo ama Pictro ex di lui figli-
uoii, or ijigliuoli di lui ; for in using t nun it might convey the meaning thai
Paul love* b*s own children.
to
NINTH LESSON.
Which books have you 7
I have the fine books of your good
neighbours.
Have 1 his small boots ?
You have not his small Doots, but you
have his large boots.
Yhich looking-glasses have 17
V n have the pretty looking-glasses of
your brothers,
riave you th3 large hammers of the
carpenters?
1 have not their large hammers, but
their large nails.
Has your brother my wooden guns 7
He has not your wooden guns.
Which has he 7
Have you the Frenchmen's fine um-
brellas 7
1 have not their fine umbrellas, but I
have their fine sticks.
My oxen.
Their asses.
His horses.
Of my gardens.
Of your horses.
Have you the trees of my gardens 7
1 * ave not the trees of your gardens.
Df my pretty gardens.
Of my fine horses
[ have not your cotton nandkerchiefa,
but I have your cloth coats.
The bread, the loaves.
Quai libri avel) vol? (ha Ella)T
Ho i bei libri dei vostri buon
vicini.
Ho io i suoi piccoli stivali 7
Ella non ha i suoi piccoli stivali, mi
ha i suoi stivali grandi.
Quali specchi ho io ?
Ella ha i leggiadri specchi dei ii
Lei fratelli.
Ha Ella i grandi martelli dei U
gnaiuoli 7
Non ho i loro grandi martelli, ma
ho i loro gran chiodi.
Ha il di Lei fratello i miei schioppi
di legno 7
Egli non ha i di Lei schioppi di legno
Quali ha?
Ha Ella i begli ombrelli dei Fran-
cesP
IV on ho i loro begli ombrelli, ma hoi
loro bei bastoni.
I miei buoi.
I loro asini.
I suoi cavalli.
Dei miei giardini.
Dei \ di Lei l cavalli.
' vostri 5
Ha Ella gli alberi dei miei giardini'
Non ho gli alberi dei di Lei giardini
Dei miei leggiadri giardini.
De' miei bei cavalli.
Non ho i vostri fazzoletti di cotone
ma ho i vostri abiti di panno.
II pane, i pani.
EXERCISES.
16.
Have you the gloves ? — Yes, Sir, I have the gloves. — Have you
nay gloves ? — No, Sir, I have not your gloves. — Have I your look-
ing-glasses ? — You have my looking-glasses. — Have I your pretty
nandkerchiefs ? — You have not my pretty handkerchiefs. — Which
handkerchiefs have I ? — You have the pretty handkerchiefs of youi
friendi. — Has the foreigner our good penknives ? — He has not our
NINTH LESSON. SI
good penknives, but our good ships. — Who has our fine horses ?— -
Nobody has your fine horses, but somebody has your fine oxen. —
Has your neighbour the trees of your gardens ? — He has not the
es of my gardens, but he has your handsome notes. — Have yoi.
the horses' hay ? — I have not their hay, but their shoes (i loro/erri).
— Has your tailor my pretty golden buttons? — He has not your
pretty golden buttons, but your pretty golden threads (fili). —
What has the sailor? — He has his fine ships. — Has he my stick*
or my guns ? — He has neither your sticks nor your guns. — Who
has the tailor's good waistcoats ? — Nobody has his waistcoats, but
somebody has his silver buttons. — Has the Frenchman's boy my
good umbrellas ? — He has not your good umbrellas, but your good
knives. — Has the shoemaker my leathern boots? — He has your
leathern boots. — What has the captain ? — He has his good sailors.
— What has our bookseller? — He has his good books. — Which
books have you ? — I have the fine books of our booksellers.
17.
Which mattrasses has the sailor? — He has the good mattrasses
of his captain. — Which gardens has the Frenchman ? — He has
the gardens of the English. — Which servants has the English-
man ? — He has the servants of the French. — What has your boy ?
He has his pretty birds. — What has the merchant ? — He has our
pretty chests. — What has the baker? — He has our fine asses. —
Has he our nails or our hammers ? — He has neither our nails nor
our hammers, but he has our good loaves. — Has the carpenter
his iron hammers ? — He has not his iron hammers, but his iron
nails. — Which biscuits has the baker? — He has the biscuits cf
mV friends. — Has our friend our fine penknives? — He has not our
fine penknives. — Which has he ? — He has the small penknives of
nis merchants. — Which looking-glasses has your servant ? — He
has the looking-glasses of his good merchants. — Has your friend
the small knives of our merchants? — He has not their small
knives, but their golden candlesticks. — Have you these notes ? —
I have not these notes, but these silver knives. — Has the man this
or that note ? — He has neither this nor that. — Has h? your book
©r your friend's ? — He has neither mine nor my fr;end's ; he has
lia own — Has vour brother the wine which I have, or that which
83
TENTH LESSON.
you have ? — He has neither that which you have nor that whicl
I have. — Which wine has he? — He has that of his merchants.-
Have you the bag which my servant has? — I have not the ba|
which your servant has. — Have you the chicken which my ccol
has, or that which the peasant has ? — I have neither that whicl
your cook has, nor that which the peasant has.— Is the peasan
x>ld or warm? — He is neither cold nor warm.
TENTH LESSON.
Lezione Decima.
OF AUGMENTATIVES.
There are in Italian two sorts of augmentatives, viz.
1. In one, to express any thing great and large. Ex.
The hat
. the large hat.
11 cappello .
. il cappellone
The book .
. the large book.
11 libro
. il librone.
The hall
. the large hall.
L<a sala
. il salone.
The house
. the large house.
La casa
. il casone.
Oba. A. The augmentatives in one are always masciJine, though the radi
sals be feminine.
The door . . the $ large door-
The chamber
(. gate.
. . the large chamber.
La porta . . il portone.
La camera . . il camerone.
2. In accio for the masculine, and accia for the feminine,
•nettling bad or contemptiMe. Ex.
These designs*?
he hat
The table
The house
Oba. B.
the large ugly nat.
the large ugly table,
the ugly house.
I! cappello
La tavola
La casa
il cappellaccio.
la tavolaccia.
la casaccia.
Nouns terminated in ame denote plenty or abundance, as : Gen
lame, abundance of people ; ossame, abundance of bones.
Oba. There are nouns in all these terminations, without being augments
fives. Ex. 11 bastonc, the sick ; lo stame, the carded wool ; il lancio, the noose
la/oecto, the face.
TENTH LESSON.
88
OF DIMINUTIVES
There aro also two sorts of diminutives, viz.
1. Of kindness and flattery in : ino, eito, ello, for the masculine, and tna, rfta,
ila, for the feminine. Ex.
From povero, poor, are derived :
A poor little man. Poverino, poveretto, poverello.
A. poor little woman. Poverina, poveretta, poverella.
Of compassion in : uccio, uzzo, icciuolo, for the masculine, and in : ueeia,
aia, icciuolo, for the feminine. Ex.
From P uomo, the man, are formed :
The poor little man. I L' uomuccio, 1' uomuzzo, 1' uomicciu-
olo, or 1' omuccio — omicciuolo.
Ob*. C. The diminutives convey no bad meaning, like the augmentatives ;
and to express a little old man, you may use indifferently : vecchietto, vecchino,
vecchicttino, rccchierello, recchierellino, vecchiuzzo. From la caea, you may form •
la carina, la casetta, la catuzza, la caauccia, la caaucciola, to express the small
house.
Ob*. D. The diminutives in ino and ina, express something tender, flatter-
ing, and cajoling. Ex. The pretty little prince, il principino (from principe) ;
the pretty little princess, la prvncipcssina (from principessa) ; the little table, il
tavolino (from tarola) ; the pretty small house, U casino (from tosa); the little
chamber, il camerino (from camera) ; the little cap, il berrcttino (from berretta)
the pretty little dog, il cagnolino (from cane).
Ob*. E. These examples Bhow that many feminine nouns in a form their
diminutives in ino, which termination is masculine.
Those.
Have you my books or those of the
man?
( have not yours ; I have those of the
man.
j QuelH,
: Quet or que1.
Ha Ella i miei libri, o quel (que')
dell' uomo?
Non ho i di Lei. ho quelli del
Y uomo.
Those which.
S Quelli, che (or cui).
Quei (or que'), che.
Have you the books which I have ?
I have those which you have.
Has the Englishman the knives
which you have, or those which I
have?
Ha Ella i libri che ho io?
Avete i libri che ho io ?
Ho quei che Ella ha.
Ho quei che avete voi.
Ho quelli cheha Ella.
Ha 1' Inglese i coltelli che a^ete vol
o quelli che ho io ?
84
TENTH LESSON.
He has neither those which you have,
nor those which I have.
Which knives has he 7
He has his own.
These books.
Those books.
Those coats.
Those looking-glasses.
Have you these or those books ?
These (Plur. of this one).
Those (Plur. of that one).
Non ha n6 quelli che avete toi, ni
quelli che ho io.
Q,uali coltelli ha egli 7
Ha i suoi.
Qnesti libri.
Quei (que') libri
Quegli abiti.
Quegli specchi.
Avete questi libri, o quelli 7
Questi.
Quelli (quegli).
Have I these or those 7
You have these, you have not those.
Ho questi, o quelli 7
Avete questi, non avete quelli.
Have I the looking-glasses of the
French, or those of the English 7
You have neither the former nor the
latter.
Obs. F. In Italian, as in French, the
■>thery are expressed in an inverted order ;
and quello, quelli, to the former.
Has the man these or those sticks 7
He has these, but not those.
Have you your guns or mine 7
I have neither yours nor mine, but
those of our good friends.
Ho io gli specchi dei Francesi, ,
quelli degl' Inglesi 7
Non avete ne* questi, ne* quelli.
former and the latter, the one and tht
questo, questi, referring to the latter
Ha 1' uomo questi bastoni, o quelli 7
Ha questi, non ha quelli.
Ha Ella i di Lei schioppi, o i miei 7
Non ho ne i di Lei, ne* i miei, ma he
quelli dei nostri buoni amici
One
. one book.
Uno
. . Un libro.
Good
. . good bread.
Buono
. . Buon pane.
Fine
. fine horse.
Bello
. . Bel cavallo.
Great
. . great courage.
Grande
. . Gran coraggio.
Saint
. Saint Peter.
Santo
. San Pietro.
Tha't
. . that dog.
Quello
. . Quel cane.
Ob». G. These adjectives lose, the two first their last vowel, the otheri
vheir last syllable, in the singular, when they precede a word beginning with t
consonant (not * followed by a consonant).
But when they precede a word beginning with a vowel, all lose their law
rowel. Ex.
The fine tree. ! H bell' albero.
The large tree. II grand' albero.
Ob: H. This suppression of a letter or a syllable never takes place before a
feminine noun or before a masculine noun in the plural, except with respect to
the word grande, for we sav :
TENTH LESSON. 86
Large book*. Gran llbrL
Bat we must say :
Great man. i Grand' uomo.
Great men Grandi uomini.
'J&r /. The word bcllo may be used in the plural as follows
Pine.
r Belli.
I Bei or be\
Plur. ^ Begli (before « followed by
1 a consonant, and before t
^ vowel).
EXERCISES.
18.
Have you these or those notes ? — I have neither these nor those.
— Have you the horses of the French or those of the English ? — I
have those of the English, but I have not those of the French. —
Which oxen have you ? — I have those of the foreigners. — Have
you the chests which I have ? — I have not those which you have,
but those which your brother has. — Has your brother your bis-
cuits or mine ? — He has neither yours nor mine. — Which biscuits
has he ? — He has his own. — Which horses has your friend ? — He
has those which I have. — Has your friend my books or his? — He
has neither yours nor his, but he has those of the captain. — Have
I your waistcoats, or those of the tailors? — You have neither
these nor those. — Have I our asses? — You have not ours, but
those of our neighbours. — Have you the birds of the sailors? — I
have not their birds, but their fine sticks. — Which glasses {il bic-
chiere) has your boy? — He has mine. — Have I my boots or those
of the shoemakers ? — You have not yours, but theirs.
19.
Which milk has the man ? — He has ours. — Has he our coffee t
Ae has it not. — Have you our coats or those of the strangers ?
I have not yours, but theirs. — Has your carpenter our hammers
or those of our friends? — He has neither ours nor those of our
friends. — Which nails has he ? — He has his good iron nails. —
Has any one the ships of the English ? — No one has those of the
English, but some one has those of the French. — Who has the
cook's chickens? — Nobody has his chickens, but somebody has
36
ELEVENTH LESSON.
his outter. — Who has his cheese? — His boy has it. — Who hi
my old gun? — The sailor has it. — Have I the peasant's bag?-
You have not his bag, but his corn. — Which guns has the English-
man?— He has those which you have. — Which umbrellas has th*
Frenchman? — He has those which his friend has. — Has he oui
books? — He has not ours, but those which his neighbour has.
\s the merchant's boy hungry? — He is not hungry, but thirst)
— Is your friend cold or warm? — He is neither cold nor warm
— Is he afraid? — He is not afraid, but ashamed. — Has the younj
man the birds of our servants? — He has not their birds, but then
soap. — Which penknives lias he? — He has those of his old mer
chants. — Have you any thing good or bad ? — I have neither am
thing good nor bad, but something fine.— What have you fine ?-
I have our cook's fine beef. — Have you not their fine mutton?-
No, Sir, I have it not.
ELEVENTH LESSON.
Lezione Undecima.
The comb.
The small comb.
The glass.
Have you my small combs 1
The nose.
The wood or forest.
The work.
The jeweL
II pettine.
II pettinino.
II piccolo pettine.
II bicchiere.
Ha Ella i miei piccoli pet*H* j**
tinetti) 7
II naso.
II bosco ; plut, 1. bosciu.
II lavoro, 1' opiri.
II travaglio.
Ilgioiello.
ELEVENTH LESSON.
37
Them.
Li, gli.
Aae he my fine glasses 7
Ha esso i miei belli bicchleri 1
He has them.
( Li ha.
( Esso li ha.
Have I them 7
Li ho io 7
Vou have them.
i Ella li ha.
( Li avete.
You have them not.
( Ella non li ha.
( Non li avete.
Has the man my fine jewels 7
Ha l'.uomo i miei bei gioiellit
He has them not.
Non li ha.
Has the boy (got) them 7
Li ha il ragazzo 7
The men have them.
Gli uomini li hanno.
Have the men (got) them 7
Li hanno gli .uomini 7
They.
Eglino, essi (et, e').
They have them.
Eglino li hanno.
They have them not.
Essi non li hanno.
Who has them 7
Chi li ha 7
The German, the Germans.
11 Tedesco, 1 Tedeschi.
The Turk, the Turks.
11 Turco, i Turchi.
The Italian, theltaliaris.
L' Italiano, gl' Italian!.
The Spaniard, the Spaniards.
Lo Spagnuolo, gli SpagnuolL
The Russian, the Russians.
11 Russo, i Russi.
The American, the Americans.
L' Americano, gli American!.
The clothes.
{ I vestiti.
( GU abiti.
Sone or any.1
{ Sing. Del, dello, delV.
\ Plur. Dei, degli, degV*
Some or any wine.
Del vino.
Some or any bread.
Del pane.
Some or any butter.
Del butirro.
Some or any sugar.
Dello zucchero.
Some or any money.
Del denaro.
Some or any books.
Del libn.
Some or any buttons.
Dei bottoni.
1 Some or any is sometimes expressed in Italian, and sometimes not ; nearly
as in English. It is expressed when a quantity or a little may be understood,
•tnerwise it is not expressed. Ex. Give me some bread, datemi del pane ; I drink
wine and you drink water, io bevo vino, e voi bevete acqua ; we have seen no sol-
diers, or we have not seen any soldiers, non abbiamo veduto soldati; wine and
bread are sufficient for me, pane ed acqua mi bastfi.no ; to write well we must em-
ploy good paper and good ink, per bene scrivere bisogr/a adoperare buona carta t
buon inchiottro; the poor are often reduced to bad meat, t poveri sono *pt*t(
Hdotti a cattiva came
5fi
ELEVENTH LESSON.
Some or any gold.
Some or any silver (metal).
Dell' oro.
Dell' argento.
Some yr any men.
Degli uomlnl
Some or any friends.
Degli amici.
Some or any coats.
Degli abiti.
Have you any wine "
Avete del vino ?
I have some wine.
Ho del vino.
Has this man any cloth 1
Ha del panno quell' no
He has some cloth.
Ha del panno.
Has he any books ?
Ha eglidei libri?
He has some books.
Ha libri.
Have you any money 7
Avete denaro 3
I have some money.
Ho denaro
Jo or not any, before a noun.
JNon.
I have no wine.
Non ho vino.
He has no money.
>n ha danaro.
You have no books.
( Klla non ha librL
t Non avete libri.
They have no friends.
Non hanno amici.
Some or any good wine.
Del buon vino.
Some or any bad cheese.
Del cattivo formaggio.
Some or any excellent wine.
Del vino eccellente.
Some or any excellent coffee.
Dell eccellente caffd.
Some or any good books.
Dei buoni libri.
Some or any pretty glasses.
Dei leggiadri bicchieri.
Some or any fine coats.
De" begli abiti.
Some or any old wine.
Del vino vecchio.
Have you any good bu rter ?
I have no good butter, but some excel-
lent cheese.
Has this man any good books ?
He has not any good books.
Has the merchant any pretty gloves 1
He has no pretty gloves, but some
pretty jewels.
Ha Ella buon burro?
Avete buon burro?
Non ho buon burro, ma ho ecot?
lente fortnaggio.
Ha buoni libri quell' uomo?
Non ha buoni libri.
Ha leggiadri guanti il mercante 1
Non ha leggiadri guanti, ma ha le*
giadri gioielli.
What has the baker ?
3e has some excellent bread.
The pointer.
Some coals.
The pencil (of a painter).
The picture.
Chehailfornaio?
Ha del pane eccellente.
II pittore.
Carbone.
II pennello.
II quadro.
The pencU
II lapis (la matita, a feminine nouni
•LKVRIfTH LESSON.
EXERCISES.
20.
Have you my fine glasses? — I have them. — Have you the fine
aorses of the English? — I have them not. — Which sticks have
You ? — I have those of the foreigners. — Who has my small combs ?
—My boys have them. — Which knives have you ? — I have those
af your friends. — Have I your good guns ? — You have them not,
but your friends have them. — Have you my pretty birds, or those
of my brothers? — I have neither yours nor your brothers', but
my own. — Which ships have the Germans? — The Germans have
no ships. — Have the sailors our fine mattrasses? — They have
them not. — Have the cooks (got) them ? — -They have them. — Has
the captain your pretty books ? — He has them not. — Have I them ?
— You have them. You have them not. — Has the Italian (got)
them ? — He has them. — Have the Turks our fine guns ? — They
have them not. — Have the Spaniards them? — They have them.
—Has the German the pretty umbrellas of the Spaniards ? — He
lias them. — Has he them? — Yes, Sir, he has them. — Has the
Italian our pretty gloves? — He has them not. — Who has them?
— The Turk has them. — Has the tailor our waistcoats or those of
our friends? — He has neither the latter nor the former. — Which
coats has he? — He has those which the Turks have. — Which
dogs have you ? — I have those which my neighbours have.
21
Have you any wood? — I have some wood. — Has your brother
Any soap ?— He has no soap. — Have I any mutton ? — You have
ao mutton, but you have some beef. — Have your friends any
money? — They have some money. — Have they any milk? —
They have no milk, but they have some excellent butter. — Have
I any fire ? — You have no fire, but you have some coals (in the
sing, in Italian). — Has the merchant any cloth? — He has no
cloth, but some pretty garments. — Have the English any silver?
—They have no silver, but they have some excellent iron. — Have
you any good coffee ? — I have no good coffee, but some excellent
*rine. — Has the merchant any good books? — He has some good
books. — Has the young man any milk? — He has no milk, but
40
TWELFTH LESSON.
tome excellent tea. — Have the French any good gloves ? — The}
have some excellent gloves. — Have they any birds ? — They have
no birds, but they have some pretty jewels.— Who has the fine
pencils of the English? — Their friends have them. — Who ha§
the good biscuits of the bakers? — The sailors of our captains have
them. — Have they our clothes? — Yes, Sir, they have them. —
What have the Italians ? — They nave some beautifu. pictures.-
What have the Spaniards ? — They have some fine asses. — What
have the Germans ? — They have some excellent corn.
22.
Have you any friends? — I have some friends. — Have your
friends any fire ? — They have some fire. — Have the shoemakers
any good boots? — They have no good boots, but some excellent
leather. — Have the tailors any good waistcoats? — They have no
good waistcoats, but some excellent cloth. — Has the painter any
umbrellas? — He has no umbrellas, but he has some beautiful
pictures. — Has he the pictures of the French or those of the
Italians? — He has neither the latter nor the former. — Which has
he ? — He has those of his good friends. — Have the Russians any
thing good ? — They have something good. — What have they good '
— They have some good oxen. — Has any one my small combs ?
—No one has them. — Who has the peasants' fine chickens? —
Your cooks have them. — What have the bakers? — They have
some excellent bread. — Have your friends any old wine ? — They
have no old wine, but some good milk. — Has any one your golden
candlesticks ? — No one has them.
TWELFTH LESSON
Lezione Duodecimo,.
borne of it, any of it, of it.
Some of them, any of them, qf<
them.
Ne (is always r laced before the
verb, except when this is in
the infinitive, participle, m
imperative).
TWELFTH LESSON.
4J
Have yon any wine ?
' I have some.
Have you any bread ?
\ have not any, or none.
Have you any good wine?
I have some good.
ilave I any good cloth ?
You have not any good.
Has the merchant any sugar J
He has some sugar.
He has some.
He has not any.
Has he any good sugar ?
He has some good.
He has not any good.
Havo I any salt?
Voi i have some salt.
Von have no salt.
Y.i u have some.
Von have not any.
1 lave you any boots'}
I have some boots.
I have no boots.
I have some.
1 have not any.
Has the man any good horses?
He has some good ones.
is not any good ones.
Has he any pretty knives?
He hat< some pretty ones.
I [••■ has not any pretty ones.
Has he any money ?
He has some.
He has not any.
Have our friends any good buttei ?
They have some good.
They have not any good.
Have you good or bad books ?
I have some good ones.
Have you good or bad bread ?
I have some good.
Who has some bad wine ?
Our merchant has some.
( Ha Ella vino I
c Avete vino ?
Neho.
Avete pane?
Non ne ho.
( Ha Ella buon vino ?
t Avete buon vino 1
< Ne ho di buono.
C Ne ho del buono.
Ho io buon panno ?
( Ella non ne ha di buono.
I Non ne avete di buono.
Ha zucchero il mercante 1
Ha zucchero.
Ne ha.
Non ne ha.
Ha egli buon zucchero 1
( Ne ha di buono.
( Ne ha del buono.
Non ne ha di buono.
Ho sale ?
Avete sale.
Non avete sale.
Ne avete.
Non ne avete.
Avete stivali ?
Ho stivali.
Non ho stivali
Ne ho.
Non ne ho.
Ha l' uomo buoni cavalii?
Ne ha dei buoni.
Non ne ha di buoni.
Ha egli leggiadri coltellj ?
Ne ha dei leggiadri.
Non ne ha di leggiadri.
Ha egli danaro ?
Ne ha.
Non ne ha.
Hanno buon burro i nostri amid 1
Ne hanno di buono.
Non ne hanno del buono.
Ha Ella buoni, o cattivi libri ?
Ne ho dei buoni.
Avete buono, o cattivo panel
Ne ho del buono.
Chi ha cativo vino 1
Ne ha il nostra mercante.
43
TWELFTH LESSON.
What oread has the baker 1
He has some good.
What boots has the shoemaker!
He has some good ones-
The hatter.
The joiner.
A or one.
dual pane ha il fornaio 7
Ne ha del buono.
Quali stivali ha il calzolaio 1
Ne ha di buoni.
II cappellalo.
II falegname.
Un (before a consonant or i
vowel).
Uno (before s followed by a
consonant, or when it standi
alone).
Norn.
Gat.
Dot.
Ace.
Abl.
DECLENSION OP THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE.
a or an.
of a — an.
to a — an.
a — an.
from a — an.
Norn.
Gen.
Dot.
Ace.
Abl.
Masculine
uno.
d' uno.
ad uno.
uno.
da uno.
A or one horse.
Hava you a book 7
I have a book.
Have you a glass ?
I have no glass.
I have one.
Have you a good horse?
I have a good horse.
I have a good one.
I have two good ones.
I have two good horses.
I have three good ones.
Have I a gun 1
You have a gun.
You have one.
You have a good one.
You have two good ones.
Has your brother a friend 1
He has a friend.
He has one.
He has a good one.
Un cavallo.
HaElla}unlibro.
Avete '
Ho un libro.
jHaElla>unbicchiere1
( Avete >
Non ho bicchiere.
Ne ho uno.
Ha Ella un buon cavallo 1
Ho un buon cavallo.
Ne ho uno buono.
Ne ho due buoni.
Ho due buoni cavalli.
Ne ho tre buoni.
Ho uno schioppo 7
Ella ha uno schioppo.
Ella ne ha uno.
Ella ne ha uno buono.
Ella ne ha due buoni.
Ha un amico il di Lei frateUo 1
Ha un amico.
Ne ha uno.
Ne ha uno buono.
TWELFTH LESSON.
4*
He has two good ones.
He ha* three good ones.
Four.
Fire.
Has your friend a fine knife 1
He tij-s one.
Fe has none,
fie has two of them.
He has three.
He has four.
Have you five good horses 7
I have six.
I have six good and seven bad ones.
Who has a fine umbrella 1
The merchant has one.
Ne ha due buonl.
Ne ha tre buoni.
Quattro.
Cinque.
Ha il vostro amico un bel coltelto i
Ne ha uno.
Non ne ha.
Ne ha due.
Ne ha tre.
Ne ha quattro.
Ha Ella
Avete
Ne ho sei.
Ne ho sei buoni e sette cattlvi.
Chi ha un bell' ombrello? or un>
Delia ombrello?
II mercante ne ha uno
) Ha Ella ) cinque bu(mi caTalI11
EXERCISES
23.
Have you any salt? — I have some. — Have you any coffee? — J
have not any. — Have you any good wine? — I have some good
(wine). — Have you any good cloth? — I have no good cloth, but 1
have some good money. — Have I any good sugar? — You have
not any good. — Has the man any good honey ? — He has some. —
lias he any good cheese? — He has not any. — Has the American
any money? — He has some. — Have the French any cheese? —
They have not any. — Have the English any good milk ? — They
have no good milk, but they have some excellent butter. — Who
has some good soap? — The merchant has some. — Who has some
good bread? — The baker has some. — Has the foreigner any
coals ? — He has not any. — Has he any cloth ? — He has some. —
What rice have you ? — I have some good (rice). — What hay has
the horse? — He has some good (hay). — What leather has the
shoemaker? — He has some excellent (leather). — Have you any
jewels? — I have not any. — Who has some jewels? — The mer
chant has some. — Have I any boots ? — You have some boots.—
Have I any hats? — You have no hats. — Has your friend any
good knives? — He has some good ones. — Has he any good oxen*
•-He has not any good ones. — Have the Italians any fine horses*
14 TWELFTH LESSON.
—They have not any fine ones. — Who has some fine asses?—
The Spaniards have some.
24.
Has the captain any good sailors ? — He has some good ones.—
Have the sailors any good mattrasses ? — They have not any good
ones. — Who has some good biscuits? — The baker of our good
neighbour has some. — Has he any bread ? — He has not any.-
Who has some beautiful ribbons? — The French have some.—
Who has some excellent iron nails ? — The carpenter has some.-
Has he any hammers ? — He has some. — What hammers has he ?—
He has some iron ones. — What is the matter with your brother ?
— Nothing is the matter with him. — Is he cold ? — He is neither
cold nor warm. — Is he afraid ? — He is not afraid. — Is he ashamed ?
— He is not ashamed. — What is the matter with him ? — He is
hungry. — Who has some pretty gloves? — I have some. — Who
has some fine pictures? — The Italians have some. — Have the
painters any fine gardens? — They have some fine ones. — Has the
hatter good or bad hats? — He has some good ones. — Has the
joiner good or bad wood ? — He has some good (wood). — Who has
some pretty jewels ? — The boys of our merchants have some. —
Have they any birds ? — They have not any. — Have you any tea ?
— I have not any. — Who has some ? — My servant has some. —
Has your servant any clothes? — He has not any. — Who has
some ? — The servants of my neighbour have some.
25.
Have you a pencil ? — I have one. — Has your boy a good book* ?
— He has a good one. — Has the German a good ship ? — He has
none. — Has your tailor a good coat? — He has a good one. — He
has two good ones. — He has three good ones. — Who has some
fine boots? — Our shoemaker has some. — Has the captain a fine
dog? — He has two. — Have your friends two fine horses? — They
have four.— Has the young man a good or bad gun ? — He has no
Rood one : he has a bad one. — Have you a cork ? — I have none.
—Has your friend a good corkscrew ? — He has two. — Have I a
friend ? — You have a good one. — You have two good friends. —
You have three good ones. — Your brother has four good ones.—
THIRTEENTH LESSON.
4*
Am the carpenter an iron nail ? — He has six iron nails. — He has
lix good ones, and seven bad ones. — Who has good beef? — Our
cook has some. — Who has five good horses? — Our neighbour has
six. — Has the peasant any corn? — He has some. — Has he any
looking-glasses? — He has not any. — Who has some good friends?
The Turks have some. — Have they any money ? — They have
not any.- — Who has their money? — Their friends have it. — Are
their friends thirsty ? — They are not thirsty, but hungry.— Has
the joiner any bread? — He has not any. — Has your servant a
good coat? — He has one. — Has he this or that coat? — He has
neither this nor that. — Which coat has he ? — He has that which
your servant has. — Have the peasants these or those bags?—
They have neither these nor those. — Which bags have they?
— They have their own. — Have you a good servant? — I have a
good one. — Who has a good chest? — My brother has one. — Hai
he a leathern or a wooden chest ?— He has a wooden one.
THIRTEENTH LESSON.
Lezione Decintaterza.-
Bow much, f How many ?
How much bread 7
How much money 7
How many knives
How many men 7
How many friends
Only, but.
I have but one friend.
1 h*ve but one.
Quanto? Qudntif
Quanto pane 1
Quanto denaro 7
Quanti coltelli 7
Quanti uominll
(AuMiti imici 1
Soltanto.
Solamente
Non — eke.
Non — se non.
Ho soltanto un amlco 1
Ne ho solamente
id
THIRTEENTH LESSON.
( have but one good gun.
I have but one good one.
You have but one good one.
How many horses has your brother 1
He has but one.
He has but two good ones.
Much, a good deal of. very
much.
Many.
Much bread.
A good deal of good bread.
Many men.
Have you much money ?
I nave a good deal.
Have you much good wine 1
I have a good deal.
Too much.
Too many.
V ou have too much wine.
They have too many books.
Enough.
Enough money.
Knives enough.
Little.
A little.
A little cloth.
A little salt.
A few men.
A few friends.
Bui Utile, only a little, not much.
Ho soltanto un buono sctaoppo
Ne ho solamente uno buono.
Ne avete solamente uno buono
Quanti cavali ha vostro fratello"'
N n ne ha che uno.
Non ne ha se non uno.
Non ne ha che due buoni.
Non ne ha se non due buonl
MoltO \
> assai.
Molti )
Molto pane (assai pane).
Molto pane buono.
Molti uomini (assai uomini).
Avete molto denaro?
Ne ho molto.
Ha Ella molto buon vino ? Ha Ells
del vino molto buono.
Ne ho molto.
Troppo.
Troppi.
Avete troppo vino.
Hanno troppi libri.
Abbastanza.
Abbastanza denaro.
Abbastanza coltelli.
{ Poco. Sing.
(Pochi. Plur.
Un poco di (alqu* <o).
Un poco di panno.
Un poco di sale.
Pochi uominL
Pochi amici.
Non — quasi. Non—-che poc*
I Non — molto.
Solamente poco.
, Non — se non poco*
THIRTEENTH LESSON.
41
/Yo< many, but few.
I have but little money.
He has few friends.
Wb have but little gold
Courage.
You have not much courage.
We have few friends.
Have we 7
We have.
We have not.
Some pepper.
Some vinegar.
Have wo any vinegar 7
We have some.
We have not any.
Have you a good deal of money 7
I have but little of it.
irou have but little of it.
He has but little of it.
We have but little of it.
Save you enough wine?
have only a little, but enough
Eight
Nine.
Ten
Eleven
f Non — mold.
\ Non — che pochi.
< Non — se non pochi.
Non ho che poco danaro.
Non ho se non poco danaro
Non ha molti amici.
Ha pochi amici.
Non abbiamo molto oro.
Non abbiamo che poco oro.
Non abbiamo se non poco oro
Coraggio, cuore.
Non avete quasi coraggio.
Non abbiamo quasi amici.
Abbiamo 7 abbiamo noi 7
Abbiamo, noi abbiamo
Non abbiamo.
Pepe.
Aceto.
Abbiamo aceto 7
Ne abbiamo.
Non ne abbiamo.
( Ha Ella molto danaro 7
(. Avete molto denaro 7
( Non ne ho se non poco.
C Non ne ho molto.
Non ne avete se non poco.
Non ne ha molto.
Non ne abbiamo che poco.
Ha Ella abbastanza vino 7
Non ne ho molto, ma abbastansa
Otto.
Nova.
Died.
Undid
And.
E.
18 THIRTEENTH LESSOH
EXERCISES
26.
How many friends have you ? — I have two good friends.— Hai
jou eight good trunks ?— I have nine. — Has your servant thre
coats ? — He has only one good one. — Has the captain two gc
ships ? — He has only one. — How many hammers has the carpen-
ter?— He has but two good ones. — How many boots has the
shoemaker? — He has ten. — Has the young man nine good books ?
— He has only five. — How many guns has your brother ? — He
has only four. — Have you much bread ? — I have a good deal. —
Have the Spaniards much money? — They have but little. — Has
our neighbour much coffee? — He has only a little. — Has the
foreigner much corn? — He has a good deal. — What has the
American? — He has much sugar. — What has the Russian? —
He has a great deal of salt. — Has the peasant much rice ? — He
has not any. — Has he much cheese ? — He has but little. — What
have we ? — We have much bread, much wine, and many books.
Have we much money ? — We have only a little, but enough.—
1 lave you many brothers ? — I have only one. — Hav** the French
many friends? — They have but few. — Has our friei-d much hay?
— He has enough. — Has the Italian much cheese? — He has a
good deal. — Has this man courage? — He has nAoe. — Has the
painter's boy any pencils ? — He has some.
27.
Have you much pepper? — I have but little. — Has the cook
much beef? — He has but little beef, but he hw a good deal of
nutton. — How many oxen has the German? — He has eight. —
How many horses has he ? — He has only four.— Who has a good
many biscuits ? — Our sailors have a good many.- -Have we many
notes ? — We have only a few. — How many notes have we ? — We
have only three pretty ones. — Have you too much butter ? — I have
not enough. — Have our boys too many books? — They have too
many. — Has our friend too much milk ? — He has only a little,
but enough. — Who has a good deal of money ? — The peasants
THIRTEENTH LESSON. 4$>
aave a good deal. — Have they many gloves ? — They have not
any. — Has the cook enough butter ? — He has not enough. — Has
he enough vinegar ? — He has enough.' — Have you much soap ? —
I have only a little. — Has the merchant much cloth ? — He has a
good deal. — Who has a good deal of pepper ? — Our neighboui
has a good deal. — Has our tailor many buttons ? — He has a good
many. — Has the painter many gardens ? — He has not many.—
How many gardens has he ? — He has but two. — How many
knives has the German ? — He has three. — Has the captain any
fine horses ? — He has some fine ones, but his brother has none. —
Have we any jewels ? — We have a good many. — What jewels
have we ? — We have gold jewels. — What candlesticks have our
friends ? — They have silver candlesticks. — Have they gold rib-
bons ? — They have some
28.
Has the youth any good sticks ? — He has no good sticks, but
some beautiful birds. — What chickens has our cook ? — He has
some pretty chickens. — How many has he ? — He has six. — Has the
hatter any hats ?~-He has a good many. — Has the joiner much
wood ? — He has not a great deal, but enough. — Have we the horses
of the French or those of the Germans 1 — We have neither these
no** those. — Which horses have we 1 — We have our own. — Has
the Turk my small combs? — He has them not. — Who has them ?
Your son has them. — Have our friends much sugar ? — They have
little sugar, but much honey. — Who has our looking-glasses ? —
The Italians have them. — Has the Frenchman this or that spoon ?
— He has neither this nor that. — Has he the mattrasses which we
iave? — He has not those which we have, but those which his
friends have. — Is he ashamed ?— He is not ashamed but afraid.
FOURTEENTH LESSON
Lezione Decimaquarta.
A few books.
! Alcuni libri.
Qualche libro.
Ob». A. The noun following qualcht is always used in the singulis
Have you a few books 1 \ Ha EUa alcuni libri 7
( Avete qualche libro ?
A few.
Alcuni (parecchi).
I have a few.
Ne ho alcuni (parecchi).
You have a few.
Ne avete parecchi.
He has a few.
Ne ha alcuni.
r Non ho se non alcuni libri.
1 have but a few books.
< Non ho se non parecchi libit
' Ho soltanto alcuni libri.
You have out a few books.
Avete solamente alcuni libri
He has but a few sous.
Non ha se non alcuni soldi.
I have but a few.
Ne ho soltanto alcuni.
You have but a few.
Ne avete solamente alcuni
He has but a few.
Ne ha soltanto alcuni.
or a sou. Plur. sous.
Un soldo. Plur. soldi.
— a franc. " francs.
Un franco. " franchi.
— a crown. " crowns.
Uno scudo. " scudi.
Other.
Altro.
Another sou.
Un altro soldo.
Some other sous.
Alcuni altri soldi.
Have you another horse?
I have another.
No other horse.
I have no other horse.
I have no other.
Have you any other horses 7
I have some othe-s.
I have no others.
Ha Ella un altro cavallo 1
Ne ho un altro.
Non — altro cavallo.
Non ho altro cavallo.
Non ne ho altro.
Ha F.lla alcuni altri cavalli?
Ne ho degli altri.
Non ne ho altri.
FOURTEENTH LESSON.
5)
The arm.
The heart.
The month.
The volume.
11 braccio (plur. le braccia)
II cuore.
II mese.
II volume.
A hat day of the month is it 1
It la the first.
It is the second.
It is the third.
It is the eleventh
Quanti ne abbiamo del mese 1
A quant i siamo del mese?
E il primo (Ne abbiamo unoV
Siamo al primo.
Ne abbiamo due.
Siamo al (or ai) due.
Ne abbiamo tre.
Siamo al (or ai) tre.
Ob$. B. The cardinal numbers must be used in Italian when speaking of the
lays of the month, though the ordinal are used in English, except il primo, the
Int.1
Ne abbiamo undici.
Siamo all' undici (or agli undici).
Which volume have you *?
I have the fourth.
dual volume ha Ella 1
Ho il quarto.
The first.
— second.
— third.
— fourth.
— fifth.
— sixth.
— seventh.
— eighth.
— ninth.
— tenth.
— eleventh.
— twentieth.
— twenty-first
— twenty-second.
— thirtieth.
— fortieth.
Ac.
Have you the first or second book 7
I have the third.
Which volume have you 7
I have the fifth.
Singular. Plural.
II primo, i primi.
II secondo, i secondi.
II terzo, i terzi.
II quarto, i quarti.
II quinto, i quinti.
11 sesto, i sesti.
II settimo, i settimi.
L' ottavo, gli ottavi.
II nono, i noni.
II decimo, i decimi.
L' undecimo, gli undeciml.
II ventesimo, i ventesimi.
II ventesimo- i ventesimi-
primo. primi.
II ventesimo- i ventesimi-
secondo. secondi.
11 trentesimo, i trentesimi.
II quarantesimo, i quarantesimi
&c.
Ha Ella il primo, o il secondo libra 1
Ho il terzo.
dual volume ha Ella ?
Ho il quinto.
Henceforth the learners should write the date before their task. Ex
bondra, ai (il or al) quindici di Liiglio mille otto cento quaranta quattro. Lon
ton. 15th July, 1844.
fit
FOURTEENTH LESSOR.
The remaining numerals are : —
Twelve,
Thirteen,
Fourteen,
Fifteen,
Sixteen,
Seventeen
Eighteen,
Nineteen,
Twenty.
Twenty-one.
Twenty-two.
Twenty- three,
Thirty.
Forty.
Fifty,
Sixty,
Seventy,
Eighty,
Ninety,
A /r one hundred,
A jr one thousand,
I so hundred,
twelfth,
thirteenth.
fourteenth.
fifteenth.
sixteenth.
seventeenth.
eighteenth.
nineteenth.
twenty-third
fiftieth.
sixtieth.
seventieth.
eightieth.
ninetieth.
hundredth.
thousandth.
tw ) hundredth.
I aree hundred,
Two thousand,
A million,
Two millions.
The last.
A tenth.
A dozen.
A score.
A thirtietn.
three hundredth,
two thousandth,
millionth.
1.
Cardinal Number*
Dodici.
Tredici.
Quattordici.
Quindici.
Sedici.
{ Diecisette, or
I Diciasette.
i Dieciotto, or
I Diciotto.
( Diecinove, or
(. Dicianove.
Venti, <fcc.
Vent' uno, Ac.
Ventidue, Ac.
Ventitre.
2.
, Ordinal Number*
Duodecimo.
( Decimo terzo, oi
I Tredicesimo.
i Decimo quarto, or
( Quattordicesimo
( Decimo quinto, at
I Quindicesimo.
{ Decimo sesto, or
( Sedicesimo.
£ Decimo settimo.
5 Diciasettesimo
i Decimottavo.
Decimo nono.
Ventesimo ten*
Trenta, Ac.
Q.uaranta, &c.
Cinquanta,
Sessanta,
Settanta,
Ottanta,
Novanta,
Cento,
Mille,
Ducento (du-
gento).
Trecento,
Due mila,
Millione,
Due millioni.
L' ultimo.
Una decina or dicina
Una dozzina.
Una ventina.
Una trentina.
Cinquantesimo
Sessantesimo.
Settantesimo.
Ottantesimo.
Novantesimo.
Centesimo.
Millesimo.
Ducentesimo.
Trecentesimo.
Due millesimo.
Millionesimo.
Ob*. C. From the above may De seen that cento is invariable ii the plural
u*d mill* is in the plural changed into mila.
FOURTEENTH LESSON. fit
EXERCISES.
29.
Have you many knives 1 — I have a few. — Have you many
*encilg ? — I have only a few. — Has the painter's friend many
looking-glasses ? — He has only a few. — Has your son a few sous t
—He has a few. — Have you a few francs? — We have a few. —
How many francs have you ? — I have ten. — How many sous hai
the Spaniard ? — He has not many ; he has only five. — Who has
the beautiful glasses of the Italians ? — We have them. — Have the
English many ships? — They have a good many. — Have the
Italians many horses ? — They have not many horses, but a good
many asses. — What have the Germans? — They have many
crowns. — How many crowns have they ? — They have eleven. —
Have we the horses of the English or those of the Germans? —
We have neither the former nor the latter. — Have we the urn-
brellas of the Spaniards? — We have them not, but the Americans
have them. — Have you much butter? — J have only a little, but
enough. — Have the sailors the mattrasses which we have ? — They
have not those which we have, but those which their captain has.
— Has the Frenchman many francs ? — He has only a few, but
he has enough. — Has your servant many sous? — He has no sous,
but francs enough.
30.
Have the Russians pepper ? — They have but little pepper, but
a good deal of salt. — Have the Turks much wine ? — They have
not much wine, but a good deal of coffee. — Who has a good deal
of milk ? — The Germans have a good deal. — Have you no other
gun ? — I have no other. — Have we any other cheese ? — We have
some other. — Have I no other picture ? — You have another. — Has
•ur neighbour no other horse ? — He has no other. — Has your
orother no other friends ? — He has some others. — Have the shoe,
makers no other boots ? — They have no others. — Have the tailors
many coats ? — They have only a few ; they have only four. —
How many gloves have you ? — I have only two. — Have you any
other biscuits ? — I have no other. — How many corkscrews has
the merchant ? — He has nine. — How many arms has this man t
54
FOURTEENTH LESSON.
— He has only one ; the other is of wood. — What heart has youi
son ? — He has a good heart. — Have you no other sen ant ?■
I have another. — Has your friend no other birds? — He has soi
others. — How many other birds has he ? — He has six others.-
How many gardens have you ? — I have only one, but my friew
has two of them.
81.
Which volume have you ? — I have the first. — Have you thi
second volume of my book ? — I have it. — Have you the third 01
fourth book? — I have neither the former nor the latter. — Have
we the fifth or sixth volumes ? — We have the fifth, but we hav(
not the sixth volumes. — Which volumes has your friend? — H(
has the seventh volumes. — What day of the month is it ? — It
the eighth. — Is it not the eleventh ? — No, Sir, it is the tenth.-
Who has our crowns ? — The Russians have them. — Have thei
our gold ? — They have it not. — Has the youth much money ?-
He has not much money, but much courage. — Have you th«
nails of the carpenters or those of the joiners ? — I lave neithei
those of the carpenters nor those of the joiners, but those of mi
merchants. — Have you this or that glove ? — I have neither this
nor that. — Has your friend these or those notes ? — He has thes<
but not those. — Has the Italian a few crowns ? — He has a few.-
Has he a few francs ? — He has five. — Have you another stick
I have another. — What other stick have you? — I have anothei
iron stick. — Have you a few good candlesticks? — We have
few. — Has your boy another hat ? — He has another.- -Have thes
men any vinegar ? — These men have none, but their friends have
some. — Have the peasants any other bags ? — Th :y have
others. — Have they any other bread ? — They have t me
FIFTEENTH LESSON.
Lezione Decimaquinta.
The tome (the volume).
Have you the first or second volume
of my book ?
Both\
I have both.
Have you my book or my stick ?
I have neither the one nor the other.
The one and the other (plural).
Has your brother my gloves or his
own?
He has both yours and his.
Has he my books or those of the
Spaniards?
He has neither tne one nor the other.
The Scotchman.
The Irishman.
The Dutchman.
Stillt yet j some or any more.
Some more wine.
Some more money.
Some more buttons.
Have you any more wine ?
t hava some more wine.
I have some more.
Has he any more money ?
He has some more.
Have I any more books ?
Vou have some more.
II tomo (il volume).
Ha Ella il primo, o 1 aecondo t>nw
del mio libro 1
L' uno e V altro (ambidue), or
simply ambo.
Ho 1' uno e 1' altro. Ho ambldue.
Ha Ella il mio libro, o il mio baa
tone?
Non ho n£ 1' uno ne* 1* altro.
Gli uni e gli altri.
Ha il di Lei fratello i miei guanti, •
i suoi ?
Egli ha gli uni e gli altri.
Ha egli i miei libri, o quelh degli
Spagnuoli ?
Non na gli uni ne* gli altri.
I Lo Scozzese.
L' Irlandese.
L' Olandese.
Ancora, i
\Anche, )&*&
> Anco (per anco).
Ancora vino.
Ancora del vino (see note 1. Leaaoi
XI).
Ancoro danaro.
Ancora del danaro.
Ancora bottoni.
Ancora dei bottoni.
Ha Ella ancora vino ?
Ho ancora vino
Ne ho ancora.
Ha egli ancora danaro*
Ne ha ancora.
Ho ancora libri ?
Ella ne ha ancora
>6
FIFTEENTH LESSON.
Not any more, no more,
I have no more bread.
He has no more money.
Have you any more butter 7
I have no more.
We have no more.
Has he any more vinegar 1
He has no more.
We have no more books.
We have no more.
He has no more dogs.
He has no more.
Not much more, not many more.
Have you much more wine 7
I have not much more.
Have you many more books 7
[ have not many more.
Non — piu.
Non ho piu pane.
Non ha piu danaro.
Ha Ella ancora del burro 1
Non ne ho pm.
Non ne abbiamo pia.
Ha egli ancora aceto ?
Non ne ha piu.
Non abbiamo piu UbrL
Non ne abbiamo piu.
Non ha piil cani.
Non ne ha piu.
( Non — fiu molto.
( Non — fiu moUi.
Ha Ella ancora molto vino 1
Non ne ho piu molto.
Ha Ella ancora molti libri*
Non ne ho piu molti.
One book more.
One good book more.
A few books more.
Have you a few francs more 7
I have a few more.
Have I a few more sous?
Vou have a few more.
We have a few more.
They have a few more.
Ancora un libro.
Ancora un buon libro.
Ancora alcuni libri (qualche libro).
Ha Ella ancora alcuni franchi (qua*
che franco) 7
Ne ho ancora alcuni.
Ho ancora alcuni soldi 7
Ella ne ha ancora alcuni.
Ne abbiamo ancora alcuni.
Ne hanno ancora alcuni.
EXERCISES.
32.
Which volume of his book have you ? — I have the first. — How
many volumes has this book ? — It has two. — Have you my book
or my brother's ? — I have both. — Has the foreigner my comb or
my knife ? — He has both. — -Have you my bread or my cheese ?
I have neither the one nor the other. — Has the Dutchman my
glass or that of my friend 1 — He has neither the one nor the
other. — Has the Irishman our horses or our chests? — He has
both. — Has the Scotchman our boots or our waistcoats ? — He has
aeither the one nor the other. — What has he ? — He has his good
iron guns —Have the Dutch our ships or those of the Spaniards J
FIFTEENTH LESSON to
—They have neither the one nor the other. — Which ships have
they ? — They have taeir own. — Have we any more hay ? — We
'lave some more. — Has our merchant any more pepper ? — He has
some more. — Has our friend any more money ? — He has not any
more. — Has he any more jewels? — He has some more. — Have
you any more coffee ? — We have no more coffee, but we have
nme more tea. — Has the Dutchman any more salt ? — He has nc
more salt, but he has some more butter. — Has the painter anv
more pictures ? — He has no more pictures, bu.. he has some more
pencils. — Have the sailors any more biscuits ? — They have not
any more. — Have your sons any more books ? — They have not
any more. — Has the young man any more friends ? — He has no
more.
33.
Has our cook much more beef? — He has not much more. —
Has he many more chickens ? — He has not many more. — Ha*
the peasant much more milk? — He has not much more milk, but
he has a great deal more butter. — Have the French many more
horses? — They have not many more. — Have you much more
jil ? — I have much more. — Have we many more looking-glasses*
We have many more. — Have you one book more ? — I imve on
more. — Have our neighbours one more garden ? — They have one
more. — Has our friend one umbrella more ? — He has no more. —
Have the Scotch a few more books ? — They have a few more. —
Has the tailor a few more buttons ? — He has not any more. — Has
our carpenter a few more nails ? — He has no more nails, but he
has a few more sticks. — Have the Spaniards a few more sous ? —
They have a few more. — Has the German a few more oxen ? —
He has a few more. — Have you a few more francs ? — I have no
more francs, but I have a few more crowns. — What more have
you ? — We have a few more ships, and a few more good sailors.
—Have I a little more money ? — You have a little more. — Have
you any more courage ? — I have no more. — Have you much more
vinegar ? — I have not much more, but my brother has a great
deal more.
34.
Has he sugar enough ? — He has not enough. — Have we franca
•nough ? — We have not enough. — Has the joiner wood enough 1
58
SIXTEENTH LESSON.
—He has enough. — Has he hammeas enough ? — He has enouj
— What hammers has he ? — He has iron and wooden hammers
— Have you rice enough ? — We have not rice enough, but w«
have sugar enough. — Have you many more gloves ? — I have not
many more. — Has the Russian another ship ? — He has another.
-—Has he another bag ? — He has no other. — What day of the
month is it ? — It is the sixth. — How many friends have you ? — I
have but one good friend. — Has the. peasant too much bread ? —
He has not enough. — Has he much money ? — He has but little
money, but enough hay. — Have we the cotton or the thread ^oats
of the Americans ? — We have neither their cotton nor their thread
coats. — Have we the gardens which they have? — We have not
those which they have, but those which our neighbours have. —
Have you any more honey ? — I have no more. — Have yor anv
more oxen ? — I have not any more.
SIXTEENTH LESSON.
Lezime Decimasesta.
Several.
Several men.
Several children
Several knives.
The father.
The child.
The ink.
The inkstand.
The cloak
The cake (the pastry the pie).
The small cake.
The macaroni.
The pastry-cook.
Petty-patties.
1 Diversi (molti, parecchi)
Varii.
Diversi uomini.
Diversi fanciulli (bambini).
Varii coltelli.
II padre.
II fanciulio (il bambino).
L' inchiostro.
II calamaio.
II mantello (il pastranoX
II pasticcio.
II pasticcino.
I maccheroni.
II pasticciere.
Pasticclnl.
SIXTEENTH LESSON.
M
As much.
As many.
As much — as.
As many— as.
As much bread aa wine.
As many men aa children.
Tanto.,
Tanti.
Tanto- ( qUanU)) plur< ^,Wti'
Tanti- ) Che'
v come.
Tanto paae quanto vino (che or
come vino).
Tanti uomini quanti fanciulli (coma
or che fanciulli).
Have you as much gold as silver ?
I have as much of this as of that, j
I have as much of the latter as of >
the former. 3
I have as much of the one as of the
other.
Have you as many boots as handker-
chiefs ?
I have as many of these as of those. ^
I have as many of the former as of >
the latter. )
I have as many of the one as of the
other.
Quite (or just), as much, as
many.
1 . have quite as much of this as of
that.
Ctuite as much of the one as of the
other.
Quite as much of these as of those.
Quite as many of the one aa of the
other.
An enemy, enemies.
My dear friend.
Dear.
The heart.
Ha Ella tanto oro quanto argentol
Ho tanto di questo quanto di quelle
Ho tanto dell' uno quanto del-
l'altro.
Ha Ella tanti stivali quanti fazzo-
lettn
Ho tanto di questi quanto di quelli.
Ho tanto degli uni quanto degli
altri.
Altrettanto, altrettanti.
Ho altrettanto di questo quanti di
quelle
Altrettanto dell' uno quanto del-
V altro.
Altrettanto di questi quanto di
quelli.
Altrettanto degli uni quanti degli
altri.
Un nemlco, nemici.
Mio caro amico (vocative).
Caro.
II cuore.
Obs. A. Words in the singular, having one of the liquid consonants, i, m,
*, r, before their final vowel, may lose it (except before words beginning with
1 Though che and come are sometimes used as the correlatives of tanto, It is
only tolerated, and none of the great writers, or indeed no Italians who speak
their language sorrectly, use any thiig but auanto, quanti, as the correlatives of
90
SIXTEENTH LESSON.
t followed by a consonant). The vowels after I and r, however, are oftena
dropped than those after m and n.
The linen thread. l\JU di lino (instead oiJUa).
The faithful heart.
Your welfare.
My opinion.
II cuor (or cor) fedele (instead of
cuore or core).
II ben vostro (instead of bent),
llparer mio (instead ofpartre.1)
More (a comparative adverb).
More bread.
More men.
Than.
More bread than wine. .
More knives than sticks.
More of this than of that.
More of the one than of the other.
More of these than of those.
More of the ones than of the others,
f have more of your sugar than of
mine.
He has more of our books than of his
own.
Piu,
Piu pane.
Piu uominL
Che.
Piu pane che vino.
Piu coltelh che bastoni.
Piu di questo che di quello.
Piu dell' uno che dell' altro.
Piii di questi che di quelli.
Piu degli uni che degli altri.
Ho pi u del vostro zucchero che del
mio.
Egli ha piu dei nostri libri che dd
suoi.
Obt. B. Quanto, che, and come, are employed for the comparative <M
equality, but che only for the comparative of superiority and minority.
Less j fewer.
Less wine than bread.
Less knives than sticks.
Meno.
Meno vino che pane.
Meno coltelli che bastoni.
Less than I. | Meno di me.
Ob*. C. After meno than is rendered by di before a pronoun. Ex.
Less than he.
Less than we.
Less than you.
Less than they.
They.
As they.
Than they.
As much as you.
As much as he.
As much as they.
Meno di lui.
Meno di noi.
Meno di voi (di Lei).
Meno di loro.
Loro.
Quanto loro.
Di loro.
Che loro.
Tanto quanto Lei, Ella, voi (Loro)
Tanto quanto lui.
Tanto quanto loro.
1 But as soon as the word following begins with » followed by a consonant,
mere is no elision. We say : il sole splcndente, the splendid sun ; un bme ttra-
trdinaria, an extraordinary benefit ; un parerc strano, a strange opinion, and
Mttitol tplendentc, un ben ttraordinario, un parer atrano.
SIXTEENTH LESSON. Oi
EXERCISES.
35.
Have you a horse ? — I have several. — Has he several coats !
—He has only one. — Who has several looking-glasses ? — My
brother has several. — What looking-glasses has he ? — He has
beautiful looking-glasses. — Who has good petty-patties ? — Several
pastry-cooks have some. — Has your brother a child ? — He hat
several . — Have you as much coffee as tea ? — I have as much of
the one as of the other. — Has this man a son ? — He has several.
—How many sons has he ? — He has four. — How many children
have our friends? — They have many: they have ten. — Have we
as much bread as butter ? — You have as much of the one as of
the other. — Has this man as many friends as enemies ? — He has
as many of the one as of the other. — Have we as many spoons as
knives ? — We have as many of the one as of the other. — Has
your father as much gold as silver ? — He has more of the latter
than of the former. — Has the captain as many sailors as ships ?
— He has more of the latter than of the former. — He has more of
the one than of the other.
36.
Have you as many guns as I ? — I have as many. — Has the
foreigner as much courage as we ? — He has quite as much.—
Have we as much good as bad coffee ? — We have as much of the
one as of the other. — Have our neighbours as much cheese as
milk ? — They have more of the latter than of the former. — Have
your sons as many petty-patties as books ? — They have more ol
the latter than of the former ; more of the one than of the other.
— How many noses has the man ? — He has but one. — How many
feet has he ? — He has several. — How many cloaks have you ?—
I have but one, but my father has more than 1 ; he has five. —
Have my children as much courage as yours? — Yours have
more than mine. — Have I as much money as you ? — You have
less than I. — Have you as many books as I ? — I have less than
you.— Have I as many enemies as your father ? — You have fewer
than he. — Have the Russians as many children as we ? — We
have fewer than they. — Have the French as many ships as we t
62 SIXTEENTH LESSON.
They have fewer than we. — Have we as many jewels as they 1
— We have fewer than they. — Have we fewer clothes than the
children of our friends ? — We have fewer than they.
37.
Who has fewer friends than we ? — Nobody has fewer — Have
you as much of your wine as of mine ? — I have as much of yours
as of mine. — Have I as many of your books as of mine ? — You
have fewer of mine than of yours. — Has the Turk as much of
your money as of his own ? — He has less of his own than of ours.
— Has your baker less bread than money ? — He has less of the
latter than of the former. — Has our merchant fewer dogs than
horses ? — He has fewer of the latter than of the former ; fewer
of the one than of the other. — Have your servants more sticks
than spoons ? — They have more of the latter than of the former.
— Has our cook as much butter as beef? — He has as much of the
one as of the other. — Has he as many chickens as birds ? — He
has more of the latter than of the former.
38.
Has the carpenter as many sticks as nails ? — He has as many
of these as of those. — Have you more biscuits than glasses ? — I
have more of the latter than of the former. — Has our friend more
sugar than money ? — He has not so much of the latter as of the
former. — Has he more gloves than umbrellas ? — He has not so
many of the latter as of the former. — Who has more soap than I ?
— My son has more. — Who has more pencils than he ? — The
painter has more. — Has he as many horses as I ? — He has not so
many horses as you, but he has more pictures. — Has the mer-
chant fewer oxen than we ? — He has fewer oxen than we, and we
have less corn than he. — Have you another note ? — I have ano-
ther.— Has your son one more inkstand ? — He has several more.
— Have the Dutch as many gardens as we ? — We have fewer
than they. — We have less bread and less butter than they. — We
h*v3 but little money, but enough bread, beef, cheese, and wine.
— Have you as much courage as our neighbour's son ? — I have
just as much. — Has the youth as manv notes as we ? — He bat
iust as many.
SEVENTEENTH LESSON
Lezione Decimasettima.
OF THE INFINITIVE.
There are in Italian three Conjugations, which are distinguished by the terai
nation of the Present of the Infinitive, viz.
1. The first has its infinitive terminated in abb, as :—
parlare, to speak ;
comprare, to buy :
tagliare, to cut.
2. The second in ere, as : —
temere, to fear ;
perdere, to lose ;
credere, to believe.
3. The third in ibb, as :—
sen tire, to feel ;
fintre, to finish ;
udire, to hear.
Each verb we shall give hereafter will have the number of the class to
which it belongs marked after it. The verbs marked with an asterisk (*) are
irregular.
Pear.
Shame.
Wrong.
Right.
Time.
Courage.
A mind, a wis'i.
To work.
To speak.
Have you a mind to work 7
» have a mind to work.
He has not the courage to speak.
Paura, timore.
Vergogna.
Torto.
Ragione, diritto.
Tempo.
Coraggio.
Desiderio or voglia.
All these words re-
quire the prepo-
sition di, of, after
them, when fol-
lowed by any in-
finitive verb. Ex.
Are you at raid to speak 7
( am ashamed to speak.
To cut.
To cut it
Lavoraxe 1.
Parlare 1 .
Ha Ella desiderio o voglia di live
rare?
Ho desiderio o voglia di lavorare.
Egli non ha coraggio di parlare
Ha Ella paura di parlare 7
Ho vergogna di parlare.
Tagliare 1.
Tagliarie,
54
SEVENTEENTH LESSON.
in if
Obt. In Italian, as in English, the accusative of the personal pronouns
.he relative ne are placed after the Infinitive ; but in Italian the pronoun
joined to the verb in the Infinitive (which loses its final vowel), the present par
ticiple, and in the imperative (of which more hereafter). Ex.
To cut them. i Tagliar/t.
To cut some. I Tagliarn*.
Have you time to cut the bread 7
( have time to cut it.
Has he a mind to cut trees ?
Be has a mind to cut some.
To buy.
To buy some more.
To buy one.
To buy two.
To buy one more.
To buy two more.
To break.
To pick up.
To mend, to repair.
To look for, to seek.
Have you a mind to buy one more
horse 7
I have a mind to buy one more.
Have you a mind to buy some books 7
T have a mind to ouy some, but I have
no money.
Are you afraid to break the glasses 7
I am afraid to break them.
Has he time to work 7
He has time, but no mind to work.
am I right in buymg a horse 7
fom are not wrong in buying one.
Ha Ella tempo di tagliare il pane 7
Ho tempo di. tagliarfo.
Ha egli desiderio di tagliare alberil
Ha desiderio di tagliarn*.
Comprare (camperare) 1.
Comprarn* ancora.
Compraroa uno.
Comprarne due.
Comprarm ancora uno.
Comprarn« ancora due
Rompere* 2.
Raccorre* (raccogliere*) 2.
Raccattare 1.
Accommodare 1.
Raccommodare 1.
Assettare 1.
Cercare 1.
Ha Ella desiderio di comprare i
cora un cavallo 7
Ho desiderio di comprarne ancora
uno.
Ha Ella desiderio di comprare libri 7
Ho desiderio di compranw, ma non
ho danaro.
Ha Ella paura di rompere i bio-
chieri 7
Ho paura di romper/*.
Ha egli tempo di lavorare 7
Ha tempo, ma non ha voglia dJ
lavorare.
Ho io ragione di comprare un cm*
v alio 7
Ella non ha torto di compranu
SEVENTEENTH LESSON. 05
EXERCISES.
39.
Have you still a mind to buy my friend's horse ? — I have still
t mind to buy it, but I have no more money. — Have you time to
work ? — I have time, but no mind to work. — Has your brother
time to cut some sticks ? — He has time to cut some. — Has he a
mind to cut some bread 1 — He has a mind to cut some, but he
has no knife. — Have you time to cut some cheese ? — I have time
to cut some. — Has he a desire to cut the tree ? — He has a desire
to cut it, but he has no time. — Has the tailor time to cut the
cloth ? — He has time to cut it. — Have I time to cut the trees ? —
You have time to cut them. — Has the painter a mind to buy a
norse ? — He has a mind to buy two. — Has your captain time to
speak ? — He has time, but no desire to speak. — Are you afraid
to speak 1 — 1 am not afraid, but I am ashamed to speak. — Am 1
right in buying a gun ? — You are right in buying one. — Is your
friend right in buying a great ox ? — He is wrong in buying one.
—Am I right in buying little oxen ' — You are right in buying
some.
40.
Have you a desire to speak ? — I have a desire, but I have not
the courage to speak. — Have you the courage to cut your arm ?
— I have not the courage to cut it. — Am I right in speaking ? —
You are not wrong in speaking, but you are wrong in cutting my
trees. — Has the son of your friend a desire to buy one more bird ?
— He has a desire to buy one more. — Have you a desire to buy
a few more horses ? — We have a desire to buy a few more, but
we have no more money. — What has our tailor a mind to mend ?
— He has a mind to mend our old clothes. — Has the shoemaker
.ime to mend our boots ? — He has time, but he has no mind to
mend them. — Who has a mind to mend our hats ? — The hatter
has a mind to mend them. — Are you afraid to look for my horse t
— I am not afraid, but I have no time to look for it. — What have
you a mind to buy ? — We have a mind to buy something good,
and our neighbours have a mind to buy something beautiful.—
a\re their children afraid to pick up some nails 1 — They are not
60 SEVENTEENTH LESSON.
afraid to pick up some. — Have you a mind to break my jew«
' — I have a mind to pick it up, but not to break it. — Am I wroi
in picking up your gloves ? — You are not wrong in picking thei
up, but you are wrong in cutting them.
41.
Have you the courage to break these glasses ? — I have
courage, but I have no mind to break them. — Who has a mind to
Dreak our looking-glass ? — Our enemy has a mind to break it. —
Have the foreigners a mind to break our guns ? — They have
mind, but they have not the courage to break them. — Have yo
a mind to break the captain's ship ? — I have a mind, but I am
afraid to break it. — Who has a mind to buy my beautiful dog
— Nobody has a mind to buy it. — Have you a desire to buy m
beautiful trunks, or those of the Frenchman? — 1 have a desire
buy yours, and not those of the Frenchman. — Which books h
the Englishman a mind to buy ? — He has a mind to buy th
which you have, that which your son has, and that which min
has. — Which gloves have you a mind to seek ? — I have a min
to seek yours, mine, and our children's.
42.
Which l«oking-glasses have the enemies a desire to break ?-
They have a desire to break those which you have, those whicl
f have, and those which our children and our friends have. — Hi
your father a desire to buy these or those petty-patties ? — He hi
a mind to buy these. — Am I right in picking up your notes ?-
You are right in picking them up. — Is the Italian right in seekii
your handkerchief? — He is wrong in seeking it. — Have you
mind to buy another ship ? — I have a mind to buy another. — Ht
our enemy a mind to buy one ship more ? — He has a mind to buj
•evera. more, but he is afraid to buy some. — Have you tw«
horpeg ? — I have only one, but I have a wish to buy one more.
:
EIGHTEENTH LESSON
Lezione Decimaottava.
To make.
To do.
To be willing.
To wish.
Fare* 1.
i Volere* 2. (desiderate 1.)
Will you 1
Are you willing 1
Do you wish 1
I will, I am willing, I wish.
Will he? is he willing? does he wish?
He will, he is willing, he wishes.
We will, we are willing, we wish.
You will, you are willing, you wish.
Vuol Ella 1 (Voletel
Voglio (or vo')
Vuol egli ?
Egli vuole.
Vogliamo.
Volete.
They will, they are willing, they wish. J Vogliono.
Thou wilt, thou art willing, thou
wishest.
Do you wish to make my fire 1
I am willing to make it.
I do not wish to make it.
Does he wish to buy your horse 1
He wishes to buy it.
He does not wish to buy t
To burn.
To warm.
To tear.
The broth.
My bed.
Vuoi.
Vuol Ella fare il mlo fuoco?
Voglio farfo.
Non voglio iwclo.
Vuol egli comprare il di Lei cavalk 1
Egli vuol comprarfo.
Egli non vuol comprarfa.
Bruclare 1.
Abbruciare 1.
Scaldare 1.
Riscaldare 1.
Stracciare 1.
II brodo.
U mio letto.
EIGHTEENTH LESSOR.
Togo.
With or at the house of.
To or to the house of.
To be.
To be with the man or at the man'*
house.
To go to the man or to the man's
house.
To be with his (one's) friend, or at his
(one's) friend's house.
To go to my father, or to my father's
house.
Andare* 1.
/ In casa di, or da.
Essere* 2.
{ Essere in casa dell' uomo.
I Essere dall' uomo.
{ Andare in casa dell' uomo.
I Andare dall' uomo.
( Essere in casa del suo ami a.
I Essere dal suo amico.
c Andare da mio padre.
I Andare in casa di mio padrt
At home.
To be at home.
To go home.
!In casa.
In casa sua.
Essere in casa.
Andare a casa.
To be with me,
To go to me,
To be with him, her,
To go to him, her,
To be with us,
To go to us,
To be with you,
To go to you,
or at my house.
— to my house.
— at his house.
— to his house.
— at our house.
— to our house.
— at your house.
— to your house.
> d<t i**
i da Ink, it ref
S (fern )
I da nui.*
— at their house.
— to their house.
To be with them,
To go to them,
To be with some one, — at some one's !
house.
To go to some one, — to some one's
nouse.
To be with no one, — at no one's
house.
da loro.
To go to no one,
house.
— to no one's Non andare
Essere in casa mia
Andare a casa mia
Essere in casa sua
Andare a casa sua
Essere in casa nostra
Andare a casa nostra
tt„„o > in casa sua, di Lei ^
■»*»*}„ « vostra, di vo* I da Lei
Andare I a casa 8Ua> di Lel f da ™
> " " vostra, di voi J
Essere in casa loro
Andare a casa loro
d' uno.
di qualcuno
Andare a casa \
? di qualcuno.
( in casa di nessuno.
da nessuno.
in casa di alcuno.
da alcuno.
a casa di nessuno.
da alcuno.
a casa di alcuno.
Essere in casa
Non essere.
- ) We cannot say in Italian da me, da noi, whei we speak of ourselves.
« ) Ex. Voglio andare a casa mia (not da me), I wish to go home. But : Mu
frateUo vuol venire da me, My brother wishes to come to me ; Vogliamo andart
• ca»a nostra (not da nti), We will go home. But : Vogliono, i Signori, renin
ia tun? Gentlemen, will you come to us 1
EIGHTEENTH LESSON.
6*
dt whose house ? With whom ?
To whose house ? To whom f
To whom (or to whose house) do you
wish to go ?
i wish to go to no one (to no one's
house).
At whose house (with whom) is your
brotner 7
He is at ours (with us).
Ik he at home 7
He is not at home.
Are you 7
Tired.
Are you tired 7
t am tired.
I am not tired.
Is he?
He is.
We are.
You are.
They are.
Thou art.
To drink.
Where ?
What do you wish to do 1
What does your brother wish to do 1
( Da chi ? in casa di chit
Da chi vuol Ella andare 1
Non voglio andare a casa di nesauao.
Da chi d il di Lei frateUo?
Egli d in casa nostra.
Eegli in casa 7
Non 3 in casa.
E Ella 7 (Siete voi 7)
Stanco, lasso.
E Ella stanca 7 (Siete lasso 7)
Sono stanco.
Non s«no stanco.
E egli 7
Egli e\
Noi siamo.
Voi siete.
Eglino o elleno sono.
Sei.
Bere* or bevere* 2.
Dove ? ove ? onde ? donde t
Che vuol Ella fare 7 o che volete roi
fare 7
Che vuol fare il di Lei o suo fratello 7
Is your father at home 7
What will the Germans buy ?
They will buy something good
Tney will buy nothing.
Do they wish to buy a book 7
They wish to buy one.
Po you wish to drink any thing 7
do not wish to drink any thing.
E in casa vostro padre?
Che vogliono comprare i Tedeschi 7
Vogliono comprare qualche cosa di
buono.
Non vogliono comprare niente.
Vogliono eglino comprare un libro 1
Vogliono comprame uno.
Vuol Ella bere qualche cosa?
Nod voglio bever niente.
70 EIGHTEENTH LESSON.
EXERCISES.
43.
Do you wish to work ? — I am willing to work, but I am tired
—Do you wish to break my glasses ? — I do not wish to breai
them — Are you willing to look for my son ? — I am willing to look
for him. — What do you wish to pick up ? — I wish to pick jp thai
crown and that franc. — Do you wish to pick up this or that sou ?
—I wish to pick up both. — Does your neighbour wish to buy
these or those combs ? — He wishes *o buy both these and those.
— Does that man wish to cut your foot ? — He does not wish to
cut mine, but his own. — Does the painter wish to burn some oil ?
— He wishes to burn some. — What does the shoemaker wish to
mend ? — He wishes to mend our old boots. — Does the tailor wish
to mend any thing ?— He wishes to mend some waistcoats, — Is
our enemy willing to burn his ship ? — He is not willing to burn
his own, but ours. — Do you wish to do any thing ? — I do not wi
to do any thing. — What do you wish to do ? — We wish to wa
our tea and our father's coffee. — Do you wish to warm
brother's broth 1 — I am willing to warm it. — Is your servant wi'
ing to make my fire ? — He is willing to make it, but he has no
time.
44.
Do you wish to speak ? — I do wish to speak. — Is your son will,
ing to study ? — He is not willing to study. — What does he wisk
to do ? — He wishes to drink some wine. — Do you wish to buy any
thing ? — I wish to buy something. — What do you wish to buy ? —
I wish to buy some jewels. — Are you willing to mend my hand,
kerchief? — I am willing to mend it. — Who will mend our son's
clothes ? — We will mend them. — Does the Russian wish to buy
this or that picture ? — He will buy neither this nor that. — What
does he wish to buy ? — He wishes to buy som t ships. — Which
looking-glasses does the Englishman wish to buy ? — He wishes to
buy those which the French have, and those which the Italians
have. — Does your father wish to look for his umbrella or for his
stick ? — He wishes to look for both. — Do you wish to drink some
wine ? — I wish to drink some, but I have not any. — Does the
wilor wish to drink some milk ? — He does not wish to drink any ;
lrn
1
EIGHTEENTH LESSON. 71
he is not thirsty. — What does the captain wish to drink ? — He
does not wish to drink any thing. — What does the hatter wish to
make ? — He wishes to make some hats. — Does the carpenter wish
to make any thing ?— ^He wishes to make a large ship. — Do you
wish to buy a bird ? — I wish to buy several.
45.
Does the Turk wish to buy more guns than knives ? — He wishes
to buy more of the latter than of the former. — How many cork-
screws does your servant wish to buy ? — He wishes to buy three.
— Do you wish to buy many corks ? — We wish to buy only a
few, but our children wish to buy a good many. — Will your
children seek the gloves that we have ? — They will not seek those
that you have, but those which my father has. — Does any one
wish to tear your coat ? — No one wishes to tear it. — Who wishes
to tear my books ? — Your children wish to tear them. — With
whom is our father ? — He is at his friend's. — To whom do you
wish to go ? — I wish to go to you. — Will you go to my house? —
I will not go to yours, but to my brother's. — Does your father
wish to go to his friend's ? — He does not wish to go to his friend's,
but to his neighbour's. — At whose house is your son ? — He is at
our house. — Will you look for our hats, or for those of the Dutch?
— I will look for neither yours, nor for those of the Dutch, but I
will look for mine and for those of my good friends.
46.
Am I right in warming your broth ? — You are right in warm-
ing it. — Is my servant right in warming your bed ? — He is wrong
in warming it. — Is he afraid to tear your coat ? — He is not afraid
to tear it, but to burn it. — Do your children wish to go to our
friends ? — They do not wish to go to your friends, but to ours. —
Are your children at home ? — They are not at home, but at their
neighbours'. — Is the captain at home ? — He is not at home, but
at his brothers'. — Is the foreigner at our brother's? — He is not at
our brother's, but at our father's. — At whose house is the English-
man?— He is at yours. — Is the American at our house ? — He is
not at our house, but at his friend's. — With whom is the Italian ?
—He is with nobody ; he is at home. — Do you wish to go home ?
—I do not wish to go home ; I wish to go to the son of my neigh.
73
NINETEENTH LESSON.
bour. — Is your father at home ? — No, Sir, he is not at home.—
With whom is he ? — He is with the good friends of our old
neighbour. — Will you go to any one's house ? — I will go to no
one's house.
47.
Where is your son ? — He is at home. — What will he do at
home ? — He wishes to drink some good wine. — Is your brot
at home ? — He is not at home ; he is at the foreigner's. — Wha
do you wish to drink ? — I wish to drink some milk. — What will
the German do at home ? — He will work, and drink some good
wine. — What have you at home ? — I have nothing at home. — Has
the merchant a desire to buy as much sugar as tea 1 — He wishes
to buy as much of the one as of the other. — Are you tired ? — I
am not tired. — Who is tired ? — My brother is tired. — Has the
Spaniard a mind to buy as many horses as asses ? — He wishes
to buy more of the latter than of the former. — Do you wish to
drink any thing ? — I do not wish to drink any thing. — How many
chickens does the cook wish to buy ? — He wishes to buy four.
Do the French wish to buy any thing ? — They do not wish to buj
any thing. — Does the Spaniard wish to buy any thing ? — H
wishes to buy something, but he has no money. — Do you wish to
go (venire) to our brothers' ? — I do not wish to go to their house,
but to their children's. — Is the Scotchman at any body's house \
—He is at nobody's. — Where is he ? — He is at his own house.
NINETEENTH LESSON.
Lezione decimanona.
Where? Whither? Where to?
There or thither, to it, at it, in it.
To go thither.
Ove? Dove?
Onde? Donde?
Vi or ci. l
Andarvi, andarct, o andan &
i When not united to the verb, there is expressed by tri, /£, R.
NINETEENTH LESSON.
13
(Mm. The relati re or local adven>* ci and vi are joined to the verb which loeet
i* final vowel.
To be there.
It to it, it there or thither.
Them there, or thither.
To take, to carry.
To send.
To lead, to take.
To conduct.
Tb take it there, or thither.
Him there, or thither.
To send him thither.
To take him thither.
Them there, or thither.
Some of it there, or thither.
To carry them thither
To carry some thither
WW you send him to my fatner?
will tend aim thither, or to him ?
The physician.
To come.
Esservi, esserci, od essere Id.
Ce lo, ve lo.
Ce U, ve U.
Portare 1.
Inviare 1. Mandare 1. Spe
dire 3.
Menare 1.
Cordurre * 2.
SPortarcelo.
Portarvelo.
Him (object of the verb). Lo or V.
Them ( — ). Li or gH.
Ce lo, ve lo.
Inviarcelo.
Inviarvelo-
( Menarvelo.
c Condurrelo.
Ce h (or gH). Ve U (or gli).
Vene, cene.
Portarceli, portarveli.
Portarcene, portarvene.
r Vuol Ella inviarlo a casa di mil
< padre 1
' Vuol Ella mandarlo da o a mio padre *
r Voglio inviarvelo.
J Voglio inviarcelo.
i Voglio mandarvelo.
*• Voglio mandarcelo
II medico.
Venire* 8.
74
When!
To-morrow.
To-day.
NINETEENTH LESSON.
Q,uando1
Domani.
Oggi.
Some where or whither, any where
or whither.
iVo where, not any where.
Do you wish to go any where 1
I wish to go some where.
I do not wish to go any where.
In qualche luogo.
In nessun luogo.
Vuol Ella andare in qualche luogo 1
Voglio andare in qualche luogo.
Non voglio andare in nessun luogo
To write.
Scrivere* 2.
At what o'clock 1
A che ora ?
At one 6' clock.
Al tocco. A un' ora.
At two o'clock.
Alle due. A due ore.
Half.
The quarter.
At half-past one.
At a quarter past one.
At a quarter past two.
At a quarter to one.
At twelve o'clock.
At twelve o'clock at night (midnight).
Leae
Mezzo ; feminine, Mezza.
II quarto.
Al tocco e mezzo.
All' una e mezzo.
Al tocco e un quarto.
AH' una e un quarto.
Alle due e un quarto.
Al tocco meno un quarto.
AH' una meno un quarto.
A mezzo giorno. Al meriggio
mezzodi.
A mezza notte.
Meno.
EXERCISES.
48.
Do we wish to go home ? — I wish to go thither. — Does youi
son wish to go to my house ? — He wishes to go there. — Is your
brother at home ? — He is there (Egli c' e or egli v* e). — Whither
do you wish to go ? — I wish to go home. — Do your children wish
to go to my house ? — They do not wish to go there. — To whom
will you take that note ? — I will take it to my neighbour. — Will
your servant take my note to your father's? — He will take it
there. — Will your brother carry my guns to the Russian's ? —
He will carry them thither. — To whom do our enemies wish to
oarry our guns? — They wish to carry them to the Turks —
NINETEENTH LESSON. 76
Whither will the shoemaker carry my boots? — He will carry
Jiem to your house. — Will he carry them home ? — He will not
carry them thither. — Will you come to me ? — I will not come. —
Whither do you wish to go ? — I wish to go to the good English. —
Will the good Italians go to our house 1 — They will not go thither.
— Whither do they wish to go ? — They will go no wher*
49.
Will you take your son to my house ? — I will not take him to
your house, but to the captain's. — When will you take him to the
captain's ? — I will take him there to-morrow. — Do you wish to
take my children to the physician ? — I will take them thither. —
When will you take them thither ? — I will take them thither to
day. — At what o'clock will you take them thither '? — At half-past
two. — When will you send your servant to the physician ? — I
will send him there to-day. — At what o'clock ? — At a quarter-
past ten. — Will you go any where ? — I will go some where. —
Whither will you go ? — I will go to the Scotchman. — Will the
Irishman come to you ? — He will come to me. — Will your son go
to any one ? — He will go to some one. — To whom does he wish
to go ? — He wishes to go to his friends. — Will the Spaniards go
any where 1 — They will go no where. — Will our friend go to
any one ? — He will go to no one.
50.
When will you take your youth to the painter's ? — 1 will take
him thither to-day. — Whither will he carry these birds ? — He
will carry them no where. — Will you take the physician to this
man ? — I will take him there. — When will the physician go to
your brother ? — He will go there to-day. — Will you send a
•ervant to me ? — I will send one. — Will you send a child to the
painter's ? — I will send one thither. — With whom is the captain ? —
He is with nobody. — Has your brother time to come to my
house ? — He has no time to come there. — Will the Frenchman
write one more note ? — He will write one more. — Has your friend
a mind to write as many notes as I ? — He has a mind to write
quite as many. — To whose house does he wish to send them ?—
He will send them to his friends. — Who wishes to write little
re
TWENTIETH LESSOIf.
notes ? — The young man wishes to write some. — Do you wish to
carry many books to my father's ? — I will only carry a few.
51.
Will you send one more trunk to our friend's ? — I will send
several more there. — How many more hats does the hatter wish
to send ? — He wishes to send six more. — Will the tailor send as
many boots as the shoemaker ? — He will send less. — Has your
son the courage to go to the captain's ? — He has the courage to
go there, but he has no time. — Do you wish to buy as many dogs
as horses ? — I will buy more of the latter than of the former. —
At what o'clock do you wish to send your servant to the Dutch-
man's?— I will send him thither at a quarter to six. — At what
o'clock is your father at home ? — He is at home at twelve o'clock.
— At what o'clock does your friend wish to write his notes ? — He
will write them at midnight. — Are you afraid to go to the cap.
tain's 1 — I am not afraid, but ashamed to go there.
TWENTIETH LESSON
Lezione ventesima.
To, meaning in order to.
Hard you money to buy bread ?
I have some to buy some.
Will you go to your brother in order to
see him ?
f have no time to go there to see him.
Has your brother a knife to cut his
bread?
He has none to eut it
Per.
Ha Ella danaro per comprart del
pane?
Ne ho per comprarne.
Vuole Ella andare dal di Lai fratellc
per vederlo ?
Non ho tempo di andarvi (d' an-
darvi) per vederlo.
Ha un coltello il di Lei fratello pel
tagliare il suo pane ?
Non ne ha per tagliarlo.
TWENTIETH LESSON.
n
To sweep.
To eat.
To kill.
To salt.
{ Scopare 1.
( Spazzare 1.
Mangiare 1.
AmmaMxare 1. Uccidere* 2.
Salare 1. (Mettere* in sale)
To be able (can).
Potere* 2.
Can you ? or are you able ?
Pud Ella 1 (potetel>
I can, or I am able.
Posso.
I cannot, I am not a! le.
Non posso
Can he ? or is he ablt ?
Pud egli 1
He can, or he is able.
Egli pud.
He cannot, he is unable.
Non pud.
We can, we are able.
Possiamo.
Von can, you are able.
Potete (pud).
Thry can, they are able.
Possono (ponnol
Thou canst, art able.
Pool.
Me.
ML
(direct object or accusative).
Him.
Lo.
(direct object or accusative).
To see.
Vedere* 2.
To see me.
Vedermi.
To see him.
Vederlo.
To see the man.
Vedere 1' uomo.
To kiU him.
Ammazzarlo, ucciderlo.
To. •
A.
r Sing. Al, allof aW. \ (Sec
To the or at the.
< Plur. Ai (a'), agli, > Lessoe
( agV. ) IX.)
Singular. Plural.
Singular. Plural.
To the friend. To the friends.
Air amico. Agli amici.
To the man. To the men.
All' uomo. Agli uomini.
To the captain. To the captains.
Al capitano. Ai capitani.
To the coat. To the coats.
All' abito. Agli abiU.
To the book. To the books.
Al libro. Ai libri. i
To the Englishman To the English.
All' Inglese. Agl' Inglesi.
Vo the Italian. To the Italians.
AH' Italianc. Agl' Italian!.
re
To him — a lui
(indirect object or dative).
To me — a me.
TWENTIETH LESSOR.
Gh.
Mi.
To speak to me.
To speak to him.
To write to him.
To write to me.
To speak to the man.
To speak to the captain.
To write to the captain.
oan you write, to me ?
I can write to you.
Can the man speak to you ?
He can speak to me.
Will you write to your brother ?
I will write to him.
The basket.
The carpet.
The floor.
The cat
Parlarmi
Parlargli.
Scrivergli.
Scrivermi.
Parlare all' uomo
Parlare al capitano.
Scrivere al cap tano.
Pud Ella scrivermi ?
Posso scriverle (or scrivenri).
Pud parlarle (parlarvi) V uomol
Pud parlarmi.
Vuole scrivere al di Lei fratello 1
Voglio scrivergli.
II canestro, il paniere.
Hi tappeto.
II pavimento.
II gatto.
Will you send the book to the man?
I will send it to him.
Vuole mandare il libro all' uomol
Voglio mandarglielo.
Oba. A. When the pronoun gli precedes lo or ne, an e is inserted betwe
the two pronouns.
When will you send it to him ? I duando vuole mandarglielo ?
I will send it to him to-morrow. | Voglio mandarglielo domani.
First person :
Third person :
First person :
Second person
Third person :
Tome.
To him.
Me.
Him.
To vm. U*.
To you. You.
To them. Them.
Singular.
Indirect object, Direct object,
or Dative. Accusative.
Mi, or o me. Me, or mi.
Gli, — a lui. Lo, — lui.
Plubal.
Ci, ne, or a noi.
Ft, — a voi.
Loro, — aloro.
Noi, or cL
Ft, —90*.
Loro—UfU
(fern).
Does he wish to speak to you?
He does not wish to speak to me, but
to yon.
Vuol parlarle (parlarvi) ?
Non vuol parlare a me ma a Lei, •
voi
TWENTIETH LESSON.
79
fro you wish to write to him ?
Vuole Eila scrivergli 1
I do not wish to
write to him, but to
Non voglio scrivere
a lui, ma a sue
his brother.
fratello ?
Thb following j
j the order in which the personal pronouns muat be placed in
the sentence : •
Singtucer
Plural.
Singulare.
PluraU.
It tO UtO.
Them to me.
t Me lo.
t Meli.
It to him.
Them to him.
t Glielo.
t Glieli.
It to us.
Them to us.
t Ce lo (ne lo).
t Ce li.
It to you.
Them to you.
t Ve lo.
t Veli
It to them.
Them to them.
Lo loro.
Li loro.
Obs. B. Tho pronouns : mi, ti, ci, vi, *t, are changed into : me, te, ce, ve, »et
when they are followed by one of the pronouns : lo, la, li, gli, le, ne.
Quando vuol Ella mandarmi 11
paniere 7
When will you senu me the basket 1
I will send it you to-day.
Voglio mandarglielo (mandarvelo)
oggi.
In the following manlier the relative pronoun ne, some of it, is placed with
regard to the personal pronoun :
Some to me.
Some to him.
Some to us.
Some to you.
Some to them.
To give.
To lend.
t Mene.
t Gliene.
t Ce ne.
t Ve ne.
Ne loro. [»]
Dare* 1.
Prestare 1,
Are . you willing to give me some
bread 1
I am willing to give you some.
tVill you lend my brother some
money 1
will lend him some.
Vuole darmi del pane? or, Voletc
darmi del pane.
Voglio dargliene (darlene), or, Voglio
darvene.
Vuole prestare del danaro a mk
fratello ?
Voglio prestargliene.
1 N. B. The verb must be placed between ne and loro.
80
TWENTIETH LESSON.
—
-C 2
*> hi
© o
6
x
8
s
S H S
■ xi
Xi xi
x:
^
»
2 a> «>
1 . o
©
41
S
<•*
o
■S -5 5
o
CO
«
M
X
If -
?*
J J
J
5
1
1
5
4 P
i |
O
1 s
o
s
jd
E
5
©
J3
S
§ § I
-S € -s
2 a
o
t
1 *
J
3
III
D
O
1
bo
5
s c5
£ 8
©
3
3
» & 0
0$
QU
od
§ 1 1
5 **■'
X o
O ©
XS X
«-> <~>
O
©
6
SL
o
o o o ,
►, ►. (K
2 |
RSONAL
I— i
w
■
S
a
r<
■ £ q
*
g
?
hi
(0
2 d
©
d
as
S S 3
2 B
s i &
US
w
B
1
(
(
1
1
i « 5
1 °
i
6 £
2
i
S
o
it
3
"8
ft
O
1
1
i i
3
I
25
o
•
©
•
$
•
? •
9
>
<->
9 - . 5
► • tJ
* "3
•5 £
3
•a
tj ** J5
f 3
~ 2
a -
1 -S
Q $
a ^
S
•**
c
c
S
5
X!
*-•
a
2 3 S
e 2 a
— o <-*
6
8
o
**
»- W
C
s
a V <9
o 5
•3
o
*3
T3 k> "T3
•r 1
1 5
j:
.2
.5 =3 5
©
4»
o
J? .2.
O V
.g
15*
(U
© © ©
s xi
x? S"
15*
3
X?
x? !5* xT
GO O
_o Cl
O
Q0_
Q\
_P__o_o J
TWENTIETH LESSON 81
EXERCISES.
52.
Has the carpenter money enough to buy a hammer ? — He has
snough to buy one. — Has the captain money enough to buy a
thip ? — He has not enough to buy one. — Has the peasant a desire
o buy some bread ? — He has a desire to buy some, but he has not
money enough to buy some. — Has your son ink to write a note ?
— He has not any to write one. — Have you time to see my
brother ? — I have no time to see him. — Does your father wish to
see me ? — He does not wish to see you. — Has your servant a
broom (unos copino) to sweep the floor ? — He has one to sweep it.
— Ls he willing to sweep it ? — He is willing to sweep it. — Has the
sailor money to buy some tea ? — He has none to buy any. — Has
your cook money to buy some beef? — He has some to buy some.
— Has he money to buy some chickens? — He has some to buy
some. — Have you salt enough to salt my beef? — I have enough
to salt it. — Will your friend come to my house in order to see
me ? — He will neither come to your house, nor see you. — Has
your neighbour a desire to kill his horse ? — He has no desire to
kill it. — Will you kill your friends ? — I will only kill my enemies.
58.
Can you cut me some bread ? — I can cut you some. — Have
you a knife to cut me some ? — I have one. — Can you mend my
gloves ? — I can mend them, but I have no wish to do it. — Can the
tailor make me a coat ? — He can make you one. — Will you speak
to the physician ? — I will speak to him. — Does your son wish to
"see me in order to speak to me ? — He wishes to see you in order
to give you a crown. — Does he wish to kill me ? — He does not
wish to kill you ; he only wishes to see you. — Does the son of
our old friend wish to kill an ox ? — He wishes to kill two. — Who
has a mind to kill our cat ? — Our neighbour's child has a mind
jo kill it. — How much money can you send me ? — I ran send you
twenty francs. — Will you send me my carpet ? — I will send it
you. — Will you send the shoemaker any thing ? — I will send him
my boots. — Will you send him your coats ? — N\> 1 will send theni
82 TWENTIETH LESSON.'
to my tailor. — Can the tailor send me my coat ? — He cannot se:
it you.— Are your children able to write to me ? — They are able
to write to you. — Will you lend me your basket ? — I will lend h
you.
54.
Have you a glass to drink your wine ? — I have one, but I have
ao wine ; I have only tea. — Will you give me money to buy some ?
— I will give you some, but I have only a little. — Will you give
me that which you have ? — I will give it you. — Can you drink
as much wine as milk 1 — I can drink as much of the one as of the
other. — Has our neighbour any coals to make a fire ? — He has
some to make one, but he has no money to buy bread and butter.
— Are you willing to lend him some ? — I am willing to lend him
some. — Do you wish to speak to the German ? — I wish to speak
to him. — Where is he ? — He is with the son of the American. —
Does the German wish to speak to me ? — He wishes to speak tc
you. — Does he wish to speak to my brother or to yours ? — He
wishes to speak to both. — Can the children of our neighbour
work ? — They can work, but they will not.
55.
Do you wish to speak to the children of the Dutchman ? — I
wish to speak to them. — What will you give them ? — I will give
them good petty-patties. — Will you lend them any thing ? — I am
willing to lend them something. — Can you lend them any thing 1
— I cannot lend them any thing ; I have nothing. — Has the cook
some more salt to salt the beef? — He has a little more. — Has he
some more rice ? — He has a great deal more. — Will he give me
some ? — He will give you some. — Will he give some to my little
children ? — He will give them some. — Will he kill this or that
chicken ? — He will neither kill this nor that. — Which ox will he
kill ? — He will kill that of the good peasant. — Will he kill this or
that ox ? — He will kill both. — Who will send us biscuits ? — The
baker will send you son e. — Have you any thing to do 1 — I have
nothing to do.
56.
What has your son to do ? — He has to write to his good friends
And to the captain. — To whom do you wish to speafe ? — I wish to
TWENTY-FIRST LESSON.
81
•peak to the Italians and to the French. — Do you wish to give
them some money ? — I wish to give them some. — Do you wish to
give tnis man some bread ? — I wish to give him some. — Will you
give him a coat ?— I will give him one. — Will your friends give
me some coffee ?— They will give you some. — Will you lend me
your books ? — I will lend them you. — Will you lend your neigh,
bou/s your mattrass ? — I will not lend it them. — Will you lend
ihem the looking-glass? — I will lend it them. — To whom will you
lend your umbrellas ? — I will lend them to my friends. — To
whom does your friend wish to lend his bed ? — He will lend it to
nobody.
TWENTY-FIRST LESSON.
Lezione ventesima prima.
To whom?
A chi ? (a
question followed D\
the obj
3ct indirect
in
the
dative).
Whom?
Chi? (for
persons.)
What?
Che ? (for
things.)
DECLENSION Of* THE INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS.
CM? Who?— Che? What?
For For \ For persons,
persona. things.
SuOjcct, in )
Nomina- >Who? What ?
tive. J
Object indi- ^
rect in the (of whom! Of what?
Genitive. 3
Object indi- ini
rect in the ^hom? To what?
Dative. VWho*>?
Chi?
Dichi?
A chi?
For things.
Che?
Diche?
Acho?
84
TWENTY-FIRST LESSON.
Object direct, ^
or Accusa- £ Whom ?
tive.
Object indi-
rect in the
Ablative.
From
i whom ?
What!
From
what?
Chi?
Da chi?
'The?
Da chc ?
Chi 1 who ? has no plural, and always refers to persons, without mstinctioi
ti sex, as who in English.
Che ? what ? has no plural, and always relates to things.
Obs. A. In che the letter e may be substituted by an apostrophe before
vowel, but not the letter * in chi.
To answer.
To answer the man.
To answer the men.
Who is it ?
Of whom do you wish to speak ?
What do you wish to say ?
To whom do you wish to answer?
I wish to answer my brother.
To answer him.
To answer you.
To answer them.
Obs. B. Loro, them or to them, is
pronouns.
Rispondere* 2.
Rispondere all* uomo.
Rispondere agli uominL
Chid?
Di chi vuol parlare ?
< Che vuol dire ?
l Che cosa vuol dire?
A chi vuole rispondere?
Voglio rispondere a mio fratello.
Rispondergli.
Risponderle (the feminine U is her
used out of politeness).
Risponder loro.
not joined to the verb like the othe
To answer the note.
To answer it.
To answer the notes.
To answer them.
To it, to them.
Will you answer my note?
I will answer it.
Will you answer the men ?
I will answer them.
My father wishes to speak to them.
Rispondere al biglietto.
Risponderci, rispondervi.
Rispondere ai biglietti.
Risponderci, rispondervi.
Ci or vi.
Vuol rispondere al mio biglietto 1
Voglio risponderci (rispondervi).
Vuol rispondere agli uomini ?
Voglio risponder loro.
Mio padre vuol parlar loro.
The theatre.
The play.
The bail.
To or at the theatre.
To — at the play.
To — at the ball.
To — at the garden.
II teatro.
Lo spettacolo.
II ballo.
Singular.
Al teatro.
Alio spettacolo.
Al ballo.
Al giardino.
PhuraL
Ai teatri.
Agli spettacoV
Aiballi.
Ai giardin!
TWENTY-FIRST LESSON.
se
The magazine.
The warehouse.
The storehouse.
The counting-house.
The market.
II magazzino.
II banco (lo studio).
II mercato.
There, thither.
To go there, thither.
To be there.
Do you wish to go to the tneatre 7
( wish to go mere.
in your brother at the theatre ?
He is there.
He is not there.
Where is he 7
Ci or vi.
Andarci or andarvi.
Esserci or esservi.
Vuol Ella andare al teatro.
Voglio andarci (andarvi).
II di Lei fratello e al teatro
teatro) 7
Vie*.
Non c* & (non vi d).
OV 3 egli 7
{or Lb
/n.
Is your father in his garden 7
He is there.
Where is the merchant 7
He is in his warehouse.
Nel, nello, nei, negli, in.
E nel suo giardino il di Lei padre 7
Egli c* e or egli v' e\
Dov' e* il mercante 7
E nel suo magazzino.
What have you to do 7 | Che ha Ella da fare 7
Obs. C. The preposition to is rendered by da when it precedes an infinitive
depending on the verb avere, to have, or ««er«, to be.
I have nothing to do.
What has the man to drink 7
He has nothing to drink.
Have you any thing to do ?
I have to answer a note.
I have to speak to your brother.
Where is your brother!
The place.
He is in that place.
Whither does he wish to go 7
He wishes to go into the garden.
Does he wish to go to the garden 7
He wishes to go there.
Non ho da far niente.
Che ha da bere 1' uomo 7
Non ha da ber niente.
Ha Ella qualehe cosa da fare 7
Ho da rispondere ad un biglietto.
Ho da parlare al di Lei fratello.
Dov' 3 suo fratello 7
II luogo.
E in questo luogo.
Ove vuol egli andare 7
Vuol andare al giardino.
Vuol egli andare al giardino t
Vuol andarci (or andarvi).
EXERCISES.
57.
Will you write to me? — I will write to you. — Will you wn*
to the Italian ? — I will write to him. — Will your brother wiite to
9H TWENTY-FIRST LESSON.
the English ? — He will write to them, but they have no mind to
answer him. — Will you answer your friend ? — I will answer him.
— But whom will you answer ? — I will answer my good father
— Will you not answer your good friends ? — I will answer them
—Who will write to you ? — The Russian wishes to write to me.
—WiL you answer him ? — I will not answer him. — Who will
write to our friends? — The children of our neighbour will write
te them. — Will they answer them ? — They will answer them.—
To whom do you wish to write ? — I wish to write to the Russian.
— Will he answer you ? — He wishes to answer me, but he can-
not. — Can the Spaniards answer us ? — They cannot answer us,
but we can answer them. — To whom do j-ou wish to send this
note ? — I wish to send it to the joiner.
58.
What have you to do ? — I have to write. — What have you to
write ? — I have to write a note. — To whom ? — To the carpenter.
— What has your father to drink ? — He has to drink some good
wine. — Has your servant any thing to drink ? — He has to drink
some tea. — What has the shoemaker to do ? — He has to mend my
boots. — What have you to mend ? — I have to mend my thread
handkerchiefs. — To whom have you to speak ? — I have to speak
to the captain. — When will you speak to him ? — To-day. — Where
will you speak to him? — At his house. — To whom has your
brother to speak? — He has to speak to your son. — What has the
Englishman to do ? — He has to answer a note. — Which note has
he to answer ? — He has to answer that of the good German.—
Have I to answer the note of the Frenchman ? — You have to an-
swer it. — Which note have you to answer ? — I have to answer
that of my good friend. — Has your father to answer a note ? —
He has to answer one. — Who has to answer notes ? — Our chil-
dren have to answer a few. — Will you answer the notes of the
merchants? — I will answer them. — Will your brother answer
this or that note ? — He will answer neither this nor that. — Will
any one answer my note ? — No one will answer it.
59.
Which notes will your father answer ? — He will answer only
those of his good friends. — Will he answer my note ?— He will
rWENTY-FIRST LPSSON. 87
answer it. — Have you to answer any one ? — 1 have tc answer no
one. — Who will answer my notes ? — Your friends will answer
them. — Have you a mind to go to the ball ? — I have a mind to go
there. — When will you go there ? — To-day. — At what o'clock ?
— At half-past ten. — When will you take your child to the play ?
— I will take him there to-morrow. — At what o'clock will you
take him there ? — At a quarter to six. — Where is your son? — He
is at the play. — Is your friend at the ball ? — He is there. — Where
is the merchant ?— He is in his counting-house. — Wt.ere do you
' wish to take me to ? — I wish to take you to my warehouse. —
Where does your cook wish to go ? — He wishes to go to the mar-
ket.— Is your brother at the market ? — He is not there. — Where
is he 1 — He is in his warehouse.
60.
Where is the Dutchman ? — He is in his granary.— Will you
some to me in order to go to the play ? — I will come to you, but
I have no mind to go to the play — Where is the Irishman ? — Hp
is at the market. — To which theatre do you wish to go ? — I wish
to go to that of the French. — Will you go to my garden or to tha*
of the Scotchman ? — I will go to neither yours nor to that of the
Scotchman ; i wish to go to that of the Italian. — Does the phy-
sician wish to ,to to our warehouses or to those of the Dutch ? —
He' will gc neither to yours nor to those of the Dutch, but to those
of the French. —What do you wish to buy at the market ? — I
wish to buy a b^ sket and some carpets. — Where do you wish to
take them ? — I v ill take them home.
61.
How many cart ets do you wish to buy ? — I wish to buy two
—To whom do yo<i wish to give them ? — I will give them to my
•ervant. — Has he & mind to sweep the floor ? — He has a mind to
do it, but he has no time. — Have the English many warehouses ?
— They have many . — Have the French as many dogs as cats ?
— They have more of the latter than of the former. — Have you
many guns in your warehouses ? — We have many there, but we
have but little corn. — Do you wish to see our guns ? — I will gc
Into your warehouses in order to see them. — Do you wish to buy
38
TWENTY-SECOND LESSON.
any thing ? — I wish to buy something. — What do you wish t<
ouy ? — I wish to buy a pocket-book (un portafolio), a looking,
glass, and a gun. — Where will you buy your trunk ? — I wil
buy it at the market. — Have you as much wine as tea in youi
storehouses ? — We have as much of the one as of the other,-
Who wishes to tear my coat ? — No one wishes to tear it,
62.
Will the English give us some bread ? — They will give you
some. — Will they give us as much butter as bread ? — They will
give you more of the latter than of the former. — Will you give
this man a franc ? — I will give him several. — How many francs
will you give him ? — I will give him five. — What will the French
lend us ? — They will lend us many books. — Have you time to
write to the merchant ? — I wish to write to him, but I have no
time to-day.— When will you answer the German ? — I will
answer him to morrow. — At what o'clock ? — At eight. — Where
does the Spaniard wish to go? — He wishes to go no where. — Dot
your servant wish to warm my broth ? — He wishes to warm it.-
ls lie willing to make my fire ? — He is willing to make it.-
Where does the baker wish to go to ? — He wishes to go to the
wood. — Where is the youth ? — He is at the play. — Who is at
captain's ball ? — Our children and our friends are there.
TWENTY-SECOND LESSON.
Lezio?ie ventesima seconda.
To or at the corner.
To or at the hole.
in the hole, in the holes.
Where is your cat 1
It is in the bag.
Singular.
NeW
Al * CaDt°-
NeW
Al 5
Nel buco.
Ove £ il suo gatto ?
IS nel sacco.
buce.
Plurcu.
2N--
Nei buchi.
1 Tht koU is rendered by u buco (mas), and : la buca (fem.) ; but the feroi
TWENTY-SECOND LESSON.
To 0r at the bottom.
To or at the bottom of the bag.
At the corner of the fire.
To or at the end.
To the end of the wood.
To the end of the woods.
To send for.
Togo for, to fetch.
Will you send for some wine ?
' will send for some.
Will your son go for some bread?
He will not go for any.
I will send for the physician.
I will send for him.
He will send for my brothers.
He will send for them.
Will you send for glasses ?
I will send for some.
Un
I Al
What have you to do 1
I have to go to the market.
What have you to drink ?
vVe have to drink some good wine.
You have to mend your handkerchiefs.
They have.
What have me men to do ?
They have to go to the warehouse.
This evening (to-night).
In the evening.
This morning.
In the morning.
fondo.
Al fondo.
Nel fondo del sacco.
Nel canto del fuoco.
Al fine.
Al fine del bosco.
Al fine dei boschi.
Mandare a cercare.
Andare a cercare.
Vuol mandare a cercar del v'no ?
Voglio mandare a cercarne.
11 di Lei figlio vuol andare a cereal
del pane ?
Non vuol andare a cercarne.
Voglio mandar a cercare il medico
Voglio mandarlo a cercare.
Vuol e mandar a cercare i miei fra
telli.
Vuol e mandarli a cercare.
Vuol Ella mandar a cercare dei bic
chieri ?
Voglio mandarne a cercare.
Che ha Ella da fare?
Ho da andare al mercato (Devo
andare al mercato).
Che hanno Elleno da bere?
Abbiamo da bere del buon vino.
Ha da raccommodare i di Lei faz-
zoletti.
Hanno. •
Che hanno da fare gli uomini ?
Hanno da andare al magazzino
Stassera.
La sera, or nella sera.
Stamattina (stamane).
La mattina, il mattino.
Nella mattina, nel mattina
•afoca, is used to designate a rather large hole, whilst the masculine, ilbuco, is
osed'to designate a rather small hole. Ex. Ilgatto, ileant I nella buca, the
eat, the dog is in the hole ; un buco nel vestiio, a hole in the coat ; gli uccelli
kanno.fatto il loro nido nella buco, the birds have made their nest in the hole.
*)
TWENTY-SECOND LESSON.
Now, at present.
{ Adesso, in questo putUo.
} Ora.
Thou.
Thou hast— thou art.
John, art thou here 1
Yes, Sir, I am.
Tu hai (ai) — tu sei.
Giovanni, sei tu la 7
Si, S ignore, ci sono.
* We have already seen (Xote 2, Lesson I.) in what instances the Italians ch
ihe second person singular; let us, in addition, observe, that it is a mark of inti-
macy among friends, and is used by parents and children, brothers and sisters,
husbands and wives, towards one another : in general it implies familiarity,
founded on affection and fondness, or hatred and contempt. Voi, as we have
seen in the above note, is used towards servants and persons with whom we are
on a familiar footing, as: Chedite voi? What do you say? Mi avete veduto?
Have you seen me 1 No, non vi ho veduto ; No, I have not seen you. Io vt
dir!), I will tell you. But the most polite way of addressing a person is with
Vossignoria (V. S.), contracted and abridged from Vostra Signoria, your wor-
ship, and in speaking to persons of rank, Voasignoria IUustrissima, Vostra Ec-
veUcnza, and to persons of royal blood, Vostra Altezza, to monarchs, Vostra
Ma est ft
All these titles being expressed by feminine substantives in the singular, th<
word Ella is used to avoid a continual repetition of them. It must therefore
always be considered as a relative to, or a substitute for, the above titles.
According to this principle the nominative should always be Ella (as it is the
custom in Tuscany), and the accusative Lei, as: Sta Ella bene? Are you well'
Owe ha Ella dormilo? How have you slept! In Rome, however, and the
rest of Italy, they say in the nominative also Lei (generally considered as ii
correct;, is: Sta bene Lei? Are you well? Come ha dormito Lei? How have
you slept ? and it would sound affected, if, according to the Florentine manner,
you were to use there Ella.
In addressing with Ella the participle or adjective agrees, according to the
best authors, with the feminine noun, Vossignoria. Ex. Se Ella si fosse
-naciuta, If you had been so kind ; Quant1 I gift ch' Ella I arrivalo ? How lot
«i it since you arrived? (and not compiaciuto, arrivato).
The five cases are therefore used in the following manner :—
You.
N.
Your.
Q.
To you.
D.
You.
Ace.
Prom you.
Abl.
Ella, also Lei.
Di Lei (suo, sua).
A Lei, Le.
Lei, La.
Da Lei.
Vossignoria.
di Vossignoria.
a Vossignoria.
Vossignoria.
da Vossignoria.
Obs. If a particular stress is to be put on iie person addressed to, a Lei :
ased in the dative, and Lei in the accusative, if not Le in the dative and La
the accusative. If Le happens to meet with one of the pronouns, lo, la, li,
%e, it is changed into gliy as : glielo, gliela, ft to you ; glieli, glide, them to you ,
fliene, some to you.
TWENTY-SECOND LESSON.
•1
Art thou fatigued 7
I am not fatigued.
Are the men tired 1
Where are you going 1
Have you always been well 1
You look very well.
Your observation is right.
Where are your gloves'?
Which is your room?
I sit down here near you.
Sei stanco ?
Non sono stanco.
Sono stanchi gli uomini ?
EXAMPLES.
NOMINATIVE.
Dove va Vossignoria? (or Ella? oi
Lei?)
E Ella stata sempre bene *
Ella (Lei) ha buonissima ciera.
•ENITIVE.
r II riflesso di V. S. (or di V. Ecc.) i
; < giusto, or il di Lei riflesso, or il
I ' suo riflesso e giusto.
{ Dove sono i di Lei guanti? or i suoi
l guanti ?
{ Qual e la di Lei camera ? or la sua
( camera?
Io seggo qui presso di Lei.
Let us take a walk, if it pleases you
(t. «. if you please).
That will neither please you nor him.
I thank you very humbly.
I thank you and your uncle very much.
Listen then, I will tell it you directly.
He is not willing to tell it either you
or me
To you alone I will say it.
I shall be eternally grateful to you for
it.
I will let you see them. ♦
I will show them you and your sister.
I will show it to you to-morrow.
Well 1 to you I can refuse nothing.
Andiamo a spasso, se Le piace.
Questo non piacera n£ a Lei, nd a
lui.
Le rendo devotissime grazie.
Rendo a Lei e al Signor zio le dovute
grazie.
Ascolti dunque, glielo diro subito.
Non lo vuol dire n£ a Lei, n£ a me.
Lo diro a Lei sola.
Gliene sard eternamente obbligato.
Glieli fard vedere.
Li faro vedere a Lei e alia sorella.
Gliela (fern.) mostrero domani.
Alia buon' ora ! a Lei non posso du
un rifiuto.
ACCUSATIVE.
Do not trouble yourself, I pray.
begged you and not your brother.
Pardon me, if I interrupt you.
He has interrupted you and us.
I thank you for it
Do not refuse me that favour, I en-
treat you.
To-morrow I shall go with you to my
cousin's.
Non s' incomodi, La prego.
Ho pregato Lei e non il fratello.
Scusi, se La interrompo.
Egli ha interrotto Lei e noi.
Ne La ringrazio.
Via, non mi rifiuti questo favore, m
La scongiuro.
Domani andrd con Lei dal cugina
92
TWENT5? -SECOND LESSON.
Obs. A. The adjective in Italian, the same as in French, when it is preceded
oy a noun or pronoun, must agree with it in number ; that is, if the noun 01
pronoun is in the plural, the adjective must be put in the same number, as may
be seen from the example in the question above, and in the answer below.
They are not tired. I Non sono stanchi.
Obs. B. It will moreover be noticed, that the adjectives in Italian form thei
plural number exactly in the same manner as the notins or substantives.
Thou wilt (wishest)— thou art able Vuoi— Puoi.
(canst).
Art thou willing to make my fire ?
I am willing to make it, but I cannot.
Vuoi fare il mio fuoco 1
Voglio farlo, ma non posso.
Art thou afraid ?
I am not afraid ; I am cold.
Art thou hungry ?
t Hai paura ?
t Non ho paura ; ho freddo.
t Hai fame?
To sell.
To tell, to say.
To tell some one, to say to some one.
The word, the jest, device, motto.
Will you tell the servant to make the
fire?
I will tell him to make it.
Vender e 2.
Dire* 3.
Dire a qualcuno.
( II vocabolo (la parola, a fern. noun).
( II motto.
Vuoi dire al servitore di fare il fuoco 1
< Voglio dirgli di farlo.
c Gli voglio dire di farlo, o Glielo dird
Sing.
Plur.
Thy.
Tuo.
Tuoi.
Thine.
11 tuo.
I tuoi.
Thy book— thy books.
11 tuo libro.
I tuoi libn
With me, with thee, with him.
Meco, teco, seco
me, con te.
(con lui), also
With her.
Con lei.
With us, with you, with them.
Con noi, con voi,
con loro.
Wilt thou go with me ? Vuoi venir meco ? con me ?
Obs. C. When a person is spoken to, the verb to go is rendered by venir*
lo come.
I will not go with thee, but with him. j j *on vo^° ven|r teco' ma con M'
| (■ Non voglio venir con te, ma con lul
This depends upon you.
That comes from you.
Be was already twice at your house.
ABLATIVE.
Questo dipende da Lei .
Questo proviene da Lei.
Ei fu gia d \e volte da Lei.
TWENTY -SECOND LESSON. 93
With our friends. I Coi (plur. of cot) nostri amid,
rill go with our good friends. Voglio andare coi nostri buoni aniia
EXERCISES.
63.
Will you send for some sugar ? — I will send for some. — Son
\ iglio mid), wilt thou go for some petty-patties ? — Yes, father
[padre mio), 1 will go for some. — Whither wilt thou go ? — I will
go into the garden. — Who is in the garden ? — The children of
jur friends are there. — Will you send for the physician ? — I will
send for him. — Who will go for my brother ? — My servant will
go for him. — Where is he ? — He is in his counting-house. — Will
yr-u give me my broth ? — I will give it you. — Where is it ? — It
is nt the corner of the fire. — Will you give me some money to
[per) fetch some milk ? — I will give you some to fetch some. —
Wl ere is your money ? — It is in my counting-house ; will you
go hr it ? — I will go for it. — Will you buy my horse 1 — I cannot
buy it ; I have no money. — Where is your cat ? — It is in the bag.
— In which bag is it ? — In the bag of the granary. — Where is
this man's (di costui) dog ? — It is in a corner of the ship. — Where
has the peasant (got) his corn ? — He has it in his bag. — Has he
a cat ? — He has one. — Where is it ? — It is at the bottom of the
bag. — Is your cat in this bag ? — It is in it.
64.
Have you any thing to do ? — I have something to do. — What
nave you to do ? — I have to mend my gloves, and to go to the
garden. — Who is in the garden ? — My father is there. — Has your
cook any thing to drink ? — He has to drink some wine and some
good broth. — Can you give me as much butter as bread ? — I can
give you more of the latter than of the former. — Can our friend
drink as much wine as coffee ? — He cannot drink so much of the
latter as of the former. — Have you to speak to any one ? — I have
to speak to several men. — To how many men have you to speak ?
— I have to speak to four. — When have you to speak to them ? —
This evening. — At what o'clock ? — At a quarter to nine. — When
can you go to the market? — I can go thither in the morning. —
t)4 TWENTY -SEC ONI LESSON.
At what o'clock ? — At half-past seven. — When will you go to the
Frenchman ? — I will go to him to night. — Will you go to the
physician in the morning or in the evening ? — I will go to him in
the morning. — At what o'clock ? — At a quarter past ten.
65.
Have you to write as many notes as the Englishman ? — I have
to write less than he. — Will you speak to the German ? — I will
speak to him. — When will you speak to him ? — Now. — Where
is he ?— He is at the other end of the wood. — Will you go to the
market ? — I will go thither to (per) buy some cloth. — Do not your
jeighbours wish to go to the market ? — They cannot go thither;
hey are fatigued. — Hast thou the courage to go to the wood in the
evening ? — I have the courage to go thither, but not in the eve-
ning.— Are your children able to answer my notes ?-^-They are
able to answer them. — What do you wish to say to the servant ?
— I wish to tell him to make the fire, and to sweep the warehouse.
— Will you tell your brother to sell me his horse ? — I will tell
him to sell it you. — What do you wish to tell me ? — I wish to tell
you something. — Whom do you wish to see ? — I wish to see the
Scotchman. — Have you any thing to tell him ? — I have a motto
to tell him. — Which books does my brother wish to sell ? — He
wishes to sell thine and his own. — Will you come with me ? — I
cannot go with you. — Who will come with me ? — Nobody. — Will
your friend come with us ? — He will go with you. — With whom
wilt thou go ? — I will not go with any one. — Will you go with
my friend ? — I will not go with him, but with thee. — Wilt thou go
with me to the warehouse ? — I will go with you, but not to the
warehouse. — Whither wilt thou go ? — I will go with our good
friends into the garden &f the captain.
TWENTY. THIRD LESSON
Lezione ventesima terza.
To go out.
To remain t to stay.
When do you wish to go out ?
wish to go out now.
To remain (to stay) at home.
Here.
To remain here.
There.
Will you stay here 1
I will stay here.
Will your friend remain there ?
He will not stay there.
Will you go to your brother 7
I will go to him.
The pleasure, the favour.
To give pleasure.
To do a favour.
Are you going 7
I am going.
I am not going.
Thou art going.
Is he going 7
He goes, or is going.
He is not going.
Uscire* 3.1
{ Rimanere* 2. Restore 1.
I Stare* 1.
Quando vuol Ella uscire *
Voglio uscire adesso.
c Rimanere in caaa.
/ Stare in casa.
Qua, qui, in questo luogo (a,
vi).
< Rimaner qua, rimaner qui.
I Stare qua, star qui.
La, li (ci, vi).
{ Vuol Ella rimaner qua ?
I Vuol Ella stare in questo luogo?
Voglio starvi (rimanervi).
( Vuol rimaner la il di Lei amteot
I II di Lei amico vuol star li?
Non vuole rimaner la (star la).
Vuol and are dal di Lei fratello ?
Voglio andarci.
II piacere, il favore.
Far piacere.
Par un piacere.
Rendere* un servizio (senifio).
VaElla(andate)?
Vado.
Non vado.
Vai.
VaegU?
Egliva.
Non va.
1 Many Italians make use of tor-tire instead of xueire; but this Udans erro
aeoualy, for torture means, to select, to draw lots, and not, t« go »ut.
16
TWENTY-THIRD LESSON.
Are we going?
We go, or are going.
They go. mr are going.
Ate you going to your brother 1
I am going there.
Where is he going 1
He is going to his father
All, every.
Every day.
Every morning.
Every evening.
it is.
Late.
What o'clock is it?
It is three o'clock.
It is twelve o'clock.
It is a quarter past twelve.
It wants a quarter to six.
F* l* half-past one.
Andiamo 1
Andiamo.
Eglino vanno.
Va Ella daldi Lei frateUo?
Ci vado, vi vado (vadovi. vadoci
little used).
Dove va egli 1
Va da suo padre.
, Sing. Tutto
1 Plur. Tutti
Tutti i giorni.
Ogni giorno.
Time le mattine.
Ogni mattino (mattina).
Tutte le sere.
Ogni sera.
ogni, yii*
lunqu*.
E
Tardi.
Che ora & 7
Sono le tre.
E! mezzodi (i mezzo giorao).
Sono le dodici.
E mezzodi e un quarto.
Sono le dodici e un quarto.
Sono le sei meno un quarto.
Sono le cinque e tre quart!
E un' ora e mezzo.
To be acquainted with (to I Conoscere* 2.
know).
To be acquainted with (to know) a I Conoscere un uomo
man.
Need.
To want.
To be in want of.
I want it.
I am in want of it.
ire you in want of this knife ?
I am in want of it.
Are wou in want of these knives ?
Bisogno.
Aver bisogno di. Abbisognare
Ne ho bisogno.
Ha Ella bisogno
tello ?
Ne ho bisogno.
Ha Ella bisogno
telli?
di questo col*
di auesti col
rWKNTY-THlRD LKSSOH.
or?
I am m want of them.
i am not in want of them.
[ am not in want of any thing.
Is he in want of money 1
He is not in want of any.
Of what?
What are you in want of 1
What do you want 1
Of whom ?
Ne ho bisojrno.
Non ne ho bisogno.
Non ho bisogno di nulla.
Non ho bisogno di niente.
Ha egli bisogno di danarol
Non ne ha bisogno.
Dichel
Di che cosa 7
Di qual cosa"?
Di che ha Ella bisogno ?
Dichi?
OBJECT INDIRECT IN THE GENITVE OF THE PERSONAL
PRONOUNS.
Of me, of thee, of him, of her. Di me, di te, di lui, di lei (ne).
Of us, of you, of them. | Di noi, di voi, di loro (ne).
Is your father in want of me ?
He is in want of you.
Are you in want of these books 1
I am in want of them.
Is he in want of my brothers 1
He is in want of them.
II di Lei padre ha bisogno di me ?
Ha bisogno di Lei (di voi).
Ha Ella bisogno di (juesti libri 1
Ne ho bisogno.
Ha egli bisogno dei miei fratelli 1
Ne ha bisogno.
Ha bisogno di loro.
To read.
Leggerc*
EXERCISES.
66.
Will you do me a favour ? — Yes, Sir, which ? — Will you tell
my servant to make the fire ? — I will tell him to make it. — Will
you tell him to sweep the warehouses ? — I will tell him to sweep
them. — What will you tell your father? — I will tell him to sell
you his horse. — Will you tell your son to go to my father? — I
will tell him to go to him. — Have you any thing to tell me ?— I
have nothing to tell you. — Have you any thing to say to my
father? — I hdve a word to say to him. — Do these men wish to
sell their carpets ? — They do not wish to sell them. — John, art
thou here (Id) ? — Yes, Sir, I am here.— What art thou going to
do ? — I am going to your hatter to \jper) tell him to mend youi
08 TWENTY-THIRD LESSON.
hat. — Wilt thou go to the tailor to tell him to mend my coats ?—
I will go to him. — Are you willing to go to the market ? — I air.
willing to go thither. — What has your merchant to sell ? — He has
to sell some beautiful leather gloves (guanti di petfe), combs, good
cloth, and fine wooden baskets. — Has he any iron guns to sell ?
—He has some to sell. — Does he wish to sell me his horses?—
He wishes to sell them you. — Have you any thing to sell ? — I
have nothing to sell.
67.
Is it late ? — It is not late. — What o'clock is it ? — It is a quarter
past twelve. — At what o'clock does the captain wish to go out ? —
He wishes to go out at a quarter to eight ? — What will you do ?
— I wish to read. — What have you to read ? — I have a good book
to read. — Will you lend it me ? — I will lend it you. — When will
you lend it me ? — I will lend it you to-morrow. — Have you a mind
to go out ? — I have no mind to go out. — Are you willing to stay
here, my dear friend? — I cannot remain here. — Whither have
you to go ? — I have to go to the counting-house. — When will you
go to the ball ? — To-night. — At what o'clock ? — At midnight. —
Do you go to the Scotchman in the evening or in the morning ? —
I go to him (both) in the evening and in the morning. — Where
are you going now ? — I am going to the theatre. — Where is your
son going ? — He is going no where ; he is going to stay at home
to (per) write his notes. — Where is your brother ? — He is at his
warehouse. — Does he not wish to go out ? — No, Sir, he does not
wish to go out. — What does he wish to do ? — He wishes to write
to his friends. — Will you stay nere or there ? — [ will stay there.
— Where will your father stay ? — He will stay there. — Has oui
friend a mind to stay in the garden ? — He has a mind to stay
there.
68.
At what o'clock is the Dutchman at home ? — He is at home
every evening at a quarter past nine. — When does your cook go
to the market ? — He goes thither every morning at half-past five.
— When does our neighbour go to the Irishmen ? — He goes to
them every day. — At what o'clock ? — At eight o'clock in the
morning. — What do you wish to buy ? — I do not wish to buy any
thing ; but my father wishes to buy an ox. — Does he wish to buv
TWENTY-THIRD LESSOH. 99
this or that ox ? — He wisnes to buy neither. — Which does he wish
to buy ? — He wishes to buy your friend's. — Has the merchant
one more coat to sell ? — He has one more, but he does not wish
to sell it. — Has this man one knife more to sell ? — He has not
one knife more to sell, but he has a few more guns to sell. —
When will he sell them ? — He will sell them to-day. — Where ?
— At his warehouse. — Do you wish to see my friend ? — I wish to
nee him in order to know him. — Do you wish to know my chil-
dren ? — I do wish to know them. — How many children have you?
— I have only two, but my brother has more than 1: he has six.
— Does that man wish to drink too much wine ? — He wishes to
drink too much.* — Have you wine enough to drink ? — I have only
a little, but enough. — Does your brother wish to buy too many
petty-patties? — He wishes to buy a great many, but not too
many.
69.
Can you lend me a knife ? — I can lend you one. — Can your
father lend me a book ? — He can lend you several. — What are
you in want of? — I am in want of a good gun. — Are you in want
of this picture ? — I am in want of it. — Does your brother want
money ? — He does not want any. — Does he want some boots ? —
He does not want any. — What does he want ? — He wants no-
thing.— Are you in want of these sticks? — I am in want of them.
— Who wants some sugar ? — Nobody wants any. — Does any body
want pepper? — Nobody wants any. — What do I want? — You
want nothing. — Does your father want these pictures or those ? —
He wants neither these nor those. — Are you in want of me ? — I
am in want of you. — When do you want me ? — At present.—-
What have you to say to me ? — I have something to say to you.
— Is your son in want of us ? — He is in want of you and your
brothers. — Are you in want of my servants ? — I am in want of
them. — Does any one want my brother ? — No one wants him. —
Does your father want any thing ? — He does not want any thing.
•—What does the Englishman want ? — He wants some corn.—*
Does he not want some jewels ? — He does not want any. — What
does the sailor want ? — He wants some biscuits, milk, cheese, and
Butter. — Will you give me any thing ? — I will give you some
tread and wine.
TWENTY-FOURTH LESSON.
Lezione ventesima quarta.
THE PRESENT.
In regular verbs1 the present tense is formed from the infinitive, whose tet
nination is changed into o.
The first and second persons singular, and the first person plural, are for at
the three conjugations terminated in the same manner, viz.#
The first person singular in o. Ex.
1 speak.
Parlo.
I sell.
Vendo.
I serve.
Servo.
Thou speakest.
Parli.
Thou sellest.
Vendi.
Thou servest.
Servi.
We speak.
P ar liamo.
We sell.
Vendiamo
We serve.
Serviamo.
The second person singular in i. Ex.
The first person plural in iamo. Ex.
As for the third person singular, it is for the first conjugation terminated in
a (from are, as parlor*), and for the second and third conjugations in e. The
beuond person plural terminates for the first conjugation in ate (from are, as
parlare), for the second in tie (from ere, as venders), and for the third in ite
(from ire, as servire). The third person plural ends for the first conjugation in
<mo (from are, as parlare), and for the second and third conjugations in ono.
EXAMPLES.
INFINITIVE.
1. Parlare,
to speak.
2. Vendere,
to sell.
3. Servire, to serve.
PRESENT
TENSE.
First Conjugation,
Second Conjugation.
Third Conjugation.
.>-
>-
^^
Park,
I speak.
Vendo,
1 sell.
-
Servo,
I serve.
Pari*
thou speak-
Vendi,
thou sell-
Servt,
thou sen
est.
est.
est.
Parlo,
be speaks.
Vende,
he sells.
Serve,
he serves.
Parliamo
, we speak.
Vendiamo,
we sell.
Serviamo.
we serve.
Parlafc,
you speak.
Vended,
you sell.
Service,
you servt
Parlano,
they speak.
Vendono,
they sell.
Servono,
they serve
1 As for the irregular verbs, it is impossible to give, as for the present, an]
fixed rules concerning them. The learner must mark them in his list of irreg
liar verbs as he meets with them in proceeding.
TWENTY-FOURTH LESSON.
lOJ
Ob*. A. As the rules which I give above, on the formation of the i resen
pense, are applicable only to regular verbs, it remains now to point out the irreg
ilarities in the present tense of all those irregular verbs which we have em-
ployed already to enable the learner to use them in his exercises. They are at
follows : —
Those that are not given here are, of course, regular in the present tense.
To give.
\ give, thou givest,
We give, you give,
he gives,
they give.
To make, to do.
I make thou makest he mattes or
or do, or dost, does.
We do, you do, they do.
To stay, to remain.
I stay, thou stayest, he stays.
We stay, you stay, they stay.
To drink.
I drink, thou drinkest, he drinks.
We drink, you drink, they drink.
To see.
I tee, thou seest, he sees.
We see, you see, they see.
To remain.
I remain, thou re- he remains.
mainest,
We remain, you remain, they re-
main.
Dare* 1 .
First
Person.
Io do,
Second
Person.
tu dai,
Noi diamo. voi date,
Third
Person.
egli da.
eglino dan*
no.
Fare* 1 (formerly facere).
Io faccio tu fai, egli fa.
or fo,
Noi facci- voi fate,
amo.
eglino fan-
no.
Stare* 1 ».
Io sto, tu stai,
Noi stiamo, voi state,
egli sta.
eglino
stanno.
Bere or bevere* 2.
Bevo, bevi, beve.
Beviamo, bevete,
bevono (o»
beono)
Vedere* 2.
Vedo, veg- vedi,
rede.
go, or
veggio,
Vediamo or vedete,
vedono «
veggiamo,
veggonc
Rimanere* 2.
1st Pen 2nd Pert. 3rd Pen.
Rimango, rimani, rimane.
Rimania, rimanete, rimangono
mo.
* These three verbs, viz., dare,* fare,* stare,* together with andare* (which
lee in the foregoing Lesson), are the on.y irregular verbs of the first conjuga-
tion, all the others being regular.
109 TWENTY-FOURTH LESSON.
To pick up.
I pick up, thou pick- he picks
est up, up.
We pick up, you pick up, they pick
up.
To say, to tell.
I say, thou sayest, he says.
We say, you say, they say.
To conduct, to take.
Raccorre * 2 (abridged frajn
raccogliere).
Raccolgo raccogli, raccoglie,
Raecogli- raccogliete, raccolgo-
amo, no.
Dire * 3 (formerly dicere).
Dico, dici (or di'), dice.
Diciamo, dite, dicono.
Condurre* 2 (formerly con
ducere).
"
I conduct,
thou con-
ductest,
he con-
ducts.
Conduco,
conduci.
conduce,
We con-
you con-
they con-
Conduci-
conducete,
conduco-
duct,
duct,
duct.
amo,
no.
To come.
Venire
* 3.
I come,
thou cont-
est.
he comes.
Vengo,
vieni,
viene
We come,
you come,
they come.
Veniamo,
venitc,
vengono.
To go out.
V scire *
3.
1 go out,
thou goest
out,
he goes
out.
Esco,
esci,
esce.
We go out, you go out,
they go
Usciamo,
uscite,
escono.
out.
or es-
ciamo,
or es-
cite.
Oba. B. There is no distinction in Italian between I love, do love, and Mi
ovlng. All these present tenses pre expressed by arno, I love. Ex.
To love.
C love. C loves.
I < do love. He < does love.
/ am loving. / is loving.
( lovest. C love.
fhou < dost love. You < do love.
( art loving. / are loving.
C love. / love.
We < do love. They } do love.
( are loving. / are loving.
A mare 1.
Amo, ama.
Ami,
Amiamo,
TWEIVTY-FOURTH LESSON.
109
To love, to like, to be fond of.
To arrange, to set in order.
Mettere * (2) in
Do you like him 7
I do like him.
I do not like him.
Amare 1.
( Or dinar e 1.
< or dine.
' Assestare 1.
L' ama Ella? (L» annate?) Vol?
L' amo.
Non P amo.
O* Personal pronouns, not standing in the nominative, take their place
!>efore the verb, except when this is in the infinitive, the present participle, or
the imperative, for then the pronoun is joined to the verb, which loses its final
f, as we have seen in Obs. Lesson XVII.
Do you sell your horse 7
I do sell it.
Do you sell it 7
Does he send you the note 7
He does send it me.
Does the servant sweep the floor 7
He does sweep it.
To want, to miss.
To pay.
Vende Ella il di Lei cavallo 7
Vendete il vostro cavallo 7
Lo vendo.
Lo vende Ella 7
Lo vendete 7
Le manda egli il biglietto 7
Egli me lo manda.
Spazza il pavimento il servitore 7 or
better, il servitore spazza egli il
pavimento 7
Egli lo spazza.
Mancare 1.
Pagare 1.
Oft*. C. Verbs ending in care, or gart take the letter h after c or g, In all
tenses and persons where c or g meets with one of the vowels, «, t, Ex.
( Manchi tu di qualche cosa?
Art thou in want of any thing 7
I am in want of nothing.
Dost thou pay for thy boots 7
I pay for them.
c Ti manca qualche cosa 7
( Non manco di niente.
( Non mi manca niente.
t Paghi tu i tuoi stivali 7
t Li pago.
Ob$. D. To want, to be in want of, may be rendered in Italian in various
aaanners ; amongst others, also in the following : —
'Averd1 uopo
To want, to be in want of.
ire you in want of this knife?
«m in want of it.
' Essere d' uopo,
<{ Essere uopo,
Essere mestieri,
di,
Aver mesti-
eri di
Le 3 d' uopo cotesto coltello? (Le i
mestieri cotesto coltello ?) very lit
tie used.
Mi £ d' uopo. (Mi £ mestieri.)
<04
TWENTY-FOURTH LESSON.
4re you in want of these knives 7
I am in want of them.
I am not in want of them.
1 am not in want of any thing.
Is he in want of money 7
He does not want any.
To open.
i open, thou openest, he opens.
We open, you open, they open.
Do you open his note ?
I do not open it.
Does he open his eyes 7
He opens them.
Whom do you love?
I love my father.
Does your father love his son 7
He does love him.
Do you love your children 7
I do love them.
To like.
To be fond of.
I like, thou likest, he likes.
We like, you like, they like.
Le son d' uopo quest! coltelli 7 a*et#
d' uopo di questi coltelli?
Mi son d' uopo. Ne ho d' uopo.
Non mi son d' uopo. Non ne ho d'
uopo.
Non mi £ d' uopo niente. Non ho
d uopo di niente.
Gli £ d' uopo danaro ?
Non gliene e d' uopo.
Aprire*
sent).
Apro,
Apriamo,
3 (regular in Pre-
apn, apre.
aprite, aprono.
Apre Ella (aprite,) voi il suo oigli
etto?
Non 1' apro.
Apre egli gli occhi?
Egli li apre.
Chi ama Ella (amate) voi 7
Amo mio padre
II di Lei padre ama suo figlio 7
Egli P ama.
Ama Ella i di Lei fanciulli 7
Li amo.
Piacere*
•Piaccio,
Piacciamo,
piaci, .
piacete,
place,
piacciono.
Obs. E. This verb, the same as dolere* (see next Lesson), is in ItalUn mm
ployed impersonally with the dative of the personal pronoun. Ex.
Are you fond of wine 7
I am fond of it.
What are you fond of 7
Cider.
[ am fond of cider.
What is the American fond of?
He is fond of coffee
The ugly man.
Le piace il vino ?
Mi piace.
Che Le piace? (Che \i place ''
Del cidro.
II cidro mi piace.
Che piace all' Americano 1
Gli piace il caff?..
L' uomaccio.
i finish,
We finish,
To receive.
To finish.
thou finishest, he finishes.
you finish, they finish.
Ricevere 2.
Finire* 3
Finisco, finisci.
Finiamo, finite.
finisce
fini»cono
TWENTY-FOURTH LESSON.
10*
This instant.
Now.
At once.
What are you going to do ?
I am going to read.
What is he going to do ?
He is going to write a note.
Are you going to give me any thing ?
1 am going to give you some bread and
wine.
AlV ins fame.
Or a.
Subito.
t Che fa ora Ella 7
t Che fate ora ?
t Ora leggo (sto per leggera).
t Che fa egli all' istante ?
t Ail' iatante scrive un biglietto.
* Mi da Ella subito qualcosal
t Le do subito pane e vino.
Oba. F. Instead of saying questo uomo, thiH man ; cotesto iumw, that man, tile
Italians often use the plural of the pronouns, qucsto, cotesto, and translate as
follows :
This man. Questi.
That man. Cotesti.
Otherwise :
This man. Costui (Plur. costoro, these
men).
That man. Colui (Plur. coloro, those
men).
Obs. G. As for cotestui, that man, it is grown obsolete.
Do you know this man ?
I know neither this nor that one.
Do you see this man?
I do not see this man, but that one.
Do you hear these men 1
I do not hear these men, but those.
Conosce Ella questi 1
Non conosco n£ questi n£ queilo.
Vede Ella costui 1
Non vedo costui, ma colui.
Sente Ella costoro 1
Non sento costoro, ma colore
To know.
I krfow, thou knowest, he knows.
We know, you know they know.
Sapere* 2.
So, sai,
sa.
Sappiamo, sapete,
sanao.
EXERCISES.
70.
Do you love your brother ? — I do love him. — Does your broth* i
love you ? — He does not love me. — My good child, dost thou lo>«
me ? — Yes, I do love thee. — Dost thou love this ugly man (quelT
uomaccio) I do not love him. — Whom do you love ? — I love my
children. — Whom do we love ? — We love our friends. — Do we like
any one ? — We like no one. — Does any body like us I — The Ame-
106 TWENTY-FOURTH LESSON.
licans like us. — Do you want anything? — I want nothing.—*
Whom is your father in want of? — He is in want of his servant.
— What do you want ? — I want the note. — Do you want this 01
that note ? — I want this. — What do you wish to do with it (fame) 1
— I wish to open it, in order to read it. — Does your son read out
notes ? — He does read them. — When does he read them ? — He
teads them when he receives them. — Does he receive as many
notes as I ? — He receives more than you. — What do you give
me ? — I do not give thee any thing. — Do you give this book to
my brother ? — 1 do give it him. — Do you give him a bird ? — I do
give him one. — To whom do you lend your books ? — I lend them
to my friends. — Does your friend lend me a coat ? — He lends you
Dne. — To whom do you lend your clothes ? — I do not lend them
to any body.
71.
Do we arrange any thing ? — We do not arrange any thing.—
What does your brother set in order ? — He sets his books in order.
— Do you sell your ship ? — I do not sell it. — Does the captain sell
his ? — He does sell it. — What does the American sell ? — He sells
his oxen. — Does the Englishman finish his note? — He does finish
it. — Which notes do you finish ? — I finish those which I write to
my friends. — Dost thou see any thing ? — I see nothing. — Do you
see my large garden ? — I do see it. — Does your father see our
ships ? — He does not see them, but we see them. — How many
soldiers do you see ? — We see a good many ; we see more than
thirty. — Do you drink any thing ? — I drink some wine. — What
does the sailor drink ? — He drinks some cider. — Do we drink wine
or cider? — We drink wine and cider. — -What do the Italians
drink ? — They drink some coffee. — Do we drink wine ? — We do
drink some. — What art thou writing ? — I am writing a note. — To
whom ? — To my neighbour. — Does your friend write ? — He doep
write. — To whom does he write ? — He writes to his tailor. — What
are you going to do ? — I am going to write. — What is your father
going to do ? — He is going to read. — What is he going to read ? —
He is going to read a book. — What are you going to give me ?— •
I am not going to give you any thing. — What is our friend going
to give you ? — He is going to give me something good. — Do you
know my friend ? — I do know him.
TWENTY-FOURTH LESSON. 1<H
72.
0o you write your notes in the evening ? — We write them in
the morning. — What dost thou say ? — I say nothing. — Does your
brother say any thing? — He says something. — What does he
say ? — I do not know. — What do you say to my servant ? — I tell
him to sweep the floor, and to go for some wine, bread, and
cheese. — Do we say any thing ? — We say nothing. — What does
your friend say to the shoemaker ? — He tells him to mend his
boots. — What do you tell the tailors? — I tell them to make my
clothes. — Dost thou go out ? — I do not go out. — Who goes out ? —
My brother goes out. — Where is he going ? — He is going to the
garden. — To whom are you going ? — We are going to the good
English. — What art thou reading ? — I am reading a note from
my friend. — What is your father reading ? — He is reading a book.
— What are you doing ? — We are reading. — Are your children
reading? — They are not reading; they have no time to read. —
Do you read the books which I read ? — I do not read those which
you read, but those which your father reads. — Do you know this
man ? — I do not know him. — Does your friend know him ? — He
does know him.— What is your friend going to do ? — He is not
going to do any thing.
73.
Do you know my children ? — We do know them. — Do they
know you ? — They do not know us. — With whom are you ac-
quainted ? — I am acquainted with nobody. — Is any body acquaint-
ed with you ? — Somebody is acquainted with me. — Who is ac-
quainted with you ? — The good captain knows me. — What dost
thou eat ? — 1 eat some bread. — Does not your son eat some
cheese ? — He does not eat any. — Do you cut any thing ? — We
cut some wood. — What do the merchants cut? — They cut some
cloth. — Do you send me any thing ? — I send you a good gun. —
Does your father send you money ? — He does send me some. —
Does he send you more than I ? — He sends me more than you. —
How much does he send you ? — He sends me more than fifty
crowns. — When do you receive your notes ? — I receive them
every morning. — At what o'cl >ck ? — At half-past ten. — Is your
ton coming ? — He is coming. — To whom is he coming ? — He is
108
TWENTY-FOURTH LESSON.
coming to me. — Do you come to me ? — I do not come to you
but to your children. — Where is our friend going ? — He is going
no where ; he remains at home. — Are you going home { — We
are not going home, but to our friends. — Where are your friends ?
— They are in their garden. — Are the Scotchmen in their gar
dens ? — They are there.
74.
What do you buy ? — I buy some knives. — Do you buy more
knives than glasses ? — I buy more of the latter than of the former.
— How many horses does the German buy ? — He buys a good
many ; he buys more than twenty of them. — What does your ser-
vant carry ? — He carries a large trunk. — Where is he carrying
it ? — He is carrying it home. — To whom do you speak 1 — I speak
to the Irishman. — Do you speak to him every day ? — I speak to
him every morning and every evening. — Does he come to you ?
— He does not come to me, but I go to him. — What has your
servant to do ? — He has to sweep my floor and to set my books
in order. — Does my father answer your notes? — He answers
them. — What does your son break ? — He breaks nothing, but
your children break my glasses. — Do they tear any thing ? —
They tear nothing. — Who burns my hat ? — Nobody burns it.—
Are you looking for any body ? — I am not looking for any body.
— What is my son looking for ? — He is looking for his pocket-
book. — What does your cook kill ? — He kills a chicken.
75.
Are you killing a bird ? — 1 am killing one. — How many chick,
ens does your cook kill ? — He kills three of them. — To whom dc
you take my boy 1 — I take him to the painter. — When is the
painter at home ? — He is at home every evening at seven o'clock.
— What o'clock is it now ? — It is not yet six o'clock. — Do you go
out in the evening ? — I go out in the morning. — Are you afraid
to go out in the evening 1 — I am not afraid, but I have no time
to go out in the evening. — Do you work as much as your son ? —
I do not work as much as he. — Does he eat as much as you ? —
He eats less than I. — Can your children write as many notes as
my children? — They can write just as many. — Can the Russian
TWENTY-FIFTH LKSSON.
i()h
lrmk hf vine as cider ? — He can drink more of the latter
than of the former. — When do our neighbours go out? — They go
jut every morning at a quarter to five. — Which note do you send
to your father? — I am sending him my own. — Do you not send
mi no ? — I am sending it also. — To whom do you send your
clothes ? — I send them to nobody ; I want them. — To whom dn
pour sons send their boots? — They send them to no one; the)
want them.
*** We should fill volumes were we to give all the exercises that are appli-
cable to our lessons, and which the pupils may very easily compose by them-
selves. We shall, therefore, merely repeat what we have already mentioned at
the commencement :— Pupils who wish to improve rapidly ought to compose a
great many sentences in addition to those given; but they must pronounce
them aloud. This is the only way by which they will acquire the habit of
speaking fluently.
TWENTY-FIFTH LESSON.
Lezione ventesima quinta.
To go to the play.
To Se at the play.
To bring.
To find.
'The butcher.
The sheep.
What, or the thing which.
Do you find what you look for
what you are looking for) 7
I find what I look for.
L find what I am looking for.
Andare* alio spettacolo.
Essere* alio spettacolo.
( Recare 1.
( Portare 1.
Trovare 1.
II macellaio.
II montone.
( Cid che.
< Quel che.
' Quanto.
Trova Ella cid che cerca? o trevu*
voi quel che cercate ?
Trovo cid che cerco.
no
TWENTY-FIFTH LESSON.
He does not find what he is looking
for.
We find what we look for.
They find what they look for.
I mend what you mend.
1 buy what you buy.
I pay what you pay.
Are you in want of money?
I am not in want of an} .
Do you take him to the play?
I do take him thither.
Egli non trova cid che cerca.
Troviamo cio che cerchiamo.
Eglinc trovano ci6 che cercano.
Assetto cio che assetta Ella, assettc
od accomodo cio che Ella assetta
Compro quello che compra Ella
(comprate voi).
Pago quanto paga Ella.
Manca Ella di danaro ?
Non ne manco.
Lo conduce Ella ailo spettacolo?
Ve lo conduco.
To study.
Studiare 1.
Instead of.
J In luogo di.
( Invece di.
Obs. Instead of is in Englisn followed by the present participle, whilst n
Italian it is followed by the infinitive.
To play.
To listen.
To hear.
Instead of listening.
Instead of playing.
Do you play instead of studying?
I study instead of playing.
That man speaks instead of listening.
Giuocare 1.
Ascoltare 1.
Sentire 3.
( Invece d' ascoltare.
c In luogo d' ascoltare.
In luogo di giuocare.
Invece di giuocare.
Giuoca Ella invece di studiare *
Studio invece di giuocare.
Questi parla invece d' ascoltare.
To ache.
To complain
Tk j finger.
I complain — thou complainest.
Wt, complain — they complain.
Vou complain — he complains.
Have you a sore finger?
Have vou the headache ?
I have a sore finger.
I have the headache.
Has your brother a sore foot ?
He has a sore eye.
We have sore eyes.
Dolere.*
Dolersi.*
II dito (plur. It diia, fem.).
Mi dolgo or doglio — ti duoli.
Ci dogliamo — si dolgono.
Vi dolete — si duole.
t Le duole il dito ?
t Le duole il capo (la testa)?
t II dito mi duole.
t II capo (la testa) mi duole. He
mal di testa.
f Duole il piede al di Lei fratello 1
t Gli duole 1' occhic.
t Ci dolgono gli occhi.
TWENTY-FIFTH LESSON.
Ill
The study (a closet).
The desk.
The elbow.
The back.
The arm.
The knee.
L have a sore elbow.
Thoii hast a pain in thy back
He has a sore arm.
You have a sore knee.
Do you read instead of writing?
Does your brother read instead ofj
speaking?
Does the servant make the bed?
H 3 makes the fire instead of making
the bed.
To learn.
To learn to read.
I leara to read.
He learns to write.
Lo scrittoio. Lo studio.
Lo snrittoio.
II gomito.
II dorso.
II braccio (plur. le braccia).
II ginocchio ( plur. le ginocchia)
Mi duole il gomito.
Ti duole il dorso.
Gli duole il braccio.
Vi duole il ginocchio.
Legge Ella invece di scrivere?
Legge il di Lei fratello invece d'
parlare ?
Fa il letto il servitore ?
Egli fa il fuoco invece di fare il
letto.
Imparare 1.
Imparare a leggere.
Imparo a leggere.
Egli impara a scrivere.
EXERCISES.
76.
Do you go to the play this evening ? — I do not go to the play.
—What have you to do ? — I have to study. — At what o'clock do
you go out ? — I do not go out in the evening. — Does your father
go out ? — He does not go out. — What does he do? — He writes.—
Does he write a book ? — He does write one. — When does he
write it ? — He writes it in the morning and in the evening. — Is
he a' home now ? — He is at home (He is). — Does he not go out ?
— He cannot go out ; he has a sore foot. — Does the shoemaker
bring our boots ? — He does not bring them. — Is he not able to
work ? — He is not able to work; he has a sore knee. — Has any
body a sore elbow 1 — My tailor has a sore elbow. — Who has a
sore arm ? — I have a sore arm. — Do you cut me some bread ?—
I cannot cut you any ; I have sore fingers (mi dogliono le dita).—
Do you read your book ? — I cannot read it ; I have sore eyes
mi dogliono gli occhi). — Who has sore eyes ? — The French have
112 TWENTY-FIFTH LESSON.
sore eyes. — Do they read too much ? — They do not read enougn
— What day of the month is it to-day ? — It is the third. — What da]
:>f the month is it to-morrow ? — To-morrow is the fourth. — Are yoi
looking for any one ? — I am not looking for any one. — What
the painter looking for? — He is not looking for any thing .-^
Whom are you looking for? — I am looking for your son. — Have
you any thing to tell him ? — I have something to tell him. — Wh{
have you to tell him ? — I have to tell him to go to the play this
evening.
77.
Who is looking for me ? — Your father is looking for you. — Is
any body looking for my brother ? — Nobody is looking for him.
Dost thou find what thou art looking for ? — I do find what I am
looking for. — Does the captain find what he is looking for ? — He
finds what he is looking for, but his children do not find what
they are looking for. — What are they looking for ? — They are
looking for their books. — Where dost thou take me to? — I take
you to the theatre. — Do you not take me to the market ? — I do
not take you thither. — Do the Spaniards find the umbrellas which
they are looking for ? — They do not find them. — Does the tailor
find his thimble ? — He does not find it. — Do the merchants find
the cloth which they are looking for ? — They do find it. — What
do the butchers find ? — They find the oxen and sheep which they
are looking for. — What does your cook find ? — He finds the chick-
ens which he is looking for. — What is the physician doing ? —
He is doing what you are doing. — What is he doing in his study ?
— He is reading. — What is he reading ? — He is reading your
father's book. — Whom is the Englishman looking for? — He 13
looking for his friend, in order to take him to the garden. — What
is the German doing in his study ? — He is learning to read. —
Does he not lean: to write ? — He does not learn it (/' impara). —
Does your son learn to write ? — He learns to write and to read.
78.
Does the Dutchman speak instead of listening ? — He speaks
lastead of listening. — Do you go out instead of remaining at
home ? — I remain at home instead of going out. — Does your son
nlay instead of studying ? — He studies instead of playing. — When
TWENTY-FIFTH LESSON. 118
aoes he study ? — He studies every day. — In the morning or in the
evening ? — In the morning and in the evening. — Do you buy an
umbrella instead of buying a book ? — I buy neither the one nor
the other. — Does our neighbour break his sticks instead of break-
ing his glasses ? — He breaks neither. — What does he break ?- —
He breaks his guns. — Do the children of our neighbour read?—-
They read instead of writing. — What is our cook doing ? — He-
makes a fire instead of going to the market. — Does the captain
give you any thing ? — He does give me something. — What does
he give you ? — He gives me a great deal of money. — Does he
give you money instead of giving you bread 1 — He gives me
money and bread. — Does he give you more cheese than bread?
— He gives me less of the latter than of the former.
79.
Do you give my friend less knives than gloves ? — I give him
more of the latter than of the former. — What does he give you ?
— He gives me many books instead of giving me money. — Does
your servant make your bed ? — He does not make it. — What is
he doing instead of making your bed ? — He sweeps the study in
stead of making my bed. — Doos he drink instead of working ?—
He works instead of drinking. — Do the physicians go out ? — They
remain at home instead of going out. — Does your servant make
coffee ? — He makes tea instead of making coffee. — Does any one
lend you a gun ? — Nobody lends me one. — What does your
fiiend lend me ? — He lends you many books and many jewels. —
Do you read the Looks which I read ? — I do not read the one
which vou read, but the one which the great captain reads. — Are
you asnamed to read the books which I read ? — I am not ashamed
"»ut I have no wish to read them.
SECOND MONTH.
Secondo mtse.
TWENTY-SIXTH LESSON
Lezione ventesima sesta.
Jo you learn French?
I do learn it
[ do not learn it.
French.
English.
German.
Italian.
Spanish.
Polish.
Russian.
Latin.
Greek.
Arabian, Arabic.
Syrian, Syriac.
i learn Italian.
My brother learns German.
The Pole.
The Roman.
The Greek.
The Arab, the Arabian.
The Syrian.
Are you ar Englishman 7
No, Sir, I am a Frenchman.
Impara Ella il francese ?
Impara Ella 1' idioma francese (01
la lingua francese) ?
L' imparo.
Non 1' imparo.
II francese.
L' inglese.
II tedesco.
L* italiano.
Lo spagnuolo
II polonese.
II russo.
II latino.
II greco,
LJ arabo.
II siriaco
Imparo 1' italiano.
Mio fratello impara il lodeooo
II Polacco.
II Romano.
II Greco.
L' Arabo.
11 Siriaco.
E Ella Inglese ?
No, SLnore. sono Francese.
Obs. A. When the indefinite article is used in English to denote qualities
.he Italians make use of ho article.
TWENTY-SIXTH LESSON.
lift
He is a German.
Is he a tailor ?
No, he is a shoemaker
The fool.
He is a fool
The morning.
The evening.
The day.
To wish.
Egli e Tedesco.
E fi,rli sarto?
No, egli e calzolaio.
J wish you a good morning.
Obs. B. Often the indefinite article
irticle in Italian.
Does he wish me a good evening 'I
He wishes you a good morning.
H-3 has a large nose.
He has blue eyes.
Blue.
Black.
Long.
A large knife.
A large man.
A French book.
An English book.
French money.
English soap.
Do you read a German book 1
? read an Italian book.
To listen to some one.
To listen to something.
What or the thing which.
lo you listen to what the man tells
you 1 j
II pazzo.
Egli e pazzo.
II mattino, la mattina.
La sera
11 giorno (il di).
Desiderare 1.
Dare* (conjugated Lessor
XXIV).
Augur are 1.
Le do (auguro) il buon giorno.
in English answers to the definin
Mi da (augura) egli la buona serai
Egli Le da (augura) il buon giorno
Egli ha il naso grande.
Egli ha gli occhi" azzurri.
Azzuno, turchino.
Nero, negro.
Lungo.
Un coltellone.
Un uomone.
Un libro francese
Un libro inglese
Danaro francese.
Sapone inglese.
Legge Ella un libro tedesco ?
Leggo un libro italiano.
C qualcuno.
1" Ascoliare < uno.
( alcuno.
( qualcosa.
j" Ascoltare < qualche cosa.
\ alcuna cosa.
Cib chc, quel che, quanto.
t Ascolta Ella cio che 1' uomo L«
dice?
116
TWENTY- SIXTH LESSON.
I listen .o it.
He listens to what I tell him.
Do you listen to what I tell you ?
Do you listen to me?
1 do listen to you.
Do you listen to my brother?
I do not listen to him.
Do you listen to the men 7
1 listen to them.
t L' ascolto.
t Egli ascolta cid che gli dico.
t Ascolta Klla quel che Le dico7
t Mi ascolta (or m' ascolta) Ella*
mi ascolta te voi?
t La ascolto (or V ascolto).
t Ascolta Ella mio fratello?
t Xson 1' ascolto.
t Ascolta Ella guegli uomini?
t Li ascolto.
To take away.
To take off.
Do you take your ha; off 7
I take it off.
Does he take off his coat 7
He does take it off.
He does not take it off.
Do your children take off their boots 7
They do take them off.
Vou take your gloves off.
We take off our glovet
We take them off.
Portar via (levare) 1.
Levarsi 1.
t Si leva Ella il cappello?
t Me lo levo.
t Levasi egli 1' abito?
t Se lo leva,
t Non se lo leva,
t Si levano gli stivali i di Lei fan-
ciulh 7
t Se li levano.
Ella si leva i guanti.
Vi levate i guanti.
+ Ci leviamo i guanti.
t Ce li leviamo.
Correggere-f 2.
Corregge i di Lei temi s'io padre?
To correct.
Does your father correct your exer-
cises?
The exercise. I II tema.
Obs. C. There are in Italian many nouns terminated in a, for the mott pan
ierived from the Greek, which ar3 masculine.
The exercises.
He corrects them.
To speak French.
To speak English.
Do you speak French 7
No, Sir, I speak English
lo take.
To dr'nk coffee
I temi.
Egli li corregge.
Parlare francese.
Parlare inglese.
Parla Klla francese?
No, S ignore, parlo inglese.
Prcndere* (regular in the
present).
SC t Prcndere il caff?. .
J t Prendere del caffS (or simply pren
dere caffe").
TWENTY-SIXTH LESSON.
in
To drink tea *
Do you drink tea ?
I do drink some.
Do you drink tea every day ?
I drink some every day.
My father drinks coffee.
He drinks coffee every morning.
My brother drinks tea.
He drinks tea every morning.
To take away. i
Who takes away the book ?
The Frenchman takes it away.
Does any one take away the glasses'?
No ore takes them away.
What do you take away ?
• take away your boots and your j
brother's clothes.
\:
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
Prendere il td.
Prendere del te* (pren Jcre li).
Prende Ella del te* 7
Ne prenao.
Prende Ella il i& ogni giorno 1
Lo prendo ogni giorno.
Mio padre prende del caffd.
Prende il caffe* ogni mattina.
Mio fratello prende del t£.
Prende il t£ ogni mattina.
Portar via.
Chi porta via il libro ?
Lo porta via il Francese.
Qualcuno porta via i bicchieri ? P^rta
via qualcuno i bicchieri?
Nessuno li porta via.
Che cosa portate via?
Porto via i di Lei stivali jd i vestiti
del di Lei fratello.
EXERCISES.
80.
Do you go for any thing ? — I do go for something. — What da
you go for ? — I go for some cider.-r-Does your father send for any
tiling ? — He sends for some wine. — Does your servant go for
some bread ? — He goes for some. — For whom does your neigh-
bour send ? — He sends for the physician. — Does your servant take
off his coat in order to make the fire ? — He does take it off in
order to make it. — Do you take off your gloves in order to give
me some money ? — I do take them off in order to give you some.
— Do you learn French ? — I do learn it. — Who learns English ?
— The Frenchman learns it. — Does your brother learn German 1
— He does learn it, — Do we learn Italian ? — You do learn it. —
What do the English learn ? — They learn French and German
— Do you speak Spanish ? — No, Sir, I speak Italian. — Who speaks
Polish ? — My brother speaks Polish. — Do our neighbours speak
Russian? — They do not speak Russian, but Arabic. — Do you
speak Arabic ? — No, I speak Greek and Latin. — What knife have
vou ? — I have an English knife. — What money have you there 1
113 TWENTY-SIXTH LESSON.
Is it Italian or Spanish money ? — It is Russian money. — Have
you c.n Italian hat ? — No, I have a Spanish hat. — Are you an
Englishman ? — No, I am a Frenchman. — Are you a Greek ?-
No, I am a Spaniard.
81.
Are these men Germans l — No, they are Russians. — Do th<
Russians speak Polish ? — They do not speak Polish, but Latin,
Greek, and Arabic. — Is your brother a merchant ? — No, he is a
joiner. — Are these men merchants ? — No, they are carpenters. —
Are you a cook ? — No, I am a baker. — Are we tailors ? — No, we
are shoemakers. Art thou a fool ? — I am not a fool. — What is
that man ? — He is a physician. — Do you wish me any thing ? —
I wish you a good morning. — What does the young man wish
me ? — He wishes you a good evening. — Do your children come to
me in order to wish me a good evening 1 — They come to you in
order to wish you a good morning. — Has the German black eyes ?
— No, he has blue eyes. — Has this man large feet ? — He has little
feet and a large nose. — Have you time to read my book ? — I have
no time to read it, but much courage to study Italian. — What dost
thou do instead of playing ? — I study instead of playing. — Dost
thou learn instead of writing ? — I write instead of learning. —
What does the son of our friend do ? — He goes into the garden
instead of doing his exercises. — Do the children of our neighbours
read ? — They write instead of reading. — What does our cook ?
— He makes a fire instead of going to the market. — Does youi
father sell his ox ? — He sells his horse instead of selling his ox.
82.
Does the son of the painter study English ? — He studies Greek
instead of studying English. Does the butcher kill oxen ? — He
kills sheep instead of killing oxen. — Do you listen to me ? — I do
listen to you. — Does your brother listen to me ? — He speaks instead
of listening to you. — Do you listen to what I am telling you ? — I
do listen to what you are telling me. — Dost thou listen to what thy
brother tells thee ? — I do listen to it. — Do the children of the phy-
sician listen to what we tell them 1 — They do not listen to it. — Do
you go to the theat~° ? — I am going to the warehouse instead ol
going to the theatre. — Are you willing to read my book ? — 1 ant
TWENTY-SEVENTH LESSON. 119
willing to read it, but not now ; I have sore eyes. Does your
father correct my exercises or those of my brother ? — He corrects
neither yours nor those of your brother. — Which exercises does
he correct ? — He corrects mine. — Do you take off your hat in
order to speak to my father ? — I do not take it off in order to
speak to him — Do you take off your boots ? — I do not take them
off. — Who takes off his hat ? — My friend takes it off. — Does he
take off his gloves ? — He does not take them off. — What do these
boys take off? — They take off their boots and their clothes. — Who
takes away the glasses ? — Your servant takes them away. — What
do your children take away ? — They take away the books and my
notes. — What do you take away ? — I take away nothing. — Do we
take away any thing ? — We take away our father's penknife and
our brothers' trunks. — Do you give me English or German cloth ? —
H give you neither English nor German cloth ; I give you French
cloth. — Do you read Spanish ? — I do not read Spanish, but Ger-
man.— What book is your brother reading ? — He is reading a
French book. Do you drink tea or coffee in the morning ? — I
drink tea. — Do you drink tea every morning ? — I drink some
every morning. — What do you drink ? — I drink coffee. — What
does your brother drink ? — He drinks tea. — Does he drink some
syery morning ? — He drinks some every morning. — Do your chil
iren drink tea? — They drink coffee instead of drinking tea —
What do we drink ? — We drink tea or coffee.
TWENTY-SEVENTH LESSON,
Lezione ventesima settima.
To wet, to moisten.
To show.
4 allow.
Bagnare 1.
Mostrare 1.
Far vedere.
Faccio vedere. Monro.
420
TWENTY-SEVENTH LESSON.
Thou showest.
He shows
To show some one.
Fai vedere.
Fa vedere.
Mostn.
Mostra.
li
Mostrare £aqualcuno.
Far vedere >
Do you show me your gun ?
1 do show it you.
What do you show ihe man ?
I show him my fine clothes.
The tobacco.
Tobacco (for smoking).
Snuff.
n
Mi fa Ella vedere
Mi mostra Ella
I
il di Lei schiop
po? o vole
mostrarmi
vostro schiop
po?
Glielo faccio vedere.
Che mostra Ella all' uomo ?
Gli mostro i miei begli abiti.
II tabacco.
Del tabacco da fumare.
Del tabacco in polvere.
Del tabacco da naso
To smoke.
The gardener.
The valet.
The concert.
To intend.
The ball.
Do vou intend to go to the ball Mis
evening?
I intend to go thither.
Fumare 1.
11 giardiniere.
II cameriere.
II concerto.
Pensare
Intendere*
3*2,^
do not take a prepo-
sition before th»
infinitive
II ballo.
La festa da ballo.
Pensa Ella andare alia festa da ballo
Btassera (or questa sera)?
Penso andarci.
To know. Sapere* 2. (Lesson XXIV).
To swim. Nuotare 1.
Do you know how to swim ? Sa Ella nuotare ?
Obs. To know is in English followed by how to before the infinitive, whilst
n Italian the infinitive joined to the verb sapere is not preceded by any p-irtfclf
Do you know how to write ? | SaElla scrivere?
Does he know how to read ? Sa egli leggere ?
To extinguish.
Do you extinguish the fiie ?
I do extinguish it.
He extinguishes it
Thou extinguishest it
Spegnere* 2 (or spenger<>* 2)
Spegne Ella il fuoco ?
Non lo spengo.
Fgli lo spegne.
Tu lo spegni.
TVvENTV-bEVENTH LESSON.
To 7ight. to kindle. Accendere* 2.
Ill
Often.
0* you often go to the ball 1
Km often as you.
as often as I.
As often as he.
As often as they.
Do you often see my father ?
Oftener.
I sea him oftener than you.
Not so often.
Not so often as you.
Not so often as I.
Not so often as they.
Spesso (spesse volte, sovente).
Va Ella spesso alia festa da ballo ?
Cosi spesso che Lei. o tanto spesso
quanto voi.
Cosi spesso come Lei
Spesso quanto Lei.
Cosi spesso che me.
Cosi spesso come lui.
► Cosi spesso come lore
! Spesso come loro.
Vede Ella spesso mio padre')
Piit spesso.
Lo vedo piu spesso di Lei.
{ Meno spesso.
( Non tanto spesso.
Meno sovente di Lei.
Meno spesso di me.
Meno spesso di loro.
EXERCISES.
83.
What does your father want ? — He wants some tobacco. — Will
you go for some ? — I will go for some. — What tobacco does he
want ? — He wants some snuff. — Do you want tobacco (for smok-
ing) ? — I do not want any ; I do not smoke. — Do you show me
any thing ? — I show you gold ribbons (dei nastri d' oro). — Does
your father show his gun to my brother? — He does show it him.
— Does he show «him his beautiful birds ? — He does show them to
him. — Does the Frenchman smoke ? — He does not smoke. Do
vou go to the ball ? — I go to the theatre, instead of going to the
ball. — Does the gardener go into the garden? — He goes to the
market instead of going into the garden. — Do you send your valet
(:7 cameriere) to the tailor ? — I send him to the shoemaker instead
of sending him to the tailor. — Does your brother intend to go to
the ball this evening ? — He does not intend to go to the ball, but
122
TWENTY-SEVENTH LESSON.
(o the concert. — When do you intend to go to the concert ? — 1 ji
tend to go there this evening. — At what o'clock ? — At a quartei
past ten. — Do you go for my son ? — I do go for him. — Where h
he ? — He is in the counting-house. — Do you find the man whom
you are looking foi ? — I do find him. — Do your sons find th<
friends whom they are looking for ? — They do not find them.
84.
Do your friends intend to go to the theatre ? — They do intend
to go thither. — When do they intend to go thither ? — They intend
to go thither to-morrow. — At what o'clock ? — At half past seven.
— What does the merchant wish to sell you ? — He wishes to sell
me some pocket-books. — Do you intend to buy some ? — I will nc'
buy any. — Dost thou know any thing ? — I do not know any thing.
— What does your little brother know ? — He knows how to writ*
and to read ? — Does he know French ? — He does not know it.-
Do you know German ? — I do know it. — Do your brothers know
Greek ? — They do not know it, but they intend to study it. — Do
you know English 1 — I do not know it, but I intend to learn it. —
Do my children know how to read Italian 1 — They know how to
read, but not how to speak it. — Do you know how to swim ? — I
do not know how to swim, but how to play. — Does your son know
how to make coats ? — He does not know how to make any ; he is
no tailor. — Is he a merchant ? — He is not (non V e). — What is
he ? — He is a physician. — Do you intend to study Arabic ? — I do
intend to study Arabic and Syriac. — Does the Frenchman know
Russian ? — He does not know it, but he intends learning it.—
Whither are you going ? — I am going into the garden in order to
speak to my gardener. — Does he listen to you ? — He does listen
to me.
85.
Do you wish to drink some cider ? — I wish to drink some wine ,
have you any ? — I have none ; but I will send for some. — When
will you send for some ? — Now. — Do you know how to make tea ?
I know how to make some. — Where is your father going ? — He
goes no where ; he remains at home. — Do you know how to
write a note ? — I know how to write one. — Can you write exer
cises ? — I can write some. — Dost thou conduct any body ? — J
TWENTY-EIGHTH LESSON. 123
jonduct nobody. — Whom do you conduct ? — I conduct my son.
— Where do you conduct him ? — I conduct him to my friends to
{per) wish them a good morning. — Does your servant conduct
your child ? — He conducts him. — Whither does he conduct it ? —
He conducts it into the garden. — Do we conduct any one ? — We
conduct our children. — Whither are our friends conducting their
ions ? — They are conducting them home.
86.
Do you extinguish the fire? — I do not extinguish it. — Does
your servant light the fire ? — He does light it. — Where does he
light it ? — He lights it in your warehouse. — Do you often go to
the Spaniard ? — I go often to him. — Do you go oftener to him
than I ? — I go oftener to him than you. — Do the Spaniards often
come to you ?— They do come often to me. — Do your children
oftener go to the ball than we ? — They do go thither oftener than
you. — Do we go out as often as our neighbours ? — We do go out
oftener than they. — Does your servant go to the market as often
as my cook ? — He does go thither as often as he. — Do you see
my father as often as I ? — I do not see him as often as you. —
When do you see him ? — I see him every morning at a quartei
to five.
TWENTY-EIGHTH LESSON.
Lezione ventesima ottava.
We have seen in many of the foregoing lessons and exercises that the Italian*
lave no particular way to construe interrogative sentences; all depends on th«
one wiih wtiich the sentence is pronounced. The F.nglish intei rogative aux-
Jiaries, (to and am, therefore, are not generally rendered in Italian. Sometime*
may be rendered by forse, which signi fies perhaj>sy why, as will be setv
by the following examples : —
lS4
TWENTY-EIGHTH LESSON.
Do 1 wuh ?
Am I able 'i
Am I doing!
What am I doing?
What do I say ?
Where am I going to 7
To whom do I speak 7
Am I going?
Am I coming ?
You are coming.
Do you tell or say 7
1 do say or tell.
He says or tells.
What does he say 7
We say.
Do 1 speak ?
Do I love or like 7
Are you acquainted with that man 7
! am not acquainted with him.
Is your brother acquainted with him?
He is acquainted with him.
Do you drink cider?
I do drink cider, but my brother drinks
wine.
T)o you receive a note to-day?
I do receive one.
What do we receive?
W hat do our children receive 7
i hey receive some books.
To begin, to commence.
I begin to speak.
Voglio 7
Voglio forse?
Posso ?
Posso forse?
Faccio (or fo) ?
Faccio forse ?
< Cosa faccio ?
C Che cosa faccio?
( Cosa dico?
( Che dico 7
Ove vado?
A chi parlo ?
Vado ? Vado forse 7
Vengo ? Vengo forse T
Ella viene.
Dice Ella?
Dico.
Egli dice.
Che dice egli 7
Diciamo.
Parlo 7 Parlo forse 7
Amo ? Amo forse 7
Conosce Ella colui 7 o quell' acn*i 1
Non lo conosco.
Lo conosce il di Lei fratello 7
Egli lo conosce.
Beve Ella del cidro?
Bevo del cidro, ma mio fratello btnrt
del vino.
Riceve Ella oggi un biglietto 7
Ne ricevo uno.
Lo ricevo.1
Che riceviamo 7
Che ricevono i nostri fanciulli I
Essi ricevono dei libri.
{ Principiare 1.
( Cominciare 1 (incominciare).
Principio (incomincio) a parlare.
1 Lno, in the sense of an indefinite article, can in Italian never stand at the
imd of a sentence; in its stead the pronoun is used before the vero, or joined
oit.
TWKN.Y-EIGHTH LESSON.
12a
Before.
On you speak before you listen ?
D<ies he go to the market before he
breakfasts 1
Prima dr.
Innanzi di (che).
k Avanti di.
Parla Ella prima d' ascoltare 1
Va egli al mercato prima di far cola
zione.
To breakfast.
He g'jes thither before he writes.
Do you take off your gloves before you
take off your boots'?
Far colazione.
Egli ci va prima di scrivere.
Si leva Ella i guanti prima di evar?
gli stivali ?
To depart, to set out. Partire* 3 (regular in Pres-
When do you intend to depart?
i intend to depart to-morrow.
Well.
Badly.
Do I speak well ?
You do not speak badly
ent).
Quando pensa Ella partire 1
Penso partire domani
Bene.
Male.
Parlo bene?
Ella non parla male.
D*-es your brother know Italian? I Sa 1' italiano il di Lei fratello?
Obs. When a tense of a verb is a monosyllable, or when it has the accent on
the last syllable, the pronoun may follow it, but the consonant must be doubled.
This applies more generally to poetry than prose. Ex.
He knows it Egli sallo (instead of lo sa).
Who knows English ?
My father knows it.
Chi sa 1' Inglese ?
Mio padre sallo (lo sa is moie elegant).
EXERCISES.
87.
Do I read well ? — You do read well. — Do I speak well ? — You
do not speak well. — Does my brother speak French well ? — He
speaks it well. — Does he speak German well ? — He speaks it
badly. — Do we speak well ? — You speak badly. — Do I drink too
Tiuch ? — You do not ^ — '• .ough. — Arr. I able to make hats ? —
You are not able to ■ { ; you are not a hatter. — Am I able
to wriie a note ? — You ai's «ule to write one. — Am I doing my
exercise well ? —You are doing it well. — What am I doing ? — Y on
126 TWENTY-EIGHTH LESSON.
are doing exercises. — What is my brother doing ? — H3 is doing
nothing. — What do I say ? — You say nothing. — Do I begin to
speak ? — You do begin to speak. — Do I begin to speak well ? —
You do not begin to speak well (a parlar bene), but to read well
(ma a legger bene). — Where am I going ? — You are going to
your friend. — Is he at home ? — Do I know ? — Am I able to speak
as often as the son of our neighbour ? — He is able to speak oftenei
than you. — Can I work as much as he? — You cannot work as
much as he. — Do I read as often as you ? — You do not read as
often as I, but you speak oftener than I. — Do I speak as well
(cosl bene) as you ? — You do not speak so well as I. — Do I go
(yengo) to you, or do you come to me ? — You come to me, and I
go (vengo) to you. — When do you come to me ? — Every morning
at half past six.
88.
Do you know the Russian whom I know ? — I do not know the
one you know, but I know another. — Do you drink as much cider
as wine ? — I drink less of the latter than of the former. — Does
the Pole drink as much as the Russian ? — He drinks just as
much. — Do the Germans drink as much as the Poles? — The
latter drink more than the former. — Dost thou receive any thing ?
— I do receive something. — What dost thou receive ? — I receive
some money. — Does your friend receive books ? — He does receive
some. — What do we receive ? — We receive some cider. — Do the
Poles receive tobacco ? — They do receive some. — From whom (da
chi) do the Spaniards receive money ? — They receive some from
the (degV) English, and from the (dai) French. — Do you receive
as many friends as enemies ? — I receive less of the latter than of
the former. — From whom (da chi) do your children receive
books ? — They receive some from me and from their friends.
—Do I receive as much cheese as bread ?— You receive more of
the latter than of the former. — Do our servants receive as many
waistcoats as coats? — They receive less of the latter than of the
former. — Do you receive one more gun ? — I do receive one more.
— How many more books does our neighbour receive ? — He re
aeives three mors.
TWENTY- EIGHTH LESSON. 1*7
89.
When does the foreigner intend to depart ? — He intends to de-
part to-day. — At what o'clock ? — At half past one. — Do you in
tend to depart this evening ? — I intend to depart to-morrow.—
Does the Frenchman depart to-day ? — He departs now. Where
is he going to ? — He is going to his friends. — Is he going to the
English ? — He is going to them [ci va). — Dost thou set out to-
morrow ? — I set out this evening. — When do you intend to write
to your friends ? — I intend to write to them to-day. — Do your
friends answer you ? — They do answer me. — Does your fathei
any wer your note ? — He answers it. — Do you answer my brotners'
notrs ? — I do answer them. — Does your brother begin to learn
Itahin ? — He begins to learn it. — Can you speak French? — I
can speak it a little. — Do our friends begin to speak German ?
— Tiey do begin to speak it. — Are they able to write it? — They
are oble to write it. — Does the merchant begin to sell ? — He does
begin. — Do you speak before you listen ? — I listen before I speak.
— Does your brother listen to you before he speaks ? — He speaks
before he listens to me. — Do your children read before they
write ? — They write before they read.
90.
Does your servant sweep the warehouse before he goes to the
market ? — He goes to the market before he sweeps the warehouse.
— Dost thou drink before thou goest out ? — I go out before I drink.
— Do you intend to go out before you breakfast? — 1 intend
to breakfast before I go out. — Does your son take off his boots
before he takes off his coat ? — He neither takes off his boots
nor his coat. — Do I take off my gloves before I take off my hat ?
— You take off your hat before you take off your gloves. — Can
I take off my boots before I take off my gloves ? — You can-
not take off your boots before you take off your gloves. — At
what o'clock do you breakfast ? — I breakfast at half past eight. —
At what o'clock does the American breakfast ? — He breakfasts
every day at nine o'clock. — At what o'clock do your children
breakfast ? — They breakfast at seven o'clock. — Do you go to my
father before you breakfast ? — I go to him before I breakfast.
TWENTY-NINTH LESSON.
Lezione ventesima nona
We have seen (Lessons XVI and XXVII.} that the comparative of equalitj
is formed by come, tanto, quanto, altrettanto, cost ; the comparative of superioritj
by pin, and that of minority by meno. As for the superlative, it is formed b)
changing the last vowel of the adjective for the masculine into jssimo, and foi
the feminine into issi/na. Ex.
Positive.
Comparative.
Superlative.
Learned,
more learned,
most learned.
Dotto,
piu dotto,
dottissimo.
Poor,
poorer,
poorest.
Povero,
piii povero,
poverissimo.
Wise,
wiser,
wisest.
Savio,
piii savio,
saviissimo.1
Pious,
more pious,
most pious.
Pio,
piii pio,
piissimo.
Rich,
richer,
richest.
Ricco,
piii ricco,
ricchissimo
Cool,
cooler,
coolest.
Fresco
piu fresco,
freschissimo.
Broad,
broader,
broadest.
Largo,
piu largo,
larghissimo.
Often,
oftener,
most ofteii.
Spesso,
piu spesso,
spessissimo.
Obs. A. From these examples it may be seen that the superlative is always
formed by joining to the adjective in the plural the syllable ssimo.
Obs. B. The relative superlative, i. e. when the article the is joined to most
or least, ia expressed by il piu, il meno, for the masculine, and by la piu, la meno,
for the feminine. Ex.
The greatest.
The smallest.
The finest.
The least fine.
II piu grande.
II meno grande.
II piu bello.
11 meno bello.
his book is small, that is smaller, and
this is the smallest of all.
This hat is large, but that is larger.
Is your hat as large as mine ?
It is larger than yours.
It is not so large as yours.
Are our neighbour's children as good
as ours 1
Questo libro S piccolo, quello £ piii
piccolo e cotesto S il piu piccolo di
tutti.
Questo cappello & grande, ma quello
& piu grande.
II di Lei cappello S cosi grande com*
il mio ?
E piii grande del di Lei.
E meno grande del di Lei.
I fanciulli del nostro vicino sono cosi
savi come i nostril
1 Many grammarians form the plural of savio into savi, instead of savii
According to this formation the superlative would be savissimo, instead of
taviisrimo.
TWENTY-NINTH LESSON.
129
They are better than ours.
They are not so good as ours.
He is the hanniest man in the world.
Sono piu savi del nostrl.
Sono meno savi del nostri.
Egli <• il piu felice degli uomini (or
fra gli uomini).
A very fine book.
Very fine books.
A very pretty knife.
Very well.
Un bellissimo libro.
Dei bellissimi libri.
Un leggiadrissimo coltello.
Benissimo.
Questi £ dottissimo.
Cluesto uccello e vezzosissimo.
That man is extremely learned.
This bird is very pretty.
Obs. C. MoUo and assai serve also to form absolute superlatives. Ex.
Very wise. Molto savio.
Very large. Assai grande.
Obs. D. The prefix arci also serves to form an absolute superlative. Ex.
Very handsome. i Arcibello.
Extremely long. Arcilunghissimo.
Obs. E. To some words the particle stra may be prefixed to form an absolute
superlative. Ex.
Over rich. i Straricco.
Over done (cooked). | Stracotto.
Obs. F. The following adjectives are irregular in the formation of theii
comparatives and superlatives : —
Positive. Comparative. Superlative.
Good,
better,
best.
Buono,
migliore,
ottimo.
Bad,
worse,
the worst.
Cattivo,
peggiore,
pessimo.
Great,
greater,
greatest.
Grande,
maggiore,
massimo.
Little,
less,
the least.
ADVE
Piccolo,
:bbs.
minore,
minimo
WeU,
better,
tka best.
Bene,
meglio,
ottimamente.
Bad,
worse,
the worst.
Male,
peggio,
pessimamente
The least noise hurts me.
The least thing hurts him.
II minimo strepito mi fa male.
La minima cosa gli fa male.
Obt. G. In Italian the repetition of the positive forms a superlative. Ex.
A very learned man i Un uomo dotto dotto.
The weather is very cold. II tempo S freddo freddo.
This seems to me most ugly. Questo mi sembra brutto Drntto
She is the finest woman in the world. E la bella delle belle.
Obs. H. Superlative adverbs are formed by joining to the adjective m
the plural .he termination ss-ymamenU Ex.
130
TWENTY-NINTH LESSON.
Learned — most learnedly.
Prudent — moat prudently.
Rich — most richly.
Whose ?
Whose hat is this 1
It is.
It is my orother's hat.
(t is the hat of my brother.
It is my brother's.
Who has the finest hat 1
Whose hat is the finest ?
That of my father is the finest.
Whose ribbon is the handsomer,
yours or mine ?
Do you read as often as I ?
( read oftener than you.
Does he read as often as I ?
He reads and writes as often as you.
Do your children write as much as
we?
They write more than you.
We read more than the children of our
friends.
To whom do you write.
We write to our friends.
We read good books.
D«.tto — dottissimamente
Prudente — prudentissimamentc
Ricco — ricchissimamente.
Di chi ?
Di chi e questo cappello 1
E.
E il cappello di mio fratello.
Chi ha il piu bel cappello ?
duello di mio padre d il piu. bello.
dual e" il piu bel nastro, il di Lei, 1
vostro o il mio ?
Legge Ella cosi spesso come io ?
Leggo piu spesso di Lei.
Legge egli cosi spesso come io 1
Egli legge e scrive cosi spesso con*
Ella (or legge e scrive spesso al
pari di Lei).
Scrivono quanto noi i di Lei fan
ciulli ?
Eglino scr'vono piu dl Loro, or piu
di Voi.
Noi leggiamo piu deC fanciulli del
nostri amici.
A chi scrivete Voi 1
Scriviamo ai nostri amici.
Leggiamo dei buoni libri
EXERCISES.
91.
Whose book is this ? — It is mine. — Whose hat is that ? — It is
my father's. — Are you taller than I ? — I am taller than you. — Is
your brother as tall as you ? — He is as tall as I. — Is thy hat as
bad as that of my father ? — It is better, but not so black as his. —
&re the clothes of the Italians as fine as those of the Irish ? — They
are finer, but not so good. — Who have the finest gloves? — The
French have them. — Who has the finest horses ? — Mine are fine.
TWENTY-NINTH LESSON. 18)
yours are finer than mine ; but those of our friends are the finest
of all. — Is your horse good ? — It is good, but yours is better, and
that of the Englishman is the best of all the horses which we
know. — Have you pretty boots ? — I have very pretty ones, but
my brother has prettier than I. — From whom (da chi) does he
receive them ? — He receives them from his best friend.
92.
Is your wine as good as mine ? — It is better. — Does your mer-
chant sell good knives ? — He sells the best knives that I know
(che conosca, subjunctive). — Do we read more books than the
French ? — We read more than they ; but the English read more
than we, and the Germans read the most (i plu). — Hast thou a
finer garden than that of our physician ? — I have a finer one than
he (del suo). — Has the American a finer stick than thou ? — He
has a finer one. — Have we as fine children as our neighbours ?—
We have finer ones. — Is your coat as pretty as mine ? — It is not
so pretty, but better than yours. — Do you depart to-day ?-—I do
not depart to-day. — When does your father set out ? — He sets out
this evening at a quarter to nine. — Which of these two children
is the better (savio) 1 — The one who studies is better than the one
who plays. — Does your servant sweep as well as mine ? — He
sweeps better than yours. — Does the Englishman read as many
bad books as good ones 1 — He reads more good than bad ones.
93.
Do the merchants sell more sugar than coffee ? — They sell
more of the latter than of the former. — Does your shoemaker
make as many boots as mine ? — He makes more than yours. —
Can you swim as well (cost bene) as my son ? — I can swim bet-
ter than he ; but he can speak French better than I. — Does he
read as well as you ? — He reads better than I. — Does the son of
your neighbour go to market ? — No, he remains at home ; he has
sore feet. — Do you learn as well as the son of on** gardener? —
i learn better than he, but he studies better than I. — Whose gun
is the finest ? — Yours is very fine, but that of ihe captain is still
finer, and ours is the finest of all. — Has any one finer cnildren
than you ? — No one has finer ones. — Does your son read as often
as I ? — He reads oftener than you.— Does my brother speak
132
THIRTIETH LESSON.
French as often as you ? — He speaks and reads it as often as Ji
— Do I write as much as you ? — You write more than I. — Dc
our neighbours' children read German as often as we ? — We qc
not read it as often as they. — Do we write as often as they t—
They write oftener than we. — To whom do they write ? — Tne'
write to their friends. — Do you read English books ? — W e reaJ
French books instead of reading English books.
THIRTIETH LESSON.
Lezione trentesima.
To believe.
To put on,
I put on my hat.
He puts on his gloves.
Do you put on your boots 7
We do put them on.
What do your brothers put on 7
They put on their clothes.
Whither do you conduct me 7
I conduct you to m; father.
Do you go out.
I do go out.
Do we go out 7
We do go out.
When does your father go out 7
Early.
Credere 2.
Mettere,* mettersi.
Metto il mio cappello.
Mi metto il cappello.
Si mette i guanti.
Mette i suoi guanti.
Si mettono gli stivali7
Ce li mettiamo.
Che si mettono i di Lei fratelli 7
Si mettono i loro vestiti.
Ove mi conduce Ella 7
La conduco lal padre mio, tor tf
conduco da mio padre.
Esce Ella 7 or Usidte Vol 7
Esco.
Usciamo Noi7
Usciamo.
Quando esce il di Lei padre 7
Am early as you.
Per tempo.
Di buon1 or a.
A buon1 ora.
Presto.
LCosi per tempo come Ella.
f Cosi di buon' ora come Eli*.
THIRTIETH LESSON.
182
He /poos out as early as you.
Erfi esce cosi per temp* come Ella,
or che Vol.
Late.
Tardi.
Too.
Troppo.
Too late.
Troppo tardi.
r Troppo di buon' ora (troppo a buo»
Poo Boon, too early.
j ora).
v Troppo per tempo. Troppo presto.
Too large, too great
Troppo grande.
Too little.
Troppo piccolo.
Too much.
Troppo.
Do you speak too
much?
Parla Ella troppo ?
I do not speak enough.
Non parlo abbastanza.
Later than
you.
Piu tardi di Lei.
I go out later than
you.
Esco piu tardi di Lei. .
. >o you go to the play as early as I ?
k go thitner earlier than you.
Sooner.
Earlier.
Ooee your father go thither earlier
iuan I 7
He goes thither too early.
Va Ella alio spettacolo cosi di buon
ora come io 7
Ci vado pivi di buon' ora di Lei (ptt
presto di Lei).
Piu presto (piu tosto).
[ Piu per tempo.
I Piil di ouorC ora.
Ci va il di ( piii presto di me?
Lei padre c piu per tempo di me 1
troppo di buon' ore,
troppo presto.
Ci va
Already.
Do you speak already 7
Not— yet.
I do not speak yet.
Do you finish your note?
I do not finish it yet.
Do you breakfast already 7
Do you come to see me ? Viene Ella a vedermi ? Venite to! a
n vedermi ?
06«. A. Verbs of motion always require the preposition a (ad before a voweU
*nd verbs of rest the preposition in. Ex.
Gid di gia.
Parla Ella digik?
{ Non — ancora.
( Non — per anco.
Non parlo ancora (per anco).
Finisce Ella il di Lei biglietto 1
Non lo finisco ancora.
Fa Ella gia colazione?
134
THIRTIETH LESSON.
I go to Bee my children.
I send for some wine.
I am sending for the physician.
I am going to the theatre.
I stay in the garden (in the room).
Vado a vedere i miei fanciculi.
Mando a cercare del vino.
Mando a cercare il medico
Vado al teatro.
Resto in giardino (in camera), or vat
ne std in camera.
Obs. B. But as we have seen in the foregoing lessons, the infinitive is it
Italian sometimes preceded by di (Lesson XVII), sometimes by a or ad (Le*
ions XXV., XXVIII., and this), sometimes by per (Lesson XX.), and some
times it is simply used without any of these prepositions before it. The lattei
is the case when it is joined to one of the following verbs, some of which have
already been exemplified in some of the preceding lessons, such as: vcltrt* to
wish, to be willing (Lesson XVIII.); potere,* to be able, can (Lesson XX.) j
far vedere, to show (Lesson XVXIL); pensare, intendere, to intend to (Les-
sons XXVII. and XXVIII.).
Bisognare,
Calcolare,
Credere,
Degnare o £
degnarsi, S
Desiderare,
Dichiarare,
Dovere,*
Fare,*
Intendere,*
Lasciare,
to be requisite,
to intend to
to believe.
to deign.
to wish.
to declare.
to owe.
to do.*
to hear, to intend.
to let.
Negare,
Osare, ardire,*
Parere,*
Pensare,
Potere,*
Pretendere,*
Sapere,*
Sembrare,
Sostenere,*
Vedere,*
Volere,*
to deny.
to dare.
to appear.
to think.
to be able (can).
to pretend.
to know.
to appear.
to maintain.
to see.
to be willing, to want
It is necessary to do that.
[ intend going to the play.
He thinks he is able to do it.
He deigns to give it me.
He wishes to speak to the king.
I declare I cannot do that.
I ought to go there.
He sends me word.
I intend to speak to him.
He lets me do it.
He says he cannot do it.
I dare to go there ; I dare to do it
They seem to say.
i intend to make a journey.
Can you give me a franc'?
He pretends he can do it.
[ can do it ; I know how to do it
IZAMPLKB.
Bisogna far cid.
Calcolo andare alio spettacolo.
Egli crede poterlo fare.
Eli si degna darmelo.
Egli desidera parlare al re.
Dichiaro non potere far cid.
Devo andarci.
Egli mi fa dire, or Egli mi manda a
dire.
Intendo parlargli.
Egli me Io lascia fare.
Egli nega poterlo fare.
Oso andarci ; ardisco farlo.
Eglino paiono dire, or sembra ettf
essi dicono.
Penso far un viaggio.
Pi|5 Ella darmi un franco I
Egli pretende poterlo fare
So farlo.
THIRTIETH LESSON. 18*
Bs seems to have a wish to do it. Egii sembra volerlo (are.
I maintain I can do it.
We see him come.
Will you do me a favour ?
Sostengo saperlo fare.
Lo vediamo venire.
Vuol Ella farmi unpiacerel
Oba. C. Further, there is no preposition before the infinitive when it is used
in an absolute sense. Ex.
To eat too much is dangerous. Mangiare troppo e pericoloso.
To speak too much is foolish. Pariar troppo £ imprudente.
To do good to those that have offended j Far del bene a quelli chi ci hanno of*
us, is a commendable action. feso, e un' azione lodevole.
EXERCISES.
94.
Do you put on another coat in order to go to the play ? — I do
put on another. — Do you put on your gloves before you put on
your boots ? — I put on my boots before I put on my gloves. —
Does your brother put on his hat instead of putting on his coat 1
— He puts on his coat before he puts on his hat. — Do our children
put on their boots in order to go to our friends ? — They put them
on in order to go to them. — What do our sons put on ? — They put
on their clothes and their gloves. — Do you already speak French ?
— I do not speak it yet, but I begin to learn. — Does your father
go out already ? — He does not yet go out. — At what o'clock does
he go out ? — He goes out at ten o'clock. — Does he breakfast be-
fore he goes out 1 — He breakfasts and writes his notes before he
goes out. — Does he go out earlier than you ? — I go out earlier
than he. — Do you go to the play as often as I ? — I go thither as
often as you. — Do you begin to know that man ? — I do begin to
Know him. — Do you breakfast early ? — We do not breakfast late.
—Does the Englishman go to the concert earlier than you ? — He
foes there later than I. — At what o'clock does he go thither ?—
He goes thither at half- past eleven.
95.
Do you not go too early to the concert ? — I go thither too late.
— Do I write too much ? — You do not write too much, but you
speak too much. — Do I speak more than you? — You speak more
than I and my brother. — Is my hat too large ? — It is neither too
10
186 THIRTIETH LESSON.
large nor too small. — Do you speak French oftener than English!
— I speak English oftener than French. — Do your friends buy
much corn ? — They buy but little. — Have you bread enough ?
—I have only a little, but enough. — Is it late ? — It is not late. —
What o'clock is it 1 — It is one o'clock. — Is it too late to go to
youi father ? — It is too late to go to him. — Do you conduct me to
him ? — I do conduct you to him. — Where is he ? — He is in his
counting-house. — Does the Spaniard buy a horse ? — He cannot
buy one. — Is he poor ? — He is not poor ; he is richer than you.
— Is your brother as learned as you ? — He is more learned than
I, but you are more learned than he and I.
96.
Do you know that man ? — I do know him. — Is he learned ? —
He is the most learned of all the men that I know (conosca, sub-
junctive).— Is your horse worse than mine ? — It is not so bad as
yours. — Is mine worse than the Spaniard's ? — It is worse ; it is
the worst horse that I know (conosca, subjunctive). — Do you give
those men less bread than cheese ? — I give them less of the latter
than of the former. — Do you receive as much money as your
neighbours ? — I receive much more than they. — Who receives
the most money ? — The French receive the most.- — Can your son
already write a note ? — He cannot write one yet, but he begins
to read a little. — Do you read as much as the Russians? — We
read more than they, but the French read the most (piudi tuW\.
— Do the Americans write more than we ? — They write less than
we, but the Italians write the least (meno di tutti). — Are they as
rich as the Americans ? — They are less rich than they. — Are
your birds as fine as those of the Irish ? — They are less fine than
theirs, but those of the Spaniards are the least fine. — Do you sell
f 3ur bird ? — I do not sell it ; I like it too much to sell it.
THIRTY-FIRST LESSON.
Lezione trentesima prima.
THE PAST PARTICIPLE.
The past participle, when it is regular,1 always terminates in to. It is formed
rom the infinitive, whose termination is for the first conjugation changed inte
ito, thus: parlare — parlato ; for the second into uto, thus : venders — vendvioi
and for the third into ito, thus : servire — servito. Examples : —
FIRST CONJUGATION.
Inf.
p. p.
SECOND CONJUGATION.
Inf. .
p. p.
Parlare,
to speak,
parlato.
Vendere,
to sell,
vendiUo.
Comprare,
to buy,
comprato.
Credere,
to believe,
credvio.
Studiare,
to study,
ttudiato.
Ricevere,
to receive,
ricevuio
THIRD CONJUGATION.
Inf.
P. P.
Servire,
to serve,
servito.
Sentire,
to hear,
sentito.
Dormire,
o be — been.
to sleep,
dormito.
—stato.*
2
Essere*-
•
Have
you been to market 1
E Ella stata al mercato ?
Ob*. In Italian the auxiliary verb essere* is conjugated in its compound
wnses with the help of the same auxiliary, and not as in English.3
I have been there.
I have not been there.
Have I been there 1
You have been there.
You have not been there.
Has he been there ?
He has been there.
He has not been there.
Vi sono stato.
Non vi sono stato.
Vi sono stato 1
Vi siete stato.
Ella vi e4 stata.
Ella non vi £ stata.
Non vi siete stato.
Vi & stato egli 1
Egli vi £ stato.
Egli non vi & stato.
1 When it is irregular it will be separately noted.
* The pupils, in repeating the irregular verbs already given, must not fail to
aiark in their lists the past participles of those verbs.
3 The same is the case in German. Ex. : 3d? bin fca (jeroefett, I have been
mere. (See German Method, Lesson XLIII »
188
THIETY-F1RST LESSON.
Ever. Mai.
Never. -Non — mat.
Have you been at the ball 1
Have you ever been at the ball 7
I have never been there.
Thou hast never been there,
tie has never been there.
You have never been there.
Siete stato ai Dalio (alia feata da
ballo)?
E Ella stata al ballo (alia feata da
ballo)?
Siete mai stato al ballo ?
E Ella stata mai alia festa da ballol
Non vi sono mai stato.
Tn non vi sei mai stato.
Non vi e* mai stato.
Non vi siete mai stato.
Ella non vi £ mai stata.
:
Already or yet.
Have you already been at the play 1
I have already been there.
You have already been there.
Gid, di gia.
E Ella gia stata alio spettacoUl
Vi sono gia stato.
Ella vi e gik stata.
Vi siete gia stato.
Not yet.
I have not yet been there.
Thou hast not yet been there.
He has not yet been there.
You have not yet been there.
We have not yet been there.
Non — ancora (non per anco)
Non vi sono stato ancora.
Non vi sei per anco stato.
Egli non vi e ancora stato.
Non vi siete stato ancora.
Ella non vi e per anco stata.
Non vi siamo per anco stati.
Have you already been at my father's ?
I have not yet been there.
E Ella gia stata da mio padre'
Non vi sono per anco stato.
Where have you been this morning 1
I have been in the garden.
Where has thy brother been 1
He has been in the warehouse.
Has he been there as early as I ?
He has been there earlier than you.
Ove S Ella stata stamanel
Sono stato nel giardino.
Ove £ stato tuo fratello 1
Egli e stato nel magazzino.
Vi £ stato cosi presto come io 1
Vi e stato piu presto di Lei.
EXERCISES.
97.
Where have you been ? — I have been at the market. — Have
/ou been at the ball ? — I have been there. — Have I been to the
piay ? — You have been there. — Hast thou been there?— I have
THIRTY-FIRST LESSON. 139
not been inert. — Has your son ever been at the theatre ? — He has
never been there. — Hast thou already been in my warehouse ? —
I have never been there. — Do you intend to go thither ? — I intend
to go thither ? — When will you go thither ? — I will go thither to-
morrow— At what o'clock ? — At twelve o'clock. — Has your
brother already been in my large garden ? — He has not yet been
there. — Does he intend to see it ? — He does intend to see it. —
When will he go thither ? — He will go thither to-day. — Does
he intend to go to the ball this evening ? — He intends to go
thither. — Have you already been at the ball ? — I have not yet
been there. — When do you intend to go thither ? — I intend to
go thither to-morrow. — Have you already been in the French-
man's garden ? — I have not yet been in it. — Have you been
in my warehouses? — I have been there. — When did you go
there ? — I went there this morning. — Have I been in your
counting-house or in that of your friend ? — You have neither
been in mine nor in that of my friend, but in that of the Eng-
lishman.
98.
Has the Italian been in our warehouses or in those of the
Dutch ? — He has neither been in ours nor in those of the Dutch,
but in those of the Germans. — Hast thou already been at the
narket ? — I have not yet been there, but I intend to go thither.—
Has our neighbour's son been there ? — He has been there. —
When has he been there ? — He has been there to-day. — Does the
son of our gardener intend to goto the market? — He intends to
to thither. — What does he wish to buy there ? — He wishes to buy
.here some chickens, oxen, corn, wine, cheese, and cider. — Have
?ou already been at my brother's ? — I have already been there. —
Has your friend already been there ? — He has not yet been there.
— Have we already been at our friends' ? — We have not yet been
.here. — Have our friends ever been at our house ? — They have
lever been there. — Have you ever been at the theatre ? — I have
lever been there. — Have you a mind to write an exercise ? — I
»ave a mind to write one. — To whom do you wish to write a note ?
— I wish to write one to my son. — Has your father already been
it the concert ? — He has not yet been there, but he intends to go
140 THIRTY-FIRST LESSON.
there. — Does he intend to go there to-day ? — He intends to gt
there to-morrow. — At what o'clock will he set out ? — He will set
out at half-past six. — Does he intend to leave (partire) before he
breakfasts ? — He intends to breakfast before he leaves.
99.
Have you been to the play as early as I ? — I have been there
•arlier than you. — Have you often been at the concert ? — I have
often been there. — Has our neighbour been at the theatre as often
as we ? — He has been there oftener than we. — Do our friends go
to their counting-house too early ? — They go thither too late. — Do
they go thither as late as we ? — They go thither later than we. —
Do the English go to their warehouses too early ? — They go
thither too early. — Is your friend as often in the counting-house
as you ? — He is there oftener than I. — What does he do there ? —
He writes. — Does he write as much as you ? — He writes more
than I. — Where does your friend remain ? — He remains in his
counting-hduse. — Does he not go out? — He does not go out. —
Do you remain in the garden ? — I remain there. — Do you go to
your friend every day ? — I go to him everyday. — When does he
come to you 1 — He comes to me every evening. — Do you go any
where in the evening ? — I go no where ; I stay at home. — Do
you send for any one ? — I send for my physician. — Does your
servant go for any thing ? — He goes for some wine. — Have you
been any where this morning ? — I have been no where. — Where
has your father been ? — He has been no where. — When do you
drink tea ? — I drink some every morning. — Does your son drink
ooffee ? — He drinks tea. — Have you been to drink some cofFe* *
— I have been to drink some.
THIRTY-SECOND LESSON.
Lezione trentesima seconda.
To have — had.
Have you had my book ?
I have noi had it.
Have I had it?
You have had it.
You have not had it.
Thou hast not had it.
Has he had it 7
He has had it.
He has not had it.
Hast thou had the coat ?
I have not had it.
Avere* — avuto.
Ha Ella avuto il mio librot
Non 1' ho avuto.
L' ho avuto io ?
L' ha avuto.
Non P ha avuto.
Non 1' hai avuto.
L' ha egli avuto ?
Egli 1' ha avuto.
Egli non 1' ha avuto.
Hai avuto 1' abito?
Non P ho avuto.
Have you had the books'? | Ha Ella avuto i libri?
5jf* The past participle in Italian (the game as the adjective, Obs. Jt. Les-
»on XXII), when it is preceded by its object, must agree with it in number)
that is, if the object is in the plural, the past participle must be put in the same
number. It may, however, also agree when followed by its object; but the
,>ast participle of essere, to be, must always agree in number an 3 gender with
ts subject. Ex.
m have had them.
I have not had them.
Have I had them 1
You have had them.
You have not had them.
Has he had them ?
He has had them.
He has not had them.
Have you had any bread 1
I have had some.
I have not had any.
Have I had any ?
You have had some.
You have not had any.
Has he had any ?
He has not had any.
Li ho avuti.
Non li ho avuti.
Li ho io avuti 1
Li ha avuti.
Ella Non li ha avuti.
avete avuti.
Li ha egli avuti 1
Egli li ha avuti.
Non li ha avuti.
Voi non li
Ha Ella avuto del pane 1
Ne ho avuto.
Non ne ho avuto.
Ne ho avuto io ?
Ella Ne ha avuto, or Voi ne avete
avuto.
Ella Non ne ha avuto. Voi non ne
avete avuto
Ne Ne ha egli avuto 1
Egli non ne ha avuto.
142
THIRTY-SECONl' LESSON.
Have you had any knives ?
I have had some,
I have not had any.
What has he had ?
He has had nothing
Ha Ella avuto Aei coltelli 1
Ne ho avuti.
Non ne ho avuti.
Che ha egli avuto ?
Egli non ha avuto niente.
Have you been hungry 1
I have been afraid.
He has never been either right or
wrong.
t Ha Ella avuto fame 1
t Ho avuto paura.
t Egli non ha mai avuto torto o4
ragione.
To take place. f Aver luogo.
That (meaning that thing). Cid, quello.
Does the ball take place this evening 1 t Ha luogo stassera la festa da ballo »
It does take place. I t Ha luogo.
It takes place this evening. t Essa ha luogo questa sera.
It does not take place to-day. t Non ha luogo quest' oggi.
When did the ball take place 1
It took place yesterday.
t Quando ha avuto luogo la festa ds
ballo?
t Ha avuto luogo ieri.
Yesterday.
The day before yesterday.
Ieri.
L' altro ieri.
How many times (how often) 1
Once.
Twice.
Thrice (three times).
Many times.
Several times.
Formerly.
{ Quante volte ?
I Quante fiate? (not much used.)
Una volta.
Due volte (fiate).
Tre volte.
Molte volte.
Varie volte (diverse volte).
Sometimes.
Dc yoa go sometimes to the ball ?
I go sometimes.
JAltre volte (altra volta).
Altrefate.
SQualche volta.
Talvolta.
( Talora.
Va Ella qualche volta alia festa it
ballo 1 or andate voi alia few! a <k
ballo 1
Y\ vado qualche volta.
THIRTY -SECOND LESSON.
148
Gone.
Gone thither.
Hare you gone thither sometimes'}
i have gone thither often.
Oftener than you.
Have the men had my trunk 7
They have not had it
Who has had it 1
Have they had my knives 1
They have not had them.
Have I been wrong in buying books 1
You have not been wrong in buying
some.
Singing rejoices.
Andato.
Andatoci (andatovl).
Vi e Ella andata qualche volUl
Ci sono andato spesso.
Piu spesso di Lei.
Hanno avuto il mio baule gii
mini )
Non lo hanno avuto.
Chi 1' ha avuto ?
Hanno avuto i miei coltelli 1
Non li hanno avuti.
Ho avuto io torto di comprar librit
Non ha avuto torto di comprarne.
H cantare rallegra.
Obs. The infinitives and adverbs are sometimes used in Italian substan
tively, and preceded by the article.
Jesting is permitted.
Flattery is despicable.
I do «ot know either when or how.
Lo scherzare 6 permesso.
U adulare d cosa vile.
Io non so ne il quando, n£ il come.
EXERCISES
100.
Have you had my pocket-book ? — I have, had it. — Have you
had my glove 1 — I have not had it. — Hast thou had my umbrella 1
— I have not had it. — Have I had your knife ? — You have had it.
— When have I nad it ? — You have had it yesterday. — Have i
had your gloves ? — You have had them. — Has your brother had
my wooden hammer ? — He has had it. — Has he had my golden
ribbon ? — He has not had it. — Have the English had my beauti-
ful ship ? — They have had it. — Who has had my linen (di lino)
handkerchiefs I — Your servants have had them. — Have we had
the iron trunk of our good neighbour ? — We have had it. — Have
we had his fine gun ? — We have not had it. — Have we had the
mattresses of the foreigners ? — We have not had them. — Has the
American had my good book ? — He has had it. — Has he had my
•ilver knife ? — He has not had it. — Has the young man had the
first volume of my work ? — He has not had the first, but th#
U4 THIRTY-SECOND LESSON.
Becond. — Has he had it ? — Yes, Sir, he has had it. — When hai
he had it? — He has had it this morning. — Have you had any
sugar ?— I have had some. — Have I had any pepper ?— -You have
not had any. — Has the cook of the Russian captain had any
chickens ? — He has had some. He has not had any.
101.
Has the Frenchman had good wine ? — He has had some, and
ne has still (ancora) some. — Hast thou had large books ? — I have
had some. — Has thy brother had any ? — He has not had any. —
Has the son of our gardener had any butter ? — He has had some.
— Have the Poles had good tobacco ? — They have had some. —
What tobacco have they had ? — They have had tobacco and snufF.
— Have the English had as much sugar as tea ? — They have had
as much of the one as of the other. — Has the physician been
right? — He has been wrong. — Has the Dutchman been right
or wrong ? — He has never been either right or wrong. — Have
[ been wrong in buying honey ? — You have been wrong in buy-
ing some. — What has the painter had ? — He has had fine
pictures. — Has he had fine gardens ? — He has not had any. —
Has your servant had my boots ? — He has not had them. — What
has the Spaniard had ? — He has had nothing. — Who has had
courage ? — The English sailors have had some. — Have the Ger-
mans had many friends ? — They have had many. — Have we had
more friends than enemies ? — We have had more of the latter
than of the former. — Has your son had more wine than cider ?—
He has had more of the latter than of the former. — Has the Turk
had more pepper than corn ? — He has had less of the latter than
of the former. — Has the Italian painter had any thing ? — He has
had nothing.
102.
Have I been right in writing to my brother ? — You have not
been wrong in writing to him. — Have you had a sore foot ?— -I
have had a sore eye. — Have you had any thing good ? — I have
had nothing bad. — Did the ball take place yesterday ? — It did not
take place. — Does it take place to-day ? — It takes place to-moi.
row. — When does the ball take place ? — It takes place this eve
THIRTY -SECOND LESSCtf. 145
ning. — Did it take place the day before yesterday ? — It did take
place. — At what o'clock did it take place ? — It took place (ha
avuto luogo) at eleven o'clock. — Did you go to my brother's ? — i
went thither. — How many times have you been at my friend's
house ? — I have been there twice. — Do you go sometimes to the
theatre ? — I go thither sometimes (talvolta). — How many times
have you been at the theatre ? — I have been there only once.—
Have you sometimes been at the ball ? — I have often been there.
—Has your brother ever gone to the ball ? — He has never gone
thither. — Has your father sometimes gone to the ball ? — He went
thither formerly. — Has he gone thither as often as you ? — He his
gone thither oftener than I. — Dost thou go sometimes into the
garden ? — I go thither sometimes. — Hast thou often been there ?
—I have often been there ? — Does your old cook often go to the
market ? — He goes thither often. — Does he go thither as often as
rny gardener ? — He goes thither oftener than he. — Did that take
place ? — It did take place. — When did that take place ?
103.
Did you formerly go to the ball ? — I went thither sometimes. —
When hast thou been at the concert 1 — I was there {vi sono stato)
the day before yesterday. — Didst thou find any body there ? — I
found (non vi ho trovato) nobody there. — Hast thou gone to the
ball oftener than thy brothers ? — I have not gone thither so often
as they. — Has your friend often been at the play ? — He has been
there many times. — Have you sometimes been hungry ? — I have
often been hungry. — Has your valet (il cameriere) often been
thirsty ? — He has never been either hungry or thirsty. — Did you
go to the play early ? — I went thither late. — Did I go to the ball
as early as you ? — You went thither earlier than I. — Did your
brother go thither too late ? — He went thither too early. — Have
your brothers had any thing ? — They have had nothing. — Who
has had my sticks and gloves ? — Your servant has had both.—
Has he had my hat and my gun ? — He has had both. — Hast
thou had my horse or my brother's ? — I have had neither yours
nor your brother's. — Have I had your note or the physician's ? —
You have had neither the one nor the other. — What has the phy-
•ioian had ? — He has had nothing.— Has any body had my gold
146
THIRTY-THIRD LESSON-
candlestick ? — Nobody has had it. — Has any body had my riWei
knives ? — Nobodv has had them.
THIRTY-THIRD LESSON.
Lezione trentesima terza.
OF THE PRETERITE INDEFINITE.
(PASSATO PROSSIMO.)
This tense is formed as the perfect tense is in English, viz. from the prej«;ni
)f the auxiliary and the past participle of the verb you conjugate. Examples :—
I have studied this morning.
I studied yesterday.
I studied last month.
I have studied this month.
Last month.
To make., to do — made, done.
What have you done 7
I have done nothing.
tias that shoemaker made my boots 7
He has made them.
Kie has not made them.
To put — put.
To put on — put on.
(lave /ou put on your boots 7
I have put them on.
To lift — lifted.
To take off — taken off.
Have you taken off your gloves 7
[ have takm them off.
Ho studiato questa mattina.
Ho studiato ieri.
Ho studiato il mese passato (scorso)
Questo mese ho studiato.
mese passato.
mese scorso.
Fare*—fatto.
Che ha Ella fatto 7 or Che avete fattt
Voi?
Non ho fatto niente.
Ha fatto i miei stivali cotesto calm
laio 7 (or quel calzolaio).
Li ha fatti.
. Non li ha fatti.
Mettere* — messo.
Mettersi* — messosi.
t Si e Ella messi gli stivali 1
t Me li sono messi.
Levare—
Levarsi-
■levato.
-levaton.
t Si & Ella levati i guanti 1
t Me li sono levat*
THIRTY-THIRD LESSON.
147
To tell, to say— -told, said.
Have you said the devices 7
I have said them.
Have you told me the device **
. have told you the device.
. have told it you.
Dire* — detto.
Ha Ella detto i nuttn
Li ho detti.
Mi ha Ella detto i. motto 1
Le ho detto il motto.
Gliel' ho detto, or Ve 1' ho dtftto
The device, the motto.
II motto.
That (meaning that thing).
This (meaning this thing).
Has he told you that 7
He has told me that.
Have I told you that 7
You have told me that.
It.
Have you told it me 7
Cid.
Questo.
Le ha detto cid 7
Mi ha detto cid.
Le ho detto io questo 7
Ella mi ha detto questo.
L0y V.
Me V ha Ella detta 7
Obs. A. Whenever the pronouns, mi, ci, ti, vi, si, are followed by lo, la, k
gli*le, ne, the letter t is changed into e; and instead of saying mi lo, mi la, mi
li, Ac, we must say me lo, me la, me li, ce lo, &c. These pronouns are separated
when used before the verb, but joined together when they stand after it. Ex
amples :
I imagine it.
I promise it thee.
You may assure yourself of it.
I have fold it you.
I have not told it you.
Has he told it you 7
He has told it me.
He has not told it me.
Have you told him that 7
I have told it him.
Me lo figuro.
Te lo pro met to.
Potete assicurarcen«.
Gliel' ho detto.
Non gliel' ho detto.
Gliel' ha egli detto 7
Egli me 1' ha detto.
Egli non me l' ha detto.
Gli ha detto ella cid o questo 7
Gliel' ho detto.
Obs. B. When the pronoun gli is followed by lo, la, li, le, ne, it takes an e,
and forms but one word with the pronoun that follows it. Gli always precede*
io, la, li, le, ne, thus : glielo, gliela, it to him ; glieli, gliele, them to him ; glient
some to him ; and not lo gli, &c.
I beg of you to speak to him of it. Vi prego di parlar^/tene.
Have you told it them 7
ii have told it them.
Have you spoken to the men 7
I have spoken to them.
To whom did you speak 7
L' ha Ella detto loro7
L' ho detto loro.
Ha Ella parlato agll uomini 7
Ho parlato loro.
A chi ha Ella parlato 7
148
THiRTY-THIRD LESSOH.
Are yon the brother of my Mead 7
So.
E Ella fratello d'l mio amico?
Lo.
Ob*. C. The pronoun lo, which is sometimes expressed in English by <*
tmid moi-e elegantly omitted, may in Italian relate to a substantive, an adjective,
or even a whole sentence. It alters neither gender nor number, when it relatei
to an adjective or a whole sentence. Sometimes il is used instead of lo, as ; U
so, I know it, instead of lo to. Ex.
I am
Are you rich 7
I am not.
Is he learned 7
He is.
He is not.
Are our neighbours as poor as they
say!
They are so.
Did your brother go to the ball the day
before yesterday 7
1 do not know.
To write — written.
Which notes have you written 7
1 have written these.
Which devices has he written 7
He has written those which you see.
To drink, — drunk
To see, — seen.
To read, — read (past pari.).
To be acquainted — been acquainted
with. with.
Which men have you seen 7
I have seen those.
Which books have you read 7
I ha 7e read those which you have lent
me.
Have you been acquainted with those
men 7
I have not been acquainted with them.
Lo sono (it sono).
E Ella ricca 7 Siete voi ricco t
Non lo sono.
E egli dotto 7
Egli V e* {or lo &).
Egli non f e* (or non lo $).
Sono cosi poveri i nostri vicini com*
lo dicono (or, il dicono) 7
.Lo sono.
E stato alia festa da ballo il di Lei
fratello 1' altroieri7
Non lo so.
Scrivere* — scritto.
Q-uai biglietti ha Ella scritti7
Ho scritto questi.
Quai motti ha egli scritti 7
Egli ha scritto quelli ch' Ella vede.
Bere * (bevere), — bevuto.
Vedere*, — veduto (visto).
Leggere*, — letto.
Conoscere*, — conosciuto.
Che uominl ha Ella vedutl (visti) I
Ho veduto (visto) quelli.
Quai libri ha Ella letti 7
Ho letto quei ch' Ella mi ha prestati
Ha Ella conosciuto quegli uominl 7
Non li ho conosciutL
Have you seen any sailors 7
I have seen some.
I have not seen any.
Ha Ella veduto del marinai 7
Ne ho veduti (visti).
Non ne ho veduti.
THIRTY-THIRD uRSSOIf.
14 ft
To call.
To throw.
To throw away.
Who calls me ?
Your father calls you.
Have you called the men 1
I have called them.
Do you throw your money away 7
do not throw it away.
Who throws away his books ?
Have you thrown away any thing 1
I have thrown away my gloves.
Have you thrown them away ?
I have thrown them away.
Chiamare 1.
Gettare 1.
Gettar via.
Chi mi chiama?
La chiama il di Lei padre.
Ha Ella chiamato gli uominit
Li ho chiamati.
Getta Ella via il di Lei danarol
Non lo getvo via.
Chi getta via i propri libri ?
Ha Ella gettato via qualcosa*
Ho gettato via i miei guanti.
Li ha Ella gettati via 1
Li ho gettati via.
EXERCISES.
104.
Have you any thing to do ? — I have nothing to do. — What hast
thou done ? — I have done nothing. — Have I done any thing ? —
You have done something. — What have I done ? — You have torn
my books. — What have your children done ? — They have torn
their clothes. — What have we done ? — You have done nothing ;
but your brothers have burnt my fine books. — Has the tailor al-
ready made your coat? — He has not yet made it. — Has your
shoemaker already made your boots ? — He has already made
them. — Have you sometimes made a hat ? — I have never made
one. — Have our neighbours ever written books ? — They wrote
some formerly.— How many coats has your tailor made ? — He
has made twenty or thirty. — Has he made good or bad coats? —
He has made (both) good and bad. — Has your father put on his
coat ? — He has not yet put it on, but he is going to put it on. —
Has your brother put his boots on ? — He has put them on. — Have
oui neighbours put on their boots and their gloves ? — They have
put on neither (questi ne'quelli). — What has the physician taken
away ?— He has taken nothing away. — What have you taken
150 THIRTY-THIRD LESSON.
off? — I have taken off my large hat. — Have your children U
off their gloves ? — They have taken them off. — When did the
ball take place ? — It took place the day before yesterday.- — Whc
has told you that ? — My servant has told it me. — What has youi
brother told you ? — He has told me nothing. — Did I tell you that
— You did not tell it me. — Has he told it you ? — He has told it
me. — Who has told it your neighbour ? — The English have told ii
him. — Have they told it to the French 1 — They have told it them.
— Who has told it you ? — Your son has told it me. — Has he told
it you ? — He has told it me. — Are you willing to tell your friends
that ? — I am willing to tell it them.
105.
Are you the brother of that young man ? — I am. — Is thai
young man your son ? — He is. — Are your friends as rich as they
say ? — They are so. — Are these men as learned as they say ? —
They are not so. — Do you often sweep the warehouse ? — I sweep
it as often as I can. — Has our neighbour money enough to buy
some coals ? — I do not know. — Did your brother go to the ball
yesterday ? — I do not know. — Has your cook gone to the mar-
ket ? — He has not gone thither. — Is he ill {malato) ? — He is. —
Am I ill ? — You are not. — Are you as tall as I ? — I am. — Are
you as fatigued as your brother ? — I am more so than he. — Have
you written a note ? — I have not written a note, but an exercise.
— What have your brothers written ? — They have written theii
exercises. — When did they write, them ? — They wrote them yes-
terday.— Have you written your exercises ? — I have written
them. — Has your friend written his ? — He has not written them
yet. — Which exercises has your little brother written ? — He has
written his own. — Have you spoken to my father ? — I have spo-
ken to him. — When did you speak to him ? — I spoke to him the
day before yesterday. — How many times have you spoken to the
captain ? — I have spoken to him many times. — Have you often
spoken to his son ? — I have often spoken to him. — To which
men has your friend spoken ? — He has spoken to *hese and to
those.
THIRTY-THIRD LESSON. 151
106.
Have you spoken to the Russians 1 — I have spoken to them.— .
Have the English ever spoken to you ? — They have often spoken
tome. — What has the German told you ? — He told me the words.
— Which words has he told you ? — He has told me these words. —
What have you to tell me ? — I have a few words to tell you. —
Which exercises has your friend written ? — He has written those.
— Which men have you seen at the market ? — I have seen these.
—Which books have your children read ? — They have read those
which you have lent them. — Have you seen these men or those ?
— I have seen neither these nor those. — Which men have you
seen ? — I have seen those to whom (a cut) you have spoken.—
Have you been acquainted with those men ? — I have been ac-
quainted with them. — With which boys has your brother been ac-
quainted ? — He has been acquainted with those of our merchant
— Have I been acquainted with these Frenchmen ? — You hav«
not been acquainted with them. — Which wine has your servant
drunk 1 — He has drunk mine. — Have you seen my brothers ? — I
have seen them. — Where have you >een them ? — I have seen
them at their own house (in casa loro). — Have you ever seen
Greeks ? — I have never seen any. — Has your brother seen any ?
— He has sometimes seen some. — Do you call me ? — I do call
you. — Who calls your father ? — My brother calls him. — Dost thou
call any one ? — I call no one. Have you thrown away your hat ?
— I have not thrown it away. — Does your father throw away any
thing ? — He throws away the notes which he receives. — Have
you thrown away your nails ? — I have not thrown them away. —
Dost thou throw away thy book ? — I do not throw it away ; I waul
it to study Italian.
THIRTY-FOURTH LESSON.
Lezione trentesima quarta.
To light (kindle)
— lighted or lit.
Accendere *
— acceao.
To extinguish,
— extinguished.
Spegnere *
— spento.
To open,
— opened.
Aprire *
— aperto.
To conduct,
— conducted.
Condurre *
— condotto.
To pick up (gather),
— picked up
(gathered).
Raccorre *
— raccolto.
To answer,
— answered.
Rispondere *
— risposto
To take,
— taken.
Prendere *
— preso.
To break,
— broken.
Rompere *
— rotto.
To know,
- known.
Sapere *
— saputo.
To be able (can), —
- been able (could).
Potere *
— potato.
To be willing, —
- been willing.
Volere *
— voluto.
To give, —
- given
Dare*
— dato.
NEUTER VERBS.
In neuter verbs the action is intransitive ; that is, it remains in the «gent
They are conjugated like the active. The latter, however, always form then
past tenses with the auxiliary avert* to have ; the neuter verbs, on the con-
trary, take taterc* to be; and their past participle must agree in gender and
number with the subject. (See |^ Lesson XXX11.) Those neuter verbs,
which are conjugated with the auxiliary to have in English, and eaaere in Italian,
will always be marked.
Togo,
— gone.
Andare •
— andato.
To stay,
— stood.
Stare*
— stato.
To remain,
— remained.
Rimanere *
— rimaso, or rimasto
To set out,
— set out (pott part.).
Partire
— partito.
To go out,
— gone out.
Uscire *
— uscito.
To come,
— come (past part.).
Venire* **
— venuto.
Did you stay long in that country 1
When did you go to the ball 1
I went thither at midnight.
Did he remain long in Paris 1
He remained there a y wi.
Has your father set out 7
Have your friends set out 7
They have not set out
£ Ella stata molto tempo in quest*
paese 1
Quando e Ella andata alia festa dt
ballo 1
Vi sono andato a mezza notte.
E egh rimasto molto in Parigi?
Ci e* rimasto un anno.
E partito il di Lei padre 1
Sono partiti i di Lei amid?
Non sono partiti.
THIRTY-FOURTH LESSON.
103
When did your brothers go out 7
They went out at ten o'clock.
Did the men come to your father 7
They did come to him
Quando sono usciti I di Lei fratelli 1
Sono usciti alte dieci.
Sono venuti dal di Lei padre gli uo-
mini 7 (better) gli uomini sono ve-
nuti dal di Lei padre 7
Ci sono venuti.
Which fires have you extinguished 7
Which warehouses have you opened 7
Save you conducted them to the store-
house 7
1 have conducted them thither.
Which books have you taken 7
How many notes have you received 7
I have received but one.
Which fires has he lighted 7
Have you opened the trunks 7
I have opened them.
Which nails has the carpenter picked
up?
To pick up — picked up.
Which notes have you answered 7
To answer a note.
Which books has he taken 7
Have they broken the glasses 7
They have not broken them.
Have you the gloves which I gave
you?
I have had them, but have them no
longer.
Quai fuochi ha Ella spenti 7
Che magazzini ha Ella aperti 7
Li ha Ella condotti al magazzino 7
Ce A ho condotti.
Quai libri ha Ella presi 7
Quanti biglietti ha Ella ricevuti 1
Ne ho ricevuto solamente uno.
Quai fuochi ha egli accesi 7
Ha Ella aperto i bauli 7
Li ho aperti.
Quai chiodi ha raccattati il legnai
uolo?
Raccattare — raccattato.
A quai biglietti ha Ella risposto 7
Rispondere * ad un biglietto.
Quai libri ha egli presi 7
Hanno eglino rotto i bicchieri 7
Non li hanno rotti.
Ha Ella i guanti che Le ho dati 7 tn
avete voi i guanti che vi ho dati 1
Li ho avuti, ma non li ho piu.
Upon.
The bench.
Upon the bench.
Upon it
Under.
Under the bench.
Under it (underneath).
Where is my hat 7
It is upon the bench.
Are my gloves on the bench 7
fhey are under it
LSu,
< Sopra,
( Sovra.
II banco (lo scanno).
c Sopra il banco.
( Sul banco.
Sopra (disaopra).
Sotto.
Sotto il banco.
Sotto (dissotto).
Ove S il mio cappello 7
E sopra il banco.
Sono sopra il banco (or sul banco) i
miei guanti 7
Sono sotto (dissotto).
154
THIBTY-FOUETH LESSON.
Do you learn to read 1
I do (learn it).
I learn to write.
Have you learnt to speak 1
I have (learnt it).
In the storehouse.
The stove.
In the stove.
In it or within.
Impart Ella a leggere?
Impair t
Imparo a scrivere.
Ha Ella imparato a parlare f
Ho imparato.
Nel magazzino.
II fornello (la stufa).
Nel fornello (nella stufa).
Dentro (al di dentro).
To wash.
To get or to nave
mended,
To get or to nave
washed,
To get or to have
made,
To get or to have
swept,
To get or to have
sold,
got or had
mended.
got or had
washed.
got or had
made.
got or had
swept.
got or had
sold.
Lavare 1.
' t Far rassettare,
t Far raccomo-
dare,
t Far lavare,
t Far fare,
t Far spazzare,
f Far vendere,
— fatto rasset
tare,
fatto racco
— inodare.
— fatto lavare
— fatto fare.
— fatto spa*
zare.
— fatto vendere
To get the coat mended.
To have it mended.
To get them mended.
To get Boim mended.
t Far raccomodare 1' abito.
t Farlo raccomodare.
t Farli raccomodare.
t Fame raccomodare.
Are yon getting a coat made (io you
order a coat) ?
I am getting one made (I order one).
I have had one made.
Have you had your coat mended 1
I have had it mended.
[ have not had it mended.
I have had my boots mended.
£ have had them mended.
t Si fa ella fare un abito 1
t Me lo faccio fare.
t Me ne son fatto fare uno.
t Ha Ella fatto raccomodare
Lei abito 1
t L' ho fatto raccomodare.
t Non 1' ho fatto raccomodare.
t Ho fatto raccomodare i
stivali.
t Li ho fatti raccomodare.
u di
mid
To wipe.
Have you not seen my boo'il
I have seen it.
Asciugare 1.
Non ha Ella veduto n mio libro ?
L' ho veduto (visto).
* Learners ought now to use in their exereises the adverbs of time, place, and
number, mentioned in Lessons XIX., XXII.. XXIII., and XXXII.
THIRTY-FOURTH LESSON. 155
When ?— Where?
When did you see my brother?
I saw him the day before yesterday.
Where did you see him ?
I saw him at the theatre.
Quando? j Do?f
I Ove1 ?
Quando ha Ella veduto mio fr»
tello?
L' ho veduto 1' altro ieri.
Dove 1' ha Ella veduto?
L' ho veduto al teatro.
EXERCISES. "
107.
Where are your brothers gone ? — Tiiey are gone to the theatre.
—Have your friends left (partire) ? — They have not yet left. —
When do they set out? — This evening. — At what o'clock ? — At
half- past nine. — When did the French boys come to your brother?
— They came to him yesterday. — Did their friends come also ?—
They came also. — Has any one come to us ? — The good Germans
have come to us. — Who has come to the English ? — The French
have come to them. — When did you drink some wine ? — I drank
some yesterday, and to-day. — Has the servant carried my note ? —
He has carried it. — Where has he carried it ? — He has carried it
to your friend. — Which notes have you carried ? — I have carried
those which you have given me to carry. — To whom have you
carried them ? — I have carried them to your father. — Which books
has your servant taken ? — He has taken those which you do not
read. — Have your merchants opened their warehouses ? — They
have opened them. — Which warehouses have they opened ? —
They have opened those which you have seen. — When have they
opened them ? — They have opened them to-day. — Have you con
ducted the foreigners to the storehouses ? — I have conducted them
thither. — Which fires have the men extinguished ? — They havt
extinguished those which you have perceived (scorti). — Have you
received any notes ? — We have receive i some. — How many notes
have you received ? — I have received only one ; but my brother
has received more than I : he has received six.
108.
Where is my coat ? — It is on the bench. — Are my boots upon
the bench ? — They are under it. — Are the coals under the bench 1
156 THIRTY-FOURTH LESSON.
— They are in the stove. — Have you put some coals into the sto>e» *
— I have put some into it. — Are you cold ? — 1 am not cold. — Are
the coals which I have seen in the stove ? — They are in it. — Are
my notes upon the stove ? — They are in it (within). — Have you
not been afraid to burn my notes ? — 1 have not been afraid to burn
them. — Have you sent your little boy to the market? — I have-
sent him thither. — When did you send him thither? — This morn
ing. — Have you written to your father ? — I have written to him.
— Has he answered you ? — He has not yet answered me. — A re
you getting your floor swept % — I am getting it swept. — Have
you had your counting-house swept ? — I have not had it swept
yet, but I intend to have it swept to-day. — Have you wiped your
feet ? — 1 have wiped them. — Where did you wipe them ? — I
wiped them upon the carpet. — Have you had your benches
wiped ? — I have had them wiped. — What does your servant wipe ?
— He wipes the knives. — Have you ever written to the physician ?
I have never written to him. — Has he sometimes written to you ?
— He has often written to me. — What has he written to you ? —
He has written something to me. — How many times have your
friends written to you ? — They have written to me more than
twenty times.— Have you seen my sons ? — I have never seen
them.
109.
Have you ever seen any Greeks ? — I have never seen any. —
Have you already seen a Syrian ? — I have already seen one, —
Where have you seen one ? — At the theatre. — Have you given
the book to my brother? — I have given it to him. — Have you
given money to the merchant ? — I have given him some. — How
much have you given to him ? — I have given him fourteen
crowns. — Have you given any gold ribbons to the children of our
neighbours ? — I have given them some. — Wilt thou give me some
wine ? — I have given you some already. — When didst thou give
me some ? — I gave you some formerly. — Wilt thou give me some
now ? — -I cannot give you any ; I have none. — Has the American
lent you money ? — He has lent me some. — Has he often lent you
some ? — He has sometimes lent me some. — Has the Italian ever
lent you money ? — He has never lent me any. — Is he poor l~
THIRTY-FOURTH LESSON. 157
He is not poor ; he is richer than you. — Will you lend me a
crown ? — I will lend you two. — Has your boy come to mine ?-
He has come to him. — When ? — This morning.— At what o'clock ?
— Early. — Has he come earlier than I ? — At what o'clock did
you come ? — I came at half-past five. — He came earlier than you.
110.
Has Jie concert taken place ? — It has taken place. — Did it
take place late ? — It took place early. — At what o'clock ? — At
twelve. — At what o'clock did the ball take place ? — It took place
at midnight. — Does your brother learn to write ? — He does learn.
— Does he know how to read ? — He does not know how yet. —
Do you know the Frenchman whom I know ? — I do not know the
one whom you know, but I know another. — Does your friend
know the same (i medesimi) merchants as I know ? — He does not
know the same (i medesimi), but he knows others. — Have you
ever had your coat mended ? — I have sometimes had it mended
—Hast thou already had thy boots mended ? — I have not yet had
them mended. — Has your brother sometimes had his waistcoats
mended ? — He has had them mended several times (alcune volte).
— Hast thou had thy hat or thy waistcoat mended ? — I have nei-
ther had the one nor the other mended. — Have you had your
gloves or your handkerchiefs mended ? — I have had neither the
one nor the other mended. — Has your father had any thing made ?
— He has not had any thing made. — Have you looked for my
gloves ?- — I have looked for them. — Where have you looked for
them ? — I have looked for them upon the bed, and have found
them under it. — Have you found my notes in the stove ? — I have
found them in it. — Have you found my boots under the bed ? — I
have found them upon it. — How long did you stay in that coun-
try ? — I stayed there two years. — Did your father remain long a
the ball ? — He remained there only a few minutes.
THIRTY-FIFTH LESSON
Lezione trentesima quinta.
To promise
To understand
— promised.
— understood.
Promettere*
f Comprendere*
< Intendere*
— promesso,
— compreso
— inteso.
To wait
To intend (to
hear).
— waited.
— intended
(heard).
\ Capire*
{ Attendere*
( Aspettare*
Intendere*
— capito.
— atteso.
— aspettato.
— inteso.
Obs. Compound and derivative verbs are generally conjugated like ths*
primitives : thus the verb promettere* is conjugated like mettere*, to put (L&»
son XXXIII), comprendere*, like prendere*, to tnke (Lesson XXXIV) oittv
dere* and intendere*, like tendere*, to tend.
Do you promise me to come 1
I do promise you.
What have you promised the man 7
I have promised him nothing.
Mi promette Ella di venire 1
Glielo prometto.
Che ha Ella promesso all' uomo ?
Non gli ho promesso nulla.
To lose — lost.
How much has your brother lost ?
He has lost about a crown.
About.
I have lost more than he.
Per dere* — perduto.
Quanto danaro ha perduto 11 di I*
fratello ?
Ha perduto circa uno scudo
Circa, incirca.
Ho perduto piu di lui.
Have you ever learnt Italian 1
I have learnt it formerly.
To wear, to use.
To wear out.
This coat is worn out.
The worn-out coat.
To refuse
To spell.
Ha Ella imparato mai 1' italiano ?
L' ho imparato altre volte
Usare.
Logorare 1.
Questo abito e logorato.
L' abito logoro.
Rifiutare (ricusare).
Compitare.
THIRTY-FIFTH LESSON.
15*
Howf
Well
Badly.
Comet
Bene.
Male.
So, thus.
So so.
In this manner.
flow has your brother written his ex-
ercise 7
He has written it well.
Cost, in questo modo.
Cost cost.
In questa maniera.
Come ha scritto il suo tema 11 di Lrt
fratello 7
L' ha scritto bene
To dry.
Do you put your coat to dry 7
I do put it to dry.
Asciugare (seccare).
Mette Ella ad asciugare il suo abito 7
Lo metto ad asciugare.
How old are you 7
I am twelve years old.
How old is your brother 7
He is thirteen years old.
Almost.
He is almost fourteen years old.
About.
I am about fifteer years old.
Nearly.
He Is nearly fifteen years old.
To draw near.
Hardly.
'on are hardly seventeen years old.
t Che eta ha Ella 7
t Quanti anni ha Ella 7
t Ho dodici anni.
t Q,uanti anni ha il di Lei fratello 1
t Che eta ha il di Lei fratello 7
t Egli ha tredici anni.
Not quite.
I am not quite sixteen years old.
To complete.
Quasi, incirca (alV incirca)
t Egli ha incirca quattordici anni
Circa, incirca (alV incirca).
t Ho circa quindici anni.
Press7 a poco, quasi, incirca.
t Ha quasi quindici anni.
t Si awicina ai quindici anni.
Avvicinare, avvicinarsi.
Appena.
t Ella ha appena diciasette anni.
Non intieramente.
Non deltutto.
Non tutV affatto.
t Non ho tutt' affatto sedici anni.
t Non ho ancor compito il sedicesi
mo anno.
Compire 3.
160
Art thou older than thy brother ?
I am younger than he.
Old (in years).
Aged.
Young.
THIKTT FIFTH LESSON.
t Sei tu maggiore di tuo fratoflo*?
( Sono piu giovane di lui.
( Sono minore di lui.
Vecchio.
< Attempato.
C Avanzato in eta.
Giovane.
There is.
There are.
How many francs are there iu a,
crown?
Three.
There are twenty sous, or a hunched
centimes, in one franc.
There are five centimes in a sou.
A or one hundred.
The centime.
The gold sequin.
The livre (a coin).
The crown.
The sou.
A sequin has four crowns.
There are seven livres (or francs) in a
crown.
There are twenty sous in a Uvre.
To understand — understood.
1 understand, thou under standest, he
understands.
We, you, they understand.
The noise.
The wind.
The noise (roaring) of the wind.
Do you hear the roaring of the wind 1
I do hear it.
C 6, vi e (vi ha, avvi).
Ci sono or vi sono.
* flvanti franchi ci vogiiono per (an
uno «*cudo ?
Tre.
t Ventl so!d\ o cento centesimi fai*
no ur frinee.
t Cinque centesimi fanno un soldo
Cento.
II centesimo.
Lo zecchino d' oro.
La lira {a feminine noun).
Lo scudo.
II soldo.
Quattro scudi fanno uno zecchino
d' oro.
Sette lire fanno uno scudo
Venti soldi fanno una lira.
Capire * — capito.
Capisco, capisci, capisce.
Capiamo, capite, capiscono.
Lo strepito, il rumore.
II vento.
Lo strepito del vento.
Intende Ella lo strepito del vento i
L' intendo.
To bark
The barking.
Have you heard the barking of the
dogs?
I have heard it.
Latrare, abbaiare 1
II latrato.
Ha Ella inteso il latrato del can) 1
V ho inteso.
THIRTY-FIFTH LSSSOIf.
16)
To wait for tome one or some-
thing.
To expect some one or some-
thing.
Are you waiting for my brother ?
I am waiting for him.
Do you expect some friends 7
I do expect some.
The nobleman.
Noblemen.
Gentle, pretty.
W here has the nobleman remained 7
He has remained at home.
Have you remained with him 7
With.
With him.
Aspettare qualcuno o qualchi
cosa.
Aspetta Ella mio fratello 1
Lo aspetto.
Aspetta Ella degli amici ?
Ne aspetto alcuni.
II gentiluomo (il nobile).
I gentiluomini (i nobili).
Gentile, grazioso.
Ove e rimasto il gentiluomo ?
E rimasto in casa.
E Ella rimasta con lui (aeco) ?
Con.
Seco, con lui
EXERCISES.
111.
Do you promise me to come to the ball ? — I promise y\m.—
Have I promised you any thing ? — You have promised me nothing.
— What has my brother promised you ? — He has promised me a
fine book. — Have you received it ? — Not yet. — Do you give me
what you have promised me ? — I give it you. — Has yoyr friend
received much money ? — He has received but little. — How much
has he received ? — He has received but one crown. — How much
money have you given to my son ? — I have given him thirty
francs. — Did you not promise him more ? — I have given him
what 1 promised him. — Have you Italian money ? — I have
some. — What money have you ? — I have some sequins, crowns,
livres, and sous. — How many crowns are there in a gold sequin ?
— There are four crowns in a gold sequin. — Have you any French
money ? — I have some ; I have French and Italian money. — What
kind of (che) French money have you ? — I have some francs,
sous, and centimes. — How many sous are there in a franc ?—
There are twenty sous m a franc — Have you any centimes ?—
I nave several. — How many centimes are there in a sou ? — Thera
163 THIRTY- FIFTH LESSON.
ire five. — And how many centimes are there in a franc ? — One
hundred (cento). — Will you lend me your coat ? — I will lend it
you, but it is worn out. — Are your boots worn out ? — They are
not worn out. — Will you lend them to my brother ? — I will lenc
them to him. — To whom have you lent your hat ? — I have not
lent it ; I have given it to somebody. — To whom have you given
it? — I have given it to a pauper (a unpovero),
112.
Does your little brother already know how to spell ? — He does
know. — Does he spell well ? — He spells well. — How has your
little brother spelt ? — He has spelt so so. — How have your chil-
dren written their exercises ? — They have written them badly.-
Has my neighbour lent you his gloves ? — He has refused to lenc
them to me. — Do you know Spanish? — I know it. — Does youi
son speak Italian ? — He speaks it well. — How do your friends
speak ? — They do not speak badly. — Do they listen to what you
tell them ? — They listen to it. — How hast thou learnt English ?
— I have learnt it in this manner. — Did you call me ? — I have
not called you, but I have called your brother. — Is he come ? —
Not yet. — Where did you wet your clothes ? — I wetted them in
the garden. — Will you put them to dry ? — I have already put
them to dry. — Does the nobleman wish to give me any thing to
do? — He wishes to give you something to do. — How old are you ?
— I am Ijardly eighteen years old. — How old is your brother ? —
He is twenty years old. — Are you as old as he ? — I am not so
old. — How old art thou? — I am about twelve years old. — Am I
younger than you ? — I do not know. — How old is our neighbour?
He is not quite thirty years old. — Are our friends as young as
we ? — They are older than we. — How old are they ? — The one
is nineteen, and the other twenty years old. — Is your father aa
old as mine ? — He is older than yours.
113.
Have you read my book ? — I have not quite read it yet. — Has
your friend finished his books ? — He has almost finished them.— *
Do you understand me ? — I understand you. — Does the French.
man understand us ? — He understands us. — Do you understand
THIRTV-S1ITH LESSON. 103
what we are telling you ? — We understand it. — Dost thou under-
stand Italian ? — I do not understand it yet, but I am learning it. —
Do we understand the English ? — We do not understand them. —
Do the English understand us ? — They understand us. — Do we
understand them ? — We hardly understand them. — Do you hear
any noise ? — I hear nothing. — Have you heard the roaring of the
wind ? — I have heard it. — What do you hear 1 — I hear the bark*
ing of the dogs. — Whose dog is this ? — It is the dog of the
Scotchman. — Have you lost your stick ? — I have not lost it. — Has
your servant lost my notes ? — He has lost them. — Did you go to
the ball ? — I did not go. — Where did you remain ? — I remained
at home. — Where did the noblemen remain ? — They remained
in the garden. — Has your father lost as much money as I? — He
has lost more than you. — How much have I lost ? — You have
hardly lost one crown.— Did your friends remain at the ball ?—
They remained there.— Do you know as much as the English
physician ? — I do not know as much as he. — How many books
have you read ? — I have read hardly two. — Do you wait for any
one ? — I wait for no one. — Do you wait for the man whom I saw
this morning ? — I wait for him. — Art thou waiting for thy book ?
— I am waiting for it. — Do you expect your father this evening 1
— I do expect him. — Do you expect some friends ?— I do expect
some. — Where is your little brother? — He is gone with the no-
bleman (col signore). — Is he gone to the play with him ? — He ia
gone there with him.
THIRTY-SIXTH LESSON.
Lezione trentesima sesta.
To bite — bitten.
To beat.
Whj a: you beat the dog 1
Mordere* — morso.
Batter e 2.
Perche batie Ella 11 cane ?
164
THIRn -SIXTH LESSON.
Why?
Because.
I beat it because it has bitten me.
Perche ?
Poiche, perchi.
Lo batto perche mi ha mono.
To owe — owed
How much do you owe me 1
I owe you fifty crowns.
Hdw much does the man owe you 7
H3 owes me sixty francs.
Do our neighbours owe as much as we 1
We owe more than they.
How much dost thou owe ?
Two hundred crowns.
Eighty francs.
Two hundred and fifty sequins.
Dovere* — dovuto.
Q,uanto mi deve Ella?
Le devo cinquanta scudi.
Quanto Le deve 1' uomo ?
Mi deve sessanta fianchi.
Debbono i nostri vicini quanto mi
Dobbiamo piu di loro.
Quanto devi ?
Due cento scudi.
Ottanto franchi.
Due cento cinquanta tecchinl.
Are you to .... ?
I am to
Where are you to go to this morning ?
I am to go to the warehouse.
Is your brother to come hither to-day ?
Soon, shortly.
He it to come hither soon.
To return (to come back).
At what o'clock do you return from the
market 1
1 return from it at twelve o'clock.
From it, from there, thence.
Does the servant return early from the
warehouse ?
He returns from it at ten o'clock in the
morning.
At nine o'clock in the morning.
At five o'clock in the evening.
At eleven o'clock at night.
t Deve Ella . . ?
t Devo
t Ove deve Ella andare stamane 1
t Devo (debbo) andare al magazziwo.
t II di Lei fratello deve venire qi
oggi?
( Quanto prima, fra poco,
< tosto.
( Presto, subito.
t Deve venire qui quantc prima.
Ritornare 1.
A che ora ritorna Ella dal meicato'
r alle dodici.
Ne ritorno ^ a mezzodi.
( a mezzo giorno.
Ne.
U servitore ritorna per tempo a»
magazzino 1
Ne ritorna alle dieci antimeridianc
Ne ritorna alle dieci del mattino.
Ne ritorna alle dieci della mattina.
-Alle nove antimeridiane.
Alle cinque della sera (pomeridiane)
Alle undici della sera (o della notte)
THIRTY-SIXTH LESSON.
16C
How long ?
During, for.
How long has he remained there ?
A minute.
An hour.
A day.
A month.
A year.
The summer.
The winter.
During the summer.
Quanta tempo f
Durante, per lo spazio tri,1
Quanto tempo vi e egli restato en
masto) ?
Durante un minuto.
Per lo spazio di un' ora.
Durante un jiorno.
Per lo spazio di un mew.
Durante un anno.
{ L' estate (Jem.)
I La state (/em.)
L* inverno
Durante la state.
To dwell, to live, to reside, to re-
main.
To lodge.
Where do you live ?
[ live in William- street, number twen-
ty-five.
Where did your orovher live?
He lived in Rivoli-street, number forty-
nine.
Dost thou live at thy brother's house ?
[ do not live at his, but at my father's
house.
Doe? your friend still live where I
lived ?
He livep no longer where you lived.
No longer.
The number.
How long were you speaking to the
man?
I spoke to him for two hours.
Did you remain long with my father ?
I remained with him an hour.
Long. •
Stare di casa ; dimorare.
State.*
Alloggiare, abitare.
Dove sta Ella di casa? (Ove al-
loggia?)
Alloggio nella contrada Guglielmo
(or via Guglielmo) numero venti
cinque.
Dove ha alloggiato il di Lei fratello 1
Ha alloggiato nella contrada (or via)
di Rivoli, numero quaranto nove.
Stai da tuo fratello ?
Non isto da lui, ma in casa di mio
padre.
II di Lei amico sta (alloggia) ancora
ove ho alloggiato (sono stato) io ?
Non ista piu dove Ella ha alloggiato
Non piu.
II numero.
Quanto tempo ha Ella parlato all
uomo?
Gli ho parlato per il corso di due ore
E Ella restata molto tempo con mi*
padre (col padre mio) ?
Vi son restato un' ora.
Molto tempo.
Durante, or per lo spazio di, when it signifies/or, may be left out in Italia*
is in English, but it is then understood.
(66 THIRTY-SIXTH LESSON.
EXERCISES.
114.
Wh) do you not drink? — I do not drir.k, because I am n(
thirsty. — Why do you pick up this ribbon ? — I pick it up, becauj
I want it. — Why do you lend money to this man ? — I lend hii
lome, because he wants some. — Why does your brother study
—He studies, because he wishes to learn French. — Has you]
cousin drunk already ? — He has not drunk yet, because he h:
not yet been thirsty. — Does the servant show you the floor whicl
he sweeps ? — He does not show me that which he sweeps now,
but that which he swept yesterday. — Why do you love that man
— 1 love him because he is good. — Why does your neigh boui
beat his dog ? — Because it has bitten his boy. — Whv do oui
friends love us? — They love us because we are good. — Why d(
you bring me wine? — I bring you some, because you are thirsty.
— Why does the sailor drink ? — He drinks, because he is thirsty.
— Do you see the sailor who is in the (sul, upon the) ship ? — I dc
not see the one who is in the ship, but the one who is in the (al
market. — Do you read the books which my father has givei
you ? — I read them. — Do you understand them ? — I understan<
them so so. — Do you know the Italians whom we know ? — We d(
not know those whom you know, but we know others. — Does the
shoemaker mend the boots which you have sent him ? — He does
not mend them, because they are worn out (non sono piu buoni).
115.
Is your servant returned from the market ? — He has not re-
turned yet from it. — At what o'clock did your brother returr
from the ball ? — He returned from it at one o'clock in the morn-
ing (al tocco dopo mezza notte). — At what o'clock didst thou come
back from thy friend ? — I came back at eleven o'clock in the
morning. — Didst thou remain long with him ? — I remained with
him about an hour. — How long do you intend to remain at the
ball ? — I intend to remain there a few minutes. — How long did
the Frenchman remain with you? — He remained with me for
two hours. — How long did your brothers remain in town (nella
ctttd) 1 — They remained there during the winter. — Do you in-
THIRTY-SIXTH LESSON. 161
tend to remain long with us ? — I intend to remain with you du.
ring the summer. — How much do I owe you ? — You do not owe
me much. — How much do you owe your tailor ? — I owe him
eighty sequins. — How much dost thou owe thy shoemaker ? — I
}we him already eighty-five sequins. — Do I owe you any thing ?
—You do not owe me any thing. — How much does the English,
.nan owe you ? — He owes me more than you. — Do the English
Dwe as much as the Spaniards ? — Not quite so much. — Do I owe
you as much as my brother ? — You owe me more than he. — Do
our friends owe you as much as we ?— They owe me less than you.
— How much do they owe you ? — They owe me two hundred and
fifty sequins. — How much do we owe you ? — You owe me three
hundred sequins.
116.
Why do you give money to the merchant ? — I give him some,
because he has sold me something. — Whither are you to go ?—
I am to go to the market. — Is your friend to come hither to-day ?
— He is to come hither. — When is he to come hither ? — He is to
come hither soon. — When are our sons to go to the play ? — They
are to go thither to-night (stassera.) — When are they to return
from it ? — They are to return from it at half- past ten. — When are
you to go to the physician ? — I am to go to him at ten o'clock at
night. — When is your son to return from the painter's ? — He is
to return from him at five o'clock in the evening. — Where do you
live ? — I live in Rivoli-street, number forty-seven. — Where does
your father live ? — He lives in his friend's house. — Where do
your brothers live ? — They live in William-street, number one
hundred and twenty. — Dost thou live at thy brother's ? — I live in
nis house. — Do you still live where you lived (dove e atata dap
prima) ? — I still live there. — Does your friend still live where he
did (dove e siato altre volte) ? — He no longer lives where he did.
—Where does he live at present ? — He lives in his father's house
12
THIRTY-SEVENTH LESSON
Lezione trentesima settima.
How long ?
Tilly until.
Till twelve o'clock (till noon).
Till to-morrow.
Till the day after to-morrow.
Till Sunday.
Till Monday.
Till this evening.
Till evening.
Until morning.
Until the next day.
Until that day.
Until that moment.
Till now— hitherto.
Until then.
Then.
Tuesday, Wednesday.
Thursday, Friday.
Saturday.
iFino a quando ? Fin quando i
Insino a quando ?
Fino, insino.
Fino a mezzo giorno.
Fino a mezzodi.
Fino a domani.
Fino a J domani l'altro
( posdomani.
Fino a domenica.
Fino a lunedx.
Fino a stassera.
Fino alia sera.
Fino a sera.
Fino al mattino.
Fino alia mattina.
Fino all' indomani.
Fino a questo giorno.
Fino a questo momento.
Fino adesso — fin qui
Fino allora.
Allora.
Martedi, mercoledi.
Giovedi, venerdi.
Sabato.
Obs. A. The names of the days and months are masculine, except la da
tnenica, Sunday, which is feminine. Of the seasons, la Primavera, Spring, and
I Estate, Summer, are feminine ; F Autunno, Autumn, and V Jnvcmo, Winter
are masculine.
Till I return (till my return).
Till my brother returns (till my bro
trier's return).
Till four o'clock in the morning.
Till midnight (till twelve o'clock at
night).
The return or coming back.
How long did you remain at my fa-
ther's house 1
I remained at his house till eleven
o'clock at night.
Fino al mio ritorno;
Fino al ritorno di mio fratello.
Fino alle quattro del mattino.
Fino alle quattro mattutine.
Fino a mezza notte (fino alle dodici
di notte.)
II ritorno.
Fino a quando e Eha restata da mio
padre ?
Ci sono restato fino all' undid d
notte.
THIRTY-SEVENTH LESSON
166
They, the people, any one, or one.
rt is said, that is, people tay.
They are known, that is, people or they
know them.
I am told, that is, they tell me.
Si.
Si dice, dicono.
Si conoscono.
t Mi ti dice (mi Tien detto, au «tt
cono).
Non ti dice. Non dicono.
t Non mi ti dice (non mi Tien detto)
Non te l ne parla.
Vi ti vede molta gente.
It is not said— people do not toy.
I am not told — they do not tell me.
They do not speak of it.
I great many people are seen there
(that is, one sees there a great many
people).
Obt. B. They, the people, any aije, or one, are generally not expressed in trw
compound tenses, or even in simple tenses, when they are followed by a per-
sonal pronoun. Ex.
I am expected (that is, they expect
me).
Here are the books which he was
asked for (that is, which they asked
him for).
It has been said 'that is, people said).
It has been written (that is, people
wrote).
I was told (that is, they told me).
They wrote to me.
Sono aspettato (Mi aspettano).
Ecco i libri che gli sono stati do-
mandati.
E stato detto (Hanno detto).
E stato scritto (Hanno scritto), or
Si scrive.
Mi d stato detto (Mi hanno detto).
Mi £ stato scritto (Mi hanno
scritto).
Have they brought my boots 7
They have brought them.
They have not brought them yet.
What have they said 1
They have said nothing.
What have they done ?
They have done nothing.
Sono stati porta ti i miei stivali?
Hano portato i miei stivali ?
Sono stati portati.
Li hanno portati.
Non sono ancora stati portati.
Non li hanno per anco portati.
Che & stato detto ? (Che hanno
detto?)
Non € stato detto niente.
Non hanno detto niente.
Che e stato fatto? (Che hanno
fatto?)
Non d stato fatto niente.
Non hanno fatto niente.
To be willing (wish) — been
willing (wished).
Have they been willing to mend my
coat?
Volere* — voluto.
t Hanno essi voluto raccwmodare L
mio abitol
1 St is here changed into at, because it is followed by *t. (3m Leasoa
tXXIII. Ok$. A.)
no
They have not been willing to mend
it.
Have they been willing to mend my
coats?
They have not been willing to mend
them.
To be able (can) — been able
(could).
Hare they been able to find the books ?
They could not find them.
Can they find them now ?
They cannot find them.
THIRTY-SE\ .JNTH LESS3N.
t Non hanno vf>luto raecomodarlo
Can they do what they wish ?
?hey do what they can, but they do
not what they wish
What do they say ?
What do they say new ?
They say nothing new.
Something or any thing new.
Nothing or not any thing new.
New.
My new coat.
My new horse.
My fine horse.
My new friend.
My handsome coat.
To brush.
This fine man.
These fine men.
This fine tree.
My new friends.
These fine trees
t Hanno voluto raccomodare i mid
abiti?
t Non hanno voluto raccomodarli.
Potere — yotulo.
i:
t Hanno eglino potuto trovare
libri?
t Non li hanno potuto trovare.
Non si son potuti trovare.
t Si possono trovare adesso 1
t Non si possono trovare.
t Possone eglino fare cid che v»
gliono ?
t Si fa cid che si pud, ma non si q
cid che si vuole.
t Chen dice?
t Che dicono ?
t Che si dice di nuovo ?
t Che dicono di nuovo 7
t Non *i dice niente di nuovo.
t Non dicono niente di nuovo.
Qualcosa di nuovo.
Niente di nuovo
Nuovo.
II mio abito nuovo.
II mio nuovo cavallo.
II mio bel cavallo.
II mio nuovo amico.
II mio bell' abito.
Spazzare, spazzolare 1.
Questo bell' uomo.
Quest! begli uomini.
Questo beir albero.
I miei nuovi amici.
Quei, or quest! begli alberi
THIRTY -SEVENTH LESSON.
171
Do they believe that 7
They do not believe it
Do they speak of that 1
They do speak of it.
They do not speak of it
< Sicredeci&7
c Credono cid 7
< Non si crede.
I Non lo credono.
< Si parla di cid 7
( Parlano di cio 7
r Se ne parla (see Lesson XXXIII
1 Oba. A.).
' Ne parlano.
( Non se ne parla.
C Non ne parlano
EXERCISES.
117.
How long have you been writing ? — I have been writing until
midnight. — How long did I work ? — You worked till four o'clock
in the morning. — How long did my brother remain with you ? —
He remained with me until evening. — How long hast thou been
working ? — I have been working till now. — Hast tljou still long
to write ? — I have to write till the day after to-morrow. — Has the
physician still long to work ? — He has to work till to-morrow. —
A.m I to remain here long ? — You are to remain here till Sun-
Jay. — Is my brother to remain long with you ? — He is to remain
with us till Monday. — How long are we to work ? — You are to
work till the day after to- morrow. — Have you still long to speak ?
I have still an hour to speak. — Did you speak long ? — I spoke till
the next day. — Did you remain long in my counting-house ? — I
remained in it till this moment. — Have you still long to live at
the Frenchman's house ? — I have still long to live at his house. —
How long have you to remain at his house ? — Till Tuesday. —
Hap the servant brushed my clothes ? — He has brushed them. —
Has he swept the floor 1 — He has swept it. — How long did he re
mail here ? — Till noon (mezzo giorno). — Does your friend still live
with you ? — He lives with me no longer. — How long did he live
with you ? — He lived with me only a year. — How ong did you
rema n at the ball ? — I remained there till midnight. — How long
did y ju remain in the ship ? — I remained an hour in it. — Have
you remained in the garden till now ?— I have remained there till
now (Jino ad ora).
172 THIRTY-SEVENTH LESSON.
118.
What do you do in the morning ? — I read. — And what do you
do then ? — I breakfast and study.— Do you breakfast before you
read ? — No, Sir, I read before I breakfast. — Dost thou play in-
stead of stuaying ? — I study instead of playing. — Does thy
brother go to the play instead of going into the garden ? — He goes
neither to the play .ior into the garden. — What do you do in the
evening ? — I study. — What hast thou done this evening ? — I have
brushed your clothes, and have gone to the theatre. — Didst thou
remain long at the theatre ? — I remained there but a few minutes.
— Are you willing to wait here ? — How long am I to wait ? — You
are to wait till my father returns. — Has any body come ? — Some-
body has come. — What did they want ? — They wanted to speak
to you. — Would they not wait ? — They would not wait. — Have
you waited for me long ? — I have waited for you two hours. —
Have you been able to read my note ? — I have been able to read
it. — Have you understood it ? — I have understood it. — Have you
ehown it to any body ? — I have shown it to nobody. — Have they
brought my fine clothes ? — They have not brought them yet. —
Have they swept my floor and brushed my clothes ? — They have
done both. — What have they said ? — They have said nothing. —
What have they done ? — They have done nothing. — Has your
little brother been spelling ? — He has not been willing to spell. —
Has the merchant's boy been willing to work ? — He has not been
willing. — What has he been willing to do ? — He has not been
willing to do any thing.
119.
Has the shoemaker been able to mend my boots ? — He has not
been able to mend them. — Why has he not been able to mend
*hem ? — Because he has had no time. — Have they been able to
find my gold buttons ? — They have not been able to find them. —
Why has tfte tailor not mended my coat ? — Because he has no
good thread. — Why have you beaten the dog ? — Because it has
bitten me. — Why do you drink ? — Because I am thirsty. — What
nave they wished to say ? — They have not wished to say any
thing. — Have they said any thing new ? — They have not said any
hing new. — What do they say new in the market ? — They sav
i
THIRTY-EIGHTH LESSON.
17S
nothing new (there). — Did they wish to kill a man 1 — They
wished to kill one. — Do they believe that ? — They do not believe
it. — Do they speak of that ? — They speak of it. — Do they speak
of the man that has been killed ? — They do not speak of him. —
Can they do what they wish ? — They do what they can, but they
do not do what they wish. — What have they brought ? — They
have brought your new coat. — Has my servant brushed my fine
carpets ? — He has not brushed them yet. — Have you bought a
new horse ? — I have bought two new horses. — How many fine
trees have you seen ? — I have seen but one fine tree. — Have you
seen a fin e man ? — I have seen several fine men. — Have you u
new friend ? — I have several. — Do you like your new friends ? —
I like them.
THIRTY-EIGHTH LESSON.
Lezione trentesima ottava.
Haw far?
Up to, as far as.
Aa far as my brother's.
As far as here, hither.
As far as there, thither
is far as London.
As far as Paris.
• To, at, or in Paris.
To, " " Berlin.
To, " " London.
To, " " Rome.
To, at, or in France.
To, " ' Italy.
T«s " ' England
( Fin dove ?
( Fin donde ?
Fino, sino.
« Fin da mio fratello.
(■ Fino a casa di mio fratdfe.
Fin qui (or qua).
Fin la
Fino a (or in) Londra.
Fino a Parigi.
A Parigi, in Parigi.
A Berlino, — Berlino,
A Londra, — Londix
A Roma, — Roma.
In Francia,
In Italia.
In Inghilterra.
174
THIRTY-EIGHTH LESSON.
As far aa England.
Aa far as Italy.
As far as Germany,
As far as France.
As far as Spain.
As far as my house.
as far as the warehouse.
As far as the corner.
As far as the end of the road.
As far as the middle of the road.
Above or up stairs.
Below — down stairs.
As far as above.
As far as below.
Is far as the other side of the road.
Fino in Inghilterra,
Fino in Italia.
Fino in Germania (Alemagns).
Fino in Francia.
Fino in Ispagna.
( Fino a casa mia (or in casa mia)
( Fino da me.
Fino al magazzino.
Fino al canto (all angolo).
Fino in fondo alia strada (a capt
dell a strada).
c Fino alia meta della via.
/ Fino in mezzo della via.
Sopra, in alto, dissopra,
Giu, dbbasso.
Fino dissopra, fino in alto.
Fin giu, fin' abbasso.
Fino all' altra parte della via.
This side.
. That side.
Ob this side of the road.
On that side of the road.
Da questo lato.
Da questa parte (da questo canto)
Da quella (cotesta) parte.
Di qua della via.
Al di qua della via.
Al di la della via.
Di la della via.
Germany.
L' Alemagna, la Germania,
America.
L' America.
Holland.
L' Olanda.
Italy.
L' Italia.
England.
L' Inghilterra.
France.
La Francia.
Spain,
La Spagna.
The middle.
11 mezzo (la meta, a fern, noun)
The well.
11 pozzo.
The cask.
La botte (a fern. noun).
The river.
11 fiume.
The lake.
11 lago.
The castle.
11 castello.
The corner.
11 canto, 1' angolo.
THIRTY-EIGHTH LESSON.
to
To travel.
Do you go to Paris 1
Do you travel to Paris 1
Do you go to Florence 1
Do you go to Rome 1
I do travel (or go) thither.
is he gone to England ?
He is gone thither.
How far is he gone 1
How far has he travelled 7
He is gone as far as America
He is gone as far as Italv
To steal.
To steal something from seme one.
Have they stolen your hat from you 7
They have stolen it from me.
Has the man stolen the books from
thee?
He has stolen them from me.
What have they stolen rrom you 7
What have they stolen from your
friend 7
They have stolen all bis good wine
from him.
AU.
All the wine.
All the good wine.
All his good wine.
All the books.
All his good books.
AU the mefc.
How do you spell this word?
How is this word written 1
Xt is written thus.
Viaggiare 1.
VaEllaaParigil
Va Ella a Firenzel
Va Ella a Roma?
Ci vado.
E egli andato in InghLterra ?
Ci e4 andato.
Fin dove e4 egli andato 7
Fine dove ha egli viaggiato 1
Egli d andato fino in America,
Egli e* andato fino in Italia.
Rubare 1.
{ Rubare qualcosa ad uno.
( Portar via qualcosa ad uno.
$ Le & stato rubato il cappello 7
(■ Le hanno portato via il cappello 1
{ Mi 3 stato rubato.
C Me l' hanno portato via.
( T' ha rubato i tuoi libri 1' uomo 1
c Ha nortato via i tuoi libri V uomo 1
Me li ha portati via.
Che Le d stato rubato ?
Che £ stato rubato al di Lei amico 1
Gli d stato rubato tutto il suo buon
vino.
Tutto.
Tutto il vino.
Tutto il buon vino.
Tutto il suo buon vino.
Tutti i libri.
Tutti i suoi buoni libit
( Tutti gli uomini.
( Ogni uomo.
Come si scrive questo ▼ocabolo
(questa parola) ?
Come scrivesi questa parola ?
Si scrive in questo modo (or
C08l).
Si scrive in questa maniera.
176
THIRTY-EIGHTH LESSOlf,
7V dye (to colour) — dyed.
I dye, thou dyest, he dyes.
We dye, you dye, they dye.
To dye blacK.
To dye red.
To dye green.
To dye blue.
To dye yellow.
Tignere * or tingere*1— titUo.
Tingo, tingi, tigne or tingo
Tigniamo, tignete, tingono.
Tignere nero.
Tignere rosso.
Tignere verde.
Tignere azzurro (turchino*.
Tignere giallo.
My blue coat.
II mio abito turchino.
This white hat.
Q.uesto cappello bianco.
His round hat
11 suo cappello tondo.
His yellow waistcoat.
I suo giubbettino giallo.
J have a three-cornered hat.
Ho un cappello a tre corni (t ere
punte).
Do you dye your coat blue ?
Tigne il di Lei abito turchino 1
1 dye it green.
Lo tingo verde.
What colour will you dye your cloth ?
. Come vuole tingere il di Lei pnnno 1
I will dye it red.
Voglio tingerlo rosso.
The dyer;
11 tintore.
To get dyed — got dyed.
Far tingere— fatto tingere
What colour do you get your
coat
Come fa Ella tingere il di Lei vet
dyed 1
tito?
I get it dyed green.
Lo faccio tingere verde.
What colour have you had your
hat
Come ha fatto tingere il di Lei cap
dyed?
pello ?
I have had it dyed black.
L' ho fatto tingere nero.
Red.
Rosso.
Brown.
Bruno.
Grey.
Grigio (bigio).
I have had my waistcoat dyed yell
DW.
Ho fatto tingere giallo il mio giub-
bettino.
EXERCISES.
120.
How far have you travelled ? — I have travelled as far as Ger-
many.— Has he travelled as far as Italy ? — He has travelled as
far as America. — How far have the Spaniards gone ? — They have
gone as far as London. — How far has that poor man come ? — He
has come as far as here. — Has he come as far as your house ? -
THIRTY-EIGHTH LESSON. 177
He has come as far as my father's. — Have L ey stolen any thing
from you ? — They have stolen all the good wine from me. — Have
they stolen any thing from your father ? — They have stolen all
his good books. — Dost thou steal any thing ? — I steal nothing. —
Hast thou ever stolen any thing ? — I have never stolen any thing,
—Have they stolen your good clothes from you ? — They have
itolen them from me. — What have they stolen from me ? — They
have stolen all the good books from you. — When did they steal
the money from you 1 — They stole it from me the day before yes-
terday.— Have they ever stolen any thing from us ? — They have
never stolen any thing from us. — How far did you wish to go ?-—
[ wished to go as far as the wood. — Have you gone as far as
there ? — I have not gone as far as there. — How far does your
brother wish to go ? — He wishes to go as far as the end of that
road. — How far does the wine go \arrivd)1 — It goes (arriva) as
far as the bottom of the cask (della botte). — Whither art thou
going ? — I am going to the market. — How far are we going ? —
We are going as far as the theatre. — Art thou going as far as the
well ? — I am going as far as the castle. — Has the carpenter
drunk all the wine ? — He has drunk it all. — Has his little boy
torn all his books ? — He has torn them all. — Why has he torn
them ? — Because he does not wish to study.
121.
How much have you lost ? — I have lost all my money. — Do
you know where my father is ? — I do not know. — Have you not
seen my book ? — I have not seen it. — Do you know how this word
is written ? — It is written thus. — Do you dye any thing ? — I dye
my hat. — What colour do you dye it ? — I dye it black. — What.
colour do you dye your clothes ? — I dye them yellow. — Do you
get your trunk dyed ? — I get it dyed. — What colour do you get
it dyed ? — I get it dyed green. — What colour dost thou get thy
gloves dyed ? — I get them dyed blue. — Does your boy get his rib.
bon dyed ? — He gets it dyed. — Does he get it dyed red ? — He
gets it dyed grey. — What colour have your friends got theii
clothes dyed ? — They have got them dyed green. — What colour
heve the Italians had their hats dyed ?■ — They have had thera
dyed brown. — Have you a white hat? — I have a black one.—.
178 THIRTY-EIGHTH LESSON.
What hat has the nobleman ? — He has two hats ; a white one ana
a black one. — What hat has the American ? — He has a round
hat. — Have I a white hat ? — You have several white and black
hats — Has your dyer already dyed your cloth ?— He has dyed
it. — What colour has he dyed it ? — He has dyed it green. — Do
you travel sometimes 1 — I travel often. — Where do you intend tc
£0 this summer (quest* estate) ? — I intend to go to Paris. — Do you
wt go to Italy ? — I do go thither. — Hast thou sometimes trav-
elled ? — I have never travelled. — Have your friends a mind to go
to Holland ? — They have a mind to go thither. — When do they
intend to depart ? — They intend to depart the day after to-morrow.
122.
Has your brother already gone to Spain ? — He has not yet gone
thither. — Have you travelled in Spain ? — I have travelled there. —
When do you depart ? — I depart to-morrow. — At what o'clock ? —
At five o'clock in the morning. -Have you worn out all your
boots ? — I have worn them all out. — What have the Spaniards
done ? — They have burnt all our good ships. — Have you finished
all your exercises ? — 1 have finished them all. — How far is the
Frenchman come ? — He has come as far as the middle of the road.
— Where does your friend live ? — He lives on this side of the
road. — Where is your warehouse ? — It is on that side of the road.
— Where is the counting-house of our friend ? — It is on that side
of the theatre. — Is your friend's garden. on this or that side of the
wood ? — It is on that side. — Is not our warehouse on this side of
the road ? — It is on this side. — Where have you been this morn-
ing ? — I have been at the castle. — How long did you remain at
the castle ? — I remained there an hour. — Is your brother above
or below ? — He is above. — How far has your servant carried my
trunk ? — He has carried it as far as my warehouse. — Has he
come as far as my house ? — He has come as far as theTe. — How
far does the green carpet go 1 — It goes as far as the corner of the
counting-house. — Have you been in France ? — I have been there
several times. — Have your children already been in Germany ?
—They have not yet been there, but I intend to send them thither
in the spring. — Will you go on this or that side of the road ? — 1
THIRTY-NINTH LESSON.
179
will go neither on this nor on that side ; I will go in the middle oi
the road. — How far does this road lead '? — It leads as far as London.
THIRTY-NINTH LESSON.
Lezione trentesima nona.
m , . . , r Esser* d uopo — stato d novo,
lo be necessary (must) — been v „. r ».
* v ' J nisognare — bisognato.
necessary. ) .... . , .
9 ( Abbisognare — abbtsognato
Is it necessary ? > _.
Must I, he, we, you, they, or she? \ Bl8°gna? Ed' uopo?
It is necessary. E d' uopo. Bisogna.
Ob*. A. All verbs expressing necessity, obligation, or want, as, to be obligca,
to vxint, to be necessary, must, are generally rendered in Italian by esser * d nope
or bisognare.
Is it necessary to go to the market 7
It is not necessary to go thither.
What must one do to learn Italian 7
It is necessary to study a great deal.
( Bisogna and are al mercato 7
t E d' uopo andare al mercato 7
{ Non bisogna andarci.
c Non e4 d' uopo andarci.
Ch' & d' uopo (che bisogna) fare per
imparare 1' italiano 7
£ d' uopo (bisogna) studiar molto.
__ . , m ( Che m' d (mi d) d' uopo fare 7
What must / do 1 \ Che debbo fare ?
Ob$. B. The English nominative, or subject of the verb must, is rendered
in Italian by the indirect cases in the dative : mi, ti, gli, &, ci, ri, loro (see the
Personal Pronouns, Lesson XX.), according to number and person.
You must stay still.
Whither must \« go 1
He must go for his book.
What must they buy 7
They must buy some beef.
What must we read 7
Le £ d' uopo restar quieta.
( Ove gli e d' uopo andare 7
C Ove gli bisogna andare 7
Gli e d' uopo andare in cerca del rue
libro.
Che e4 loro d' uopo coraprare ?
E loro d' uopo comprar del manzo
r Che ci £ d' uopo leggere 7
5 Che ci bisogna leggere 7
C t Che ci convien leggere 7
180
THIRTY-NINTH LESSON.
What must you have 7
/ must have some money.
Must you have a sou 7
Must you have a great deal 7
/ must have a great deal.
/ ^nly want one sou.
Is that all you want 7
That is all I want.
How much must thou have 7
How much dost thou want 7
I only want a livre.
How much must your brother have 7
He only wants two livres.
Che Lc $ d' uopol
Cherie1 d' uopo?
Che Lt bisogna 7
Mi € d' uopo danaro.
Le e d' uopo un soldo ?
Gliene i d' uopo molto ?
Me n' £ d' uopo molto.
Mi e d' uopo solamente un soldo
Non Le bisogna che questo 7
Non mi bisogna che questo.
Quanto ti e d' uopo 7
■ Non mi & d' uopo che una lira.
Non mi biscgna che una lira
Mi $ d' uopo solamente una lira.
Quanto bisogna al di Lei fratello 1
■ Non gli bisognano che due lire.
Non gli e" d' uopo che due lire.
Gli e d' uopo solamente due lire.
Have you what you want 7
I have what I want.
He has what he wants.
They have what they want.
More.
No — more.
Do you not want more 7
/ do not want more.
He does not want more.
Have you been obliged to work much
to learn Italian 7
I have been obliged to work much.
HaEUaci6 5che^^^a1
c che Le e d' uopo ?
Ho cid che m' & d' uopo.
Ha cid che gli d d' uopo.
Hanno cid che loro e d' uopo.
Di piu ( piu).
Non — di piu (non — piu).
Non Le abbisogna di piu 1
Non mi abbisogna di piu.
Non gli abbisogna di piu.
Le 6 stato d' uopo studiar molto pet
imparare 1' italiano ?
Mi e stato d' uopo studiar molto.
What am I to do 1
You must work.
Am I to go thither?
You may go thither.
To be worth — been worth.
How much may that horse be worth 1
[t may be worth a hundred sequins.
Are you worth 7
Che debbo fare ?
Deve lavorare, or Dovete lavorare.
Devo and ami
Pud andarvi.
Valere* — valuto (yalso).
Quanto puO valere questo cavallo?
Pud valere cento zecchini.
Yale Ella (valete) 7 (not much used*
THIETY-NINTH LESSOR.
181
I am worth.
Thou art worth.
He is worth.
ffe are worth — they are worth.
How much is that gun worth 7
It is worth but one sequin.
How much is that worth ?
That is not worth much.
That is not worth any thing.
Valgo.
Vali.
Vale.
Vagliamo— vagliono or valgona
Quanto vale questo fucile 1
Vale solamente uno zeccbino,
Quanto val cid 7
Ciu non val molto.
Cid non val gran cosa.
Ciu non val niente.
This is worth more than that.
The one is not worth so much as the
other.
Questo val piu di quello.
L' uno non vale quanto 1' altro.
To be better.
Am I not as good as my brother ?
Vou are better than he.
I am not so good as you.
To give back, to restore, j
Given back, restored. ]
Does he restore you your book 7
He restores it to me.
Has he given you back your gloves 7
He has given them me back.
Has your brother already commenced
his exercises'?
Not yet.
He has not yet commenced them.
The present.
Have you received a present 7
1 have received several.
Have you raceived the books?
( have received them.
From whom ?
Prom whom have you received pre-
sents)
Prom my friends.
< Valer* piu.
I Costar piu.
Non valgo quanto mio fratello 1
Ella val piu di lui.
- Non valgo quanto Ella.
Rendere* — reso,
Le rende il di Lei libro?
Me lo rende
Le ha reso i di Lei guanti 7
Me li ha resi.
II di Lei fratello ha gia cominciato
suoi temi 1
Non — ancora ; non — per ancc
Non li ha ancora incominciati.
II regalo.
Ha ricevuto un regalo 1
Ne ho ricevuti parecchi.
Ha Ella ricevuto i libri?
Li ho ricevuti.
Dacht?
Da chi ha ricevuto del regafit
Dai miei amicL
183
THIRTY-NINTH LESSON.
Whenct? Where from?
Where do you come from 1
I come from the garden.
Where is he come from 1
He is come from the theatre
Where did they come from 1
They are come from home.
Da dove f
D' onde?
D' onde (da dove) riena 1
Vengo dal giardino.
Da dove e* venuto 1
E venuto dal teatro.
Da dove son venuti 1
Son venuti da casa loro
EXERCISES.
123.
Is it necessary to go to the market ? — It is not necessary to go
thither. — What must you buy ? — I must buy some beef. — Must I
go for some wine ? — You must go for some. — Am I to go to the
ball ? — You must go there. — When must I go there ? — You must
go there this evening. — Must I go for the carpenter ? — You must
go for him. — What must be done to learn Russian ? — It is neces-
sary to study a great deal. — Is it necessary to study a great deal to
learn German ? — It is necessary to study a great deal. — What
must I do ? — You must buy a good book. — What is he to do ? —
He must sit still. — What are we to do ? — You must work. — Must
you work much in order to learn the Arabic ? — I must work much
to learn it. — Why must I go to the market ? — You must go thither
to buy some beef and wine. — Must I go any where ? — Thou must
go into the garden. — Must I send for any thing ? — Thou must
send for some wine. — What must I do ? — You must write an ex-
ercise.— To whom must I write a note ? — You must write one to
your friend. — What do you want, Sir ? — I want some cloth. —
How much is that hat worth ? — It is worth four crowns. — Do you
want any boois ? — I want some. — How much are these boots
worth ? — They are worth twenty livres. — Is that all you want 1
— That is all I want. — Do you not want any gloves ? — I do not
want any. — Dost thou want much money ? — I want much. — How
much must thou have ? — I must have five sequins. — How much
does your brother want ? — He wants but six francs. — Does he not
Want more ? — He does not want more. — Does your friend want
more ? — He does not want so much as I. — What do you want ?—
THIBTV -NINTH LESSON. 183
f want money and clothes. — Have you now what you want ? — 1
have what I want. — Has vour father what he wants ? — He has
what he wants.
124.
Have the neighbours children given you back your books ?—
They have given them me back. — When did they give them you
back ? — They gave them me back yesterday. — Has your little boy
received a present ? — He has received several. — From whom has
he received any ? — He has received some from my father and from
yours. — Have you received any presents ? — I have received some.
— What presents have you received ? — I have received fine pres-
ents.— Do you come from the garden 1 — I do not come from the
garden, but from the warehouse. — Where are you going to ? — 1
am going to the garden. — Whence does the Irishman come ? — He
comes from the garden. — Does he come from the garden from
which (dal quale) you come ? — He does not come from the same
(dal medesimo). — From which (da qual) garden does he come ? —
He comes from that of our old friend. — Whence comes our boy ?
— He comes from the play. — How much may that horse be worth ?
— It may be worth five hundred crowns.-— Is this book worth as
much as that ? — It is worth more. — How much is my gun worth ?
— It is worth as much as that of your friend. — Are your horses
worth as much as those of the English ? — They are not worth so
much. — Hov much is that knife worth? — It is worth nothing.
125.
Is your servant as good as mine ? — He is oetter than yours.—
Are you as good as your brother ? — He is better than I. — Art thou
as good as thy friend ? — 1 am as good as he. — Are we as gooa as
our neighbours ? — We are better than they. — Is your urribrella
worth as much as mine ? — It is not worth so much. — Why is it
not worth so much as mine ? — Because it is not so fine as yours
—How much is that gun worth ? — It is not worth much. — Do you
wish to sell your horse ? — I wish to sell it. — How much is it
worth ? — It is worth two hundred crowns. — Do you wish to buy
it ? — I have bought one already. — Does your father intend to buy
* horse ? — He intends to buy one, but not (ma non) yours (il d>
184
FORTIETH LESSON.
Lei). — Have your brothers commenced (incominctato) their ex.
ercises ? — They have commenced them. — Have you received
your notps ? — We have not yet received them. — Have we what
we want ? — We have not what we want. — What do we want ? —
We want fine horses, several servants, and much money. — Is that
all we want ? — That is all we want. — What must I do ? — You
must write. — To whom must I write ? — You must write to your
friend. — Where is he? — He is in America. — Whither am I to
(debbo) go ? — You may go to France. — How far must I (mi e d'
uapo) go ? — You may go as far as Paris. — Which (a quai) notes
has your brother answered ? — He has answered those of his
friends. — Which (quai) dogs have your servants beaten 1 — Thev
uave beaten those that have made much noise.
FORTIETH LESSON.
Lezione quarantesvma.
To eat — eaten.
To dine (eat dinner).
The dinner.
The breakfast.
To eat supper (to sup).
The supper.
After,
. After me.
After him-
After you.
After my brother.
Mangiare 1 — mangiato
SDesinare 1 — desinato.
Pranzare 1 — pranzato.
li pranzo.
La colazione (a fern. noun).
Cenare 1 — cenato.
La cena (a fern. noun).
Dopo.
Dopo di me.
Dopo di lui.
Dopo di Lei (di vol).
Dopo mio fratello.
Ob*. The preposition dopo requires the genitive before a personal pro-
M#un otherwise it governs the accusative.
After having spoken | t Dopo aver parlato.
JjjT When the present participle is ueed in English after a preposition, it it
rendered in Italian by the infinitive.
FORTIETH LESSON.
isr
After hating sold his horse.
After having been there
broke your knife after cutting the
beef.
t Dopo aver venduto il suo cavallo
t Dopo tsterci statu.
1 Ilo rotto il di Lei coltello dopo
aver tagliato il manzo.
* have dined earlier than you.
You have supped late.
To pay for.
To pay a man for a horse.
To pay the tailor for the coat.
Do you pay the shoemaker for the
boots ?
I pay him/«w them.
Does he pay you for the knife 7
He does pay me for it.
I pay what I owe.
To ask for.
Ho desinato piu per tempo di Lei
Ella ha cenato tardi.
Pagare 1 — pagato.
t Pagare un cavallo ad un uomo
t Pagare 1' abito al sarto.
t Paga Ella gli stivali al calzolaio t
t Glieli pago.
Le paga egli il coltello 1
t Me lo paga.
Pago cio che debbo.
Domandare 1 — domandato
(Chiedere* — chiesto).
J3r The English verbs to pay and to ask require the preposition for ; but uj
Italian, as in French, they require the person in the dative and the object in the
accusative. When the verb pagare, however, has no object in the accusative,
it requires the person in that case.
I have paid the tailor.
I have paid him.
Have you paid the shoemaker ?
I have paid him.
To ask a man for some money.
I ask my father for some money.
Do you ask me for your hat 1
I ask you for it.
To ask for— asked for .
I ask for, thou askest for, he asks
for.
We ask for, you ask for, they ask
for.
To ask him/or it
To ask him for them .
What do you ask me fori
I aak you for vothing.
Ho pagato il sarto.
L' ho pagato.
Ha Ella pagato il calzolaio ?
L' ho pagato.
t Domandare del danaro ad un
uomo?
t Domando danaro a mio padre,
t Mi domanda Ella il di Lei cap
pello 1
t Giielo domando (chiedo).
Chiedere* — chiesto .
Chiedo, chiedi, chiede
Chiediamo, chiedete, chiedoiM
( t Chiederglielo
It
i:
Domandarglielo.
t Chiederglieli.
Domandarglieli.
t Che mi chiede Ella 1
t Non Le chiedo niento.
186
FORTIETH LESSOH.
To try.
Will you try to do that 7
I have tried to do it.
You must try to do better
To UWr-Keld.
1 hold, thou hoidest, he holds.
Do you hold my stick 7
I bold it.
We hold.
You hold.
They hold.
Are you looking/or any one 7
Whom are you looking/or?
I am looking far a brother of mine.
My uncle.
My cousin.
My relation.
The parents (father and mother).
A brother of mine.
A cousin of yours.
A relation of his (or hers).
A friend of ours.
A neighbour of theirs.
He tries to see you.
Does he try to see me 7
He tries to see an uncle of his.
To inquire after some one.
After whom do you inquire 7
I inquire after a friend of mine.
Th»y inquire after you.
Or they inquire after me 7
Provare (provarsi) 1 — pre
vato.
Vuol Ella provare a far cid T
Ho provato a farlo.
Bisogna provare a far meglio.
Tenere* — tenuto.
Tengo, tieni, tiene.
Tiene Ella il mio bastone?
Lo tengo.
Teniamo.
Tenete.
Tengono.
t Cerca Ella qualcuno 1
t Chi cerca Ella 7
1 Cerco un mio fratello.
Mio zio.
Mio cugino.
II mio parente ; pi. i miel parentl
I genitori (padre e madre).
t Un mio fratello.
t Un di Lei cugino.
t Un suo parente.
t Un nostra amico
t Un loro vicino
Cerca vederla.
Cerca vedermi 7
Cerca vedere un suo zio.
{ Domandare di qualcuno
( Chiedere di qualcuno.
Di chi domanaa Ella 7
Domando di un mio amico.
( Domandano di Lei.
( t Si domanda di Lei.
\ Domandano di me 7
( t Si domanda di me ?
FORTIETH LESSON.
187
Properly.
Fou write properly.
Theee men do their duty properly
The duty.
The task.
Have you done your task 7
I haw done it.
Have ye done your task ?
We have done it.
A glass of wine.
4 pie^e of bread.
! Benissimo.
A perfexione.
Ella scrive benissimo (a peifezione)
Q,uesti uomini fanno il dover loro i
maraviglia.
II dovere.
II dovere (il lavoro).
Ha Ella fatto il di Lei dovere!
L' ho fatto.
Hanno fatto il loro dovere?
L' abbiamo fatto.
Un bicchier di vino.
UnPezzo2dipane.
Un tozzo >
EXERCISES.
126.
Have you paid for the gun ? — I have paid for it. — Has your
uncle oaid for the books? — He has paid for them. — Have I paid the
tailor for the clothes ? — You have paid him for them. — Hast thou
paid the merchant for the horse ?— I have not vet paid him for it.
—Have we paid for our gloves ? — We have raid for them. — Has
your cousin already paid for his boots ? — He has not yet paid
for them. — Does my brother pay you what he owes you ? — He
pays it me. — Do you pay what you owe ? — I pay what I owe.—
Have you paid the baker ? — I have paid him. — Has your uncle
paid the butcher for the beef? — He has paid him for it. — Who
has broken my knife ? — I have broken it after cutting the bread
— Has your son broken my glasses ? — He has broken them after
drinking the wine. — When has your cousin broken my penknife?
^— He has broken it after writing his notes. — Have you paid the
merchant for the wine after drinking it ? — I have paid for it after
Jrinking it. — What did you do after finishing your exercises ? —
1 went to my cousin, in order to conduct him to the play .-*— How
do I speak ? — You speak properly (benissimo). — How has my
cousin written his exercises ? — He has written them properly (a
verfezione). — How have my children done their task ? — The)
188 FORTIETH LESSOH.
hare done it well. — Does this man do his duty ? — He alwaj
does it. — Do these men do their duty ? — They always do it. — Dc
you do your duty ? — I do what I can. — What do you ask this
man for ? — I ask him for some money. — What does this bey ask
me for ? — He asks you for some money. — Do you ask me for any
thing ? — I ask you for a crowr, — rDo you ask me for the bread 1
I ask you for it. — Which man do you ask for money ? — I ask
him whom you ask for some. — Which merchants do you ask foi
gloves ? — I ask those for some who live in William-street. — What
do you ask the baker for ? — I ask him for some bread.
127.
Do you ask the butcners for some meat ? — I ask them for some.
— Dost thou ask me for the stick ? — I ask thee for it. — Does he
ask thee for the book ? — He asks me for it. — What have yoi
asked the Englishman for ? — I have asked him for my leather
trunk. — Has he given it you ? — He has given it me. — Whom
have you asked for some sugar ? — I have asked the merchant for
some. — Whom does your brother pay for his boots ? — He pays
the shoemaker for them. — Whom have we paid for the bread ? —
We have paid our bakers for it. — How old art thou ? — I am not
quite ten years old. — Dost thou already learn French ? — I do al-
ready learn it. — Does thy brother know German ? — He does not
know it. — Why does he not know it ? — Because he has not had
time to learn it. — Is your father at home ? — No, Sir, he is gone
(jpartito), but my brother is at home. — Where is your father gone
to ? — He is gone to England. — Have you sometimes been there ?
— I have never been there. — Do you intend going to France this
■ummer ? — I do intend going thither. — Do you intend to stay there
long ? — I intend to stay there during the summer. — How long does
your brother remain at home? — Till twelve o'clock. — Have you
had your gloves dyed ? — I have had them dyed. — What have you
had them dyed ? — I have had them dyed yellow. — Have you already
dined ? — Not yet. — At what o'clock do you dine ? — 1 dine at six
o'clock. — At whose house (da chi, or in casa di chi) do you dine ?
—1 dine at the house of a friend of mine. — With whom did you
dine yesterday ? — I dined with a relation of mine. — What did you
eat ? — We eat good bread, good beef, and petty-patties. — Whai
FORTIETH LESSON. 189
lid you drink ? — We drank good wine and excellent cider. —
vVhere does your uncle dine to-day ? — He dines with us. — At
vhat o'clock does your father sup ? — fie sups at nine o'clock ? —
)o you sup earlier than he ? — I sup later than he.
128.
Where are you going to ? — I am going to a relation of mine, ic
arder to dine with him. — Art thou willing to hold my gloves ?— I
am willing to hold them. — Who holds my hat ? — Your son holds it.
— Dost thou hold my stick ? — I do hold it. — Do you hold any
thing ? — I hold your gun. — Who has held my book ? — Your ser-
vant has held it. — Will you try to speak ? — I will try. — Has your
little brother ever tried to do exercises? — He has tried. — Have
you ever tried to make a hat ? — I have never tried to make one.
— Whom are you looking for ? — I am looking for the man who
has sold a horse to me. — Is your relation looking for any bod\ ?
— He is looking for a friend of his. — Are we looking for any
body ? — We are looking for a neighbour of ours. — Whom dost
♦hou look for ? — I look for a friend of ours. — Are you looking foi
i servant of mine ? — No, I am looking for one of mine. — Have
you tried to speak to your uncle ? — I have tried to speak to him.
— Have you tried to see my father ? — I have tried to see him.—
Has he received you ? — He has not received me. — Has he re-
ceived your brothers ? — He has received them. — Have you been
able to see your relation ? — I have not been able to see him. —
What did you do after writing your exercises ? — I wrote my note
after writing my exercises. — After whom (di chi) do you inquire
(domandare) ? — I inquire after the tailor. — Does, this man inquire
after any one ? — He inquires after you (di Lei). — Do they in-
quire (si domanda) after you ? — They inquire after me.— Do they
inquire after me ? — They do not inquire after you, but after a
friend of yours (di un di Lei amico). — Do you inquire after the
physician ? — I inquire after him. — What does your little brother
ask for ? — He asks for a small piece of bread. — Has he not yet
breakfasted ? — He has breakfasted, but he is still hungfy. — What
does your uncle ask for ? — He asks for a glass of wine. — Has he
not already drunk ? — He has already drunk, but he is still
hungry.
FORTY-FIRST LESSON.
Lezione quarantesima prima.
To perceive (to discover). Scorgere* — scorto.
Htm who. \ Quetto, il quale (or che)
I Coluiy il quale (or che).
Those who. \ Qwllh i quali (or che).
( Coloro, i quali (or che).
Colui and coloro relate only to persons, qudlo and quelli to persona and
Oft*.
mings.
Do yon perceive the man who is
coming ?
I perceive him who is coming.
Do you perceive the men who are
going into the warehouse 1
I perceive those who are going into it.
Scorge Ella I' uomo che viene 1
Scorgo quello che viene.
Scorge Ella gli uomini che vanno a
magazzino 1
Scorgo coloro (quelli) che vi vanno
How is the weather?
What kind of weather is it ?
It is fine weather at present.
How was the weather yesterday 1
What kind of weather was it yester-
day?
Was it fine weather yesterday ?
It was bad weather yesterday.
It m fine weather this morning.
t Che tempo fa?
t Adesso fa bel tempo.
t Che tempo ha fatto ieri V
t Ha tatto bel tempo ieri ?
t Ieri ha fatto cattivo tempo,
t Stamane fa bel tempo.
If it warm? .
It it warm.
Very.
It is very warm.
It is cold.
It is very cold.
it is neither warm no* cold.
t Pa caldo?
t Fa caldo.
Molto.
t Fa molto caldo (or fa caldissimo).
t Fa freddo.
t Fa freddissimo (or fa molto freddo >
t Ncn fa caldo ne" freddo.
FORTY-FIRST LESSON. 191
Oar*.
Nuvoloso, oscuro.
Obicuro.
Oscuro, fosco.
Dusky, gloomy.
Buio, opaco.
Clear, light.
Chiaro.
A ia dark in your warehouse.
t Fa oscuro nel di Lei magaxxino.
[s it dark in his granary ?
t Fa oscuro nel suo granaio?
t is dark there.
t Vifa oscuro.
Wet, damp.
Umido.
Dry.
Asciutto.
Is the weather damp 1
E umido il tempo?
It is not damp.
Non 3 umido.
It is dry weather.
E asciutto.
The weather is too dry.
E troppo asciutto.
The moorlight, moonshine.
11 chiaro di luna.
The sun.
11 sole.
It is moonlight.
C e chiaro di luna (splende la luna)
We have too much sun.
t Fa troppo sole.
To taste.
J Gustare 1.
1 Assaggiare I.
Have you tasted that wine?
Ha Ella assaggiato questo vino?
I have tasted it.
L' ho assaggiato.
t Come lo trova ?
H w do you like it 7
< Come Le piace ?
( Come Lepare?
r Lo trovo buono.
< Mi piace.
( Mi par buono.
I like it well.
£ Non mi par buono.
I do not'like it
) Non mi piace.
' 4
C Non lo trovo buono.
To appear — appeared.
I appear, thou appearest, he appears.
We, you, they appear.
Parere* — paruto (or parso)
(an impersonal verb gov.
erning the dative).
Paio, pari, pare.
Pariamo, parete, paiono.
To like — liked.
* like, thou likest, he likes.
We, you, they like.
Piacere* — piacciuto (an imper
sonal verb governing the
dative).
Mi, ti, gli, piace.
Ci, vi piace, piace loro.x
f Piacerty in the signification of to please, is conjugated thus: Piatcio, piad
fiact i piacciamo, piacetc, piacciono.
192
FORTY-FIRST LESSON.
1 like fish.
He likes fowl.
Do you like cider 1
No, I like wine.
The fish.
Do you like to see my brother'}
I like to see him.
I like to do it.
He likes to study.
t Mi piace ii peace
t Gli piace il polla»t*».
t Le piace il cidro ?
t No, mi piace il vino,
t II pesce ; pL i pesci.
Le piace vedere mio fratello T
Mi piace vederlo.
t Mi piace farlo.
t Gli piace studiare.
To learn by heart
The scholar.
The pupil.
The master (teacher).
The professor.
Do your scholars like to learn by
heart ?
They do not like learning by heart.
Have you learnt your exercises by
heart ?
We have learnt them.
Imparare a memoria,'
Lo scolaro.
L' allievo.
11 maestro.
II professore.
I di Lei scolari imparano volontier.
a memoria 7
Non imparano volontieri a memoria
Hanno imparato i loro temi a memo-
ria?
Li abbiamo imparati.
Once a day.
Thrice, or three times a month.
So much a year.
So much a head.
So much a soldier.
Six times a year.
t Una volta al giorno.
t Tre volte al mese.
t Tanto all' anno,
t Tanto a testa.
t Tanto per soldato.
t Sei volte all' anno,
t Sei volte 1' anno.
Early in the morning.
We go out early in the morning.
When did your father go out?
To speak of some one or some-
thing.
Of whom do you speak ?
We speak of the man whom you
know.
Of what are they speaking ?
They are speaking of the weather.
f Di buon mattino or di buon1 or a
Usciamo di buon mattino.
Quando e uscito il di Lei padre 1
Parlare di uno o di qualcosa.
Dichi parla Ella?
Parliamo dell' uomo che Ella oo-
nosce.
* Di che parlano (di che si parla) 7
Parlano del tempo (si parla deJ
tempo).
FORTY-FIRST LESSON.
193
The weather.
The soldier,
llso.
Vo be vJittcn- (satisfied) with
some one or Wnitthing.
Are you satisfied with this man 1
I am satisfied with him.
Are you content with your new coat 7
I am contented with it.
With what are you contented 7
Discontented.
I am discontented with him or it.
They speak of your friend.
They speak of him.
They are speaking of your book.
They are speaking of it.
'/•
I intend paying you, if I receive my
money.
Do you intend to buy coals 7
I intend to buy some, if they pay me
what they owe me.
II tempo.
II Boldato.
Anche (ancora).
Essere contento (soddisfatto ^
di uno o di qualcosa.
E Ella contenta (soddisfatta) di co»
tui?
Ne son contento (soddisfatto).
V. Ella soddisfatta del di Lei nuoro
abito 7
Ne son soddisfatto.
Di che cosa e Ella contenta (soddir
fatta) 7
Scontento, malcontento.
Ne sono scontento.
Si parla del di Lei amico.
Parlano del di Lei amico.
Se ne parla
Ne parlano.
Si parla del di Lei libro.
Parlano del di Lei libra
Se ne parla.
Ne parlano.
Se.
Intendo pagarla, so ncevo il mlo
danaro.
Intende comprar del carbone ?
Intendo comprarne, se mi pagano
cid che mi debbono.
How was the weather yesterday 7
Was it fine weather yesterday 7
It was bad weather.
I intend to take a walk, if the weather
is fair.
If the weather is fine, I intend to go to
the country.
To take a walk (go a walking).
t Che tempo ha fatto ieri ?
t Ha fatto bel tempo ieri 7
t Ha fatto cattivo tempo.
t Penso passeggiare se fa bel tempo.
t Se fa bel tempo intendo andare alia
campagna.
Passeggiare 1.
194 FORTY-FIRST LKSSOH.
EXERCISES.
129.
Do you perceive the man who is coming ? — I do not perceive
Aim. — Do you perceive the soldier's children ? — I perceive them.
— Do you perceive the men who are going into the garden ? — 1
do not perceive those who are going into the garden, but those
who are going to the market. — Does your brother perceive the
man who has lent him money ? — He does not perceive the.one
who has lent him, but the one to* whom he has lent some. — Dost
thou see the children who are studying ? — I do not see those who
are studying, but those who are playing. — Dost thou perceive
any thing ? — I perceive nothing. — Have you perceived my pa-
rents' warehouses ? — I have perceived them. — Where have you
perceived them ? — I have perceived them on that side of the road.
— Do you like a large hat ? — I do not like a large hat, but a
large umbrella. — What do you like to do ? — I like to write. — Do
you like to see these litttle boys ? — I like to see them. — Do you
.ike wine ? — I like it. — Does your brother like cider ? — He does
not like it. — What do the soldiers like ? — They like wine. — Dost
thou like tea or coffee ? — I like both. — Do these children like to
study 1 — They like to study and to play. — Do you like to read
and to write ? — I like to read and to write. — How many times a
day do you eat ? — Four times. — How often do your children
drink a day ? — They drink several times a day ? — Do you drink
as often as they ? — I drink oftener. — Do you often go to the the-
atre ? — I go thither sometimes. — How often in a month do you
go thither ? — I go thither but once a month. — How many times a
year does your cousin go to the ball ? — He goes thither twice a
year. — Do you go thither as often as he ? — I never go thither.—
Does your cook often go to the market ? — He goes thither every
morning (ogni mattina).
130.
Do you often go to my uncle ?— I go to him six times a year.— •
Do you like fowl ? — I like fowl, but I do not like fish. — What do
you like ? — I like a piece of bread and a glass of wine. — Do you
learn by heart ? — I do not like learning by heart. — Do your ou-
FORTY-FIRST LESSON. 195
oils like learning by heart ? — They like to study, but they d«
not like learning by heart. — How many exercises do they do a
day ? — They only do two, but they do them properly. — Were
you able tc read the note which I wrote to you 1 — I was able to
read it. — Did you understand it ? — I did understand it. — Do you
understand the man who is speaking to you ? — I do not under-
stand him. — Why do you not understand him ? — Because he
speaks too badly. — Does this man know French? — He knows it,
but I do not know it. — Why do you not learn it ? — I have no
time to learn it. — Do you intend going to the theatre this eve-
ning ? — I intend going thither, if you go. — Does your father intend
to buy that horse ? — He intends buying it, if he receives his
money. — Does your friend intend to go to England ? — He intends
going thither, if they pay him what they owe him. — Do you in-
tend going to the concert ? — I intend going thither, if my friend
goes. — Does you brother intend to study Italian ? — He intends
studying it, if he finds a good master.
131.
How is the weather to-day ? — It is very fine weather. — Was
it fine weather yesterday ? — It was bad weather yesterday. —
How was the weather this morning ? — It was bad weather, but
now it is fine weather. — Is it warm ? — It is very warm. — Is it
not cold ? — It is not cold. — Is it warm or cold ? — It is neither
warm nor cold. — Did you go to the garden the day before yes-
terday ? — I did not go thither. — Why did you not go thither ? — I
did not go thither, because it was bad weather. — Do you intend
going thither to-morrow ? — I intend going thither, if the weather
is fine. — Is it light in your counting-house ?--It is not light in it.
— Do you wish to study in mine ? — I wish to study in it. — Is it
light there ? — It is very light there. — Why cannot your brothei
work in his warehouse ? — He cannot work there, because it it
too dark (perche ci fa troppo buio). — Where is it too dark ? — In
his warehouse. — Is it light in that hole ? — It is dark there. — Is
the weather dry 1 — It is very dry. — Is it damp ? — It is not damp.
It is too diy. — Is it moonlight ? — It is not moonlight; it is very
damp. — Of what does your uncle speak I — He speaks of the
fine weather. — Of what do those men speak ? — They speai
196 FORTY-FIRST LESSON.
of fair and bad weather. — Do they not speak of the wind ? —
They also speak of it. — Dost thou speak of rny uncle? — I do
not speak of him. — Of whom dost thou speak ? — I speak of
thee and thy parents. — Do you inquire after any one ? — I in-
quire after your cousin ; is he at home ? — No, he is at his best
friend's.
132.
Have you tasted that wine ? — I have tasted it. — How do you
like it ? — I like it well. — How does your cousin like that cider ?
—He does not like it. — Which wine do you wish to taste ? — I
wish to taste that which you have tasted. — Will you taste (seniire)
this tobacco? — I have tasted (sentito) it already. — How do you
like it (come Le pare) ? — I like it (mi pare) well. — Why do you
not taste that cider ? — Because I am not thirsty. — Why does your
friend not taste this beef? — Because he is not hungry. — Of whom
have they spoken (si e parlato) ? — They have spoken of your
friend. — Have they not spoken of the physicians ? — They have
not spoken of them. — Do they not speak of the man of whom we
have spoken ? — They speak of him. — Have they spoken of the
noblemen ? — They have spoken of them. — Have they spoken of
those of whom we speak ? — They have not spoken of those of
whom we speak, but they have spoken of others. — Have they
spoken of our children or of those of our neighbours ? — They
have neither spoken of ours, nor of those of our neighbours.
Which children have been spoken of? — Those of our master
have been spoken of. — Do they speak of my book ? — They speak
of it. — Are you satisfied with your pupils ? — I am satisfied with
them. — How does my brother study ? — He studies well. — How
many exercises have you studied ? — I have already studied forty-
one. — Is your master satisfied with his scholar ? — He is satisfied
with him. — Is your master satisfied with the presents which he
has received ? — He is satisfied with them. — Have you received a
note? — I have received one. — Will you answer it? — I am going
to answer it (ora ci rispondo). — When did you receive it? — I re-
ceived it early this morning. — Are you satisfied with it ? — I am
not satisfied with it. — Does your friend ask you for money ?—
He asks me for some.
/OKTT-SSCOND LESSOII.
1*1
FORTY-SECOND LESSON.
Lezione quarantesima seconda.
OF PASSIVE VERBS.
Ptotfivi verbs represent the subject as receiving or suffering from others the
action expressed by the verb. They are conjugated by means of the auxiliary
rerb ew^e, to be, joined to the past participle of the active verb, in Italian as
well as in French and English.1 Thus any active verb may be change*! into
the passive voice.
Active voice.
Passive voice
I love.
I am loved.
Amo.
Sono amato.
Thou praisest
Thou art praised.
Lodi.
Sei lodato. .
fie believes.
He is believed.
Crede.
E creduto.
We beat.
We are beaten.
Battiamt
Siamo battuti.
You punish.
You are punished.
Punite.
Siete puniti.
They serve.
They are served.
Servono.
Sono serriti.
To praise.
Lodare 1.
To blame.
Biasimare 1.
To punish.
Punire 3.
•
To
serve.
ServireS.
B9.
Da.
Byrne,
— by us.
Da me,
— da not
By thee,
— by you.
Date,
- da vol.
rloro.
By him,
— by them.
Dalui,
— da< coloro.
v easi.
i am loved by him.
Sono amato da lui.
Who is punished 1
Chi 3 punito ?
The naughty boy is punished.
11 cattivo fanciullo £ punito.
By whom is he punished?
Da chi e* egli punito 7
He is punished by his father.
E punito da
suo padre.
Which man is
praised, and which is
Q.ual uomo
3 lodato e quale & biasi
blamed 1
mato?
1 With this difference only, that in English and French we say : I have been
esteemed, J ai ite estime ; and in Italian: Sono stato stimato (I am been es-
teemed, Je 8ui8 ete estime), for the compound tenses of essere are formed by
taeans of the same verb
198
FOETY -SECOND LESSON.
1
A DIMINUTIVB
of tenderness, of contempt
Naughty.
Cattivo, cattivello, cattivacclo.
Skilful, diligent, clever.
Abile, destro.
Awkward.
Inabile, incapace.
duous, industrious, studious.
Assiduo, diligente, studioso.
Idle.
Pigro, poltrone
ignorant.
Ignorante.
The idler, the lazy fellow.
| 11 pigro, ii poltrone.
To reward.
Ricompensare 1.
To esteem.
Stimare 1.
To despise.
Disprezzare 1. Sprezzare
To hate.
Odiare 1.
Good (wise).
These children are loved, because they
are studious and good.
Buono (savio).
Questi fanciulli sono amati, percbi
sono diligenti c buoni
To travel to a place.
Where has he travelled to 1
He has travelled to Vienna.
j* Andare* 1.
t Dove £ andato ?
t E andato a Vienna.
la it good travelling 9
It is good travelling.
It is bad travelling.
In the winter.
In the summer.
In the spring.
In the autumn.
It is bad travelling in the winter.
t Si viaggia bene 1
t Si viaggia bene,
t Si viaggia male
Nell' inverno.
Nella state.
Nella (or in) primavera.
Nell' autunno.
t Si viaggia male in inverno.
To drive, to ride in a carriage.
To ride (on horseback).
To go on foot.
Do you like to ride ?
[ like to drive.
Andare in carrozza (in vettura.
legno).
< Andare a cavallo, or cavalcart
C Montare a cavallo.
Andare a piedi.
Le piace andare a cavallo 9
Mi piace andare in legno
FORTY-SECOND LESSON.
19N
To live — lived.
Is It good living in Paris ?
Is the living good in Paris ?
It is good living there.
Tha living is good there.
Dear.
Is the living dear in London ?
Is it dear living in London ?
The living is dear there.
Vivere * — vissuto.
t Si vive bene a Parigi ?
t Ci si vivo bene.
Caro.
Si vive a caro prexzo in Lonriio V
E caro il vivere in Londra?
Ci si vive a caro prezzo.
II vivere vi € caro.
Thunder.
I tuono, il fulmine.
The storm.
11 temporale, la tempesta (ftm.)
The fog.
La nebbia (Jem.)
is it windy ? Does the wind blow ?
t Fa vento ? Tira vento 1
t is windy. The wind blows.
t Fa vento. Tira vento.
. t is not windy.
t Non fa vento.
It is very windy.
f Fa molto vento.
Does it thunder ?
Tuona?
To thunder.
Tuonare 1. Fulminare 1.
Is it foggy ?
t Fa nebbia?
It is stormy.
t Fa burrasca. Fa temporale.
It is not stormy.
t Non fa burrasca (temporals).
Does the sun shine ?
C * sole?
It thunders very much.
Tuona molto.
Afterwards.
As soon as.
As soon as I have eaten, I drink.
As soon as I have taken off my boots,
I take off my coat.
What do you do in the evening ?
To sleep.
Does your father still sleep
He still sleeps.
Poi, dipoi.
Subito che, appena.
Subito che ho mangiato, bevo.
Subito che ho levato i miei sthmli
mi levo 1' abito.
Che fa Ella la sera?
Dormire 3.
Dorme ancora il di Lei padrs?
Dorme ancora.
Without.
Without money.
Without speaking.
Senza.
Senza danaro.
Senza parlare
Ob*. Without requires in English the present participle ; in Italian $enaa Is
lowed by the infinitive.
Without saying any thing. | Senza dir nlen to
14
200
FORTY-SECOND LESSON.
At last.
To arrive.
Has he arrived at last ?
He has not arrived yet
Is he coming at last 7
He Is coming.
And then.
And then he sleeps.
As soon as he has supped he reads, and
then he sleeps.
He comes in at ten o'clock, sups, reads
a little, takes tea, and then he goes to
bed.
To enter.
To go to led — -gone to bed.
Alfine, finalmente.
Arrivare 1. Ritornart
E arrivato alfine 1
Non e* ancor arrivato.
Viene finalmente 1
Viene.
Poi, di poi, indt.
Poi dorme.
Subito che ha cerato, legge ps
dorme.
Entra alle dieci, cena, legge un poco
prende il t£ ; indi si corica
Entrare 1.
Coricarsi — coricaton
EXERCISES.
133.
Are you loved ? — I am loved. — By whom are you loved ? — I
am loved by my uncle. — By whom am I loved ? — Thou art loved
by thy parents. — By whom are we loved ? — You are loved by
your friends. — By whom are those children loved ? — They are
lOved by their friends. — By whom is this man conducted ? — He is
conducted by me. — Where do you conduct him to ? — I conduct
him home. — By whom are we blamed ? — We are blamed by our
enemies. — Why are we blamed by them 1 — Because they do not
love us. — Are you punished by your master ? — I am not punished
by him, because I am good and studious. — Are we heard ? We
are. — By whom are we heard ? — We are heard by our neigh-
bours.— Is thy master heard by his pupils? — He is heard by
them.— Which children are praised ? — Those that are good. —
Which are punished ? — Those that are idle and naughty. — Are
we praised or blamed ? — We are neither praised nor blamed.—
\n our friend loved by his masteis ? — He is loved and praised by
FORTY -SECOND LES&Ofl. 201
uiem, because he is studious ind good ; but his brother is d«
spised by his, because he is naughty and idle. — Is he sometimes
ounished ? — He is (V e) every morning and every evening. —
Are you sometimes punished ? — I never am (non lo sono mat) ; I
am loved and rewarded by my good masters. — Are these children
r.evei punished ? — They never are (non lo sono mai), because
they are industrious and good ; but those are so (lo sono) very
aften, because they are idle and naughty. — Who is praised and
rewarded ? — Skilful children (ifanciulli abili) are^ praised, es.
teemed, and rewarded ; but the ignorant are blamed, despised,
and punished. — Who is loved, and who is hated ? — He who is
studious and good is loved, and he who is idle and naughty is
nated. — Must one be (e mestieri esser) good in order to be loved ?
— One must be so (e (Vuopo esserlo). — What must one do (che
bisognafare) in order to be loved ? — One must be good and indus-
trious.— What must one do in order to be rewarded ? — One must
be (bisogna esser) skilful, and study much.
134.
Why are those children loved ? — They are loved because they
are good. — Are they better than we ? — They are not better, but
more studious than you. — Is your brother as assiduous as mine ?
— He is as assiduous as he, but your brother is better than mine.
— Do you like to drive 1 — I like to ride. — Has your brother ever
been on horseback ? — H° has never been on horseback. — Does
your brother fide on horseback as often as you? — He rides on
horseback ofitener than I. — Did you go on horseback the day be-
fore yesterday? — I went on horseback to-day. — Do you like
travelling? — I like travelling. — Do you like travelling in the
winter ? — I do not like travelling in the winter ; I like travelling
in the spring and in autumn.— Is it good travelling in the spring I
— It is good travelling in spring and in autumn, but it is bad
travelling in the summer and in the winter ? — Have you some-
times travelled in the winter ? — I have often travelled in the win-
ter and in the summer. — Does your brother often travel ? — He
travels no longer; he formerly travelled much. — When do you
like to ride? — I like to ride in the morning. — Have you been in
London? — I have been there. — Is the living good there? — The
Z02 FORTY-SECOND LESSON.
living is good there, but dear. — Is it dear living in Paris ? — It u
good living there, and not dear. — Do you like travelling in
France ? — I like travelling there, because one finds (ci si trava)
good people there. — Does your friend like travelling in Holland ?
— He does not liKe travelling there, because the living is bad
there. — Do you like travelling in Italy ? — I like travelling there,
because the living is good, and one finds (e vi si trova) good
people ; but the roads are not very good there. — Do the English
like to travel in Spain (in Ispagna) ? — They like to travel there ;
but they find the roads too bad. — How is the weather ? — The
weather is very bad. — Is it windy ? — It is very windy.— Was it
stormy yesterday ? — It was very stormy.
135.
Do you go to the market this morning ? — I do go thither, if it
is not stormy. — Do you intend going to France this year ? — I
intend going thither, if the weather is not too bad. — Do you like to
go on foot ? — I do not like to go on foot, but I like going in a car-
riage when I am travelling. — Will you go on foot ? — I cannot go
on f^ot, because I am tired. — What sort of weather is it ? — It
thumi "9. — Does the sun shine ? — The sun does not shine ; it is
foggy. — Do you hear the thunder ? — I hear it. — Is it fine
weather ? — The wind blows hard, and it thunders much. — Of
whom have you spoken ? — We have spoken of you. — Have you
praised me ? — We have not praised you ; we have blamed you.
— Why have you blamed me ? — Because you d&Vt study (non
istudia) well. — Of what has your brother spoken ? — He has
spoken of his books, his horses, and his dogs. — What do you do
in the evening? — I work as soon as I have supped. — And what
do you do afterwards ? — Afterwards I sleep. — When do you
drink ? — I drink as soon as I have eaten.-*— When do you sleep?
I sleep as soon as I have supped. — Have you spoken to the mer-
chant?— I have spoken to him, — What has he said? — He has
left (e partito) without saying any thing. — Can you work without
speaking ? — I can worK, but not study French without speaking.
—Wilt thou go for some wine ? — I cannot go for wine without
money. — Have you bought any horses ? — I do not buy without
money. — Has your father arrived at last? — He has arrived. —
FORTY-THIRD LESSON.
209
When did he arrive ? — This morning at four o'clock. — Has youi
cousin set out at last ? — He has not set out yet. — Have you at
last found a good master ? — 1 have at last found one. — Are you
at last learning Italian ? — I am at last learning it. — Why have
you not already learnt it ? — Because I have not been able to find
% good master.
FORTY-THIRD LESSON
Lezione quarantesima terza.
OF REFLECTIVE VERBo.
When the action falls upon the agent, and the objective case refers to the
■ame perron as the nominative, the verb is called reflective. In reflective
rerbB, therefore, the pronoun of the object is of the same person as that of the
nbject.
In such verbs each person is conjugated with a double pronoun, thus :
I.
myself.
lo,
mi.
Thou,
thyself.
To,
tL
He,
himself.
Egli,
She,
herself.
Ella,
si.
It
itself.
Esso,
r Uno,
t*
One,
one's self.
jTaluno,
' Alcuno,
They,
1 themselves.
JAltri,
? Alcuni, j
sL
The people,
We,
ourselves.
Noi,
d.
Too,
yourself.
!
Ye,
yourselves.
Voi,
vt
r Eglino
\
Tkey,
themselves.
< Essi, Esse,
( Elleno,
frsi.
Ob$. A. It will be remarked that the
third person is alu
rays si, whatever
its number or
gender.
204
FORTY-THIRD LESSON.
To cut yourself.
To cut myself.
To cut ourselves.
' himself ^
Tagliarvt
TagliarmL
TagliarcL
To cut «
herself. 1
itself,
■.one's sell. J
Tagliarsi.
Do you burn yourself? | Si brucia Ella (vi cruciate)?
Oba. B. In Italian, however, the first pronoun is often not expressed, b«!
understood.
I do not burn myself.
You do not burn yourself.
I see myself.
Do I see myself?
He sees himself.
We see ourselves.
They see themselves.
Do you wish to warm yourself?
I do wish to warm myself.
Does he wish to warm himself ?
He does wish to warm himself.
They wish to warm themselves.
Non mi brucio.
Non si brucia (non vi brutiate).
Mi vedo.
Mi vedoio?
Si vede.
Ci vediamo (or veggiaino).
Eglino si vedono (or veggono)
Si vuol Ella scaldare (volete seal-
darvi) ?
Voglio scaldarmi.
< Si vuol egli scaldare?
C Vuol egli scaldarsi ?
Egli vuol scaldarsi (or Egli si vuoi
scaldare).
Si vogliono scaldare (or Voghon*
scaldarsi).
To enjoy, to divert, to amuse one's
self.
In what do you amuse yourself?
I amuse myself in reading.
He diverts himself in playing.
SDivertirsi — divertitosi.
Dilettarsi — dilettatosi.
t A che si diietta (si diverte) Ellal
t Mi diletto a leggere.
t Si diverte a giuocare.
Each.
Each one.
Each man.
elath man amuses himself as he likes.
Each one amuses himself in the bei t
way he can.
The taste.
Bach man has his taste.
Each of you.
The world, the people.
Everv one, every body.
Qualunque, ogni.
Ciascuno, ognuno
Qualunque uomo.
Ciascuno si diverte come gli place
( Ciascuno si diverte alia meglio.
c Ciascuno si diverte a modo suo.
II piacere, il gusto.
Ognuno ha il suo gusto.
Ciascuno di voi (di Loro).
La gente.
Tutta la gente, tutti.
FORTY-THIRD LESSON.
20a
£▼017 body speaks of It
Every one is liable to error.
< Tuttl ne parlano.
I CiaBcuno ne parla.
Ognuno 3 soggetto ad ingannarsL
To mistake, to be mistaken.
You are mistaken.
He is mistaken.
Ingannarsi.
Ella s' inganna (v' ingannate).
S' inganna.
To deceive, to cheat,
tie has cheated m >.
He has cheated me of a hundred
sequins.
Ingannare 1.
M' ha ingannato.
Mi ha ingannato di cento lecchinL
You cut your finger. Ella si taglia L iito (vi tagliatel
dito).
Ob». C. When an agent performs an act upon one part of himself, the verc
s made reflective.
I cut my nails. Mi tagho le unghie (a fern, nouu, thi
sing, of which is P vnghia).
A hair.
To pull out.
He pulls out his hair.
He cuts his hair.
The piece.
A piece of bread.
To go away.
Are you going away 1
I am going away.
Is he going away 1
He is going away.
Are we going away 1
We are going away.
Are these men going away 7
They are not going away.
To feel sleepy.
Do you feel sleepy 1
I feel sleepy.
To soil.
T<* fear, to dread.
Un capello.
Strappare 1.
Egli si strappa i capelA.
Egli si taglia i capelli.
II pezzo.
Un pezzo di pane.
Andarsene *.
Se ne va (ve ne andate) 1
Me ne vado.
Se ne va egli 7
Egli se ne va.
Ce ne andiamo noi t
Ce ne andiamo.
Se ne vanno questi uomini 1
Non se ne vanno.
Aver voglia di dormire.
Ha Ella voglia di dormire?
Ho voglia di dormire.
SInsudiciare 1-
Sporcare I.
Aver paura, temere, %
306
FORTY -THIRD LESSON.
He fears to soil his fingers
Do you dread to go out 1
I dread to go out.
He is afraid to go thither.
To fear some one.
I do not fear him.
Do you fear that man 1
What do you fear ?
Whom do you fear?
I fear nobody.
I fear nothing
Ha paura d' instkliciarsi le dita.
Ha EHa paura d' uscire 1
Ho paura d' uscire.
Ha paura d' andarci
( Temere uno.
( Aver paura d* uno.
Non lo temo.
Teme costui (temete questi) ?
< Che teme Ella?
t Di che cosa ha Ella paura t
{ Chi teme Ella ?
( Di chi ha Ella paura?
Non temo nessuno
Non temo niente.
EXERCISES.
136.
Do you see yourself? — I see myself. — Do you see yourself ie
that small looking-glass (neUo specchietto) ? — I see myat,lf in it.—
Can your friends see themselves in that large looking-glass (nello
rpecchione) ? — They can see themselves therein (yedervisi). —
Why does your brother not light the fire ? — He does not light it,
because he is afraid of burning himself. — Why do you not cut
your bread ? — I do not cut it, because I fear to cut my finger.—
Have you a sore finger (he duole il dito) ? — I have a sore finger
and a sore foot (e anche il piede). — Do you wish to warm your-
self?— I wish to warm myself, because I am very cold. — Why
does that man not warm himself? — Because he is not cold. — Do
your neighbours warm themselves? — They warm themselves,
because they are cold. — Do you cut your hair ? — I cut my hair
—Does your friend cut his nails ? — He cuts his nails and his
hair. — What does tnat man do (costui) ? — He pulls out his hair.
—In what (ache cosa) do you amuse yourself? — I amuse myself
In the best way I can (alia meglio). — In what do your children
amuse themselves ? — They amuse themselves in studying,
writing, and playing. — In what does your cousin amuse himself?
—He amuses nimself in reading good books, and in writing to
nis friends. — In what do you amuse yourself when you hav*
FORTY-THIRD LESSON. 20*7
nothing to do at home ? — I go to the play, and to the concert. I
often say : Every one (tiascuno) amuses himself as he likes.
Every man (aascuno) has his taste ; which is yours ? — Mine is
to study (Zo studiare), to read a good book (iZ leggere, &c), to go
to the theatre, the concert (indi al concerto), and the ball, and to
ride.
137.
Why does your cousin not brush his coat ? — He does not brush
ill because he is afraid of soiling his fingers (le dita). — What does
my neighbour teli you ? — He tells me that you wish to buy his
horse ; but I know that he is mistaken, because you have no mone}
to buy it. — What do they say (che si dice, or che dicono) at the
market ? — They say that the enemy is beaten. — Do you believe
that (16) ? — I believe it, because every one says so. — Why have
you bought that book ? — I have bought it, because I want it
(jperche ne ho bisogno) to learn Italian, and because everyone
speaks of it. — Are your friends going away ? — They are going
away. — When are they going away ? — They are going away to-
morrow.— When are you going away (se ne vanno Loro) ? — We
are going away to-day. — Am I going away ? — You are going
away, if you like. — What do our neighbours say 1 — They are
going away without saying any thing. — How do you like this
wine ? — I do not like it. — What is the matter with you ? — I feel
sleepy. — Does your friend feel sleepy ? — He does not feel sleepy,
but he is cold. — Why does he not warm himself? — He has no
coals to make a fire. — Why does he not buy some coals ? — He
has no money' to buy any. — Will you lend him some ? — If he has
none I will lend him some. — Are you thirsty ? — I am not thirsty,
but very hungry. — Ts your servant sleepy ? — He is sleepy. — la
he hungry 1 — He is hungry. — Why does he not eat ? — Because
he has nothing to eat. — Are your children hungry ? — They are
hungry, but they have nothing to eat. — Have they any thing to
drink ? — They have nothing to drink. — Why do you not eat ? —
I do not eat when I am not hungry. — Why does the Russian not
drink ? — He does not drink when he is not thirsty. — Did your
Drother eat any thing yesterday evening ? — He ate a piece of
beef, a small bit {un pezzetto) of fowl, and a piece of bread. — Did
he not drink ? — He also (anche) drank. — What did he drink ? —
He drank a glass of wine. (See end of Lesson XXIV).
FORTY-FOURTH LESSON.
Lezione quarantesima quartcu
PERFECT OP REFLECTIVE VERBS.
In Italian, all reflective verbs, without exception, take in their compound
tense*, the auxiliary essere *, whilst in English they take to have
Have you cut yourself?
[ have cut myself.
Have 1 cut myself?
You have cut yourself.
You have not cut yourself.
Hast thou cut thyself?
I have not cut myself.
Has your brother cut himself?
He has cut himself.
Have we cut ourselves ?
We have not cut ourselves.
Have these men cut themselves?
They have not cut themselves.
To take a walk.
To go a walking.
To take an airing in a carriage.
To take a ride.
The coach.
Do you take a walk ">
I take a walk,
lie takes a walk.
Wa take a walk.
Thou wishest to take an airing.
They wish to take a ride.
Sie Ella tagliata?
Mi son tagliato ?
jli son tagliato ?
Si e tagliata.
Ella non s' e4 tagliata.
Ti sei tagliato ?
Non my son tagliato.
II di Lei fratello s' e* tagliato?
Egli s' 3 tagliato.
Ci siamo tagliati ?
Noi non ci siamo tagliati.
Si sono tagliati questi uomim •
Essi non si sono tagliati.
Passeggiare I.
Andare * a passeggiare.
f carrozza.
Andare * in < legno.
[ vettura.
Fare una trottata.
Andare * a cavallo.
< La carrozza, la vettun. (/««*. nan*
I II legno.
Passeggia Ella?
Passeggio.
Passeggia.
Paeseggiamo.
( Vuoi fare una trottata,
f Vuoi andare in carrozza.
Vogllono andar a cavallo.
FORTY-FOURTH LESSON.
209
To take a child a walking.
Do y<r; take your children a walking 1
take them a walking every morning.
To go to bed, to lie down.
To go t: bed.
To put (to place, to fix).
1 put, thou puttest, he puts.
We put, you put.
They put.
To get up j to rise.
Do you rise early ?
I rise at sunrise.
i go to bed at sunset.
The sunrise.
The sunset.
At what time did you go to bed ?
At three o'clock in the morning.
At what o'clock did he go to bed
yesterday 1
He went to bed late.
To rejoice at something.
I rejoice at your happiness.
At what does your uncle rejoice 7
I have rejoiced.
They have rejoiced.
You have mistaken.
We have mistaken.
Condurre a spasso un fan.
ciulto.
Conduce Ella a spasso i di Lei fan
chilli?
Li conduco a spasso ogni mattina.
Coricarsi — concato.
Porsi* in letto.
Andare * a letto.
Porre * (anciently ponert\
posto.
Pongo, poni, pone.
Poniamo or ponghiamo, ponete.
Pongono.
Levarsi, alzarsi.
Si aiza presto (di buon mattino) ?
Mi alzo (mi levo) alio spuntar de.
sole.
Mi corico al tramontar del sole.
Lo spuntar del sole.
II tramontar del sole.
A che ora s' £ Ella coricata?
Alle tre del mattino.
A che ora s' £ coricato ieri 1
S' d coricato tardi.
!f Rallegrarsi per qualcosa.
f Rallegrarsi di qualche cosa.
Mi rallegro per la di Lei felicita (o
della vostra).
Per che cosa (perchS) si rallegra 11 dj
Lei zio?
Mi son rallegrato.
Si sono rallegrati.
t Ella s' £ ingannata.
t Ci siamo ingannati.
At what did your uncle rejoice 1 -\
What was your uncle delighted >
with? J
For the.
Per che cosa s' e* rallegrato il di Let
zio?
< Sing. Pel (contraction of per il).
( Ptrm Pei (contraction of per «)
110
FORTY-FOTTRTH LESSON.
t S' e rallegrato pel cavallo ehe KUt
gli ha mandato
t Per che cosa si sono rallegrati i
Lei fanciulli ?
t Si son rallegrati pei bei vestiti cl
ho fatti Far loro.
He rejoiced at (was delighted with) the
horse which you have sent him.
At what did your children rejoice?
(What were your children delighted
with?)
They rejoiced at (they were dengnted
with) the fine clothes which I had
made for them.
The rapidity of pronouncing has led to a contraction of the definite article
mth certain prepositions which precede it; thus pel is used instead of peril, pei
Instead of per i, &c.
According to this contraction we say and write :
Singular.
for
Del, of the,
Al, to the,
Dal, from the, —
Nel, in the, —
Col, with the, —
Pel, for the, —
Sul, upon the, —
di il.
a il.
da il.
in il.
conil.
peril.
*uil.
Singular.
Dello, of the, for di lo.
Alio, to the, — a lo.
Dallo, from the, — da lo.
Xello, in the, — in lo.
Collo, with the, — con lo.
Pello, for the, — per lo.
Sullo, upon the, — §u lo.
To hurt somebody.
The evily the pain, the harm.
Have you hurt that man 7
I have hurt that man.
IVhy did you hurt that man!
h*v» not nurt him.
Does that hurt you 1
rhat hurts me.
Plurat,
Dei or de\
for
di i.
Ai or a\
—
ai.
Dai or da\
—
dai.
Nei or ne*t
—
int.
Coi or co*,
—
ami.
Pei or pe\
—
peri.
Sui or su\
—
*ui.
Plural
Degli, for
digh.
Agli, —
agli.
Dagli, —
dagli.
Negli, —
in gli.
Cogli, —
con gli.
Pegli, -
per gli.
Sugli, —
eugli.
{ Apportar male ad uno.
( Far del male ad uno.
Il male, il danno.
r Ha Ella apportato danno a costal 1
5 Ha Ella fatto male a questi ? o I
( quest' uomo?
( Ho apportato danno a costui.
( Ho fatto male a costui.
Perche* ha apportato danno a quett
uomo?
r Non gli ho apportato danno a)
< cuno.
' Non gli ho fatto alcun male.
( Cio Le fa male ?
I Cid Le apporta danno ?
( Cid m' apporta danno.
r Cid mi fa male.
FORTY-FOURTH LESSON.
911
7b do good to any body.
Have I ever done you any harm?
On the contrary.
So, on the contrary, you have done me
good.
I have never done harm to any one.
Far bene ad uno.
Le ho giammai apportato dannol
Al contrario.
No, al contrario, Ella mi ha fatto del
bene,
Non ho giammai apportato danno t
nessuno.
Have I hurt you ?
You have not hurt me.
That does me good.
Le ho fatto male ? o Vi ho io fatto
male?
Ella non mi ha fatto male.
Cio mi fa bene.
To do with, to dispose of.
What does the tailor make with the
cloth ?
He makes coats with it.
What does the painter do with his
brush?
tie makes a picture with it.
What does he wish to make of this
wood?
He does not wish to make any thing of
it.
Far di.
Che fa il sarto del panno?
Ne fa degli abiti.
Che fa il pittore col suo pennelk
Fa un quadro.
Che vuol far di questo legno ?
Nou vuol fame niente.
He is flattered, but he is not beloved.
That (conjunction).
. am told that he is arrived.
A knife was given to him to cut his
bread, and he cut his finger.
To flatter some one.
To flatter one's self.
He flatters himself that he knows
French
Nothing but.
He has nothing but enemies.
( t Lo udulano, ma non F amano.
( E adulato, ma non £ amato.
Che.
Mi si dice (mi dicono) ch' £ arri*
vato.
Gli hanno dato (gli £ stato dato) ui
coltello per tagliare il suo pane'
si e" tagliato il dito.
Adularc qualcuno.
Adularsi, lusingarsi du
t Si lusinga di sapere il franceaa
Non — che.
Non ha che nemicft.
212
POETY-FOUETH LESSON.
To become.
He has turned a soldier.
Have you turned a merchant ?
I have turned (become) t .awyer.
What has become of your brother 1
What has become of him 1
I do not know what has become of
him.
To enlist, to enrol.
He has enlisted.
SDiventare — diventato*
Divenire * — divenuto.
tS'a fatto soldato.
* E diventata mercante ?
t Son diventato awocato.
t Che n' e stato del di Lei fra
tellol
t Che cosa e* stato del di Lei fra
tello?
t Che ne e stato ?
t Non so che sia divenuto (»wfr
junctive, of which hereafter).
v Ingaggiarsi.
\ Far si soldato, arruolarsi.
< Si e fatto soldato.
(S'eM
S' £ ingaggiato (si e* arruolato).
For (meaning because).
I cannot pay you, for I have no money.
He cannot give you any bread, for he
has none.
Per che, poiche.
Non posso pagarla perche1 non ha
danaro.
Non pud darle pane poiche* non n»
ha.
To believe some one.
Do you believe that man ?
I do not believe him.
I believe what that man says.
if
Credere qualcuno.
Credere a qualcuno.
t Crede a costui 7
t Non gli credo.
t Credo a quest' uomo cid che die*.
To believe in God.
1 believe in God.
Credere in Dio.
Credo in Dio.
To utter a falsehood, to lie.
The story-teller, the liar.
I do not believe that man, for I know
Urn to be a story-teller.
Mentire
mentito.
II bugiardo, il mentitore.
Non credo a questi percM so che
un bugiardo.
EXERCISES.
138.
Why has that child been praised ? — It has been praised because
it has studied well. — Hast thou ever been praised ?— I have ofter
I
FORTY-FOURTH LES&ON. 213
teen praised. — Why has that other child been punished ? — It has
been punished because it has been naughty and idle. — Has this
child been rewarded ? — It has been rewarded because it has
studied well. — What must one do (che e bisogno fare) in order not
to be despised ? — One must be studious and good. — What has
become of your friend ? — He has become a lawyer. — What has
1 ecome of your cousin ? — He has enlisted. — Has your neighbour
enlisted ? — He has not enlisted. — What has become of him ? — He
has turned a merchant. — What has become of his children ? — His
children have become men. — What has become of your son? —
He has become a great man. — Has he become learned? — He has
become learned. — What has become of -my book ? — I do not know
what has become of it. — Have you torn it ? — I have not torn it
— What has become of our friend's son ? — I do not know what
has (che sia, subj.) become of him. — What have you done with
your money ? — I have bought a book with it (con quello). — What
has the joiner done with his wood ? — He has made a bench of it.
— What has the tailor done with the cloth which you gave him ?
— He has made clothes of it for your children and mine. — Has
that man hurt you ? — No, Sir, he has not hurt me. — What must
one do (ch' e df uopofare) in order to ( per ) be loved ? — One must
do good to those that have done us harm. — Have we ever done
you harm ? — No; you have, on the contrary, done us good. — Do
you do harm to any one ? — I do no one any harm. — Why have
you hurt these children ? — I have not hurt them. — Have I hurt
you ? — You have not hurt me, but your children have (me ne
hannofatto). — What have they done to you ? — They have beaten
me. — Is it (e) your brother who has hurt my son ? — No, Sir, it is
not (nan e) my brother, for he has never hurt any one.
139.
Have you drunk that wine ? — I have drunk it. — How did you
like it ? — I liked it very well. — Has it done you good ? — It has
done me good. — Have you hurt yourself? — I have not hurt my-
self.— Who has hurt Himself ? — My brother has hurt himself, for
ie has cut his finger. — Is he still ill (malato) ? — He is better (star
meglio). — I rejoice to hear (me rallegra V intendere) that he is no
.onger ill, for I love him. — Why does your cousin pull out hi*
214 FORTY-FOURTH LESSON.
hair ? — Because he cannot pay what he owes. — Have you cut
your hair? — I have not cut it (myself), but I have had it cut
(me li son fatti tagliare). — What has this child done ? — He has
cut his foot. — Why was a knife given to him ? — A knife was
given him to (per) cut his nails, and he has cut his finger and his
foot. — Do you go to bed early ? — I go to bed late, for I cannot
sleep when I go to bed early. — At what o'clock did you goto bed
yesterday ? — Yesterday I went to bed at a quarter past eleven.
— At what o'clock do your children go to bed ? — They go to bed
at sunset. — Do they rise early ? — They rise at sunrise. — At what
o'clock did you rise to-day ? — To-day I rose late, because I went
to bed late yesterday evening (ieri sera). — Does your son rise
late ? — He rises early, for he never goes to bed late. — What does
he do when he gets up ? — He studies, and then he breakfasts. —
Does he go out before he breakfasts ? — No, Sir, he studies and
breakfasts before he goes out. — What does he do after breakfast-
ing ?— As soon as he has breakfasted he comes to me, and we
take a ride. — Didst thou rise this morning as early as I ? — I rose
earlier than you, for I rose before sunrise.
140.
Do you often go a walking ? — I go a walking when I have
nothing to do at home. — Do you wish to take a walk ? — I can-
not take a walk, for I have too much to do. — Has your brother
taken a ride ? — He has taken an airing in a carriage. — Do your
children often go a walking ? — They go a walking every morn-
ing after breakfast (dopo la colazione). — Do you take a walk after
dinner (dopo il pranzo) 1 — After dinner I drink tea, and then I
take a wall . — Do you often take your children a walking ? — I
take them a walking every morning and every evening. — Can
you go (venire) with me ? — I cannot go (venire) with you, for 1
am to take my little brother a walking. — Where do you walk ? —
We walk in our uncle's garden. — Did your father rejoice to see
you ? — He did rejoice to see me. — What did you rejoice at ? — J
rejoiced at seeing my good friends. — What was your uncle
delighted with ? — He was delighted with the horse which you
have sent him. — What were your children delighted with ?—
They were delighted with the fine clothes which I had made fo/
FORTV-FIFTH LESSON. 215
ihem (che lor hofattifare). — Why does this man rejoice so much
(tanto) 1 — Because he flatters himself he has good friends. — Is he
not right in rejoicing (di rallegrarsi) ? — He is wrong, for he has
nothing but enemies. — Is he not loved ? — He is flattered, but he
is not loved. — Do you flatter yourself that you know Italian ? — 1
flatter myself that I know it, for I can speak, read, and write it.
-Has the physician done any harm to your son ? — He has cut
)is finger (gli ha tagliato il dito), but he has not done him any
harm ; so (e) you are mistaken, if you believe that he has (che
gli abbia) done him any harm. — Why do you listen to that man ?
— I listen to him, but I do not believe him ; for I know that he is
a story-teller (un bugiardo). — How do you know that he is (che
$ia, subj.) a story-teller? — He does not believe in God ; and all
those (e tutti quelli) who do not believe in God are story-tellers.
— Are we story-tellers ? — You are no story-tellers, for you believe
in God (in Dio) our Lord (nostro Signore).
FORTY-FIFTH LESSON.
Lezione quarantesima quinta.
OF IMPERSONAL VERBS.
We have already seen (Lessons XLI.and XLI1.) some expressions belonging
» the impersonal verbs. These verbs, having no determinate subject, are only
conjugated in the third person singular.
To rain, — u rains.
It has rained.
To snow, — it snows.
It has snowed
To hail,— it hails.
It has hailed.
Piovere * 2, — piove.
E piovuto (or ha piovuto).
Nevicare 1, — nevica.
E nevicato (or ha nevicato).
Orandinare 1 (tempestare), — gran-
dina (tempesta).
E gmndinato (tempestato), or ha
tempestato l.
From these examples it may be seen, that in Italian impersonal verbs
relating to the weather may take either cssere or avere in their compound tenses
15
2tO
FORTY-FIFTH LESSOTl.
The three substantives belonging to these verbs are feminine, and will b«
»een when we come to such nouns; but as in Italian any infinitive may tx
used as a masculine noun, we may say also : il piovere, the rain ; U nevieare
the snow ; il grandinare, the hail.
To lighten.
Does it lighten 1
It lightens.
The lightning.
The parasol.
It rains very hard.
It lightens much.
Does it snow 1
It snows much.
It hails much.
The sun does not shine.
The sun is in my eyes.
To thunder, — it thunders.
It has thundered.
To »hine, to glitter,— shone.
To shut.
Shut the door.
Have you done 1
Lampeggiare 1.
Lampeggia 1
Lampeggia.
II lampo, il baleuo.
II parasole, Y ombrellino.
Piove dirottamente diluvia.
Lampeggia molto.
Nevica 1
Nevica molto.
Grandino molto.
t Non c' e sole,
t II sole mi da agli occhi.
Tuonare 1, — tuona.
E tuonato or ha tuonato.
i Riverberare 1, — riverberato.
( Risplendere 2, risplenduto.
Chiudere *, past part, chiuso.
Chiudete la porta.
t Ha Ella finito 1 avete voi finiiol
It the walking good 7
In that country.
The country.
He has made many friends in that
country.
To walk, to travel.
t Si cammina bene 1
In questo paese.
II paese.
Si e fatto molti amici in questc
paese.
Camminare 1, passeggiare 1.
Of which, of whom, whose.
I see the man of wnom you speak.
I have bought the horse of which you
spoke to me.
I see the man whose brother has killed
my dog.
I se» the man whose iog you have
killed.
Do you see the child whose father set
out yesterday?
(sec it
iDi cui (onde).
Del quale (plui. dei quah).
Vedo 1' uomo di cut (del quale) FUa
parla.
Ho comprato il cavallo di cui (del
quale) Ella mi ha parlato.
Veggo (vedo) 1' uomo il di cui
fratello ha ammazzato il mio
cane.
Veggo Y uomo di cui Ella ha am-
mazzato il cane.
Vede Ella il fanciullo il di cui padrv
e partito ieri 1
Lo vedo.
FORTY-FIFTH LESSOR.
217
IVTiom have you seen ? Chi ha Ella visto ?
have 9een the merchant whose ware- i Ho visto il mercante di cul Ella ha
house you have taken. preso il magazzino.
have spoken to the man whose ware- i t Ho parlato all' uomo il di cui ma-
house has been burnt. gazzino e* stato brucciato.
That of which.
That, or the one of which.
Those, or the ones of which.
I have that of which I have need.
f have what I want.
He has what he wants.
!Cid di chef quanta
Quello di che.
Quello di cm.
QuelH di cui.
( Ho quanto mi abbisogna.
I Ho cib di che ho bisogno.
Ho cid che mi & d' uopo.
( Egli ha cib dicht ha bisogno.
( Egli ha ci6 che gii e d' uopo.
Have you the book of which you are in
need?
1 have that of which I am in need.
Ha Ella il libro di cui ha bisogno *?
Ho quello di cui ho bisogno.
Has the man the nails of which he is I L' uomo ha I chiodi di cui egli ha
in need ? bisogno ?
He has those of which he is in need. Ha quelli di cui ha bisogno.
To need, to want.
To have need of.
To he in want of something.
I am in want «,/ this book.
Did you find the book which you
want?
Aver bisogno dt.
Aver bisogno di qualche cosa.
Ho bisogno di questo libro.
Ha Ella trovato il libro di cui ha
bisogno ?
Which men do you see ?
see those of whom you have spoken
to me.
Do you see the pupils of whom I have
spoken to you ?
see them.
Quali uomini vede Ella ? or vedets
voi?
Vedo quelli di cui Ella mi ha par-
lato.
Vede Ella gli scolari di cui Le he
parlato ?
Li vedo.
ais
»OE.TY FIFTH LESSON.
To whom.
[ see the children to whom you have
given some petty-patties.
To uohirh men do you speak ?
i speak to those to whom you nave
applied.
To apply to.
To meet uriih some one.
I have met with the men to whom you
have applied.
Of which men do you speak ?
I speak of those whose children have
been studious and obedient.
Obedient, disobedient.
So thai.
( have lost my money, so that I cannot
pay you
111.
I am 111, to that I cannot go out
Masc. and Ftm.
Sing, and Plur. Mate. Phm
A chi. Ai quail.
Veggo i fanciulli ui quail Ella ha daU
dei pasticcini.
A quali uoinini parla Ella?
Parlo a qutlii ai piali si e" indirizzala
Lei.
Slndirizzarsi a — indirizzato a.
Dirigersi * a — diretto a.
Incontrare uno.
Rincontrare uno.
Ho incontratc gli uomini ai quak
Ella si £ diretta (vi siete diretto).
Di quali uomini parla Ella?
Parlo di quelli i di cui fanciulli *>na
stati studiosi ed obbedienti.
( Obbediente, disobbediente.
f Ubbidiente, disubbidiente.
In guisa che — cosicche.
Di modo che, per cui.
. Di maniera che.
Ho perduto il mio danaro, in guise
che non posso pagarla.
Malato, ammalato.
Sono malato, in guisa che non poa*»
uscire.
EXERCISES.
141.
Have you at last learnt Italian ? — I was ill, so that I could not
earn it. — Has your brother learnt it ? — He has not learnt it, be
cause he has not yet been able to find a good master. — Do you go
to the ball this evening ? — I have sore feet, so that I cannot go to
't. — Did you understand that German ? — I do not know German,
50 that (per cut) I could not understand him. — Have you bough
FORTY FIFTH LESSON. 219
he ftorse of which you spoke to me ? — I have no money, so that
di modo che) I could not buy it. — Have you seen the man from
ivhom I received a present ? — I have not seen him. — Have you
seen the fine gun of which I spoke to you ? — I have seen it. — Has
your uncle seen the books of which you spoke to him ? — He t\a.z
seen them. — Hast thou seen the man whose children have been
punished ? — I have not seen him. — To whom have you been
speaking at the theatre ? — I have been speaking to the man whose
brother (tV di cuifratello) has killed my fine dog. — Have you seen
the little boy whose father has become a lawyer ? — I have seen
him. — Whom have you seen at the ball ? — I have seen there the
men whose horses, and those whose coach you have bought (e
quelli del quali ha comprato la carrozza). — Whom do you see
now ? — I see the man whose servant has broken my looking-
glass. — Have you heard the man whose friend has lent me
money ? — I have not heard him. — Whom have you heard ?— rl
have heard the French captain, whose son is my friend. — Hast
thou brushed Ihe coat of which I spake to thee ? — I have not yet
brushed it. — Have you received the money which you were
wanting ? — I have received it. — Have I the sugar of which I have
need ? — You have it. — Has your brother the books which he i?
wanting ? — He has them. — Have you spoken to the merchants
whose warehouse we have taken ? — We have spoken to them. —
Have you spoken to the physician whose son has studied Ger-
man ? — I have spoken to him. — Hast thou seen the poor men
whose warehouses ha^e been burnt? — I have seen them. — Have
you read the books which we have lent you ? — We have read
them. — What do you say of them (ne) ? — We say that they are
very fine. — Have your children what they want (che loro abbi-
togna) ? — They have what they want.
142.
Of which man do you speak ? — I speak of the one (di gueUo)
whose brother has turned soldier. — Of which children have you
spoken 1 — 1 have spoken of those whose parents are learned. —
vVhich book have you read ? — I have read that of which I spoke
to you yesterday. — Which book has your cousin ? — He has that
220 FORTY-SIXTH LESSON.
of which he is in need. — Which fishes has he eaten ? — He has
eaten those which you do not like. — Of which books are you in
want ? — I am in want of those of which you have spoken to me.
— Are you not in want of those which I am reading ? — I am
not in want of them. — Do you see the children to whom 1
have given petty-patties ? — I do not see those to whom you
have given petty-patties, but those whom you have punished.
—To whom have you given some money? — I have given some
to those who have been skilful. — To which children must one
give (e mestieri dare) books ? — One must give some to those who
are good and obedient. — To whom do you give to eat and to
drink ? — To those that are hungry and thirsty. — Do you give any
thing to the children who are idle ? — I give them nothing. — Did
it snow yesterday ? — It did snow, hail, and lighten. — Did it rain ?
— It did rain. — Did you go out ? — I never go out, when it is bad
weather. — Ha e the captains at last listened to the man ? — They
have refused to listen to him ; all those to whom he applied {si e
tndirizzato) have refused to hear him.— With whom have you met
'his morning (questa mane) 1 — I have met with the man by whom
I am esteemed. — Have you given petty-patties to your pupils ?—
They have not studied well, so that I have given them nothing
FORTY-SIXTH LESSON
Lezione quarantesima sesta.
OF THE FUTURE.
Rr u.— The first or simple future is formed, in all Italian verba, rrom UP
snflnitiye, by changing for the second and third conjugations re into •-
Singular.
*-
■ ■ "■*
1
2
3
ro,
rai,
ra,
And for the first arc
into:—
erd,
eraiy
era.
Plural.
t *
1 2 3
remo, rete, ranno.
eretno, erete, eranna
FORTY-SIXTH LESSON.
321
To love
or will love, 4c.
To speak.
I shall or will speak, 4c.
To receive.
I shall or will receive, 4c.
To believe.
I shah or will believe, 4 c.
To punish.
I shall or will punish, 4c.
To serve.
I shall or will serve.
SXAMPLKS.
Inf. Amare 1.
Future. \ Amerk amerot,
' Ameremo. amerete.
amcrd.
Ameremo, amerete, ameranno
Parlare 1.
Parl«rd, parlerat, pntitriL.
Parlerano, parlercie, penleromtc
Ricevere 2.
r Riceverd, riceverat, ricevenl
< Ricevere- riceverefc riceverar
' mo, no.
Credere 2.
( Crederb, crederai, crederd,
t Cred eremo, crederete, crederanrw
Punire 3.
( Punird, punirai, punird.
( Puniremo, punirete, punimnno.
Servire 3.
{ Servird, servirat, servird.
( Servirmo, servird, serviranno.
Obt. A. It will be remarked, that in all Italian verbs the first and thirt
arsons singular of the future have the grave accent (').
KXCIFTIOHS.
To have. I shall or will have, 4c.
To be. I shall or will be, 4c.
Future.
Infinitive.
Avere* 5 Avrd> avrai> avriL
I Avremo, avrete, avranno.
Essere* \ Sar0' *»***> 8ar**
( Saremo, sarete, saranno.
Ob$. B. The following eighteen verbs, besides the auxiliaries avere * and
—ere *, form all the exceptions to our rule on the formation of the future. We
need not give all the persons, as the first person singular of the exception*
oeing once known, all the others are, being, as may be seen from the above,
tne same in all verbs of the Italian language.
Togo.
To fall.
To gather.
To give.
To complain.
Te owe.
I shall or will go.
I shall or will fall.
I shall or will gather.
I shall or will give.
I shall or will com-
plain.
I shall or will owe.
Infinitive.
Andare* 1.
Cadere * 2.
Cogliere ♦ 2.
Dare* 1.
Dolere * 2.
Future.
Andro (also regular}
Cadrd.
Corrd.
Dard.
Dorrd.
Dovere* 2. Dovrd.
322
FORTY-SIXTH LESSON,
To do.
I shall or will do.
Fare* 1.
Fard.
To die.
I shall or will die.
Morire* 3.
Morrd or moriri
To appear.
I shall or will appear
Parere* 2.
Porrd.
To put.
I shall or will put.
Porre * 2.
Porrd (regular)
To be able.
I shall or will be able.
Potere* 2.
?otro.
To rest.
I shall or will rest.
Rimanere * 2.
Rimarrd.
To know.
I shall or will know.
Sapere* 2.
Saprd.
To hold.
I shall or will hold.
Tenere* 2.
Tend.
To be worth.
I shall or will be
worth.
Valere * 2.
Varrd
To see.
I shall or will see.
Vedere * 2.
Vedrft
To come.
I shall or will come.
Venire * 3.
Verrd.
To be willing.
I shall or will be
willing.
Volere * 2.
Vorrd.
Shall or will he have money 7
Avra egli danaro 7
He will have some.
Ne avra.
He will not hav
e any.
Non ne avra.
Shall you soon
have done writing 7
t Quanto prima
scrivere 7
avra (avrete) finito d
I shall soon have done.
t Quanto prima
avrd finito.
He will soon have done his exercise.
Quanto prima
avra finito il suo terns
Soon (ere long).
When shall you do your exercises 7
I will do them soon (ere long).
My brother will do his exercises to-
morrow.
Quanto prima, fra poco.
Quando fara Ella i di Lei temi 7
Quanto prima li fard.
Mio fratello fara i suoi temi domanl
Next Monday.
Last Monday.
Next month.
This month.
This country
Lunedi venturo.
Lunedi passato.
II mese venturo.
Questo mese.
Questo paese.
When will your cousin go to the
concert 7
He will go next Tuesday.
Shall you go any where 7
We shall go no where
Quando andra al concerto II di Led
cugino 7
Egli vi andra martedi venturo.
j Andra EUa)in,chell
I Andranno >
Non andremo in verun luogo.
Will he send me the book 7
He will send it you, if he has done
with it.
Mi mandera egli il libro7
( Glielo mandera, se 1' ha finito.
' Se P ha finito glielo ma idera.
FORTY-SIXTH LESSON
S2*
Snail yon be at home this evening ?
( shall be there.
v\ ill your father be at home 7
( f e will be there.
v\ ill your cousins be there 1
They will be there.
Will he send me the books'?
He will send them you.
Will he send some ink to my counting-
house?
He will send some thither.
Shall you be able to pay your shoe-
maker ?
J have lost my money, so that I shall
not be able to pay him.
My friend has lost his pocket-book, so
that he will not be able to pay. for
his boots.
Will you hold any thing ?
I shall hold your umbrella.
Will your friend come » • my concert ?
He will come.
Shall you come?
I shall come.
Will it be necessary to go to the
market ?
It will be necessar) to go thither to-
morrow morning.
It will not be necessary to go thither.
Shall you see my father to-day ?
We shall «* him.
Te foresee— foreseen.
To restore — restored.
Sara Ella in casa questa serai
Quests sera sark Ella in casal
Vi sard. .
Sark in casa il di Lei padre?
Visara.
I di Lei cugini vi aaranno?
Vi aaranno.
Mi mandera egli i libri ?
Glieli mandera.
Mandera dell' inchiostro all
banco (studio) ?
Ce ne mandera.
mk
Potra pagare il di Lei calzolak I \o
potrete voi pagare il vostro).
Ho perduto il danaro, di modo che
nun potrd pagarlo.
II mio amico ha perduto il porta-
foglio, in guisa che non potrk
pagare i suoi stivali.
Terra Ella una cosa? (o qualche
cosa) ?
Terrd il di Lei ombrello.
II di Lei amico verrk al mio con-
certo ?
VerrtL
Verra Ella? Verrete voi?
Verrd.
Sara d' uopo andar al mercato ?
Bisognerk andare al mercato ?
Sara d' uopo' andarci domani nella
mattina (domani mattina) do-
mattina.
Non sard d' uopo andarci.
Vedranno oggi le vostre signorie mi*
padre ?
Vedrete voi mio padre oggi.
Prevedere*2 $!**»**•
( previsto.
Rendere * — reso.
134 FORTY-SIXTH LESSON.
EXERCISES.
143.
Shall you nave any books ? — I shall have some. — Who wil
give you any ? — My uncle will give me some. — When will youi
cousin have money ? — He will have some next month. — How
much money shall you have? — I shall have thirty-five sequins
— Who will have good friends ? — The English will have some.
— Will your father be at home this-evening ? — He will be at
home (ci sard). — Will you be there ? — I shall also be there (anch7
to). — Will your uncle go out to-day ? — He will go out, if it is
fine weather. — Shall you go out ? — I shall go out, if it does not
rain. — Will you love my son ? — I shall love him, if he is good. —
Will you pay your shoemaker ?— I shall pay him, if I receive
my money. — Will you love my children ? — If they are good and
assiduous, I shall love them ; but if they are idle and naughty, I
shall despise and punish them. — Am I right in speaking (di par-
lare) thus ? — You are not wrong. — Is your friend still writing ?
— He is still writing. — Have you not done speaking ? — I shall
soon have done. — Have your friends done reading ? — They will
soon have done. — Has the tailor made my coat ? — He has not
made it yet ; but he will soon make it. — When will he make it ?
— When he shall have time. — When will you do your exercises ?
— I shall do them when I shall have time. — When will your
brother do his ? — lie will do them next Saturday. — Wilt thou
come to me? — I shall come. — When wilt thou come ? — I shall
come next Friday, — When have you seen my uncle ? — I saw
him last Sunday. — Will your cousins go to the ball next Tues-
day ? — They will go —Will you come to my concert ? — I shall
come, if I am not ill.
144.
When will you send me the money which you owe me ?-— 1
*hall send it you soon. — Will your brothers send me the bocks
which I have lent them ? — They will send them you. — When
will they send them to me ? — They will send them to you next
month. — Will you be able to pay me what you owe me ? — I shall
not be able to pay it you, for I have lost all my money. — Will
..
FoRTY-SEVENTH LESSON.
220
Jie American be able to pay for his boots ? — He has lost his
pocket-book, so that he will not be able to pay for them. — Will it
be necessary (bisognerd) to send for the physician ? — Nobody is
ill, so that (per cut) it will not be necessary to send for him. —
Will it be necessary to go to the market to-morrow ? — It will be
necessary to go thither, for we want (c' e d\ uopo) some beef,
some bread, and some wine. — Shall you see your father to-day I
— I shall see him. — Where will he be ? — He will be at his
counting-house. — Will you go to the ball to-night (questa sera) ?
— I shall not go, for I am too ill to go to it. — Will your friend go '
— He will go, if you go. — Where will your neighbours go ? —
They will go no where ; they will remain at home, for they have
a good deal to do.
FORTY-SEVENTH LESSON
Lezione quarantesima settima.
To belong.
Do you belong ?
I do belong.
Does that horse belong to your
brother? '
It belongs to hfm
To vrhom do these gloves belong ?
"The? belong to the captains.
Do these horses belong to the cap-
tains?
Tfcey belong to them.
Appartenere* (is conjugated
like its primitive tenere *,
Lesson XL.)
Appartiene Ella?
Appartengo.
Q,uesto cavallo, appartiene al di Lef
fratello? (o al vostro.)
Gli appartiene.
A chi appartengono quest! guantl ?
Di chi son questi guanti ?
Appartengono ai capitani.
Sono dei capitani.
Questi cavalli appartengono al ca
pitani ?
Appartengono loro.
226
FORTY -SEVKJ* TH LESSON.
To suit.
Does that cloth suit your brother ?
It suits him
Do these boots suit your orothers?
rhey suit them.
To suit.
Does it suit you to do that 1
it suits me to do it.
Does it suit your cousin to come with
us?
It does not suit him to go out.
It does not suit me to go to him, for I
cannot pay him what I owe him.
To succeed.
Do you succeed in learning Italian ?
I succeed in it.
I do succeed in learning it.
To succeed,
l succeed, thou succeedest, he suc-
ceeds.
*Ye, you, they succeed.
Do these men succeed in telling their
horses 1
Tney do succeed therein.
Do you succeed in doing that 1
succeed in it.
Piacere* (esser * di gusto),
' Piace questo ranno al di Lei fra
tello 1
Q,uesto panno e" di gusto del di Lei
fratello 1
Gli piace (e di suo gusto),
f Piacciono questi stivali oi di Le'
J fratelli ?
) Q.uesti stivali sono di gusto del <D
[ Lei fratelli ?
Piaccion loro (sono di lor gusto).
Convenire *, addirsi*, esser
convenevole or dicevole
Le piace di far cid ?
Mi piace di farlo.
Piace al di Lei cugino di venire con
noi?
Non gli piace d' u scire.
Non mi e* convenevole d' andare da
lui, poiche non posso pagargli cio
che gli debbo.
Riuscire *, riuscito (conju-
gated like uscire *).
Pervenire *, pervenuto (con-
jugated like its primitive
venire *).
Riesce Ella ad imparar V italiano ?
Vi riesco.
Pervengo ad impararlo.
Riuscire * — riuscito.
Riesco, riesci, riesce. „
Riusciamo, nuscite, riescono.
Riescono cotesti uomini a vender* t
loro cavalli 1
Vi riescono.
Riesce Ella a far c^1 o questo?
Vi riesco.
FORTY -SEVENTH LESSOR.
221
To/orget.
forgot to do it.
To clean.
The inkstand.
Immediately, directly
This instant, instantl}
Presently.
am going to do it.
will do it immediately.
I am going to work.
/* there ?
Are there ?
There is not.
There are not.
Will there be?
There will be.
Was there or has there been ?
Were there or have there been r
There has been.
There have been.
Is there any wine 7
There is some.
There is not any.
Are tnere any men ?
There are some.
There are not any.
fhere are men who will not study.
Is there any one ?
There is no one.
Are there to be many people at the
bail?
There are to be a great many peopie
there.
Dimenticare 1 (takes di be-
fore the infinitive).
Ho dimenticato di farlo (or ho di
menticato farlo).
' Pulire 3 — pulito.
i Ripulire 3 — ripuUio.
>. Nettare 1 — nettato.
II calamaio
Subito.
Immantinente, all' istante.
A momenti, fra poco.
Lo faccio subito. Sto per farlo.
Lo faccio immantinente subito,
Lavorerd fra poco.
C e? fe? Hawif
Ci sono ? Vi sono ? Sown I
Non c' e or non v' e\
Non ci sono or vi sono.
Vi sara or ci sara.
Ci sark or vi sara ?
C e stato or v' & stato 1
Ci sono stati or vi sono stati 1
C e* stato orv'$ stato.
Ci sono stati or vi sono stati.
C'e- del vino?
Ce n' e\
Non ce n' e\
Sonvi degli uomini?
Ve ne sono.
Non ve ne sono.
Vi sono degli uomini che non hanne
voglia di studiare (or che non vof*
liono studiare).
V e* qualcuno 1
Non v' e1 nessuno,
Ci deve essere n,r Ita • gente alia
festa da ballo ?
Ce ne deve essere molta.
1 Molta here agrees with gente, people, which is feminins
238
FORTY -SEVENTH LESSOII.
On credit
To sell on credit.
The credit.
Ready money.
To buy for cash.
To sell for cash
To pay down.
Will you buy for cash ?
Does it suit you to sell to me on
credit 1
ToJiL
Does that coat fit me ?
It fits you.
That hat does not fit your brother.
ft does not fit him.
Do these boots fit you?
They fit me.
That fits you very well.
A credenza, a credito.
Vendere a credenza (a credito).
II credito.
Danaro in contante (danaro con
tante).
Comprare per contanti (comprai
contante).
Vendere per contanti (vender con
tante).
Pagare in contanti (pagar con-
tante).
Vuole Ella comprare per contanti ?
Le conviene vendermi a credenza ?
Star * bene.
Mi sta bene questo abito 1
Le sta bene.
Cotesto cappello non ista bene al di *
Lei fratello.
Non gli sta bene.
Le stanno bene cotcsti stivali 1
Mi stanno bene.
Cid (questa cosa) Le sta benissimc
(a maraviglia).
To keep.
You had better.
I had better.
He had better.
Instead of keeping your horse you had
better sell f*.
Instead of selling his hat he had better
keep it.
Tenere *, ritenere *, — tenuto.
t Ella fara meglio (di).
t Faro meglio (di).
t Egli fara meglio (di).
t In vece di tenere il di Lei cavallo
fara meglio di venderlo.
t In vece di vendere il suo cappello
fara meglio di tenerlo.
Will you keep the horse 1
I shall keep it.
Ton must not keep my money.
Terra Ella il cavallo 7
Lo terrd.
Non £ d' uopo ritenere il mio danaro
Non dovete tenervi il mio danaro
To please, to e pleased.
To please some one.
Does that book please you 1
It pleases me much.
I will do what you please.
Piacere * (Lesson XLI.).
Piacere * a qualcuno
Le piace questo libro 7
Mi piace molo.
t Faro cid che vorra, o che vorret*
FORTY -SEVEN rH LESSON.
zzv
Toil are pleased to say so.
What is your pleasure 7
What do you want 7
What do you say 7
To please one's self.
How do you please yourself here 7
f please myself very well here.
Whose bool: is this 7
It is his.
Whose boots are these 7
They are ours.
It is they who have seen nim.
It is your friends who are {n
right.
It is we who have done it
It is you who say so.
It is of yon that I speak.
! t Cid Le place di dire (a familiar ex-
pression).
Che desidera, Signore 7
Che vuole, Signore 7 .
Che dice?
the
i Fiaccrsi * — piaciutori.
I Trovarsi * — trovatost.
Come vi godete qui.
Mi ci godo benissimo.
Di chi e* questo libro 7
E il suo.
Di chi sono questi stivali 7
Sono i nostri.
Sono essi che Y hanno veduto.
Sono i di Lei amici che hannc
ragione.
Siamo noi che 1' abbiamo fatto.
E Lei che lo dice. Siete voi che 1c
dite.
E di Lei che parlo. Si i di voi cku
parlo.
EXERCISES.
145.
To whom does that horse belong ? — It belongs to the English
japtain whose son has written a note to you. — Does this money
belong to you ? — It belongs to me. — From whom have you re-
ceived it ?— I have received it from the men whose children you
have seen. — Whose horses are those ? — They are ours. — Have
you told your brother that I am waiting for him here ? — I have
forgotten to tell him so (dirglielo), — Is it your father or mine who
is gone to Berlin ? — It is mine. — Is it your baker, or that of our
friend, who has sold you bread on credit ? — It is ours. — Is that
your son ? — He is not mine ; he is my friend's. — Where is
yours ? — He is at Paris. — Have you brought me the book which
you promised me ? — I have forgotten it. — Has your uncle brought
you the pocket-books which he promised you ? — He has forgotten
o bring them to me. — Have you already written to your friend 'f
330 FORTY-SEVENTH LESSON.
—I have not yet (per anco) had time to write to him. — Have yon
forgotten to write to your relative ? — I nave not forgotten tc
write to him. — Does tnis cloth suit you ? — It does not suit me;
have you no other ? — I have some other ; but it is dearer than
this. — Will you show it me ? — I will show it you. — Do the^e
boots suit your uncle ? — They do not suit him, because they are
too dear. — Are these the boots of which you have spoken to us \
—They are the same (i medesimi, or gli stessi). — Whose booka
are these ? — They belong to the gentleman whom you have seen
this morning in my warehouse. — Does it suit you to come with
us ? — It does not suit me. — Does it suit you to go to the market ?
— It does not suit me to go thither. — Did you go on foot to Ger-
many ? — It does not suit me to go on foot, so that (per cut) I went
thither in a coach.
146.
What is your pleasure (che desidera), Sir ? — I am inquiring
after your father. — Is he at home ? — No, Sir, he is gone out. —
What do you say ? — I tell you that he is gone out. — Will you
wait till he comes back ? — I have no time to wait. — Does that
merchant sell on credit? — He does not sell on credit. — Does it
suit you to buy for cash ? — It does not suit me. — Where did you
buy these pretty knives (coltellini) ? — I bought them at the mer-
chant's (dal mercante\ whose warehouse you saw yesterday.—
Has he sold them you on credit ? — He has sold them to me for
cash. — Do you often buy for cash ? — Not so often as you. — Have
you forgotten any thing here ? — I have forgotten nothing. — Does
it suit you to learn this (cib) by heart ? — I have not much time
to study, so that (di modo che) it does not suit me to learn it by
heart. — Has that man tried to speak to your father? — He has
tried to speak to him, but he has not succeeded in it. — Have you
iucceeded in writing an exercise ? — I have succeeded in it. —
Have those merchants succeeded in selling their horses ? — They
have not succeeded therein.— Have you tried to clean my ink-
■tand ? — I have tried, but I have not succeeded in it. — Do your
children succeed in learning English ? — They do succeed in it.
— Is there any wine in this cask (in questo harile) ? — There is
tome in it — Is there any vinegar in this glass ? — There is none
FORTY-SEVENTH LESSON. 28l
m it.— Is there wine or cider in it ? — There is neither win*! nor
cider in it. — What is there in it ? — There is some vinegar in it.
147.
Are there any men in your warehouse ? — There are some
here. — Is there any one in the warehouse ? — There is no one
ihere. — Were there many people in the theatre ? — There were
many there. — Will there be many people at your ball (alia di
Lei festa da hallo)! — There will be many there. — Are there
many children that will not play ? — There are many that will not
study, but all will play. — Hast thou cleaned my trunk ? — I have
tried to do it, but I have not succeeded. — Do you intend buying
an umbrella ? — I intend buying one, if the merchant sells it me
on credit. — Do you intend to keep mine ? — I intend to give it you
back (o restiiuir glielo), if I buy one. — Have you returned the
books to my brother ? — I have not returned them to him yet. —
How long do you intend to keep them ? — I intend to keep them
till next Saturday. — How long do you intend keeping my horse ?
— I intend keeping it till my father returns. — Have you cleaned
my knife ? — I have not had time yet, but I will do it this instant.
— Have you made a fire ? — Not yet, but I Will make one
presently. — Why have you not worked ? — I have not yet been
able. — What had you to do ? — I had to clean your carpet, and to
mend your linen handkerchiefs. — Do you intend to sell your
coat ? — I intend keeping it, for I want it. — Instead of keeping it
you had better sell it. — Do you sell your horses ? — I do not sell
them. — Instead of keeping them you. had oetter sell them. — Does
vou friend keep his parasol ? — He keeps it ; but instead of keep-
ing it he had better sell it, for it is worn out. — Does your son
tear his book ? — He tears it ; but he is wrong in doing ao :
nstead of tearing it he bad better read it.
16
282
FORTY-EIGHTH LESSON.
FORTY-EIGHTH LESSON
Lezione quararitesima ottava.
T„ gL away.
When will you go away 7
F will go soon.
By and by.
He will go away soon (by and by).
We will go away to-morrow.
They will go away to-morrow.
Thou wilt go away immediately.
Andarsene * (Less. XL1IL).
Quando se ne andra Ella! (oven
andrete voi 7)
Me ne aHrd quanto prima.
Fra poco
Se ne anara fra poco.
Ce ne andremo domani.
Se ne andranno domani.
Te ne *>ndrai immantinente.
When.
Quando (ahorche, allorquan
do).
To become.
What will become of you if you lose
your money 7
I do not know what will become of
me.
What will become of him 7
What will become of us 7
What will become of them 7
I do not know what will become of
them.
■f* Esser * mai (diventare, du
venire *, Lesson XLIV.).
t Che sara mai di voi se perdate 1)
vostro 7
t Non so che sara di me.
t Che sara mai di lui ?
t Che sark mai di noi 7
t Che sara mai di loro 7
t Non so cosa sara di loro.
The turn.
My turn.
In my turn
In his turn
In my brother's turn.
Eseh in his turn.
La volta.
t La mia volta.
t Alia mia volta (tocca a me or spetts
a me),
t Alia sica volta (spetta a lui or tocca a
lui).
t Alia volta di mio fratello (tocc#
(spetta) a mio fratello).
t Ciascuno aila sua volta.
FORTY-EIGHTH LESSON.
283
IVhen it come* to your torn.
Our turn will come.
A turn, a tour, a walk.
To take a turn.
To take a walk.
Ue> Lb gone to take a walk.
To walk round the garden.
To run — run (past part.).
Do you run 1
I do run.
Shall or will you run ?
I shall or will run.
Behind.
Behind him.
Behind the castle.
A blow, a stroke, a clap.
Have you given that man a blow ?
1 have given him one.
A blow with a stick.
A kick (with the foot)
A blow with the fist.
A stab of a knife.
A shot (or the report of a gun).
A shot of a pistol.
A glance of the eye.
A clap of thunder.
To give a cut with a knife.
To give a man a blow with a stick.
To give a man a kick.
To give a man a blow with the fist.
Quando verra la di Lei volta (quando
toccherk a Lei or quando spettera
a Lei) n a voi.
Avremo la nostra volta (spettera s
noi or tocchera a noi).
I*
Tin giro.
Far un giro.
Far una passeggiata.
E andato a fare un giro.
E andato a fare una passeggiata.
Far un giro interno del giardino.
Correre * — cor so.
Corre Ella 1 Correte voi 1
Corro.
Correra Ella 1 Correrete voi 7
Correr*.
Dietro (or di dietro).
Dietro a lui.
Dietro al castello.
Un colpo, una botta (a fem.
noun).
Ha Ella dato un colpo a costui 7
GlieP ho dato.
Una bastonata, un colpo di bat-
tone.
Un calcio, una pedata.
Un pugno.
Una colteila^o, un colpo di col-
tello.
Una schioppettata (una fucilata).
Un colpo di fucile.
Una pistolettata, un colpo di pit
tola.
Un' occhiata, un colpo d' occnio,
Un colpo di fulmine.
Dare una coltellata.
Dare una bastonata ad un uomo.
Dare un calcio ad un uomo.
Dare un pugno ad un uomo.
234
FORTY-EIGHTH LESSON.
To pull, io draw. )
To shoot, to fire. S
To fire a gun.
To fire a pistol.
To fire at some one.
I have fired at that bird.
1 have fired twice.
1 have fired three times.
I have fired several times.
How many times have you fired 1
I have fired six times.
How many times have you fired at
that bird ?
I have fired at it several times
I have heard a shot.
He has heard the report of a pistol.
We have heard a clap of thunder.
The fist.
Tirare 1. Spar are 1. bm
fuoco.
t Sparare un fucile.
f Tirare una fucilata.
Tirare un colpo di pistola.
Tirare un colpo di fucile a quaJ
cuno.
Ho tirato una schioppettata a quelr"
uccello.
Ho fatto fuoco due volte.
Ho sparato tre colpi.
Ho sparato varie volte.
Quanti colpi di fucile na tirati ?
Ne ho tirati sei.
Quant e volte ha tirato a quell' uc
cello 1
Ho tirato parecchie volte sopra di
lui.
Ho inteso un colpo di fucile.
Ha inteso una pistolettata.
Abbiamo inteso un colpo di fulm"n6
(o scoppio di fulmine).
II pugno.
To cast an eye upon some one or
something.
Have you cast an eye upon that
book?
I have cast an eye upon it.
Gettare un* occhiata sopra uno,
o qualcosa.
Ho Ella gettato un' occhiata so
questo libro 1 (o dato un' occhiata)
Vi ho gettato un' occhiata.
Has that man gone away?
He has gone away.
Have your brothers gone away ?
fhey have gone away.
They have not gone away.
Have they gone away 1
They were not willing to go away.
Se n' £ andato costui ?
Egli se n' e andato.
I di Lei fratelli se ne sono andati >
Se ne sono andati.
Non se ne sono andati.
Se ne sono eglino andati 1
Non hanno voluto andarsene
To ask some one, that is, to
question, to interrogate him.
Interrogare qualcuno.
FORTY -EIGHTH LESSOW. 28G
EXERCISES.
148.
Are you going away already ? — I am not going yet. — When
will that man go away ? — He will go away presently. — Will you
go away soon ? — I shall go away next Thursday. — When will
your friends go away ? — They will go away next month. — When
wilt thou go away ? — I will go away instantly. — Wh} has your
father gone away so soon (cost tosto) ? — He has promised his
friend to be at his house at a quarter to nine, so that (di mode
che) he went away early in order to keep (per mantenere) what
he has promised. — When shall we go away ? — We shall go away
to-morrow. — Shall we start early ? — We shall start at five
o'clock in the morning. — When will you go away ? — I shall go
away as soon as I have done writing. — When will your children
go away ? — They will go as soon as they have done their exer-
cises.— Will you go when I go ? — I shall go away when you go
— Will our neighbours soon go away ? — They will go awav
when they have done speaking. — What will become of your son
if he does not study ? — If he does not study he will learn nothing.
— What will become of you if you lose your money ? — I do not
know what will become of me. — What will become of your
friend if he loses his pocket-book ? — If he loses it I do not know
what will become of him.- — What has become of your son ? — I do
not know what has become of him. — Has he enlisted ? — He has
not enlisted. — What will become of us if our friends go away ?
— If they go away I do not know what will become of us. — What
has become of your relations V — They have gone away.
140.
Do you intend buying a horse ? — I cannot buy one, for I have
not yet received my money. — Must I go (Mi i duopo andart
Devo io andart al teatso*) to the theatre ? — You must not gc
thither, for it is very bad weather. — Why do you not go to my
brother? — It does not suit me to go to him, for I cannot yet pay
aim what I owe him. — Why does your servant give that man a
986 FORTY-EIGHTH LESSOR.
8Ut with his knife ? — He gives him a cut, because the man ha*
given him a blow with his fist. — Which of these two pupils
begins to speak ? — The one who is studious begins to speak. —
What does the other who is not so ? — He also (anch1 egli) begins
to speak, but he knows neither how to write nor to read. — Does
he listen to what you tell him ? — He does not listen to it, if I do
lot give him a beating (se non lo batto dei colpi). — Why do those
hildren not study ? — Their master has given them blows, so
iiat (di maniera che) they will not study. Why has he given
them blows with his fist ? — Because they have been disobedient
— Have you fired a gun ? — I have fired three times. — At wha
did you fire % — I fired at a bird. — Have you fired a gun et that
man ? — I have fired a pistol at him. — Why have you fired a
pistol at him ? — Because he has given me a stab with his knife.
— How many times have you fired at that bird ? — I have fired at
it twice. — Have you killed it ? — I have killed it at the second
shot (a/ seconds colpo). — Have you killed that bird at the first
shot ? — I have killed it at the fourth (al quarto colpo). — Do you
fire at the birds which you see upon the trees, or at those which
you see in the gardens ? — I fire neither at those which I see upon
th? trees nor at those which I see in the gardens, but at those
which I perceive on the castle behind the wood.
150.
How many times have the enemies fired at us (su di run) ? —
They have fired at us several times. — Have they killed any
body ? — They have killed nobody. — Have you a wish to fire at
that bird ? — I have a wish to fire at it. — Why do you not fire at
those birds ? — I cannot, for I have a sore finger. — When did the
captain fire? — He fired when his soldiers fired. — How many
birds have you shot at ? — I have shot at all that I have perceived,
but I have killed none, because my gun is good for nothing. —
Have you cast an eye upor. .hat man ? — I have cast an eye upon
him.— Has he seen you ? — He has not seen me, for he has sore
eyes. — Have you drunk of that wine ? — I have drunk of it, and
it has done me good. — What have you done with my book ? — 1
have put it upon your trunk.— Am I (debbo) to answer you ?—
You will answer me when it comes to your turn (quando verr*
FOETY -NINTH LESSON
237
la di La volia). — Is it my brother's turn (tocca a mw fratello) ? —
When it comes to his turn I shall ask him (lo interrogherb\ for
rach in his turn. — Have you taken a walk this morning ? — I have
taken a walk round the garden. — Where is your uncle gone to?
—He is gone to take a walk. — Why do you run ? — I run because
I see my best friend. — Who runs behind us (dietro a noi) 1 — Our
dog runs behind us. — Do you perceive that bird ? — 1 perceive it
behind the tree. — Why have your brothers gone away ? — They
have gone away, because they did not wish to be seen by the
man vlwse dog they have killed. (See end of XXIVth Lessen.)
FORTY-NINTH LESSON
Lezione quarantesima nona.
To hear — heard.
hear (hou hearest, he hears.
We hei , »ou hear, they hear
To hear of.
Have j»a heard of your brother!
i have heard ot him.
Is it long since you breakfasted?
How long is it since you breakfasted!
"t is net long since I breakfasted.
It is a great while since.
It is a short time since.
How long is it since you heard of your
•rather 1
Udire*
3-
—udito.
s.
Odo,
odi,
ode.
sar.
Udiamo,
udite,
odono.
[ f Udire * parlare,
I f Sentir parlare.
Ha Ella udito parlare del di \a
fratello 1
Ne ho udito parlare.
E molto tempo che Ella ha fatto
colazione ?
Quanto e che Ella ha latto colazione?
Non £ molto tempo che ho fattf
colazione.
E moltissimo tempo che.
E poco tempo che.
Quanto ten po £ che ha udito par
lare del di Lei fratello ?
&!
t J l T*
■. IT"
aba. |:]Eai
ftwontra jtm
(Mm. A, Then,
beiarea
A few
Haifa
OU. B The word/., third
men fa hi
I have
laa haara
faaa
Tea yearn ag*.
A fortnight.
flaaepen lane*
i baYi
i^ Fna**1
Ota. C. In ragaeh Ike atate
a alwaye expreaaed m the
Freod^ ii to erpreaaed by the
Be haa been in
anmj
• aoj
have yon had that hornet
ft theee five y<
Brno long (since when) t
laaf baa he beat here 1
Shut.
£
ic rendered by <&
Pmdtnove.
Pft a? read volte.
E njmacaeora (acno ;
E nan nm* ora (men* on fe)
of the verb/«r«,ie
u> the eiagnlar.
L' ho vedwo an meee Ji.
Soao dae ore e mezzo.
Tre aeeoii aoao.
Dfad anal
t E moho tempo *%* Ban a nj
Fmadat
or of action, who* H U* deration,
whitot in Italian vHiuix
t Sootre«mriea*einPerlff
CUaato tempo i ea* EOa ha intjaji
einqne aaaf ebe F ho.
!D« quando in qua 9
Da pumtotcmpt
Da | Matt tempi t-enjf,
aa a/eg aa m French, we any fifteen dave for a/w majii
rOBTT-NUmi USSSU.
S3*
three da ya»
This month,
have seen him more than twenty
Da tregiomi
L' ho vedute pin di venti
t la aix months since I spoke to nun.
che
Sono set
lam
Ob*. P. The negative nan in una and similar expressions is
Italian, though the English use no negative in such instances.
gl ho par
It is more than a year since I heard of
him.
Since I saw yon it has rained very
often.
Epm d* un anno che non ne ha
ndito pariare.
Da che r ho vednta ha piovuio
Just.
I have just seen your brother.
He has just done writing.'
The men have just arrived.
Has that man been waiting tongl
He has but just <
I have just so
I have just received it
I have just written to hinv
f Poco /a, poc* emit, teste.
< Oro, or ore, in amesto patnto.
( Appmtio.
HovistoUdiLeirxatellojDeceJ*.
Ha finite di acrivqe pee" ana*.
Gti uomini sono appunto arrivatL
E motto tempo che questiaspetta >
E arrivato w ouesfi
L'hovedutofeef*.
L'horicevntdari
Gfi hoacrittopec*
T6<U<me'sbest.
I will do my beat.
He wiH do hie beat
if Fart > t/ possible.
t FardUi»osmbue(ca»cnepotM>.
It FaxaUposatbite(cuchepottn).
*• spend JWM/jf "— " spew.
How much have yon spent to-day T
He has fifty sequins a month to five
Spewdere* % — spese*.
Quanto ha Etta speso ocgil
Egti ha ciuquanta uecchint al
Have ihe horsea been found 1 | Sono stati trovati i cavalif
f^ The passive participle agrees with the nominative in number ; that la
when the nominative is plural the partkiple must also he in the plural
They have been found.
Where t When*
The men h:\\e bSM Stan,
Out children have been praised and
rewarded; because they have
Sono atari trovati.
OveerDove? Quandol
Gfi uomini aono stati vedurt
I noatri frocielh aono atari lodatl e
ricompensati, poiche sono atatf
aavi e atndioei.
ZiO
FORTY-NINTH LESSON.
By whom have they been rewarded ?
By whom have we been blamed ?
Da chi sono stati riconipensati 1
Da chi siamo stati biasimati 7
To pass.
Before,
Passare 1.
! Davanti.
Innanzi.
Oo*. E. Before is expressed in Italian by "prima, when it denotes priority
Lesson XXVIIL), and by davanti, innanzi, when it signifies in presence
-f. Ex.
To pass before some one.
To pass before a place
A place.
I have passed before the theatre.
He passed before me.
Passar davanti a qualcuno.
Passar davanti un luogo.
Un luogo.
Son passato davanti al teatro.
E passato innanzi a me (or davanti
me).
1 breakfasted before yon.
Ho fatto colazione prima di Lei.
To spend time in something.
What do you spend your time in 1
I spend my time in studying.
What has he spent his time in ?
What shall we spend our time in 1
Passare il tempo a qualcht
cosa.
t Come passa il tempo 1
t Passo il tempo a studiare.
t Come ha egli passato il tempo 1
t Come passeremo il tempo 1
To miss j to fail.
The merchant has failed to bring the
money.
You have missed your turn.
You have failed to come to me this
morning.
Mancare 1.
II mercante ha mancato di portare il
danaro.
Ella ha mancato alia di Lei volta.
Ella ha mancato di venire da mo
questa mane (o questa mattina).
To be good for something.
Oi what use is that 1
It is good for nothing.
The good-for-nothing fellow.
.s the gun which you have bought a
good one 1
No, it is worth nothing
Esser * buono a qualcosa.
t A che serve cid 1
t Cio non serve a niente (Non vtl
niente).
L discolo. lo sfaccendato.
II fucile ch' Ella ha comprato I
buono ?
No Signore, non e* ouono a nient*
FORTY-NINTH LESSON.
341
To throw away.
Have you thrown away any thing 7
. have not thrown away any thing.
Have you used the books which you
have bought ?
have not used them ; I have ex-
amined them, and found them very
bad, so that I have thrown them
away.
To examine.
Gettar via.
Ha Ella gettato via qualche con 1
Non ho gettato via niente.
Si e Ella servita dei libri che ha
comprati 7
Non me ne son servito; li ho esa
minati e li ho trovati cattivissimL
di raaniera che li ho gettati via.
Esaminare.
EXERCISES.
151.
Have you heard of any one ? — I have not heard of any one, foi
1 have not gone out this morning. — Have you not heard of the
man who has killed a soldier ? — I have not heard of him. — Have
you heard of my brothers ? — I have not heard of them. — Of
whom has your cousin heard ? — He has heard of his friend who
is gone to America. — Is it long since he heard of him ? — It is not
long since he heard of him. — How long is it ? — It is only a
month. — Have you been long in Paris ? — These three years. —
Has your brother been long in London ? — He has been there
these ten years. — How long is it since you dined ? — It is long
since I dined, but it is not long since I supped. — How long is it
since you supped 1 — It is half an hour. — How long have you had
these books ? — I have had them these three months. — How long
is it since your cousin set out ? — It is more than a year since he
set out. — What has become of the man who has lent you money ?
— I do not know what has become of him, for it is a great while
since I saw him. — Is it long since you heard of the soldier who
gave your friend a cut with the knife ? — It is more than a yeai
since I heard of him. — How long have you been learning
French ? — I have been learning it only these two months. — Do
you know already how to speak it ? — You see {Ella sente) that I
am beginning to speak it. — Have the children of the English
242 FORTY-NINTH LESSON.
noblemen been learning it long ? — They have been learning N
these three years, and they do nol yet begin to speak. — Why do
they not know how to speak it ? — They do not know how to speak
it, because they are learning it badly. — Why do they not learn it
well ? — They have not a good master, so that they do not learn it
well.
152.
Is it long since you saw the young man who learnt German
•vith the (dal) master with whom (presso il quale) we learnt it ?
— I have not seen him for nearly a year. — How long is it since
the child ate ? — It ate a few minutes ago. — How long is it since
those children drank? — They drank a quarter of an hour ago. —
How long has your friend been in Spain ? — He has been there
this month. — How often have you seen the king ? — I saw him
more than ten times when I was in Paris. — When did you meet
my brother ? — I met him a fortnight ago. — Where did you meet
him ? — I met him before the theatre. — Did he do you any harm ?
— He did me no harm, for he is a good boy. — Where are my
gloves ? — They have thrown them away. — Have the horses been
found ? — They have been found. — Where have they been found 1
They have been found behind the wood, on this side of the road.
— Have you been seen by any one ? — I have been seen by no
one. — Do you expect any one ? — I expect my cousin the captain.
— Have you not seen him ? — I have seen him this morning ; he
has passed before my warehouse. — What does this young man wait
for ? — He waits for money. — Art thou waiting for any thing ? —
I am waiting for my book. — Is this young man waiting for his
money ? — He is waiting for it. — Has the king passed here ? — He
has not passed here, but before the theatre. — Has he not passed
before the castle ? — He has passed there, but I have not seen him.
153.
What do you spend your time in ? — I spend my time in study
ing. — What does your brother spend his time in ? — He spends
his time in reading and playing. — Does this man spend his time
in working ? — He is a good-for-nothing fellow ; he spends his
time in drinking and playing. — What do your children spend
FORTY -NINTH LESSON. 242
their time in 1 — They spend their time in learning. — Can you pay
me what you owe me ? — I cannot pay it you, for the merchani
has failed to bring me my money. — Why have you breakfasted
without me ? — You failed to come at nine o'clock, so that Wf
have breakfasted without you. — Has the merchant brought you
the gloves which you bought at his house (da lui) 1 — He
failed to bring them to me. — Has he sold them you on credit ?-
He has sold them me, on the contrary, for cash. — Do you know
those men ? — I do not know them ; but I believe that they are
(che siano, subjunctive) good-for-nothing fellows, for they spend
their time in playing.— Why did you fail to come to my father
this morning ? — The tailor did not bring me the coat which he
promised me, so that I could not go to him. — Who is the man
who has just spoken to you ? — He is a merchant. — What has the
shoemaker just brought ? — He has brought the boots which he
has made us. — Who are the men who have just arrived ? — The}
are Russians. — Where did your uncle dine yesterday ? — He dined
at home. — How much did he spend ? — He spent five francs. —
How much has he a month to live upon ? — He has a hundred se-
quins a month to live upon. — Do you throw your hat away '? — 1
i'o not throw it away, for it fits me very well. — How much have
you spent to-day ? — I have not spent much : I have only spent
Due sequin. — Do you spend every day as much ? — I sometimes
spend more than that. — Has that man been waiting long ? — He
has but just come. — What does he wish ? — He wishes to speak tc
you. — Are you willing to do that ? — I am willing to do it. — Shali
you be able to do it well ? — I will do my best. — Will this man be
able to do that? — He will be able to do it, for he will do hi?
Beat.
FIFTIETH LESSON.
Lezione cinquantesima
Far.
How far (meaning What dis-
tance) f
How far is it from here to Paris 1
Is it far from here to Paris ?
It is far.
It is not far.
A mile.
How many miles is it?
It is twenty miles.
It is almost two hundred miles from
here to Paris.
It is nearly five hundred miles from
Paris to Vienna.
Lontano, lungi.
{ Qual distanza ?
I Quanta e lontano ?
t dual distanza v* S da qui a Parigi 7
t Qual distanza corre da qui a Parigi 1
C e* molto da qui a Parigi 1
C $ molto. E lontano.
Non c' 6 molto. Non e4 lontano
Un miglio.1
Quante miglia vi sono 1
Vi sono venti miglia.
Vi son circa due cento miglia da qui
a Parigi.
Vi son circa cinque cento miglia dt
Parigi a Vienna.
From.
From Venice.
From London.
From Rome.
From Florence.
<Vhat countryman are jom 1
Are you from France?
[ am.
The Parisian.
He is a Parisian (from Paris)
The king.
The philosopher.
The preceptor, the tutor.
The actor.
The professor
The landlord, the innkeeper.
Da.
Da Venezia.
Da Londra.
Da Roma.
Da Firenze.
t Di qual paese e Ella ? » siete vol 1
t EElla di Francia? Siete vol fran
cese ?
Lo sono.
II Parigino.
E Parigino.
lire.
II filoaofo.a
II precettore,* 1' aio.
L' attore.4
II professore.
L' oste, il locandiere, 1' albergatore.
1 Miglio is one of the nouns in o, which, though masculine in the singular,
take in the plural the form of the feminine singular, as It miglia, miles. W«
•hall see hereafter a list of such nouns.
* Whenever pk occurs in English, it is in Italian changed into,/.
4 I In Italian c or p is never put before <, but they are changed into I.
FIFTIETH LESSON.
244
Aim you an Englishman ?
ire you an Italian ?
Whence f
Whence do you come?
I come from Rome.
1 erme from Paris.
To fly, to run away.
To run away.
I run away, thou runnest away lie
runs away.
W# run away, you run away, they run
away.
Why do you fly 1
I fly, because I am afraid.
To assure.
\ assure you that he is arrived.
To arrive.
To hear — heard.
Hare you heard nothing new 1
I have heard nothing new.
What do they say of our prince ?
fhey say he is wise and generous.
EEIlalnglese? > __
EEllaltaliano? \ Siete T°l
Da dove ? D' onde ?
Da dove vienel D' onde vien*'
o venite ?
Vengo da Roma.
Vengo da Pangi.
( Fuggire 3.
( Fuggirsene,
Scappare 1.
Fuggo, fuggi, fugge
Fuggiamo, fuggite, fuggono
Perche" fugge ? fuggite 1
Fuggo, perchd ho paura.
Assicurare 1.
L' assicuro ch' e arrivato.
Arrivare 1.
Intendere * — inteso.
Non ha Ella inteso niente di nno-
vo?
Non ho inteso niente di nuovo.
Che si dice (che dicono) del nostrc
principe ?
Lo dicono saggio & magnanimo
(better, Si dice che 4 saggio.)
To happen — happened.
The happiness, fortune.
The unhappiness, misfortune
i. great misfortune has happened.
file has met with a great misfortune. *
Accadere * — accaduto.
Sopraggiungere* — sopraggx
unto.
Succedere *, — successo.
Arrivare 1.
La felicita (a fern. noun).
La disgrazia (a fern. noun).
E sopraggiunta una gran disgrazia.
Gli e sopraggiunta una gran dl*
grazia. o sventura.
146
FIFTIETH LESSON.
What has happened to you ?
Nothing has happened to me.
I have met with your brother.
Che Le e sopraggiunto 1
Non mi e sopraggiunto niente
Ho incontrato il di Lei fratelle.
The poor man.
I have cut his finger.
You have broken the man's neck.
He broke his leg.
The leg.
II povero.
t Gli ho tagliato il dito.
t- Ella ha rotto il collo all1
t Si £ rotta la gamba.
La gamba (o /em. noun).
uomo.
To pity — pitied.
I pity, thou pitiest, he pities.
We, you, they pity.
Compiangere * — compianto.
Compatire (a) — compatito.
Aver compassione (di) — avuU
compassione.
compatisci, compa-
Compatisco,
tisce.
Compatiamo,
tiscono.
compatite, compa
Ob*. Most verbs of the third conjugation terminate in the three first per-
sons of the present indicative in : isco, isci, face, and in the third person plura
in iscono, just as compatire. As there are a great many of them (some gram*
marians make their number amount to nearly four hundred), we shall conteir
ourselves with marking them thus : (t*co,) as they will occur in the course of
the Method.
Do you pity that man 7
I pity him with all my heart.
With all my heart.
To complain.
Do you complain ?
I do not complain.
Do you complain of my friend?
I complain of him.
I do not complain of him.
Compiange Ella costui ?
Lo compiango di tutto cuore.
Di tutto cuore.
f Lamentarsi, lagnam.
t Silamenta?
t Non mi lamento.
t Si lagna del mio amico 1
t Me ne lagno.
t Non me ne lagno.
Tc dare — dared or durst,
I dare, thou darest, he dares.
Wt, you, they dare.
Osare — osato.
Ardire — ardito.
Ardisco, ardisci, ardisce.
Osiamo,5 ardite, ardiscono.
• The first person plural of osare is substituted for the first person plural *
ardire, not to confound this with the first person plural ofardere, to burn.
FIFTIETH LESS «.
247
To spoil.
You have spoiled my kn\<*.
To serve , to wait upon.
To *erue some one, to wait upon
some one.
Has he been in your service ?
Has he served you 1
How long has he been in your serrice 1
Hie service.
Guastart 1.
Ha guastato il mio coliello. (Avete
guastato).
Servire 3.
t Servire qualcuno.
> Essere * al servizio di <piaL
[ cuno.
E egli stato al di Lei servizio ?
L' ha servita 1 Vi ha egli servito 1
t Q,uanto tempo e" che La serve ? (o
serve Lei.)
t Quanto tempo e1 che trovasi al di
Lei servizio? (al servizio di Lei.)
t Da quanto tempo e" al di Lei ser-
vizio ? (o al servigio di vol)
II servizio.
To offer.
Do you offer ?
I offer.
Thou offerest
He offers.
To confide, to trust with, to
intrust.
Do you trust me with your money?
trust you with it
I have intrusted that man with a
secret.
The secret.
To keep any thing secret
have kept it secret
To take care of something.
Do you take care of your clothes 1
take care of them.
Vill you take care of my horse 1
will take care of it
Offrxre * — offerto.
OffreElla'? Offritevoil
Offro.
Offri.
Offre.
{ Dare * in custodm.
} Confidare 1.
Mi confidn Ella il di Lei danaro?
Glielo confido.
Ho confidato un segreto a costui.
II segreto.
r Tenere qualche cosa segreta.
? Osservare il segreto su qualcfc*
C cosa.
L' ho tenuto segreto.
Aver cura dx qualcosa.
Ha Ella cura dei di Lei abiti 1
Ne ho cura.
Vuole aver cura del mio cavalk) >
c Voglio averne cura, or
( Ne voglio aver cura.
M8
FIFTIETH LESSON.
To leave — lej
To squander, to dissipate.
He has squandered all his wealth.
He has left nothing to his children.
To hinder, to keep from.
I hinder, thou hinderest, he hinders
We, you, they hinder.
You hinder me from sleeping.
He has hindered me from writing.
To purchase, to spend.
What have you purchased to-day 1
I have purchased two handkerchiefs.
Have you purchased any thing to-day 1
I have *
Most lovely, charming.
Admirably.
That hat fits you admirably,
rhat coat fits him very well.
I' is charming.
Lasciare 1 — lasciato.
Dissipare I — dissipato.
Ha dissipato ogni suo avmrc.
Non ha lasciato niente ai suoi fan
ciulli.
Impedire * — impedito.
Impedisco, impedisci, impedisce.
Impediamo, impedite, impediscono
Ella mi impedisce di dormire.
Mi ha impedito di scrivere.
Far spesa, far compera (la
spesa, la "ompera, the ex'
pense, fern, nouns).
Far delle spese.
j. Far delle compere.
Cosa ha comprato oggi ?
Ho comprato due fazzoletti.
Ha fatto delle spese (delle compere.
oggi?
Ne ho fatto. '
Grazioso, leggiadro, vago.
A meraviglia.
Q.uestu cappello Le sta a meraviglia.
Quest' abito gli sta benissimo.
E grazioso.
EXERCISES.
154.
How far is it from Paris to London ? — It is nearly three hundred
miles from Paris to London. — Is it far from here to Berlin ? — It is
far. — Is it far from here to Vienna ? — It is nearly five hundred
miles from here to Vienna. — Is it further from Paris to Blois than
from Orleans to Paris ? — It is further from Orleans to Paris than
from Paris to Blois. — How far is it from Paris to Berlin ? — It is
-!?r>ost fivp hiindrftd and thirty miles from Paris to Berlin. — Do
FIFTIETH LESSON. 24£
rcu Intend to go to Paris soon ? — I intend tc go thither soon. —
Why do you wish to go this time (questa volta] ? — In order to buy
good books and good gloves, and to see my good friends. — Is it
long since you were there ? — It is nearly a year since I was
there. — Do you not go to Italy this year {quest' anno) ?—~J do not
go thither, for it is too far from here to Italy. — Who are the men
hat have just arrived ? — They are philosophers. — Of what
country are they ? — They are from London. — Who is the man
who has just left ? — He is an Englishman who has squandered
away (dissipato) all his fortune (ogni suo avere) in France. —
What countryman are you ? — I am a Spaniard, and my friend is
an Italian. — Are you from Tours ? — No, I am a Parisian. — How
much money have your children spent to-day ? — They have spent
but little ; they have spent but one crown. — Where did you dine
yesterday ? — I dined at the inn-keeper's. — Did you spend a great
deal ? — I spent a crown and a half. — Has the king passed here
{di qui) 1 — He has not passed here (di qui), but before the theatre
— Have you seen him ? — I have seen him. — Is it the first time
(e la prima volta) you have seen him ? — It is not the first time,
for I have seen him more than twenty times.
155.
Why does that man run away ? — He runs away because he is
afraid. — Why do you run away? — I run away because I am
afraid. — Of whom are you afraid 'f — I am afraid of the man who
does not love me. — Is he your enemy ? — I do not know whether
he is {s1 e) my enemy ; but I fear all those who do not love me,
for if they do me no harm they will do me no good. — Do you fear
«ny cousin ? — I do not fear him, for he has never done any body
harm.— You are wrong to run away before that man, for I assure
you that he is (V assicuro esser egli) a very good man (un bravo
uonio), who has never done harm to any one. — Of whom has youi
brother heard ? — He has heard of a man to whom (al quale) a
misfortune has happened (e accaduta una disgrazia). — Why have
your scholars not done their exercises ? — I assure you that they
have done them, and you are mistaken if you believe that they
Have (abbiano, subj.) not done them. — What have you done with
J50
FIFTIETH LESSON.
my book ? — I assure you that I have not seen it. — Has youi sol
had my knives ? — He assures me that he has not had them. — Is
your uncle arrived already ? — He is not arrived yet (per anco).
— Will you wait till he returns ? — I cannot wait, for I have a
good deal (motto) to do. — Have you not heard any thing new ? —
I have heard nothing new. — Is the king arrived ? — They say he
is (che sia) arrived. — What has happened to you ? — A great mis-
fortune (una gran disgrazia) has happened to me. — What (quale) ?
— I have met with my greatest enemy, who has given me a blow
with a stick. — Then I pity you with all my heart (di tutto cuore).
— Why do you pity that man (a costui) 1 — I pity him because,
you have broken his neck. — Why do you complain of my friend ?
I complain of him because he has cut my finger. — Does that man
(costui) serve you well ? — He serves me well, but he spends too
much. — Are you willing to take this servant ? — I am willing to
take him, if he will serve me. — Can I take that servant ? — You
can take him, for he has served me very well. — How long is ii
since he has left your service (che ha lasciato il di Lei servizio) ?
— It is but two months since. — Has he served you long ? — H*
»as served me for (durante) six years.
156.
Do you offer me any thing ? — I have nothing to offer you. —
What does my friend offer you ? — He offers me a book. — Have
the Parisians offered you any thing ? — They have offered me
wine, bread, and good beef. — Why do you pity our neighbour ?
I pity him, because he has trusted (perche ha dato in custodia) a
merchant of Paris with his money, and the man (e questi) will
not return it to him. — Do you trust this man with any thing ? — I
do not trust him with any thing. — Has he already kept any thing
from you ? — I have never trusted him with any thing, so that he
has never kept any thing from me. — Will you trust my father
with your money ? — I will trust him with> it. — With what secret
has my son intrusted you ' — I cannot intrust you with that with
which he has intrusted me, for he has desired me (m' ha pregato)
to keep it secret. — Whom do you intrust with your secrets ? —1
Entrust nobody with them, so that nobody knows them. — Has
FIFTIETH LESSON 251
your brother been rewarded ? — He has, on the contrary, been
punished ; but I beg of you to keep it secret, for nobody knows
it. — What has happened to him? — I will tell you what has
happened to him, if you promise me to keep it secret (di
nsservarne il segreto). — Do you promise me to keep it secret ?
— I promise you, for I pity him with all my heart. — Will
you take care of my clothes ? — I will take care of them. — Are
you taking care of the book which 1 lent you ? — I am taking care
of it. — Who will take care of my servant ? — The landlord will
take care of him. — Do you throw away your hat ? — I do not
throw it away, for it fits me admirably (a meraviglia). — Does
your friend sell his coat ? — He does not sell it, for it fits him most
beautifully. — Who has spoiled my book ? — No one has spoiled
it, because no one has dared to touch it. — Do you hinder any one
from studying ? — I hinder no one from studying, but ? hinder ywj
from doing harm tc this boy.
THIRD MONTH
Terzo mese.
FIFTY-FIRST LESSON.
Lezione cinquantesima prima.
I'Ae people.
Will the people come soon ?
T\my will come soon.
La gente (a Jem. noun).
Verra la gente quanto prim*
Verra quanto prima.
Soon, very soon.
A violin.
The flute.
The horn.
To play upon the violin.
To play the violin.
Jba. The verb to play is rendered by suonare with the accusative, when i
musical instrument is spoken of, and by giuocare with the dative, when a game
is spoken of. Ex. To play at cards, giuocart aUe carte; to play at chess.
qvuocare agii scacchi.
Tosto, per tempo, quanto pnmt
Un violino.
II flauto.
II corno.
Suonare il violin*
The harpsichord.
The piano-forte.
To play thp harpsichord.
To play upon the harpsichord.
To play the, or upon the, flute
JVhat instrument do you play ?
II cembalo.
II pianoforte.
Suonare il cembalo.
Suonare il flauto.
Che strumento suona Ella 7 * + *
nate voi 7
To touch.
I play upon the piano.
Near.
Near me.
Near them.
Toccare 1.
t Tocco il pianoforte, (o suono U.
Vicino a, presto a.
Vicino a me.
Vicino a k>ro
FIFTY-FIRST LESSON.
25a
Near the fire.
Near the trees.
Near going.
•V here do you live ?
[ live near the castle.
What are you doing near the fire ?
VIcino al fuoco, pre sac al fuoco.
Vicino agli alberi.
Vicino ad andare. Star per andare
Ove sta Ella?
Sto vicino al castello.
Che fa Ella vicino al fuoco 1
To dance.
To/all
To drop (to let fall).
Has he dropt any thing?
He has not dropt any thing,
dropt my gloves.
To retain, to hold back.
Ballare I.
Cadere * — caduto.
Lasciar cadere.
t Gli e" caduto qualche cosa?
t Nort gli e* caduto niente.
t Mi son caduti i guanti.
Ritenere * (is conjugated liki
its primitive tenere *, Les-
son XL.).
7*o approach, to draw near.
Do you approach the fire ?
I do approach it
To approach, to have access to.
He it a man difficult of access.
Anicinarsi (gov. the dative,,
acctarossi.
S' awicina ella al fuoco ? (vi awi-
cinate voi al.)
Me ne avvicino (or merely m' av
vicino).
Accostarst ad uno.
Avvicinare uno.
' E un uomo che non si pud avvici
nare.
E un uomo che nessuno pud ae
costare.
( go away (withdraw) from the fire
To withdraw from.
To go away from.
Why doe* that man go away from the
fire?
He goes away from it, because he is
not cold.
I go away from it
M' allontano dal fuoco.
Allontanarsi da (gov. the ab-
lative).
Perche" s' allontana costui dal fuoco 1
Se ne allontana perchd non ha
freddo.
Me ne allontano.
£54
FIFTY-FIRST LESSON.
7b recollect.
Do you recollect that 7
I recollect it.
Does your brother recollect that 7
He recollects it.
Do you recollect the aevices 7
I recollect them.
Have you recollected the devices 1
I have recollected them.
[ have not recollected them.
Have you recollected them 7
You have recollected them.
Has he recollected them 7
He has recollected them.
We have recollected them.
They have recollected them.
To remember, to recollect.
Do you remember that man 7
I remember him.
Do you remember that 7
I remember it.
What do you remember 7
I remember nothing.
( Ricordarr. 1 (gOY. the gent
\ tive).
' Rammentarsi.1
Si rammenta di cid 7
Me ne rammento.
Si rammenta di cid il di Lei ft*
tello7
Se ne rammenta.
Si rammenta dei motti 7
Me ne rammento. Me ne ricordo
Si e Ella rammenta ta dei motti 1
Me ne son rammentato.
Non me ne son rammentato.
Si e Ella rammentata di quelli 7
Ella se n' e* ricordata.
Se n' e* egli rammentato 7
Sen' e rammentato.
Ce ne siamo rammentati.
Se ne sono rammentati.
To stt down
sit do* n, thou sittest down, he sits
down.
IVe, you, they sit down.
Do you sit down 7
I do sit down.
Thou art sitting down.
He is sitting down.
I shall or will sit down.
He sits near the fire.
Ricordarsi 1 (gov. the gem
tive).
Si ricorda ella di costui ? (o vi ricor
date voi di.)
Me ne ricordo, or lo ricordo.
Si ricorda di cid 7
Me ne ricordo.
Di che si ricorda Ella 7
Non mi ricordo di niente.
' Sedere * — seduto.
k Metier si a sedere.
- Porsi a sedere.
Seggo, siedi, siede.
Sediamo, sedete, seggono.
Siede Ella (Si mette Ella a sedere) 1
(Vi mettere voi a.)
Seggo (mi metto a sedere).
Siedi (ti metti a sedere).
Siede (si mette a sedere).
Sederd (mi metterd a sedere).
E seduto vicino al fuoco.
1 Ricordare, rammentare, when they are not reflective, govern the accusative
FIFTY -FIRST LESSCN
25ft
fie sat down near the fire.
To like better, to prefer.
Do you like to stay here better than
going out ?
J like staying here better than going
out.
He likes to play better than to study.
Do you like to write better than to
speak 1
like to speak better than to write.
I*
Better than.
I like beef better than mutton.
Do you like bread better than cheese ?
He likes to do both.
I like neither the one nor the other.
I like tea as much as coffee.
Just as much.
Some veal.
A calf, calves.
Quick, fast.
Slow, slowly.
Aloud.
t)oes your master speak aloud 7
He speaks aloud.
In order to learn Italian one must
speak aloud.
Quicker, faster.
Not so quick, less quick.
Asjast as you.
He eats quicker than I.
S' 3 messo a sedere vicino al fuoco.
S' i posto a sedere vicino al fuoco
f Placer meglio (piu), preferire
(isco).
Aver piu caro.
' Amar meglio (piu).
Le piace meglio restar qui ctot
uscire 1
Mi piace meglio restar qui eh*
uscire.
Ama meglio giuocare che studlare.
Le piace piu scrfr (ire che parlare 1
Preferisco parlare a scrivere.
11 parlar mi piace piu che lo scri-
vere.
! Meglio che.
Piu che.
Mi place piu il manzo che il mon
tone.
Le piace pift il pane che il cacio 1
Gli piace fare 1' uno e 1' altro.
Non mi piace n£ V uno ne* 1' altro.
Mi piace altrettanto il td quanto t
cafB.
Altrettanto.
Del vitello.
Un vitello, del vltelli.
Presto.
Lentamente, adagio.
Forte, ad alta voce.
II di Lei maestro parla forte 1
Parla forte.
Per imparar 1' italiano bisogna par
lar forte.
Piu presto.
Non cosl presto, meno presto
piu adagio.
Cost presto come Lei.
Mangia pru presto di me.
$56
FIFTY-FIRST LESSON.
Do you learn as fast as I?
[ learn faster than you.
I do not understand you, because you
speak too fast.
To sell cheap.
To sell dear.
Does he sell cheap ?
He does not sell dear.
He has sold me very dear.
So.
This man sells every thing so dear that
one cannot buy any thing of him.
You speak so fast that I cannot un-
derstand you.
To buy something from tome
one*
l have bought it of him.
[ have bought that horse of your
brother.
I have bought a cake for my child.
[ have bought it for him.
So much ; plur. so many.
have written so many notes that I
cannot write any more.
Do you fear to go out?
[ fear to go out.
To run away, to fly.
Die you run away ?
( did not run away.
Why did that man 1 un away ?
Hs ran away because he was afraid.
Who has run away 7
He has run away.
Impara presto come io (al pari di
me)?
Imparo piil presto di Lei.
Non La capisco, perche parla troppa
presto.
Vendere a buon mercato,
'Vender caro.
Vende a buon mercato?
Non vende caro.
M' ha venduto carissimo.
Cost.
Questi tinde tutto cosi caro che non
si pud comprar niente da lui.
Ella parla cosi presto che non posso
comprenderla.
Comprar qualche cosa da
qualcuno.
L' ho comprato da lui.
Ho comprato questo cavallo dal di
Lei fratello.
Ho comprato un pasticcino a mio
figlio.
Glieio ho comprato.
Tanto ; plur. tanti.
Ho scritto tanti biglietti che non at
posso scriver piii.
Teme Ella d' uscire?
Temo d' uscire.
Saharsi 1. Scappare 1.
E Ella scappata ?
Non sono scappato.
Perche* e scappato costui ? (o coroo
o fuggitovia.)
E scappato, perche* ha avuto paura
( Chi e* scappato?
( Chi s' e salvato ?
c Egli e scappato.
I Egli $ fuggito.
FIFTY-FIRST LESSOR. 261
EXERCISES.
157.
Do you play the \iolin ? — I do not play the violin, but the-, harp,
•ichord. — Shall we have a ball to-night ? — We shall have ore. —
At what o'clock ? — At a quarter to eleven. — What o'clock is it
now 2 — It is almost eleven, and the people will soon come. — What
instrument will you play. ? — I shall play the violin. — If you play
the violin, I shall play the harpsichord. — Are there to be a great
many people at our ball? — There are to be a great many. — Will
you dance ? — I shall dance. — Will your children dance ? — They
will dance if they please (se place loro). — In what do you spend
your time in this country ? — I spend my time in playing on the
harpsichord, and in reading. — In what does your cousin divert
himself? — He diverts himself in playing upon the violin. — Does
my one dance when you play ? — A great many people dance
when I play. — Who? — At first (in primo luogo) our children,
then our cousins, at last (injine) our neighbours. — Do you amuse
yourself? — I assure you that we amuse ourselves very much. —
Whom do you pity ? — I pity your friend. — Why do you pity
him ? — I pity him because he is ill. — Has any one pitied you ?
— Nobody has pitied me, because I have not been ill. — Do you
offer me any thing ? — I offer you a fine gun. — What has my
father offered you ? — He has offered me a fine book. — To whom
have you offered your fine horses ? — I have offered them to the
English captain. — Dost thou offer thy pretty little dog to these
children ? — I offer it to them, for I love them with all my heart.
— Why have you given that boy a blow with your fist ? — Because
he has hindered me from sleeping. — Has any body hindered you
from writing ? — Nobody has hindered me from writing, but I
fcave hindered somebody from hurting your cousin.
158.
Have you dropt any thing ? — I have dropt nothing, but my
cousin dropt some money. — Who has picked it up ? — Some men
have picked it up. — Was it returned to him (Gli e stato reso) 1 —
It was returned to him, for those who picked it up did not wish
258 FIFTY-FIRST LESSEN.
to keep it. — Is it cold to day ? — It is very cold. — Will you dra*
near the fire ? — I cannot draw near it, for I am afraid of burning
myself. — Why does your friend go away from the fire ? — He
goes away from it, because he is afraid of burning himself. — Art
thou corning near the fire ? — I am coming near it, because I am
very cold. — Do you go away from the fire ? — I go away from it.
— Why do you go away from it ? — Because I am not cold. — Are
you cold or warm ? — I am neither cold nor warm. — Why do your
children approach the fire ? — They approach it because they are
cold. — Is any body cold ? — Somebody is cold. — Who is cold ? —
The little boy, whose father has lent you a horse, is cold. — Why
does he not warm himself? — Because his father has no money to
buy coals. — Will you tell him to come to me to warm himself?
— I will tell him so (dirglielo). — Do you remember any thing ? —
I remember nothing. — What does your uncle recollect ? — He
recollects what you have promised him. — What have I promised
him ? — You have promised him to go to Italy with him next
winter. — I intend to do so, if it is not too cold. — Why do you
withdraw from the fire ? — I have been sitting near the fire this
hour and a half, so that I am no longer cold. — Does not your
friend like to sit near the fire ? — He likes, on the contrary, much
(molto) to sit near the fire, but only when he is cold. — May one
(ci pud) approach your uncle ? — One may approach him, for he
receives every body (tutti). — Will you sit down ? — I will sit
down. — Where does your father sit down ? — He sits down near
me. — Where shall I sit down ? — You may (pud) sit near me.—
Do you sit down near the fire ? — I do not sit down near the fire,
fbr I am afraid of being too warm. — Do you recollect my brother ?
— I recollect him.
159.
Dc your parents recollect their old friends ? — They recollect
Uiem. — Do you recollect these devices ? — I do not recollect them.
— Ha e you recollected that ? — I have recollected it. — Has your
uncle rscollected those devices ? — He has recollected them.-—
Have I recollected my exercise ? — You have recollected it.—
Have you recollected your exercises ?— =-I have recollected them,
for I have learnt them by heart ; and my brothers have recol
FIFTY-FIRST LESSON. 259
i«cted theirs, because they have learnt them by heart. — Is it long
since you saw your friend from Paris ? — I saw him a fortnight
ago. — Do your scholars like to learn by heart 1 — They do not
like to learn by heart ; they like reading and writing better than
learning by heart. — Do you like cider better than wine ? — I like
wine better than cider. — Does your brother like to play ? — He
ikes to study better than to play. — Do you like veal better than
siutton ? — I like the latter better than the former. — Do you like
lO drink better than to eat ? — I like to eat better than to drink ;
but my uncle likes to drink better than to eat. — Does the French-
man like fowl better than fish ? — He likea fish better than fowl.
— Do you like to speak better than to write ? — I like to do both.
— Do you like honey better than sugar ? — I like neither. — Does
your father like coffee better than tea ? — He likes neither. — Can
you understand me ? — No, Sir, for you speak too fast. — Will
you be kind enough (aver la bontd) not to speak so fast ? — I will
not speak so fast, if you will listen to me.
160.
Can you understand what my brother tells you ? — He speaks
so fast that I cannot 'understand him. — Can your pupils under-
stand you ? — They understand me when I speak slowly ; for, in
order to be understood, one must speak slowly. — Is it necessary
to speak aloud (forte or ad alia voce) to learn Italian ? — It is
necessary to speak aloud. — Does your master speak aloud ? — He
speaks aloud and slow. — Why do you not buy any thing of that
merchant ? — He sells so dear that I cannot buy any thing of him.
— Will you take me to another ? — I will take you to the son of
-he one whom you bought of last year. — Does he sell as dear as
this ? — He sells cheaper (a miglior mercato). — Do your children
.ike to learn Italian better than Spanish ? — They do not like to
learn either ; they only like to learn German. — Do you like
nutton? — I like beef better than mutton. — Do your children like
sake better than bread ? — They like both. — Has he read all the
book i which he bought ? — He bought so many (tanti) that he
cannot read them all. — Do you wish to write some exercises?—
I have written so many that I cannot write any more. — Why
does that man run away ? — He runs away because he is afraid
260
FIFTY-SECOND LESSON.
— Will any one do him harm ? — No one will do him harm ; bu
he dares not stay, because he has not done his task, and is afraid
of being punished. — Will any one touch him ? — No one will
touch him, but he will be punished by his master for not having
( per non aver) done his task. (See end of Lesson XXIV.)
FIFTY-SECOND LESSON
Lezione cinquantesima seconda.
By the side of.
To pass by the side of some one.
I have passed by the side of you.
Have you passed by the side of my
brother ?
I have passed by the side of him.
To pass by a place.
I have passed by the theatre.
He has passed by the castle.
You have passed before my ware-
house.
{ f Accanto a.
( j Allato a.
t Passare accanto ad uno.
t Son passato acca.no a Lei.
t E Ella passata accanto a mio fra
tello 1
t Son passato accanto a lui.
f Passare accanto ad un luogo
"\Passare vicino ad un luogo
t Son passato vicino al teatro.
t h passato vicino al castello.
t Ella e* passata davanti al mio nit
gazxino.
To dare.
I dare not go thither.
He dares not do it.
[ did not dare to tell him so.
Ardire (see Lesson L).
Non ardisco andarci
Non ardisce farlo.
Non ho ardito dirglieio.
FIFTY-SECOND LESSON.
261
To make use of, to use.
do you use my horse ?
I use it.
Does your father use it ?
He uses it.
Have you used my gun 1
I have used it.
They have used your cooks.
They have used them.
Servirsi di, adoperarel.
t Si serve Ella del mio cavallo? (V\
servite *oi.)
i t Me ne servo,
j t Se ne serve il di Lei padre ?
t Se ne serve.
t S' e* Ella servita del mio schioppo I
t Me ne son servito.
t Hanno adoperato i di Lei libri.
t Li hanno adoperati
To instruct.
instruct, thou instructest, he in-
structs.
We, you, they instruct.
To teach.
To teach some one something.
He teaches me arithmetic.
I teach you Italian.
I have taught him Italian.
To teach some one to do some-
thing.
He teaches me to read.
I teach him to write.
Hie French master (meaning the
master of the French language).
The French master (meaning that the
master is a Frenchman, whatever
Be teaches).
To shave.
To get shaved.
Ammaestrare — ammaestrato.
Instruire, oi istruire (isco) —
instruito, or istruito.
Istruisco, istruisci, istruisce.
Istruiamo, istruite, istruiscono.
Insegnare 1. *
Insegnare qualcosa a qualcuno.
M' insegna 1' aritmetica (a fern
noun).
Le insegno 1' italiano. O vi insegno.
Gli ho insegnato 1' italiano.
Insegnar a qualcun*
qualche cosa.
M' insegna a leggere.
Gl' insegno a scrivere
a Jar
II maestro di franceae.
II maestro franceae.
f Sbarbarsi.
f Farsi la barba,
"f Far si far la barba
j* Farsi sbarbare.
162
PIFTY-SECCND LESSON.
To dress.
To undress.
To dress one's self.
To undress one's self.
Have you dressed yourself 7
I have not yet dressed myself.
Have you dressed the child ?
I have dressed it
To undo.
To get rid of.
Are you getting rid of your damaged
sugar 1
I am getting rid of it.
Did you get rid of your old ship ?
I did get rid of it
To part with.
The design, the intention.
To intend, or to have the inten-
tion.
I intend to go thither.
We have the intention to do it
Do you intend to part with your
horses ?
i have already parted with them.
He has parted with his gun.
To discharge.
Have you discharged tout servant?
i have discharged him
To get rid of some one.
I did get rid of him.
Did your father get rid of that man ?
He did get rid of him.
Vestire — vestito.
Spcgliare — spogliato.
Vestirsi.
Spogliarsi.
S' e* Ella vestita ? Vi siete vestito ?
Non mi sono ancor vestito.
Avete vestito il bambino ?
L' ho vestito.
Disfare.
Disfarsi di.
Si disfa Ella del di Lei zuccherc
avariato ?
Me ne disfaccio.
S' e Ella disfatta del di Lei vecchio
bastimento ?
Me ne son disfatto.
Disfarsi.
L' intenzione (a Jem.. noun)y il di
segno.
Desqrnare, o aver intenzione
di.
Ho intenzione di andarci.
Abbiamo intenzione di farlo.
Ha Ella intenzione di disfarsi del at
Lei cav alii?
Me ne sono gia disfatto.
S' e disfatto del suo schioppo.
SLicenziare 1.
Mandar via
Ha Ella lieenziato ii di Lei ner
vitore ?
L* ho lieenziato.
!■(■ Sbarazzarsi di qualcuno.
•j" Sbrogliarsi di qualcuno.
Mi sono sbrogliato di luL
U di Lei padre s' d ebrogliat*. di
costui ?
Se n' & sbrogliato.
FIFTY -SECOND LESSON,
269
To wake.
To awake.
generally awake at six o'clock in the
morning.
My servant generally wakes me at six
o'clock in the morning.
The least noise wakes me.
A dream has waked me.
do not make a noise in order not to
wake him.
A dream.
Generally.
To come down.
To alight from one's horse, to
dismount.
To conduct one's self.
To behave.
I conduct myself well.
How does he conduct himself?
Towards.
He behaves ill towards that man.
He has behaved ill towards me.
To be worth while.
Is it worthwhile?
It is worth while.
»t is not worth while.
Is it worth while to do that ?
Is it worth while to write to him?
til worth nothing.
Is It better?
It is better.
Will it be better?
16
Svegliare 1. RisvegUare 1.
Svegliarsi 1. Risvegliarsi 1.
Ordinariamente mi sveglio alle sei
del mattino.
II mio servitore ordinariamente (di
solito) mi sveglia alle sei del
mattino.
II minimo strepito mi risveglia.
Un sogno m' ha risvegliato.
Non faccio strepito per non ris-
vegliarlo.
Un sogno.
Di solito, ordinariamente.
Scendere * 2 ; past part, sceso.
Discendere calare.
Smontare da cavallo.
Condursi *. (Less. XXXIV.
Comportarsi 1.
Mi conduco bene.
Come si conduce ?
Verso, or mverso di.
Si comporta male verso costui.
S' d comportato male verso di me
{ Valer la pena.
( Meritare il conto.
Val la pena ?
Cid val la pena.
Cid non val la pena.
Val la pena di farlo ?
Val la pena di scrivergli ?
c Cid non val niente.
\ Non val niente.
i5 meglio ?
S meglio.
Sara meglio ?
264 FIFTY-SECOND LESSON.
It will not be better.
It is better to do this than that.
It is better to stay here than go a
walking.
It is better to read a good book than
go to the theatre.
Non sar* meglio.
E meglio far questo che quelle
E meglio restar qui che paseeg
giare.
E meglio legger un buon libro che
andare al taatro
EXERCISES.
161.
Have your books been found ? — They have been found.—
Where ? — Under the bed. — Is my coat on the bed ? — It is under
it. — Are your brother's clothes under the bed ? — They are upon
it. — Have I been seen by any body. — You have been seen by
nobody. — Have you passed by any body ? — I passed by the side
of you, and you did not see me. — Has any body passed by the
side of you ? — Nobody has passed by the side of me. — Where
has your son passed ? — He has passed by the theatre. — Shall you
pass by the castle ? — I shall pass there. — Why have you not
cleaned my trunk ? — I was afraid to soil my fingers. — Has my
brother's servant cleaned his master's (U padrone) guns ? — He
has cleaned them. — Has he not been afraid to soil his fingers ?—
He has not been afraid to soil them, because his fingers are never
clean ( pulite). — Do you use the books which I have lent you ?
— I use them. — May I (posso) use your knife? — Thou mayest
use it, but thou must not (non devi) cut thyself. — May my brothers
use your books ? — They may use them. — May we use your gun ?
—You may use it, but you must not spoil it {non dovele guas-
iarlo). — What have you done with my coals ? — I have used them
lo warm myself. — Has your brother used my horse ? — He has
used it. — Have our neighbours ased our clothes ? — They have
not used them, because they did not want them. — Who has used
my hat ? — Nobody has used it. — Have you told your brother to
come down 1 — I did not dare to tell him. — Why have you not
dared to tell him ? — Because I did not wish to wake him. — Ha#
FIFTY-SECONU LESSON. 265
ie told you not to wake him ? — He has told me not to wake him
vhen he sleeps.
162.
Have you shaved to-day ? — I have shaved. — Has your brothei
shaved ? — He has not shaved himself, but he got shaved. — Do you
»have often ? — I shave every morning, and sometimes also in the
evening. — When do you shave in the evening ? — When I do not
fine at home. — How many times a day does your father shave ?
—He shaves only once a day, but my uncle shaves twice a day.
—Does your jousin shave often ? — He shaves only every other
day (ogni due giorni). — At what o'clock do you dress in the
morning ? — I dress as soon as I have breakfasted, and I breakfast
every day at eight o'clock, or a quarter past eight. — Does your
neighbour dress before he breakfasts ? — He breakfasts before he
Iresses. — At what o'clock in the evening dost thou undress ? —
I undress as soon as I return from the theatre. — Dost thou go
every evening to the theatre ? — I do not go every evening, for it
is better to study than to go to the theatre. — At what o'clock dost
thou undress when thou dost not go to the theatre ? — Then I
undress as soon as I have supped, and go to bed at ten o'clock. —
Have you already dressed the child {il bambino) ? — I have not
dressed it yet, for it is still asleep (dorme ancora). — At what
o'clock does it get up ? — It gets up as soon as it is waked. — Do
you rise as early as I ? — I do not know at what o'clock you rise
(si levi, subj.), but I rise as soon as I awake. — Will you tell my
servant to wake me to-morrow at four o'clock ?— I will tell him.
— Why have you risen so early ? — My children have made such
a noise {tanto strepito) that they awakened me. — Have you slept
ivell ? — I have not slept well, for you made too much noise. — At
what o'clock did the good captain awake ? — He awoke at a
quarter past five in the morning.
163.
How did my child behave ? — He behaved very well. — How
did my brother behave towards you ? — He behaved very well
towards me, for he behaves well towards every body. — Is it worth
while to write to that man ? — It is not worth while to write to
266 FIFTY-SECONE LESSOR.
him. — Is it worth while to dismount from my lorse ilk **<ir,r to
buy a cake ? — It is not worth while, for it is not long since you
ate. — Is it worth while to dismount from my horse in order to
give something to that poor man (a questo povero) ? — Yes, for he
seems ( pare) to want it ; but you can give him something with-
out dismounting from your horse. — Is it better to go to the theatre
than tc study ? — It is better to do the latter than the former. — Is
it better to learn to read French than to speak it ? — It is not worth
while to learn to read it without learning to speak it. — Is it better
to go to bed than to go a walking ? — It is better to do the latter
than the former. — Is it better to go to France than to Germany ?
— It is not worth while to go to France or to Germany when one
has no wish to travel. — Did you at last get rid of that man ? — I
did get rid of him. — Why has your father parted with his horses ?
— Because he did not want them any more. — Has your mer-
chant succeeded at last to get rid of his damaged sugar?—
He has succeeded in getting rid of it. — Has he sold it on
credit ? — He was able to sell it for cash, so that he did not
sell it on credit. — Who has taught you to read ? — I have learnt
it with (da) a French master. — Has he taught you to write?
— He has taught me to read and to write. — Who has taught
your brother arithmetic (V aritmetica) ? — A French master has
taught it him (insegnata). — Do you call me ? — I call you. —
What do you wish (desiderate) ? — Why do you not rise ? do you
not know that it is already late ? — What do you want me for
(che vuol Ella) ? — I have lost all my money, and I came to
beg you to lend me some.-— What o'clock is it ? — It is already
a quarter past six, and you have slept long enough (dor'mito
abbastanza). — Is it long since you rose ? — It is an hour and a
half since I rose. — Do you wish to take a walk with me ? —
[ canno. go a walking, for I am waiting for my Italian master
PIFTY-THIRD LESSON.
Lezione cinquantesima terza.
To change.
To change one thing for another.
. change my hat for his.
The change (exchange).
To change (meaning to put
other things).
Do you change your hat?
I do change it.
He.changes his boots.
They change their clothes.
on
Cambiare, far cambio di.
' Cambiare qualche cosa con qualch*
cosa.
Far cambio di qualche cosa cob
qualche cosa.
Faccio cairtbio del mio cappello col
suo.
Cambio il mio cappello col suo.
II cambio (concambio).
Mutare 1.
Muta Ella il cappello 1
Lo muto.
Egli muta gli sthrali.
Eglino mutano i restiti
To mix.
i mix among the men.
He mixes among the soldiers.
Among.
f Mischiarsi 1.
t Mi mischio fra gli uominL
t Si mischia fra i soldati.
Fra,tnu
To recognize, or to acknowledge. Riconoscere * (is conjugated
like its primitive conoscere *,
Lessons XXVIII. and
XXXIII.).
Do you recognize that man? Riconosce Ella quest' uomo ?
. t is so long since I saw him that I do E si lungo tempo che non 1' ho risto
not recollect him. che non lo riconosco piu.
Ob$. A. When there, is a comparison between two sentences, titan iff
tendered by di qtuilo che, followed by turn. Ex.
668
FIFTY-THIRD LESSON.
I hare more bread than I shall eat.
That man has more money than he
will spend.
There is more wine than will be
necessary.
You have more money than you will
want
We have more clothes than we want.
f hat man has fewer friends than he
imagines.
To fancy.
To think.
To hope, to expect.
Do you expect to find him there 1
I do expect it.
To earn, to gain, to get.
How much have you gained 1
Has your father already started
(departed) 1
He is ready to depart
Ready.
To make ready.
To make one's self ready.
To keep one's self ready.
I am ready to set out
To rend, to split.
To break some one s heart.
You break that man's heart.
Whose heart do I break ?
t Ho piii pane di quello che non
mangero.
t Quest' uomo ha pitt danaro di quello
che non ispendera.
t Vi e piu vino di quello che non fara
d' uopo (or non sara bisogno).
t Ella ha piu danaro di quelle che non
le abbisognera.
t Abbiamo piu vestiti di quello che non
ce ne abbisognera.
t Quest' uomo ha meno amici di
quello che egli non pensi (subjunc-
tive, of which hereafter).
SImaginare or immaginare.
Imaginarsi, credersi.
Pensare 1.
Sperarel. Aspettarst.
Spera Ella trovarcelo ?
Lo spero.
Guadagnare 1.
Quanto ha Ella guadagnatpl
E gia parti to il di Lei padre 7
E pronto a parti re.
Pronto (takes a before the
Infinitive).
Preparare, allestire (Uco).
Prepararsi, allestirsia.
Tenersi pronto a.
e Mi tengo pronto a partire.
I Son pronto a partire.
Squarciare 1.
Squarciare il cuore ad una.
Ella squarcia il cuore a quest' uomo 1
A chi squarcio io il cuore 7
FIFTY-THIRD LBSSOH.
26*
Ti spill.
To spill Ink upon the book.
To spread, extend.
To expatiate, to lay stress upon.
That man is always expatiating upon
that subject.
The subject.
Always.
To stretch one's self.
To stretch one's self along the floor.
The sofa, the bed.
He stretches himself upon the sofa.
To hang on or upon.
The wall.
I hang my coat on the wall.
He hangs his hat upon the tree.
We hang our clothes upon the nails
The thief has been hanged.
The thief.
The robber, the highwayman.
Vou have always been studious, and
will always be so.
Your brother is, and will always be
good.
A well-educated son never gives his
father any grief; he loves, honours,
and respects him.
Spargere * ; past part, sparto.
Spargere dell' inchiostro sui libro
Spandere versare.
Stendere * ; past part, steso.
Estenuersi * sopra.
Quest* uomo si estende sempre sx
questo soggetto. (O si diffonde.)
II soggetto.
Sempre.
iSdraiarsi.
Stendersi.
Sdraiarsi (stendersi) sul pavimento.
II sofa, il canape*, il letto.
Si stende (si sdraia) sul canape1.
' Appendere * a ; past part.
appeso.
. Appiccare 1.
II muro.
Appendo il mio abito al muro.
Egli appende il suo cappello all' al*
bero.
Appendiamo i nostri vestiti al
chiodi.
II ladro d stato appiccato.
II ladro.
II ladro da strada, H masnadiero.
Ella 3 sempre stata studiosa e lo
para* sempre. (Vol siete stato sem-
pre studioso e lo sarete sempre).
II di Lei fratello d sempre savio e lo
sara sempre.
Un figlio ben educato non di mai
dolore a suo padre ; 1' ama, 1' onora
e lo rispetta.
Jf 1 can, I will receive him willingly. 1 1 Se potrd, lo rlceverd volonderi.
Oba. B. The conditional conjunction m, if, may in Italian be followed tj *'
die future.
no
FIFT7-THIRD LESSON.
If you go there, we shall see each
other,
(f our affairs permit us, we shall take a
short journey.
Willingly.
The affair, the occupation.
To allow, to permit
The voyage, the journey
Se andra, ci vedremo. O se voi vi
andrete.
Se i nostri affari ce lo permette-
ranno, andremo a fare un piccols
viaggio.
Voiontieri or volentierl.
L' affare.
Permettere * (is conjugated like its
primitive mettere *, Lessoni
XXIV. and XXXIII.)
II viaggio.
EXERCISES.
164.
Do you hope to receive a note to-day ? — I hope to receive one.
—From whom ?— From a friend of mine. — What dost thou hope ?
—I hope to see my parents to-day, for my tutor has promised me
to take me to them. — Does your friend hope to receive any thing ?
— He hopes to receive something, for he has studied well. — Do
you hope to arrive early in Paris ? — We hope to arrive there at a
quarter past eight, for our father is waiting for us this evening.
— Do you expect to find him at home ? — We expect it. — For what
have you changed your coach, of which you have spoken to me ?
—I have changed it for a fine Arabian horse. — Do you wish to
exchange your book for mine ? — I cannot, for I want it to study
Italian. — Why do you take your hat off? — I take it off because I
see my old master coining (vedo venire). — Do you put on another
(mutare) hat to go to the market ? — I do not put on another to go
to the market, but to go to the concert. — When will the concert
take place ? — It will take place the day after to-morrow. — Why
do you go away ? — Do you not amuse yourself here ? — You are
mistaken, Sir, when you say that I do not amuse myself here ;
for I assure you that I find a great deal of pleasure in conversing
(a conversare) with you ; but I am going, because I am expected
at my relation's ball.- Have you promised to go? — I have
promised. — Have you changed your hat in order to go to the
English captain's ? — I have changed my hat, but I have not
FIFTY-THIRD LESSON. 271
changed my coat or my boots. — How many times a day dost thou
change thy clothes ? — I change them to dine and to go to th6
theatre.
165.
Why do you mix among these men ? — I mix among them in
order to know what they say of me. — What will become of you
if you always mix among the soldiers ? — I do not know what will
become of me, but I assure you that they will do me no harm, for
they do not hurt any body. — Have you recognized your father ?
— It was so long since I saw him, that I did not recognize him. —
Did he recognize you ? — He recognized me instantly. — How long
have you had this coat ? — It is a long time since I have had it. —
How long has your brother had that gun ? — He has had it a great
while. — Do you still speak French ? — It is so long since I spoke
it, that I have nearly forgotten it all. — How long is it since your
cousin has been learning French ? — It is only three months since.
— Does he know as much as you ? — He knows more than I, for
he has been learning it longer. — Do you know why that man does
not eat ? — I believe he is not (che rum abbia, subj.) hungry, for
he has more bread than he can (possa, subj.) eat. — Have you
given your son any money ? — I have given him more than he will
spend (che rum ispenderd). — Will you give me a glass of cider ?
— You need not drink cider, for there is more wine than will be
necessary. — Am I to (debbo to) sell my gun in order to buy a new
hat ? — You need not sell it, for you have more money than you
will want. — Do you wish to speak to the shoemaker ? — I do not
wish to speak to him, for we have more boots than we shall want.
— Why do the French rejoice ? — They rejoice because they
6atter themselves they have many good friends. — Are they not
right in rejoicing (di rallegrarsi) ? — They are wrong, for tkey
have fewer friends than they imagine (che pensino, subj.).
166.
Are you ready to depart with me ? — I am so. — Does your uncle
depart with us ? — He departs with us, if he pleases (se ouole).—
Will you tell him to be ready (di tenersi pronto) to start to.
morrow at six o'clock in the evening ? — I will tell him so.— "If
*72 FIFTY -FOURTH LESSON.
this young man ready to go out ? — Not yet, but he will soon be
ready — Why have they hanged that man ? — They have hanged
him, because he has killed somebody. — Have they hanged the
man who stole the horse from your brother ? — They have
punished him, but they have not hanged him ; they only hang
highwaymen in our country (nel nostro paese). — What have yo»i
done with my coat ? — I have hanged (appeso) it on the wall.— -
Will you hang my hat upon the tree ? — I will hang it thereon
(appendervelo). — Have you not seen my gloves ? — I found them
under your bed, and have hanged them upon the rails. — Has the
thief who stole your gun been hanged ? — He has been punished,
but he has not been hanged. — Why do you expatiate so much
upon that subject ? — Because it is necessary to speak on all sub-
jects.— If it is necessary to listen to you, and to answer you when
you expatiate upon that subject, I^will hang my hat upon the
nail, stretch myself along the floor, listen to you, and answer you
as well as I can (alia meglio). — You will do well. — Shall you gc
to Italy this year ? — If I prosper (se faro buoni affari) I shall go
there. — Shall you go to the captain ? — I will go if you go. — Will
you lend me a book ? — If I can (se potrd) I will lend you one. —
Will your son receive a present ? — If he is (se sara)good and in-
dustrious, he will receive one ; but if he is idle, he will receiv*
nothing. — Shall you go out ? — If it is (sard) fine weather, I shall
go out ; but if it rains I shall remain at home.
FIFTY-FOURTH LESSON.
Lezionc cinquantesima quarto.
To be well.
How do you do 1
I am well.
Star bene.
Come sta ?
3 to bene (or sJmply bend}.
FIFTY-FOURTH LESSON.
27fl
(*b.<*. A . The verbs to be, and to do. are both expressed in Italian by the verb
ttare *, when they are used in English to inquire after, or to speak of a person's
health.
To serve you.
How is your father ?
f Per ubbidlrla.
J Per servirla (an expression com-
i monly used in Italian, in answer t»
[ an inquiry after one's health).
Come ata il di Lei signor padre ?
Obs. B. The qualifications of Signore, Mr., Signora, Mrs., Signorina,
Jiiss, usually follow the possessive pronouns in Italian, when we speak to a
person respecting his parents, relations, or friends, and we mean to pay them
some respect.
He is ill.
Your father.
Your brother.
Your cousin.
Your cousins.
Your uncles.
To doubt a thing.
To question any thing*
Do you doubt that ?
I doubt it.
I do not doubt it.
I make no question, have no doubt
of it.
What do you doubt?
doubt what that man has told me.
The doubt.
Without doubt, no doubt.
There is no doubt about it.
Sta male,
t 11 di Lei signor padre,
t II di Lei signor fratello.
t II di Lei signor cugino.
t I di Lei signori cugini.
t I di Lei signori zii.
Dubitare di qualche cosa.
Dubita Ella pi cid ?
Ne dubito.
Non ne dubito.
Diche dubita Ella?
Dubito di cid che m' ha detto quest
uomo.
II dubbio.
Senza dubbio.
Non v' ha dubbio.
To agree to a thing.
Do you agree to that?
I agree to it.
How much have you paid for that
hat?
I have paid three crowns for it.
Convenire* di qualche cosa
(conjugated like its primitive
venire :* Lessons XXIV.,
XXXIV., and XLVI.).
Conviene Ella di ci6 ?
Ne convengo.
t Quanto ha Ella pagato quests
cappello ?
♦ L ho pagato tre scudi.
«74
FIFTY-FOURTH WESSON.
[ have booght this horse Jot five
hundred francs.
The price.
Have you agreed about the price 7
We have agreed about it.
4 bout what have you agreed ?
About the price.
Ho comprato questo cavallo jw
cinque cento franchi.
II prezzo.
Sono Elleno convenute del prezzo *
(O siete voi convenuto.)
Ne siamo convenuti.
Di che sono Elleno convenute ?
Del prezzo.
Co agree, to compose a differ-
ence.
To feel {to perceive).
To consent.
I consent to go thither.
He consents to pay it me.
However.
Accordarsi.
Sentire 3.
!Consentire (di before Infin.).
Acconsentire (di before Inf.).
Acconsento d' andarvi.
Acconsente di pagarmelo
Pure, perd.
To wear (meaning to wear
garments).
What garments does he wear t
He wears beautiful garments.
The garment.
Portare 1
Che vestimenti porta egli 1
Porta bei vestimenti.
11 vestimento.
Plwr. I vestimenti A le vestimenta.
Against my custom.
As customary.
My partner.
Contro il mio solito (costume).
Come al solito.
II mio socio.
'jlo observe something.
To take notice of something.
Do you take notice of that ?
1 do take notice of it.
DH you observe that 1
Did you notice what he iidl
I did notice it
Accorgersi * 2 ; dx qualcht
cosa. Past part, accortosi.
Si accorge Ello di questo ? Vi accor-
gete voi di.
Me ne accorgo.
Si d Ella accorta di questo 1
Si 3 Ella accorta di eft cne ki
fatto?
Me ne son accorto.
FIFTY-FOURTH LESSON.
376
To expect (to hope).
Do you expect to receive a note from
your uncle ?
1 expect it.
He expects it.
We expect it.
Have we expected it ?
We have expected it.
To get (meaning to procure).
I cannot procure any money.
He cannot procure any thing to eat.
To make fun of some one, to
laugh at some one.
To laugh at something.
He laughs at every body. )
He criticises every body. 3
Do you laugh at that man ?
I do not laugh at him.
To stop, to stay.
Have you stayed long at Berlin?
( flayed there only three days.
To sojourn, to stay.
Where does your brother stay at
present?
At present, actually.
He stays at Florence.
The residence, stay, abode.
'Paris is a fine place to live in.
f Attendersi * 2 ; past part.
attesosi. (Aspettare o aspeu
tarsi.)
S' attende Ella a ricevere un bigliet
to dal di Lei zio 1
Mi vi attendo. Lo aspetto.
Vi si attende. Vi s' attende.
Vi ci attendiamo. Ce lo aspettiamo
Vi ci siamo attesi ?
Vi ci siamo attesi. L' abbiamo attesa
j* Procurarsi.
I Non posso procurarmi danaro.
I Non posso procurarmi del danaro.
Non pud procurarsi di che man-
giare.
f Beffarsi (1) di qualcuno.
Burlarsi di.
Ridersi * (2) di qualche cosa,
p. past, risosi.
Ei si beffa di tutti.
Si beffa Ella di quest' uomol
Non me ne beffo.
Fermarsi 1.
'La si 3 fermata molto tempo a Ber*
lino ? (Si S ella fermata.)
E rimasta Ella lungo tempo s
Berlino 1 (Siete voi rimasto.)
Non mi vi son fermato che trs
giorni.
Soggiornare 1. Stare*.
Ove soggiorna attuaimente II di L*4
signor fratello ?
Attuaimente.
Soggiorna a Firenze.
II 80ggiorno.
t Parigi d un bel soggiorna.
276
FIFTY-FOURTH LESSON.
After reading.
After cutting myself.
Oba. C. See fpr Lesson XL.
After dressing yourself.
After dressing himself.
After shaving ourselves.
After warming themselves.
( returned the book after reading it.
I threw the knife away after cutting
myself.
You went to the concert after dressing
yourself.
He went to the theatre after dressing
himself.
We breakfasted after shaving our-
selves.
They went out after warming them-
selves.
To return (to restore).
t Dopo aver letto.
t Dopo eseermi tagliato
t Dopo essersi vestita. (O assert
vestito.)
t Dopo essersi vestito.
t Dopo esserci sbarbati.
t Dopo essersi scaldati (riscaldati).
t Ho restituito il libro dopo averla
letto.
t Ho gettato il coltello dopo esserml
tagliato.
t Ella £ andata al concerto dopo es-
sersi vestita.
t Egli e" andato a teatro l dopo essersi
vestito.
t Abbiamo fatto colazione dopo esserci
sbarbati.
t Sono usciti dopo essersi scaldati.
The sick person (the patient).
Tolerably well.
It is rather late.
It is rather far.
Restituire 3.
II malato. L' infermo.
Mediocremente (abbastanza beneX
E molto tardi.
E molto lontano
EXERCISES.
167.
How is /our father (il di Lei signor padre) ? — He is (only) so-
so (cost cost). — How is your patient ? — He is a little better to-day
than yesterday (d' ieri). — Is it long since you saw your brothers
(i di Lei signori fratelli) ? — I saw them two days ago. — How
art thou ? — I am tolerably well (abbastanza bene). — How long
has your cousin been learning French ? — He has been learning
1 There is a difference between andare al teatro, and andare a teatro. Th«
former determines the theatre we are going to, whilst the latter implies to go t«
the play merely. Ex. Vado al teatro reale, I am going to the royal theatre.
FIFTV -FOURTH LESSON. 271
it only these three months. — Does he already speak it? — He
already speaks, reads, and writes it better than your brother, who
has been learning it these two years. — Is it long since you heard
of my uncle ? — It is hardly a fortnight (quindici giorni) since I
heard of him. — Where is he staying now ? — He is staying a
Berlin, but my father is in London. — Did you stay long at
Vienna ? — I stayed there a fortnight. — How long did your cousin
stay at Paris ? — He stayed there only a month. — Do you like to
speak to my uncle ? — I like much to speak to him, but I do not
like him to laugh (che si beffi, subj.) at me. — Why does he laugh
at you ? — He laughs at me, because I speak badly. — Why has
your brother no friends ? — He has none, because he criticises
every body. — Why are you laughing at that man ? — I do not
intend (non ho intenzione) to laugh at him. — I beg (pregare) you
not to do it, for you will break his heart if you laugh at him. —
Do you doubt what 1 am telling you ? — I do not doubt it. — Do
you doubt what that man has told you ? — I doubt it, for he has
often told stories (mentire). — Have you at last bought the horse
which you wished (che voleva) to buy last month ? — I have not
bought it, for I have not been able to procure money.
, 168.
Has your uncle at last bought the garden ? — He has not bought
it, for he could not agree about the price (nelprezzo). — Have you
at last agreed about the price of that picture ? — We have agreed
about it. — How much have you paid for it ? — I have paid fifteen
nundred (mille cinque cento) francs for it. — What hast thou bought
to-day ? — I have bought two fine horses, three beautiful pictures,
and a fine gun. — For how much hast thou bought the pictures 1
— I have bought them for seven hundred francs. — Do you find
them dear ? — I do not find them dear. — Have you agreed with
your partner ? — I have agreed with him (con lui). — Does he con-
sent to pay you the price of the ship ? — He consents to pay it me.
— Do you consent to go to France ? — I consent to go there. — Have
you seen your old friend again (rivedere *) 1 — I have seen him
again. — Did you recognize him ? — I could hardly (non V ho quasi
mu) recognize him, for, contrary to his custom, he wears a large
\iat. — How is he? — He is very well. — What garments does he
278 FIFTY-FOURTH LESSON.
wear?— «He wears beautiful new garments. — Have you taker
notice of what your boy has done ? — I have taken notice of it.—
Have you punished him for it ? — I have punished him for it. — Haa
your father already written to you ? — Not yet ; but I expect to
receive (mi attendo) a note from him to-day. — Of what do you
complain ? — I complain of not being able to procure some money.
—Why do these poor men complain ? — They complain because
they cannot procure any thing to eat. — How are your parents ?
— They are as usual (come alsolito) very well. — Is your uncle,
well ? — He is better than he usually is (del solito). — Have you
already heard of your friend who is in Germany ? — I have already
written to him several times (parecchie voile) ; however (ma), he
has not answered me yet.
169.
What have you done with the books which the English captain
has lent you ? — I have returned them to him, after reading them.
— Have you thrown away your knife ? — I have thrown it away
after cutting myself. — When did I go to the concert ? — You went
thither after dressing yourself. — When did your brother go to the
ball ? — He went thither after dressing himself. — When did you
breakfast ? — We breakfasted after shaving ourselves. — When did
our neighbours go out ? — They went out after warming them-
selves.— Why have you punished your boy ? — I have punished
him because he has broken my finest glass. — I gave him some
wine, and instead of drinking it, he spilt it on the new carpet, and
broke (e ha rotto) the glass. — What did you do this morning ? —
I shaved after rising, and went out after breakfasting. — What did
your father do last night (ieri sera) ? — He supped after going to
the play, and went to bed after supping. — Did he rise early ?—
He rose at suarise. (See end of Lesson XXIV.)
FIFTY- FIFTH LESSON
Lezione cinquantesima quinta.
FEMININE SUBSTANTIVES AND ADJECTIVES
DECLENSION OF THE ARTICLE FEMININE.
l«he \ Singular.
I Plural,
Nom.
La,
Le,
Gen.
della,
delle,
Dal.
alia,
alio,
Ace.
la,
»e,
dalla.
dalle.
EXAMPLE.
The house
X the house
To the house
The house
From the house
the houses,
of the houses,
to the houses.
the houses,
from the houses.
Nom.
Gen.
Dal.
Ace.
Sing.
Lacasa
Delia casa
Alia casa
La casa
Abl. Dalla casa
Phtr.
Le case.
Delle cast
Alle case.
Le case.
Dalle case
The contraction of the feminine article with certain prepositions is as follow*
(See Lesson XLIV.)
Singular. PluraL
Delia, of the, for di la. Delle, for di le.
Alia, to the, — a la. Alle, — . ale.
Dalla, from the, — da la. Dalle, — dale.
Nella, in the, — in la. Welle, — inle.
Colla, with the, — eon la. Colle, — con le.
Pella, for the, — per la. Pelle, — per le.
Sulla, upon the, — tula. Sulle, — rule.
Obs A When the definite article stands before a vowel, it is in the singula,
alike for both genders, and in the plural the feminine article does not vary, as ;
Nom. Gen. Dot. Ace. Abl.
. L», dell', all', 1', daU\
Le, delle, alle, bj dalle.
The j &"&*»■>
I Plural,
Ob*. B. The plural of the article la is never abridged, except, however, wbei
to noun begins with an e, as :
19
380
vIFTY-FIFTH LESSON.
The eloquence.
The eminence.
The execution.
Of the eminences, of the executions.
Oba C. When, however, the noun beginning with c has in the plural th,
i&me termination as in the singular, the article cannot be abridged. Ex.
Sing.
U eloquenza,
L' eminenza,
L' esecuzione,
Dell' eminenze.
Plur.
V eloquenze.
1' eminenze.
Y esecuzioni.
dell' esecuzioni
Sing.
Plur.
The image.
L' efBgie,
Le effigie.
The emphasis.
L' enfasi,
Le enfasi.
Ecstasy
L' estasi,
Le estasi.
The age.
L' eta,
Le eta.
The extremity.
L' estremit&,
Le estrem
Rule i. — Nouns and adjectives ending in a are feminine l, and form theii
plural in changing a into e Ex.
The woman — women.
The table.
The shoe.
The stocking.
The pencil.
The stone.
The brush.
The broom.
The pistol.
The daughter.
The sister.
The candle.
The bottle.
Sing.
La donna,
La tavola,
La Scarpa.
La calza,
La matita,
La pictra,
La spazzola,
La scopa,
La pistola,
La figlia,
La sorella,
La candela,
La bottiglia,
Plur.
le donne.
le tavole.
le scarpe.
le calze.
le matite.
le pietre.
le spazzole
le scope,
le pistole,
le figlie.
le sorelle.
le candele.
le bottiglie.
1 From this rule must be excepted some nouns of dignity and of professions
belonging to men, and some nouns derived from the Greek, such as
Sing.
II papa,
II clima,
II diadema
II diploma,
I! dogma (or domma),
II dramma,
L' enigma (or enimma),
L' idioma
II poema,
II tema
the pope,
the climate,
the diadem,
the diploma
the doctrine,
the drama,
the enigma)
the idiom,
the poem,
the exercise
Plar.
i papi.
i climi.
i diademi.
i diplomi.
i dogmi (or domml).
i drammi.
gl' enigmi (or enimmi)
gl' idiomi.
i poemi.
i temi, Ac.
JIFTY-FIFTH LESSON.
28 J
The shift.
fhe amiable woman.
The straight stocking.
The barbarous law.
The soul.
The island.
The shade.
Sing.
La camicia,
La donna ama-
bile,
La Scarpa stretta,
La legge barbara,
L' anima,
L' isola,
L' ombra,
Ptur.
le camicie.
le donne amabit
le scarpe strette
le leggi barbare
le anime.
le isole.
le ombre.
Rul* 2. — All nouns and adjectives, masculine and feminine, terminated in
iorm their plural in i. Ex.
Sing.
Plur.
The mother.
La madre,
le madri.
The key.
La chiave,
le chiavi.
The invention.
L' invenzione,
le invenzionl
The uut.
La noce,
le noci.
Rule 3. — Nouns ending in t, i«, an accented vowel, and monosyllables, hav«
01 the plural the same termination as in the singular. Ex.
Sing.
Plur.
The u etropolis.
La metropoli,
le metropoli.
The cnsis.
La crisi,
le crisi.
The f<w>t— feet.
11 pie* (or piede).
i pie (or piedi)
The k»ng.
lire,
i re.
The cane (a bird).
Lagru,
le gru.
The t«wn.
La citta,
le citta.
Virtu*.
La virtu,
le virtu.
Ordw — series.
La eerie,
le serie.
Sort— species.
La specie,
le specie.
Obs. O La moglie, the wife, is in the plural le mogli, wives.
Reus 4. Nouns and adjectives, masculine and feminine, terminated in r$
?*, 00 or #o, generally take an h in the plural to keep the hard sound. Ex.
The sleeve.
The witch.
The monarch.
The wood or forest.
The lake.
The inn.
The refreshment.
Rich.
Sing.
La manica,
La Strega,
II monarca,
II bosco,
II lago,
L' albergo
II rinfresco,
Ricco,
Plur.
le maniche.
le streghe.
i monarchi.
i boschi.
i laghi.
gli albergiu
i rinfreschi
ricchi
283
FIFTY-FIFTH LESSON.
Ancient.
The parish-priest.
The obligation.
The punishment.
Antico,
II parroco,
U obbligo,
11 castigo,
fcutichi.
i parrochi.
gli obblighi
i castighi.
Obs. E. All feminine nouns terminated in ca and ga take, without 3\
eeption, an h in the plural. Ex.
Sing. Plur.
The female friend.
The league.
L' arnica,
La lega,
le amiche.
le leghe, 4c.
The following masculine nouns are a few of the exceptions to the abors
mle :—
The physician. II medico,
The friend.
The monk.
The hog.
The Greek.
Asparagus.
L' amico,
II monacc,
II porco,
II Greco,
L' asparago,
i medici.
gli amici.
i monaci.
i porci.
i Greci.
gli asparagi.
Rule 5. — Some maculine nouns form their pluial in a, and become feminine ,
others have a masculine plural in i, and a feminine plural in a, of which tho
latter is most in use.
a) The following masculine nouns always form their plural in o :—
A thousand.
A hundred.
An egg.
A mile.
A pair.
A bushel.
A sort of measure.
6) The following have
ised in preference : —
The ring.
The arm.
The gut.
The heel.
The castle.
The eye-brow.
Theb rn.
The finger.
The thread,
The basis.
The fruit*.
Siyig.
Plur.
Un migliaio,
le migliaia.
Un centinaio,
le centinaio.
Un uovo,
le uova.
Un miglio,
le miglia.
Un paio,
le paia.
Uno staio,
le staia.
Un moggio,
le moggia.
i a feminine plural
, but the latter if
Sing.
Plur.
L' anello,
le anella.
11 Draccio,
le braccia.
11 budello,
le budella.
11 calcagno,
le calcagna.
11 castello,
'e castella.
11 ciglio,
le ciglia.
11 corno,
le coma.
Ildito,
le dita.
Ilfilo,
lefila.
Ufondamento,
le fondamenta.
11 frutto,
le frutta.
» II frutto is employed for fruit in general* but la fnttta and UJrutU fat
temexx fruit only.
PIFTY-FIFTH LESSON.
283
Sing.
Phtr.
The spindle.
11 fuso,
•efusa.
The action •.
11 gesto,
le gesta.
The knee.
11 ginocchio,
le ginocchia
The elbow4.
11 gomito,
le gomita.
The cry.
11 grido,
le grida.
The lip.
11 labbro,
le labbra.
The wood *
11 legno,
le legna.
The sheet.
11 lenzuolo,
le lenzuola
The limb«.
11 membro,
le membra.
The wall *.
11 muro,
lemura.
The bone.
L' osso,
le ossa.
Ilie apple.
11 porno,
le poma.
The arrow.
11 quadrello,
le quadrella.
The laughter.
11 riso,
lerisa.
The sack.
11 sacco,
le sacca.
The shriek.
Lo stride,
le strida.
CONTINUATION OF THE FIFTY-FIFTH LESSON.
Continuazione delta Lezione cinquantesima quinta.
Sing. Phtr.
Ella — elleox eUeno.
Essa — esse.
Dessa — desse (See Table of ihc
Personal Pronouns,
Lesson XX.).
Obs A. In the plural, elleno, esse, and desse, are more frequently used than
She — they.
tie.
Has she 1
She has.
She has not.
Ha dessa 7
Essa ha.
Essa non ha.
» II gesto means also gesture, and then its plural is gesti.
* II gomito is also a measure, and its plural is then t gomiti.
• II legno means wood for timber, or any thing else : but wood tor fuel if
i legna and le legna.
• Membro, a member of an assembly, is in the plural i membrt.
* Muro, a rampart, is in the plural i muri.
284
FIFTY-FIFTH LESSOR.
Have they (feminine) 1
Theyjiave. "
They'have not. "
Hanno desse 1
Esse hanno.
Esse non hanno.
Norn,. Gen. Dot. Ace. Abl.
My, mine. Fern. Sing. La mia, della mia, alia mia, la mia, dalla mie
Thy, thine. " La tua, della tua, alia tua, la tua, dalla tua
Her, hers. " La sua, della sua, alia sua, la sua, dalla sua.
My. mine. Fern. Plur. Le mie, delle mie, alle mie, le mie, dalle mie
The father and his son, or hi*
daughter.
The mother and her son, or her
daughter.
The child and Us brother, or its
sister.
II padre e suo figlio, o sua figlia.
La madre e suo figlio, o sua figlia. •
II fanciullo e suo fratello, o sua so
rella.
Obs. B. See Rule, Lesson IV., about the possessive pronoun taking no arti-
cle in the singular, when it is immediately followed by a name of quality oi
kindred.
Rule I. — The English possessive adjectives or pronouns are in the gender ol
the possessor ; in Italian and French they must be in the gender of the thing
possessed. My, thy, his, her, its, must be expressed by il mio, il tuo, il sua,
when the thing possessed is masculine, and by la mia, la tua, la sua, when it ia
feminine, without considering in the least the gender of the possessor, as may
be seen from the above examples. .
My pen, my pens.
Thy letter, thy letters
His or her fork his or her forks.
Our nut, our nuts.
Your mouth, your mouths.
Their dow, their doors.
Their hand, their hands.
Rule 2. — All nouns terminated in o are masculine, except la mono, th«
hand. As for the poetical words imago and Cartago, they are abridged frorr.
imagine, image, Cartagine, Carthage, and are of course feminine.
Plur
le vezzose
donne.
Sing.
La mia penna,
La tua lettera,
La sua forchetta,
La nostra noce,
La vostra bocca,
La loro porta,
II loro uscio,
La loro mano,
Plur.
le mie penne
le tue lettere.
le sue forchetto
le nostre noci.
le vostre bocche
le loro porte.
i loro usci.
le loro mani.
The pretty woman,
The small candle
fhe Urge bo'tle,
the pretty wo-
men.
the small can-
dles.
the large bot-
tles
Sing.
La vezzosa donna,
La piccola candela,
La candeletta.
La gran bottiglia.
le piccole
candele.
le candelette
le grandi bot
tigli*
FIFTY-FIFTH LESSON.
28£
Sing.
Which woman ? which women ? Che donna 7
Wiich daughter ? which daughters 7 Che figlia 7
Quale, Sing.
Plur.
che donne 1
che figlie ?
Quali, Piut
This or that woman, these or those
women.
Questa donna, queste donne
Tfcia young lady,
That young lady,
these young
ladies.
those young
ladies.
Questa signorina,
Quella signorina,
queste signo
rine.
quelle signo-
rme.
The rignt hand.
The left hand.
I have a sore hand.
My hand hurts me.
My hand aches.
The tooth, the teeth.
Have you the toothache?
I have the headache.
I feel a pain in my side.
His feet are sore.
His feet ache.
The face.
La mano destra (dritta or diritta).
La mano manca (mancina).
Ho la mano malata.
Mi fa male la mano.
II dente, i denti.
Tie fanno male i denti ?
Le dolgono i denti?
ft Ho male al capo. Mi duole \t
testa,
t Mi'fa male il capo. Mi fa male U
testa.
Ho male a un lato.
Egli ha male ai piedi.
Ha i piedi che gli fan male.
The cheek.
The tongue, the language.
The window.
The street.
The town.
The linen.
The old woman, the little old woman.
le facce, i
i void,
le guance 8.
le lingue.
le flnestre.
le contrade.
le citta.
le tele.
visi.
La faccia, il viso,
il volto,
La guancla,
La lingua,
La finestra,
La contrada,
La citta,
La tela,
La vecchia donna, le vecchie donne
La vecchie tta le vecchiette
(vecchierella). (vecchierelle).
Ob$. C. From what precedes, it may be seen that Italian adjectives ter-
iiinate either in o or e. The adjectives in o, which form their masculine plural
8 Feminine words, ending in cio, gia, scia, reject in the plural me letter t, as
ux guancia, plur. le guance ; la tpiaggia, the coast ; plur. le spiagge ; la coscia.
the thigh ; plur. le coscc : except, however, where t has the accent. Ex. k
hugia, the lie ; plur. le bugie.
886
FIFTY-FIFTH LESSEN.
In t, are made feminine oy rtvi rising their termination Into
and into e for the plural. Those terminated in e are of both
their plural in changing e into t. Ex.
An industrious
boy,
An industrious
young woman,
An amiable man,
Aa amiable wo-
man,
.ndustrious boys.
industrious young
women,
amiable men.
amiable women.
Un ragazzo at-
tivo,
Un ragazza at-
tiva,
Un uomo ama-
bile,
Una donna ama-
bile.
a for the singula*,
genders, and form
dei ragazzi attivL
delle ragazze at*
tive.
degli uomini ama«
bili.
delle donne amv
bili.
The room. La stanza, la camera.
The front room. t La camera verso strada.
The back room. t La camera verso corte.
The upper room. t La camera in alto (la camera al piar»«
supe'riore).
Oba. D. Adjectives terminated in ore, which are generally also substantives
♦hange for the feminine ore into trice. Ex.
Mat.
Fern.
Traitorous.
Traditore,
traditrice.
Enchanting.
Incantatore,
incantatrice.
Deceitful.
Ingannatore,
ingannatrice,
Avenging.
Vendicatore,
vendicatrice.
PARTITIVE ART
[CLE FEMININE.
Sing.
Phtr.
Some.
Norn, Delia, dell'
Delle.
Of some.
Gen. Di.
Di.
To some.
Dot. A della, a dell'. A delle.
Some.
Ace. Delia, dell'
Delle.
Sing.
Plur.
Some silk.
Della seta,
defle sete.
Some meat.
Della carne,
delle carni.
Some good soup
Della buona
zuppa,
delle buone zuppt
Bring lights.
Portate dei lumi.
Strike a light. 1
Fatemi lume.
INDEFINITE ART
ICLE FEMININE.
A, one.
Nom' J Una.
Ace. )
Geru D' una
Dti. Ad una.
Abl Da ana
FIFTY-FIFTH LESSON.
987
Una donna virtuosa.
Una ragazza attiva.
Una signorina felice.
Una gonna (veste) nuova.
Una proposizione spontanea.
Una donna muta.
Una buona verity
Una crudele certezza.
Una simile promessa.
Una antica conoscenza.
A virtuous woman.
An active young womaL
k happy young ladv
A new gown.
An ingenious proposal.
A dumb woman.
A good truth.
A cruel certainty.
Such a promise.
An old acquaintance.
Have you my pen ? Ha Ella la mia penna?
No, Madam, I have it not. No, Signora, non 1' ho.
Which bottles have you broken ] Che (quali) bottiglie ha Ella rotte?
Which door have you opened ? Che (qual) porta ha Ella aperta.
Which water have you drunk ? Che (quale) acqua ha Ella bevuu
or bevuta ?
Obs. E. With the auxiliary avtre the past participle may or may not agref
with the noun in gender and number, but it must always with the auxiliary
cstere.
Which letters have you written ?
Which windows have you opened ?
Which young ladies have you con-
ducted to the ball ?
Che (or quali) lettere ha Ella scn4t«
(or scritto) ?
Che (quali) finestre ha Ella aperte 1
Che (quali) signorine ha Ella cod
dotte al ballo 7
These.
Those.
Have you this pen or that ?
I have neither this nor that.
Queste or queste qui.
Quelle or quelle la.
Ha Ella questa penna, o quella 1
Non ho nd questa n£ quella.
It or her — them.
Do you see that woman?
[ see her.
Have you seen my sisters 1
No, my lady, I have not seen them
To her — to them.
Do you speak to my sisters ?
I speak to them.
Some coarse linen.
Some good water
A napkin, a towel.
La — le.
Vede Ella questa donna 1
La vedo.
Ha Ella vedute le mie sorelle?
No, signorina, non le ho redut*.
Le — loro.
Parla Ella alle mie sorelle f
Parlo loro.
Delia grossa tela.
Delia buon' acqua.
Una salvietta (un tovaglloio).
*88
FIFTY-FIFTH LESSON.
Some beautiful linen shirts.
Some fine silk stockings.
The Christian.
The Jew.
The negro.
A companion.
A friend.
To celebrate, to feast.
Do you wish to go to Spaia ?
Have you paper to write a letter?
Delie belle camicie * di tela.
Deile belle calze di seta.
II Cristiano. Fern, la Cristiana
L' Ebreo, " V Ebrea.
II nero, il negro, " la nera, u
negra.
Uncompagno, " una cos
pagna.
Un amico, " un' arnica.
Celebrare 1. Festeggiare 1.
Vuol Ella andar in Ispagna ?
Ha Ella della carta per iscrivere una
lettera 1
Obt. F. Of two werds, the first of which ends in n or r, and the second
begins with a, followed by a consonant, the letter i is prefixed to the second.
I have some to write one.
Who does not study does not learn.
What have you found in the street 1
A book to study Italian.
Ne ho per iscriverne una.
Chi non istudia non impara.
Che ha Ella trovato per istrada?
Un libro per istudiare 1' italiano.
EXERCISES.
170.
How are your brothers ? — They have been very well for these
few days. — Where do they reside ? — They reside in Paris.—
Which day of the week do the Turks celebrate ? — They celebrate
Friday (il venerdi), but the Christians celebrate Sunday (la do-
menica), the Jews Saturday, and the negroes their birthday (il
giorno della loro nascita). — " Amongst you country people (Fra
voi altre genii della campagna) there are many fools, are there not
(non e vero) '?" asked (domando) a philosopher lately (V altro gi-
orno) of a peasant (ad un contadino). — The latter answered (m-
vose) : " Sir, they are to be found (se ne trovano) in all stations
(gli stati)." — " Fools sometimes tell the truth (la verild)," said
(disse) the philosopher. — Has your sister my gold ribbon ? — She
has it not. — What has she ? — She has nothing. — Has your mother
any thing ? — She has a fine gold fork. — Who has my large bot-
_• In eamicia the letter i is not suppressed in the plural, to prevent mistaking
tt for cornice, a priest's garment. (See note 8. p. 286.)
FIFTY- FIFTH LESSOW. 289
*
le ? —Your sister has it. — Do you see sometimes m/ mother ? —
i see her often. — When did you see your sister ? — I saw her a
fortnight ago. — Who has my fine nuts ? — Your good sister has
them — Has she also my silver forks ? — She has them not. — Whc
has them ? — Your mother has them. — What fork have you ? — 1
have my iron fork. — Have your sisters had my pens ? — Thev
have not had them, but I believe that their children have (abbiano*
subj.) had them. — Why does your brother complain ? — He com-
plains because his right hand aches. — Why do you complain ? —
I complain because my left hand aches.
171.
Is your sister as old {cost attempata) as my mother I — She is
not so old, but she is taller. — Has your brother purchased any
thing {fare delle compre) ? — He has purchased something (ne ha
fatto). — What has he bought ? — He has bought fine linen and
good pens. — Has he not bought some silk stockings ? — He has
bought some. — Is your sister writing ? — No, Madam, she is not
writing (non iscrive). — Why does she not write ? — Because she
has a sore hand. — Why does not the daughter of your neighbour
go out ? — She does not go out because she has sore feet. — Why
does not my sister speak ? — Because she has a sore mouth. — Hast
thou not seen my silver pen ? — I have not seen it. — Hast thou a
front room ? — I have one behind, but my brother has one in the
front. — Is it an upper room ? — It is one (n' e una). — Does the
wife of our shoemaker go out already ? — No, my lady (signora>
no), she does not go out yet, for she is still very ill (essendo essa
ancor molto ammalata). — Which bottle has your little sister broken ?
— She broke the one (quettaj which my mother bought yesterday.
—Have you eaten of my soup or of my mother's ? — I have eaten
neither of yours nor your mother's (ne di quella di sua madre)*
but of that of my good sister. — Have you seen the woman who
was with me this morning ? — I have not seen her. — Has your
mother hurt herself? — She has not hurt herself. — Have you pa-
per to write a letter ? — I have some, but to whom must I write ?
—You must write to your mother's friend. — What has your sis-
ter to do ? — She has to write to her friend. — Why does she not
200 FIFTY-FIFTH LESSON.
i
write to hei ? — Because she has no pen to write to her.— Can she
not write with her pencil ? — She can write with it (con queUo),
but does not wish to do so (turn vuole),
172.
Have you a sore nose ? — I have not a sore nose, but I have the
tooth-ache. — Have you cut your finger ? — No, my lady, I have
cut my hand. — Will you give me a pen ? — I will give you one.
— Will you have this or that ? — I will have neither. — Which
(quale) do you wish to have ? — I wish to have that which your
sister has. — Do you wish to have my mother's good black silk (la
buona seta nera), or my sister's ? — I wish to have neither your
mother's nor your sister's, but that which you have. — Can you
write with this pen ? — I can write with it. — Each woman (ogni
donna) thinks herself amiable, and each (ciascuna) is conceited
(ha delV amor proprio). — The same as (del pari che) men, my
dear friend. Many a one (tat) thinks himself (si crede) learned
who is not so (non V c), and many men surpass women in vanity.
— What is the matter with you ? — Nothing is the matter with me.
— Why does your sister complain ? — Because she has a pain in
her cheek. — Has your brother a sore hand ? — No, but he feels a
pain in his side. — Do you open the window ? — I open it, because
it is too warm. — Which windows has your sister opened ? — She
has opened those of the front room. — Have you been At the ball
of my old acquaintance ? — I have been there. — Which young la-
dies did you take to the ball ? — I took my sister's friends there. —
Did they dance ? — They danced a good deal. — Did they amuse
themselves ? — They amused themselves. — Did they remain long
at the ball ? — They remained there two hours. — Is this youug
lady a Turk ? — No, she is a Greek. — Does she speak French ? —
She speaks it. — Does she not speak English ? — She speaks it, but
she speaks French better. — Has your sister a companion ? — She
has one. — Does she line her * — Sne likes her very much, for she
is very amiable.
FIFTY-SIXTH LESSON. x
Lezione cinquantesima sesta.
To go to the country
To be in the country.
To go to church.
To be at church.
To go to school.
To be at school.
To po to the Italian school.
To be at the Italian school.
To go to the dancing school.
To be at the dancing school.
To or at the bank.
To or at the exchange.
To or in the kitchen.
To or in the cellar.
The play (the comedy).
The opera.
The river.
The hunt.
The fishing.
To go a hunting.
To be a hunting.
To go a fishing.
To be a fishing.
To hunt
To fish.
The whole day, all the day.
The whole morning.
The whole evening.
The whole night, all the night.
The whole year.
The whole week.
The whole soeiety.
All at once.
Suddenly, all of a sudden.
Andare in or alia campagna,
Essere in — alia campagna.
Andare in — alia chiesa.
Essere in chiesa.
Andare in iscuolaor alia scuola
Essere in iscuola.
Andare alia scuola d' italiano.
Essere nella or alia scuola d' italtane
Andare alia scuola di ballo.
Essere nella scuola di ballo.
Alia banca.
Alia borsa.
In cucina.
In cantina.
La comedia,
L' opera.
II fiume.
La caccia.
La pesca.
Andar a (or alia) caccia.
Esser a (or alia) caccia
Andar a (or alia) pesca.
Esser a (or alia) pesca.
Cacciare 1.
Pescare 1.
Tutto il giorno (tutta la giomata).
Tutto il mattino (tutta la mattina)
Tutta la sera.
Tutta la notte (tutta notte).
Tutto 1' anno.
Tutta la settimana.
Tutta la societa.
( Tutto ad un tratto.
I Tutto in una volta.
Repentinamente (repente).
1 When the hunting is determined the article must be made use of, Ex
Andar o esser alia caccia del cervo, to go or be a stag-hunting ; andar o esser*
alia pesca deUeperle, del xrratto> to go or be a pearl or coral fishing.
292
riFT /-SIXTH LESSON.
This week.
This year.
Last week.
Next week.
Every woman.
Every time.
Every week.
Your mother.
Your sister.
Your sisters.
A person.
A word.
The ear-ache.
The nausea.
The belly-ache.
The stomach-ache.
She has the stomach-ache.
His sister has a violent head-ache.
I have the stomach-ache.
' Questa settimana.
Quest' anno.
La settimana scorsa (paf.sata).
La settimana ventura (prossima>
Tutte le donne, ogni donna.
Tutte le volte, ogni volta.
Tutte le settimane, ogni settimana
La di Lei signora madre.
La di Lei signora sorella.
Le di Lei signore sorelle
Una persona.
Una parola.
11 male agli orecchi
La nausea.
II mal di ventre.
II mal di stomaco.
t Ella ha un dolore alio stomaco.
t Sua sorella ha un mal di testa
lento,
t Ho male di stomaco.
7l«
Our or ours, your or yours, ) . ^cm ^^ ^ K La nostra, la vostra, la loro-
their or theirs, * <
Thy or thine, his, her, or > ijmu ^.^ j Le tue, le sue.
hers, its, >
iir or ours
their or theirs,
Our or ours, your or youis, )
Le nostre, le vostre, le loro.
Have you my pen or hers ?
1 have hers.
What do you wish to send to your
aunt?
( wish to send her a tart.
Will you send her some fruit also 1
I will send her some.
Have you sent the books to my
sisters 1
I have sent them to them.
The ache.
The tart.
The peach.
Ha Ella la mia penna, o la sua ?
Ho la sua.
Che vuol Ella mandare alia di LeJ
zia?
Voglio mandarle una torta.
Vuol mandarle anche delle frutta 1
Voglio mandargliene (inviargliem 1.
Ha Ella inviato i libri alle ink
sorelle ?
Li ho inviati loro.
II dolore.
La torta.
La peace.
FIFTY -SIXTH LESSON,
399
La fragola.
La ciliegia.
II giornale.
La gazzetta.
La mercanzia.
La cameriera.
Some substantives have the same termination for both gender?
The strawberry.
The cherry.
The newspaper.
The gazette.
The merchandise.
The goods.
The maid-servant.
Ob* A
and are only distinguished by the article, such as :
The husband. II consorte, or, il marito.
The wife.
The heir.
The heiress.
The nephew
The niece.
The relation.
The female relation.
Obs B
La consorte, or, la moglie.
L' erede.
L' erede.
II nipote.
La nipote.
II parente.
La parente, Ac.
Others change their masculine ending o into a, such as :
The uncle,
The cousin
The brother-in
law,
The cook,
The neighbour,
The laa,
The heathen,
a peasant,
the aunt,
the sister-in-law.
the female-cook.
the female-neigh-
bour,
the lass.
a country-woman.
Masculine.
Lo zio,
II cugino,
II cognato,
II cuoco,
II vicino,
II giovinetto,
Iipagano,
( Un contadino,
\ Un paesano,
Feminine.
la zia.
la cugina.
la cognata.
la cuoca.
la vicina.
la giovinetta.
la pagana.
una contadina
una paesana, A*.
Ob. C. Substantives (the same as adjectives, preceding Lesson) terminate*'
o tore, are generally made feminine by changing tore into trice. Ex.
The accuser.
The actor.
The ambassador.
The benefactor.
The hunter.
The elector.
The emperor.
The founder
The protector
The painter.
The author.
The victor.
The conqueror.
Masculine.
L' accusatore,
L' attore,
L' ambasciatore,
II benefattore,
II cacciatore,
L' elettore,
L' imperatorc,
II tondatore,
II protettore,
II pittore,
L' autore,
Ilvincitore.
II conquistatore,
Ac.
Feminine.
V accusatrice.
1' attrice.
1' ambasciatrice.
la benefattrice.
la cacciatrice.
1' elettrice.
P imperatrice.
la fondatrice.
la protettrice.
la pittrice.
1' autrice.
la vincitrice.
la conquistatnee,
J94
FIFTY-SIXTH LESSON.
06*. D. Some have a distinct form for individuate of the female mi
such as:
Masculine.
Peminint.
The abbot.
V abate.
abbadessa (la ba>
dessa).
The baron.
11 barone,
la baronessa.
The shepherd.
11 pastore,
la pastorella.
The canon.
11 canonico,
la canonichessa
The singer.
11 cantante,
la cantatrice.
The count
11 conte,
la contessa.
God.
Dio or Iddio.
The god.
11 dio,
la dea.
The duke.
Ilduca,
la duchessa.
The lion.
11 leone,
la leonessa.
r 11 marchese,
la marchess.
The marquis.
< Plur. I raar-
v chesi,
Plur. Le marchese.
The prince.
11 principe,
la principessa.
The peacock.
11 pavone,
la pagonessa.
The prior.
11 priore,
la priora.
The king.
lire,
la regina,
The poet.
11 poeta,
la poetessa.
The philosopher.
11 filosofo,
la filosofessa.
The merchant
11 mercante,
la mercantessa,
The landlord.
L' oste,
1' ostessa.
The cock.
11 gallo,
la gallina.
The elephant
L' elefantfe,
1' elefantessa.
The dog.
11 cane,
la cagna.
The prophet.
11 profeta,
la profetessa.
The lord mayor.
11 podesta,
la podestessa (o6#).
The doctor.
11 dottore,
la dottoressa.
The manager.
11 fattore,
la fattoressa
The master.
11 padrone,
la padrona.
Ob*. E. The name* of trees are con
imonly masculine,
and the same wordi
irlth the feminine termination in a desi
gnate the fruits of the same trees. Ex
The chestnut-tree, the chestnut
11 castagno,
la castagna.
The cherry-tree, the cherry.
11 ciliegio, or
la ciliegia, or
ciriegio,
ciriegia.
The pear-tree, the pear.
11 pero,
lapera.
The plum-tree, the plum.
11 prugno,
la prugna.
The walnut-tree, the walnut.
11 noce,
la noce.
The following, however, are always masculine, and designate the tree as well
as the fruit : RJlco, the fig-tree, and the fig; ileedro, the citron-tree, and citron;
Udattero, the date-tree, and the date; U porno, the apple-tree, and the apple.
Obs, P. Of the names of animals several become feminine by changing a
Into o, as : U cavallo, the horse ; la cavaUa, the mare ; U gattot the cat ; la gotta.
he she-cat Ac.
FIFTY-SIXTH LESSON.
295
Others have for each gender particular denominations, as , il frue, the oz ; la
caeca, the cow ; U becco, the buck ; la capra, the goat ; il montane, the ram ; la
pecora, the sheep, &c.
Others again, though they are used for both genders, are always mascuhno.
a»:il tordo, the thrush; il corvo, the raven; lo acarafaggio, the beetle, &c.
Others again are always feminine, as : la rondinc, the swallow ; la pantera, the
panther ; la vipera, the viper ; F anguilla, the eel. Finally, there are some
which it is indiiferent to make masculine or feminine, such as : U or la lepre
he hair ; il or la serpe, the serpent, &c.
( Prendere in affitto (or a pi-
< gione).
v Prendere a nolo.
C Affittare 1, or dar in affitto (or
\ a pigione).
v Dare a nolo.
Ha Ella gia preso a pigione una
camera 7
To hire.
To let.
Have you already hired a room 1
To admit or grant a thing. )
To confess a thing. S
Do you grant that 1
I do grant it.
Do you confess your fault 1
1 confess it.
I confess it to be a fault
To confess, avow own, acknowledge.
So much.
jhe has so many candles that she can-
not burn them all.
Convenire * di qualche cosa.
Conviene Ella di cid (or in cid) ?
Ne convengo.
Conviene Ella del di Lei error* 1
Ne convengo.
Convengo ch' $ un errore.
Confessare 1.
Tanto.
Ella ha tante candele che non
consumarle tutte.
pud
To catch a cold.
To make sick.
f you eat so much it will make you
sick.
Does it suit you to lend your gun 1
it does not suit me to lend it.
't does not suit me.
•Vhere did you catch a cold 1
caught a cold in going from the
opera* *0
Rajfreddarsi 1. InfreddarH 1.
Rendere malato.
Se Ella mangia troppo cid La ren-
dera malata.
Le conviene di prestare il di Lei
schioppo ?
Non mi conviene prestarlo.
Non mi conviene.
Ovesi £ Ellaraffreddatal
Mi son raffreddato nel sortire dai
teatro dell' opera.
296 FIFTY-SIXTH LESSON.
To have a cold.
The cold.
The cough.
I have a cold.
You have a cough.
The brain.
The chest
Esser raffreddato (or infreddato).
U raffreddore (1' infreddatura).
La tosse.
Ho un infreddatura di testa.
Ella ha la tosse.
II cervello.
II petto
EXERCISES.
173.
Where is your cousin ? — He is in the kitchen. — Haa your cook
(fem.) already made the soup ? — She has made it, for it is already
upon the table. — Where is your mother ? — She i«s at church. — Is
your sister gone to school ? — She is gone thitner. — Does your
mother often go to church ? — She goes thither every morning and
every evening. — At what o'clock in the morning does she go to
church ? — She goes thither as soon as she gets up. — At what
o'clock does she get up ? — She gets up at sunrise. — Dost thou go
to school to-day ? — I do go thither. — What dost thou learn at
school ? — I learn to read, write, and speak there. — Where is your
aunt ? — She is gone to the play with my little sister. — Do your
sisters go this evening to the opera ? — No, Madam, they go to the
dancing-school. — Do they go to the French school ? — They go
thither in the morning, but not in the evening, — Is your father
gone a hunting? — He has not been able to go a hunting, for he
has a cold. — Do you like to go a hunting ? — I like to go a Ashing
better than a hunting (che non a caccia). — is your fathei still in
the country ? — Yes, Madam, he is still there. — What is he doing
there ? — He goes a hunting and a fishing. — Did you hunt in the
country ? — I hunted the whole day. — How long did you stay with
my mother ? — I stayed with her the whole evening. — Is it long
since you were at the castle ? — I was there last week. — Did you
find many people there ? — I found only three persons there ; the
count, the countess, and their daughter.
174.
Are these girls as good (savio) as their brothers ? — They are
better than they. — Can your sisters speak German ? — They can
FIFTY -SIXTH LESSON. 297
not* but they are learning it. — Have you brought any thing to
your mother ? — I have brought her some fine fruit and a fine
tart. — What has your niece brought you ? — She has brought us
good cherries, excellent strawberries, and very good peaches. —
Do you like peaches ? — I like them much. — How many peaches
has your neighbour (fern.) given you ? — She has given me more
than twenty. — Have you eaten many cherries this year ? — I have
yaten many — Did you give any to your little sister ? — I gave
her so many that she cannot eat them all. — Why have you not
given any to your good neighbour (fern.) ? — I wished to give her
some, but she would not take any, because she does not li*e
cherries. — Were there many pears last year ? — There were not
many. — Has your cousin (fern.) many strawberries ? — She i.as
so many that she cannot eat them all.
175.
Why do your sisters not goto the play ? — They cannot go thither
because they have a cold, and that makes them very ill. — Where
did they catch a cold ? — They caught a cold in going from the
opera (nelV uscire dal teatro delV opera) last night. — Does it suit
your sister to eat some peaches ? — It does not suit her to eat any,
for she has already eaten a good many, and if she eats so much
it will make her ill. — Did you sleep well last night ? — I did not
sleep well, for my children made too much noise (il rumore) in
my room. — Where were you last night ? — I was at my brother-
ln-law's — Did you see your sister-in-law ? — I saw her.— rllow i&
ihe ?— She is better than usual (meglio del solito). — Did you
play ? — We did not play, but we read some good books ; for my
sister-in-law likes to read better than to play. — Have you read
the gazette to-day ? — I have read it. — Is there any thing new in
ft ? — I have not read any thing new in it. — Where have you been
•ince I saw you ? — I have been at Vienna, Paris, and Berlin. —
Did you speak to my aunt ? — I did speak to her. — What does she
say ? — She says that she wishes to see you. — Where have you
put my pen? — I have put it upon the bench. — Do you intend to
see your niece to-day ? — I intend to see her, for she has promised
me to din* with us. — I admire (ammirare) that family (lafamigha),
298 FIFTY-SIXTH LESSON.
for the father is the king and the mother is the queen of it. The
children and the servants are the subjects (il suddito) of the state
(lo stato). The tutors of the children are the ministers (il minis-
tro) who share (dividere *) with the king and the queen the care
(la curd) of the government (il governo). The good education
(V educazixme) which is given to children is the crown (la zorona)
of monarchs (il monarca, plur. ?).
176.
Have you already hired a room ? — I have already hired one. —
Where have you hired it ? — I have hired it in William-street
(nella contrada .Guglielmo), number one hundred and fifty-two. —
At whose house (da chi) have you hired it ? — At the house of the
man whose son has sold you a horse. — For whom has your father
hired a room 1 — He has hired one for his son, who has just
arrived from France. — Why have you not kept your promise (la
promessa) ? — I do not remember what I promised you. — Did you
not promise us to take us to the concert last Tuesday ? — I confess
that I'was wrong in promising you ; the concert, however (pure),
has not taken place. — Does your brother confess his fault ? — He
confesses it. — What does your uncle say to (di) that note ? — He
says that it is written very well, but he admits that he has been
wrong in sending it to the captain. — Do you confess your fault
now ? — I confess it to be a fault. — Where have you found my
coat ? — I have found it in the blue room. — Will you hang my hat
on the tree ? — I will hang it thereon (appendervelo). — How are
you to-day ? — I am not (won isto) very well. — What is the mattei
with you ? — I have a violent headache and a cold (una infredda.
tura di testa). — Where did you catch a cold ? — I caught it latf
night in coming (nell uscire) from the pity.
FIFTY-SEVENTH LESSON.
Lezione dnquantesima settima.
OF THE PRESENT PARTICIPLE.
The present participle is in Italian formed from the infinitive by changing
Cor the first conjugation, are into ando, and for the two others ere and ire inU
tndo.1 Ex.
To speak, — speaking.
To sell, — selling.
To serve, — serving.
1. Parlor*, — parlando.
2. Vender*, — xendendo.
3. Servtre, — servendo
To have, — naving.
To be, — being.
Av«r«, — avendo.
Essere, — essendo.
Ob». A. This form of the verb is not so often used in Italian as in English,
for whenever it is used in English after a preposition it is rendered in Italian
by the infinitive. (See fjT Lessons XL. and XLIV.) Moreover, it is often
substituted by the infinitive with one of the prepositions a, con, in, nel, as
colamprare, in buying; nd, vender e, in selling; nel servire, in serving. Ex.
In teaching one learns.
He was drowned in pasting the river.
In seeing him 1 judged that he was not
satisfied.
Having come too late he found no
more room.
To be drowned. To pass the river.
To infer.
Found.
ColP insegnare s' impara.
Egli si & annegato nel ralicare ii
fiume.
Al vederlo argomentai che non era
contento.
Per e»ser venuto tardi non trovd pitt
potto.
Annegarsi. Valicare il fiume.
Argomentare (argomentai is its pre-
terite definite).
Trovai (is the preterite definite of
trovart).
1 There is another present participle, which is also formed from the infinitive,
and terminates for the first conjugation in ante, and for the two others in ente,
as : parlante, speaking ; vendente, selling ; aervente, serving. It is not much
used in Italian, and in its stead the present or imperfect of the indicative is
iften employed.
/
soo
FIFTY-SEVENTH LESSON.
I tremble only in thinking of it.
I perceived it in reading the letter.
She gets a livelihood by spinning and
weaving.
In going out of the church.
Tremc solamente in pensarvi.
Me ne accorsi nel legger la lettera.
Ella si guadagna il vitto col filare «
col tessere.
All' uscir dalla chiesa.
Obs. B. Yet the present participle is used when an agent performs tw«
a :tions at the same time.
The man eats while running. L' uomo mangia correndo.
J correct while reading.
1 question while speaking.
You speak while answering me.
Correggo leggendo.
Interrogo parlando.
Ella parla rispondendomt.
Obe. C. The personal pronouns, the relative ne, and the local adverbs ci and
oij are joined to the present participle in the same manner as to the infinitive
(Oot. Lesson XVII.)
I read your exercises while correcting
them.
I question you while speaking to you.
You ride while fighting.
He fights while retiring.
You speak while dancing.
I extemporate while eating.
He walks while reading.
Leggo i di Lei temi correggendo/t.
La interrogo parlando/e
Ella cavalca battendost.
Egli si batte ritirandom
Ella parla danzando.
Improvviso mangiando
Passeggia leggendo.
Obs. D. When a certain continuation or succession of time is to be ex-
pressed, the present participle is made use of with the verbs andarty mandare,
ttarc, venire. Ex.
I am writing.
Thou art reading.
He is telling me.
He is telling me his misfortunes.
I am gathering flowers in my gardec
He was crying all day and all night.
'. was thinking of the things that had
just happened.
Her grief is consuming her by degrees.
Io $to scrivendo. .
Tu vai (or stai) leggendo.
Egli vien raccontandomi.
Egli eta raccontandomi le sue sven«
lure 2.
Vo cogliendo fiori nel mio giardino *
Ando gridando 4 tutto il giorno t
tutta la notte.
10 andava pensando alle cose acca-
dute s.
11 suo dolore la va etruggendo len-
tamente ®.
* Raccontare, to telL to relate ; la sventura} the misfortune.
* Coglierejioriy to gather flowers ; iljiore, the flower.
* Andd is the third person singular of the preterite definite of the verb andart
to go : gridare, to cry.
* Andava is the first person singular of the imperfect indicative of the verli
mdare ; accadute is the past participle in the plural feminine of the verb acca
ierc, to happen.
* Struggendo is the present participle of etruggere, to consume, to kill, tc
iMtrov
FIFTY-SEVENTH LESSON.
30i
They were descending slowly the hill.
I am beginning to perceive that 1 was
mistaken.
What I am doing now, thou wilt know
when it is time.
They were conversing together for an
hour, when ....
You are thinking.
J was perceiving.
He is saying.
What were you doing when I arrived ?
I wa dining.
To question.
The cravat.
The carriage.
The family.
The promise.
The leg.
The sore throat.
The throat.
f have a sore throat.
The meat.
Salt meat.
Fresh meat
Fresh beef.
Cool water.
The food (victuals).
The dish (mess)
Salt meats
Milk-food.
The traveller.
To triarchy to walk, to step,
have walked a good deal to-day.
Venivano scendcndo lentamente L
colle.'
Vado vedcndo che mi sono ingan-
nato.
Uuello che ora sto facendo, lo saprai
a suo tempo.
Se la stavano discorrendo insieme d#
un' ora, quando 8
Voi state pensando.
Io andava accorgendomi.
Egli ra dicendo.9
Che andatate (or ttavate) facendo
quando son giunto.10
Io pranzava (io stava pranzando).
Interrogate 1.
La cravatta.
La carrozza.
La famiglia.
La promessa.
La gamba.
II mal di gola.
La gola.
Mi fa mal la gola, or ho mal J
gola.
La came.
Came salata.
Came fresca.
Manzo fresco.
Acqua ffesca.
L' alimcmo.
La vivanda, il cibo.
Vivande salate.
II latticinio ) piur De. ,atticlnIl
Un latticinio >
II viaggiatore ; Jem. la viaggi&triee.
Camminare 1.
Ho camminato molto oggi.
T Venivano is the third person plural of the imperfect indicative of vemrt.
' Discorrcre, to converse.
» Dicendo is the present participle of dire, ro say.
10 Andatate is the second person plural of the imperfect indicative of andar^
and stavate is the same of stare. Giunto is the past participle of giungert, t«
*mve.
W>2
FIFTY-SEVENTH LESSON.
Obs E. Camminare must not be mistaken for passeggiare. The forme)
means to walk, and the latter to walk for pleasure. (Lesson XL1V.)
I have been walking in the garden
with my mother.
To walk or travel a mile — two miles.
To walk or travel a league — two
leagues.
To walk a step.
To take a step.
To go on a journey.
To make a speech.
A piece of business, an affair.
To transact business.
Ho passeggiato nel giardino co»
mia madre.
t Far un miglio — due miglia.
t Far una lega — due leghe.
t Far un passo.
t Far un passo (presso di).
t Far un viaggio.
Far un discorso.
Un af Fare ; plur. i : una f accenaa.
Far degli affari.
Tc meddle with something.
What are you meddling with 1
l am meddling with my own business.
That man always meddles with other
people's business.
[ do not meddle with other people's
business.
Others, other people.
He employs himself in painting.
The art of painting.
Chemistry.
The chemist.
The art.
Strange.
Surprising.
It is strange.
To employ one's self in.
To concern some one.
( Mischiarsi di qualche cosa.
( Immischiarsi di qualche cosa.
Di che si mischia Ella ?
Mi mischio de' miei propri affari
Quest' uomo s' immischia seroprt
negli affari degli altri.
Non m' irnmischio negli affari a)
trui.
Altrui.
Si occupa di pittura,
La pittura.
La chimica.
II chimico.
L' arte.
Strano.
Sorprendente.
E strano.
f Occuparsi di qualche cosa.
To look at some one.
i do not like to meddle with things
mat do not concern me
I*hat concerns nobody.
To concern one's self about -^
something.
To trouble one?s head about
something
Concernere, riguardare qual
cuno.
Riguardare qualcuno.
Non mi piace immischiarmi di cH
che non mi concerne.
Cid non riguarda nessuno.
Curarsi di qualche cosa, or
Prendersi cur a di qualche cosa
FIFTY-SEVENTH LESSON.
8UJJ
To attract.
I attract, thou att» act est, he attracts.
We, you, they att' act.
Loadstone attracts iron.
Her singing attracts me
To charm.
To encnant.
I am charmed with it.
The beauty.
The harmony.
The voice.
The power.
To repeat.
The repetition.
Hie commencement, beginning.
The wisdom.
Study.
The lord.
A good memory.
A memorandum.
The nightingale,
ill beginnings are difficult.
To create.
Creation.
The Creator.
The benefit, the benefactor
The fear of the Lord.
Heaven.
The earth.
The solitude
The lesson.
The goodness.
Flour, meal.
The mil .
p. part attrattc
attirato
Attrarre * 2
Attraere * 2
, Attirare 1,
Attraggo, attrai, attrae.
Attraiamo, attraete, attraggono
La calamita attrae (attira) 11 ferro
II suo canto m' attrae.
Incantare.
Dilettare.
Ne sono felice, ne sono incantato.
La oellezza.
L' armonia.
La voce.
La potenza, il potere.
Ripetere 2.
La ripetizione.
II principio.
La saviezza.
Lo studio.
II signore.
Una buona memoria.
Un memoriale, un promemoria, um
memoria.
11 rosignuolo, 1' usignuolo.
Tutti i principii sono difficili.
Creare 1.
La creazione.
II Creatore.
II benefizio, il benefattore; /am,
trice.
11 timore di Dio.
II cielo.
La terra.
La solitudine.
La lezione.
La bonta.
La farina.
II molino.
Ob$. F. We have seen (Lesson XLIV.) tha*. all reflective verbs are, ii
Italian as well as in French, conjugated with the auxiliary essere*, to be, \n
iheir compound tenses. There are besides some other verbs, which, in Italian,
ire likewise compounded with the auxiliary ewere*, to be, though they are no*
304
FIFTY-SEVENTH LESSON
effective, and generally take to have for their auxiliary in English The prift
:ipal are the following :
Togo.
To stop.
To arrive.
To decay.
To die.
To come in.
To be born.
To set out.
To go out.
To fall.
To come.
To become.
To disagree.
To intervene.
To attain.
To come back.
To happen.
Andare* 1.
Arrestarsi 1, fermarsi ..
Arrivare 1.
Decadere* 2.
Morire* 3, trapassare 1
Entrare 1.
Nascere* 2.
Partire 3.
Uscire* 3.
Cadere* 2.
Venire* 3.
Divenire* 3.
Diventare 1.
Non convenire* 3.
Intervenire* o
Perveniret 3
Ritornare 1, rinvenire* 3.
Sopraggiugnere* 2.
E venuta la di Lei madre 7
(las your mother come?
fjT The past participle of these verbs must agree in gender and numoer wlU
:he nominative of the verb essere*, ;o be.
She has not come yet.
Have the women already come?
I'hey have not come yet.
Has your sister arrived 7
Non & ancor venuta.
Sono gia arrivate le donne 7
Non sono ancor arrivate.
E arrivata la di Lei sorella 7
EXERCISES.
177.
Will you dine with us to-day ?— With much pleasure. — What
iave you for dinner (che ha Ella da pranzo) ? — We have good
soup, some fresh and salt meat, and some milk food. — Do you
like milk food ? — I like it better than (Li preferisco a) all other
food. — Are you ready to dine ? — I am ready. — Do you intend to
let out soon ? — I intend setting out next week. — Do you travel
alone (sola) ? — No, Madam, I travel with my uncle. — Do you
^ravelon foot or in a carrage ? — We travel in a carriage. — Did
you meet any one ii your last journey (nel di Lei ultimo viagpio)
PIFTY-SEVENTH LESSON. 806
jo Berlin ? — We met many travellers. — What do you intend to
spend your time in this summer ? — I intend to take a short (piccolo)
journey. — Did you walk much in your last journey ? — I like
much to walk, but my uncle likes to go in a carriage. — Did he
not wish to walk ? — He wished to walk at first (da principio), but
he wished to get into the coach after having taken a few 3tep*
( poifatti appena alcuni passi voile montar in legno), so that I did
not walk much. — What have you been doing at school to-day ?— -
We have* been listening to our professor. — What did he say ? —
He made a long speech on the goodness of God. After saying :
" Repetition is the mother of studies, and a good memory is a
great benefit of God," he said (egli disse), " God is the creator
of heaven and earth ; the fear of the Lord is the beginning of all
wisdom." — What are you doing all day in this garden 1 — I am
walking in it. — What is there in it that attracts you (che mai L'
atlira cola)1 — The singing of the birds attracts me (miviattrae).
— Are there nightingales in it ? — There are some in it, and the
harmony of their singing enchants me (mirapisce). — Have those
nightingales (forse gli usignuoli hanno) more power over you
(sopra di Lei) than painting, or the voice of your tender (tenero)
'mother, who loves you so much ? — I confess the harmony of the
singing of those little birds (di questi augellini) has more power
over me than the most tender words of my dearest friends.
178.
What does your niece amuse herself with in her solitude ? — She
reads a good deal, and writes letters to her mother. — What does
your uncle amuse himself with in his solitude ? — He employs him-
self in painting and chemistry. — Does he no longer do any busi.
ness ? — He no longer does any, for he is too old to do any. — Wh j
does he meddle with your business ? — He does not generally
(ordmariamente) meddle with other people's business, but he
meddles with mine, because he loves me. — Has your master made
you repeat your lesson to-day ? — He has made me repeat it. — Did
you know i< ? — 1 knew it pretty well (discretamente). — Have you
also done some exercises ? — I have done some, but, pray, what ia
that to you {ma che he fa questo, ne La prego) 1 — I do not gener
ally meddle with things that do not concern me, but I love you
300 FIFTY-EIGHTH LESSON.
so much that I concern myself much about (che to m9 interesst
molto a) what you are doing. — Does any one trouble his heac
(havvi alcuno che si cora) about you ? — No one troubles his head
about me, for I am not worth the trouble (non ne valgo la pena)
— Who corrects your exercises ? — My master corrects them. —
How (come) does he correct them ? — He corrects them in readir.g
them ; and in reading them he speaks to me. — How many things
(quante cose) does your master at the same time (in una volta) ?—
He does four things at the same time. — How so (come cid) ? — He
reads and corrects my exercises, speaks to me and questions me
all at once (al tempo stesso). — Does your sister sing (cantare) while
dancing ? — She sings while working, but she cannot sing while
dancing. — Has your mother left ? — She has not left yet. — When
will she set out ? — She will set out to-morrow evening. — At what
o'clock ? — At a quarter to seven. — Have your sisters arrived ? —
They have not arrived yet, but we expect them this evening. —
Will they spend (passare) the evening with us ? — They will spend
it with us, for they have promised me to do so. — W here have you
spent the morning ? — I have spent it in the country. — Do you gc
every morning to the country ? — I do not go every morning, but
twice a week. — Why has your niece not called upon me (venir <t
vedere qualcuno) ? — She is very ill, and has spent the whole day
in her room.
FIFTY-EIGHTH LESSON.
Lezione cinquantesima ottava.
OF THE PAST FUTURE.
The past or compound future is formed from the future of the auxiliary, an*
he past participle of the verb you conjugate Ex.
I shall have loved. I Avro amato.
Thou wilt have loved I Avrai amato.
FIFTY-EIGHTH LESSON.
801
He will have loved.
She will have loved.
We shall have loved.
You will have loved.
They will have loved.
i shall have come.
Thou wilt have come
He will have come.
She will have come.
We shall have come
Yoj will have come
They will have come.
8t<all have been praised.
Thou wilt have been praised.
He will have been praised.
She will have been praised.
We shall have been praised.
You will have been praised.
They will have been praised.
Egli avra ama. ».
Ella avra amato.
Avremo amato
Avrete amato.
Mat Eglino
Fern. Elleno
avrann» amato
Sard venuto
Sarai venuto.
Sara venuto.
Sara venuta.
Saremo venuti.
Sarete venuti.
Saranno venuti.
Saranno venute.
Fern, venuta.
" venuta.
Fern, venute.
" venute.
Sard stato lodato. Fern, stata lo
• data.
Sarai stato lodato. " stata lo
data.
Sara stato lodato.
Sara stata lodata.
Saremo stati lodati- Fern, state lo
date.
Sarete stati lodati. " state lo
date.
Saranno stati lodati.
Saranno state lodate
To have left.
When I have paid for the horse I shall
have only ten crowns left.
How much money have you left 1
I have one crown left.
I have only one crown left.
How much has your brother left ?
He has one crown left.
How much has your sister left %
She has only three sous left.
How much have your brothers left ?
They have one gold sequin left.
When they have paid the tailor, they
will have a hundred Italian livres
ML
t Rimanere* 2.
Quando avrd pagato il cavallo non
mi rimarranno che dieci scudi.
Quanto danaro Le rimane 1
Mi rimane uno scudo.
( Non mi rimane che uno scudo.
( Mi rimane solamente uno scudo.
Quanto rimane al di Lei fratello 1
Gli rimane uno scudo.
Quanto rimane alia di Lei sorella 7
Non le rimangono che tre soldi.
Quanto rimane ai di Lei fratelli?
Rimane Loro uno zecchino d' oro.
Quando avranno pagato il sartors
resteranno loro cento lire italiane.
308
FIFTY-EIGHTH LESSON.
Obs, In English the present, or the compound of the present, is use*
after the conjunctions : when, as soon as, or after, when futurity is to be ex-
pressed ; but in Italian, as well as in French, the future must in such instance!
always be employed. Ex.
When I am at my aunt's, will you
come to see me ?
After you have done writing, will you
take a turn with me 7
Vou will play when you have finished
your exercise.
What will you do when you have
dined?
When I have dined, I will take a turn
with my sister in the garden of the
marchioness.
Whe.i I have spoken to your brother*
I shall know what I have to do.
Quando sard da mia zia, verra Ella
a vedermi ?
Quando avra finito di scrivere, venfc
Ella meco a far un passeggio ? or
una passeggiata.
Ella giuochera quando avra finito It
di Lei tenia (esercizio).
Che fara Ella quando avid pranzatol
Quanao avrd pranzato, andrd a far
una passeggiata con mia sorella
nel giardino della marchesa.
Quando avrd parlato al di Lei fra
tello, sapro ciu che ho da fare.
Do'es it rain ?
Piove ?
It rains.
Piove.
Does it snow ?
Nevica?
It snows.
Nevica.
Is it muddy?
c t Vi e* del fango ?
\t V' £ fango?
It is muddy.
t C £ del fango.
Is it muddy out of doors?
t C d del fango in istrada ?
It is very muddy.
t E cattivo andare.
Is it dusty ?
V ha della polvere ?
It is very dusty.
Fa molta polvere. V ha
polvere.
Is it smoky ?
V ddelfumo? V'dfumo?
It is too smoky.
V £ troppo fumo.
Out of doors.
Fuori. In istrada.
molt*
Tc
enter, to go in, to come in.
Will you go into my room ?
I will go in.
Will you go in ?
I shall go in.
Entrare 1, in.
Vuol Ella entrar nella mia camera 1
Voglio entrarvi.
Vi entrera Ella ?
Vi entrer'6.
To sit down.
To sit, to be seated.
fle is seated upon the large chair.
She is seated upon the bench.
I sit down near you.
See dre *, mettersi a sedere (Los
son LI.).
Essere seduto ; fem. sedula
Egli e seduto sulla gran sedia.
Essa £ seduta sulla panca.
c Seggo presso di Lei.
} Mi metto a sedere vicino a Lei.
FIFTY -EIGHTH LESSON.
809
To fill with.
To fill the bottle with wine.
Do you fill that bottle with water ?
I fill my purse «vith money.
Ha fills his belly with meat.
The pocket.
! Empire or nempire (isco) 3.
Empiere or riempiere 2.
Riempire di vino la bottiglia.
Riempie Ella d' acqua -uesta bot-
tiglia 1
Riempio di danaro la mia borsa.
S' empie il ventre di carne (a vul
gar expression).
La tasca.
Have you come quite alone?
No, I have brought all my men along
with me.
He has brought all his men along with
him.
Have you brought your brother along
with you 1
I have brought him along with me.
Have you told the groom to bring me
the horse ?
The groom.
I have brought you a fine horse from
Germany.
Are you bringing me my books ?
I am bringing them to you.
To take, to carry.
Will you take that dog to the stable 1
1 will take it thither.
Are you carrying this gun to my
father ?
I carry it to him.
The cane, stick.
The stable.
To come down, to go down,
Ti go down into the well.
To go or come down the hill.
To go down the river.
To alight from one's horse, to dis-
mount.
To alight, to get out.
E Ella venuta del tutto sola ?
No, ho condotto meco tutta la mia
gente.
Egli ha condotto seco tutta la sua
gente.
Ha Ella condotto seco il di Lei ara-
tello? (or vostro.)
L' ho condotto meco.
Avete detto al palafreniere di con-
durmi il cavallo ?
II palafreniere.
Le ho condotto d' Alemagna un bel
cavallo.
Mi porta Ella i miei libri 1
Glieli porto.
Menare 1.
Volete menare questo cane alia
stalla 1
Voglio menarvelo.
Porta Ella a mio padre quest**
schioppo ?
Glielo porto
La canna, or il bastone.
La stalla.
Scendere * 2 — sceso.
I Discendere * 2 ; past part
disceso.
Discendere nel pozzo.
Scendere la montagna
Discendere il flume.
Smontare da cavallo (Lesson LII.)
Scendere, or discendere dal legno.
310
FIFTY-EIGHTH LESSON.
To go up, to mount, to ascend.
To go up the mountain.
Where is your brother gone to 7
He has ascended the hill.
To mount the horse.
To get into the coach.
To get on board the ship.
To desire, to beg, to pray,
to request.
Will you desire your brother to come
down?
I beg of you to call on me to-day.
The beard.
The river.
The stream, torrent.
To go or come up the river.
The stream.
To go or come down the river.
Montare, salire *, ascendere *
S Salire il monte. Salire il colle.
f Montare sulla collina.
Ove £ andato il di Lei fratello 1
E montato sulla collina.
Montare a cavallo.
Montare in legno (in carrozza).
t Entrar nella nave.
( Ascendere il naviglio.
Pregare ,1 (di before Inf.).
Vuol Ella pregare il di Lei fratelli
di scendere 7
La prego di venirmi a vedei* oggi.
La barba.
II flume, la riviera.
II torrente.
Andar contro la corrente del fiume.
La corrente.
Discendere il fiume.
EXERCISES.
179.
Will your parents go to the country to-morrow ? — They will
not go, for it is too dusty. — Shall we take a walk to-day ? — We
will not take a walk, for it is too muddy out of doors (perche c' e
troppofango in istrada, or perche le strade sono troppo fangose). —
Do you see the castle of my relation behind (dietro) yonder
mountain (quella montagna) ? — I see it. — Shall we go in ? — We
will go in if you like. — Will you go into that room ? — I shall not
go into it, for it is smoky. — I wish you a good morning, Madam.
— Will you not come in ? — Will you not sit down ? — I will sit
down upon that large chair. — Will you tell me what has become
of your brother ? — I will tell you. — Where is your sister ? — Do
you not see her ? — She is sitting upon the bench. — Is your father
•eated upon the bench ? — No, he sits upon the chair. — Hast thou
spent all thy money ? — I have not spent all. — How much nasi
FIFTY-EIGHTH LESSON. 311
thou left ? — 1 have not much left. I have but five Italian livrea
ila lira italiana) left. — How much money have thy sisters left ?
— They have but three crowns left. — Have you money enough
left to pay your tailor ? — I have enough left to pay him ; but if I
pay him I shall have but little left. — How much money will youi
brothers have left ? — They will have a hundred sequins left. —
W »ien shall you go to Italy ? — I shall go as soon as (subito che)
have learnt Italian. — When will your brothers go to France ? —
They will go thither as soon as they know French ' — When will
they learn it ? — They will learn it when they have found a good
master. — How much money shall we have left when we have
paid for our horses ? — When we have paid for them we shall hav«
only a hundred crowns left.
180.
. Do you gain (guadagnare) any thing by (in) that business ? —
1 do not gain much by it (gran che), but my brother gains a good
ieal by it. He fills his purse with money. — How much money
have you gained ? — I have gained only a little, but my cousin
nas gained much by it. He has filled his pocket with money. —
Why does not that man work ? — -He is a good-for-nothing fellow
(disutilaccio), for he does nothing but eat all the day long.. He
continually fills (si riempie mat sempre) his belly with meat, so
that he will make himself (diverrd) ill, if he continues (con-
tinuare) to eat so much. — With what have you filled that bottle ?
—I have filled it with wine. — Will this man take care of my
horse ? — He will take care of it. — Who will take care of my ser-
vant ? — The andlord will take care of him, for he will give him
to eat and t Irink^ he will also give him a good bed to sleep in
( per coricarsi). — Does your servant take care of your norses ?—
He takes care of them. — Is he taking care of your clothes ? — He
is taking care of them, for he brushes them every morning. —
Have you ever drunk French wine ? — I have never drunk any.
—Is it long since you ate Italian bread ? — It is almost three
years since I ate any. — Have you hurt my brother-in-law ? — 1
have not hurt him, but he has cut my finger. — What has he cul
your linger with ? — With the knife which you have lent him.
21
812 FIFTY-EIGHTH LESSON.
181.
Is your father arrived at last ? — Every body says that he ii
arrived, but I have not seen him yet. — Has the physician hurt
your son ? — He has hurt him, for he has cut his finger. — Have
they cut off (tagliare) that man's leg ? — They have cut it off. —
Are you pleased (soddisfalto) with your servant ? — I am much
pleased with him, for he is fit for any thing (buono a tutto). —
What does he know ? — He knows every thing ^tutto). — Can he
ride (andar a cavallo) ? — He can. — Has your brother returned
at last from England ? — He has returned thence, and has brought
you a fine horse. — Has he told his groom to bring it to me (di
condurmelo qua) ? — He has told him to bring it you. — What do
you think (che dice Ella) of that horse ? — I think (dico) that it is
a fine and good one (ch' c hello e buono), and beg you to lead it
into the stable (in istalla). — In what did you spend your time
yesterday ? — I went to the concert, and afterwards (e poi) to
the play. — When did that man go down into the well ? — He
went down this morning. — 'Has he come up again yet (giaris-
alito) 1 — He came up an hour ago. — Where is your brother ?
— He is in his room. — Will you tell him to come down ? — 1
will tell him so, but he is not dressed yet. — Is your friend
still on the mountain ? — He has already come down. — Did you
go up or down the river ? — We went down it. — Did my cou&in
speak to you before he started ? — He spoke to me before he
got into the coach. — Have you seen my brother? — I saw him
before I went on board the ship. — Is it better to get into a
coach than to go on board the ship (o salir la nave)! — It is
not worth while to got into a coach, or to go on board the
ihip, when one has no wish to travel.
FIFTY. NINTH LESSON
Lezione cinquantesima nona
OF THE IMPERFECT.
(Imperfetto.)
The imperfect of the indicative is formed in all Italian verbs by changing tb,
semination re of the infinitive into va.1 Ex.
Infinitive*.
To speak — I spoke, Ac. 1. Parlar«.
To believe — I believed, 2. Creder*.
Ac.
To hear — I heard, Ac. 3. Sentire.
To have — I had, Ac. %. Aver*.
Imperfects.
Parlara, parlari, parlam.
Parlaramo, parlara/*, parlarano
< Credera, crederi, credera.
( Credecamo, credera/e, crederano
( Sentira, sentivt, sentira.
( Sentiramo, sentira/e, sentirano
c A vera, avert, avevo.
I Avevamo, &yevaie, arevano.
Ob*. A. There is but one exception to this rule ; it is the verb essere, to be
J < Era, eri, era.
I I Eravamo, eravate, erano.
To be — I was, Ac. Essere.
Ob*. B. The imperfect is a past tense, which was still present at the time
spoken of, and may always be recognized by using the two terms, " wai
DOING,'' Or " USED TO DO." Ex.
When I was at Berlin, I often went
to see my friends.
When you were in Paris, you often
went to the Champs-Elysees.
Rome was at first governed by
kings.
Cesar was a great man.
Cicero was a great orator.
Our ancestors went a hunting every
day.
Quando io era a Berlino, andava
spesso a vedere i miei amici.
Quando Ella era (voi eravate) in
Parigi, Ella andava (voi andavate)
spesso ai Campi Elisi.
Roma era da principio governata -fa)
re.
Cesare era un grand' uomo.
Cicerone era un grand oratore.
I nostri antenati andavano tutti i
giorni a caccia.
1 The termination of the first person of the imperfect indicative in o has
grown obsolete. Besides, the best authors, and the Academy deila Crusca.
have rejected it, as being contrary to its Latin origin : eram> amabam, Uqtbam.
atudiebarr, Ac
314
FIFTY-NINTH LESSON.
The Romans cultivated the arts and
sciences, and rewarded merit.
Were you walking ?
I was not walking.
Were you in Paris when the king was
there 1
I was there when he was there.
Where were you when I was in Lon-
don 7
kt what time did you breakfast when
you were in Germany 7
I breakfasted when my father break-
fasted.
!>id you work when he was working 7
1 studied when he was working.
Some fish.
Some game.
To live.
When 1 lived at my father's, I rose
earlier than 1 do now.
When we lived in that country we went
a fishing often.
When I was ill, I kept in bed all day.
Last summer, when I was in the
country, there was a great deal of
fruit
A thing.
The same thing.
The same man.
It is all one (the same).
Such.
Such a man.
Such men.
Such a woman.
Such things.
Such men merit esteem.
I Romani coltivavano le aiti e U
scienze, e ricompensavano il me-
rito.
Passeggiava Ella (passeggiavats
voi)?
Non passeggiava.
Era Ella (eravate voi) a Parigi quae
do vi era il re 1
V era quando v' era lai.
Ove era (eravate voi) quando io en
a Londra 1
Quando faceva Ella (facevate voi)
colazione allorche Ella era (era-
vate) in Alemagna?
Faceva colazione quando la faceva
mio padre.
Lavorava Ella (lavoravate voi)
quando lavorava lui ?
Io studiava quando egli lavorava.
Del pesce.
Delia cacciagione.
Dimorare 1.
Quando io dimorava da mio padre,
mi alzava pitt presto che nols
faccio adesso.
Quando stavamo (dimoravamo) in
quel paese, andavamo spesso a
pesca.
Quando era malato, stava a letto
tutto il giorno.
L' estate (or nell1 estate) scorsa,
essendo io alia campagna, v' en
gran copia di frutti.
Una cosa.
La medesima cosa (la stessa cosa).
II medesimo uomo (lo stesso uomo)
* Elo stesso
E tutt' uno.
Tale, simile
Un tal uomo.
Tali uomini.
Una tal donna.
Tali cose.
Tali uomini meritano della stima.
• Not is » contraction of rum. io.
fifty-n:nth lesson.
815
Ota of.
Out of the city (the town).
Without, or out doors.
The church stands outside the town.
I shall wait for you before the town
gate.
The town or city gate.
The barrier, the turnpike.
Seldom (rarely).
Some brandy.
The life, the livelihood.
To get one's livelihood — by.
I get my livelihood by working.
He gets his living by writing.
I gain my money by working.
By what does that man get his liveli-
hood 7
To continue, to proceed, to go on.
I continue *o write.
He continues his speech.
A good appetite.
The narrative, the tale.
The edge, the border, the shore.
The edge of the brook.
The sea-shore.
On the sea- shore.
rhe shore, the water-side, the coast,
the bank.
People or folks.
They are good people.
They are wicked people.
Fuori di.
Fuori della citta.
Fuori.
La chieaa e" fuori della citta,
L'aspetterd innanzi alia porta della
citta.
La porta della citta,
La barriera, la porta, il dazio.
Raramente, or di rado.
Dell' acquavite.
La vita, il vitto.
Guadagnarsi il vitto (il pane)
— col.
Mi guadagno il vitto lavorando.
Egli si guadagna il vitto collo scri
vere.
Guadagno il mio danaro col lavo-
rare.
Con che si guadagna quest' uom«
il vitto 7
Continuare 1, proseguire 3,
seguitare 1.
Continuo a scrivere.
Egli jontinua il suo discorso
Un buon appetlto.
II racconto, la novella.
La riva.
La riva del ruscello.
La spiaggia del mare.
Sulla spiaggia del mare.
La ripa, il lido, la sponda, l' argins
La gente.
Sono buona gente.
Sono cattiva gente.
EXERCISES.
182.
Were you loved when you were at Dresden (Dresda) ? — 1 was
aot hated. — Was your brother esteemed when he was in London 1
$16 FIFTY-NINTH LESSOR.
— He was loved and esteemed. — When were you in Spain (m
[spagna) ? — I was there when you were there. — Who was loved
and who was hated ? — Those that were good, assiduous, and obe-
dient, were loved, and those who were naughty, idle, and disobe-
dient, were punished, hated, and despised. — Were you in Berlin
when the king was there ? — I was there when he was there. —
Was your uncle in London when I was there ? — He was the' e
when you were .here. — Where were you when I was at Dresden ?
— I was in Paris. — Where was your father when you were in
Vienna ? — He was in England. — At what o'clock did you break-
fast when you were in England ? — I breakfasted when my uncle
breakfasted. — Did you work when he was working ? — I studied
when he was working. — Did your brother work when you were
working? — He played when I was working. — On what {di che)
Jived our ancestors ? — They lived on nothing but fish and game,
for they went a hunting and a fishing every day. — What sort o\
people were the Romans ? — They were very good people, foi
they cultivated the arts and sciences, and rewarded merit. — Did
you often go to see your friends when you were at Berlin 1 — J
went to see them often. — Did you sometimes go to the Champs
Elysees when you were at Paris ? — I often went thither
183.
What did you do when you lived in that country ? — When we
lived there we often went a hunting. — Did you not go out a walk-
ing (passeggiare) ? — I went out a walking sometimes. — Do you
rise early ? — Not so caily as you ; but when I lived at my un-
cle's I rose earlier -nan I do now. — Did you sometimes keep in
bed when you stayed at your uncle's ? — When I was ill I kept in
bed all day. — Is there much fruit (Avvi gran copia difrutti) this
y^ar ? — I do not know, but last summer {nella scorza estate), when
I was in the country, there was a great deal of fruit. — What do
you get your livelihood by ? — I get my livelihood by working. —
Does your friend get his livelihood by writing ? — He gets it Dy
speaking and writing. — Do these gentlemen get their livelihood
by working ? — They get it by doing nothing (facendo niente), foi
thev are too id*e to worfc, — By what has your friend gained thai
FTFTY-NINTH LESSON. 3n
money ?— He has gained it by working. — By what did you get
your livelihood when you were in England ? — I got it by writing.
— Did your cousin get his livelihood by writing ? — He got it by
working.— Have you ever seen such a person ? — I have never
seen such a one (una simile). — Have you already seen cur church 1
— I have not seen it yet. — Where does it stand (essere) ? — It
stands outside the town. — If you wish to see it, I will go with you
in order to show it you. — Upon what do the people live that in-
habit the sea-shore ? — They live on fish alone. — Why will you
not go a hunting any more ? — I hunted yesterday the whole day,
and I killed nothing but an ugly bird, so that I shall not go a
hunting any more. — Why do you not eat ? — Because I have, not
a good appetite'. — Why does your brother eat so much ? — Because
he has a good appetite.
184.
Whom are you looking for ? — I am looking for my little bro-
ther.— If you wish to find him you must go (bisogna andar) into
the garden, for he is there. — The garden is large, and I shall not
be able to find him, if you do not tell me in which part (in qual
parte) of the garden he is (sia, subj.) — He is sitting under the
large tree under which we were sitting yesterday. — Now I shall
find him. — Why did you not bring me my clothes ? — They were
not made, so that I could not bring them, but I bring them you
now.— You have learnt your lesson : why has not your sister
learnt hers 1 — She has taken a walk with my mother, so that she
could not learn it, but she will learn it to-morrow. — When will
you correct my exercises ? — I will correct them when you bring
m^ (mi parte r , future) those of your sister.— Do you think you
have made faults in them ? — I do not know. — If you have made
faults you have not studied your lessons well ; for the lessons
must be learnt well (bisogna imparar bene) to make no faults in
he exercises. — It is all the same : if you do not correct them to-
day, I shall not learn them before to-morrow (non li imparerb se
non domani). — You must not (Ella non dene) make any faults in
your exercises, for you have all that is necessary to prevent yo¥
from making any.
SIXTIETH LESSON.
Lezione sessantesima.
OF THE PRETERITE DEFINITE.
(Passato rcmoto.)
Tfcii put tense is fcrmed from the infinitive by changing the terminatioLi
ire, ere, irty into at, ei, ii. Ex.
Preterite Definite*.
Parlat, parlarft, parfd.
Parlammo, parlasfe, parlarono.
Credei, credesti, crede*
Credemmo, credeste, crederono.
Sentii, sentisti. senti.
Sentimmo, sentiste, sentirono.
To speak— I spoke, Ac.
To believe — I believed,
Ac.
1. Parlare.
2. Credere.
To hear— I heard, Ac. 3. Senttra.
Ob». A. The third person singular of the preterite definite has in the regulai
verbs always the grave accent (').
To have— I had, Ac
To be— I was, Ac
Avere*.
Essere*.
Ebbi, avesti, ebbe.
Avemmo, aveste, ebbero.
Fui, fosti, fu.
< Fummo, foste, furono.
Ob*. B. The irregularity of an Italian verb almost always falls on the pre
terite definite. This is irregular only in the first and third persons singular, and
1 Almost all the verbs of the second conjugation have a double form for the
first and third persons singular, and third person plural, and instead of ei >
srono, they end in etti, ttte, ettero, as : credere, to believe.
Credei, or credetti,
Credesti,
Cred$ or credette j
Credemmo,
Credeste,
Crederono, or credettero.
Practice alone can teach which form is to be preferred. We have, however,
ascertained that when the verb ends in tere the preference is to be given to thy
first form as :
Potere, to be able (can) — potei, I was able.
Battere, *o beat " — battei, I did beat.
Esistere to exist " - esistei, I existed, Ac
SIXTIETH LESSON.
319
me third person plural, which almost invariably end the first person singulis
In i, the third person singular in e, and the third person plural in era Ex.
To please — pleased (past part.).
I pleased, Ac
To know — known.
I knew, Ac
To hold— held.
I held, Ac
To wish — wished.
I wished, Ac
To read — read.
I read, 4c
To take — took.
I took, Ac
Piacere — piaciuto.
Preterite Definite
( Piacqui, placesti, piacque.
I Piacemmo, piaceste, piacquero «
Conoscere — conosciuto.
r Conobbi, conoscesti, conobbc
< Conoscem- conosceste, conobbe-
v mo, to
Tenere — tenuto,
( Tenni, tenesti, tenne.
I Tenemmo, teneste, tennero
Volere — voluto.
{ Volli, volesti, voile,
c Yolemmo, voleste, vollero.*
Leggere — letlo.
< Lessi, leggesti, lease,
c Leggemmo, leggeste, lessero 4
Prendere — preso.
( Presi, prendesti, prese.
< Prenderamo, prendeste, presero.4
■ All verbs having e before the termination ere of the infinitive are conju
gated in the same manner, as: naacere, to be born; taeere, to be silent; giacert,
.o lie, to be situate; nuocere, to hurt; except cuocere, to cook, bake; and conoe-
?er«, to know ; which have in the pret. def. cossi and conobbi.
9 The principal verbs which, besides the above three, double in the preterite
definite the consonant in the first and third persons singular and third person
plural are : avere, to have ; etoi, I had : rompere, to break ; rwppt, I broke :
eadcret to fall ; caddi, I fell : tapere, to know ; seppi, I knew : pioverc, to rain ;
piorr«, it rained.
4 All verbs whose first person singular of the indicative terminates in ggo, eo,
ro, primo, cuoto, have their preterite definite terminated in ssi, as : Dico, I say ;
rfwwt, I said : scrivo, I write ; sertsri, I wrote : esprrimoy I express ; ta/prtani^ I
expressed : acuoto, I shake ; scoesi, I shook : percuoto, 1 strike ; percoasi, I struck.
5 All verbs whose first person singular of the indicative ends in do have their
preterite definite either in aai, esi> iai, osi, or uai, according to the letters that
precede this termination, as : perauodo, I persuade ; persuari, I persuaded
520
SIXTIETH LESSON.
To choose — chosen
4 chose, Ac.
Scegliere — scelto .
{ Sceisi, scegliesti, scelse.
( Scegliemmo, sceglieste, scelsero •
Ob$. C. The learner has uniy to make himself acquainted with the irre-
gularity of the first person singular of this tense ; this once known, all th*
others are. For, in addition to the first person singular, the irregular person i
cf this tense are the third person singular and third person plural, all the Jthei
persons are always regular. The first person singular, therefore, ending in t,
the third person singular changes i into e, and the thira person plural into ero,
as may be seen from the above examples. This rule holds good throughout
the Italian language. All the other rules that can be given on the formation ol
this tense in irregular verbs are contained in the above five notes.
ON THE USE OF THE PRETERITE DEFINITE.
This tense is so called, because it always expresses an action completed at •
time specified, either by an adverb or some other circumstance. Ex.
I had done reading when he entered.
You had lost your purse, when I found \
mine.
Aveva finito di ieggere, quando egli
entrb.
Ella aveva (voi avevate) perduto la
di Lei (la vostra) borsa, quandc
trovai la mia.
Obs. D. These examples show that the pluperfect is formed in Italian, as
In English, with the imperfect of the auxiliary, and the past participle of the
verb you conjugate.
We had dined, when he arrived.
The king had named an admiral, when
he heard of you.
Aft/* having spoken, you went away.
Aflsr shaving, I washed my face.
After having warmed themselves, they
went into the garden.
Avevamo pranzato, quando egli ar-
rivb (or giunse).
II re aveva fatto un ammiraglio,
quando gli si parlb di Lei (or quan-
do gli parlarono di Lei).
Dopo aver parlato, Ella se ne andb.
Dopo essermi sbarbato, mi lavai la
faccia.
Dopo essersi scaldati, andarono in
giardino.
thiedo, I ask ; chiesi, I asked : rodo, I gnaw ; rosi, I gnawed : chiudo, I shut ;
'Musi, I did shut : fondo, I melt ; fusi, I melted.
6 Verbs whose termination o of the first person singular indicative is pre-
ceded by a consonant, which in its turn is preceded by one of the liquids I, n, r.
with which they form the syllables Igo, nco, rdo, have their preterite definite in
Iw, n#t, or r*t, as : vincot I vanquish ; vinsi, I vanquished : mordo, I bite , morsi
I bit, Ac.
SIXTIETH LESSON.
321
U soon as the bell rang, you awoke.
As soon as they called me, I got up.
As soon as he was ready, he came to
see me.
As soon as we had our money, we
agreed to that.
\e soon as he had his horse, he came to
show it me.
i/ter having tried several times, they
succeeded in doing it.
As soon as I saw him, I obtained what
I wanted.
As soon as I spoke to him, he did what
I told him.
The business was soon over.
Tosto che la campana suond, Ella t
risvegliiS (voi vi risvegliastt).
Tosto che mi chiamarono, mi levau
Tosto che fu pronto, venne a ve
dermi.
Tosto che noi avemmo il nostro da
naro, convenimmo di cid.
Tosto che ebbe il suo cavallo, vcnnt
a mostrarmelo.
Dopo aver provato parecchie volte,
pervennero a farlo.
Tosto che \o vidi, ottenni cid di cul
aveva bisogno.
Tosto che gli parlai, fece cid che gll
dissi.
L' affare fu ben tosto fatto.
OF THE PRETERITE ANTERIOR.
(Passato anterior e.)
*
This tense is compounded of the preterite definitive of the auxiliary, and the
past participle of the verb you conjugate. It is used (from its name anUriore,
anterior,) to express an action past before another which is likewise past, and
is hardly ever used except after one of the conjunctions :
{ Tosto che.
c Subito che
Dopo che.
As soon as.
After.
When.
No sooner.
Scarcely.
It also expresses au action as quickly done.
( Allorchd.
t Quando.
Non tosto.
Appena.
EXAMPLES.
As soon as 1 had finished my work, 1
carried it to him.
As soon as I had dressed my self \ I went
out.
When they had dont playing ; they be-
gan singing.
When I had dined, it struck twelve.
As soon as the guests were assembled,
the repast commenced.
Tosto che ebbi ftntio il mio lavorc
glielo portai.
Tosto che mi fui vestito, uscii.
Quand1 ebbero finito di giuocare, si
misero a can tare.
Quando ebbi pranzato, suonc*
mezzodi.
Tosto che i convitati si furono ra
unati, il bancnetto comincia
322
SIXTIETH LESSON.
I had soon done eating.
After the soldiers had pillaged the
town, they slaughtered without pity
the women and children.
Scarcely had we arrived, when we were
conducted to the king.
fie had no sooner perceived us, than he
advanced towards us.
When he had done reading, he ex.
claimed.
When he had well understood, he left.
Ebbi ben } resto finite di manglare.
Dopo che i soldati ebbero saccheg
grata la citta, trucidarono spie-
tatamente le donne e i fanci
ulli.
Appena fvmmo giunH, che ci ti
condusse (or che ci condussero)
dal re.
Non tosto egli ci ebbe scorti, che si
avanzu verso noi.
Quand? ebbe finito di leggere, escla-
md.
QuancP ebbe capita bene, parti
To die (to lose life).
1 die, thou diest, he or she dies.
We, you, they die.
I died, Ac.
Shall or will you die?
I shall die.
The man died this morning, and his
wife died also.
The man is dead,
rhe woman died this morning.
Morire ; past part, morto.
Muoio, muori, muore.
Moriamo, morite, muoionc
Preterite definite.
Morii. moristi, mori.
Morimmo, moriste, morironc
Morra Ella (morrete voi)?
Morrd.
L' uomo e* morto questa mattina •
sua moglie pure e morta.
L' uomo e morto.
La donna e morta questa mane.
To kill.
I killed, Ac
To tellt to relate.
The spectacles.
The optician.
The accident.
7b write.
1 wrote, Ac.
Uccidere * ; past part, ucciso
Preterite definite.
( Uccisi, uccidesti, uccise.
C Uccidemmo, uccideste, uccieero.
Raccontare 1.
Gli occhiali.
L' ottico.
L' accidente.
Scrivere 2 — scritto.
Preterite definite.
c Scrissi, scrivesti, scrisee.
I Scrivemmo, scriveste, scrissere
EXERCISES.
185.
VVhat did y >u do when you had finished your letter ? — I wen!
jo my brother who took me to the theatre, where I had the plea
SIXTIETH LESSON. 323
wire to find one of my friends whom I had not seen for ten years
(da died anra').— What didst thou do after getting up this morn-
ing ? — When I had read the letter of the Polish (polacco) count,
I went to see (uscii per vedere) the theatre of the prince, which I
had not seen before (non — ancora). — What did your father do
when he had breakfasted? — He shaved and went out. — What did
your friend do after he had been a walking ? — He went to the
baron (il barone). — Did the baron cut the meat after he had cut
the bread ? — He cut the bread after he had cut the meat. — When
do you set out ? — I do not set out till (non parto che) to-morrow ;
for before I leave I will once more see my good friends. — What
did your children do when they had breakfaste J ? — They went a
walking with their dear preceptor (precettore). — Where did your
uncle go to after he had warmed himself? — He went nowhere.
After he had warmed himself, he undressed and went to bed.—
At what o'clock did he get up ? — He got up at sunrise. — Did you
wake him ? — I had no need to wake him, for he had got up before
me. — What did your cousin do when he heard of (quandc apprese)
the death (la morte) of his best friend ? — He was much afflicted,
and went to bed without saying a word (senza dir motto). — Did
you shave before you breakfasted '/ — I shaved when I had break-
fasted.— Did ycu go to bed when you had eaten supper ? — When
C had eaten supper I wrote my letters, and when I had written
them I went to bed. — At what (di che) are you distressed (affiitta) ?
— I am distressed at that accident. — Are you afflicted at the
death (delta norte) of your relation ? — I am much afflicted at it
(ne). — When did your relation die ? — He died last month. — Of
whom do you complain ? — I complain of your boy. — Why do you
complain of him ? — Because he has killed the pretty dog (il cag
nolino) which I received from one of my friends. — Of what has
your uncle complained ? — He has complained of what you have
done. — Has he complained of the letter which I wrote to him the
day before yesterday ? — He has complained of it.
186.
Why did you not stay longer in Holland ? — When I was there
the living was dear, and I had not money enough to stay ther*
324 SIXTIETH LESSON.
longer.— What sort of weather was it when you were on the way
to Vienna ? — It was very bad weather, for it Was stormy (tern-
porale), and snowed and rained very heavily (dirottamente). —
Where have you been since I saw you ? — We sojourned long r*i
the sea-shore, until a ship arrived (fino alV arrivo d' un — ) which
brought us to France. — Will you continue your narrative ? —
Scarcely had we arrived in France when we were taken (con-
durre *) to the king, who received us very well, and sent us back
to our country. — A peasant having seen that old men (il vecchio)
used (servirsi di) spectacles (occhiali) to read, went to an optician
(un ottico) and asked for a pair (e ne domando). The peasant
then took a book, and having opened it, said the spectacles were
not good. The optician put another pair (un altro paio) of the
best which he could find in his shop (la bottega) upon his nose ;
but the peasant being still unable to read, the merchant said to
him : " My friend, perhaps you cannot read at all ? " " If I could
(se sapessi leggere)" said the peasant, " I should not (non avrei
bisogno di) want your spectacles." — Henry (Enrico) the Fourth,
meeting one day in his palace (il palazzo) a man whom he did
not know (che gli era sconosciuto), asked him to whom he belonged
(appartenesse, imp. subj.). " I belong to myself," replied the
man. " My friend," said the king, " you have a stupid (stolido)
master (padrone)." Tell us (La ci racconti) what has happened
to you lately (V altro giorno). — Very willingly (benvolentieri) :
but on condition (colla condizione) that you will listen to me with
out interrupting (interrompere *) me. — We will not interrupt you.
you may be ( pud esserne) sure of it. — Being lately at the theatre,
I san the Speaking Picture and the Weeping (piangere*)
Woman performed (vedere * rappresentare). As I did not find
this latter play (quest'' ultima commedia) very amusing (troppo
itlegra per me), I went to the concert, where the music (la musica)
caused me (cagionare) a violent head- ache (un violento mal di
testa). I then left (lasciare) the concern cursing it (maledicendo),
and went straight (e me ne andai dijilato) to the madhouse (lo spe-
dale dei pazzi), in order to see my cousin. On entering ( ntrando)
the hospital of my cousin, I was struck with horror ( fui vreso d'
orrore) at seeing (vedendo) several madmen (it pazzo), who came
up tf me (avvicinarsi ad uno), jumping (saltare) and hovling
SIXTY-FIRST LESSON.
32ft
(urlare). — What did you do then ? — I did the same (altrettanto\
and they set up a laugh {mettersi * a ridere) as thev withdrew
(ritirarsi).
SIXTY-FIRST LESSON.
Lezione sessantesima prima.
To employ.
When we received some money, we
employed it in purchasing good
books.
When you nought of that merchant,
vou did not a.^ays pay in cash.
Has yovr »Ut^ succeeded in mending
your o**vjit i
She hw succeeded in it.
Has »he woman returned from the
market 1
S*w has not yet returned.
PW the women agree to that 1
Tk«v agreed to it.
ftfn«re is your sister gone 1
**• m gone to church.
Here is, here are.
There is,. there are.
There is my book.
Behold my book.
There is my pen.
Behold my pen.
There it is.
There they are
Here I am.
Impiegare 1.
Quando ricevevamo del danaro, 1
impiegavamo a comprare del
buoni libri.
Quando Ella comprava da questa
mercante, non pagava sempre ir.
contanti.
Sua sorella ha dessa potuto raccomo-
• dare la di Lei cravatta 1
L' ha potuto.
La donna e dessa ritornata dal mer
cato?
Non n' £ peranco ritornata.
Sono convenute di cio le donn* 1
Ne son convenute.
Ov' e andata la di Lei sorella >
E andata in chiesa.
Ecco,
Ecco il mlo libro.
Ecco la mla penna.
Eccolo. Fern, eccola.
Eccoli. '• eccole
Eccomi.
>*•. A The pronouns are joined to the word ecco in the following manner
426
SIXTY -FIRST LESSON.
Sing.
Pltar.
rhere 01 Here I am. There or here we are.
Eccomi.
Eccoci
« " thou art. « «
you are.
Eccoti.
Eccovi
« " he is. " "
they are.
Eccolo.
Eccoli
- " she la. " "
they are.
Eccola.
Eccole
I am there.
Eccomici, or eccomiri.
There is some.
Eccone.
no.
There is the man.
Ecco 1' uon
There is the woman.
Ecco la donna.
That is the reason why.
Ecco perchd.
Therefore I say so.
Ecco perch
dlo dico
ii piedi.
My feet are cold.
t Ho freddo i
His feet are cold.
t Egli ha freddo ai piedi.
Her hands are cold.
f Essa ha freddo alle mani.
My body is cold.
t Ho freddo a tutto il corpo
My head hurts me.
t Mi duole la testa (mi fa male
tettm).
His leg hurts him.
t Gli fa male la gamba.
Her leg hurts her.
t Le fa male la gamba.
He has a pain in his side.
t Ha male ad un lato.
Her tongue hurts her very much.
t Le duole m
oho la lingua.
A plate.
Un tondo.
A clean plate.
Un tondo pulito.
Clean plates.
Del tondi r.
mliti
The son-in-law
11 genero.
The step- son.
11 figliastro.
The daughter-in-law
La nuora.
The step-daughter.
La figliastra.
The father-in-law.
11 suocero.
The step-father.
11 patrigno.
The mother-in-law.
La suocera.
The step-mother.
La matrigna
The progress.
To improve.
To improve in learning.
The progress of a malady
II progresso.
t Par dei progress!.
t Far dei progressi negli studii, neJla
scienze.
II progresso (or i progressi) d' una
malattia.
SIXTY-FIRST LESSON.
82T
What has become of your aunt 7
I do not know what has become of
her.
What has become of your sisters 1
I cannot tell you what has become of
them.
Ch' e* avvenuto della di Lei zia?
Chen' a della di Lei zia?
Non so che ne sia avvenuto (tubj.).
Ch' £ avvenuto delle di Lei sorelle?
Non posso dirle che aia avvenuto di
loro (*ubj).
Wine sells well.
Wine will sell well next year.
That door shuts easily.
That window does not open easily.
That picture is seen far off.
Winter clothes are not worn in sum-
mer.
That is not said.
That cannot be comprehended.
To conceive, to comprehend.
It is clear.
According to circumstances.
The circumstance.
Thai is according to circumstances.
It depends.
Glad.
Pleased.
Sorry, displeased.
Tn •cold.
To be angry with somebody.
t II vino ha grande smercio.*
t Vi ha molta ricerca di vino,
t II vino avra grande smercio 1' anno
venture
t L' anno venturo il vino si venders
benissimi
t Questa porta si chiude agevol-
mente.
t Quest a finestra non s' apre facil
mente.
t Questo quadro si vede da lontano.
t I vestiti del verno non si portano
nella state.
t Ci<) non si dice.
{ t Questo non si capisce
c Questo non si concepisce.
Concepire (concepisco) ; past
part, concepito; preterite
def. concepii.
E chiaro.
t Secondo le occorrenze.
L' occorrenza (or la circostansa).
Secondo le circostanze.
Dipende (dalle circostanze).
Contento (di before inf.).
Soddisfatto (di before inf.).
Malcontento, increscioso.
Sgridare 1.
' Essere in collera con qualcunc
Essere indispettito contro quat
cuno.
Nutrire mat animo contro qual
cuno.
1 Smercio, though in constant use, has not been {sanctioned vet by la Cnucm
22
328
SIXTY-FIRST LESSON.
To be angry about something.
What are yon angry about ?
Are you sorry for having done it ?
I am sorry for it.
Are yon rich 7
I am.
Are the women handsome ?
They are; they are rich and hand-
some.
Are you from France ?
I am.
What countrywoman is she 7
She is from Italy.
Honest
Polite.
Uncivil.
Impolite.
Happy, lucky.
Unhappy, unlucky.
Easy.
Difficult.
Useful.
Useless.
Is it useful to write a good deal ?
It is useful.
Is it well (right) to take the property of
others 7
It is wrong (bad),
ft is not well (wrong)
Well, right
Bad, wrong.
Essere indispettito per qualcht
cosa.
t Qual e 1' oggetto che La indispe*
tisce ?
t Le rincresce d' averlo fatto 1
Me ne rincresce.
EEllaricca?
Lo sono.
Sono belle le donne ?
Lo sono ; sono ricche e belle.
t E Ella Francese? E Ella di Fran
cia?
Lo sono.
t Di qual paese e* dessa?
Essa e d' Italia.
Onesto.
Civile.
Incivile.
Scortese (impulito).
Felice.
Infelice.
Facile.
Difficile.
Utile.
Inutile.
E egli utile di scriver molt ?
E utile.
E egli lecito di prendere 1' *•&.« degi
altri 7 (o la roba degl' altn).
Non va bene (sta male).
Non d lecito.
Bene.
Male.
Of what use is that'?
That is of no use.
What is that?
1 do not know what that is.
What is it?
I do not know what it is.
(t A che serve cid ?
ft A che giova ?
( t Cid non e buono a niente
c t Cid non serve a niente.
Che d questo ?
Non so che sia (present rub}.).
CheS?
c Non so che sia (svbjX
I Non so che cosa sia {pre*, tub])
SIXTY-FIRST LESSON.
829
What is jour name!
My name is Charles.
What do you call this in Italian ?
How do you express this in Italian ?
What is that called ?
T!iat flower is called anemone.
Come si chiama?
Quale* ildi Lei nome?
Che nome ha Ella 1
Mi chiamo Carlo.
Ho nome Carlo.
Come si chiama cio in italiano 7
Come si dice questo in Italians 7
Come si chiama cio ?
Questo fiore ha nome anemone.
George the Third. | Giorgio terzo.
Oba. B. After the Christian names of sovereigns the Italians employ the
ordinal numbers, as in English, but without using the article.
Lewis the Fourteenth.
Henry the Fourth.
Henry the First.
Henry the Second.
Charles the Fifth spoke several
European languages fluently.
Europe, European.
Fluently.
Luigi decimo quarto.
Enrico quarto.
Enrico primo.
Enrico secondo.
Carlo Quinto parlava speditamen*
parecchie lingue europee.
Europa, europeo.
Speditamente.
Rathtr.
Rather — than.
Rather than squander my money, I
will keep it.
I will rather pay him than go thither.
I will rather burn the coat than wear
it
He has arrived sooner than I.
A half-worn coat.
To do things imperfectly (by halves).
Piuttosto,
Piuttosto che (di).
Piuttosto che dissipare il mio da
naro, lo conserved.
Lo pagherd piuttosto che andarvi.
Abbrucierd 1' abito piuttosto che por
tarlo.
Egli £ arrivato prima di me.
Un abito mezzo logoro.
Far le cose a meta (a mezzo).
EXERCISES.
187.
Did your mother pray for any one when she went to church ?
— She prayed for her children. — For whom did we pray ? — You
prayed for your parents. — For whom did our parents pray ? —
They prayed for their children. — When you received your money
what aid you do with it (che ne facevano) 1 — We employed it in
purchasing (a comprare) some good books. — Did you employ
yours also ( pure) in purchasing books ? — No ; I employed it in
assisting (a soccorrere) the poor (i poveri). — Did you not pay you?
830 SIXTY-FIRST LESSON.
tailor? — We did pay him. — Did you always pay in cash whet
you bought of that merchant? — We always paid in cash, for we
never bought on credit. — Has your sister succeeded in mending
(ha potuto raccomodare) your stockings ? — She has succeeded in
it (V ha potuto). — Has your mother returned from church ? — Sh;
nas not yet returned. — Whither is your aunt gone ? — She in
gone to church. — Whither are our cousins (fern.) gone ? — They
are gone to the concert. — Have they not yet returned from it 1 —
They have not yet returned. — Did you forget any thing when you
went to school ? — We often forgot our books. — Where did you
forget them ? — We forgot them at the school. — Did we forget any
thing ? — You forgot nothing.
188.
Who is there * — It is I (son to). — Who are those men ? — They
are foreigners who wish to speak to you. — Of what country are
they ? — They are Americans. — Where is my book ? — There it
is. — And my pen ? — Here it is. — Where is your sister ? — There
she is. — Where are our cousins (fern.) ? — There they are. —
Where art thou, John (Giovanni) ? — Here I am. — Why do your
children live in France ? — They wish to learn French ; that is
the reason why they live in France. — Why do you sit near the
fire ? — My feet and hands are cold ; that is the reaso.. why I sit
near the fire. — Are your sister's hands cold ? — No ; but her feet
are cold. — What is the matter with your aunt? — Her leg hurts
her. — Is any thing the matter with you ? — My head hurts me. —
What is the matter with that woman ? — Her tongue hurts her
very much. — Why do you not eat ? — I shall not eat before I have
a (prima df aver) good appetite. — Has your sister a good appetite ?
— She has a very good appetite ; that is the reason why she eats
so much. — If you have read the books which I lent you, why do
you not return them to me ? — I intend reading them once more
(ancor una volta) ; that is the reason why I have not yet returned
them to you ; but I will return them to you as soon as I have read
them a second time (per la seconda volta). — Why have you not
brought my shoes ? — They were not made, therefore I did not
bring them ; but I bring them you now : here they are. — Whj
has your daughter not learnt her exercises ? — She has taken *
SIXTY-FIRST LESSOR. 83 i
*alk with her companion ; that is the reason why she has not
earnt them : but she promises to learn them to-morrow, if you do
aot scold (sgridare) her.
189.
A French officer (vffiziale) having arrived (essendo arrivato) at
the court (la corte) of Vienna, the empress Theresa (Teresa)
asked (domandare) him, S he believed that the princess of N.
whom he had seen the day before (la vigilia), was (fosse, subj.
really the handsomest woman in the (del) world, as was said.
" Madam," replied (rispondere *) the officer, " I thought so yes-
terday."— How do you like that meat ? — I like it very well. —
May 1 ask you for (Oserei domandarle) a piece of that fish ? — If
you will have the goodness (la bonta) to pass (porgere) me your
plate, I will give you some.- —Would you have the goodness to
pour me out some drink (di virsarmi da here, or di mescermi) ? —
With much pleasure. — Cicero (Cicerone) seeing his son-in-law,
who was very short (piccolissimo), arrive (venire) with a long
sword (con una lunga spada) at his side (al lato), said, " Who has
fastened (attaccare) my son-in-law 10 this sword V
190.
What has become of your uncle ? — I will tell you what has
become of him. Here is the chair (la sedia) upon which he often
sat (essere seduio). — Is he dead ? — He is dead. — When did he
die ? — He died two years ago. — I am very much grieved at it. —
Why do you not sit down ? — If you will stay with me, I will sit
down ; but if you go I shall go along with you. — What has
become of your aunt ? — I do not know what has become of her,
— Will you tell me what has become of your sister ? — I will tell
you what has become of her. — Is she dead ? — She is not dead. —
What has become of her ? — She is gone to Vienna — What ha?
become of your sisters ?— I cannot tell you what has become of
diem, for I have not seer them these two years. — Are your parents
still alive? — They are dead.— How long is it since your cousin
(fern.) died ? — It is six months since she died. — Did the wine
sell well last year ? — It did not sell very well ; but it will sell
better next year, for there will be a great deal, and it will not be
d«ar — Whv do you open the door 1 — Do you not see how it
332 SIXTY-FIRST LESSON.
smokes here ? — I see it ; but you must (bisogna) open the window
instead of opening the door. — The window does not open easily ;
that is the reason why I open the door. — When will you shut it ?
— I will shut it as soon as there is no (che non vi sard) more
smoke. — Did you often go a fishing when you were in that
country ? — We often went a fishing and a hunting. — If you will
go with us into the country you will see my fathers castle.— You
are very polite, Sir ; but I have seen that castle already.
191.
When did you see my father's castle ? — I saw it when I was
travelling (viaggiando) last year. — It is a very fine castle, and is
seen far off*. — How is that said ? — That is not said. — That cannot
be comprehended (non si concepisce) ; cannot every thing be ex-
pressed in your language? — Every thing can be expressed, but
not as in yours. — Will you rise early to-morrow ? — It will depend
upon circumstances (secondo) ; if I go to bed early I shall rise
early, but if I go to bed late I shall rise late. — Will you love my
children ? — If they are good I shall love them. — Will you dine
with us to-morrow ? — If you get ready (far preparare) the food
I like I shall dine with you. — Have you already read the letter
which you received this morning ? — I have not opened it yet. —
When will you read it ? — I shall read it as soon as I have time
(che ne avro il tempo). — Of what use is that ? — It is of no use. —
Why have you picked it up? — I have picked it up in order
to show it you. — Can you tell me what it is ? — I cannot tell
you, for I do not know ; but I will ask (domandare a) my
brother, who will tell you. — Where did you find it ? — I found
it on the shore of the river, near the wood. — Did you perceive
it from afar?-*-I had no need to perceive it from afar, for I
passed by the side of the river. — Have you ever seen such a
thing ? — Never.— Is it useful to speak much ? — It is, according
to circumstances : if one wishes to learn a foreign (straniero)
language, it is useful to speak a great deal. — Is it as useful to
write as to speak ? — It is more useful to speak than to write ; but,
in order to learn a foreign language, one must (bisogna) do both
(V uno e V altro). — Is it useful to write all that one says ? — Thai
is useless.
SIXTY- SECOND LESSON.
Lezione sessantesima seconda.
As to (as for).
As to me.
kt ui that I do not know what to say
[ do not know what to do.
I do not know where to go.
He does not know what to answer.
We do not know what to buy.
To die of a disease.
She died of the small-pox.
The small-pox.
The fever.
The intermittent lever.
The apoplexy.
He had a cold fit.
He has an ague.
His fever has returned.
H i has been struck with apoplexy.
To strike.
Sure.
To be sure of a thing.
I am sure of that.
I am sure that she has arrived.
I am sure of it.
To happen
Something has happened.
In quanto a, or quanio a.
( Quanto a me.
C In quanto a me.
Quanto a cio, non so che dire.
Non so che fare.
Non so dove andare.
Non sa che rispondere.
Non sappiamo che comprare
Morire* d* una malattia.
Essa d morta del vaiuolo.
II vaiuolo.
La febbre.
La febbre intermittente.
L' attacco d' apoplessia.
II colpo apopletico, 1' apoplessia.
Egli aveva un accesso di febbre.
E preso dalla febbre.
Gli e* ritornata la febbre.
Egli e stato colpito d' apoplessia.
Colpire (colpiscot &c.)
Sicuro, certo (fem. sicura,
certa).
Esser sicuro (certo) di qualche
cosa.
( Ne sono sicuro (certo).
I Sono certo (sicuro) di cid.
Sono certo ch' essa £ arrivata
Ne sono certo (sicuro).
Accadere*; p. part, accaduto
(Conjugated like cadere, Less. LI.)
Preterite Definite.
Accaddi, accadesti, accadde.
Accademmo, accadeste, accaddero
[Used only in the 3d pen.]
E accaduto qualche cosa.
334
SIXTY-SECOND LESSON.
Nothing has happened.
What has happened ?
What has happened to her?
She has had an accident.
To shed.
To pour out.
A tear.
To shed tears.
To pour out some dring.
I pour out some drink for tnat man
With tears in his, her, our, or my eyes.
Non e accaduto niente
Ch' e* accaduto rt
Che le e accaduto ?
Essa ha avuto un accident*
Spargere* 2 ; p. part, sparse
Preterite Definite.
Sparsi, spargesti, sparse
Spargcnmo, spargeste, sparseis
Versare 1.
Una lagrima.
Spargere la grime.
Versar da bere (mescere).
Verso da bere a quest' uomo.
Colie lagrime agli occhi
Sweet, mild.
Sour, acid.
Some sweet wine
A mild air.
A mild zephyr.
A soft sleep.
Nothing makes life more agreeable
than the society of, and intercourse
with, our friends.
Obs. A. There is, in the above signification, may be rendered in seven differ-
ent manners, viz. arm, ewi, vi ha, vi £, r' ha, t? >,, c? h.
Dolce.
Acido, acida.
Del vino dolce.
Un' aria dolce.
Un dolce zeffiro.
Un dolce sonno.
Non avvi cosa che renda la fitaco: i
dolce quanto la societa e il torn-
mercio dei nostri amici.
To repair to
To repair to the army, to one's regi-
ment.
An army, a regiment.
[ repaired to that place.
He repaired thither.
Renderst a (pret. def. re*i,
rendesti, rese, &c.)
Rendersi all' esercito, al suo reggi
mento.
Un esercito, un reggimento
Mi sono reso a questo luogo.
Vi si e reso.
To cry, to scream, to shriek.
To help.
I help him to do it
I help you to write.
I will help vou to work.
Gridare 1.
Aiutare 1 (governs the accus
and takes a before the inf.)
L' aiuto a farlo.
L' aiuto a scrivere.
Voglio aiutarla a lavorars-
8IXTY-SEC0ND LESSON.
835
To cry for help.
The help.
Chiamare aiuto.
Domandar soccorso.
L' aluto, il soccorso.
To inquire after some one,
Will you have the goodness to pass me
that plate 1
Will you pass me that plate, if you
please ?
To reach, offer, present.
To favour.
Informarsi di qualcuno.
Vuol Ella aver la bonta di porgerrru
quel piatto ?
t Favorisca di porgermi quel piatto ?
Porgere * 2, past part, porto
(pret. def. porsi, porgesti,
porse, &c).
Favorire 3 (favorisco).
06#. B. If you please is often rendered in Italian by the imperative
favorisca.
Please to sit down.
As you please.
At your pleasure.
As you like.
To please.
To knock at the door.
To trust some one.
To distrust one.
Do you trust that man ?
I trust him.
He trusts me.
We must not trust every body.
To laugh at something
Do you laugh at that?
1 laugh at it.
At what do they laugh ?
To laugh in a person's face.
Favorisca di sedersi.
Come Le piace.
Come Le aggrada.
Aggradire 3 (isco),
c Bussare alia porta,
\ Picchiare alia porta
■\ Affidarsi a qualcuno.
Non fidarsi di qualcuno.
Diffidare di qualcuno.
Si fida EHa di quest' uomo?
Me gli affido. Mi fido di Lui.
Egli s' affida in me (or a me).
Non bisogna fidarsi di tutti.
' Rider e * di qualche cosa (Lea
sons LIV. and LX.>
Preterite Definite.
Risi, ridesti, rise.
Ridemmo, rideste, r.seio.
Ride Ella di cio.7 Ridute voi di ?
Ne rido.
Di che ridono 7
Ridersi di Qualcuno.
886
SIXTY-SECOND LESSON.
We laughed in his face.
To laugh at, to deride some one.
I laugh at (deride) you.
Did you laugh at us ?
We did not laugh at you.
We never laugh at any body.
Noi ci siamo rid di lui.
r Ridersi \
5 Beffarsi £di qualcuno.
( Farsi beffe j
( Mi rido di voi (di Lei).
v MI Defib di voi (di Lei).
Sibeffava Ella di noi?
< Non ci ridevamo di Lei (di voi).
c Non ci beffavamo di Lei (di voi.)
^ Non ci beffiamo mai di nessuno.
5 Non ci facciamo mai beffe di nei
' suno.
Full.
A book full of errors.
Pieno.
Un tibro pieno d' errori.
To afford.
Can you afford to buy that horse ?
I can afford it.
[ cannot afford it.
f Aver di che. Aver con vhe
Ha Ella di che comprare quel ca
vallo?
Ho di che comprarlo.
Non ho di che comprarlo.
Who is there ? Chi 4 la?
It is I. Sono io.
Ob*. C. The impersonal pronoun it is not rendered in Italian.
// is not I.
Is tthe?
It is not he.
Are they your brothers ?
It Is they.
It is not they.
Is if she?
It is she.
It is not she.
Are they your sisters ?
It is they.
It is not they.
It in I who speak.
Is it they who laugh ?
it is you who laugh.
is it thou who hast done it ?
tt is you, gentlemen, whc have said
that.
Non sono io.
E desso?
Non e desso.
Sono idi Lei fratelli (orisUoLer
i vostri fratelli) ?
Sono essi.
Non sono essi.
E dessa?
E dessa.
Non e dessa.
Sono le di Lei sorelle (or le sue, or k
vostre sorelle) ?
Sono esse.
Non sono esse.
Son io che parlo.
Son essi (fern, esse) che ridono 1
E Lei che ride (siete voi che ridete)
Sei tu che 1' hai fatto ?
Siete voi, signori, che avete dett*
cio.
Sono Ioro signori che hanno dottf
cid.
MXTY -SECOND LESSON.
337
We learn Italian, my orother and I.
Fou and I will go into the country.
Vou and he will stay at home.
You will go to the country, and I will
return to town.
A lady. A lady of the court.
What were you doing when your tutor
was here ?
1 was doing nothing.
What did you say 1
I said nothing.
Mio fratello ed io impariamo P ita
liano.
Ella (voi) ed io andremo in earn
pagna.
Ella (voi) ed esso resteranno a casa.
Voi andrete (Ella andra) in cam-
pagna ed io ritornerd in citta.
Una signora Una dama di corte.
Che faceva (facevate) quando il di
Lei (il vostro) precettore era qui 1
Io non faceva niente (nulla).
Chediceva Ella?
Io non diceva niente
EXERCISES.
192.
Where did you take this book from ? — I took it out of the room
(nella camera) of your friend (fern.). — Is it right (permesso) to
take the books of other people ? — It is not right, I know ; but I
wanted it, and I hope that your friend will not be displeased (non
ne sard incresciosa), for I will return it to her as soon as I have
read it. — What is your name ? — My name is William (Gugli-
elmo). — What is your sister's name ? — Her name is Eleanor
(Eleonora). — Why does Charles complain of his sister ? — Because
she has taken his pens. — Of whom are these children complain
ing ? — Francis (Francesco) complains of Eleanor, and Eleanor
of Francis. — Who is right ? — They are both (tuttie due) wrong;
for Eleanor wishes to take Francis's books, and Francis Elea-
nor's.— To whom have you lent Dante's works (le opere di Dante) ?
— I have lent the first volume to William and the second to Louisa
(Luigia). — How is that said in Italian ? — It is said thus. — How
is that said in French ? — That is not said in French. — Has the
tailor brought you your new coat ? — He has brought it me, but
it dees not fit me. — Will he make you another ? — He will make
me another; for, rather than wear it, I will give it away (dar
tia). — Will you use that horse ? — I shall not use it. — Why will
you not use it ? — Because it does not suit me. — Will you pay for
it 1 — I will rather pay for it than use it. — To whom do those fine
books belong (appartengono) ? — They belong to William. — Whc
338 SIXTY-SECOND LESSON
has given them to him ? — His father. — Will he read them ? — lid
▼ill tear them rather than read them. — Who nas told you that'
—He has told me so himself (egli stesso).
193.
What countrywoman is that lady (la signora) ? — She is from
France. — Are you from France ? — No, I am from Germany. —
Why do you not give your clothes to mend ? — It is not worth
while, for I must have (mi abbisognano) new clothes. — Is the coat
which you wear not a good one ? — It is a half-worn coat, and is
good for nothing. — Are you angry with any one (essere in collera
con qualcuno) 1 — I am angry with Louisa, who went to the Opera
without telling me a word of it. — Where were you when she went
out ? — I was in my room. — I assure you that she did not know
it. — Charles the Fifth, who spoke fluently (speditamente) several
European languages, used to say (aveva costume di dire), that wv
should speak (che bisognava parlare) Spanish with the gods,
Italian with our friend (fern.), French with our friend (mas.),
German with soldiers, English with geese (colle ocke), Hungarian
(ungherese) with horses, and Bohemian (boemo) with the devil.
194.
Of what illness did your sister die ? — She died of fever. — How
is your brother ? — My brother is no longer alive. — He died three
months ago. — I am surprised (maravigliato) at it, for he was very
well last summer when I was in the country. — Of what did he
die? — He died of apoplexy. — How is the mother of your friend ?
— She is not (non ista) well ; she had an attack of ague the day
before yesterday, and this morning the fever has returned (le 6
ritornata). — Has she tne intermittent fever ? — I do not know, but
she has often cold fits. — What is become of the woman whom I
saw at your mother's ? — She died this morning of apoplexy. — Dc
your scholars learn their exercises by heart ? — They will tear
them rather than learn them by heart. — What does this man ask
me for ? — He asks you for the money which you owe him. — If
he will repair to-morrow morning (domani mattina) to my house,
I will pay nim what I owe him. — He will rather lose his money
lian repair thither (rendervisi). — Why does the mother of oui
SIXTY-SECOND LESSON. 839
old servant shed tears ? — What has happened to her ? — She sheds
tears because the old clergyman (il vecchio ecclesiastico), her
friend, who was so very good to her (che lefaceva tanto bene), died
a few days ago. — Of what illness did he. die? — He has been
struck with apoplexy. — Have you helped your father to write hia
letters ? — I have helped him. — Will you help me to work when
we go (quando not andremo) to town ? — I will help you to work,
if you help me to get a livelihood.
195.
Have you inquired after the merchant who sells so cheap ?— - J
have inquired after him, but nobody could tell me what has be-
come of him. — Where did he live when you were here three
years ago ? — He lived then (altera) in Charles-street (nelte con-
trada Carlo, or via Carlo), number fifty-seven. — How do you like
this wine ? — I like it very well, but it is a little sour. — How does
your sister like those apples {la mete) ? — She likes them very
well, but she says that they are a little too sweet. — Will you
have the goodness to pass me that plate ? — With much pleasure.
— Shall I (devo) pass you these fishes ? — I will thank you to
(prego di) pass them to me. — Shall I (devo) pass the bread tc
% your sister ? — You will oblige her (Le fard piacere) by passing
it to her (nel porgerglielo). — How does your mother like our food ?
—She likes it very well, but she says that she has eaten enough.
— What dost thou ask me for ? — Will you be kind enough to (La
prego di) give me a little bit (un pezzetto) of that mutton ? — Will
you pass me the bottle, if you please (favorisca) ? — Have you not
drunk enough ? — Not yet, for I am still thirsty. — Shall I (devo
io) give you (versarle) some wine ? — No ; I like cider better. —
Why do you not eat ? — I do not know what to eat. — Who knocks
at the door ? — It is a foreigner. — Why does he cry ? — He cries
because a great misfortune has happened to him. — What has hap-
pened to you ? — Nothing has happened to me. — Where will you
go this evening ? — I do not know where to go. — Where will your
brothers go? — 1 do not know where they will go; as for me, I
shall go to the theatre. — Why do you go to town ? — I go thither
in order to purchase some books. — Will you go thither with me 1
— I will go with you, but I do not know what to do there.
SIXTY THIRD LESSON,
Lezione sessantesima terza.
To get into a scrape.
To get out of a scrape.
got out of the scrape,
rhat man always gets into scrapes,
but he always gets out of them
again.
j- Attirarst cattivi off an.
f Cavarsi d' impiccio.
Mi son cavato d' impiccio.
Quest' uomo s' attira mai sempn
cattivi aftari, ma n' esce sempn
facilmente.
Between.
Amongst or amidst.
To make some one's acquaint-}
ance.
To become acquainted with
somebody.
I have made his or her acquaintance.
I have become acquainted with him
or her.
Are you acquainted with him (her) ?
Do you know him (her) 1
I am acquainted with him (her).
I know him (her).
He or she is an acquaintance of mine.
She or he is my acquaintance.
He is not a friend, he is but an ac-
quaintance.
To enjoy.
Do you enjoy good health ?
To be well.
8he is well.
To imagine,
Fra or tra.
Far conoscenza con qualcuno.
Ho fatto la sua conoscenza.
Lo (la) conosce Ella?
Lo (la) conosco.
E di mi a conoscenza, or
E una mia conoscenza.
Non e un amico, 3 solamente nni
conoscenza.
Godere 2, di.
i Gode Ella buona salute ?
c Gode Ella d' una buona salute ?
C Star bene.
( Essere in buona salute.
{ Sta bene.
I E in buona salute.
i lmmaginare
\* Immaginarsi.
SIXTY -THIRD LESSON.
841
Our fellow-creatures,
fie has not his equal, or his match.
I nostri simili.
Egli non ha 1' uguale.
To resemble some one, to look
like some one.
That man resembles my brother.
That beer looks like water.
Each other
We resemble each other.
They do not resemble each other.
The brother and the sister love each
other, but do not resemble each
other.
Are you pleased with each other?
We are.
So, thus.
4a, or at well as.
The appearance, the counte-
nance.
To show a disposition to.
That man whom you see shows a
desire to approach us.
To look pleased with some one.
To look cross at some one.
\hen I go to see that man, instead of
receiving me with pleasure he looks
displeased.
A good-looking man.
A bad-looking man.
Bad ooking people, or folks
To go to see some one.
Kassomigliare a qualcuno.
Quest' uomo rassomiglia a mio fri
tello.
Questa birra e come acqua.
L' un 1' altro.
Noi ci rassomigliamo.
Eglino (fern, elleno) non si rassc
migliano.
II fratello e .a sorella s' amano, m«
non si rassomigliano.
Siete (sono) con u mi i' un dell' a>
tro?
Lo siamo.
Cosi.
- Siccome, come.
Egualmente che.
In quel modo che.
La ciera (V aspetto, la
sembianza, la vista, la
mostra).
Far vista, far mostra di.
Quell' uomo che vede fa vista d
awicinarsi a noi.
( Far buona cera a qualcuno.
( Accoglier bene qualcuno.
SFar cattiva cera a qualcuno.
Accoglier male qualcuno.
Quando vado da quell' uomo, in
vece di farmi (mostrarmi) buona
cera, egli mi fa (mi mostra) cattiva
cera.
Quando vado da quell' uomo, in vece
d' accogliermi bene, egli m' a<r
coglie male.
Un uomo di buon aspetto.
Un uomo di cattivo aspetto.
Delia gente di cattivo aspetto.
Visitare qualcuno, or far visita a
qualcuno.
54a
To pay some one a visit.
To frequent a place
To frequent societies.
To associate with some one.
SIXTY -THIRb LE&SON.
Restituire la visita a qtulcuno, m
render la visita a qualcuno.
Frequentare un luogo, or andar spe»
so in un luogo.
Frequentare delle societi.
Frequentare qualcuno.
To look like, to appear.
How does he look 1
He looks gay (sad, contented).
You appear very well.
You look like a doctor.
She looks angry, appears to be angry.
They look contented, appear to be con-
tented.
To look good, to appear to be good.
Aver V aspetto (aver V ana)
Che cera ha 1
Ha la cera lieta (trista, contenta).
Ella ha 1' aspetto di star bene.
Ella ha 1' aspetto d' un medico.
Essa ha il sembiante indispettito
Eglino hanno 1' aspetto coiilento
Aver 1' aspetto buono.
To drink someone's health
I drink your health.
It is all over with me.
It is all over.
t Bere alia salute di qualcuno.
t Bevo alia di Lei salute,
t Sono perduto (fern, perduta).
t Sono ho (fem. ita).
E finita.
To hurt some one's feelings.
You have hurt that man's feelings.
Far dispiacere a qualcuno.
Ha fatto dispiacere a quell' uomo.
A place,
know a good place to swim in.
Un luogo.
t Conosco un buon luogo per nna
tare.
To experience, to undergo,
I have experienced a great many mis-
fortunes.
Spenmentare 1.
( Ho sperimentato molte disgrazie.
< Son passato per molte disgrazie.
To suffer*
Soffrire * 3 ; p.
part, sofferto
To open.
To offer.
Aprire * 3 ; u
Offrire* 3; "
" aperto.
" offerto.
To cover.
To cover again.
To discover.
To feel a pain in one's head or
I felt a pain in my eye.
foot.
Coprire*3; " " coperto.
Ricoprire * 3 j c " ricoperto
Scoprire * 3 ; " " scoperto
Soffrir dolori al capo, al piede.
Ho sofferto all' occhio.
SIXTY-THIRD LESSON.
843
To neglect.
&• has neglected his duty.
He neglects to call upon me
To yield.
We must yield to necessity.
To spring forward.
The cat springs upon the rat.
To leap on horseback.
An increase, an augmentation.
For more bad luck.
For more good luck.
The fullness.
For more bad luck (to complete my
bad luck) I have lost my purse.
To lose one's wits.
That man has los his wits, and he
does not know what to do.
Obstinately, by all means.
That man wishes by all means to lend
me his money.
Tofollow.
follow, thou followest, he follows,
*c.
To pur we
To preserve, to save.
Trascurare 1, negligere * 2,
non badare 1 ; past part.
negletto.
Preterite Definite.
Neglessi, negligesti, neglesse
Negligem- negligeste, neglesse:©.
mo,
Ha trascurato il suo dovere.
Egli bada poco a visitarmi.
Cedere 2 ; pret. def. regular,
or cessi, or cedetti.
Bisogna cedere alia necessita.
Lanciarsi 1, or slanciarst 1.
II gatto si slancia sul sorcio.
Lanciarsi a cavallo.
Un aumento (un' aggiunta, un ac*
crescimento).
Per colmo di sventura (d' infelicita).
Per colmo di felicita.
II c* imo.
Per colmo di sventura ho perduto la
mia borsa.
Perdere la testa.
Quell' uomo ha perduto la testa e
non sa che fare.
Ad ogni patio.
Quest' uomo vuole ad ogni patto
prestarmi il suo danaro.
Seguitare 1, seguire * 3.
Seguo or sieguo, segui or siegui
segue or siegue, Ac.
Per seguitare 1, inseguvre * 3
(is conj. like seguire *).
Conservare 1.
EXERCISES.
106.
Must I sell to that man on credit ? — You may sell to him, but
aot on creo; ; you must not trust him, for he will not pay you
23-
344 SIXTY-THIRD LESSON.
— Has he already deceived (ingannare) any body ? — He has
already deceived several merchants who have trusted him. — Must
I trust those ladies ? — You may trust them ; but as to me I shall
not trust them, for I have often been deceived by (dalle) women,
and that is the reason why I say : We must not trust every body.
— Do those merchants trust you ? — They trust me, and I trust
them. — Whom do those gentlemen laugh at ? — They laugh at
those ladies whc wear red gowns (la veste) with yellow ribbon*
— Why do these people laugh at us ? — They laugh at us because
we speak badly. — Ought we (dobbiamo) to laugh at persons whc
speak badly ? — We ought not to laugh at them ; we ought, on the
contrary (devest al contrario), to listen to them, and if they make
blunders (errori), we ought to correct them. — What are you laugh-
ing at ? — T am laughing at your hat ; how long (da quando in
qua) have you worn it so large ? — Since (da che) I returned from
Germany. — Can you afford to (ha Ella di che) buy a horse and
a carriage ? — I can afford it. — Can your brother afford to buy
that large house ? — He cannot afford it. — Will your cousin buy
that horse ? — He will buy it, if it pleases (convenire *) him. — Have
you received my letter ? — I have received it with much pleasure.
I have shown it to my Italian master, who was surprised (che e
nmasto maravigliaio\ for there was not a single fault in it. — HavA
you already received Petrarca's and Boccaccio's works (le opere
del Petrarca e del Boccaccio) ? — I have received those of Boc-
caccio; as to those of Petrarca, I hope to receive them next
week.
197.
Is it thou, Charles, who hast soiled my book ? — It is not I ; it
is your little sister who has soiled it. — Who has broken my fine
inkstand ? — It is I who have broken it. — Is it you who have
spoken of me ? — It is we who have spoken of you, but we have
said of you nothing but good (se non del bene). — Who knocks, at
the doer ? — It is I ; will you open ? — What do you want (desid-
erare) 1 — I come to ask you for the money which you ewe me,
and the books which I lent you. — If you will have the goodness
to com" to-morrow I will return both to you. — Is it your sister
who is playing on the harpsichora ? — It is not she. — Who is it t
SIXTY-THIRD LESSON. 345
—It is my cousin (fern.). — Are they your sisters who are
coming? — It is they. — Are they your neighbours (fern.) who
were laughing at you ? — They are not our neighbours. — Who
are they ? — They are the daughters of the countess whose brother
has bought your house. — Are they the ladies of whom you have
spoken to me ? — They are. — Shall you learn German ? — My
brother and I will learn it. — Shall we go to the country to-
morrow ? — I shall go to the country, and you will remain in
town. — Shall I and my sister go to the opera ? — You and she will
remain at home, and your brother will go to the opera. — What
did you say when your tutor was scolding you (La riprendeva) 1
— I said nothing, because I had nothing to say, for I had not (non
avendo to) done my task, and he was in the right to scold me (di
rampognarmi). — What Were you doing whilst (quando) he was
out (fuori) ? — I was playing on the violin, instead of doing what
he had given me to do. — What has my brother told you ? — He
has told me that he will be the happiest man when he knows how
(quando sapra) to speak Italian well.
198.
Why do you associate with those people ? — I associate with
them (lafrequento) because they are useful to me. — If you con-
tinue to associate with them you will get into bad scrapes, for
they have many enemies. — How does your cousin conduct him-
self? — He does, not conduct himself very well, for he is always
getting into some scrape (or other). — Do you not sometimes get
into scrapes ? — It is true (vero) that I sometimes get into them,
but 1 always get out of them again (ma n' esco sempre felicemente).
— Do you see those men who seem desirous (chefanno vista) of
approaching us ? — I see them, but I do not fear them ; for they
nurt nobody. — We must go away (Usogna allontanarci), for I do
not like tc mix with people whom I do not know. — I beg of you
not to be afraid of them (averne paura), for I perceive my uncle
among them. — Do you know a good place to swim in ? — 1 know
one. — Where is it ? — On that side of the river, behind the wood,
near the high road (vidua alia via maestra). — When shall we go
to swim ? — This evening, if you like. — Will you wait for me
Vefore the city gate ? — I shall wait for you there ; but I beg of
346
SIXTY-FOURTH LESSON.
you not to forget it. — You know that 1 never forget my promises.
— Where did you become acquainted with that lady ? — I became
acquainted with her at the house of one of my relations. — Why
does your cousin ask me for money and books ? — He is a fool (un
pazzo) ; for of me (a me), who am his nearest relation (il suo piu
prossimo parente) and his best friend, he asks nothing. — Why did
you not come to dinner (venir a pranzare) ? — I have been
hindered, but you have been able to dine without me (senza d\
me). — Do you think (credere) that we shall not dine, if you can-
not come ? — How long (sino a quando) did you wait for me ?—
We waited for you till a quarter past seven, and as you did not
come, we dined without you. — Have you drunk my health ? —
We have drunk your health, and that of your parents.
SIXTY-FOURTH LESSON.
Lezione sessantesima quarta.
How good you are 1
How foolish he is !
How foolish she is !
How rich that man is !
How handsome that woman is !
How much kindness you have for
me!
How many obligations I am under to
you!
To be under obligations to some
one.
I am under many obligations to him.
How many people!
How happy you are !
How much wealth that man has !
How much money that man has spent
in his life!
■ Quanto Ella £ buona! or aitnply.
Quanto $ buono !
Quanta bonta !
Qua nto & sciocco !
Quanto e sciocca !
Quanto e ricco quell' uomo !
Quanto $ bella quella donna !
Quanta bonta Ella ha per me'
Quante obbligazioni Le debbo!
Quanto vi son debitore !
Aver (dovere) delle obbliga
zioni verso qualcuno.
Gli debbo molte obbligazioni
Quanta gente !
Quanto Ella 3 felice '
Quante ricchezze ha quell' uomo*
Quanto danaro ha speso quell' uomc
nella sua vita \
SIXTY-} OURTH LESSON.
847
To be obliged to some one for some-
thing.
To be indebted to some one for some-
thing.
t am Indebted to him (to her) for it.
To thank.
Tb thank some one for some-
thing.
I thank you for the trouble you hate
taken for me.
You have no reason for it.
Is there any thing more great ?
* Is there any thing more cruel ?
Is there any thing more wicked ?
Can any thing be more handsome ?
How large 7
How high?
How deep ?
Of what size?
Of what height?
Of what depth?
Of what height is his or her house ?
It is nearly fifty feet high.
Our house is thirty feet broad.
That table i? six feet long.
That river is twenty feet deep.
The sue.
Of what size is that man ?
How was that child dressed ?
It was dressed in green.
The man with the blue coat.
The woman with the red gown
Esser obbligato verso qualcuno per
qualche cosa.
Esser debitore verso (or a) qualcuno
di qualche cosa.
Gliene sono debitore.
Ringraziare (governs the ac-
cusative of the person, and
the preposition per of the
object, as in English).
Ringraziare qualcuno per
qualche cosa.
La ringrazio per la pena ch' Ella si
e1 data per me. (or, Vi ringrazio
per 1' incomodo £).
c Non ne vale il prezzo.
\ Non ne vale la pena.
Che v' e di piu grande ?
Che v' 6 di piu crudele ?
Che v' & di piu cattivo ?
V d qualche cosa di piii bello ?
Di che grandezza ?
Quanto £ alto (alta) ?
Quanto e* profondo (profonda) ?
Quanto e* alta la sua casa ?
E alta cinquanta piedi incirca.
La nostra casa £ larga trenta piedi.
Quella tavola £ lunga sei piedi.
Questo flume e* profondo vent
piedi.
La statura, grandezza, forma
Di quale statura S quell' uomo ?
Come era vestito quel fanciulio?
+ Egli era vestito di verde.
t L' uorno dall' abito turchino.
t La donna dalla veste rossa.
848
8IXTY-F0URTH LESSON.
True.
Is it true that his house is burnt ?
It Is true.
Is it not!
Is it not true 1
Vero.
E vero che la sua easa i abbruc
data?
E vero.
Non & vero ?
Non & egli vero 1
Forse.
V andrd forse.
Dividere * 2 ; p. part, diviso ;
pret. def. divisi.
Perhaps,
I shall perhaps go thither.
To share, to divide
Whose ? I Di chi ? (See Lessons XXL
I and XXIX.)
Ob*. The absolute possessive pronoun, mine, thine, &c, when it is preceded
by the verb to be, eesere, is in Italian rendered merely by the possessive pro-
noun. Ex.
Whose horse is this ?
It is mine.
Whose horses are these ?
They are mine.
Whose house is this ?
It is mine.
Whose houses are these?
They are mine.
To run up.
Many men had run up ; but instead of
extinguishing the fire, they set to
plundering.
To run to the assistance of some one.
Di chi e questo cavallo ?
E mio.
Di chi son questi cavalli ?
Sono miei.
Di chi e questa casa ?
E mia.
Di chi son queste case?
Sono mie.
To extinguish.
The miscreant.
Accorrere * 2 ; past part, ac-
corso; pret. def. accorsi.
Molti uomini erano accorsi, ma in
vece d' estinguere il fuoco, s' erano
messi a predare.
Accorrere al soccorso di qualcuno.
Estinguere * ; p. part, estinto ,
pret. def. estinsi.
Lo scellerato.
To save, to deliver.
To save any body's life.
To plunder (to rob).
To set about something.
Have they succeeded in extinguishing
the fire ?
They have succeeded in it.
Salvare 1. Liber are 1.
Salvare la vita a qualcuno.
Predare 1.
Mettersi a qualche cosa.
Sono pervenuti ad estinguere
fuoco 1
Vi sono oervenuti.
SIXTY-FOURTH LESSOff.
*4S
The watch.
11m watch indicates the hours
To indicate, to mark.
To quarrel.
To quarrel with some one.
To dispute (to contend) about
something.
About what are these people dis-
puting?
They are disputing about who shall go
first.
Thus or so.
To be ignorant of.
Not to know.
The day before.
The day before that day was Saturday.
The day before Sunday is Saturday.
JL' oriuolo.
TV oriuolo indlca le ore.
Indicare 1.
Querellarsi 1.
Rirnproverare qualcuno.
Disputare sopra qualche cosa.
Sopra che cosa disputano quegl
uominil
Disputano a -hi tocca andare i)
prirao.
Cost, in questa guisa.
Ignorare I.
Non sapere.
La vigiKa.
La vigilia di quel giorno era un at.
bato. '
La vigilia di domenica & sabato.
EXERCISES.
199.
How does your uncle look (che cera ha — ) ? — He looks (ha la
eera) very gay (lietissima), for he is much pleased with his chil-
dren,— Do his friends look as gay (hanno la cera cost lieta) as he ?
— They, on the contrary, look sad, because they are discontented.
My uncle has no money, and is always contented ; and his
friends, who have a good deal of it, are scarcely ever so. — Do
you like your sister ? — I like her much, and as she is (ed essendo)
very good-natured (compiacentissima) to me, I am so to her ; but
how do you like your sister ? — We love each other, because we
are pleased with each other. — A certain (certo) man liked much
wine, but he found in it (gli) two bad qualities (la qualita). " If
L put water to it," said he, " I spoil it, and if I do not put any to
»t, it spoils me (mi guasta me)." — Does your cousin resembk
350 SIXTY-FOURTH LESSON.
you ? — He resembles me. — Do your sisters resemble each other 1
—They do not resemble each other ; for the elder (la primo-
genita) is idle and naughty, and the younger (la cadetta) assid-
uous and good-natured towards every body. — How is your aunt ?
— She is very well. — Does your mother enjoy good health ? —
She imagines she enjoys (essa s* immagina di godere) good
health, but I believe she is mistaken (ch' essa sJ inganni, subj.),
for she has had a bad cough (la tosse) these six months, of which
(della quale) she cannot get rid. — Is tnat man angry with you ?
—I think he is angry with me because I do not go to see him ;
but I do not like to go to his house, for when I go to him, instead
of receiving me with pleasure, he looks displeased. — You must
not believe that ; he is not angry with you, for he is not so bad as
he looks (come ne ha V aspetto). — He is the best man in the (del)
world ; but one must know him in order to appreciate him (per
polerlo apprezzare). — There is a great difference (la differenza)
between you and him ; you look pleased with all those who come
to see you, and he looks cross with them.
200.
Is it right (sta bene) to laugh thus at every body ? — If I laugh
(quando mi beffo) at your coat, I do not laugh at every body. —
Does your son resemble any one ? — He resembles no one. — Why
do you not drink ? — I do not know what to drink, for I like good
wine, and yours looks like vinegar (e come aceto). — If you wish
to have some other I shall go down (discendero) into the cellar to
fetch you some. — You are too polite, Sir ; I shall drink no more
to-day. — Have you known my father long ? — I have known him
long, for I made his acquaintance when I was yet at school. —
We often worked for one another, and we loved each other like
brothers. — I believe it, for you resemble each other. — When I
had not done my exercises he did them for me, and when he had
not done his I did them for him. — Why does your father send
for the physician ? — He is ill ; and as the physician does not
come (mm venendo), he sends for him. — Ah (Ah), it is all over
with me>! — But, bless me (Dio mio), why do you cry thus ?— I
have been robbed of my gold rings, my best clothes, and all my
money ; that is the reason why I cry. — Do not make (non faceup
SIXTY-FOURTH LESSOR. 85i
«o much noise, for it is we who have taken them all (tutto cid),
:n order to teach you ( per apprenderle) to take better care (ad
aver piu cara) of your things (effetti), and to shut the door of
your room when you go out. — Why do you look so sad ? — I have
experienced great misfortunes. — After having lost all my money,
. was beaten by bad-looking men ; and, to my still greater ill
iuok, 1 hear that my good uncle, whom I love so much, has been
struck with apoplexy. — You must not afflict yourself (affligersi)
so much, for you know that we must yield to necessity (necessita
non ha legge).
201.
Can you not get rid of that man ? — I cannot get rid of ;im, for
ne will absolutely (ad ogni patto) follow me. — Has he not lost his
wits ? — It may be (pud darsi). — What does he ask you for ? — He
wishes to sell me a horse which I do not want.' — Whose houses
are those? — They are mine. — Do these pens belong to > i ? —
No, they belong to my sister. — Are those (sono quelle) th< pens
«vith which she writes so well ? — They are the same (le medesime).
— Whose gun is this ?— It is my father's. — Are these books your
sister's ? — They are hers. — Whose carriage is this ? — It is mine.
— Which is the man of whom you complain ? — It is he (quello)
who wears (che indossa) a red coat. — " What is the difference
(che dijferenza c* e) between a watch and me ?" inquired (do-
mando) a lady of a young officer. " My lady," replied he (questi
le rispose), " a watch marks the hours, and near you'(e presso di
Lei) one forgets them." — A Russian peasant, who had never
seen asses (un asino), seeing several (vedendone alcuni) in France,
said (disse) : " Lord (Bio mio), what large hares (la lepre) there
are in this country ! " — How many obligations 1 am under to you,
my dear friend ! you have saved my life ! without you I had been
lost (io era ito). — Have those miserable men hurt you ? — They
have beaten and robbed me ; and when you ran to my assistance
Lney were about (erano sul punto) to strip (spogliare) and kill
me.— I am happy to have delivered you from the hands of those
robbers (il briccone). — How good you are !
SIXTY- FIFTH LESSON.
Lezione sessantesima quintet.
To propose,
I propose, 6c
[ propose going on that journey.
He proposes joining a hunting party
A game at chess.
A game at billiards.
A game at cards.
To succeed.
I succeed, Ac.
Do you succeed in doing that 1
I do succeed in it
To endeavour.
I endeavour to do it.
1 endeavour to succeed in it.
Endeavour to do better.
Since, considering.
Since yuu are happy, why do yon
gomplain 7
Proporsi * (is conjugated likr
porre, Lesson XLIV.).
'Mi propongo, ti proponi, si pro-
pone.
Ci proponiamo, vi proponete, si pro
pongono.
P. part, propostosi ; Put. proporrd j
Pret. dcf. proposi, proponesti, &c
Mi propongo di far questo viag
gio.
Si propone d' andare ad una partit*
di caccia.
Una partita agli scacchi (or a
scacchi).
Una partita al bigliardo.
Una partita alle carte.
Riuscire * (a before Inf.).
Riesco, riesci, riesce.
Riusciamo, riuscite, riesconc
Riesce, Ella a far cid?
Vi riesco.
Sforzarsi (di before Inf.)
Mi sforzo di farlo.
Mi sforzo di riuscirvi.
i La si sforzi di far meglio.
I Sforzatevi di far meglio.
Giacche ^poiche, daccke, da
che).
Giacche Ella e felice, perche La si
lagna? or Poichd siete fieliei
perche vi Iagnate 1
SIXTY-FIFTH LESSON.
359
To be thoroughly acquainted
with a thing,
lo make one's self thoroughly
acquainted with a thing.
That man understands that business
perfectly.
I understand that well.
f Essere in istato difar qual
che cosa.
j" Conoscere qualche cosa a
fondo,
f Informarst (istruirsi) di
qualche cosa.
Quest' uomo d istruito di quell' af
fare.
Sono istruito di cid.
Since or from.
From that time.
From my childhood.
From morning until evening.
From the beginning to the end.
From here to there.
1 have had that book these two years.
I have lived in Paris these three years.
Da poi (or simply da).
Da quel momento.
Dalla mia giovinezza (infanzia).
Dal mattino fino alia sera.
Da mane a sera.
Dal principio sino alia fine.
Da qui fino la.
Ho questo libro da due anni in poi
Ho questo libro da due anni.
Dimoro a Parigi da tre anni.
Dimoro a Parigi da tre anni in poi
To blow, to blow out.
To allege (to bring).
I allege, <ftc.
We allege, &c
'.b the same manner are conjugated
To conduct.
To infer.
To introduce.
To produce.
To reconduct.
To reduce, to subdue.
To produce again.
To seduce
To translate.
Sqffiare I.
(Addurre* 2; formerly addu
\
cere.
Pre*. Adduco ; P. part, addotto ;
Pret. def. addussi ; Put. addurrd
Adduco, adduci, adduce.
Adduciamo, adducete, adducono
Condurrc * 2, formerly
AJedurre * 2, "
Introdurre * 2, "
Produrre * 2, "
Ricondurre * 2, "
Ridurre * 2, "
Riprodurre * 2, "
Sedurre* 2, "
Tradurre * 2, "
conducere.
deducere.
introducer*
producers
riconducere
riducere.
riproducert
seducere.
traducere.
Ob*. A. Verbs ending in ucere, gliere, nere, aere, have been contracted, su
Ibat they have two infinitives; the ancient Latin one, as adducere, to allege;
Kgliere, to gather (to catch) ; ponerc, to put ; traere, to draw ; and the new
354
SIXTY-FIFTH LESSON.
contracted one, as : addurre, corre, porre, trarrt. The second contracted ont
is always used in the infinitive from which the future and the present of th«
conditional (of which hereafter) are formed, as • addurrl. I shall allege ; co~rd\
I ^hall gather; porro, I shall put; irarrd, I shall draw, &c. (See Lesson
XL VI) But all the other tenses are In such verbs formed from the ancient
Latin infinitive.
To put, to place.
I put, &c.
We put, Ac
To draw.
I draw, &c
We draw, Ac.
In the same manner are conjugated :
Astrarre, to abstract. i
Attrarre, to attract.
Contrarre, to contract.
To gather.
I gather, &c.
We gather, Ac.
in the same manner are conjugated i
To choose.
To untie, to loose.
To take.
* And all its compounds, such as :
Anteporre, to prefer.
Apporre, to add.
Comporre, to compound.
Contrapporre5 to oppose.
Deporre, to depose.
Diaporre, to dispose
Esporre, to expose.
Frapporre, to interpose.
■ In verbs in gliere the contracted are
Porre * ; formerly ponere K
Pongo, poni, pone.
Poniamo, ponete, pongono.
Past part, posto; Pre/, def. posi;
Put. porrd.
Trarre * 2 ; formerly traere.
Traggo, traggi, tragge or trae.
Traggiamo, traete, traggono.
Past part, tratto ; Pret. def. trassi j
Put. trarrd.
Detrarre,
Estrarre,
Sottrarrc,
to detract,
to extract,
to draw away.
Corre * 2, or cogliere *.
Colgo, cogli, cogUe.
Cogliamo, cogliete, colgono.
Past part, colto ; Pret. def. cols)
Put. corro or coglierd.
Scerre * or scegliere 2 (scelto, sceUi
scerrb or sceglierb).
Sciorre * or sciogliere 2 (sciolta
sciolsi, sciorrd or sciogliero).
Torre * or togliere 2 (toUo, tolm
torrb or toglierb).
Imporre,
Opporre,
Posporre,
Preporre,
Proporre,
Soprapporre,
Sottoporre,
Supporre,
more generally
to impose,
to oppose,
to postpone
to prefer,
to propose,
to put over,
to subdue,
to suppose
used in poetry.
To drink.
I drink, <fee.
We drink, Ac.
SIXTY-FIFTH LESSON.
Bere * or bevcre.
*H>
Bevo, bevi, beve.
Bcviamo, bevete, bevcno.
Past part, beuto or bevuto; Pret
def. bevvi; Fut. berd.
Obs. B. Besides the above there are a few other verbs terminated in m
.ng. i. e. with the accent on the last syllable but one, which are not contracted
a the infinitive, but only in the future (and consequently in the conditional,
Hereafter), when they reject the letter e of the last syllable but one (Lessor
XLVL). They are:
Put. avrb.
" dwrb.
" potrb.
» aaprb.
1 vedrb.
" parrd.
Ob». C. When the verbs in ere long have / or n before that termination.
mose letters are in the contracted form of the future and conditional, for the
•ake of euphony, changed into r, as :
To have.
Avere *
Tb be obliged (owe).
Dotlre
Tb be able (can).
PoUre*
7b know.
• Sapire *
To see.
Vedlre*
To appear.
Porire *
To remain.
Rimirane.
Put.
rimarrb.
To hold.
Tetare
(i
terrb.
To ache.
DoUre
H
dorrd.
To be worth.
Voters
if
varrd.
To be willing.
VoUrs
((
torrS.
To destroy.
To construct.
Distruggere*.
P. part, distrutto; pret. def. die*
trusai.
Costruire * (isco).
P. part, costruito and costrutto
Pret. def. costrussi, costruieti, Ac
To reduce the price
To reduce the price to a crown.
Co translate into Italian.
To translate from Italian into Eng-
lish.
To translate from one language into
another.
I introduce him to you.
i present him to you.
To present.
Ridurre * il prezzo.
Ridurre il ptezzo ad uno scudo
Tradurre in italiano.
Tradurre dall' italiano in inglese
Tradurre da una lingua in un' altr*
L' introduco da Let
Glielo presento.
Presentare I.
856
SIXTY> PIPTH LESSON.
Seff.
Selves.
Myself.
Thyself.
Himself.
Herself.
Ourselves.
Yourselves.
Themselves.
One's self.
Ae himself has tolc it me.
He has told me, myself (not to another
person).
I also told him the same.
In the same manner,
[t is all the same-
One does not like to flatter one's self.
Even.
Even not.
He has not even money enough to buy
some bread.
We must love ?very body, even our
enemies.
Again (once more).
He speaks again (anew).
To fall.
The price of the merchandise falls.
To deduct, to lower.
To overcharge, to ask too much.
Not having overcharged you, „ cannot
deduct any thing.
An ell, a yard.
K metre {measure).
Stesso or medesimo; fern.
stessa or medesima.
Plur. Stessi or medesimi ,
fem. stesse or medesime
Io stesso, or io medesimo.
Tu stesso, or tu medesimo.
Egli stesso, or egli medesimo.
Ella stessa, or Ella medesima
Noi stessi, or noi medesimi.
Voi stessi, or voi medesimi.
( Eglino stessi, or eglino medesimi.
I Elleno stesse, or elleno medesime.
Se stesso, or se medesimo.
Me 1' ha detto egli stesso (egli me
desimo).
L' ha detto a me stesso (a me me-
desimo). *
Gli ho detto anch' io lo stesso.
Nello stesso modo.
E tutto lo stesso (d tutt' uno).
Non piace lusingar se stesso (or s*
medesimo).
Anche.
Nemmeno.
Non ha nemmeno abbas tanza danars
per comprar del pane.
Bisogna amar tutti, anche i nostri
nemici.
Di nuovo, un' altra volte.
Parla di nuovo.
SAbbassare 1.
Ribassare 1.
t La mercanzia ribassa di prezzo.
SDiminuire (isco).
Dedurre* (formerly deducere)
f Domandar piil die la cosa non
vale.
Non avendo domandato troppo
(piu che la cosa non vale), non
posso diminuir niente.
Un braccio; pi braccia: ua' &unt
Un metro.
SIXTY- FIFTH LESSON.
35'^
To produce (to yield,
profit, to bring i?i).
to
fljw much doeB that employment
yield you a year?
An employment.
To make one's escape. \
To run away (to flee). £
To take to one's heels. /
To desert.
Hft deserted the battle.
He deserted his colours.
To run away.
The thief has run away.
By no means.
Not at all.
Riportare \.
Rendere * (p part, reso; pret.
def. resi).
Dare * (p. part, dato ; pret
def. diedi and detti).
Quanto Le rende quest' impiego ail
anno?
Lin impiego (un offizio)
P render la fuga, fuggirsene
Disertare, soapy are 1.
Egli ha abbandonato la battaglia.
Egli ha disertato la bandiera.
Evader si, fuggirsene.
II ladro se n' £ fuggito.
Non mica, in nessun modo.
Niente aifatto.
EXERCISES.
202.
Will you go to Mr. Vimerati to-night ? — I shall perhaps go.—
And will your sisters go ? — They will, perhaps. — Had you any
oleasure (divertirsi) yesterday at the concert ? — I had no pleasure
•here ; for there was such a multitude of people (tantagente) that we
oould hardly get in. — I bring you a pretty present with which you
will be much pleased. — What is it? — It is a silk cravat. — Where
is it ? — I have it in my pocket (nella mia tasca). — Does it please
you ? — It pleases me much, and I thank you for it with all my
neart I hope that you will at last (finalmente) accept (accettare)
something of (da) me. — What do you intend to give me ? — I will
not tell you ; for if I tell you, you will have no pleasure when I
give it you (glielo darb). — Have you seen any one at the market 1
— I have seen a good many people there. — How were they
dressed ? — Some were dressed in blue, some in green, some in
358 SIXTY-FIFTH LESSON.
yellow, and several {diver si altri) in red. — Who are those men \
— The one who is dressed in gray is my neighbour, and t: e man
with the black coat the physician, whose son has given my neigh
bour a blow with a stick. — Who is the man with the green coat ?
— He is one of my relations. — Are there many philosophers in
your country ? — There are as many there as in yours. — How
does this hat fit me ? — It fits you very well. — How does that coat
fit your brother ? — It fits him admirably. — Is your brother as tall
(grande) as you ? — He is taller than I, but I am older than he. —
Of what size (di quale statura) is that man ? — He is five feet and
four inches (il pollice) high. — How high is the house of our land-
lord ? — It is sixty feet high.— -Is your well deep ? — Yes, Sir, foi
it is fifty feet deep. " There are many learned men (il dotto) in
Rome, are there not (n9 e vero)V Milton asked a Roman.
" Not so many as when you were there," answered (rispose) the
Roman.
203.
Is it true that your uncle is arrived ? — I assure you that he is
arrived. — Is it true that the king has assured you of his assist-
ance (/' assistenza) ? — I assure you that it is true. — Is it true that
the six thousand (mt7a, plur.) men whom we were expecting have
arrived ? — I have heard so. — Will you dine with us ? — I cannot
dine with you, for I have just eaten. — Will your brother drink a
glass of wine ? — He cannot drink, for I assure you that he has
just drunk. — Why are these men quarrelling ? — They are quar-
relling because they do not know what to do. — Have they suc-
ceeded in extinguishing the fire ? — They have at last succeeded
in it ; but it is said that several houses have been (siano state,
subj.) burnt. — Have they not been able to save any thing ? —
They have not been able to save any thing ; for, instead of extin-
guishing the fire, the miserable wretches (lo scellerato)f who had
come up, set to plundering. — What has happened? — A great
misfortune has happened. — Why did my friends set out without
me ? — They waited for you till twelve o'clock, and seeing that
you did not come they set out. — What is the day before Monday
called ? — The day before Monday is Sunday. — Why did you not
run to the assistance (in aiuto) of your neighbour whose house
SIXTY-FIFTH LESSON. 869
aas been burnt ?— I was quite ignorant (ignorare interamente) of
ais house being on fire (che V tncendio fosse nella di ltd casa).
204.
Well (Ebbene) ! does your sister make any progress ? — Sh6
makes some, but you make more than she. — You flatter me.—
Not at all ; I assure you I am more satisfied with you than with
all my other pupils. — Do you already know what has happened ?
— I have not heard any thing — The house of our neighbour has
been burnt down (abbruciata). — Ha\e they not been able to save
any thing ? — They were very fortunate (felicissimi) in saving
the persons who were in it ; but out of the things (delle cose) that
were .here (trovarsi), they could save nothing. — Who told you
that ? — Our neighbour himself (istesso) has told it me. — Why are
you without a light (senza lume)! — The wind blew it out (V ha
spento) when you came in. — What is the price of this cloth ? — ]
sell it at three crowns and a half the ell. — I think (trovare) it very
dear. Has the price of cloth not fallen (diminuito) ? — It has not
fallen ; the price of all goods (la mercanzia) has fallen, except
that of cloth (eccettuato quello del panno). — I will give you three
crowns for it. — I cannot let you have (dare*) it for that price (a
questo prezzo), for it costs me more (costa piu a me). — Will you
have the goodness to show me some pieces (la pezta) of English
cloth ? — With much pleasure. — Does this cloth suit you ? — It
does not suit me. — Why does it not suit you 1 — Because it is too
dear ; if you will lower the price, I shall buy twenty yards of it
—Not having asked too much, I cannot take off any thing.
24
SIXTY-SIXTH LESSOiM
Lezione sessantesvma sesta.
A kind, sort (a species).
Miat kind of fruit is that 1
A stone (of a fruit).
A stone of a peach, an apricot, a
plum. *
Stone-fruit.
Jne must break the stone before one
comes at the kernel.
A kernel.
An almond.
Kernel-fruit.
It is a kernel-fruit.
To gather.
To gather fruit.
To serve up the soup.
To bring in the dessert.
The fruit.
An apricot.
A peach.
A plum.
An anecdote.
Roast-meat.
The last
Last week.
Last year.
To cease, to leave ojf
I leave off reading.
She leaves off speaking
To avoid.
To escape.
To escape a misfortune.
Una sorta.
Che sorta di frutto £ questo ?
Un nocciolo.
Un nocciolo di pesca, di alblcoeco
di prugna.
Frutto da nocciolo.
Bisogna rompere il nocciolo per a*e
la mandola.
Un acino, una mandola.
Una mandola.
Frutti da acino.
IS un frutto da acino.
Corre* or cogliere.
Cogliere frutti.
Portar in tavola la zuppa,
Portar in tavola la frutta
II frutto.
Un albicocco.
Una pesca.
Una prugna.
Un aneddoto.
Dell' arroato.
L' ultimo, 1' ultima.
{ La settimana scorsa.
I La settimana passata.
L' anno scorso (passato).
Cessare 1 .
Cesso di (or dal) Ieggere.
Cessa di (or dal) parlare.
Evitare 1.
Scampare I, scappare 1,
Scampare da una diegrazia.
SIXTY-SIXTH LESSON.
36]
Ha ran away to avoid death.
To do without a thing.
Can you do without bread ?
I can do without it.
There are many things which we must
do without.
To execute a commission. \
To acquit one's self of a com- >
mission. j
I have executed your commission.
Have you executed my commission ?
I have executed it
To do one's duty.
To discharge, to do, or to fulfil
one's duty.
That man always does his duty.
That man always fulfils his duty.
To rely, to depend upon some-
thing.
He depends upon it.
I rely upon you.
Yon may rely upon him.
To suffice, to be sufficient.
In that bread sufficient for you ?
It is sufficient for me.
It is sufficient for me, for thee, <fec.
Will that money be sufficient for that
man?
it will be sufficient for him.
uittle wealth suffices for the wise.
Was that man contented with that
il
Ha preso la fuga per iscampare dalla
morte.
Scappd per fuggir la morte.
SPrivarsi di qualche cosa.
Far a meno di qualche cosa.
( Pud Ella privarsi di pane ?
( Pud Eiia M a meno del pane ?
Posso fame a meno.
Vi sono moltissime cose di cui d no
cessario fare a meno.
Far una commissione.
Ho fatto ia di Lei commissione.
Ha Ella fatto la mia commissione?
L' ho fatta.
Far il suo dovere.
Adempiere il suo dovere.
Quest1 uomo fa sempre il suo do-
vere.
Quest' uomo adempie sempre U sue
dovere.
{ Contare su qualche cosa,
\ Far capitale di qualche cos i
Ci conta.
( Fo capitale di Lei
I Mi fido di Lei.
r Pud fidarsi a (or di) lui.
< Pud fidarsene.
' Pud far capitale di lui.
Bastare.
Le basta questo paue ?
Mi basta.
Mi Dasta, ti basta, Ac.
Questo danaro bastera a quell
uomo?
Gli bastera,
Poca for tuna basta al savio.
Quest' uomo si d egli contentato 4*
quella somma ?
362
SIXTY-SIXTH LfiSSON.
das that sum been sufficient for that
man?
It has been sufficient for him.
He has been contented with it
To be contented with something.
It will be sufficient for him, if you will
only add a few crowns.
He will be contented, if **m will only
add a few crowns.
To add.
To build.
Tb embark, to go on board,
A sail.
TosetsaiL
To set sail for.
To sail for America.
TosaU.
Under full sail.
To sail under fall sal
Be embarked on the sixteenth of last
month.
He sailea on the third instant.
The instant, the present month.
The fourth or fifth instant
The letter is dated the sixth instant.
That is to say (i. e.).
Ei catiera (etc.).
My pen (quill) is better than yours.
£ write better than you.
Quella somma & bastata a aroMt
uomo 1 t
Gli e bastata. Gli bastd.
Se n' & contentato.
Contentarsi di qualche cosa.
Gli bastera se vuol aggiugnenri ssiir
mente qualche scudo.
Se ne contentera se vuol aggiugnervi
appena pochi scudi.
Aggiungere * 2 (p. part, ag
giunto; pret. def. aggiunsi).
Costruire * 2, isco (past. part.
costruito or costrutto (p. d.
construssi).
.Fabbricare 1.
Imbarcarsi. Entrar nella
nave,
Una vela.
( t Mettere alia vela.
C t Spiegare le vele.
t Par vela per.
i Far vela per 1' America.
(. Andare in America.
Andare a vela.
c A piene vele.
( A gonfie vele.
Spiegar tutte le vele.
fS' € imbarcato il sedici del m&M
scorso.
^ E entrato nella nave il sedici del
mese passato.
Ha fatto vela il tre del corrente.
II corrente.
II quattro, o il cinque del corrente
La lettera $ del sei corrente.
Cioe, vale a dire.
Eccetera, e simili.
La mia penna € migliore dells <U
Lei.
Scrivo meglio di Lei.
They will warm the soup.
Dinner (or supper) is on the table (is
nerved up).
Si fara scaldare la tuppa.
E intavoia.
SIXTY-SIXTH LESSON. 36*
Do yea choose some soup ?
Shall I help you toftome soup?
will trouble you for a little.
To serve up, to attend.
Desidera Ella della zuppal
Desidera Ella che io Le terra ielb
zuppa 1
{ t Gliene domando un poco.
I t Me ne favorisca un poco.
Servire, presentare, ofrirt.
EXERCISES.
205.
You are learning Italian ; does your master let you translate
— He lets me read, write, and translate. — Is it useful to translate
in learning a foreign language ? — It is useful to translate when
you nearly know (quando gid si sa) the language you are learn-
ing ; but while (quando) you do not yet know any thing (nan se ne
sa niente) it is entirely (affatto) useless. — What does your Italian
master make you do ? — He makes me read a lesson ; afterwards
he makes me translate English exercises into Italian on the lesson
which he has made me read ; and from the beginning to the end
of the lesson he speaks Italian to me, and I have to (deoo) answer
him in the very language (nella lingua stessa) which he is teach,
ing me. — Have you already learnt much in that manner ? — You
see that 1 have already learnt something, for I have hardly been
learning it three months, and I already understand you when
you speak to me, and can answer you. — Can you read (it) as well
(del pari) 1 — I can read and write as well as speak (it). — Does
your master also teach German ? — He teaches it. — Wishing to
make (desiderando fare) his acquaintance, I must beg of you
(La prego) to introduce me to him. — It will give me (Mi faro un)
pleasure to introduce you to him. — When do you wish to go to
him I — To-mprrow in the afternoon (dopo mezzo giorno), if you
olease (se Le aggrada).
206.
How many exercises do you translate a day ? — If the exercises
are not difficult, I translate from three to four every day (da ire
a quattro al giorno) ; and when they are so, I translate but one
(uno solo).— -How many have you already done to-day ? — It is the
364 SIXTY -SIXTH LESSON
third which am translating (sto traducendo) ; but to-monow 1
hope to be able to do one more (uno di piu), for I shall be alone
(solo). — Have you paid a visit to my aunt ? — I went to see hei
two months ago (or fan due mesi), and as she looked displeased
I have not gone to her any more since that time (da quel tempo).
—How do you do to-day 1 — I am very unwell (molto male).—
How do you like that soup ? — I think (La trovo) it is very bad ;
since I have lost my appetite (/' appeMto), I do not like any thing
(non mi piace piu niente). — How much does that employment
bring in (rendere *) to your father ? — It brings him in (gli rende,
or gli da) more than four thousand (mila, plur. of mille) crowns.
— What news is there (dire *) ? — They say nothing new. — What
do you intend to do to-morrow ? — I propose joining a hunting
party. — Does your brother purpose (divisa egli) playing (far) a
game at billiards ? — He proposes playing a game at chess. — Why
do some people ( perche mai sonvi persone) laugh when I speak ?
— Those are unpolite people ; you have only to laugh also (Ella
pure), and they will no longer laugh at you. — If you will do as 1
do, you will speak well. — You must study a little (Le abbisogna
studiare qualche poco) every day, and you will soon be no longer
afraid to speak. — I will endeavour to follow your advice, for I have
resolved (mi son proposto) to rise every morning at six o'clock,
to study till ten o'clock, and to go to bed early. — Why does your
sister complain ? — I do not know ; since (quando) she succeeds
in every thing, and since she is (e cA' e) happy, even happiei
than you and I, why does she complain ? — Perhaps she com-
plains because she is not thoroughly acquainted (wow e istruita)
with that business (in tale facenda). — That may be (pud darsi).
207.
Have they served up the soup ? — They have served it up some
minutes ago. — Then (allora) it must be (dev' essere) cold, and I
only like soup hot (la zuppa calda). — They will warm it for you.
—You will oblige me. — Shall I help you to some (desidera
Ella) of this roast meat ? — I will trouble you for a little.—
Will you eat some of this mutton ? — I thank you ; I like fowl
better. — May I offer you (desidera Ella che Le serva) some
wine * — T will trouble you lor a little (me ne favorisca un poco)
SIXTY -SEVENTH LESSON. &t>6
—Have they already brought in (portato in tavold) the dessert ?—
They have brought it in. — Do you like fruit ? — I like fruit, but 1
lave no more appetite. — Will you eat a little ctoeese ? — I will
eat a little. — Shall I help you to English or Dutch cheese ? — 1
will eat a little Dutch cheese. — What kind of fruit is that ? — It
is a stone-fruit. — What is it called? — It is called thus. — Will
you wash your hands ? — I will wash them, but I have no towsl
to (per) wipe them (with). — I will let you have (Le faro dare) a
towel, some soap, and some water. — I shall be much obliged to
you. — May I ask you for (oso domandarle) a little water? — Bere
is some (eccone). — Can you do without soap ? — As for soap I can
do without it, but I must have a towel to wipe my hands (with).
— Do you often do without soap ? — There are many things which
we must do without (di cut e necessario pnvarsi). — Why has that
man run away ? — Because he had no other means of escaping
the ounishment (dalla punizione) which he had deserved (meri-
tare). — Why did your brothers not get (procurarsi) a better
horse ? — When they get rid of (quando avranno alienato) their
old horse, they will get a better. — Has your father arrived
already ? — Not yet ; but we hope that he will arrive this very
day (oggi stesso). — Has your friend set out in time ? — I do
not know, but I hope he has (che sard) set out in time.
SIXTY-SEVENTH LESSON.
Lezione sessantesima settima.
To be a judge of something.
Intendersi di qualche cosa.
Conoscersi di (or in) quahht
cosa.
Are you a good judge of cloth 1 Si conosce Ella di panno ?
r am a judge of it. Mi vi conosco (me ne intendo).
566
I am not a judge of it
SIXTY-SEVENTH LESSON.
I am a good judge of it
I am not a good judg.s of it
To draw.
To chalk, to trace.
To draw a landscape
To draw after life.
The drawing.
The designer.
Nature.
Non mi vi conosco (non me ne in
tendo).
Mi vi conosco benissimo.
Non mi vi conosco molto.
Disegnarc 1.
Calcare 1, ricalcarc 1.
Disegnare una vista di paese.
Disegnare dal naturale (dal vero)
11 disegno.
II disegnatore.
La natura.
To manage, or to go about a
thing.
How do you manage to make a fire
without tongs?
I go about it so.
You go about it the wrong way.
I go about it the right way.
How does your brother manage to do
that?
Skilfully, handily, dexterously, cle-
verly.
Awkwardly, unhandily, badly.
f Prendersi.
Come si prende Ella per far del fuocc
senza molle ? or Come fa ella a far
Mi vi prendo cosi, or Faccio cosi.
Ella vi si prende male.
Mi vi prendo bene.
Come si prende il di Le' fxatello pe
far cid.
Destramente.
Senza giudizio.
Toforbid.
Proibire 3 (isco).
I forbid you to do that.
Le (vi) proibisco di far cid\
To lower.
Abbassare 1.
To cast down one's eyes.
The curtain.
The curtain rises.
The curtain falls.
Abbassare gli occhi.
La, tela, il sipario.
Si alza il sipario.
Cala il sipario.
To rise.
Alzarsi 1.
To fall, to descend.
Calare 1.
The stocks have fallen.
The day falls.
Night comes on.
It grows towards night
\t grows dark.
It grows late.
11 cambio ha bassato (e" calato>
Declina il giorno.
La notte s' avvicina
t Si fa notte.
t Si fa oscuro.
t Sifatardi
To stoop
Abbassarri 1.
SIXTY-SEVENTH LESSON.
307
To smell, to feel.
He smells of garlic.
To feel some one's pulse.
To consent
I consent to it
Who says nothing consents.
Sentire 3.
Ha un cattivo odor d' aglio.
Puzza d' aglio.
Toccar il polso a qualcuno.
Consentire 3. Acconsentire 8
V acconsento
Chi tace consente.
To hide, to conceal.
The mind.
Indeed.
In fact.
The truth.
The fact.
The effect.
True.
A true man.
rhis is the right place for that picture.
Nascondere* 2 (past part. nas.
coso or nascosto ; pret. def.
nascosi).
La mente, lo spirito.
In veriti
t In fatti, t in vero.
La verita.
II fatto.
L' effetto.
Vero.
Un uomo' verace.
Ecco il vero luogo per questo quadra
To thin^' much of one (to esteem
one).
To esteem some one.
I do not think much of that man.
I think much of him (1 esteem him
much).
!f Far conto di qualcuno.
Aver in istima qualcuno.
Stimare qualcuno. •
Non fo gran conto di quest' uomo.
Fo gran conto di lui (lo stimo molto).
The flower, the bloom, the blossom.
That man has his eyes on a level with
his head.
On a level with, even with.
To blossom (to flourish). ,
To grow.
To grow rapidly (fast) .
To grow tall or big.
ftat child grows so fast that we may
aven see it.
Ilfiore.
Quest' uomo ha gli occhi al plant
della testa.
Al piano, a livello.
Fiorire 3 (isco).
Crescere* 2 (past part. crt>
sciuto ; pret. def. crebbi).
Crescere rapidamente.
Ingrandire 3 (isco).
Questo fanciullo ingrandisco a vista
368
SIXTY-SEVENTH LESSON.
That child has grown very fast in a
short time.
T'hat rain has made the corn grow.
Cora.
A cover.
A shelter.
A cottage, a hut.
To shelter one's self from some-
thing.
To take shelter from something.
Let us shelter ourselves from the
rain, the wind.
Let us enter that cottage, in order
to be sheltered from the storm (the
rain).
Every where, all over, through-
out.
All over (throughout) the town.
A shade.
Under the shade.
Let us eit down under the shade of
that tree.
To pretend.
That man pretends to sleep.
rhat young lady pretends to know
Italian.
They pretend to come near us.
Now.
From, since.
From morning.
From morning till nigSt.
From the break of day
Queeto fanciullo ha molto ingrandiu
in poco tempo.
Questa pioggia ha fatto ingrandire i
grano.
Grano.
Un alloggio.
Un ricovero, un rlfugio.
Una capanna.
Mettersi al ricovero di qualche cos*
Mettiamoci al ricovero della pioggia
del vento.
Entriamo in questa capanna per es-
sere a coperto della tempesta, or
per essere a ricovero delle ingiurie
del tempo.
Dappertutto.
Per tutta la citta.
Un' ombra.
All* ombra.
Andiamo a sederci all' ombra di
quest' albero.
Finger e* di (p. part, finto ;
pret. def.Jinsi).
Quest' uomo finge di dormire.
Quest' uomo fa sembiante di dor-
mire.
Questa signorina finge di sapere 1
italiano.
Fanno sembiante d' avvicinarsi I
noi.
Ora, al presente, adesso.
Da, Jin da, dal.
Dalia mattina.
Da mattina a sera.
Dallo spunta ; del giorno.
SIXTY-SEVENTH LESSON.
36&
From tne cradle. From a child.
From this time forward.
Fin dalla culla. Fin dall' iufanxla
Da ora in poi.
As soon as. Tosto che, appena.
As soon as I see him, I shall speak to Tosto ch' io lo vedrd gli parlerd
him.
For fear of.
To catch a cold.
I will not go out for fear of catching a
cold.
He does not wish to go to town for
fear of meeting with one of his cred-
itors.
He does not wish to open his purse for
fear of losing his money.
!Per timore (per tema).
Sul timore.
SInfreddarsi.
Pigliar urC infreddatwa.
Non voglio uscire per timore d' In-
freddarmi.
Non vuol andar in citta sul timor*
d' incontrar un suo creditore.
Non vuol aprire la borsa per timore
di perdere il suo danaro.
To copy, to transcribe.
To decline.
To transcribe fairly.
A substantive, an adjective, a pronoun.
A verb, a preposition, a grammar, a
dictionary.
Copiare 1.
Declinare 1.
Mettere in netto.
Un sostantivo, un aggettivo (addi
ettivo), un pronome.
Un verbo, una preposizione, una
grammatics, un dizionario.
EXERCISES.
208.
Have you executed my commission ? — I have executed it. —
Has your brother executed the commission which I gave him ? —
He has executed it. — Will you execute a commission for me ? —
I am under so many obligations to you that I shall always exe-
cute your commissions when it shall please you to give me any.
— Will you ask the merchant whether (se) he can let me have
(darmi) the horse at the price (al prezzo) which I have offered
him ? — T will ask him, but I know that he will be satisfied, if you
will but add a few crowns. — Good morning, children (ragazzi) \
—Have you done your task ? — You well know that we always do it
«rhen we are not ill. — What do you give us to do to day ? — ]
370 SIXTY-SEVENTH LESSON.
give you the sixty seventh lesson to study and to do the exercises
belonging to it (che ne dipendono); that is to say, the two hun-
dred and eighth and two hundred and ninth. — Will you endea-
vour (si studieranno) to commit no errors (far errori) ? — We
shall endeavour (ci studieremo) to make none. — Is this bread suf.
ficient for you ? — It is sufficient for me, for I am not very hungry.
— When did your brother embark for America ? — He sailed on
the thirtieth (il trenta) of last month. — Will you ask your brother
whether he is satisfied with the (del) money which I have sent
him ? — As to my brother, he is satisfied with it, but I am not so ;
for having suffered shipwreck (far naufragio), I am in want of
the money which you owe me. — Do you promise me to speak tc
your brother ? — I promise you, you may depend upon it. — I rely
upon you. — Will you work (studiare) harder (meglio) for the
next iesson than you have done (che non ha studiato) for this ?—
I will work harder. — May I rely upon it ? — You may.
209.
Are you a judge of cloth ? — I am a judge of it. — Will you buy
some yards for me ? — If you will give me the money I will buy
you some. — You will oblige me (Ella mi fard piacere, or Gliene
sard tenuto). — Is that man a judge of cloth ? — He is not a good
judge of it. — How do you manage to do that ? — I manage it so. —
Will you show me how you manage it ? — Very willingly (moltc
volenlieri). — What must I do (che debbofare) for my lesson of to-
morrow ? — You will transcribe your exercises fairly (mettere in
netto), do three others, and study the next lesson (la lezione se-
guente). — How do you manage to get goods (delle mercanzie)
without money ? — I buy on credit. — How does your sister man
age to learn Italian without a dictionary ? — She manages it thus.
—She manages it very dexterously. But how does your brother
manage it ? — He manages it very awkwardly (senza dlcun giudu
tio) : he reads, and looks for the words in the dictionary. — He
may (pud) learn (studiare) in this manner twenty years without
knowing how to make a single sentence (una sola frase). — Why
does your sister cast down her eyes ? — She casts them down be-
cause she is ashamed of not having done her task. — Shall we
breakfast in the garden to-day ? — The weather is so fine that we
SIXTY-EIGHTH LESSON.
371
should take advantage of it (che bisogna approjittarne). — How dc
you hke that coffee ? — I like it very much. — Why do you stoop ?
— I stoop to pick up (per prendere) the handkerchief which 1
have dropped. — Why do your sisters hide themselves ? — They
hide themselves for fear of being seen. — Of whom are they afraid ?
—They are afraid of their governess (la maestro), who scolded
(tarnpognare or sgndare) them yesterday because they had net
•lone their tasks (il lor dovere, in the sing.).
SIXTY-EIGHTH LESSON.
Lezione sessantesima ottava.
To get beaten (whipped).
To get paid.
Tc s»t one's self invited to dine.
t Farsi battere.
t Farsi pagare.
t Farsi invitare a pranzo.
At first
Firstly.
Secondly.
Thirdly, Ac.
Da principio, a prima vista.
Primieramente, in primo luogo.
Secondariamente, in secondo lu
In terzo luogo, ecc.
tc your mother at home?
She is.
I am going to her house
fi in casa ladi Lei madre?
Vi&
Vado da essa.
r Un motivOf una causa, i
A cause.
< cagione.
( Un soggetto.
A cause of complaint.
A cause of sadness.
r'he has reason to be sad.
Grief, sorrow, sadness.
Is that woman ready to go out 1
Un soggetto di dispiacere.
Un soggetto di tristezza.
Ha un motivo di tristezza.
11 dispiacere, la tristezza.
Questa donna £ dessa pronta
She Is.
uscire 1
Lo&
una
at
873
SIXTY-EIGHTH LESSON.
Notwithstanding, in spite of.
Notwithstanding that.
In spite of him.
In spite of her.
In spite of them,
[n spite of me.
{ Malgrado.
( A dispetto, ad onto.
Malgrado cid.
Malgrado lui or suo malgrado.
Malgrado essa or suo malgrado.
Malgrado loro or loro malgrado.
Mio malgrado.
To manage.
Do you manage to finish your work
every Saturday night 1
Do you manage to have your work
done every Saturday night ?
Try to do that to oblige me.
!f Far in modo di.
Procurare di.
t Fa Ella in modo di finire il di Lei
lavoro ogni sabato sera 1
t Fa Ella in modo d' aver finito il di
Lei lavoro ogni sabato sera ?
Faccia in modo di far cid per compla
cermi.
Obs. Whenever in order to can be substituted for the preposition to, the lattei
Is rendered in Italian by per, to express the end, the design, or the cause, for
which a thing is done.
I will do every thing to oblige you.
Faro tuttoper compiacerl*
To look upon.
The window looks into the street.
The window looks out upon the river.
That apartment looks upon the street.
The back-door looks into the garden.
/ Dar su.
< Sporgere su.
f Guardare su.
La finestra da (sporf«) nulla etrada.
La finestra sporge <dk) sul fiume.
Quest' appartamento da (sporga)
sulla strada.
La porta di dietro id sul giardino
To drown.
To drown a dog.
To drown one's self^ to get drowned.
To be drowned, to be drowning.
To leap through the window.
To throw out of the window.
I am drowning.
He jumped out of the window.
To fasten.
He was fastened to a tree.
Annegare (affogare).
Annegare un can*.
Annegarsi (affogarsi).
Saltare dalla fine*tr*.
Gettare dalla finestra
Mi annego.
Sal to dalla finestra.
Attaccare.
V attaccarono a** on alba*
SIXTY -EIGHTH LESSON.
373
The cattle
To keep warm.
To keep cool.
To keep clean.
tt> keep on one's guard against some
one.
Keep on your guard against that man.
II bestiame.
t Tenersi caldo.
t Tenersi fresco.
t Tenersi pulito.
t Star all' erta contro qualcuno,
t Mettersi (porsi) in guardia contt*
qualcuno.
Stia all' erta contro quest' uomo
To take care (to beware) of
somebody.
To take care (tc beware) of
something.
If you do not take care of that horse,
it will kick you.
Take care that you do not fall.
To beware of somebody or something.
Keep on your guard against that man.
Take care!
Guardarst di (da) qualcuno.
Badare a qualche cosa.
Se non bad a a quel cavallo, Le dara
un calcio.
t Badi a non cadere !
Guardarsi di qualcuno o di qualche
cosa.
La si guardi da quest' uomo
Badi ! (La badi !)
A thought.
An idea.
A sally.
To be struck with a thought.
A thought strikes me.
A thought has struck me.
That never crossed my mind.
To take into one's head.
He took it into his head lately to rob
me.
What is in your head ?
Un pensiere, un pensiero.
Un' idea.
Un impeto.
C t Venir in pensiero.
c t Cader nell' animo.
{ Mi viene un pensiero.
t Mi viene in mente.
< M' e" venuto un pensiere.
( M' 3 venuto in mente.
rQ,uesto non m' e mai caduto nelf
animo.
Questo non m' e mai passato per la
„ testa.
f Immaginare 1.
t Egli immagind 1' altro giorao dl
rubarmi.
t Che immagina Ella ?
In my place.
In your, his, her place.
fVe moit put every thing in its place.
A (in) mio luogo. In mia vece.
A (in) vostro, di Lei, suo, luogo.
Bisogna mettere ogni cosa a sue
luogo.
174
SIXT\-fiiGHTH LESSON.
Around, round.
All around.
We sailed aiound England.
They went about the town to look at
the curiosities.
To go round the house.
To go about the house.
To cost.
How much does that cost you ?
How much does this book cost you t
It costs me three crowns and a half.
That table costs him seven crowns.
Alone, by one's self.
I was alone.
One woman only.
One God.
God alone can do that.
The very thought of it is criminal.
A single reading is not sufficient to
satisfy a mind that has a true taste.
To kill by shooting.
To blow out some one's brains.
To shoot one's self with a pistol.
tie has blown out his brains.
He has blown out his brains with a
pistol.
He has shot him with a pistol.
He served for a long time, acquired
honours, and died contented.
Se arrived poor, grew rich in a short
time, and lost all in a still shorter
time
Intorno (a preposition).
Intorno intorno. Tutto intorno.
Navigammo intorno all' Inghil
terra.
Andarono qua e la per la citta pet
verderne le cose notabili.
Andare intorno alia casa.
Far il giro della casa.
Andar qua e la nella casa.
Costart I.
Quanto Le costa ?
Quanto Le costa questo libro 1
Mi costa tre scudi e mezzo.
Questa tavola gli costa sette scudi.
Solo ; fem. sola.
10 era solo.
Una sola donna.
Un solo Dio.
Dio solo pud far questo.
11 pensiero solo di cio e criminoso.
Una sola lettura non basta per con-
tentare un uomo che ha buor
gusto.
Decider e con anna dafuoco.
Far saltare le cervella a qualcuno.
Bruciare le cervella a qualcuno.
Mandar a qualcuno le cervella all1
aria.
Uccidersi con una pistolettata.
Si e fatto saltare le cervella.
Si £ fatto saltare le cervella con una
pistolettata.
Gli ha mandato all' aria le cervella
con una pistolettata.
Servi gran tempo, giunse agli onori.
e mori contento.
Arrivo povero, divento ricco in poco
tempo, e perdd tutto in meno tempt
ancora.
SIXTY-EIGHTH LESSON. 37«*»
EXERCISES.
210.
What is the matter with you ? — Why do you look so melancholy
ycosi melancolico) ? — I should not look so melancholy, if I had nc
reason to be sad. I have heard just now that one of my friends
has shot himself with a pistol, and that one of my wife's best
friends has drowned herself. — Where did she drown herself? — •
She drowned herself in the river which is behind her house.—-
Yesterday, at four o'clock in the morning, she rose (si leva) with-
out saying a word to any one (ad alamo), leaped out of the win-
dow which looks into the garden, and threw herself into the river,
where she was drowned. — 1 have a great mind (gran voglia) to
bathe (bagnarsi) to-day. — Where will you bathe ? — In the river.
— Are you not afraid of being drowned ? — Oh, no ! I can swim.
. — Who taught you ? — Last summer I took a few lessons in the
swimming-school (alia scuola del (or di) nuoto).
When had you finished your task ? — I had finished it when
you came in. — Those who had contributed (contribuire) most (piu)
to his elevation to the throne (alia sua elevazione sul trono) of his
ancestors, were those who laboured (lavorare) with the greatest
eagerness (con piu animosita) to precipitate him from it (per pre-
cipitarnelo). As soon as (Dacche) Caesar (Cesare) had crossed
(passare) the Rubicon (il Rubicone), he had no longer to deliberate
(deliberate) : he was obliged (dovette) to conquer (vincere) or to
die. — An emperor (un imperatore), who was irritated at (irritato
contro) an astrologer (un astrologo), asked him : " Wretch (mis-
erabile) ! what death (di che sorta di morte) dost thou believe thou
wilt die ? " — " I shall die of fever," replied the astrologer.
u Thou liest," said the emperor, "thou wilt die this instant of a
fiolent death (di morte violenta)." As he was going to be seized
stavano per prenderlo), he said to the emperor, " Sire (Sire),
>rder some one (ordinate) to feel (che mi si tocchi, subj.) my
pulse, and it will be found that I have a fever." This sally
(qucsto detto) saved his life.
211.
Do you perceive yonder house (quella casa laggiu) ? — I. per-
oeive it ; what house is it ? — It is an inn (una locanda) ; if you
376 8IXTY -EIGHTH LESSON.
like we will go into it to drink a glass of wine, for I am ver>
thirsty. — You are always thirsty when you see an inn. — If we
enter I shall drink your health. — Rather than go into an inn 1
will not drink. — When will you pay me what you owe me ? —
When I have (avro) money ; it is useless to ask me for some to-
day ; for you know very well that there is nothing to be had of
him who has nothing. — When do you think you will have
money ? — I think I shall have some next year. — Will you do
what I am going to tell you ? — I will do it if it is not too difficult.
— Why do you laugh at me ? — 1 do not laugh at you, but at your
coat. — Does it not look like yours ? — It does not look like it, for
mine is short (corto), and yours is too long (lungo) ; mine is black
and yours is green. — Why do you associate with that man? — I
would not associate with him (non lofrequenterei, cond.) if he had
not rendered me (se non m* avesse reso, subj.) great services
[gran servigi). — Do not trust him (now se ne foil), for if you are
not on your guard he will cheat (ingannare) you. — Why do you
work so much (tanto) ? — I work in order to be one day useful to
my country. — When I was yet (essendo ancor) little I once (un
giorno) said to my father, " I do not understand (intendere *) com-
merce (il commercio), and I do not know how to sell ; let me (per-
mettetemi) play." My father answered me, smiling (sorridendo) :
" By dealing (mercantando) one learns to deal, and by selling to
sell." " But, my dear father," replied I, " by playing one learns
also to play." " You are right," said he to me, " but you must
first (prima) learn what is necessary (necessario) and useful."
— Judge not (non giudicate voi) that you may not (che non volett
essere) be judged ! Why do you perceive (scoprire) the mote
(una paglia) in your brother's eye, you who do not percr
[vedere *) the beam (la trave) which is in your eye ?
SIXTY-NINTH LESSON.
Lezione set santesima nona.
PRESENT OP THE SUBJUNCTIVE.
n»at I may have, that thou mayest
hare.
That he or she may have.
That we may have, that you may
have.
That they may have.
That I may be, that thou mayest be.
That he or she may be.
That we may be, that you may be.
That they may be.
That I may speak, that thou mayest
speak.
That he or she may speak.
That we may speak, that you may
speak.
That they may speak.
That X may believe. Ac
That we may believe, Ac
That I may hear, Ac.
That we may hear, Ac.
Ch' io abbia, che tu abbia (abli)
Che noi abbiamo, che voi abbiate
( eglino (essi) } , . ,
Ch' io sia, che tu sia (sii).
Segli(esso) )
Un i ella (essa) $ 81a*
Che noi siamo, che voi siate.
i eglino (essi) / .
Ch' Lueno(esse) \ 8lan0 <siww>-
Ch' io parli, che tu parli.
«»_. S egli (esso) >
Ch'\ ella (essa) *ParlL
Che noi parliamo, che voi parliate
~., < eglino (essi) > ..
Ch' Lueno(esse) $Parlmo-
Ch' io creda, che tu creda, ch' egU
creda.
Che noi crediamo, che voi crediate
ch' eglino credano.
Ch' io senta, che tu senta, ch egll
senta.
Che noi sentiamo, che voi sentiate
ch* eglino sentano.
Ob». It will be remarked, firstly, that in the first conjugation the three per
tons singular terminate in t ; in the two others, and in the two auxiliaries, in a
*78
SIXTY-NINTH LESSON.
The second person singular of the nuxiliaries may also terminate in ». Sec*
andly, that all the three conjugations have the first and second persons plural
terminated alike, and the third person plural terminates in the second and third
eonjugations in ano, whilst in the first conjugation it ends in ino.
HEM ARKS ON THE USE Or THE SCBJUNCTIVB IN ITALIAN.
A. The subjunctive in Italian is made use of to express doubt or uncertainty.1
It is governed by one of the following conjunctions, which generally precede*
the verb which is put in the subjunctive mood.
Che, that.
Acciocchi
Affinchl,
Benefit,
Ancorchi,
to the end that.
I although.
Avvegnachl, whereas, though.
Finchl, till.
Sintantochl, until.
Quantunque, though, although.
Purchi, provided, that.
B. The conjunction che makes all the words to which it is joined become
conjunctions. The following conjunctive expressions, therefore, also require
the subjunctive :
suppose that.
Bisogna che, it is necessary that.
Diofaccia che, ) would to God
Voglia Iddio che, ) that
Dato che,
Posto che,
In caso che, in case that.
Avantiche, >beforethat>
Prima che, )
C. Verbs expressing vrill, desire, command, permission, and fear, followed by
the conjunction che, require the subjunctive, as: I will, I desire, I command,
I permit my brother to study, to speak, to see, to go out, &c, voglio, desidero,
tomandc, permetto, che mio frateUo studii, parli, veda, esca, &c. I fear he may
not sing, he may not say, <&c, temo che non canti, che non dica, Ac.
EXAMPLES.
Desidero che Xofacciate presto.
Temo che piova questa sera,
t Spero che la cosa mi riescn.
Bisogna cK io stesso ci vada,
Lo dice, acciocchl non diate a me la
colpa, ed qffincKb sappiate, quanto
si possa sperar da lui.
I wish you may do it soon.
I fear it will rain to-night.
I hope to succeed in it.
I must go there myself.
He says so, to the end that you may
not attribute the fault to me, and that
you may Know what is to be ex-
pected from him.
Though it be difficult to subdue our
passions, we must, notwithstanding,
vanquish ourselves.
The count, though much frightened,
had the boldness.
Wait till I return.
So long as I have not finished my
work.
[ will come, provideu it does not rain.
Benche sia difficile vincer le nostre
passioni, bisogna perd vincere se
stesso.
II conte avvegnachl (ancorchi) fosst
molto spaventato, ebbe 1' ardire.
Aspettate JinchZ io torni.
Sintantochi io non abbia finito il mio
lavoro.
Verrd purchk non piova.
1 Hence the verb credere, to believe, always governs the subjunctive ia
Italian. Ex. Mio frateUo crede cK io parli, My brother thinks 1 speak
SIXTY-NINTH LESSON.
87P
Suppose that he were to die.
In case he should not be in his apart-
ment.
Suppose it to be so.
Would to God that all were going well.
However wise the counsel that you
have taken may be.
it is sufficient for me to know.
I must do.
Panto che egli xniwia.
In caso che non fo$$e nel su appar
tamento.
Data che sia cast.
Diofaccia che tutto vada bene.
Comunque savio sia il consiglic che
avete preso.
Basta cti io tappia.
Bisogna cA' io faccia.
D. The conjunction che does not require the subjunctive when it relate* U
» erbs expressing certainty. Ex.
i know that thou hast not been at my
house.
He assured me that the work was by a
master-hand. .
1 am sure that he is wrong.
I swear to thee that I have told him
nothing.
( am convinced that he does not betray
me.
Io so che tu non set stato da mo.
M' assicurava che V opera era d\
mano maestra.
Sono persuaso ch' egli ha torto.
Ti giuro che non gli ho detto niente.
Sono convinto che non mi tradisce.
E. The indicative is also employed after conjunctions expressing an action
vith certainty, such as :
AUorcne,
when.
Fratianto,
meanwhile.
Come,
as.
Gracchi,
since.
Con,
thus.
Intantoche',
so that.
Dacchi,
since.
Mentrechi,
whilst.
Oimodoche,
so that.
Non pertanto,
notwithstanding.
Oopoche,
after.
Onde,
therefore.
Perchl,
because, why.
Se,
if, since.
Percib,
therefore.
Sicchi,
so that
Pero\
{ therefore.
1 nevertheless.
Siccome,
•a
StantechZ,
since.
Potato,
because.
Tostoche,
as soon as.
Quando,
when.
EXAM
Tuttavia,
PLE8.
yet, nevertheless.
Whilst ne was at dinner, two horses
were stolen from him.
Whilst fortune came to his aid, it
happened that the King of France
died.
Whilst I am speaking, time is passing.
»t seemed to him he was ill, but he was
nevertheless contented.
should like to know why you do not
call upon me any more.
Intanto ch' egli stava a pranzo, gli
furono rubati due cavalli.
Mentechi la fortuna veniva ad
aiuiarlo, avvenne che il Re di
Francia mori.
Mentre ch' io parlo, il tempo passa.
Gli pareva di star male, ma non per
tanto era contento.
Vorrei sapere, perchi non venite pit
dame.
380
SIXTY-NINTH LESSON.
I cannot come, because I am busy.
He is an honest man, therefore I
believe all he tells me.
Every thing lost may be recovered, but
not life : therefore every one ought
to take good care of it.
Though every body says it, I never-
theless do not believe it.
Now, as God has granted me so much
grace, I shall die happy.
Though I have been advised by many
physicians to use certain baths, I
have nevertheless not been willing
to do it.
If I do not mistake, I saw him the
other night.
Though the smell of that juice offends,
it is not for all that injurious to
health.
As soon as I am able, I will come.
Non po8so venire, perch} ho da fate
Egli e* galantuomo, percib credt
quanto mi dice.
Ogni cosa perduta si pud ricuperare,
ma non la vita: epperb ciascuna
deve esser di quella buon guardia
no.
BenchS tutti lo dicano, io ptrb nor
lo credo.
Ora, poichk Dio mi ha fatto tants
grazia, io morrd contento.
Quantunque da molti medici mi sia
stato consigliato d' usar certi oag-
ni, pure non 1' ho voluto fare.
Se non m' inganno, lo vidi 1' altra
sera.
Sebbene 1' odore di questo sugo offen-
da, non percib nuoce alia salute.
Tostochi io potrd, verrd.
F. The subjunctive is further made use of after the relative pronoun che,
when it follows a superlative ; and after the relative pronouns che, U, quale, chi
cut, when the action which they present is doubtful or uncertain.
EXAMPLES
The finest picture that is in Rome.
The bravest man that I have ever
known.
The most ridiculous figure that one can
see.
For that a man of some knowledge is
required
You will not find any body who would
do it.
I have nobody on whom I could rely.
Show me any one who has never com-
mitted a fault.
I want a horse that must be taller than
this.
It is assured that peace is made.
They say that there has been a grea \
battle near the Rhine.
Whatever may happen.
However handsome she may be, she
does not please me.
Let him be awake or asleep, I must
■oeak to him. I
II piil bel quadro che sia in Roma.
II piu brav' uomo cK io abbia mat co-
nosciuto.
La figura la piu ridicola che si possa
vedere.
A cio si vuole un uomo che abbia dcUfl
cognizioni.
Non troverete chi \ofaccia.
Non ho nessuno in cui pos*a fidarmi.
Mostratemi uno che non /zM>ta mai
commesso un fallo.
Ho bisogno di un cavallc cne sia
piii alto di questo.
Si da per sicuro che la pace sia fatta.
Si dice che al Reno aia stata data ana
gran battaglia.
Ne succeda quel che vuole.
Per bella che sia non mi piace.
Vegli o dorma, bisogna ch' io gtf
putt.
SIXTY-NINTH LESSON. 381
Tnere is no one, however learned he
may be, that know9 all.
[ do not see which is his intention.
I do not know which are your books.
Non v' £ uomo, per dotto the no. eh*
gappia tut to.
Non vedo qual $ia Y intenzione sua.
Non so quali siano i vostri libri.
G. When of two verbs the first is preceded by rum, the second by efte, the
Atter requires to be in the subjunctive. Ex.
I do not believe he studies. Non credo che studii.
J do not think he walks. Non penso che cammini.
EXERCISES.
212.
M. de Turenne would never buy (non compr&va mat) any thing
on credit of tradesmen (il mercante), for fear, said he, they should
ose a great part of it, if he happened to be killed (se gli accadesse
di restar morto in guerra). All the workmen (gli operai) who
were employed about his house had orders to bring in the bills
(di presentare i loro conti), before he set out for the campaign
[mettersi in campagna), and they were regularly paid.
You will never be respected (rispettare) unless you forsake (se
non lasciando) the bad company you keep. — You cannot finish
youi work to-night unless (a meno che) I help you. I will explain
(spiegare) every difficulty to you, that you may not be disheart-
ened (scoraggiare) in your undertaking (V impresa). — Suppose
you should lose your friends, what would become of you ? — In
case you want my assistance, call me ; I shall help you. — A wise
and prudent man (un uomo savio e prudente) lives with economy
when young, in order that he may enjoy the (per godere del) fruit
of his labour when he is old. — Carry (portate) this money to Mr.
N., in order that he may be able to pay his debts (il debito). —
Will you lend me that money ? — I will not lend it you unless you
promise to return (rendere*) it to me as soon as you can. — Did
the general arrive ? — He arrived yesterday morning at the camp
(i7 campo), weary and tired (stanco ed abbattuto), but very season-
ably (molto a propositi) ; he immediately gave his orders to begin
the action (la battaglia or il combattimento), though he had not
(non avesse) yet all his troops. — Are your sisters happy ? — They
are not, though they are rich, because they are not contented. —
Although they have a good memory, that is not enough to learr
iS2 SIXTY-NINTH LESSON.
any language whatever (qualunque siasi lingua) ; they must make
use of their judgment (il giudizio). — Behold (Guardi) how amia-
ble that lady is ; for all that she has no fortune (quantunque non
ria agiata), I do not love her the less (V amo istessamente). — Will
you lend me your violin ? — I will lend it you, provided you return
it me to-night. — Will your mother call upon me ? — She will, pro-
vided you will promise to take her to the concert. — I shall not
cease to importune (importunare) her till she has forgiven me.—
Give me (mi dia) that penknife (il temperino). — I will give it you,
provided you will not make a bad use of it. — Shall you go tc
London? — I will go, provided you accompany (accompagnare)
me ; and I will write again (di nuovo) to your brother, in case he
should not have received my letter.
213.
Where weie you during the engagement (ilfatto dy armi)!— I
was in bed to have my wounds (la ferita) dressed (medicare). —
Would to God (cost fosse piaciuto a Dio che) I had been there (cA5
to vifossistato)\ I would have (avrei voluto, cond.) conquered
(vincere*) or perished (pertre). — We avoided (si evito) an engage-
ment for fear we should be (che nonfossimo) taken, their force
being superior (superiore) to ours. — God forbid (Bio non voglia) 1
should blame your conduct ; but your business will never be
done properly (a dovere)y unless you do it yourself. — Will you
set out soon ? — I shall not set out till I have dined. — Why did you
tell me that my father was arrived, though you knew (mentre ch}
Ella sapeva) the contrary 1 — You are so hasty (iracondo)f that
however little you are contradicted (ch> uno La contrarii) you fly
into a passion (mettersi in cnllera) in an instant. — If your father
does not arrive to-day, and if you want money, I will lend you
some, — I am much obliged (tenutissimo) to you. — Have you done
your task ? — Not quite ; if I had had (se avessi avuto) time, and
if I had not been (fossi stato) so uneasy about (^er)the arrival of
my father, I should have (V avrei) done it.— If you study and are
(sta) attentive, I assure you that you will learn the Italian lan-
guage in a very short time. He who wishes to teach an art
must know it thoroughly (afondo) ; he must give none but deal
\preciso) and well-digested (digerire) notions (la nozione) ; h«
SIXTY-NINTH LESSON. 383
must instil (far entrare) them one by one into the minds (nello
rpirito) of his pupils ; and above all (sopra tutlo), he must not
over burthen (sopraccaricare) their memory with useless and un
important (vano) rules.
My dear friend, lend me (prestatemi) a sequin. — Here are (ec-
cone) two instead of one. — How much obliged I am to you (quanta
he sono tenuto) ! I am always glad when I see you, and I find
my happiness in yours. — Is this house to be sold ? — Do you wish
to buy it ? — Why not? — Why does not your sister speak ? — She
would speak (parlerebbe, cond. ) if she were not (se non fosse) al-
ways so absent (disattenta). — I like pretty anecdotes : they season
(condire) conversation (la conversazione), and amuse every body.
Pray relate me some. — Look, if you please, at page (pagina) one
hundred and forty-eight of the book which I lent you, and you
arill find. some. •
214.
You must have patience, though you have no desire to have it,
for I must also (pure) wait till I receive my money. — Should I
(nel caso ch? io) receive it to-day, I will pay you all that I owe
you. — Do not believe that I have forgotten it, for I think of it
every day. Do you believe, perhaps (crede Ella forse) that I
have already received it ? — I do not believe that you have already
received it; but I fear that your other creditors (che gli aUri di
Lei creditori) may already have received it. — You wish you had
(vorrebbe aver, cond.) more time to study, and your brothers wish
they did not need (vorrebbero non aver bisogno) to learn. — Would
to God (volesse Lldio) you had (avesse) what 1 wish you, and that
I had (avessi) what I wish. — Though we have not had what we
wish (yet) we have almost always been contented ; and Messieurs
B. have almost always been discontented, though they have had
every thing a reasonable man (un uomo ragionevole) can be con-
tented with. — Do not believe, Madam, that 1 have had your fan
(il ventaglio)- — Who tells you that I believe it ? — My brother-in-
law wishes he had not had (vorrebbe non aver avuto) what he has
had. — Wherefore ? — He has always had many creditors, anc? no
money. — I wish you would always speak Italian to me ; and you
must obey, if you wish to learn that language, and if you do not
384
SEVENTIETH LESSON.
wish to lose your time (inutilmente). — I wish you were (vorrt*
chefoste) more industrious and more attentive when I speak to
you. If I were not (nonfossi) your friend, and if you were not
(nonfoste) mine, I should not speak {jparlerei) thus to you. — Do
not trust Mr. N. (won vi fidate del Signor N.), for he natters you.
— Po you believe a flatterer (tin adulatore) can be a friend ? — You
do not know him so well as I, though you see him every day. —
Do not think that I am angry with him, because his father has
offended me. — Oh ! here he is coming (eccolo che viene) ; you
may tell him all yourself.
SEVENTIETH LESSON
Lezione settantesima.
THE SUBJUNCTIVE CONTINUED
IMPERFECT OF THE SUBJECTIVE.
If I had, if thou hadst, if he had.
If we had, if you had, if they had.
If I were, if thou wert, if he were.
If we were, if you were, if they were.
If I spoke, if thou spokest, if he spoke.
If we spoke, if you spoke, if they spoke.
S' io avessi, se tu avessi, r eg.
avesae.
Se noi avessimo, se voi aveste, rf
eglino avessero.
S' io fossi, se tu fossi, s' egli fosse.
Se noi fossimo, se voi foste, s' eglino
fossero.
S' io parlassi, se tu parlassi, s' egli
parlasse.
Se noi parlassi mo, se voi parlaste, s'
eglino parlassero.
It I believed, if thou believedst, if he , S' io credessi, se tu credessi, tf egli
believed. credesse.
a we believed, if you believed, if they Se noi credessimo, se voi credett*
believed. s' eglino credessero.
SEVENTIETH LESSON.
38S
B I heard, if thou heardest, if he heard. , S' io sontissi, se tu sentissi, a* egli
sentisse.
.f we heard, if you heard, if they | Se noi sentissimo, se voi aentiste, ft
heard. ' eglino sentissero.
Out. A. The imperfect of the subjunctive is formed fiam the potato remote
(Lesson LX.), by changing, for the first conjugation, ai into assi, for the sec-
ond ei into essit and for the third ii into issi. The second person plural is in ail
ilike the second person plural of the passato remoto. (See Lesson LX.)
Obs. D. As to the formation of the preterite, or preterperfect and pluperfec*
of the subjunctive, it is exactly the same as in the indicative; the former
being compounded of the present subjunctive of the auxiliary, and the past
participle of another verb, the latter of the imperfect subjunctive of the auxil-
iary, and the past participle of another verb. Ex.
That I may have loved. Ch' io abbia amato.
That he may have come. Ch' egli sia venuto.
If I had loved. S' io avessi amato.
If 1 were come. S' io fossi venuto.
Remahk H. — On the Use of thk Subjunctive.
The imperfect of the subjunctive is employed after the conditional conjuno
lion *e, if, expressed or understood l.
EXAMPLES.
If I had money.
If he had time.
If you were rich.
If he were a little more amiable.
If he loved me.
If I lost my money.
If he were to beat his dog.
If she neard me.
If the child slept.
Se io avessi danaro.
Se avesse tempo.
S' Ella fosse ricco.
S' egli fosse un po' piu corteae.
Se mi amasse.
Se io perdessi il mio danaro.
Se battesse il suo cane.
Se essa mi sentisse.
Se il fanciullo dormisse.
OF THE CONDITIONAL 3R POTENTIAL TENSES.
CONDITIONAL PRESENT.
This U formed from the present future (Lesson XLVI.) by changing
12 3 12 3
Sing, ad, bai, ba, Plur. bemo, bete, banno.
nto
BESTI, bebbb,
BEMMO, BESTE, BEBBEBO.
1 Exempt when futurity is to be expressed, for then the future must be made
ise of. Ex.
If he comes, we shall see him.
will go to see him to-morrow, if I
have time.
Se verra, lo vedremo.
Andro a vederlo domani, ao avrf
tempo.
386
I should hare, thou wouldst have, he
■would have.
We should have, yea would have, they
wauld have.
( should be, thou wouldst be, he would
be.
We should be, you would be, they
would be.
SEVENTIETH LESSON.
Avrei, avresti, avrebbe.
Avreuimo, avreste, aviebitfr*
Sarei, saresti, sarebbe.
Saremmo, sareste, sarebbero
I should love, thou wouldst love, he
would love.
We should love, you would love, they
would love.
I should believe, thou wouldst believe,
he would believe.
We should believe, you would believe,
they would believe.
I should hear, thou wouldst hear, he
would hear.
We should hear, you would hear, they
would hear.
Amerei, ameresti, amerebbe
Ameremmo, amereste, amerebberc
Crederei, crederesti, crederebbe.
Crederemmo, credereste, erode
rebbero.
Sentirei, sentiresti, sentirebbe.
Sentiremmo, sentireste, sentireb
bero.
/. Whenever there is a condition to be expressed, the imperfect of the suo
junctive is used, and the conditional present answers to it. It is indifferent tc
begin the sentence by the imperfect of the subjunctive or the conditional, and
viesversd.
EXAMPLES.
if 1 had money, I would buy some
books.
I would buy some books, if I had
money.
If he were a little more amiable, he
would have many friends.
He would have many friends, if he
were a little more amiable.
I would do it, if I could.
If I could, I would do it.
If I had money, I would have a new
coat.
\ would have a new coat, if I had
money
If thou couidsi do this, thou wouldst
do that.
Se avessi danaro, comprerei de' iibri.
Comprerei de' libri, se avessi danaro.
& fcgli fosse un po' pill cortese, av
rebbc molti amici.
Avrebbe molti amici, a? egli fosse ua
po' pitl cortese.
Lo farei, se poiessi.
Se potessi, lo farei.
Se avessi danaro, avrei un' abito
nuovo.
Avrei un' abito nuovo se avessi aa«
naro.
Se tu sapessi far questo, vorrssti fat
quello.
SEVENTIETH LESSON.
38T
Thou wouldst do that, if thou couldst
do this.
If he could, he would.
He would, if he could.
I would go there, if I had time.
If I had time, I would go there.
U he knew what you have done, he
would scold you.
He would scold you, if he knew what
you have done.
To scold.
If there were any wood, he would
make a fire.
He would make a fire, if there were
any wood.
Should the men come, it would be
necessary to give them something to
drink.
Should we receive our letters, we
would not read them until to-
morrow.
Vorresti far quello, se tu sapessi fa
questo.
Sepotesse, vorrebbe.
Vorrebbe, se potesse.
V andrei, se avessi tempo.
Se avessi tempo, v' andrei,
Se sap esse cid che avete fatto, *\
rampognerebbe.
Vi rampognerebbe se sapesse cid ch
avete fatto.
Rampognare (sgridare).
Se ci fosse legns^farebbe fuoco
Farebbe fuoco, se ci fosse legna.
f Se gli uomini venissero, bisogne-
rebbe dar loro qualche cosa ds
-i bere.
Bisognerebbe dar loro qualche cosa
v da bere, se gli uomini venissero.
Se ricevessimo le nostre lettere, non
le leggeremmo prima di domani.
CONDITIONAL PAST.
It is formed from the present conditional of the auxiliary and the past par-
ticiple of the verb you conjugate.
I should have had, &c. i Avrei avuto, Ac.
I should have been, <&c.
We should have been, 4c.
I should have, thou wouldst '
have, he would have,
We should have, you would
have, they would have,
I snould have, thou wouldst
have, he (she) would have,
We should have, you would
have they would have,
Sarei stato. Fern, stata, &c.
Saremmo stati. Fern, state, &c.
spoken,
believ-
ed,
heard.
Avrei, avresti, avrebbe,
Avremmo, avreste, av-
rebbero,
I parlato.
' credutu
sentito
Sarei, saresti, sa- "1 partito ; Fern.
rebbe, I partita.
Saremmo, sareste, fpartiti; Fern.
sarebbero, partite.
BXAMPLM.
They would have been more cautious, Sarebbero stati pih cauti, se fossers
if they had been warned.
He would have been freed, if he
requested it.
had
stati avertiti.
Sarebbe stato dispensato se
richiesto.
598
SEVENTIETH LESSON.
If I h&4 received my m:mey, I would
have bought new shoes.
If he had had a pen, he would have
recollected the word.
If you had risen early, you would not
have caught a cold.
If they had got rid of their old horse,
they would ha\o procured a better
one.
If he had washed his hands, he would
have wiped them.
If I knew that, I would behave differ-
ently.
If I had known that, I would have
behaved differently.
If thou hadst taken notice of that, thou
wouldst not have been mistaken.
& io avessi ricevuto il mio dan*
ro, avrei comprato delle scarpe
nuove.
5 avcsse avuto una penna, si sarebU
ricordato della parola.
Se si fosse levata (alzata) di buon
ora, non si sarebbe infreddaia.
Se avessero venduto il lor vccchic
cavallo, se ne sarebbero procurato
uno migliore.
6 avesse lavato le sue mani, se l«
sarebbe asciugate.
Se sapessi ciu, mi condurrei diffe-
rentemente.
Se avessi sapuio cid, mi earei con
dotto altrimenti.
Se ti fo8si accorto di cid, non ti so.
rtsti ingannato.
K. The pluperfect of the subjunctive and the past conditional meeting with
each other, may sometimes be substituted by the imperfect of the indicative
Ex.
Had I known it yesterday, I would
certainly have come.
I would have given it you, if 1 had had
it.
Se lo sapeva ieri, io veniva sicura-
mente.
Instead of:
Se V avessi sapuio ieri, sarei venuto
sicuramente.
Io ve lo dava, se V aveva.
Instead of;
i C Ve 1' avrei dato, se V avessi avuto.
L. As soon as se is not conditional it requires the indicative mood. Ex.
If at that time I had Italian books, | Se allora io aveva libri italiani, ncn
they were not mine.
if he is not ill, why does he send for
the physician 7
erano miei.
Se non £ ammalato, perche" fa venii
il medico 7
M. The imperfect of the subjunctive is further used to express a wish in an
exclamatory form. Ex.
O could I but know your sentiments !
0 could I also come !
0 had I but money !
Oh potessi sapere i vostri sent!-
menti !
Ok potessi venir anch' io t
Oh avessi danaro !
and when there is another verb following, it is also put in the imperfect of tlw
subjunctive. Ex.
SEVENTIETH LESSON.
889
Would to God he never returned any j Volease Icdio che non ritorna*$e mai
more I pin !
xV. But when the wish is not exclamatory, the present of the conditional
must be employed. Ex.
1 should like to see him.
I should willingly accompany you to
Florence.
I could not say so.
I would lay any thing that it will not
succeed.
Vorrei vederlo.
L' accompagnerei Tolentieri a Fi
renze.
Non saprei dirlo.
Scommettcrei tutto, che la cosa non
andra bene.1
O. The past conditional alone is made use of to represent as doubtful an
event that is to follow a preceding event. Ex.
He has promised to send me the goods,
as soon as he would have received
them.
He has promised to write to me, as
soon as he should be arrived in Lon-
don.
Would you learn Italian, if I learnt it 7
I would learn it, if you learnt it.
Would you have learnt German, if I
had learnt it ?
1 would have learnt it, if you had learnt
it.
Would you go to Italy, if I went
thither with you 1
I would go thither, if you went thither
with me.
Would you have gone to Germany, if I
had gone thither with you?
Would you go out, if I remained at
home ?
Would you have written a letter, if I
had written a note 1
Ha promesso di mandarmi le met-
canzie subito che le avrebbe rice-
vute.
Ha promesso di scrivermi subito che
sarebbe arrivato in Londra.
Imparerebbe Ella 1' italiano, se io 1
imparassi ?
L' imparerei, s' Ella 1' imparasse.
Avrebbe Ella imparato il tedesco, se
io V avessi imparato 1
U avrei imparato, se ellal' avesse
imparato.
Andrebbe Ella in Italia, s' io v' an
dassi con Lei ?
V andrei s' Ella ci venisse meco.
Sarebbe Ella andata in Alemagna, »f
io vi fossi andato con Lei 1
Uscirebbe Ella, se io stessi in casa ?
Avrebbe Ella scritto una lettera, tn io
avessi scritto un biglietto 1
1 Such expressions are, in fact, elliptical, for they should be : Vorrei vederlo,
m potessi, I would see him, if I could ; V accompagnerei volentieri a Firenze^ u
avetri tempo, I should willingly accompany you to Florence, if I had time ; non
taprei dirlo^e dovessi, 1 could not say so, if I were obliged. Hence it comes
.hat when such expressions are followed by another verb, this must stand in
die imperfect of the subjunctive. Ex. Vorrei trovare uno che m' accornpagnasse,
I should like to find one who would accompany me ; Vorrei un segretario cfu
tavease la lingua italiano, I should like to have a secretary who knew the
'talian language.
590
SEVENTIETH LESSON.
P. The imperfect of the subjunctive is often substituted for the imperfect
•f the indicative in speaking emphatically. Ex.
How much 1 relied on your promise,
you know ; how much I loved you,
is not unknown .o you ; how little I
deserved your forgetfulness, let your
heart tell it you for me.
Quanto io mi Jidasri della >ostrt
promessa, voi lo sapete ; quanto io
v* atnassi, non vi e ignoto ; quanto
poco meritassi la vostra dimenti
canza, lo dicu. il vostro cuore pei
me.
Q. Let it finally be remarked, that the relative che requires the indicativ*
when the subordinate proposition expresses any thing certain or positive, and
the subjunctive when it relates to any thing uncertain 01 doubtful. Ex.
Bring me the book that pleases me.
Bring me a book that may please me.
I am looking for the road that leads to
Florence.
I am seeking a road that may lead me
to Florence.
Ind. Reeami il libro che mi place.
Subj. Reeami un libro che mj
piaccia.
Ind. Cerco la via che mena a Fi
renze.
Subj. Cerco una via che meni a Fi
renze.
However or howsoever.
!Per quanto.
Per — che.
Ob*. R. However or howsoever, followed by an adjective, is rendered by per
juanto invariably without che, or by per with che. In both cases the subjunc-
tive is employed. Ex.
However learned you may be, there
are many things which you do not
know.
However happy she may be, she
always thinks herself unhappy.
Per quanto dotto voi aiaie (or pet
dotto che voi state), ignorate molt*
cose.
Per quanto fortunata ella sia (or per
fortunata ch} ella sia). si crede
sempre infelice.
Whatever ', whatsoever. Per quanto,
Ob*. S. Whatever or whatsoever, followed by a suustantive, is rendered by
oer quanto without che, but it agrees with the substantive, and is followed by
the subjunctive. Ex.
Whatever endeavours he may make,
he will never attain his aim.
Whatever riches they may possess,
they will never be contented.
Per quanti sforzi egli faccia, non ar-
rivera mai al suo fine.
Per quante ricchezze po*aedano, nor
saranno mai contenti.
Whoever ', whosoever,
Uf whomsoever you may speak, avoid
•lander.
iChi the sia (or chichessia),
Chiunque.
Chi che sia la persona di cui parlaU
evitate la maldicenza.
SEVENTIETH LESSON.
Whosoever may come, wk be wel-
come.
Whoever the stranger may be that you
will see, receive him well.
Whomsoever you may give this book
to, recommend him to read it atten-
tively.
891
Chlunque venga sari ben venuto.
Cui che sia lo straniero en' Ella
vedra, 1' accolga bene.
A chiunque diate questo libro rac-
comandate di leggerlo attenta-
mente.
have seen nothing that could be
blamed in his conduct.
Enow nobody who is so good as you
are.
There is nobody who does not know it.
Non ho veduto niente che si poss*
biaeimare nella sua condotta.
J* Non conosco nessuno che sia cosi
buono come Lei, or Voi.
j Non conosco nessuno che sia tantc
L buono quanto Lei, or Voi.
Non v' & chi non sappia cid.
Whoever, whosoever. )
Whatever, whatsoever. $
Whoever may be your enemies, you
have not to fear them so long as you
act according to justice.
Whatever his intentions may be, I
shall always behave towards him in
the same manner.
Qualunque.
Qualunque siano i di Lei nemici non
ha da temerli tanto che si conduce
secondo la giustizia.
Qualunque siano le sue intenzioni,
mi condurrS sempre nella stessa
maniera contro di lui (or verso di
tui).
EXERCISES.
215.
Would you have money if your father were here ? — I should
have some if he were here. — Would you have been pleased if 1
had had some books ? — I should have been much pleased if you
had had some. — Would you have praised my little brother if he
had been good ? — If he had been good I should certainly (sicura-
nenie) not only have praised, but also loved, honoured (onorare)
and rewarded him. — Should we be praised if we did our e»
ercises ? — If you did them without a fault (senza errore), you
would be praised and rewarded. — Would not my brother have
been punished if he had done his exercises ? — He would not have
oeen punished if he had done them. — Would my sister have beer
praised if she had not been skilful ? — She would certainly (certa
26
392 SEVENTIETH LESSON.
mente) not have been praised if she had not been very skilful,
and if she had not worked from morning till evening. — Would
you give me something if I were very good ? — If you were very
good, and if you workea well, I would give you a fine book. —
Would you have written to your sister if I had gone to Paris ? —
I would have written to her, and sent her something handsome
*f you had gone thither. — Would you speak if I listened to you ?
—I would speak if you listened to me, and if you would answer
me. — Would you have spoken to my r.iother if you had seen
her ? — I would have spoken to her, and have begged h^r (pregare)
to send you a handsome gold watch (un belV oriuoh d'oro) if I
had seen her.
Would you copy your exercises if I copied mine ? — I would
copy them if you copied yours. — Would your sister have trans-
cribed her letter if I had transcribed mine ? — She would havp
transcribed it if you had transcribed yours. — Would she have set
out if I had set out ? — I cannot tell you what she would have
done if you had set out
216.
One of the valets de chambre (uno dei cameneri) of Louis (cU
Luigi) the Fourteenth requested that prince, as he was going to»
bed (mentre questi andava a letto), to recommend (di far raccom-
mandare) to the first president (il presidente) a law-suit (una lite)
which he had against (contro) his father-in-law, and said, in
urging him (sollecitandolo) : "Alas (Ah), Sire (Sire), you have
but to say one word." " Well (Eh)," said Louis the Fourteenth,
" it is not that which embarrasses me (non e questo che mi dia
fastidio) ; but tell me (dimmi), if thou wert in thy father-in-law's
place (in luogo di — ), and thy father-in-law in thine, wouldst thou
be glad if I said that word V9
If the men should come it would be necessary to give them
something to drink. — If he could do this he would do that. — 1
have always flattered myself, my dear brother, that you loved me
as much as I love you ; but I now see that I have been mistaken.
I should like to (vorrei) know why you went a walking without
me (senxa di me). — I nave heard, my dear sister, that you are
wigry with me (in collera contro di me\ because I went a walking
SEVENTIETH LESSON. 893
without you (senza di voi). — I assure you that, had I known that
you were not ill, I should have come for you (venire a cercare qual
cuno) ; but I inquired (informarsi) at (dal) your physician's about
your health (sulla vostra salute), and he told me, that you had
been keeping your bed (che voi stavate a letto) the last eight day?
(da otto giorm).
217.
What do you think of our king ? — I say he is a great man, but
I add, that though kings be ever so powerful (potentt), they die
as well as the meanest (abbietto) of their subjects. — Have you
been pleased with my sisters ? — I have ; for however plain (brut-
to) they may be, they are still very amiable ; and however learned
(dotto) our neighbour's (Jem.) daughters, they are still sometime?
mistaken. — Is not their father rich ? — However rich he may be,
he may lose all in an instant. — Whoever the enemy may be whose
malice (la di cui malizia) you dread (temere), you ought to rely
(nposarsi) upon your innocence ; but the laws (la legge) condemn
(condannare) all criminals (il reo) whatever they may be. — What-
ever your intentions (Vintenzione) my be, you should have acted
differently (differ entemente). — Whatever the reasons (la ragione)
be which you may allege (allegare), they will not excuse your
action, blamable in itself. — Whatever may happen to you in this
world, never murmur (mormorare) against Divine Providence (la
divina providenza) ; for whatever we may suffer we deserve.—
Whatever I may do, you are never satisfied. — Whatever you may
say, your sisters shall be punished, if they deserve it, and if they
do not endeavour (studiarsi) to mend (emendarsi). — Who has
taken my gold watch ? — I do not know. — Do not believe that 1
have had it, or that Miss C. has had your silver snuff-box (la
tabacchiera), for I saw both in the hands of your sister when we
were playing at forfeits (a1 pegni). — To-morrow I shall set out
for Dover ; but in a fortnight I shall be back again (tornare), and
then I shall come to see you and your family. — Where is your
sister at present ? — She is at Paris, and my brother is at Berlin. —
That little woman is said to be going to marry General (il gen-
trale) K., your friend ; is it true ? — I have not heard of it. — What
news is there of our great army 7 — It is said to be lying (start*)
894
SEVENTY-FIRST LESSON.
between the Weser (il Veser) and the Rhine (il Reno). — All that
the courier (il corriere) told me seen ing (parere*) very probable
(verisimile), I went home immediately, wrote some letters, ana
departed for London.
SEVENTY-FIRST LESSON.
Lezione settantesima prima.
OF THE IMPERATIVE.
This mood is formed from the present of the subjunctive by changing, for th«
first conjugation, the termination i of the second person singular into a, and
for the two other conjugations a into t. All other persons of the imperative
are like the present of the subjunctive, except the second person plural, which
is formed, even in most of the irregular verbs, from the second person plural
of the indicative.
Subj.
Imperative.
Conjug.
2nd pert. ting.
2nd pert, ting
That thou mayest speak,
\tt.
Parli.
Parla.
speak thou.
That thou mayest believe,
2nd.
Creda.
Credi.
believe thou.
That thou mayest hear,
3rd.
Senta.
Send
hear thou.
The other Pkrsokb or thb Impbbativ* amm .
Let him speak, let us speak, speak ye,
let them speak.
Let him believe, let us believe, believe
ye, let them believe.
Let him hear, let us hear, hear ye, let
them hear.
Parli, parliamo, parlaU, parttno.
Creda, crediamo, credete, credano
Senta, sentiamo, tentite, sentano
2nd pert.
tlave thou, <&c. Abbi,
Be thou, Ac. Sii (sia),
3rd pert.
abbia.
sia.
Ut p. pi 2nd p. pi.
Abbiamo, abbiate,
Siamo, slate,
3rd p. y
abbiaae
siano
Obt. A. The second person singular of the imperative is rendered by the
infinitive whenever it is preceded by the negative nan, Ex.
SKVENTY-PIRST LESSON.
89f
Do not do that.
Do not say that.
Do not deny that
Do not believe that.
Hare patience.
Be (thou) attentive.
Go (ye) thither.
Non far questo.
Non dir questo.
Non negar questo.
Non credere cio.1
Abbiate pazienza.
Sii attento.
Andatevi (or andate la)
Ob$ . B. The pronouns vit, /t, ci, w, *t, melo, cdo, gliclo, &c., are joi: ed •:
«ne imperative (the same as to the infinitive, Lesson XVII., and to t\ e presort
participle, Lesson LVIL). Ex.
Give me. Datemi.
Give us some.
Give it me.
Send it to him (to her).
Lend it to me.
Believe (thou) me.
Datecene.
Datemelo.
Mandateglielo.
Prestatemelo.
Credimi.
Ob*. C. When the imperative is in the third person singular or plural, oc
when it is negative, the pronouns are not joined to it Ex.
Let him believe me.
Let them believe us.
Do (thou) not believe me.
Do (ye) not tell it me.
Do (thou) not listen to him.
Let him not give it him.
Let us not believe her.
Do (ye) not believe me.
Let them not believe him.
Have the goodness to reach me that
dish.
Mi creda.
Ci credano.
Non mi credere.
Non me lo dite.
Non 1' ascoltare.
Non glielo dia.
Non le crediamo.
Non mi credete.
Non gli credano.
Abbiate (abbia) la bonta dl poi
germi questo piatto.
To borrow.
I will borrow some money of yon.
I will borrow that money of you.
Borrow it of (or from) him.
I borrow it from him.
Do not tell him or her.
Do not return it to them.
Chiedere (ricevere) in prestito
Voglio chiederle danaro in prestito
Voglio chiederle in prestito questo
danaro.
Chiedeteglielo in prestito.
Glielo chiedo.
Non glielo dite (dica).
Non lo rendete (renda) loro.
1 This manner of rendering the imperative is elliptical, for there is always the
verb deoiy thou ought st or shouldst, understood, as if we said : Non devi far qua
to thou shouldst not do that ; non devi dir questo, non devi ereder eio\ Ac
396
SEVENTY -FIRST LESSON.
Patience, Impatience.
The neighbour, the snuff-box.
Be (ye) good.
Know (ye) it.
La pazienza, 1' imp&zienza.
II prossimo, la tabaccbiera
Obey your masters, and never give
them any trouble.
Pay what you owe, comfort the af-
flicted, a;id do good to those that
have offended you.
Love God and thy neighbour as thy-
■elf.
To obey.
To comfort.
To offend.
Let us always love and practise virtue,
and we shall be happy both in this
life and in the next
To practise.
Let us see which of us can shoot best.
To express.
To express one's self.
To make one's self understood.
To have the habit.
To accustom
To accustom one's self to something.
Children must be accustomed early to
labour.
To be accustomed to a thing,
I am accustomed to it.
( cannot express myself in Italian, for
I am not in the habit of speaking.
Siate buoni.
Sappiatelo.
Obbedite ai vostri mwslri e aoa
date loro mai dispiacere.
Pagate cio che dovete, co^«c.«te gi'
infelici e fate del bene a quelli che
vi hanno offesi.
Amate Iddio ed il pi-ossimc come
voi stessi.
J Ubbidire (ubbidisco).
I Obbedire 3 (obbedisco).
Consolare 1.
Offendere * (is conjugated like
prendere *) 2.
Amiamo e pratichiamo sempre la
virtu, e saremo felici in questa vita
e nell' altra.
Praticare 1.
Vediamo chi di noi tirera meglio.
Espnmere * 2 (past pari, es-
presso ; pret. def. espressi).
Esprimersi.
Far si capire.
Aver V abitudine. Essere
solito.
Awezzare 1, or assuefare *
(like fare *).
Avvezzarsi a qualche cosa.
Bisogna avvezzar presto i fanciulh
al lavoro.
Esser avvezzato (assuefatto) a
qualche cosa.
Io son avvezzato (arvezzo, asf ue»
fatto).
Non posso esprimerrrJ c«ne in Ha-
liano, perche non ho . abitudin*
di parlara.
IKVKNTY-FIRST LESSON.
891
ftrt" speak properly.
To talk (converse).
To chatter.
To prate.
A prattler.
A chatterer.
To practise.
1 practise speaking.
To permit, to allow.
The permission.
1 permit you to go thither.
Ella parla (vol parlate) propria
mente.
Do good to the poor, have compassion
on the unfortunate, and God will
take care of the rest.
To do good to some one.
To have compassion on some one.
Compassion.
Pity
The rest
J he comes tell him that I am in the
garden.
Ask the merchant, whether he can let
me have the horse at the price which
I have offered him.
Parlare 1, discorrere (diseor
so, discorsi) 2.
!Cicaiare 1.
Chiacchierare 1, ciarlare 1.
Cianciare 1.
Un cicalone, un ciarlone
Un ciarlatore.
Esercitare 1.
Mi esercito a parlare.
Permettere* (like metteie*).
11 permesso.
La permissione.
Vi permetto di andarvi.
Fate del bene ai poveri ed abbiate
compassione degl' infelici; Die
avra cura del resto.
Far del bene a qualcuno
Aver compassione di qualcuno.
La compassione.
La pieta.
II resto.
Se viene ditegli ch' io sono nel giai
dino.
Domandate al mercante, se pud dar-
mi il cavallo al prezzo che gli he
offerto.
THE ACCENTS.
There are in Italian two accents :
I. The grave ( ' ), and
II. The acute (').
I. The Gbavk Acckht.
This is put, 1. Un nouns in td? and tH Such nouns have the singular and
•lural alike, as :
Beauty, goodness, virtue, youth. Bcltb, bontti, virtd, gioceniH.
* Many Italian nouns in th derive from the Latin nouns in tas, as : castitH
toastity ; rnaesth, majesty. Such nouns in a that are unaccented, are variabu
398 * SEVENTY-FIRST LESSON.
These nouns ended formerly ui ode, ate, ude, vie, and are still used thus th
poetry.
2. On the third person singular oi the preterite definite of verbs whose first
person ends in two vowels, as :
He loved, he believed, he heard. Amb, credb, senti.
From amai, I loved ; credei, believed ; eentii, I heard.
But write without an accent : Vinse, he vanquished ; prese, he took : diede, ht
gave, from : vinsi, I vanquished ; preri, 1 took ; died i, I gave, &c
3. On the first and third persons singular of every verb m the future, as
I shall speak, he will speak.
I shall believe, he will believe.
I shall feel, he will feel.
Parlerb, parlerb.
Crederb, crederh.
Sentirb, eentira.
4. To make a distinction between words stfike in orthography, but different
ht signification, such as :
La, It, there, and la, the, her ; li, he, they.
Db, he gives, and da (the ablative), from.
Di, day, and di (the genitive), of.
Si (the affirmation), yes, so, and ei (the pronoun), one's sett.
&, he or she is (the verb), and e (conjunction), and.
i There are some other words which also have the grave accent, such as
Pin, more.
CHU, below.
Costi and costb, there.
Cost, thus.
Gib, already.
Cib, that which.
uos. When a word, having the grave accent, is joined to anotner word, tne
tonsonant of the latter must be doubled, and the accent taken off, as :
Di and da joined to mi become dimmi, tell (thou) me ; dammi, give (thou)
me.
Farb and to, become farollo, I will do it
PiU and tosto make piuttosto, &c.
II. The Acutk Accent ( ).
This is seldom used in Italian. Some authors employ it :
1. On the letter t of words ending in to or to, whenever to or ta are pronounced
In two distinct syllables, such as :
Folly, gallery. i Pazzfa, galleria.
Desire, adieu. Desio, addfo.
2. On words which have a double signification to avoid an ambiguous
neaning as:
Tfenere, to hold, and tinere, tender.
Anc&ra, again, and dncora, an anchor.
Nettare, nectar, and nettdre, to clean, &c.
p the plural, as: una viaita, a visH; plural, U vis'dt, the visits, grazia. praeei
piur. graxic. graces tapitnxa, wisdom , plur. sapimze : un potto, a poet t plur
foeti poets.
S1VKNTY -FIRST LESSON. 399
EXERCISES.
218.
Have patience, my dear friend, and be not sad ; foi sadnes*
titers (cambiare) nothing, and impatience makes bad worse ( peg
gwrare il male). Be not afraid of your creditors ; be sure that
they will do you no harm. They will wait, if you cannot pay
then* yet.— Wkeia will you pay me what you owe me ? — As soon
as I have money I will pay all that you have advanced (anticipare)
for me. I have not forgotten it, for I thin* of it (vi penso) every
day. I am your debtor (il debitore), and I shall never deny
(negare) it. — What a beautiful inkstand you have there ! pray lend
it me. — What do you wish to do with it ? — I will show it to my
sister. — Take it, but take care of it, and do not break it. — Do not
fear (Non tema di niente). — What do you want of my brother ?
— I want to borrow money of him. — Borrow some of somebody
else (ad un altro). — If he will not lend me any, I will borrow
some of somebody else. — You will do well. — Do not wish for
(desiderate) what you cannot have, but be contented with what
Providence (providenza) has given you, and consider (considerare)
that there are many men who have not what you have. — Life
being short (breve), let us endeavour to make it as agreeable
(gradevole) as possible (quanto possibile). But let us also consider
that the abuse (Vabuso) of pleasure (dei piaceri) makes it bitter
(amaro). — Have you done your exercises ? — I could not do them,
because my brother was not at home. — You must not get your
exercises done by your brother, but you must do them yourself. —
What are you doing there ? — I am reading the book which you
lent me. — You are wrong in always reading it. — What am I to
do ? — Draw this landscape, and when you have drawn it, you
shall decline some substantives with adjectives.
219.
What must we do in order to be happy ? — Always love and
practise virtue, and you will be happy both in this life and in the
next. — Since (giacche) we wish to be happy, let us do good to the
poor, and let us have compassion with the unfortunate ; let us
obev our masters, and never give them any trouble ; let us com
tOO SEVENTY-FIRST LESSON.
fort the unfortunate, love our neighbours as ourselves, and not
hate those (e non odiamo quelli) that have offended us ; in short
(in una parola), let us always fulfil our duty, and God will take
care of the rest. — My son, in order to be loved you must be labo-
rious (laborioso) and good. Thou art accused (ti accusano) of
having been idle and negligent (negligente) in thy affairs. Thou
tnowest, however (perd), that thy brother has been punished for
having been naughty. Being lately (Valtro giorno) in town, I
received a letter from thy tutor, in which he strongly (molto)
complained of thee. Do not weep (piangere*) ; now go into thy
room, learn thy lesson, and be a good boy (savio), otherwise
(altrimenti) thou wilt get nothing for dinner (da pranzo). — I shall
be so good, my dear father, that you will certainly (certamente)
be satisfied with me. — Has the little boy kept his word (tener
varola) ? — Not quite (Non del tutto) ; for after having said that,
he went into his room, took his books, sat down at the table (si
mise al tavola), and fell asleep (s'addormento). — " He is a very
good boy when he sleeps," said his father, seeing him some time
after.
Good morning, Miss N. Ah ! here are you at last (eccola
alia fine) ; I have been waiting for you with impatience. — You
will pardon (perdonare) me, my dear, I could not come sooner. —
Sit down (si accommodi), if you please (La prego). How is your
mother ? — She is better to-day than she was yesterday. — I urn
glad of it (ne sono contenta). — Were you at the ball yesterday? —
I was there. — Were you much amused (divertirsi) ? — Only so so
(mediocr entente). — At what o'clock did you return (ritornare)
home ? — At a quarter past eleven.
220
Have you been learning Italian long ? — No, Sir, I have been
learning it only these six months. — Is it possible ! you speak
tolerably well (passabilmente bene) for so short a time (per stpoco
tempo). — You jest (scherzare) ; I do not know much of it yet. —
Indeed, you speak it well already. — I think (credo) you flatter me
a littie. — Not at all (nulla affatto) ; you speak it properly (con-
tenevolmente). — In order to speak it properly one must know more
)f it than I know (che non so io). You know enough of it U
■EVENTY-SECOND LESSOR.
401
make yourself understood.— I still make many faults. — That if
nothing (non fa nulla); you must not be bashful (timido); besides
(d'ahrorule), you have made no faults in all you have said just
now. — I am still timid {timido) because I am afraid of being laughed
at {che. si beffino di me). — They would be (bisognerebbe essere) very
unpolite to laugh at you. Who would be so unpolite as to laugh
at you ? Do you not know the proverb (il proverbio) ? — What
proverb ? — He who wishes to speak well must begin (deve comin-
dare) by speaking badly (dalparlar male). — Do you understand
all I am telling you ?— I understand (intendere*) and comprehend
(capire*) it very well ; but I cannot yet express myself well in
Italian, because I am not in the habit of speaking it. — That will
come in time (col tempo). — I wish (desiderare) it with all my
heart.
Do you sometimes see my brother ? — I see him sometimes ;
when I met him the other day he complained of you. " If he
had behaved better, and had been more economical (economo),"
said he, " he would have no debts (il debito), and I would not
have been angry with him." — I begged him to have compassion
on you, telling him that you had not even money enough to buy
bread. — "Tell him when you see him," replied he to me, "that
notwithstanding his bad behaviour (la condotta) towards me, I
pardon him. Tell him also," continued he, " that one must not
laugh at those (che non bisogna beffarsi di coloro) to whom one is
jnder obligations. Have the goodness to do this, and I shall be
much obliged to you (tenutissimo)" added he in going away
(allontanandosi).
SEVENTY- SECOND LESSON,
Lezione settantesima seconda.
To stand up.
To remain up.
Will you permit me to go to the
market 1
f Star in piedi. Stare mu,
f Restar in piedi.
Vuol Ella permettermi d' andare t)
mercato ?
103
SEVENTY-SECOND LESSON.
To hasten, to make haste.
Make haste, and return soon.
Go and tell him that I cannot come to-
day.
Sbrigarst 1.
Sbrigatevi e rltornate presto.
Andate a dirgli che oggi non posse
venire.
Ob: A. Always put a before the infinitive, preceded by a verb of motion.
The conjunction and, which in English follows the verbs go and amut is not
rendered.
He came and told us he could not) Venne a dirci che non poteva v<*
come. nire.
Go and see your friends. Andate a vedere i vostri amici.
To weep, to cry.
fhe least blow makes him cry.
To frighten.
To be frightened, to startle.
rhe least thing frightens him (her).
Be not frightened.
To be frightened at something.
What are you frightened at ?
At my expense.
At his, her expense.
At our expense.
At other people's expense
That man lives at every body's ex-
pense.
Piangere * ; p. part, pianto ;
pret. def. piansi.
II menomo (il piu piccolo) colpo lo
fa piangere.
Spaventare \,atterrire (isco).
Spaventarsi, atterrirsi.
La piu piccola (la minima) cosa lc
(la) spaventa.
Non si spaventi. Non si atterrisca
Non vi atterrite.
Spaventarsi di qualche cosa.
Di che si spaventa (vi spaventate) ?
Alle mie spese (or a mie spese).
Alle sue spese (or a sue spese).
Alle nostre spese (or a nostre spese)
AH' altrui spese (or ad altrui spese).
Quest' uomo vive alle spese di tutti,
To depend.
That depends upon circumstances,
rhat does not depend upon me.
It depends upon him to do that.
0 ! yes, it depends upon him.
To astonish, to surprise.
To be astonished, to wonder.
To be surprised at something.
I am surprised at it.
4n extraordinary thing happened,
which surprised every body.
Dipendere da.
Questo dipende dalle circostanze.
Questo non dipende da me.
Dipende da lui di far cid
Oh ! si, dipende da lui.
SStupire 3 (isco).
Sorprendere* 2.
Stupirsi, maravigliarsi.
Essere maravigliato (sorpreMO)
di qualche cosa.
Ne sono sorpreso (maravigliato).
Accadde una cosa straoidinaria chff
sorprese ogni persona.
SEVENTY-SECOND LESSON.
403
To take place.
Many things have passed which will
surprise you.
Many days will pass before that.
4 man came in who asked me how I
was.
Aver luogo.
Avvenire *, Accadere.
Sopraggiugnere * (soprag-
giunto (sopraggiunsi).
Awennero molte cose che La sor
prenderanno
Ololti giorni passeranno prima di
cid.
Entro un uomo che mi domande
come io stessi
Then, thus, consequently.
Therefore.
The other day.
Lately.
In a short time.
In.
Dunque, adunque.
Ecco perche.
L' altro giorno.
( Ultimamente, poco fa.
I Non e gran tempo, non ha guar!
Fra poco.
Fra (tra) in.
Obt. B. When speaking of time,
duration. Ex.
He will arrive in a week.
It took him a week to make this
journey.
He will have finished his studies in
three months.
He finished his studies in a year.
He has applied himself particularly to
geometry.
He has a good many friends.
You have a great deal of patience.
They have a great deal of money.
Fou have a great deal of courage.
fra expresses the epoch, and in the
Egli arrivera/ra otto giorni.
Ha fatto questo viaggio in otto
giorni.
Egli avra fatto i suoi studii fra tre
mesi.
Ha finito i suoi studii in un anno.
Ha fatto uno studio particolare della
geometria.
Ha molti amici.
Ella ha molta pazienza.
Hanno molto danaro.
Ella ha molto coraggio.
Tc make a present of something
to some one.
Hi. Lambertini wrote to me lately, that
bis sisters would be here in a short '
time, and requested me to tell you
so ; you will then be able to see them,
and to give them the books which
you have bought. They hope that,
tou will make them a present of
them. Their brother has assured '
me that they esteem you, without I
knowtmr von personally.
Far regalo di qualche cosa a
qualcuno.
II Signor Lambertini mi scrisse 1*
altro giorno che le sue signore
sorelle verrebbero qui fra poco, e
mi prego di dirglielo. Potra
dunque vederle e dar loro i libri
che ha ccmprati. Spcrano che ne
fara loro regalo. II loro fratello
m' ha assicurato che La stimans
senza conoscerla personalraente
104
SEVENTY-SECOND LESSON.
To want amusement.
To get or be tired.
Annoiarsi 1.
J Come potrei annoiarmi presto d
Lei?
pany 7 Come potrei annoiarmi nella di La
I v. compagnia.
He gets tired every where. S' annoia dappertutto.
Agreeable, pleasing.
To be welcome.
Be welcome.
You are welcome every where.
Gradevole, piacevole.
Esser il ben venuto (il ben arrivato)
Esser la ben venuta (la ben arrivata)
Siate il ben venuto (la ben venuta)
Ella e dappertutto il ben venuto
EXERCISES.
221.
Have you already seen my son ? — I have not seen him yet / how
is he ? — He is very well ; you will not be able to recognize him,
for he has grown very tall (si e fatto molto grande) in a short
time. — Why does that man give nothing to the poor (ai poveri) ?
— He is too avaricious (avaro) ; he does not wish to open his
purse for fear of losing his money. — What sort of weather is it ?
— It is very warm ; it is long (e un pezzo) since we had any rain :
I believe we shall have a storm (un temporale). — It may be (pud
darsi). — The wind rises (alzarsi), it thunders already ; do you
hear it ? — Yes, I hear it, but the storm is still far off (molto lon-
tano). — Not so far as you think ; see how it lightens. — Bless me
(Dio mio) ! what a shower (che pwggia dirotta) ! If we go into
some place (in qualche sito), we shall be sheltered (al coperto)
from the storm. — Let us go into that cottage then (dunque) ; we
shall be sheltered there from the wind and the rain. — Where
shall we go to now ? — Which road shall we take ? — The shortest
(corto) will be the best. — We have too much sun, and I am still
very tired ; let us sit down under the shade of that tree. — Who
is that man who is sitting under the tree ? — I do not know him.
— It seems he (pare ch* ei) wishes to be alone (solo) ; for when
we offer to approach him (gli andiamo vicino), he pretends to be
«sleep. — He is like vour sister : she understands Italian ven
SEVENTY-SECOND LESSON. 40ft
veil ( benissimo) ; but when I begin to speak to her, she pretends
not to understand me. — You have promised me to speak to th.6
captain ; why have you not done so ? — I have not seen him yet i
out as soon as I see him, I shall speak to him.
222.
Will you drink a cup of tea? — I thank vou ; I do not like tea
-Would you drink coffee ? — With pleasure (volentieri), but
have just drunk some. — Do you not get tired here ? — How soula
I get tired in this agreeable (gradita) society ? — As to me, 1
always want amusement (mi annoio sempre). — If you did as I do
(come sogli: far id), you would not want amusement; for I listen
to all those who tell me any thing. In this manner I learn a
thousand agreeable things, and I have no time to get tired ; but
you do nothing of that kind (di tutto cid), that is the reason why
you want amusement. — I would do every thing like (come) you,
if I had no reason (motivo) to be sad. — Have you seen Mr. Lam.
bertini ? — I have seen him ; he told me that his sisters would be
here in a short time, and desired me (pregare) to tell you so.
When they have arrived you may give them the gold rings (V
anello) which you have bought ; they flatter themselves that you
will make them a present of them, for they love you without
knowing you personally. — Has my sister already written to you ?
— She has written to me ; I am going to answer her. Shall I
(debbo h) tell her that you are here ? — Tell her ; but do not tell
her that i am waiting for her impatiently (con impazienza). — Why
have you not brought your sister along with you ? — Which ?
— The one you always bring, the youngest. — She did not wish
to go out, because she has the tooth-ache. — I am \ery sorry
tor it, for she is a very good girl. — How old is she ? — She is
acarly fifteen years old. — She is very tall (grandissima) for
itr age (V eta). How old are you? — I am twenty-two — Ig
J pwiible ! I thought you weiu not yet twenty.
8EVENTY-TH1RD LESSON
Lezione settantesima terza
dt is too fond of me not to do ii
! go away not to displease him (dis-
please her).
One must be a fool not to perceive
that.
To cease.
To dare.
To be able.
To know (can).
You continually ask me for money.
She does not cease complaining.
I do not dare to ask you for it.
She does not dare to tell you so.
I cannot go thither.
I cannot tell you.
You cannot believe it.
Mi ama troppo per non faric
Me ne vado per non disfiacergfi
(dispiacerle).
Bisogna essere sciocco per non ac-
corgersi di questo (or Bisogna avei
pocco senno per non accorgerii
di questo).
Cesmre 1.
Ardire (ar disco1), osare.
Potere*.
Sapere*.
Non cessate mai dal chiedermi da
naro.
Dessa non si sta dal lagnarsi.
Non ardisco chiederglielo.
Essa non ardisee dirglielo.
Non posso andarvi.
Non saprei dirle, or dirvi.
Non potrebbe crederlo.
Besides, moreover.
Besides that.
Besides.
Besides what I have just told you.
There is no means of finding money
now.
In otire, di piii.
Oltre do, or oltre di cto,
AUronde.
Oltre cid che Le (vi) ho detto 01
ora.
Adesso non vi d mezzo di trovar
danaro.
1 Not to confound the verb ardire, to dare, with ardere, to burn, its present
participle, first person plural of the present tense indicative, first and second
persons plural of the present tense subjunctive, and first person plural of the
imperative, are substituted by the verb osare, as : Present participle, asando,
daring : first person plural indicative, Not osiamo, or noi abbiamo F ardire, w«
dare ; first and second persons plural subjunctive, Ofiamo, osiate, or eke noi ib-
biamor ardire, che voi abbiate V ardire, that we may dare, that vou may dare
irst person plural of the imperative, Otiamo, let us dare.
S1VENTY-THIRD LESSON.
407
To push
Along.
Along the road.
Along the street.
Along the coast
along the river.
All along.
All the year round.
To enable to.
To be able to.
fo the 7*ght.
hand.
On the right side or
Vo the left. On the left side or hand.
Could you not tell me which is the
nearest way to the city-gate 1
Bo to the bottom of this street, and
when you are there, turn to the
right, and you will find a cross- way,
which you must take.
And then ?
You will then enter a broad street,
which will bring you to a great
square, where you will see a blind
. alley.
Tou must leave the blind-alley on your
left, and pass under the arcade that
is near it
Then you must ask again.
An arcade.
The cross-way.
The blind-alley.
The shore, the bank.
7b get married, to enter into
matrimony.
27
Spingere* 2 (p. part, spinto ,
pret. def. spinsi).
{ Lungo il (or at).
\ Rasente il, accanto di.
Lungo la via (lunghesso il caminoj
Lungo la strada.
Lungo il lido.
( Lungo il fiurae.
c Lunghesso il fiume.
Pel corso di.
Pel corso dell' anno.
t Mettere net case (m utato
di.
f Essere in utato (net caso)
di.
Essere capace.
A destra. A mano destra.
A diritta.
A sinistra. Dal lato manco.
A manca.
Non potrebbe dirmi qual & la via
la piil corta per arrivar alia porta
dellacitta?
Segua tutta questa strada, e quando
sara all' estremita, giri a destra;
trovera una capocroce, or un cro-
cicchio che traversers.
Epoi?
Poi entrera in una strada discreta-
mente larga, che La menera sopra
una gran piazza dove vedra un
angiporto.
Lasciera 1' angiporto dal lato man-
co, e passera sotto gli archi cbt
sono accanto.
In seguito domandera.
Un arco.
La capocroce.
L' angiporto.
La spiaggia, il lido.
Maritarst, ammogharm*
108
SEVENTY-THIRD LESSON.
To marry somebody.
To marry (to give in marriage).
My cousin, having given his sister in
marriage, married Miss Delbi.
is vour cousin married ?
No, he is still a bachelor.
To be a bachelor.
Embarrassed, puzzled, at a loss.
An embarrassment, a puzzle.
You embarrass (puzzle) me.
You puzzle (perplex) me.
The marriage.
Vie asks my sister In marriage.
The measure.
To take measures.
' shall take other measures.
Goodness ! how rapidly time passes in
your society.
The compliment.
You make me a compliment which I
do not know how to answer
The fault.
t is not my fault.
Do not lay it to my charge.
To lay to one's charge.
Who can help it?
Whose fault is it?
f cannot help it.
The delay.
He does it without delay.
I must go (must be off).
Go away! Begone!
Sposare qualcuno,
Maritare. *
Mio cugino avendo maiitato toi
sorella, sposd la signorina Delbi.
II di Lei signor cugino & egli am
mogliato ?
No, Signore, $ ancor celibe.
Essere celibe, or scapolo.
Imbarazzato, impacciato
Un imbarazzo, un imbroglio.
Ella m' imbarazza.
Ella mi mette nell' imbarazzo.
11 matrimonio.
Domanda mia sorella in matrimo
nio.
La misura.
Prendere della misure.
Prenderd altre misure.
Dio ! quanto presto passa il tempo
nella di Lei societa (nella di Lei
compagnia).
II complimento.
Mi fa un complimento al quale non
so che rispondere.
II f alio, la colpa.
Non e mia colpa.
( Non me lo imputi.
( Non imputatemelo.
Imputare a qualcuno.
Di chi e la colpa?
5 Non so che farvi.
c Non saprei che farvi.
La dilazione, il ritardo, 1' mdugifr
Lo fa senza ritardo.
C Sto per ritararmi {or ora me n«
s andro).
' Sto per andarmene via.
c Fugga ! Seappi f
I Andatevene ! Se ne vada '
SITENTY THIRD . BSSON.
409
Tojesi.
The jest, the joke.
Seriously, in good earnest.
You are jesting.
tte cannot take a joke, is no joker.
To take a joke.
To beg some one's pardon.
To pardon.
i beg your pardon.
Pardon me.
The pardon.
To advance.
The watch goes too fast (gains).
That clock goes too fast (gains).
To retard.
The watch goes too slow (loses).
My watch has stopped.
To stop.
Buffonare, burlare, scherxar*
Lo scherzo, la burla.
Senza burle (sul serio).
( Ella burla (scherza).
C Ella si burla.
t Non regge alia celia.
t Reggere * alia celia (retto, rati).
Domandar scusa a qualcuno.
Perdonare, far grazia, sol
sare.
r Mi perdoni. La mi scusi. Le do
< mando scusa.
v Perdonatemi. Vi domando scuta.
( Vossignoria mi scusi.
I Mi scusi. Scusatemi.
II perdono, la scusa.
Avanzare. Andare avanii
(innanzi).
L' oriuolo avanza (va avanti).
Quest* orologio anticipa.
Ritardare 1.
L' oriuolo ritarda.
II mio oriuolo si e* fermato.
II mio oriuolo sta (or £) fermo.
Fermarsi 1.
Where did we stop 1
We left off at the fortieth lesson, page
one hundred and thirty six.
t Dove ne eravamo ?
t Eravamo alia lezione quarantesima,
paging cent* trenta set
Tc wind up a watch.
To regulate a watch.
four watch is twenty minutes too
fast, and mine a quarter of an hour
too slow.
Cartcare un oriuolo.
Regolare un oriuolo (mettere a
segno un oriuolo).
II di Lei oriuolo avanza venti ml-
nuti, e il mio ritarda un quarto d
ora.
no
SEVBNTY-THIRD LESSOIf.
It will strike twelve.
Has it already struck twelve 1
It has already struck hree.
To strike.
On condition, or provided.
I will lend you money, provided you
will henceforth De more economical
than you have hitherto been.
Hereafter, for the future, henceforth.
The future.
Economical
To renounce gambling.
To follow advice (counsel).
Fou look so melancholy.
Adieu, farewell.
God be with you, good bye.
Till I see you again.
( hope to see you again soon.
Sta per suonare mezzo giorn*.
Mezzo giorno suonera" or onu
Son gia suonate le dodicl 1
Le tre sond gia sonate.
Suonare 1. Batter e 2.
A condizione, sotto condizione.
Col patto.
Vi presterd del danaro, a condizio-
ne che sarete d1 or innanzi pit
economo che non siete stato sine
adesso (or che non lo foste finora).
D' or innanzi, d' oggi in avanti, in
awenire, nell' avvenire.
L' avvenire (mas.), il futuro.
Economo, economico, risparmiante.
Rinunciare al giuoco.
Abbandonare il giuoco.
Seguire un consiglio (un pa-
rere).
EUa ha 1' aspetto cosi melanconieo.
Addio.
Al piacere di rivederla.
A rivederla.
EXERCISES.
223.
flHiy does my sister make no progress ? — She would make some
if she were as assiduous as you. — You flatter me. — Not at all
(niente affalto) ; I assure you that I should be highly satisfied (con-
tentissinio), if all my pupils worked (studiare) like you. — Why do
you not go out to-day ? — I would go out, if it were fine weather.
— Shali I have the pleasure of seeing you to-morrow ? — If you
wish it \ will come. — Shall I still be here when you arrive (al dt
Lei rit&rno) 1 — Will you have occasion (occasione) to go to town
this evening ? — 1 do not know, Dut I would go now, if I had an
opportunity (una buona occasione). — You would not have so much
pleasure, and you would not be so happy, if you had not friendf
SEVBNY-THIRD LESSON. 411
and books. — Man (V uomo) would not experience (provare) so
much misery in his career (la carriera), and he would not be so
unhappy, were he not so blind (cieco). — You would not have that
insensibility (questa insensibilita) towards the (pei) poor, and you
would not be so deaf (sordo) to their supplications (alle loro preg-
hiere), if you had been yourself in misery for some time (qualzhe
tempo). — You would not say that if you knew me well. — Why
has your sister not done her exercises ? — She would have done
t! in if she had not been prevented. — If you worked more, and
spoke oftener, you would speak better. — I assure you, Sir, that I
should learn better, if I had more time. — I do not complain of you,
but of your sister. — You would have no reason (Non avrebbe luo-
go) to complain of her, had she had time to do what you gave her
to do. — Would you be sorry (spiacere ad uno) if your mother
were to arrive to-day ? — I should not be sorry for it. — Would
your sister be sorry if she were rich ? — She would not be sorry
for it. — Where were you when your sister went out ? — I was in
my room. — She wished she had known it (Ella vorrebbe averlo
saputo) ; for, had she known it, she would have called you in
order to take you along with her to the opera.— They say that
the house of our neighbour has been burnt down (sia stata abbru-
ciata). — Did you know it? — I was quite ignorant of (ignoravo in-
tieramente che) his house being on fire (il fuoco fosse alia sua
casa) ; for had I known it, I would have run to his assistance (wi
suo aiuto). — What has my brother told you ? — He has told me
that he would be the happiest man in the world (delmondo)y if he
knew the Italian language, the finest of all languages.
224.
I should like to know (vorrei pur sapere) why I cannot speak as
well as you. — I will tell you : if you did as I do you would speak
well. You would speak as well as I, if you were not bashful
(timido). But if you had studied your lessons more carefully
'meglio), you would not be afraid to speak ; for, in order to speak
well one must know, and it is very natural (molto naturale) that he
who does not know well what he has learnt, should be (subj.) timid.
You would not be so timid as you are, if you were sure to make
no mistakes (sbagli)
412 SEVENTY- THIRD LESSOIf.
I come to wish you a good morning. — You are very kind (ama
bilissimo). — Would you do me a favour ? — Tell me (Dicami, or mi
dica) what you want, for I would do any thing to oblige you (per
renderle servigio). — I want five hundred crowns, and I beg you to
lend them to me. — I will return them to you as soon as I have
received my money. — You would oblige me much (rendere qual-
cuno obbligato), if you would render me this service. — I would do
it with all my heart (di tuttocuore), if I could ; but having lost all
my money, it is impossible for me (mi e impossibile) to render you
this service. — May I ask you for (oserei domandarle) a little water ?
— What do you want water for ? — Because I wish (perche vorrei)
to wash my hands. — If you would also give me a towel to wipe
my hands after having washed them, I should be much obliged
to you (he sarei tenutissimo. — Why have your brothers sold their
old horse ? — They would not have got rid of it, if they had not got
a better. — Why did not your sister get a better carriage ? — If she
had got rid of her old carriage, she would have got a better. —
Would you execute (fare *) a commission for me ? — With much
pleasure. — If the merchant would be satisfied with the sum which
I offered for the horse, I would buy it. — I am sure that he would
be satisfied, if you would add (aggiungervi) a few crowns more.
— If 1 was sure of that I would add a few crowns more. — Children
(ragnzzi miei) ! have you done your task ? — We must be ill (bi-
sognerebbe che fossimo ammalati) not to do it. — Is this wine suffi-
cient for you (Le basta — ) ? — It would be sufficient for me if I
was not very thirsty. — If your sisters have done their tasks (il lor
dovere), why do they hide themselves ? — They would not hide
themselves, if they did not fear to be seen by their (dalla lor)
governess (maes*ra), who would scold them for having gone a
walking without telling her (senza dirle nulla).
225.
What o'clock is it ? — It is half-past one. — You say it is half.
past one, and by my watch (al mio oriuolo) it is but half-past
twelve. — It will soon strike two. — Pardon me, it has not struck
one. — I assure you it is five-and-twenty minutes past one, for my
watch goes very well.— Bless me ! how rapidly time passes in
your society. V ou make me a compliment which I do not know
S1VENTY-F0URTH LESSON. 413
how to answer. Have you bought your watch in Paris ? — I have
not bought it, my uncle has made me a present of it. — What has
that woman intrusted you with ? — She has intrusted me with the
secret of a great count who is in great embarrassment about the
marriage (a cagione del matrimonio) of one of his daughters. —
Does any one ask her (La domanda forse qualcuno) in marriage ?
— The man who asks her in marriage is a nobleman of the
neighbourhood (la vicinanza). — Is he rich ? — No, he is a poor
devil (il diavolo) who has not a sou (un quattrino).— You say you
have no friends among your school-fellows (il condiscepolo) ; but
is it not your fault ? You have spoken ill (sparlare)of them, and
they have not offended you. Believe me, he who has no frienda
deserves to (meritare di) have none.
226.
A Dialogue (Dialogo) between a Tailor and his Journeyman
(il garzone).
Charles (Carlo), have you taken the clothes to the Count of
(delta) Torre ? — Yes, Sir, I have taken them to him. — What did
he say ? — Nothing but (se non) that he had a great mind to give
me a box on the ear (uno schiaffo), because I had not brought
them sooner. — What did you answer him ? — Sir, said I, I do not
understand (non tollero) that joke : pay me what you owe me ;
and if you do not do so instantly, I shall take other measures.
Scarcely had I said that, when he put his hanci 10 his sword (che
mise mano alia spada), and I ran away (prendere* lafuga).
SEVENTY-FOURTH LESSON.
Lezione settantesima quarta.
To last (to wear well). \ Bur are 1.
That cloth will wear well. Questo panno durera molto.
How long has that coat lasted youl Quanto tempo Le ha durato quest
abito?
ti4
SEVENTY-FOURTH LESSON.
To my liking.
To every body's liking.
Nobody can do any thing to his
liking.
A mio grado (a mw gemo, •
mio modo).
A grado di tutti.
Non gli va niente a genio.
Non si pud far nulla a suo gratit
(a modo suo).
A boarding-house.
A boarding-school.
To keep a boarding-house.
To board with any one, or any where.
Una pensione.
Tenere pensione, tenere a dozzina.
SEssere in pensione di, essere a do*
zina.
Mettersi in pensione a.
To exclaim.
To make uneasy.
To get or grow uneasy.
To be uneasy.
Why do you fret (are you uneasy) 7
1 do not fret (I am not uneasy).
That news makes me uneasy.
I am uneasy at not receiving any
news.
She is uneasy about that affair
Do not be uneasy.
Quiet.
Esclamare 1.
Inquietare 1.
Inquietarst.
Esser inquieto (Jem. inquieta)
Perche* mai s' inquieta 7
Non m' inquieto.
Questa nuova m' inquieta.
Sono inquieto di non ricevere nuove
E inquieta su questo affare.
Non s' inquieti.
Tranquillo, quieto.
To quiet.
Compose yourself.
Tranquillare 1.
Si tranquilli (tranquillatevi).
To alter, to change.
That man has altered a great deal since
I saw him.
Cambiare 1.
Quest' uomo ha moito cambiato da
che non 1' ho veduto.
To be of use.
Of what use is that to you 7
That is of no use to me.
Of what use is that to your brother)
It is of no use to him.
Of what use is that stick to you 7
I use it to beat my dogs
Of what use ie that norse to your
brother? **
Servire 3.
t A che Le serve (vi serve) cidt
t Non mi serve a niente.
t A che serve cio al di Lei fratello?
t Non gli serve a niente.
* A che Le serve questo bastone?
t Mi serve per battere i miei cani.
t A che serve questo cavallo al di Lef
fratello 7
SBVENTY-FOURTH LESSON.
415
Be um it to carry his vegetables to
the market.
Of what use are these bottles to your
landlord?
They serve him to put his wine in.
To stand instead, to be as
t use my gun as a stick.
This hole serves him as a house.
He used his cravat as a nightcap.
To avail.
What avails it to you to cry 1
It avails me nothing.
Opposite to.
Opposite that house.
Opposite the garden.
Opposite the church.
Opposite to me.
Right opposite.
He lives opposite the castle.
I live opposite the* king's library.
To get hold of.
To take possession of
To witneso
To show.
To give evidence against some one.
He has shown a great deal of friend
ship to me.
To turn some one into ridicule
To become ridiculous..
Tc make one's self ridiculous.
To be born.
Where were you born ?
I was born in this country.
Where was your sister born 1
She was born in the United States of
North America.
t G i serve a portar i tuoi legnmi a.'
mercato.
t A che servono queste bottiglie al d)
Lei locandiere 7
t Gli servono per mettervi il rot
vino.
Servire di.
t II mio schioppo mi serve di bastone.
t Questo buco gli serve di casa.
t La sua cravatta gli ha servito di
berretta da notte (di cuffia da
notte).
Servire (di before inf.).
t A che Le serve di piangere »
t Non mi serve a nulla.
! Dirimpetto a, in faccia a,
Contro a (di), di contro a.
Dirimpetto a questa casa.
Dirimpetto al giardino.
In faccia (dirimpetto, di contro) alia
chiesa.
Dirimpetto a me.
Proprio in faccia.
Abita in faccia al castello.
Abito in faccia alia biblioteca reale.
Impadronirsi di.
Attestare 1, testimoniare 1, dimo»
trare 1.
Testimoniare contro qualcuno.
Mi ha dimostrato molta amicixia.
Porre in ridicolo qualcuno
Divenir ridicolo.
Renderai ridicolo.
Esser nato.
t Dove & Ella nata 1
t Sono nato in questo paese.
t Dove e" n;ita la di Lei sorella?
t E nata negli Stati-Uniti delF Am*
rica settentrionale.
416 SEVENTY-FOURTH LESSON.
Where were your brothers born ?
They were born in Italy.
The boarder.
The pouch.
A pillow.
Down.
t Ore eon nati i di Lei frateffil
t Son nati in Italia.
II pensionario, Dozzinante
11 carniere.
Un guanciale, piumaccio
La peluria.
EXERCISES.
227.
What are you astonished at ? — I am astonished to find you still
ji bed. — If you knew how (quanto) sick I am, you would not be
astonished. — Has it already struck twelve ? — Yes, madam, it is
already half-past twelve. — Is it so late ? Is it possible? — That is
not late, it is still early. — Does your watch go well ? — No, Miss
N., it is a quarter of an hour too fast. — And mine is half an hour
too slow. — Perhaps it has flopped ? — In fact, you are right. — Is it
wound up ? — It is wound up, and yet (pure) it does not go. — Do
you hear ? it is striking one o'clock (suona V ora). — Then I will
regulate my watch and go home.-— Pray (di grazia) stay a little
longer ( La resti ancor un poco) I — I cannot, for we dine precisely
at one o'clock. — Adieu, then, till I see you again. — What is the
matter with you, my dear friend ? Why do you look so melan-
choly ? — Nothing ails me (non ho niente). — Are you in any
trouble (Avresti a caso qualche dispiacere) ? — I have nothing, and
even less than nothing, for I have not a penny (un qttattrino), and
owe a great deal to my creditors : am I not very unhappy ? —
When a man is well and has friends he is not unhappy. —
Dare I ask you a favour ? — What do you wish ? — Have the good-
ness to lend me fifty crowns. — I will lend them you with all my
heart, but on condition that you will renounce gambling (rinun-
nare algiuoco), and be more economical than you have hitherto
been. — I see now (Ora vedo), that you are my friend, and I love
you too much not to follow your advice. — John KGiovanni)l —
What is your pleasure, Sir ? — Bring some wine, — Presently, Sii.
— Menico ! — Madam ? — Make the fire (del fuoco). — The maid-
servant has made it already. — Bring me some paper, pens, and
ink. Bring me also some sand (della sabbia) or blotting-paj>ei
SEVENTY-FOURTH LESSON. 417
{delta carta sugante o succhia), sealing-wax (della cera lacca), ana
a light (un lume). — Go and tell my sister not to wait for me, ana
be back again (di ritorno) at twelve o'clock in order to carry my
letters to the post {la postd). — Very well (benissimo), Madam.
228.
Sir, may I (ardiro to) ask where the Eail of B. lives ? — He
ives near the castle on the other side of the river. — Could you
.ell me which road I must (debba) take to go thither ? — You must
go (segua) along the shore, and you will come to a little street
[quando sard alV estremitd prenda una contradella) on the right,
which will lead you straight (direttamente) to his house. It is a
fine house, you will find it easily. — I thank you, Sir. — Does Count
N. live here ? — Yes, Sir, walk in (favorisca di entrare), if you
please. — Is the Count at home ? I wish to have the honour
(V onore) to speak to him.— Yes, Sir, he is at home; whom shall
I have the honour to announce (annunziare) ? — I am from B.,
and my name is (chiamarsi) F.
Which is the shortest (corto) way to the arsenal (V arsenate) 1
— Go down (segua) this street, and when you come to the bottom
(sard alV estremitd), turn to the left, and take the cross-way
(troverd una — che traverserd) ; you will then enter into a rather
narrow (stretto) street, which will lead you to a great square (la
piazza), where you will see a blind alley. — Through ( per) which
1 must pass ? — No, for there is no outlet (/' uscita). You must
leave it on the right, and pass under the arcade which is near it.
— And then 1 — And then you must inquire further. — I am very
much obliged (tenutissimo) to you. — Do not mention it (Non ne
val la pena). — Are you able to translate an English letter into
Italian ? — I am. — Who has taught you ? — My Italian master has
enabled me to do it. (See end of Lesson XXIV.)
SEVENTY-FIFTH LESSON
Lezione settantesima quinta,
To lose sight of.
The sight.
1 wear spectacles because my sight is
bad (or because I have a bad sight).
I am near-sighted.
The ship is so far off that we shall
soon lose sight of it.
1 have lost sight of that.
As it is long since I was in England,
I have lost sight of your brother.
As it is long since I have read any
Italian, I have lost sight of it.
r f Perdere di vista.
| Dileguarsi dagliocchi (ialla
vista.)
j" Lasciare andare dalle
sguardo {dagli sguardi, dal
guar do).
La vista.
Porto degli occhiati, perche4 ho cat-
tiva vista.
t Ho la vista corta.
t II bastimento e cosi lontano chc si
dileguera quanto prima dalla nos-
tra vista (dai nostri occhi, dal nos-
tra sguardo).
t Non so piu nulla di cio.
t Siccome e molto tempo che non
sono stato in Inghilterra, ho psr-
duto di vista il di Lei fratello.
t Come e lungo tempo che non ho
letto 1' italiano, 1' ho dimenticato
(non lo so piu).
You ought or should do that. |
Obs. A. Ought and should are rendered
verb dovere*, to be obliged, to owe.
Ht ought not to speak thus to his
father.
We ought to go tnither earlier.
l'hey should listen to what you say.
You should pay more attention to what
I say.
You ought to have done that.
He should'have managed the thing bet-
ter than he has done.
Vou should have managed the thing
differently.
Dovrebbe far cio.
into Italian by the conditionals of the
Egli non dovrebbe parlar cosi a sue
padre.
Dovremmo andarvi pin per temps
(piil di buon' ora).
Dovrebbero ascoltare cid che Ella
dice.
Dovreste far piu attenzione (star piu
attento) a cio che dico.
Avrebbe dovuto far cio.
Egli avrebbe dovuto regolarsi meglic
che non ha fatto.
Avrebbe dovuto prendersi in modo
diverso (or maneggiare la cosa)
SEVENTY-FIFTH LESSON.
410
fhey ought to have managed tho thing
as I did.
We ought to have managed it differently
from what they did.
Voc have managed the thing badly.
t Avrebbero dovuio agire in tal fao
cenda come mi vi son preso io.
t Avremmo dovuio condurci in tal fa»-
cenda diversamente di quello cm
hanno fatto.
Vi siete mal preso.
To bid or to wish.
1 bid you good morning.
I wish you a good morning.
I wish you a good journey.
To play a game at billiards.
To play upon the flute.
A fall.
To have a fall.
A stay, a sojourn.
To make a stay.
Do you intend to make a long stay in
the town 7
I do not intend to make a long stay
in it.
Augur are 1,
Le auguro 11 buon giorno (L
XXVI.).
Le auguro un buon viaggio
Far una partita al bigJiardo (Let-
son LI.).
Suonare il flauto (Lesson LI.).
Una caduta.
t Far una caduta.
Un soggiorno.
Far un soggiorno.
Pensa Ella far un lungo soggiorno
nellacitta?
Non penso farvi on lungo sog-
giorno
To propose (meaning to intend).
1 propose going on that journey.
I propose (intend) joining a hunting
party.
di.
{ Proporre* )
( Far proposito S
Mi propongo di far questo viaggio.
Mi propongo d' andare ad una par
tita di caccia.
To suspect, to guess,
I suspect what he has done.
He does not suspect what is going to
happen to him.
Sospettare 1.
Sospetto cid che ha fatto.
Non sospetta cid che or ora gii a*
cadra (gli arriverd).
To think of some one or of Pensare a qualeuno,
something. che cosa.
Of whom do you think 7 A chi pensa Ella 7
Of what do you think 1 A che pensa Ella 7
a qual*
i
To turn upon.
To be the question.
It is the question it turns upon.
The question is not pleasure, but yonr
improvement.
Trattarsi di.
Si tratta di.
Non si tratta del vostro piacere,
dei vostri progressi
420
SBVKNTY-FIFTH LESSON.
Yon play. Sir ; but playing is not the
thing, but studying.
What is going on 1
The question is what we shall do to
pais the time agreeably.
On purpose.
1 beg your pardon, I have not done it
on purpose.
To hold one's tongue.
To stop speaking, to be silent
.i
Giuocate, Signore -, ma ron si tratta
di giuocare, si tratta di studiare.
Di che si tratta?
Si tratta di sapere cio che faremc
per passar il ten do piacevolmente
{ Apposta.
( A bella posta.
Le domando scusa, non
apposta (a bella posta).
ho fattc
Tacere* ; past part, taciuto
pret. def. tacqui.
Ob*. B. Five irregular verbs have their perfetto remoto in cqui, viz.
Infinitive.
To please,
To be situated,
To be silent,
To hurt,
To be born,
Piacere*.
Giacere*.
Tacere*.
Nuocere*.
Nascere*.
Do you hold your tongue 7
I hold my tongue.
He holds his tongue.
We are silent.
They are silent.
After spsaking half an hour, he held
hit tongue.
Pret. Def.
Piacqui,
Giacqui
Tacqui,
Nocqui,
Nacqui,
Past Part.
piaciuto.
giaciuto.
taciuto.
nociato.
nato
Tacete?
Taocio.
Tace.
Tacciamo.
Tacciono.
Dopo aver parlato men' ora tar
que.
EXERCISES.
229.
Why does your mother fret ? — She frets at receiving no newi
from her son, who is with the army. — She need not be uneasy
about him, for whenever he gets into a scrape he knows how to
get out of it again. Last summer, when we were a hunting toge-
ther (insieme), night grew upon us {la notte ci sorprese) at least
ten leagues (la Uga) from our country-seat (la casa di campagna).
SEVENTY-FIFTH LESSON. 42}
—Well (Ebbene), where did you pass the night ? — I was verj
uneasy at first (da principio), but your brother not in the least
(non — affatto) ; on the contrary, he tranquillized me, so that I lost
n iv uneasiness. We found at last a peasant's hut, where we
Dassed the night. Here (ivi) I had an opportunity of seeing how
olerer your brother is. A few benches and a truss of straw (un
ello di paglia) served him to make a comfortable bed ; he
used a bottle as a candlestick, our pouches served us as a pillow,
and our cravats as nightcaps. When we awoke in the morning
we were as fresh and healthy (sano) as if we had slept on down
and silk.
A candidate (un candidate) petitioned (domandare a) the king
of Prussia for an employment (un impiego). This prince asked
him where he was born. lt I was born at Berlin," answered he.
" Begone,'' said the monarch (ilmonarca) "all the men of Berlin
(il berlinese) are good for nothing." " I beg your majesty's (la
maestd) pardon," replied the candidate, " there are some good
ones, and I know two." " Which are those two ?" asked the
king. " The first," replied the candidate, " is your majesty, and
I am the second." The king could not help laughing (non poti
astenersi dal ridere) at this answer (la risposta), and granted the
request (accordare una domanda).
230.
A thief having one day entered a boarding-house stole three
cloaks (il mantello). In going away he was met by one of the
boarders who had a fine laced (gallonato) cloak. Seeing so many
cloaks, he asked the man where he had taken them. The thief
answered boldly (freddamente) that they belonged to three gen
tlemen of the house who had given them to be cleaned (dapulire).
" Then you must also clean mine, for it is very much in need of
it (averne gran bisogno)" said the boarder ; " but," added he,
•'you must return it to me at three o'clock." "I shall not fail
(mancare), Sir," answered the thief, as he carried off (portando
ma) the four cloaks with which he has not yet returned (che non
ha ancora riportati). — You are singing (cantare), gentlemen, but
it is not a time for (non si tratta di) singing : you ought to be
«ilent, and to listen to what you are told. — We are at a loss. —
422 SEVENTY-FIFTH LESSON.
What are you at a loss about ? — I am going to tell you : the
question is with us how we shall pass our time agreeably (lieta-
menle). — Play a game at billiards or at chess. — We have pro-
posed joining a hunting-party ; do you go with us (e Ella dei
nostri) ? — I cannot, for I have not done my task yet ; and if I ne-
glect it, my master will scold me. — Every one Recording to his
liking ; if you like staying at home better than going a hunting
(che non oV andare alia caccia) we cannot hinder you. — Does Mr.
B. go with us ? — Perhaps. — I should not like to go with him, for
he is too great a talker (troppo ciarlone), excepting that (da quello
in fuori) he is an honest man.
What is the matter with you ? you look angry. — I have reason
to be (aver motivo d' essere) angry, for there is no means of get-
ting money now. — Have you been to Mr. A's. — I have been to
his house ; but there is no possibility (non c' e mezzo) of borrow,
jig from him. — I suspected (pensare) that he would not lend me
any, that is the reason why I did not wish to ask him, and had
you not told me to do so, I should not have subjected myself (non
vu earei 'jpnsto) to a refusal (Urifiuto).
FOURTH MONTH
Quarto mese.
SEVENTY- SIXTH LESSON.
Lezione settantesima sesta.
Towards,
Be comes towards me.
He has behaved very well towards
me.
We must always behave well towards
every body.
The behaviour of others is but an echo
of our own. If we behave well to-
wards them, they will also behave
well towards us ; but if we use them
ill, we must not expect better from
them.
To treat or to use somebody well.
To use somebody ill.
Is you have always used me well, I
will not use you ill.
4s he has always used me well, I
have always used him in the same
manner.
To delay (to tarry).
Do not be long before you return,
shall not be long before I return.
Verso.
Viene verso dl me.
Si 6 condotto benissimo verso dl
me.
Bisogna condursi sempre bene verso
di tutti.
La condotta degli altri non d che un
eco della nostra. Se ci condu-
ciamo bene verso di loro, si con-
durranno pur bene verso di noit
ma se trattiamo male con essi,
non dobbiamo aspettare meglio da
loro.
f Comporiarsi { bene con
f Trattare (usare) ( qualcuno.
Sf Comportarsi i male con
•(■ Trattare (usare) \ qualcuno
t Come Ella si £ sempre comportata
bene con me, non mi comporterd
male con Lei.
t Come s' e sempre comportato bene
meco, mi sono sempre comportata
della stessa maniera con ltd.
Tardare 1 (a before Inf.).
Non tardate a ritornare.
Non tarderd a ritornars.
424
SEVENTY-SIXTH LESSON.
To long for or to.
1 long to see my brother.
He longs to receive his money.
We long for dinner, because we are
very hungry.
They long to sleep, because they are
ured
Oh, how mucn I long that some one
mav join me here !
' (Desiderare 1..
f Esser impaziente di (tat
dar f
■ f Non veder V ora di.
Scno impaziente di vedere mio fra
tello.
E impaziente di ricevere il suo da-
naro. (Non vede 1' ora di ricevere
il suo danaro.)
Siamo impazienti di pranzar*
perche abbiamo mo] to fame.
Desiderano di dormire, perche son!
stanchi.
Oh! quanto mi tarda ch' aim qu
giunga ! (pres. of the subj.)
To be at one's ease.
To be comfortable.
To be uncomfortable.
I am very much at my ease ipon mis
chair.
You are uncomfortable upon your
chair.
What can that be 1
We are uncomfortable in that board-
ing-house.
That man is well off, for he has plenty Quest' uomo & agiato, perche* h»
of money. molto danaro.
That man is badly off, for he is poor. Quest' uomo non e agiato, perchd 4
povero.
Essere agiato (comodo).
\ Essere mal comodo.
I Non essere agiato.
Sono molto comodo su questa se-
dia.
Ella & mal comodo sulla di Le.
sedia.
t Che pud essere 1
Siamo mal coruodi in questa pen
sione.
To make one's self comfortable.
Make yourself comfortable.
To be uncomfortable.
To inconvenience one's self. \
To put one's self out of the >
way. ;
Do not put yourself out of the way.
That man never inconveniences him-
self; he never does it for any body.
San you, without pntting yourself to
Inconvenience, lend me your gun ?
f Accomodarsr,
La si accomodi.
Essere incomodo.
Incomodarsi.
Non La si incomodi.
Q,uest' uomo non s' incomoda mat
non s' incomoda mai per alcuno.
Pud Ella, senza incomodarsi, pret
Urmi il di Lei fucile?
SEVENTY-SIXTH LESSON.
426
To make entreaties.
To beg with entreaty.
[ employed every kind of entreaty to
engage him to it.
To solicit, to press, to sue, U
entreat.
Far istanxe.
Pregare con isianza.
Ne i' ho sollecitato con tutte k
istanze possibili.
Soiled tare 1.
Here and there.
Now and then.
Prom time to time.
Indifferently (good or bad).
have made my composition tolerably
weL
Qua e la.
Di distanza in distanxa.
Di tanto in tanto.
Di quando in quando.
Di tempo in tempo.
Bene o male.
Bene o male ho fatto la mia oompo
sizione.
To postpone, to put off.
Let us put that off until to-morrow.
Let us put off that lesson until another
time.
To impart something to some one.
Have yon imparted that to your
father!
have imparted it to him.
Rimettere * a, differire (isco).
Rimettiamo questo a domani.
Rimettiamo questa lezione ad un'
altra volta.
j" Far parola di qualche cosa a
qualcuno.
Ha Ella fatto parola di cW al di Lei
padre 1
Gliene ho fatto parola.
In vain.
.n vain I looked all around, I saw
neither man nor house: not the
least sign of settlement.
A dwelling, habitation, settlement.
In vain I speak, for you do not listen
to me.
Ir vain I do my best, I cannot do any
thing to his liking.
Yo* may say what you please, nobody
will believe you.
It is in vain that they earn money,
they will never be rich.
We search in vain ; for what *e have
lost we cannot find
Invano.
Io avea bel guardare tutto all' intor-
no, io non vedeva ne* uomini ni
case : non la minima apparenza d'
abitazione.
Un* abitazione.
Ho bel parlare, Ella non m' aseolta.
Ho bel fare quanto so di meglio, non
posso far niente a suo grado.
Ha bel dire, nessuno Le credera.
Invano si guadagnan danaro, non
saranno mai ricchi.
Cerchiamo invano, non potrem ma!
trovare cio ch' abbiamo perduto.
13b
SEVENTY-SIXTH LESSON.
To salute.
I have the honour to bid you adieu:
Present my compliments to him (to
her).
Remember me to him (to her).
Pray present my compliments t> your
9ister.
Remember me (present my compli-
ments) to him (to her).
f shall not fail.
Salutare 1
Ho 1' onore di salutarla.
Gli (le), presento i miei compli
menti.
Gli (le) dica molte cose da mia
parte.
La prego di far i miei compliment
alia di Lei signora sorella.
Gli (le) presenti (offra) le mie civilfaf
(i miei umili rispetti), (civilt* ob-
solete).
Non manchero.
The present (the present time or II presente.
tense).
The past.
The future.
The loss of time.
Enjoy all the pleasures that virtue per-
mits.
II passato.
L' awenire, il futuro
La perdita di tempo.
Goda (godete) di tutti i piaceri chi
la virtu permette.
EXERCISES.
231.
i iuspected (pensare) that you would be thirsty, and that your
sister would be hungry ; that is the reason why I brought you
here. I am sorry, however (perd), not to see your mother. —
Why do you not drink your coffee ? — If I were not sleepy I would
drink it. — Sometimes (ora) you are sleepy, sometimes cold, some-
times warm, and sometimes something else is the matter with you
(ed ora qualche altra cosa). I believe that you think too much
of the misfortune that has happened to your friend (fern.). — If 1
did not think about it, who would think about it ? — Of whom does
your brother think ? — He thinks of me, for we always think oi
each other (/' uno alV altro) when we are not together (insieme).
I have seen six players (il gitiocatore) to-day, who were all
winning (guadagnare) at the same time (nelV istesso tempo).—
That cannot be (non si da) ; for a player can only win when
another loses. — You would be right if I spoke of people that had
played at cards or billiards ; but I am speaking of flute and
nolin players (di suonatori di flattie e di violino). — Do you somt
SEVENTY -SIXTH LESSON. 421
jmes practise (fare) music (della musica) ? — Very often, for I
like it much. — What instrument do you play (suonare) ? — I play
the violin, and my sister plays the harpsichord. — My brother who
plays the bass (il contrabasso) accompanies (accompagnare) us,
•ind Miss Stolz sometimes applauds (applaudire — isco) us. — Does
ihe not also play some musical instrument (istrumento di mu-
tied) 1 — She plays the harp (/' arpa), but she is too proud (fiera)
jo practise music with us. — A very poor town (una cittd alquanto
povera) went to considerable expense (far una spesa considere-
vole) in feasts and illuminations (in feste ed illuminazioni) on the
occasion of its prince passing through (del passaggio del suo — ).
The latter seemed (ne parve) himself astonished. " It has only
done," said a courtier (un cortigiano), " what it owed (il suo de-
bito) (to your majesty)." — " That is true," replied (riprendere *)
another, " but it owes all Jiat it has done."
232.
Have you made your Italian composition ? — I have made it. —
Has your tutor been pleased with it ? — He has not. In vain I
do my best, I cannot do any thing to his liking. — You may say
what you please, nobody will believe you. — Can you, without
putting yourself to inconvenience, lend me five hundred livres ?
— As you have always used me well, I will use you in the same
manner. I will lend you the money you want, but on conditior
that you will return it to me next week. — You may depend upon
it (poterfarne capitale). — How has my son behaved towards you ?
— He has behaved well towards me, for he behaves well towards
every body. His father often told him : — " The behaviour of
others is but an echo of our own. If we behave well towards
them, they will also (pur) behave well towards us; but if we
use them ill, we must not expect better from them." — May I see
your brothers? — You will see them to-morrow. As they have
just arrived from a long journey (il viaggio)1 they long for sleep,
for they are very tired. — What did my sister say ? — She said
ihat she longed for dinner, because she was very hungry. — Art
you comfortable in your boarding-house ? — I am very comfort-
able there. — Have you imparted to your brother what I told you t
128
SEVENTY-SIXTH LESSON.
— As he was very tired, he longed for sleep ; so that I have pi
off imparting it to him till to-morrow.
233.
I have the honour to wish you a good morning. How do yoi
do? — Very well at your service (per servirla). — And how are
all at home (E come stanno in casa) 1 — Tolerably well ( passabil
mente), thank God (grazie a Dio) ! My sister was a little indis
posed (indisposta), but she is better (ristabilita) ; she told me
give you her best (m' ha incaricato di molti — per Lei) compli-
ments.— I am glad (contentissimo) to hear that she is well. As
to you, you are health (la salute) itself (slessa) ; you cannot lool
better (ha la miglior cera del mondo). — I have no time to be ill
my business (i miei affari) would not permit me. — Please to sit
down (La si accomodi) ; here is a chair. — I will not detain (dis
trarre) you from your business ; I know that a merchant's time
is precious (die il tempo e prezioso per un negoziante). — I have
.nothing pressing (pressante) to do now, my courier is alread;
dispatched (il mio corriere e gid spedito). — I shall not stay an;
longer. I only wished in passing by (passando diqui) to inquire
about your health. — You do me much honour. — It is very fine
weather to-day. — If you allow me I shall have the pleasure ol
seeing you again (rivedere) this afternoon (questo dopo pranzo),
and if you have time, we will take a little turn together. — Wit!
the greatest pleasure. In that case I shall wait for you. — I will
come for you (yerro a prenderla) about (verso) seven o clock.-
Adieu then, till I see you again. — I have the honou* u> Vtf yoi
idieu.
SEVENTY- SEVENTH LESSON
Lezione settantesima settima.
To mean.
IV hut do yon mean?
. mean.
What does that man mean 1
He means.
What does that mean 1
That does not mean any thing.
I do not know what that means.
, Voter e *.
< Pretendere *.
( Intendere *, significare 1 .
Che pretendete (intendete) 1
Pretendo (intendo).
Che vuol quell' uomo 7
Vuole (pretende, intende).
Che signifiea questo?
Non signifiea niente.
Non so che cid signifiea. (Non
cosa significhi questo).
To be particular.
I do not like to deal with that man,
for he is too particular.
To grow impatient, to fret.
Do not fret about that.
To sit up, to watch.
I have sat. up all night.
To advise.
The dress, the costume.
An elegant dress.
Hit dress is decent (elegant).
To dress one's self.
That man always dresses well.
f Riguardarvi da vicino,
t i\on tratto volentieri con quell'
uomo, perche vi riguarda troppo
da vicino, (or perche & troppo sin ■
golare).
j" Impazientarsi di.
Non s' impazienti di cid.
Non impazientatevi di cid.
Vegliare 1.
Ho vegliato tutta la notU.
Consigliare i.
II vestire.
Un vestire elegante.
11 suo vestire e decente (elegante).
Vestirsi 3.
Quest' uomo si veste sempre bene
To find fault with something .
That man always finds fault with
every thing he sees.
Do you find fault with that 1
I do not find fault with it
Trovare a ridire a qualcne
cosa.
Quest' uomo trova sempre a ridire a
tutto ci6 che vede.
Trova Ella a ridire a questo ?
Non vi trovo niente a ridire.
ISO
SEVENTY-SEVENTH LESSON.
A trick.
To play a trick.
To play a trick on some one.
To take a turn.
I have taken a turn round the garden.
H« has taken a couple of turns round
the garden.
To take a little turn.
To travel through Europe.
Una beffa, una burla.
Fare una burla.
Fare una burla a qualcuno
t Fare un giro (una passeggiata).
t Ho fatto un giro nel giardino.
t Egli ha fatto due giri nel giardino
t Far un piccol giro.
t Fare il giro dell! Europa
Mare (meaning besides).
Vou have given me three books, out I
want three besides.
Less.
Three less.
Three too many.
To want,
I want
I want three books.
Di piu.
Ella mi ha date tre libri, ma me nt
occorrono tre di piu.
Di meno.
Tre di meno.
Tre di troppo.
Occorrere * ; p. part, occorso ;
pret. def. occorsi.
Mi occorre.
Mi occorrono tre libri.
My reach.
Within my reach.
Out of my reach,
rhose things are not within the reach
of everybody.
That is not within the reach of my
sight.
Within gun-shot.
A gun-shot (meaning distance).
Two gun-shots ( " " ).,
How many shots have you fir si 1
I wonder why that man makes such a
noise.
So long as.
Bo long as you behave well, peopie
will love you.
La mia vista (capacita).
Alia mia vista.
Fuori della mia vista (or capacita).
Queste cose non sono d?ila capacita
di tutti, or alia portata di tutti.
Cio e troppo lontano per la mia
vista.
A un tiro di fucile.
Un tiro di fucile.
Due tiri di fucile.
Qnante volte ha Ella tiraco (Lesson
XLVII1.) 1
t Vorrei sapere perch* quest* uomt
fa un tale strepito (un tal rumore)
SQuanto.
Finckifjin tanto che.
Finche (or fintanto che) vi compor
terete bene, vi ameranno.
SEVENTY-SEVENTH LESSON.
481
To carry off.
A mouthful.
To overwhelm, to heap, to load.
To overwhelm one with joy.
Generous.
Beneficent, charitable.
You have heaped benefits upon me.
Sincere.
Sincerely.
An advantage.
The disadvantage, prejudice.
I shall never say any thing to your dis-
advantage.
Portarvia, r apire (isco)
Una boccata. Un boccone.
Colmare 1.
Col mare qualcuno di gioia.
Generoso.
Benefico, caritatevole.
Ella mi ha colmato di benefixii.
Sincero.
Sinceramente.
Un vantaggio.
Lo svantaggio.
Non dird mal niente a svantaggio «
L,ei.
To surrender.
The enemies have surrendered.
To prefer.
I prefer the useful to the agreeable.
Rendersi.
I nemici si sono real.
Preferire* (isco) (past part.
preferito ; pret. def. prefern
or prefersi).
Preferisco 1' utile al gradevole.
Ob*. All the infinitive moods of a verb used substantively are masculine.
The drinking. II bere (il bevere).
The eating. II mangiare.
To behold.
Behold those beautiful flowers with
their colours so fresh and bright.
The colour.
The lily.
The forget-me-»ot.
The rose.
An emblem.
Vreeb verdure is salutary to oui eyes.
Guar dare 1. Riguardare 1.
Guardate quei superbi fiori d' un
colore cosi fresco e splendido vivo.
II colore, il colorito.
II giglio.
II camedrio.
La rosa.
Un' emblema.
La verzura fresca fa del bene ai no*
tri occhi (or ci fa del bene agU
oochi).
EXERCISES.
234.
The loss of time is an irreparable (irreparabile) loss. A single
aninuie (un sol minuto) cannot be recovered (rfguadagnare) for all
latest
time
s
132 SEVENTY-SEVENTH LESSOR.
fhe gold in the (del) world. It is then (dunque) of the gre
importance (della massima importanza) to employ well the
which consists (consistere) only of minutes which we must make
good of (che bisogna mettere a profiito). We have but the presen
•,he past is no longer any thing (non e piu nulla), and the future
uncertain (incerto). A great many people (una infinita d' uomin
ruin themselves (rovinarsi) because they wish to indulge them-
selves too much (per voler avvantaggiare). If most men (la
maggior parte degli uomini) knew how to content themselves (con-
tvntsirsi) with what they have, they would be happy ; but their
greediness (la loro aviditd) very often makes (rendere*) them un-
happy.— In order to be happy we must forget the past, not trouble
ourselves about the (non inquietarsi delV) future, and enjoy the
present. — I was very much dejected (afflittissimo) when my cousin
came to me. " What is the matter with you ?" he asked me.
" Oh (Ah) ! my dear cousin," replied I, " in losing that money
I nave lost every thing." "Do not fret," said he to me, "for I
have found your money."
235.
>ir f
z
eon
oon
Why have you played a trick upon that man ? — Because he
finds fault with every thing he sees. — What does that mean, Sir ?
— That means that I do not like to deal with you, because y
are too particular. — I wonder why your brother has not done
task. — It was too difficult. He sat up all night, and has not be
able to do it, because it was out of his power (capacitd). — As s
as Mr. Civiltak. sees me he begins to speak English, in order to
practise, and overwhelms me with politeness (lafinezza), so that I
often do not know what to answer. His brothers do the same (ns
funno altrettanto). However, they are very good people (sons
buonissime persone) ; they are not only (non solamente) rich and
amiable, but they are also generous and charitable (benefici).
They love me sincerely, therefore I love them also (io pure), and
consequently (percib) shall never say any thing to their disad-
vantage (lo svantaggio). I should love them still more, if they
did not make so much ceremony (tante cerimonie) ; but every one
has his faults, and mine is to speak too much of their ceremonies
SEVENTY-SE-VENTH LESSON. 43il
236.
Have the enemies surrendered ? — They have :.ot surrendered,
they did not prefer life (la vita) to death (la morte). They
aad neither bread, nor meat, nor water, nor arms (ni armi), nor
money ; notwithstanding they determined to die rather (hanno
preferito morire) than surrender. — Why are you so sad ? — You do
not know what makes me uneasy, my dear friend (fern.) — Tell
for I assure you that I share (dividere* in egual modo) your
sufferings (la pena) as well as your pleasures. — I am sure that
you feel for me (prendere* parte alle mie pene), but I cannot tell
you now (in questo momento) what makes me uneasy. I will,
lowever (pure), tell you when an opportunity offers (al presentarsx
ielV occasione). Let us speak of something else now. What do
you think of the man who spoke to us yesterday at the concert ?
—He is a man of much understanding (di molto senno), and not
u all wrapped up in his own merits (e non e mica infatuato del
mo meritc^. But why do you ask me that ? — To speak of some-
thing.— It is said: contentment surpasses (contento val meglio)
riches ; let us then always be content. Let us share (dividere*)
(with each other) what we have, and remain (e restiamo) our life-
time (tutta la nostra vita) inseparable (inseparabile) friends. You
will always be welcome at my house, and I hope to be equally so
(io pure) at yours. If I saw you happy, I should be equally so,
and we should be more contented than the greatest princes. We
shull be happy (Saremo felici) when we are perfectly (perfet-
tammte) contented with what we have ; and if we do our duty as
we ought (Sow), God will take care of the rest. The past being
no longer any thing, let us not be uneasy about the future, and
Mijtv (repeat the imperative) the present. (See end of Lesson
IXIV.)
SEVENTY-EIGHTH LESSON
Lezione settantesima ottava.
A gold watch.
A marble statue.
A deserving soldier.
A talented youth.
A silk gown.
A mahogany table.
A brick house.
A stone house.
A velvet bonnet.
A silver tankard.
A one-story house.
A two-story house.
A three-story house.
Obs. A. As we have seen (Lesson
natter of which a thing is made ; but to
tion da must be made use of. (See Obi.
A kitchen-table. ,
A nightcap.
A powder-box.
A neck-handkerchief.
A handkerchief (for the nose).
Writing-paper.
A wine-glass.
A princely magnificence.
A gallant action.
Gunpowder.
Fire-arms.
A windmill.
A coffee-mill.
A water-mill.
A steam-mill.
A one-horse waggon.
A four-horse carriage.
A two-wheeled waggon.
A four-wheeled waggon.
The garden-door.
Un oriuolo d' oro.
Una statua di marmo.
Un soldato di merito.
. Un giovane di talento
Una vesta di seta.
Una tavola di mogano.
Una casa di mattoni.
Una casa di pietra.
Un cappello di vellut*
Un boccale cP argento.
Una casa d' un sol piano.
Una casa di due piani.
Una casa di tre piani.
II.), the preposition di expresses ilk
mark the use of a thing, the preposi-
C. Lesson VIII.) Ex
Una tavola da cucina.
Una berretta da notte.
Una scattola da polvere.
Un fazzoletto da collo.
Un fazzoletto da naso.
Carta da scrivere.
Un bicchiere da vino.
Una magnificenza da prlncipe.
Un' azion 3 da cavaliere.
Polvere c a cannone.
Armi da tuoco.
Un mulino a vento.
Un mulinello da cafie.
Un mulino ad acqua.
Un mulino a vapore.
Una carrozza ad un cavallo.
Una carrozza a quattro cavalli
Una carrozza a due ruote.
Una carrozza a quattro ruote
La porta del giardino.
Waiter ! bring something to drink, to I Garzone ! portate da bere, via man
eat, to sit upon. giare, da sedere.
SEVENTY-EIGHTH LESSON.
435
A three-corner hat. | Un cappello a tre punte.
Qb». B. The preposition a is made use of when the determinatin/ ««<»n»
ix presses resemblance o* thape.
A fashionable coat. Un abito alia moda.
A pendulum-clock Un orologio a pendolo
An hour-glass. Un orologio o polvere.
A sailing vessel. Una nave a vela,
A rowing vessel | Una nave a remi.
He entreated him with joined hands.
Thou wantedst to act according to thy
wish.
To play at first sight.
To drive with six horses.
They will come at the fixed time.
At twelve o'clock (mid-day).
At twelve o'clock at night (midnight).
He came in time.
To play at a game
To exaggerate.
That man exaggerates all that he says
and does.
That man exaggerates his genero-
sity.
To take, the place >f, to be in-
stead of.
That man i» a father to me.
That umbrella serves him as a stick.
Lo pregu a mani giunte.
Volesti fare a tuo modo
Suonare a prima vista.
Andare a sei cavalli.'
Verranno alT ora stabilita.
A mezzo giorno (alle dodici).
A mezza notte.
Venne a tempo.
Giuocare a un giuoco.
t ]$sagerare 1
< f Spingere tropp* oltre,
( j" Andar alV eccesso.
Quest' uomo esagera quanto dice it
quanto fa.
Quest' uomo spinge tropp' oltre b
sua generosita,
Servtre di, tener luogo di.
Quest' uomo mi tiene luogo di padre.
Quest' uomo mi serve di padre, at
mi fa da.
Quest' ombrello gli tiene luogo cl
bastone.
An inch.
On a small scale.
On a large scale.
Thereabouts, nearly
Alternately, turn by turn.
Un pollice.
In piccolo.
In grande.
Presso a poco, a un di presso.
Alternativamente.
*8f
SEVENTY-EIGHTH LESSON.
To endeavour, to strive.
To give one's self up to grief.
To melt.
To melt in team,
To give birth to (meaning to
raise, to cause),
'i o raise diificulties.
'io cause quarrels.
To cause suspicions.
The behavioui of that man raised sus-
picions in i.i/ *tuqq.
To ohakc.
Shake that tree, and the fruit will fall
down.
To be in Uhxnt of, ta be thort or,
to want.
That man i# m want of ereiy thing.
I am in want of nothing.
A place at table, including knile, fork,
and spoon.
A table for four persons.
A table for ten persons.
A writing-table or desk.
A dining-room.
A sleeping or bed-room
A repeater.
An oil-bottle.
A ruustarl-pot.
A pitcher.
Boiled meat for dinner
A fowling-piece.
A milk-pot.
A fishing-line.
Sforzarsi, studiarst 1.
Abbandonarsi al dolor t,.
Fonder e* ; past part, fuso ,
pret. def. fust.
Struggere* ; p. part, strutto .
pret. def. strussi.
t Struggersi in lagrime
Far nascere.
t Far nascere delle difficolta.
t Far nascere delle question!.
t Far nascere dei sospetti.
t La condotta di quest' uomo fece
nascere dei sospetti nella mia
mente, or mi fece nascere dei sos-
petti.
Scuotere* ; p. part, scosso ;
pret. def. scossi.
Scuotete (scuota) quest' albero e na
cadranno i frutti.
[ Mancare di.
I Aver mancanza di.
Quest' uomo manca di tutto.
Non manco di niente, «r non
manca niente.
Una posata.
Una tavola da quattro po*».&
Una tavola da dieci posate.
Una tavola da scrivere.
Una sala da pranzo.
Una camera da ietto.
Un oriuolo a ripetizione,
Una bottiglia da t>lio.
Una mostardiera.
Un vaso da acqua.
t La pentola.
Un fucile da caccia.
Un vaso da latte.
Una lenza.
SEVEN TT-IIGHTH LESSOM. 4S"
To exact, to want of. Esigere* ; p. part, esatto.
*V hat do you want of me 1 { Che esigete (esige) da me 1
What did you exact of me 7 I Che vuole darnel
... - c Non esigo niente da voi.
exact nothing of you. l ) s _
1 ( Non vogho niente da Lei.
The rabbit-man. L' uomo dai conigH.
The oyster-woman. La donna dalle oatriche.
Dainties.
He is fond of dainties.
At broad daylight.
To sit down to dinner.
I buoni bocconi.
Gli piacciono (ama) i buoni ooceoid
Di giorno.
Mettersi a tavolt.
EXERCISES.
237.
Behold, ladies (Signore), those beautiful flowers, with theii
colours so fresh and bright ; they drink nothing but water. The
white lily has the colour of innocence (V innocenza) ; the violet
indicates gentleness (indica la dolcezza) ; you may see it in
Louisa's eyes (negli occhi di Luigia). The forget-me-not has the
colour of heaven, our future dwelling, and the rose, the queen of
flowers, is the emblem of beauty and of joy. You see (Mirasi)
all that personified ( personificato) in seeing the beautiful Amelia
(Amalia). — How beautiful is the fresh verdure (la verzura) ! It
is salutary to our eyes, and has the colour of hope (la speranza),
our most faithful (fedele) friend (fern.), who never deserts (ab-
bandonare) us, not even in death (alia morte). — One word more,
my dear friend. — What is your pleasure ? — I forgot to tell you to
present my compliments to your mother. Tell her, if you please,
that I regret (che mi rincresce) not having been at home when she
lately honoured me with her visit. I thank you for her, I shall
not fail. Farewell then (State bene).
238.
Has your sister been out to-day ? — She has been out to buy
•everal things (per far delle compre). — What has she bought 1 —
She has bought (La si e comprata) a silk gown, a velvet bonnet,
and a lace vei" (*m velo di merletti). — What have you done with
anl
188 KVENTY-EIGHTfl LESSON.
my silver tankard ? — It is on the kitchen-table, together with
(colla) oil-bottle, the milk-pot, the pitcher, tne mustard-pot, ani
the coffee-mill. — Do you ask for a wine-bottle ? — No, I ask for
bottle of wine, and not (e non mica) for a wine-bottle. — If you
will have the goodness to give me the key of the wine-cellar 1
shall go for one. — What does that man want of me ? — He exact
nothing ; but he will accept what you will give him, for he is
want of every thing. — I will tell you that I am not fond of hii
for his behaviour raises suspicions in my mind. He exaggerate
all that he says and does. — You are wrong in having such a bf
opinion (unf opinione) of him, for he has been a father to you.-
I know what I say. He has cheated me on a small and on
large scale, and whenever he calls he asks me for something.
In this manner he has alternately asked me for all I had : my
fowling-piece, my fishing-line, my repeater, and my golden can-
dlesticks.— Do not give yourself up so much to grief, else (altn-
menti) you will make me melt in tears.
Democritus (Democrito) and Heraclitus were two philosophers
of a very different character (d* un indole molto differente) : the
first laughed at the follies (la follia) of men, and the other wept
at them. They were both right, for the follies of men deserve
to be laughed and wept at.
239.
Hare you seen youi niece ? — Yes ; she is a very good
who writes well, and speaks Italian still better ; therefore she is
loved and honoured by every body. — And her brother, what is
he doing ? — Do not speak to me of him ; he is a naughty boy,
who writes always badly, and who speaks Italian still worse : he
is therefore (jpercio) loved by nobody. He is very fond of dain-
ties, but he does not like books. Sometimes he goes to bed at
broad day-light, and pretends to be ill ; but when we sit down to
dinner (si va a tavola) he is generally better again — He is tc
study physic (la medicina), but he has not the slightest inclination
for it (alcuna voglia). He is almost always talking of his dogs,
which he loves passionately (appassionatamente). His father is
extremely so*ry for it. The young simpleton (/' inibecille) said
SEVENTY-NINTH LESSON
43V
ately to his sister, " I shall enlist as soon as a peace [la pace) is
proclaimed (pubblicare)."
My dear father and my dear mother dined yesterday with
some friends at the king of Spain (alV insegna del re di Spagna)
— Why do you always speak English and never Italian ? — Be-
cause I am too bashful. — You are joking ; is an Englishman
ever bashful ? — I have a keen appetite (grand* appetito) : give me
something good to eat. — Have you any money ? — No, Sir. —
Then I have nothing to eat for you. — Will you not let me have
some (non mi da Ella) on credit? I pledge (impegnare) my
honour. — That is too little. — What (come), Sir !
SEYENTY-NINTH LESSON
Lezione settantesima nona.
Just a Utile, ever so Utile.
Will you do me the favour of giving
me a piece of bread ?
Do you wish a great deal?
No, jtut a little.
{ Alquanto.
< Unpoco,unpochetio,unpochino,
v Un tantino.
Vuol farmi il piacere di darmi u
pezzo di pane ?
Ne vuol molto ?
No, un pochetto.
To turn to account.
To make the best of.
This man does not know how to make
the best of his talents.
That man turns his money to account
in trade.
How do you employ your money ?
tarn it to account in the stocks.
To boast, to brag.
. do not like that man because he
boasts too much.
29
t Far valere (trar profitto).
t Quest' uomo non sa far valere i suoi
talenti.
t Quest' uomo fa valere il suo danaro
nel commercio.
t Come fa Ella valere il di Lei da-
naro?
t Lo faccio valere nei fondi puDblici.
t Farsi valere.
t Non mi place quest' uomo, perche
si fa troppo valere, or percbi m
vanta troppo.
140
SEVENTY-NINTK LESSON.
Notwithstanding that.
For all that, although.
That man is a little bit of a rogue, but
notwithstanding he passes for an
honest man.
Although that man is not very well, he
notwithstanding works a great deal.
Although that woman is not very
pretty, still she is very amiable.
Although that man has not the least
talent, yet fur all that he boasts a
great de»L
Although the tavern-keeper's wife is
rather swarthy, yet for all that she
turns the business to good account.
I received your letter on the fifth, on
the sixth, on the seventh.
)n the eighth.
To go back, to return.
The top.
The bottom.
Up to the top.
The eldest brother.
The eldest sister.
He is the eldest.
To appear, to seem.
I appear, Ac.
We appear, Ac.
Appeared.
To keep, to maintain.
My keeping or maintenance.
My keeping costs me six nundred
livres a-year.
To drive in, to sink.
To converse with some one.
A conversation.
Cid non di meno [nullameno)
Nondimeno, jtullcfdimeno.
Quest' uomo e alquanto briccom
cid non dimeno passa per un ga
antuomo.
Qjtantunque costui non istia bci
non tralascia di lavorar molto
Benc^e* questa donna non sia molt;
leggiadra, non tralascia (not ele-
gant) d' esser molto amabile (or
pure ia e molto amabile).
Quantunque costui non abbia alcun
talento, non tralascia di farsi mol-
to valere.
Benche la moglie di quest' oste sia
un tantino bruna, non tralascia di
far valere 1' osteria, or pure fa* bene
gli affari della sua osteria.
Ho ricevuto la di Lei lettera il
cinque, il sei, il sette.
L' otto.
Ritornare 1, tornare 1.
L' alto, la cima.
II basso, il fondo.
Fino in alto.
Il fratello primogenito.
La sorella primogenita.
E il primogenito (il maggiore).
Par ere *, sembrare 1.
Paio, pari, pare.
Paiamo (pariamo), parete, paiono;
past part, parso ; prtt. def. parvi.
Mantenere *.
II mio minrenimento.
II mio mantenimento mi costa
cento lire 1' anno (all' anno).
SAndar a fondo.
Affondare 1.
Conversare con qualcuno l.
Una conversazione.
CvKCtrtart in un patst means : f'eqttentarvi^ to go often to a country
SEVENTV -NINTH LESSON.
Ul
To spare.
Spare your money.
To get tired.
To be tired.
To handle.
To lean against
Lean against me.
Lean against the wall, s
To aim at.
Short
To stop short
Virtue is amiaole.
Vice is odious.
Risparmiare 1.
Risparmiate il vostro danaro
Stancarsi 1, annoiarsi 1.
Esser stanco, lasso, annoiato.
Maneggiare 1.
Appoggiarsi.
Appoggiatevi a me.
Appoggiatevi contro il mar*.
J Prender di mira.
\ Metter in mira.
Corto, subito.
Fermarsi subito.
La virtu 3 amabile.
R vizio 3 odioso.
Obs. A. Before substantives taken in a general sense, and in the whole extent
df their signification, no article is made use of in English, but in Italian il
cannot be dispensed with.
Men are mortal.
Gold is precious.
Corn is sold a crown a bushel.
Beef costs four-pence a pound.
The horror of vice, and the love of
virtue, are the delights of the wise
man.
England is a fine country.
Italy is the garden of Europe.
The dog is the friend and companion
of man.
Thessaly produces wine, oranges, le-
mons, olives, and all sorts of fruit
He ate the bread, meat, apples, and
petty-patties j he drank the wine,
beer, and cider.
Beauty, gracefulness, and wit, are valu-
able endowments when heightened
&jr modesty.
Gli uomini sono mortali.
JJ oro 3 prezioso.
H grano si vende uno scudo lo (or
alio) staio.
B manzo costa quattro soldi la (or
alia) libbra.
U orrore del vizio e V amore delta
virtu sono » diletti del savio.
12 Inghilterra e* un bel paese.
U Italia e* il giardino dell' Europa
77 cane e* 1' amico ed il compagne
deW uomo.
La Tessalia produce del vino, delle
melarancie, dei cedri, delU ulive ed
ogni sorta di frutti.
Mangid il pane, la came, /* mele ed
i pasticcini ; bevette il vino, la
birra ed il cidro.
La bellezza, le grazie e 1' ingegno
sono vantaggi preziosissimi, quan-
do la mode'stia lor da rilievo (tr
risalto).
143
SEVENTY-NINTH LESSON.
[ shall go to Germany on my return
from Italy.
The balance of Europe.
He lives in Spain.
Andrd in Alemagna al mie rit
d' Itdia.
L' equilibrio d' Europa.
Vive in Ispagna.
OF PROPER NAMES.
They have generally no article in Italian, and are declined by means of pi
positions, such preposition is called the indefinite article, viz.
21
Peter,
Rome.
N.}
Pietro,
Roma.
G.
of Peter,
of Rome.
G.
di Pietro,
di Roma.
D.
to Peter,
to Rome.
D.
a Pietro,
a Roma.
AM.
from Peter,
from Rome.
Abl.
da Pietro,
da Roma.
The wife of Joseph or Joseph's wife.
I said so to Theresa.
I have received this book from Alex-
ander.
He is from Vienna.
He goes to Venice.
He departs from London.
La rroglie di Giuseppe.
Lo dissi a Teresa.
Ho ricevuto questo libro da Ales
sandro.
Egli e di Vienna.
Va a Venezia.
Parte da Londra.
Obi. B. The article, however, is made use of in the following instances .
a) When the name is preceded by an adjective, as :
The brave Caesar. II valoroso Cesare.
The divine Raphael. II divino Rafaello (or Raffaelle).
6) Some proper names of men and gods take the article in the plural wt
they stand as appellative nouns, as .
I Ciceroni.
Gli dei degli antichi Roman!.
The Ciceros.
The gods of the ancient Romans.
Also in the singular, when they are used to mark another person, as:
The Solon of France. | R Solone della Francia.
e) When known personages, particularly learned or renowned men, are men-
tioned by their family-names, as :
Tasso II Tasso.
Petrarca. II Petrarca.
Fiammetta. La Fiammetta.
Obs. C. When a whole part of the world is mentioned, the article is gene
made use of, as :
Europe is more peopled than Africa.
The States of America,
rtaly is on. three sides surrounded by
the
L' Europa £ piu popolata dell' Ai
frica.
Gli Stati dell' America.
L' Italiae da tre parti circondata di
mare.
SEVENTY-NINTH LESSON. 44J
Ob*. D. Some countries and islands have always the article, such as :
Tyrol, Switzerland, Moldavia.
Morea, Crimea, China.
Japan, Peru, India.
Brazil, Virginia, Sicily.
Sardinia, Corsica, Ireland.
Iceland, Capri.
// Tirolo, la Svizzera, la Moldavia.
La Morea, la Crimea, la China.
II Giappone, il Peril, It Indie.
11 Brasile, la Virginia, la Sicilia.
La Sardegna, la Corsica, l' Irlanda.
V Islanda, la Capraia.
And a few others.
Ob*. E. The names of countries which are called after their capitals havs
Mrer the article, as :
Naples, Venice, Geneva. Napoli, Venezia, Genova8, &c.
Ob*. F. The namss of the seas, rivers, and mountains, have always the
article, as :
The Atlantic ocean, the Danube, the I L Atlantico, il Danubio, il Po, Ac.
Po.
EXERCISES.
240.
Will you relate (raccontare) something to me ? — What do you
yish me to relate to you ? — A little anecdote, if you like. — A
little boy one day at table (a tavola) asked for some meat ; his
father said that it was not polite to ask for any, and that he should
wait until some was given to him (che gliene desero). The poor
little boy seeing every one eat, and that nothing was given to him,
said to his father : " My dear father, give me a little salt, if you
please." " What will you do with it V asked the father. " I
wish to eat it with the meat which you will give me," replied
(repUcare) the child. Every body admired (ammirare) the little
boy's wit; and his Either, perceiving that he had nothing, gave
him meat without hi> asking for it (senza ch1 egli ne domandasse)
— Who was that little boy that asked for meat at table ? — He was
the son of one of my friends. — Why did he ask for some meat ?
—He asked for some because he had a good appetite. — Why did
his father not give him some immediately ? — Because he had for-
gotten it. — Was the little boy wrong in asking for some ? — He
<ras wrong, for he ought to have waited. — Why did he ask his
* Also the names of the following Islands have no article : Cipro, Corfu,
Crete, Cerigo, Candia, Maiorca, Minorca, Malta, Ischia, Procida, Lipari, Rod!
Scio, and a few others.
444
SEVENTY-NINTH LBSSON.
father for some salt ? — He asked for some salt, that (affinche) hii
father might perceive that he had no meat, and that he might give
him some (e gliene desse).
Do you wish me to relate to you another anecdote ? — You will
greatly oblige me. — Some one, purchasing some goods of a shop
<eeper (il mercante), said to him : " You ask too much ; you
should not sell so dear to me as to another, because I am a friend
{sono amico di casa)." The merchant replied, " Sir, we must gain
something by (coi) our friends, for our enemies will never come
'o the shop."
241.
Where shall you go next year ? — I shall go to England, for il
is a fine kingdom (il regno), where I intend spending the summei
on my (al mio) return from France.) — Whither shall you go ii
the winter ? — I shall go to Italy, and thence (di la) to the West
Indies ; but before that I must go to Holland to take leave of nr
friends. — What country do these people inhabit (abitare) ? — The^
inhabit the south (il mezzo giorno) of Europe; their countries aie
called Italy, Spain, and Portugal, and they themselves (ed essi
medesimi) are Italians, Spaniards, and Portuguese ; but the people
called Russians, Swedes, and Poles, inhabit the north (il Setten-
trione) of Europe ; and the names of their countries are Russia,
Sweden, and Poland (Polonia). France and Italy are separatee
(separare) by the Alps (le Alpi), and France and Spain by the
Pyrenees (t Pirenei). — Though the Mahometans (il Maomeltano)
are forbidden the use of wine ( proibire qualche cosa ad uno), yet
for all that some of them drink it. — Has your brother eaten an^
thing this morning ? — He has eaten a great deal ; though he sai(
he had no appetite, yet for all that he ate all the meat, bread, and
vegetables (e tutti i legumi), and drank all the wine, beer, anc
cider. — Are the eggs (le nova plur. of V novo) dear at present ? —
They are sold at six livres a hundred. — Do you like grapes (I
uve or V uva) ? — I do not only like grapes, but also plums (um
prugna), almonds, nuts, and all sorts of fruit (di frutti). — Thougl
modesty, candour, and an amiable disposition (V amabilitd) are
valuable endowments, yet for all that there are some ladies that
are neither modest, nor candid (candido), nor amiable. — The feai
EIGHTIETH LESSON.
445
•f death, and the love of life, being natural to men (nelF uomoj
they ought to shun( fuggire) vice (il vizio)t and adhere to (attener*
i) virtue.
EIGHTIETH LESSON.
Lezione ottantesima.
To give occasion to.
Do not give him cause to complain.
Dar motivo di.
Non dategli (non gii da) motivo <3
iagnarsi.
To leave it to one.
I leave it to you.
Rimeltersi al giudizio d? ah
cuno.
Mi rimetto al di Lei giudizio.
A good bargain.
To stick, or to abide by a thing.
I abide by the offer you have made
me.
Un buon mercato.
t Tenersi a. Stare a.
t Mi tengo (or sto) all' offerta ch
Ella mi ha fatta.
I do not doubt but you are my friend. I Non dubito ch' Ella non ria mio
amico.
Obs. A. The vert dubitare, negatively used, requires non before the sub
junctive.
[ do not doubt but he will do it. I Non dubito che non lo faccia.
To suffer, to bear.
They were exposed to the whole fire
of the place.
To examine one artfully, or to\
draw a secret from one.
examined him artfully, and by that
means I have made myself acquaint-
ed with all his affairs.
Soffrire 3. Sopportare 1.
Erano esposti a tutto il fuoco dells
piazza.
■(■ Sorprendere il segreto di
qualcuno
Ho sorpreso i) suo segreto, e cosi mj
son messo al fatto di tutti i suof
affari.
14«
EIGHTIETH LESSOR.
To bear, to put up with.
Fou will be obliged to put up tvith all
he wishes.
Thick.
A thick cloud.
A thick heard.
A bunt.
A burst of laughter
To burst out laughing.
lo burst out
To burst out a laughing.
Splendour, brightness.
To make a great show.
To light.
The noise, the crack.
To suffer one's self to be beaten.
To let or to suffer one's self to fall.
To suffer one's self to be insulted.
To suffer one's self to die.
To let one's self be struck.
To send back, to send away
To extol, to praise up.
To boast, to praise one's self.
Go thither.
Let us eo thither.
Sottoporsi * (conjugated like
porre * (ponere), Lessen
LXV. and LXXIV.).
Le sara forza (Ella sari costretta) di
sottoporsi a tutto cid ch eg.i
vorra.
Denso, spesso, folto.
Un nuvolo denso (or una nuvola
densa).
Una barba folta.
Unc scroscio.
Uno scroscio di risa.
t Dar uno scroscio di risa.
t Far uno scroscio di risa
Scrosciare 1.
Scoppiare dalle risa.
Lo splendore.
Far pompa.
Illuminare 1.
Lo strepito, lo scoppio.
;
Lasciarsi battere.
Lasciarsi cad ere.
Lasciarsi oltraggiare.
Lasciarsi morire.
Lasciarsi percuotere.
Rimandare 1.
Van tare 1.
Vantarsi 1.
Andatevi.
Andiamvi.
Obs. B. The letter o of the first and third persons plural of the impend re
omitted before the adverb of place, ct, vi.
Let them go thither.
Go thou.
Go (thou) thither.
Go (thou) away.
Let him go thither.
Go away, begone.
Let us begone.
Let him go away let him begone.
< Vadanvi.
c Ch" eglino vi vadanc.
Va.
Vacci.
Vattene.
Ch' esso ci vada.
Andatevene.
Andiamcene.
Ch' egli se ne vadi
EIGHTIETH LESSON.
447
Give me.
Glive It to me.
Give it him.
Give him some
Get paid.
Let us set out.
Let us breakfast
Let him give it me.
LDt him be here at twelve o'clock.
Let him send it me.
He may believe it.
Make an end of it.
Let us finish.
Let him finish.
Let him take it.
Let her say so.
The starling.
«f 1 were to question you as I used to
do at the beginning of our lessons,
what would you answer ?
•Ve found these questions at first rather
ridiculous, but, full of confidence in
your method, we answered as well
as the small quantity of words and
rules we then possessed allowed us.
We were not long in finding out that
those questions ^ere calculated to
ground us in the rules, and to exer-
cise us in conversation, by the con-
tradictory answers we were obliged
to make.
We can now almost keep up a conver-
sation in Italian.
This phrase does not seem to us
logically correct.
We should be ungrateful, if we allowed
such an opportunity to escape with-
out expressing our liveliest gratitude
to you.
In all cases, at all events.
The native.
The insurmountable difficulty.
Datemi.
Datemelo.
Dateglielo.
Dategliene.
Fatevi pagare.
Partiamo.
Facciamo colazione.
Ch' egli me lo dia.
Ch' egli sia qui a mezzo giorno.
Ch* egli me lo mandi.
Ch* egli lo creda.
Finite.
Finiamo.
Ch* egli finises.
Ch' egli lo prenda.
Ch' essa lo dica.
Lo stornello, lo storno.
Se vi presentassi adesso dele ques
tioni come ve ne presentai al prin-
cipiare delle nostre lezioni (come
prima io aveva 1' abitudine di far-
lo), che rispondereste ?
Abbiamo trovato a prima vista tali
questioni alquanto ridicole; ma
pieni di confidenza nel di Lei me-
todo, vi abbiamo risposto per
quanto ce lo permetteva il picciol
corredo di parole e di regole che
avevamo allora.
Non abbiamo tardato ad accorgerci
che tali questioni miravano o ten-
desano ad inculcarci i principii ed
esercitarci alia conversazione colle
risposte contraddittorie che era-
vamo costretti di farci.
Adesso possiamo presso a poco sos-
tenere una conversazione in ita-
liano.
Gluesta frase non ci pare logicamente
corretta.
Saremmo ingrati, se lasciassimo
sfuggire una cosi bella occasion*
senza dimostrarle la piu viva rrs>
titudine.
In ogni caso.
II nativo.
La difficolta insuperabil*.
14S EIGHTIETH LESSON.
EXERCISES.
242.
A young prince (un principino), seven years old, was admire
by every body for his wit (a cagione del suo spirito) ; being 01
in the society of an old officer {V uffiziale), the latter observed,
speaking of the young prince, that when children discovered
much genius (aver molto spirito) in their early years, they gene,
rally grew very stupid (we hanno ordinariamente pochissimc) when
they came to maturity (quando sono avvanzati in eta). ' If that
is the case," said the young prince, who had heard it, "then you
must have been remarkable for your genius (aver moltissimc
ipirito) when you were a child (nella sua infanzia)."
An Englishman, on first visiting (al primo giugnere in) France,
met with (s'avvenne — in) a very young child in the streets of
Calais, who spoke the French language with fluency and elegance
(correntemente e con eleganza). — " Good Heaven (gran Dio) ! is it
possible," exclaimed he, " that even children here speak the
French language with purity (la purezza) ?"
Let us seek (ricercare) the friendship of the good, and avoid
(evitare) the society of the wicked (dei cattivi) ; for bad company
corrupts (le cattive societd corrompono) good manners (i buorn
costwmi). — What sort of weather is it to-day ? — It snows continu-
ally, as it snowed yesterday, and, according to all appearances
will also snow to-morrow. — Let it snow ; I should like it to snoi
still more, for I am always very well when it is very cold. — Ai
I am always very well when it is neither warm nor cold. — It
too windy to-day, and we should do better if we stayed at homt
— Whatever weather it may be, I must go out ; for I promised
be with my sister at a quarter past eleven, and I rflust keep mj
vord (tenere* parola).
243.
Will you drink a cup of coffee ? — I thank you, I jo not li
coffee. — Then you will drink a glass of wine ? — I have ju
drunk some. — Let us take a walk. — Willingly (con molto piacere)
but where shall we go to ? — Come with me into the garden of m
tunt ; we shall find there very agreeable society. — I believe it J
EIGHTIETH LBSSON. 44W
but the question is (resta a sapere) whether this agreeable society
will admit me (mi vorrd). — You are welcome every where. —
What ails you (che avete), my friend ? How do you like that
wine ? — I like it very well (squisito) ; but I have drunk enough
of it (bastantemenie). — Drink once more. — No, too much is
unwholesome (ogni eccesso e nocivo) ; I know my constitution (ii
t&mper amenta). — Do not fall. What is the matter with you ? — I
do not know ; but my head is giddy (mi giro, la testa) ; I think I
am fainting (cadere in deliquio, or svenire). — I think so also (%c
pure), for you look almost like a dead person (un morto). — What
countryman are you 1 — I am an Englishman. — You speak Italian
so well that 1 took you for an Italian by birth (un Italiano di na-
zione). — You are jesting. — Pardon me; I do not jest at all. —
How long have you been in Italy ? — A few days. — In earnest
(davvero) ? — You doubt it, perhaps, because I speak Italian ; I
knew it before I came to Italy. — How did you learn it so well ? —
I did like the prudent starling.
Tell me, why are you always on bad terms (essere sempre in
dissensione) with your wife ? and why do you engage in unpro-
fitable trades (occuparsi di mestieri inutili) 1 It costs so much
trouble (si dura tanta pena) to get (ad ottenere) a situation (un
impiego) ; and you have a good one, and neglect it. Do you not
think of (pensare a) the future ? — Now allow me to speak also
(alia mia volta). All you have just said seems reasonable ; but
it is not my fault, if I have lost my reputation (la riputazione) ;
it is that of my wife : she has sold my finest clothes, my rings
(V anello), and my gold watch. I have a host of (esser carico di)
debts, and I do not know what to do. — I will not excuse (scolpare)
your wife ; £ut I know that you have also (pure) contributed
[contribuire) to your ruin (la perdita). Women are generally
good when they are left so (quando si lasciano buone).
244.
DIALOGUE.
The Master. — If I were now to ask you such questions as I
did in the beginning of our lessons, viz. (tali che) : Have you tha
hat which my brother has ? — Am I hungry ? Has he the tree of
my brother's garden ? &c, what would you answer ?
X50
EIGHTY-FIRST LESSON.
.
The Pupils. — We are obliged (essere costretto) to confess that
we found these questions at first rather ridiculous ; but, full of
confidence in your method, we answered as well as the smal
quantity of words and rules we then possessed allowed us. W«
were, in fact, not long in finding out that these questions wei
calculated to ground us in the rules, and to exercise us in coi
versation, by the contradictory answers we were obliged to make
But now that we can almost keep up a conversation in the beai
tiful language which you teach us, we should answer: It
impossible that we should have the same ha. which your brother
has, for two persons oannot have one and the same thing. To
the second question we should answer, that it is impossible for
us to know whether you are hungry or not. As to the last, we
should say : that there is more than one tree in a garden ; and in
asking us whether he has the tree of the garden, the phrase does
not seem to us logically correct. At all events we should
ungrateful (ingrato) if we allowed such an opportunity to escaj
without expressing (dimostrare) our liveliest gratitude to you foi
the trouble you have taken. In arranging those wise combinj
tions {la combinazione) you have succeeded in grounding
almost imperceptibly (impercettibilmente) in the rules, and exei
oising us in the conversation of a language which, taught in an]
other way, presents to foreigners, and even to natives, all
insurmountable difficulties. (See end of Lesson XXIY.)
EIGHTY-FIRST LESSON,
Lezione ottantesima prima
It lacks (wants) a quarter
It wants (lacks) a half
Sow much djes it want?
it docs not want much
t Ci vuole un quarto,
t Manca un quarto,
t Ci vuol la meta.
t Manca la meta.
Quanto ci vi ole 7
Non ci vuo' molto.
EIGHTY-FIRST LESSON.
461
Jt wanti but a trifle.
It wants but an inch of my being as
tall as you.
U lacked a great deal of my being as
rich as you.
The half
The third part.
The fourth part.
Fou think you have re.*urned me all-
a great deal is wanting.
The younger is not so good as the
elder by far.
Our merchants are far from giving us
an idea of the virtue mentioned by
our missionaries : they may be con-
sulted on the depredations of the
mandarins.
He is nearly as tall as his brother.
A discourse, impeded or embarrassed
by nothing, goes on and flows from
itself, and sometimes proceeds with
■uch rapidity that it is only with
difficulty that the mind of the
speaker follows the words.
Ci manca poco.
Non ci manca se non poco.
Ci vuole un pollice perch' io sia defc
la sua statura.
Ci mancava molto perch' io fosai
ricco quanto Lei.
La meta, il mezzo.
U terzo.
II quarto.
Ella crede forse (voi credete forae
avermi tutto reso ; ci manca molto.
II cadetto e molto meno savio del
primogenito.
I nostri negozianti son ben lontani
dal fornirci 1' idea di quella virtu
donde ci parlano i nostri mission-
arii : si pud consultarli sui ladro-
necci dei mandarini.
Gli manca ben poco ad esser grande
come suo fratello.
Un discorso chiaro e sciolto procede
e fluisce da se stesso e talvolta
cosi rapidamente ch' egli e solo
con difBcolta che il pensiero dell
oratore piu tenergli dictro.
In a foolish manner, at random. Sconsideratamentc, disavvedu-
tamente.
He speaks at random like a crazy man.
Parla sconsideratamente come u
paxxo.
To resort to violence.
A fact.
It is a fact
Else, or else.
To make fun of.
iiTo contradict, to give one the lie.
Should he say so, I would give him the
lie.
tlis actions belie his words.
To scratch.
t Venirne alle vie dl fatto (agli atti di
violenza).
Un fatto.
E un fatto.
Se non, altrimenti.
Beffarsi, burlarsi di.
Smentire qualcuno.
Se dicesse questo lo smentirei.
Le sue azioni smentiscono lo rat
parole.
Grqfiare 1 .
452
EIGHTY-FjRST lesson.
To escape.
. fell from the top of the tree to the
bottom, but I did not hurt myself
much.
1 escaped with a scratch.
The thief has been taken, but he will
escape with a few months' imprison-
ment
Scappare, scampare 1.
Sono caduto dalla cima dell' lit
(al basso) e non mi son fatto molt
male.
L' he scappata con una graffiaturs
II ladio e stato preso, ma scamper
con alcuni mesi di prigione, or
ee la passera con.
By dint of.
By dint of labour.
By too much weeping.
You will cry your eyes out.
i •btained of him that favour by dint
of entreaty.
t Pel gran (aforza di).
t Pel gran lavoro.
t Pel gran piangere.
t Pel gran piangere che fa, perdei
gli occhi.
tOttenni da lui questo favore
gran pregare (a forza di pregare)
That excepted.
rhat fault excepted, he is a good man.
!Da quello infuon.
Eccettuato questo.
Da questo in fuori (eccettuato que
to) e un buon uomo.
To vie with each other.
f -4 gara, a prova (V w
delV altro).
. f A concorrenza.
Those men are trying to rival each t Questi uomini lavorano a
other
Clean,
dean linen.
The more — as.
The less — as.
I am the more discontented with his
conduct, as he is under many obliga-
tions to me.
I am the leas pleased with his conduct,
as I had more rigb* to hie friend-
ship.
Netto, pulito.
Delia biancheria pulita.
Delia biancheria di bucato.
Tanto piu — c/tc.
Tanto meno — che.
Sono tanto piil malcontento deLa
sua condotta cfC egli & molto ob-
bligato verso di me (egli mi ha
molte obbligazioni).
Sono tanto meno soddisfatto della au»
condotta M io aveva piu diritti alls
sua amicizia di qualunque altro
/ wish that.
' with that house belonged to me.
f Vorrei che.
t Vorrei che questa casa fosse mia
EIGHTY -FIRST LESSON.
453
Tb muse, to think.
thought a long time on tWat affair.
Meditare 1, star pensieroso
(or sopra pensiero).
Ho mcditato molto tempo su questo
aflare (ho pensato molto tempo an
questo aflare).
To be naked,
Tc have the head uncovered.
Tc have the feet uncovered.
To be barefooted.
To be bareheaded.
To ride barebacked.
Esser nudo (ignudo).
Aver la testa scoperta.
Aver i piedi scalzi.
Essere pie scalzi.
Essere a capo scoperto.
Cavalcare a bardosso (or a schiena
nuda).
To have like to, or to think to
have.
I had like to have lost my money.
I thought i had lost my life.
We had like to have cut our fingers.
He was very near falling.
He was within a hair's breadth of being
kiUed.
He had like to have died.
Mancare 1, star per.
Stetti per perdere il mio t anaro.
Poco manco ch' io non perdessl
il mio danaro.
Credei perdere la vita.
Poco mancd che non ci tagliassimo
le dita.
Stette quasi per cadere.
' Poco manco che non fosse ucciao.
Poco ci voile ch' egli non foase uc-
ciso.
Crede (pensd) essere ucciao.
Credd (credette) morire.
At, on, or upon your heels.
The enemy is at our heels.
Alle vostre spalle.
II nemico c' lnsegue alle spalle.
To strike (in speaking of lightning).
The lightning has struck.
The lightning struck the ship.
While my brother was on the open sea,
a violent storm rose unexpectedly ;
the lightning struck the ship, which
it set on fire, and the whole crew
jumped into the sea to save them-
selves by swimming.
He was struck with fright when he
saw that the fire was gaining on all
sides.
He did not know what to do.
He hesitated no longer.
Cascare 1, cadere*
II fulmine cadde.
II fulmine cadde sul bastimento.
Trovandosi mio fratello in alto mare,
sopravvenne fiera tempesta ; II
fulmine cadde sul bastimento chi
mise in fuoco, e tutto 1' equipaggiu
si gettd al mare per salvarsi a nu-
oto.
Fu preso da spavento vedendo che
il fuoco imperversava da ogni late
Non sapeva a che appigliarsi.
Non istette piu in forse.
154
EIGHTY-FIRST LESSON.
I have not heard of him yet. Non ho ancor avuto hie naova
An angel. Un angelo.
A master-piece. "Un capo d' opera.
Master-pieces. Capi d' opera.
Obi. Of a word compounded k/ means of a preposition, expressed or
itood, the first word only takes .he mark of the plural.
Four o'clock flowers. Gelsomini di notte.
His or her physiognomy
His or her shape.
The expression.
The look.
Contentment
Respect.
Admiration.
Grace, charm.
Delightfully.
Fascinating.
Thin (slender).
Uncommonly **ell.
Mis or her look inspires respect and
admiration.
La sua fisonomia.
Le sue forme, la sua stature
figure.
L' espressione.
L' aspetto, la ciera.
II contento.
II rispetto.
L' ammirezione.
Le grazie.
A maraviglia.
Attraente, lusinghiero.
Srelto, asciutto, smilzo, magro.
Superior men te bene.
II suo aspetto inspire deferenza ad
ammirezione.
EXERCISES.
245.
Will you be my guest {mangiare con qualcuno) ? — I thank yoi
a friend of mine has invited me to dinner : he has ordered {fa
apparecchiare) my favourite dish (un cibo favorite). — What is it
— It is a dish of milk (dei latticinii). — As to me, I do not like
milk-meat : there is nothing like (niente di meglio che) a good
piece of roast beef or veal. — What has become of your younger
brother ? — He has suffered shipwreck {far naufragio) in going to
America. — You must give me an account of that {La mi racconti
quest' avvenimento). — Very willingly (volontierissimo). — Being on
the open sea, a great storm arose. The lightning struck the ship
and set it on fire. The crew jumped into the sea to save them-
■elves by swimming. My brother knew not what to do, having
never learnt to swim. He reflected in vain ; he found no means
to save his life. He was struck with fright whsn he saw that
.be fire was gaining on all sides. He hesitated no longer, and
EIGHTY-SECOND LESSON.
45?,
• limped into the sea. Well (su via) what has become of him ? —
1 do not know, having not heard of him yet. — But who told you
all that ? — My nephew, who was there, and who saved himself.
— As you are talking of your nephew (a propositi del — ) where
is he at present ? — He is in Italy. — Is it long since you heard of
him ? — I have received a letter from him to-day. — What does he
write to you ? — He writes to me that he is going to marry a
young woman who brings him a hundred thousand crowns. — Is
she pretty ? — Handsome as an angel ; she is a master-piece of
nature. Her physiognomy is mild and full of expression ; her
eyes are the finest in the (del) world, and her mouth is charming
(e la sua bocca e leggiadra). She is neither too tall nor too short;
her shape is slender ; all her actions are full of grace, and her
manners are engaging. Her looks inspire respect and admira-
tion. She has also a great deal of wit ; she speaks several lan-
guages, dances uncommonly well, and sings delightfully. My
nephew finds but one defect in her (le trova che un difetto). — And
what is that defect ? — She is affected (aver delle pretensioni). —
There is nothing perfect in the (al) world. — How happy you are !
you are rich, you have a good wife, pretty children, a fine house,
and all you wish. — Not all, my friend. — What do you desire
more ? — Contentment (la contentezza) ; for you know that he onry
is happy who is contented (che quo dirsi contento).
EIGHTY-SECOND LESSON.
Lezione ottantesima seconda.
To unriddle, to disentangle.
To find out.
To disentangle the hair.
To unriddle difficulties.
I have not been able to find out the
sense of that phrase.
" Sviluppare 1, sciogliere *
(sciolto, sciolsi) 1.
Distrigare 1, distinguere* 2
(p. part, distinto, pret. de£
distinsi).
Pettinare i capelli.
Sciogliere difficolta.
Non ho potuto distinguere 11
di questa irase.
Utf>
EIGHTY-SECOND LESSON.
A quarrei.
ro have differences (a quarrel) with
somebody.
uaa querela, una nssa
Aver delle quistioni con quaicuM)
To take good care, to shun, to
beware,
I will take care not to do it.
Mind you do not lend that man
money.
He takes care not to answer the ques-
tion which I asked him.
To ask a question.
it you take it into your head to do
that, I will punish you.
To take into one's head.
To become, to Jit well.
Does that become me 1
That does not become you.
It does not become you to do that.
That fits you wonderfully well.
Her head-dress did not become her.
It does not become you to reproach
me with it.
To reproach.
To follow from it.
It follows from it that you should not
do that
How is it that you have come so late 7
I do not know how it is.
How is it that he had not his gun 1
I do not know how it happened.
To fast.
To be fasting.
vO give notice to, to let any bony
know.
To warn some one of something.
GHve notice to that man of his father's
return.
Guardarti da.
Mi guarderd bene dal farlo.
Guardatevi dal prestare danaro a
costui.
Si guarda bene dal rispondere alia
questione che gli ho fatta.
Far una questione (or una doman
da).
Se vi avvisate di farlo, vi punird
Avvisarsi (mettersi in capo).
Star bene, convenire *, affarn
Mi sta bene questo 7
Non vi (Le) sta bene.
Nor vi (Le) conviene di far cid.
Questo Le (vi) sta a maraviglia.
La sua acconciatura di capo le stave
male
Non vl sta bene di rinfacciarmelo.
Rinf acciarc 1.
Seguire, mccedere * ; p. part.
successe ; pret. def. successi.
Ne segue che non dovreste (do
vrebbe) far cid.
Come rr.ai e Ella (siete) venuta (v*
nuto) cosi tardi 7
Non so come.
Come mai non aveva *' suo fucile 7
Non so come.
Digiunare, far astmenxa,
Essere a digiuno.
Avvertire (avvisare) qualcrno i*
qualche cosa.
Awertite (awisate) costui del rto*
no di suo padre.
BIGHTY-SKCOND LESSON.
467
To clear, to elucidate, to clear up.
The weather is clearing up.
Schiarire 3 (isco). Rischiarare
11 tempo si rischiara.
To refresh.
Refresh yourself, and return to me im-
mediately.
To whiten, to bleach.
To blacken.
To turn pale, to grow pale.
To grow old.
To grow young.
That makes one look young again.
To blush, to redden.
To make merry.
To make one's self merry.
He makes merry at my expense.
To feign, to dissemble, to pretend.
He knows the art of dissembling.
To possess.
To procrastinate, to go slowly.
. do not like to transact business with
that man, for he always goes very
■lowly about it
A proof.
It is a proof.
To stray, to get lost, to lose )
ene's way, to lose one's self. S
Through.
Hie cannon-ball went through the
wall.
fe ran him through the body.
Rinfrescare 1.
Rinfrescatevi e ritornate subita
Imbiancare 1.
Annerire (isco), abbrunare.
Impallidire (isco).
Invecchiare 1.
Ringiovinire (isco).
t Questo ringiovinisce il volto
Arrossire (isco).
Rallegrare 1, divertire 8.
Rallegrarsi, divertirsi.
Si diverte alle mie spese.
Fingere* ; past part. Jinto j
pret. def.fnsi.
Possiede V arte di fingere.
Possedere* (is conjugated like
sedere*, Lesson LI.).
f Mandar le cose in lungo.
Non mi piace far aflari con costal,
perche* manda sempre le com in
lungo.
Unaprora.
fc una pro va.
Smarrirti.
( A tra verso.
Per mezzo.
Da banda a banda.
Da parte a parte.
La palla di cannone e" passata a tra-
verso la muraglia.
Gli ho passato la mla tpada da. part*.
a parte.
458
EIGHTY-SECOND LESSON.
APOSTROPHE AND ELISION.
The apostrophe is used,--—
I. After the articles lo, la, li, gli, and their oblique cases, when they me*' be-
fore words beginning with a vowel, or when they are abbreviated, as :
The soul, the honour.
Of the books, to the fathers.
L' anima, 1' onore.
D£ libri, a' padri, 6c.
Uba. A. The articles lo, la, are never abridged in the plural, unless the noart
following lo begins with ani1. Ex.
The friends, the coats.
The loves, the honours.
The shades, the inventions.
The eminences, the executions.
Gli amici, gli abiti.
Gli amori, gli onori.
Le ombre, le invenzioni.
Le eminenze, le esecuzioni
But write.
The geniuses, the English, the instru- Gl' ingegni, gl' Inglesi, gl' istru-
ments. menti.
Oba. B. Whenever the prepositions : con, with ; in, in ; m, upon ; per, for, by,
meet with the definite articles, il, lo, la, they are contracted i thus nel is said
instead of in il, nello, instead of in lo, &c. According to this contraction we
say and write :
Singular.
Plural.
-*
A.
Masculine. Feminine.
Masculine. Feminine
In the.
Nel, nello " Nella.
Nei or ne', negli. Nelle
With the.
Col, collo " Colla.
Coi or co', con gli or cogli. Colle.
Upon the.
Sul, sullo " Sulla.
Su' or sui, sugli. Sulie.
For the.
Pel, pello " Pella.
Pelli, pei or pe', per gli. Pelle2.
EXAMPLES.
fn the garde
n, in the spirit, in the
Nel giardino, nello spirito, nella
room.
camera.
In the garde
ns, in the spirits, in the
Ne' giardini, negli spiriti, nelle
rooms.
camere, Ac
2. In the article il the letter i is sometimes cut off, and an apostrophe put in
ts stead, after a word ending with a vowel, but not the vowel of that word.
This, however, is more frequently the case in poetry than in prose. Ex.
The whole country.
Let him tell me his name.
Tutto '1 oaese.
Mi dica '1 suo nome.
3. Mi, ti, ci,vi,ne, se, si, di, receive the apostrophe before a vowel. Ex.
You understand me.
He understands it.
He will mistake.
If he likes.
Voi m' intendete.
Ei 1' intende.
S' ingannera.
S' egli vuole.
1 Words ending in gli and ei are never abridged, unless tne following wort/
Begins with i, as* quegP intervalli, these intervals; dole1 inganni, sweet illu
■ions. But write quegli amici, those friends, and not quegV amici.
* The contractions contained in this last line are leas generally made use of
EIGHTY-SECOND LESSON.
456
06*. C. Ci, however, ii never abridged before a, o, *, to avoid harshneu
Ex.
We want.
W 3 are in want of.
They unite us.
Ci abbisogna.
Ci occorre.
Oi uniscono.
4. The words uno, bello, grande, $anto, quello, bucmo, are often abridged before
masculine nouns beginning with a consonant or a vowel, but never before
feminine nouns (except when beginning with a vowel), or before • followed by
a consonant. (See Obs. G., //., /., Lesson X.) Ex.
A book, a fine book, a large horse.
Saint Peter, that soldier, good bread
A friend, a fine man, great genius.
Holy Anthony, that love, good orator.
Large boat, great army.
Un libro, un btl libro, un gran ca-
vallo.
San Pietro, quel solda'o, buon pane.
Un amico, un beW uomo, grand? in-
gegno.
San? Antonio, quelP amore, bwn
oratore.
Gran barca, grand? armata.
5. Words in the singular, having one (not two) of the liquid consonants, /,
m, n, r, before their final vowel, may lose this, unless before words beginning
with «, followed by a consonant. The vowels after m and n are not so often
dropped as those after / and r, except in verbs, where the vowel after m is fre-
quently dropped. Ex.
The rising sun.
Your welfare.
The serene sky.
Full senate.
Light wind.
Let us wail.
Let us go.
Let us feign.
Ob*. D. Cannot be abridged :
II sol nascente (instead of sole na
•cente).
II ben vostro (instead of bene vos-
tro).
II ciel sereno (instead of cielo se-
reno).
Pien Senato (instead of pieno se-
nato).
Leggier vento (instead of leggiero
vento).
Attendiam (instead of attendiamo).
And i am (instead of andiamo).
Fingiam (instead of fingiamo), &c.
(a) The words, ehiaro, clear; raro, rare;
wero, black ; oscuro, dark ; and some others. (6) The first person singular of
.he present of the indicative, as : Io perdono, I pardon ; io mi console, I console
myself, Ac, except sono, first person singular and third person plural of the
Enxiliary essere. Ex.
I am ready. Io son pronto (for io sono pronto).
They are come. Eglino son venuti (for eglino sono
vemiti).
6. Infinitives, when joined to mi, U, ci, ri, «, ne, lo} la, Ic, /i, gH> or any othei
cord, drop their final e. Ex.
To see him.
To feel one's sjlf.
To repent
Per vedeno (for per vedere toy
Sentirsi (for sen tire si).
Pentirsi (for pentire si).
460 EIGHTY-SECOND LESSON.
Ob*. E Words having the grave accent are never abridged, as : dirb \
•hail say ; farb, I will make ; felicity, happiness, &c, except che, with its com-
pounds : perch}, why 1 bench}, although ; Hcchi, therefore, so that, 6c, which
are sometimes abridged. Ex.
Because he was. Perch' era.
Though he might go. Bench' andasse, 4c
AUGMENTATIONS.
I. When words beginning with s followed by a consonant are preceded by on*
of the prepositions in, con, per, or by the negative rum, the letter i is prefixed
to them for the sake of euphony. (See Obs. F. Lesson LV.) Ex.
In the street.
In a state (able).
With terror.
With study.
By mistake.
Do not jefct.
Not to stay.
In istrada (for in strada).
In istato (for in stato).
Con iepavento (for con spavento).
Con istudio (for con studio).
Per isbaglio (for per sbaglio).
Non ischerzate (for non scherzate)
Non istare (for non stare).
2. The preposition a, and the conjunctions e, o, ne are changed into ad, ea\
xt, ned, before a vowel ; od ind ned, however, are less frequently made use of
Jtxan ad and ed. Ex.
To Anthony.
You and I.
We and he.
Neither thou nor she.
Ad Antonio.
Voi ed io.
Noi ed egli.
Ni tu ned essa.
EXERCISES.
246.
The Emperor Charles the Fifth being one day out a hunting,
lost his way in the forest, and having come to a house entered it
to refresh himself. There were in it four men, who pretended tc
sleep. One of them rose, and approaching the Emperor, told
him he had dreamt he should take his watch, and took it. Then
another rose, and said he had dreamt tnat his surUmt fitted him
wonderfully, and took it. The third took his purse. At last the
fourth oame up, and said. he hoped he would not taKe it ill if he
searched him, and in doing it perceived around the emperor's
neck a small gold chain to which a whistle was attached which
he wished to rob him of. But the Emperor said • " My good
friend, before depriving me of (spogliare qualcuno di quakhe cosa
IIGHTY-SECOND LESSON. 461
his trinke. (il gioicllo), I must teach you its virtue." Saying
Jus, he whistled. His attendants (i suoi ujfiziah), who were
»eeking him, hastened to the house, and were thunderstruck
(soprqfatti dallo stupore) to behold his majesty in such a state.
But the Emperor, seeing himself out of danger (fuor di pericolo\
said (li prevenne dicendo) : " These men (Ecco degli uomini che)
have dreamt all that they liked. I wish in my turn also to
dream." And after having mused a few moments, he said : " I
have dreamt that you all four deserve to be hanged :" which
was no sooner spoken than executed before the house.
A certain king making one day his entrance into a town at
two o'clock in the afternoc;. ^dopo mezzo giorno), the senate sent
some deputies (un deputato) to compliment him. The one who
was to speak (portar la parola) began thus (in questi termini) :
" Alexander the Great, the great Alexander," and stopped short
(e tosto s} arrestd). — The king, who was very hungry (aver molta
fame\ said : " Ah ! my friend, Alexander the Great had dined,
and I am still fasting." Having said this, he proceeded to (pro-
seguire verso) the hotel de ville (il palazzo della cittd), where a
magnificent dinner had been prepared for him.
247.
A gooa old man (un vecchierello), being very ill, sent for hk
wife, who was still very young, and said to her : " My dear, you
see that my last hour is approaching, and that I am compelled tc
leave you. If, therefore, you wish me to die in peace you must
do me a favour (una grazia). You are still young, and will,
without doubt, marry again (rimaritarsi) : knowing this, 1 request
of you not to wed (prendere) M. Lewis (Luigi); for I confess
that I have always been very jealous of him, and am so still. I
should, therefore, die in despair (disperato) if you do not promise
me that." The wife answered : " My dear husband (mio care
marito), I entreat you, let not this hinder you from dying peace-
ably ; for I assure you that, if even I wished to wed him I could
aot do so, being already promised to another."
It was customary with Frederick (Federico) the Great, when
ever a new soldier appeared in his guards, to ask him three que*
462
EIGHTY-THIRD LESSON.
tkma ; viz. " How old are you ? How long have you been m
my service ? Are you satisfied with your pay and treatment V
tt happened that a young soldier, born in France, who had served
in his own country, desired to enlist in the Prussian service.
His figure caused him immediately to be accepted ; but he was
totally ignorant of the German dialect ; and his captain giving
him notice that the king would question him in that tongue the
first time he should see him, cautioned him, at the same time, to
learn by heart the three answers that he was to make to the king.
Accordingly he learnt them by the next day ; and as soon as he
appeared in the ranks Frederick came up to interrogate him : but
he happened to begin upon him by the second question, and asked
him, " How long have you been in my service ? " Twenty-one
years," answered the soldier. The king, struck with his youth,
which plainly indicated that he had not borne a musket so long as
that, said to him, much astonished : " How old are you V " One
year, an't please your majesty (con buona grazia delta Maesta
Vostra)" Frederick, more astonished still, cried, "You or I
must certainly be bereft of our senses.,, The soldier, who took
this for the third question, replied firmly (con molto sangue fred*
do) : " Both, an't please your majesty (quando piaccia a Vostra
Maesta)."
EIGHTY-THIRD LESSON.
Lezione ottantesima terza.
Tb double.
The double.
Tour share, your part.
That merchant asks twice as much as
he ought.
Fou must bargain with him ; he will
g*~« it you for the half,
fou have twice your share.
fou htve three times your share.
( Addoppiare 1.
( Doppiare 1, raddopptart 1.
II doppio.
La vostra parte.
Questo mercante domanda il doppie
Bisogna mercanteggiare con lui
glielo dara per la meta preizo.
Ella ha due volte tanto.
Ella ha tre volte tanto.
,U Lt&*.iti\Jx*
«t5«i
To renew.
To stun.
Wild, giddy.
To shake somebody's hand
Open, frank, real.
Rinnovare, rinnovtllare a.
Stordire (isco). .
Siordito.
Stringere la mano a quaicu*i«.
Franco, aperto. schieitv.
1 tell you yes.
I tell you no.
I told him yes.
1 told him no.
To lay up, to put by.
Put your money by.
Is soon as I read my book I put it by.
do not care much about going to the
play to night.
+ VI dico di si.
t Vi dico di no.
t Gli dissi di si.
t Gli dissi di no.
To care.
To satisfy one's self with a
thing.
» have been eating an hour, and I tan-
not satisfy my hunger.
To be satisfied*
To quench one's thirst.
I have toon drinking this half hour,
but 1 cannot quench my thirst.
To have one's thirst quenched.
r Serrare I, riporre * (posto, po*i).
< Chiudere, rinchiudere * (chiuso
C chusi).
Chiuda (chiudete) il di Lei (ii voir
tro) danaro.
Appena ho letto il mio libro, lo ii
pongo.
'Non mi do molta briga d' andarc
alio spettacolo questa sera.
I Non mi euro molto d' andare alto
. spettacolo questa sera
Darsi briga, curartt.
Saziarsi 1.
f E un' ora che mangio e non petto
J saziarrm.
J Mangio da un' ora e non Dnee
*• saziarmi.
Essere sazw.
Dissetarsi 1.
E una mezz' ora che bevo, mm
dosso dissetarmi.
Esser dissetato.
To thirst for, to be thirsty or Esser assetato, aver gran scut,
dry.
He is a blood-thirsty fellow.
On both sides, on every side
On all sides.
5 E un uomo assetato di sangue,
<E un uomo sitibondo di sangue.
Da un canto e dall' altro. D' amM
i lati.
Da tutti i htf.
104
EIGHTY-THIRD LJiSSON.
Allow me, my lady, to introduce to you
Mr. G., an old friend of our family.
( am delighted to become acquainted
with you.
[ shall do all in my power to desene
your good opinion.
Allow me to introduce to you Mr. B.
whose brother has rendered such
eminent services to your cousin.
How happy we are to see you at our
house!
It is the finest country in Europe.
Candia is one of the most agreeable
islands in the Mediterranean.
He lives in his retreat like a real
philosopher.
You live like a king.
He acts like a madman.
To behave like a blunderbuss.
Who knocks as if he were master
where lam?
Good morning.
You are out very early.
I wish you a good morning.
You rose early (in good tinie, late)
Had you a good night's rest?
Good evening.
Good night.
I wish you a good night's rest
[ wish you a good appetite.
I wish you the same.
May it do you good.
A happy new year.
A happy journey.
I wish you good luck.
God bless you.
God preserve you.
When shall I have the pleasure of see-
ing you again ?
Soon. In a short time.
adieu i till we meet again
Permetta, Signora, ch' lo Le pre
senti il Signor di G. come un veo-
chio amico della nostra famigiia.
Sono contentissima, Signore, (mi £
grati8simo, Signore) di far la di Lei
conoscenza.
Faro tutto cid che sard in mio poter*
per rendermi degno delle di Lo;
buone grazie.
Signore, permettano ch' io Lor pre*
senti il Signor di B. il cui frateilo
ha reso cosi eminenti servigi al
Loro cugino.
Ah, Signore, quantc siamo contente
di riceverla in casa nostra I
E il piu bel paese dell' Europa.
Candia e una delle isole piu amene
del Mediterraneo.
Vive nel suo ritiro come un vera
filosofo (da vero filosofo).
Vivete (Ella vive) da re.
Si comporta come un furioso.
Condursi come uno stordito.
Chi picchia da padrone ove son io ?
Buon giorno. Ben levato.
Cosi di buon' ora in piedi.
Le auguro il buon giorno.
Vossignoria (Ella) s' 3 levataabuou
ora (per tempo, tardi).
Ha Elladormito (riposato) bene?
Buona sera (felice sera).
Buona notte (felice notte).
Riposi bene. Dorma bene.
Le auguro un buon appetito.
Parimenti.
Buon pro Le faccia.
Buon capo d' anno.
Buon viaggio.
Le auguro (Le desidero; un pros
pero successo.
II ciel La benedica
Dio la guardi.
Quando avrd il piacere di rivederlal
Presto. Fra poco (tempo).
Addio, Signore! a rivederci.
BIGHTY-THIED LESSON.
465
faur most humble servant
Your most obedient servant.
I am entirely yours.
Adieu.
How is your Lordship 1
How do you do 1
Well, at your service.
I am glad of it.
How is your health 1
I am well, very well, tolerably, so so,
unwell.
Not too well. So so.
You do not look very well.
What is the matter with you ?
I am a little indisposed.
I am sorry for it.
Welcome, Sir.
I am happy to see you.
It seems a century since I had the
pleasure of seeing you.
It is a good while since I had the plea-
sure of seeing you.
Give this gentleman a chair.
Please to sit down
Sit down. Be seated.
Sit by my side.
Take a chair.
I thank you, I prefer to stand.
Do not trouble yourself.
Do as if you were at home.
Do not make any compliments.
I will nrt trouble you any longer.
Do you wish to leave already ?
Stay a little longer,
must beg you to excuse me .his time.
Umilissimo servo. BT inchlno h
| Lei.
. Le sono schiavo.
Servo divoto. Divotissimo servo.
I miei rispetti. Padron riverito.
Son tutto suo.
La riverisco.
Come sta Vossignoria Illustrissima '
Come va ? Come se la passa 1
Bene, per servirla (per ubbidirla).
Ne godo. Me ne rallegro. Me na
consolo.
Come sta V. S. (Ella) di salute?
Sto bene, ottimamente, passabil-
mente, mediocremente, male.
Non troppo bene. Cosi cosi.
Ella non ha troppo buona ciera.
Che cosa ha 1
Sono un poco indisposto (a).
Me ne displace. Me ne rincresce.
Ben venuta, Vossignoria.
Mi rallegro di vederla.
Mi pare cent' anni che non ho avuto
il piacer di vederla.
E gid lungo tempo (3 gia un bel pez-
zo) che non ebbi il piacere di
vederla.
Date una sedia (date da sedere) a
questo Signore.
Si serva. S' accomodi, La prego
La supplico, resti servita.
Si metta a sedere. Resti a sedere.
Segga accanto a me.
Prenda una sedia.
La ringrazio, voglio restare in piedi.
Non s' incomodi, La prego.
Faccia con to d' essere a casa sua.
Non fate cerimonie (complimenti).
Non voglio recarle incomodo piu a
lungo.
Voglio levtrle 1' incomodo.
Or mai se ne vuol andare? Se na
vuolegia and are 1
Si trattenga ancora un poco.
Per questa volta convien (bisogna)
che La preghi di dispensarmene.
#00
EIGHTY-THIRD LESSON.
Are you in such a hurry 1
You are in a great hurry, Sir.
I must go.
i have pressing business.
I speak frankly.
1 hope then to have the honour another
time.
Favour me oftener (with your visits).
Farewell.
Till we meet again.
Ha poi tanta premural
Ha molta fretta, Signore.
Bisogna ch' io me ne vada.
Ho degli affari di premura.
Io parlo schietto, senza suggezione.
Spero dunque d' aver I' onore un' *1
tra volta.
Mi favorisca piu spesso.
Si conservi.
A buon rivederci.
It is the prerogative of great men to
conquer envy; merit gives it birth
and merit destroys it.
Vincer I' invidia e privilegio da
grandi uomini ; il merito la fit
nasoere, il merito la fa morire
EXERCISES.
248. *
A man had two sons, one oi whom liked to sleep very late n>
the morning (tutta la mattina), and the other was very industri-
ous, and always rose very early. The latter (costui), having one
day gone out very early found a purse well filled with money.
He ran to his brother to inform him (a fargli parte) of his good
luck {la buona fortuna), and said to him: "See, Luigi, what is
got (guadagnarsi), by (a) rising early." — "Faith (infedemia)l"
answered his brother, " if the person to whom it belongs had not
risen earlier than I, he would not have lost it."
A lazy young fellow being asked what made him lie (stare*)
in bed so long — " I am busied (essere occupato)" said he, " in
hearing counsel every morning. Industry (il lavoro) advises
me to get up ; sloth (la pigrizio) to lie still ; and so they give
me twenty reasons pro and con (pro e contro). It is my part
(iocca a me) to hear what is said on both sides ; and by the time
the cause (la causa) is over (intesa) dinner is ready."
A beautiful story is related of a great lady, who, being («
racconta un bel tratto d' — ) asked where her husband was, when
he lay concealed (essere nascosto) for having been deeply con-
cerned in a conspiracy (per essere stato complice d1 una conspira-
none,) resolutely (coraggiosamente) answered, she had hid him.
This oonfession drew her before the king, who told her thai
1I0HTY-THIKD LSSSOlf. *6".
nothing but her discovering where her lord was concealed could
§ave her from the torture (che non poteva evitare la tortura quatulc
rum iscoprisse il ritiro del suo sposo). " And will that do ( pas-
tore)!" said the lady. "Yes," said the king, "I give you my
word for it." " Then," says she, " I have hid him in my heart,
where you will find him." Which surprising answer (quest*
ruposta ammirabile) charmed her enemies.
249.
Cornelia, the illustrious (iUustre), mother of the Gracchi (dei
(xracchi), after the death of her husband, who left her with twelve
ohildren, applied herself (consacrossi) to the care of her family,
with a wisdom (con tal saviezza) and prudence (la vrudenza) mat
acquirer] for her (che si acquisto) imiversal esteem (la stima um-
t'o, ,ll,^. Only three out of (fra) the twelve lived to the years
of maturity (V eta matura) ; one daughter, Sempronia, whom she
married to the second Scipio Africanus (Scipione V Africano) ;
and two sons, Tiberius (Tiberio) and Caius (Caio\ whom sue
brought up (educate) with so much care, that, though they were
generally acknowledged (benche si sapesse generalmente) to have
been born with the most happy dispositions (la disposizione), it
was judged that they were still more indebted (pure si ritenevana
debiton — piu) to education than nature. The answer she gave
(fare*) a Campanian lady (una dama della Campania) concern-
ing them (su di essi) is very famous (celebemma), and includes
in it (rinchiudere*) great instruction for ladies and mothers.
That lady, who was very rich, and fond of pomp and show
(essere appassionato pel fasto e lo splendore), having displayed
(esporre*) her diamonds (il diamante), pearls (la perla)t and
richest jewels (il monile), earnestly desired Cornelia to let her see
her jewels also. Cornelia dexterously (destramente) turned the
conversation to another subject to wait the return of her sons, who
were gone to the public schools. When they returned (ArnvaU.
ehefurono), and entered their mother's apartment, she said to the
Campanian lady, pointing to them (mostrandoli) : " These are.
my jewels, and the only ornaments (V unico ornamento) I prize
[apprezzare)." And such ornaments, which are the strength (aj
168
EIGHTY-FOURTH LESSON.
form) and support (il sostegno) of society, add a brighter lustre
(un piu gran lustro) to the fair (la bellexza) than all the jewels of
the East (deW Oriente).
EIGHTY-FOURTH LESSON.
Lezione ottantesima quarta.
CONSTRUCTION, OR SYNTAX.
]£JThe regular construction has this principle for basis, that the governing
wolGror part of speech has always its place before the governed.
According to this principle, the subject or nominative, with all the words that
determine it, takes the first place in the sentence ; then follows the verb, then
the objective case (accusative), with all its determinations, then the indirect
object (genitive, dative, or ablative), with its determinations ; at last the modi
fications, showing the different circumstances of place, time, &c. Ex.
I shall surely send to-morrow the most ManderO
faithful of my servants to you, in
order to return you the manuscripts
with which you have intrusted
me not long ago ; and 1 write this
note to you, that you may let me
know the hour at which my servant
will find you at home.
I have the honour to return you the
Italian book which you had the
goodness to lend me. I have read it
with much pleasure, and am very
much obliged to you for it.
2. As for the irregular construction or inversion, which the Italians, in imi
tation of the Latins, use very freely, it is impossible to lay down any fixed
rules ; it depends entirely on the particular stress the person who writes or
speaks wishes to lay on certain words, which he then puts at the head of th«
senterce. The following sentence, which may be rendered in Italian in seve»
different ways, may stand as an instance :
Rendo me a voi.
domani senza fallo il piu
fedele dei miei servitori da Lei, per
restituirle i manoscritti afl&datimi da
qualche tempo ; e Le scrivo questa
cartolina, or bigliettino, accioche mi
faccia sapere 1' ora alia quale il mic
servo La trovera in casa.
Ho ! 1' onore di rimandarle il libro
italiano che Ella ebbe la bonta di
prestarmi. L' ho letto con molto
piacere, e gliene sono tenutissimo.
\ submit to you.
A voi rendo me.
Mi rendo a voi.
Rendomi a voi.
A voi mi rendo.
Vi rendo me. (Not elegant)
^ R«ndomivi
K1GHTV- FOURTH LESSON.
409
3. Inversions, however, when used properly, contribute uncommonly tc
elegance, beauty, and harmony of language. This may be exemplified in the
following beautifully constructed expression of Boccaccio, which if constructed
regularly, would lose all its harmony, beauty, and interest. *
O dearest heart, all my duties towards
thee are fulfilled ; I have nothing
else to do, but to go with my soul to
keep thee company.
O molto amato cuore, ogni mio officio
verso te £ fornito, n£ piu altro mi
resta a fare, se non di venire con
la mia anima a fare la tua cora-
pagnia.1
EXPLETIVES AND LICENSES.
1 Expletives, which the Italians call ripieno, i. e. full, filled, are employed
tor the purpose of giving more emphasis, fulness, harmony, and elegance, to
the sentence. The principal are :
HELLO-
1 have paid a hundred crowns.
Your suit of clothes is finished.
I asked him, if he had the courage to
send him away, and he answered,
res.
ail.
! do not think that you will take it ill.
I should not like him to go.
Ho pagato cento bcgh scudi.
II di Lei vestito e bell t fatto.
Gli domandai, se gli bastasse 1' ani-
mo di cacciarlo via : ed egii
rispose, si bene.
Non credo gib che 1' avrete a (or per)
male.
Non vorrei gib ch' egli partisse.
•
He is always repeating the same Torna mai sempre a dire 1' isteiM
things. cose.
Always. Mai sempre.
mm.
He is more learned than I thought. Egli e* piu dotto ch' io non credeva.
Learning is of greater value than ! La dottrina e* di piu gran prezzo che
riches. non le richezze.
POI.
What he told me Is not true.
| Non 3 poi vero quanto mi disss
PURE.
They are now disposed to come. Ora sono pur disposti a venire.
Ob*. A. This expletive is ofter used to strengthen the imperative. Ex.
- Re-establish the regular construction, all the beauty, harmony, and lively
.merest which is felt in reading it, disappears : " O cuore amato molto, ogn.
mio officio £ fornito verso te, ne mi resta piu altro a fare, se non di venire a fart!
eompaguia con la mia anima."
£70
EIGHTY-FOURTH LESSOH.
Say (i. e. you have only to say)
Uo (i. e. you may go).
Give (i. e. you may give). ,
VIA.
Are you willing to do it 1 do it
Let us make peace.
Dite pure.
Andate pur*.
Date pure.
Volete farlo 1 via fatelo.
Via facciam la pace.
MI, TI, CI, VI, si, SB.
\ thought you were an Italian.
? wish thou wouldst stay with us this
evening.
She left.
1 do not Know whether you know that
man.
Vie leads a gay life.
Io mi credeva che voi /oste Italians.
Desidero che tu con noi ti riman^t
qucsta sera.
Essa se ne parti.
Npn so se voi vi conosciate quest
uomo.
Egli se la passa assai lietamente.
II. As to the licenses, they are very numerous in Italian, and are chiefly per-
tained and made use of in poetry, viz.
a) The letter v is sometimes left out, chiefly in the imperfect of the indicative
is;
Avea, potea, finia, dee, deono, bee, bea, &c. for
Aveva, poteva, finiva, deve, devono. beve, beva, &c.
W The letters g and gg are sometimes substituted for other letters, as:
Seggio, veggio, caggio, veggendo, cheggio, veglio, speglio, &c, for
«Siedo, vedo, cado, vedendo, chiedo, vecchio, specchio, &c.
e) The third person plural of the preterite definite of the indicative, ending
ba arcno, is often abridged into aro, chiefly in poetry, as :
Amaro, legaro, andaro, for
Amarono, Iegarono. andarono.
J) The syllable at is often rejected in poetry in the past participle, as :
Colmo, adorno, chino, domo. oso, for:
Colmato, adornato, chinato, domato, osato, Ac.
*) The letter o is often added in poetry to the preterite definite of verba ending
mirs, as:
Rapio, finio, empio, uscio, for
Rapi, rini, empi, usci.
/ ) The articles deUo, delta, degli, dei, delle, are by the poets often written .
De lot de la, degli, de li, de le.
Gb3. B. A great number of figurative, as well as Latin words, are also used
Pf tne Italian poets, which a ■ 3 hardly ever used in prose ; thus you will find •
Air, sword.
Poem, food.
Ship, carriage.
Eyes, hand.
ML
tfver.
Poet, men, heroes, «c.
C. No abridgment takes plana I
Aer for aria ; brando for spado.
Carme for verso ; esca for cibo.
Legno for tascello or carrozza.
Lumi for occhi; palma for mono.
Squilla for campana.
Unqua, unquanche, unquaneOy fat
mat.
Vat* for poeta ; viri for wnM, Ac
EIGHT f -FOURTH LKSSON. 471
a) In the last word of a sentence, chiefly in prose.
b) In the words which have an accent on their last syllable, except eke witk
Its compounds, as : bench}, perche, poicfie, Ac.
c) In words ending in a before a consonant, except the adverbs, allora, talora,
tncora, <&-», and the word mora, sister, when used as an adjective. Say cUcuna
persona, nessuna pena, and not alcun persona, nessun ptna,
d) In words terminating in a diphthong, as : occhio, specckia, cambio, Ac.
EXERCISES.
250.
politeness (Creanza).
When the Earl of Stair was at the court of Louis the Fourteenth
his manners, address, and conversation, gained much on the
esteem and friendship of that monarch. One day, in a circle of
his courtiers, talking of the advantage of good breeding and easy
manners, the king offered to lay a wager he would name an Eng-
lish nobleman that should excel in those particulars any French-
man of his court. The wager was jocularly accepted, and his
majesty was to choose his own time and place for the experiment.
To avoid suspicion, the king let the subject drop for some
months, till the courtiers thought (ondefar credere) he had forgot-
ten it ; he then chose the following stratagem : he appointed Lord
Stair, and two of the most polished noblemen of his court, to take
an airing with him after the breaking up of the levee (alV uscire
del grand lever) ; the king accordingly came down the great stair-
case at Versailles, attended by those three lords, and coming up
to the side 0~ the coach, instead of going in first as usual, he
pointed to the French lords to enter; they, unaccustomed to the
ceremony, shrunk back, and submissively declined the honour ;
he then pointed to Lord Stair, who made his bow, and sprang into
the coach ; the king, and the French lords followed.
When they were seated, the king exclaimed : " Well, gentle-
men, I believe you will acknowledge I have won my wager.,;
1 How so, Sire V " Why," continued the king, " when I desired
you both to go into the coach, you declined it ; but this polite for-
eigner (pointing to Lord Stair) no sooner received the commands
of a king, though not his sovereign, than he instantly obeyed '
31
472 EIGHTY FOURTH LESSON.
The courtiers hung down their heads in confusion, and acknc*
ledged the justice of his majesty's claim.
251.
MILDNESS.
The mildness of Sir Isaac Newton's temper through the ccurse
:>f his life commanded admiration from all who knew him ; bul
in no instance perhaps more than the following. Sir Isaac had a
favourite little dog, which he called Diamond ; and being one
day called out of his study into the next room, Diamond was left
behind. When Sir Isaac returned, having been absent but a
few minutes, he had the mortification to find that Diamond, hav-
ing thrown down a lighted candle among some papers, the nearly
finished labour of many years was in flames, and almost consumed
to ashes. This loss, as Sir Isaac Newton was then very far
advanced in years, was irretrievable ; yet, without once striking
the dog, he only rebuked him with this exclamation : " O, Dia-
mond ! Diamond ! thou little knowest the mischief thou hast
done."
Zeuxis (Zeusi) entered into a contest of art with Parrhasius
(Parrasio). The former painted grapes so truly, that birds came
and pecked at them. The latter delineated a curtain so exactly,
that Zeuxis coming in said : " Take away the curtain that we
may see this piece." And finding his error, said : " Parrhasius,
thou hast conquered : I only deceived birds, thou an artist."
Zeuxis painted a boy carrying grapes ; the birds came again
and pecked. Some applauding, Zeuxis flew to the picture in a
passion, saying : " My boy must be (bisogna dire die — e) very
ill painted."
The inhabitants of a great town offered to Marshal de Turenne
one hundred thousand crowns upon condition that he should take
another road, and not march his troops their way. He answered
them : " As youi town is not on the road I intend to march, J
cannot accept the money you offer me."
1 corporal of the life-guards of Frederick the Great, who haii
& g/eat deal of vanity, but at the same time u <is a brave fellovr
IIGHTY -FIFTH LESSOR. 478
«/ore a watch-chain, to which he affixed a musket- bullet instead of a
watch, which he was unable to buy. The king, being inclined
one day to rally him, said : " Apropos, corporal, you must Iravc
been very frugal to buy a watch : it is six o'clock by mine ; tell
me what it is by yours ?" The soldier, who guessed the king's
intention, instantly drew out the bullet from his fob, and said
'* My watch neither marks five nor six o'clock ; but it tella nv
every moment, that it is my duty to die for your majesty.'
" Here, my friend," said the king, quite affected, " take this
watch, that you may be able to tell the hour also." And he gave
him his watch, which was adorned with brilliants.
252.
My dear friend (carissima arnica), — As we have next Tuesday
several persons to dinner whose acquaintance, I am sure, you
would be delighted to make, I request you to add by your presence
to the pleasure, and by your brilliant and cultivated mind to the
mirth of our assembly. I hope you will accept my invitation,
and awaiting your answer I send you a thousand compliments.
Dearest friend (amatissima arnica), — I accept the more readily
your very kind invitation for Tuesday next, as my disappoint-
ment at seeing so little of you latterly has been very great. I
thank you for your kind remembrance, and send you a thousand
kisses.
EIGHTY-FIFTH LESSON
Lezione ottantesima quinta
TREATISE OF THE ITALIAN VERBS.
I. CONJUGATION OP THE AUXILIARY VERBS,
Essere, to be, and Avere, to have.
Present of the Infinitive (Infinito Presente).
dwre, to have j Essere, to be.
174
EIGHTY-FIFTH ^ESSON.
Past of the Infinitive (Infinite* Passato).
Avere avuto, to have had. | Essere stato, to have been
Present Participle (Participio Presente).
Agendo,1 having. | Essendo, being.
Past Participle (Participio Passato).
Masc. Avuto ; fern, avuta. Masc. Stato ; fern, stata.
Plur. Avuti; Jem. avute. Plur. Stati; fern, state.
INDICATIVE (Indicativo).
Present (Presente).
lo ho (o\ see Lesson VII., I have.
1 lo sono,
I am.
Note 1).
Tu hai (ai)
thou hast.
Tu sei (so'),
thou art
Egli (esso) >
$ he has.
Egli (esso) >£
Ella (essa) S
C he is.
( she is.
Ella (essa) $ na- W } she has.
Noi abbiamo,
we have
Noi siamo,
we are.
Voi avete,
you have.
Voi siete,
you are.
Eglino (essi) > hanno >
Elleno (esse)* (anno), J they have.
Eglino (essi) i
Elleno (esse* \ S°n°'
they are.'
Imperfect (Imperfetto).
Aveva (avea),
I had.
lo era,
I was.
Avevi,
thou hadst.
Tu eri,
thou wast
Aveva (avea),
he had.
Egli era,
he was.
Avevamo,
we had.
Noi eravamo,
we were.
Avevate,
you had.
Voi eravate,
you were.
Avevano 'aveano)
they had.
Essi erano,
they were
Preterite Definite (Passato Rimoto)
Ebbi,
I had.
Fui,
I was.
Avesti,
thou hadst.
Fosti,
thou wait.
Ebbe,
he had.
Fu (poet, fue),
he was.
Avemmo,
we had.
Fummo,
we were.
Aveste,
you had.
Foste,
you were.
Ebbero,
they had.
Furono (poet, furo),
they were.
Preterperfect (Passato Prossimo).
Ho ]
I have
Sono i . i
. /stato; \
. (fern, stata. ]
I have
Hai
thou hast
thou hast
Ha
Abbiamo
►a*uto,<
he has
we have
.had.
E V '<
Siamo. -\ . c
he has
we have
►been
Avete
you have
c.. . f stati ; \
Siete. \ ' J
you have
Hanno.
they have
_ Lfem. state, J
Sono y ' I
they have t
- There is another present participle, which is seldom used as such, vii
tcente, having (See Lesson LVIL).
2 The personal pronouns : io, I ; tu, thou ; egli, he ; ella, she, &c, are not in-
iispensable in the Italian conjugation. Vou may as well say : tone, sei, I ,
word, avrai, avra, as : io, sono, tu sei, egli i; io avrb, tu avrai, egli avra. But
when there is a particular stress to be put on the person, or when an ambigu-
ous meaning is to be avoided, the pronouns must be expressed. Ex. Noi§uwu
attrannati. e non rot. We are deceived, not vou.
EIGHTY-FIFTH LV.SSOiV.
475
areva
Averi
Aveva
Avevamo
Avevate
Avevano
fibbi
Avesti
£bbe
1 kad had, Ac
►avuto.
Pluperfect (Trapassato).
Era
Eri
Era
Eravamo
Eravate
Erano
I had been, Ac
£ stato j
^ fern, stata.
Sstati;
/«m. state.
Preterite Anterior (Passato Rimoto Composto).
I had had, Ac
>avuto
Avemmo j
Aveste
Ebbero J
Fui
Fosti
Fu
Fummo
Foste
Furono
1 bad bad, Ac
r stato ;
\ fern, state
Sstati ;
fern, state.
Future (Futuro Imperfetto).
Avrd,
Avrai,
Avrt
A vremo,
Avrete,
Avranno,
Avrd
Avrai
Avra,
Avremo
Avrete
Avranno
I shall have,
thou wilt have,
he will have,
we shall have.
you will have,
they will have.
Sard,
Sarai,
Sara,
Saremo,
Sarete,
Saranno,
Future Past (Futuro Perfetto).
^avuto,
I shall have had.
thou wilt have had,
Ac.
Sard
Sarai
Sara
Saremo
Sarete
Saranno
\ stato ;
if em.
J stata.
stati ;
fern.
state.
I shall be.
thou wilt bo
he will be.
we shall be.
you will be.
they will be
I shall have
been,
thou wilt have
been, Ac
Conditional Present (Condizionale Presente).
Avrei,
Avresti,
Avsbbe (poet
avria),
Avremmo,
Avreste,
Avrebbero
(poet, avriano).
Avrei
Avres
Avreboe
Avremmo
Avreste
Avrebbero
I should have,
thou would st have
he would have.
Sarei, I should be.
Saresti, thou wouldst I*
Sarebbe (poet. he would be.
saria, fora).
we should have. Saremmo, we should be.
you would have. Sareste, you would be.
they would have. Sarebbero, they would be.
(poet, sariano, sarieno. forano.)
Fcut Conditional (Condizionale Passato).
► avuto.
I should have
had
thou wouldst
have had,
Ac.
Sarei
Saresti
Sarebbe
Saremmo
Sareste
Sarebbero
I should have
been,
thou woulds'
nave been,
Ac.
*7C EIGHTY-FIFTH LiSSSON.
Present of the Subjunctive
(Congiuntivo Pvasente).
3he io abbia, that I may have.
Che io sia, that I may te.
" tu abbia (abbi), that thou may est
** tu sia (sii), that thou mayet
have.
" egli abbia, that he may have.
'* egli sia, that he may be.
,l noi abbiamo, that we may have.
" noi siamo, that we may be.
•« voi abbiate, that you may have.
" voi siate, that you may be
u essi abbiano, that they may have.
" essi siano, that they may bt
Imperfect of the Subjunctive (Imperfetto del Congiuntivo).
S' io avessi, If I had.
S' io fossi, If I were.
Se tu avessi, if thou hadst.
Se tu fossi, if thou wert.
S' egli avesse, if he had,
S' egli fosse, if he were,
Se noi avessimo, <&c.
Se noi fossimo, Ac
S« voi aveste,
Se voi foste.
S' essi avessero.
S' essi fossero.
*9
Perfect of the Subjunctive (Passato Prossimo del Congiuntivo).
That I may have had, &c.
On' io abbia
Che tu abbia (abbi)
Ch' egli abbia
Che noi abbiamo
Che voi abbiate
Ch' essi abbiano
►avuto.
That I may have been, Ac.
Ch' io sia ^
Che tu sia (sii)
Ch' egli sia
Che no* siamo
Che voi siate
Ch' essi siano
stato ; fern, stats
stati;/«m. state
Pluperfect of the Subjunctive (Trapassato del Congiuntivo).
If I had had, &c.
S' io avessi
Se tu avessi
S' egli avesse
Se noi avessimo
Se vol aveste
S' eglino avessero
"avuto.
If I had been, &c.
S' io fossi }
Se tu fossi
S' egli fosse
Se noi fossimo
Se voi foste
S' essi fossero
stato ; fern. ala.it
stati ; fern, state
IMPERATIVE (Imperativo).
(No first person singular.)
Abbi,
Abbia,
Abbiamo,
Abbiate,
Abbiano
Have (thou),
let him (her) have,
let us have,
have (ye),
let them have.
SU (sia)*,
Sia,
Siamo,
Siate,
Siano,
Be (thou),
let him (her) be
let us be.
be (ye),
let them be.
OBSERVATIONS.
A. There u, is in Italian rendered by esaere, preceded by ei or vi. Ex.
* The second person singular of the imperative is rendered by the infinitive
when it is negative Ex. Non titer e, be thou not; non avere, have thou ao
Lesson LXXI.).
EIGHTY-*!*' ltf LESSON.
477
tvorc o a great quantity.
There »*j people.
There w*3 once a wise Grecian.
There wt/e nations.
There hat been a singer.
There were princes.
(s there any physician here!
C I (J e) una gran quantiti.
Ci sono {pi sono) delle persone.
C era una volta un savio Greco
V erano de' popoli.
C 2 tia/a una cant ltrice.
Ci sono slati de' principi.
C S (»' £) or ecct (crui) qui un quai
che medico ?
B. Instead of essere, avert could in some cases be used, and may stand in the
singular, though the substanave be in the plural. Ex.
There are princes
There are many things.
There are many poor people.
V ha (instead of r' hanno) de prin-
cipi.
V ha molte cose.
V ha (or hacvi) mci a gente povera.
C. If of it or of them is understood, it is rendered by ne. Ex.
There is no more of it.
There are many of them.
There were only two (of them).
There are no physicians here.
I do not think thai there are any.
Non ce n' 1 piu.
Ce ne sono molti.
Non re n' erano che due.
Medici qui non ce ne sono.
Non credo che ve n' abhia.
D Sometimes 11 may be rendered by si dh or si danno. Ex.
There is nothing woise in the world. Non si dh al mondo cosa peggiore.
There are some whe pretend. Si danno di quelli che sostengono.
E. The adverbs ci> i/t, are left out when time is spoken of. Ex.
It is a month. It is iwo years.
A few months ago.
It is a long while since I saw her.
E un mese. Sono due anni.
Pochi mesi sono (or pochi mesi/a).
E un bel pezzo, che non 1' ho vs-
duta.
This happened two mcu ihs ago. Cid accadde due mesi/a.
F. Avere and essere are followed by the preposition da before the infinitive,
when they are employed .n the signification of must or shall. Ex.
You shall do it thus.
Avele da farlo cosi (instead 0/ doveU
J'arlo cosi).
Egli ha da sapere.
Abbiamo tutti da morire.
E da temersi. ,
Egli non I da scusare.
He shall know.
We must all die.
It is to be feared.
He is not to be excused.
G In other instances a precedes the infinitive. Ex.
I should like to ask a favour of you. Avrei a pregarla d' un favor*
She went to see her. ' Ella/w a ritrovarUu
II. CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERBS.
Present of the Infinitive (Infinitivo Presente).
°arlare, to speak. | Credere, to believe. | Nutrire, to nourish.
Past of the Infinitive (Infinitivo Passato).
Iver parlato, to have J Aver creduto, to have I Aver nutrito, to Oaf*
•poken. believed. nourished.
478
EIGHTY-FIFTH LESSON.
Present Participle (Participio Presente)
Parlando (parlante*) Credendo (credente)f I Nutrendo (nutrentt.
speaking. believing. nourishing.
Past Participle (Participio Passato).
Parlato, spoken. | Creduto, believed. | Nutrito, nourished
1 speak, 4c
fari-o.
— i.
— a.
— iamo.
— ate.
— ano.
I spoke, Ac.
Parl-ava.
— avi.
— ava.
- avamo.
— avate.
— avano.
INDICATIVE (Indicativo)
Present (Presente).
I believe, Ac.
Cred-o.
— i.
- e.
— iamo.
— ete.
— ono.
I nourish, Ac.
Nutr-o, {i*co).
— i. (****).
— e, (iscs)
— iamo.
— ite.
— ono, (iscono)
1 spoke, or did speak,
Ac.
Parl-ai.
Imperfect (Imperfetto).
I believed, Ac
Cred-eva (ea).
— evi.
— eva (ea).
— evamo.
— evate.
— evano (eano).
Preterite Definite (Passato Rimoto).
I nourished, Ac.
Nutr-iva (to).
— ivi.
— iva (ia).
— ivamo.
— ivate.
— ivano.
— aati.
-d.
— ammo
— aste.
— arono.
I have spoken, Ac.
Ho )
Hai I
Abbiamo j
Avete
Hanno j
I believed, or did
believe, Ac.
Cred-ei, (etti).
— esti.
— d, (ette).
— emmo.
— este.
— erono, (ettero).
Preterperfect (Passato Proseimo)
I nourished, or did
nourish, Ac.
Nutr-ii.
— isti.
-t
— immo.
— iste.
— iron©.
I have believed, Ac.
creduto,
I have nourished, At
nutrito.
* There is this difference between the two present participles, that the first in
mdot endo applies to a person while speaking, believing, Ac. ; and the second i»
wife, ente to a person who steaks, believes, Ac (See Lesson LVII.)
MGHTY-F1FTH LESSON.
479
Pluperfect (Tiapassato).
1 had spoken, Ac
I had believed, Ac.
1 had nourished, Ac.
Aveva
Avevi
Aveva
Avevamo
► pari a to,
creduto.
nutrita
Avevate
Avevano
Preterite Anterior (Passato Rimoto compoato).
I had spoken, Ac.
I had believed, Ac. i I had nourished, fte
Ebbi
A vest!
I
Sbbe
Avemmo
-par la to
creduto,
nutrtto
Aveste
(Cbbero
Future (Future- Imperfetto).
I shall speak, Ac.
I shall believe, Ac.
I shall or will nourish, Ac
1 arl-ero.
Cred-erd.
Nutr-ird.
— erai.
— erai.
— irai.
— eriL
— era.
— ire
— eremo.
— eremo.
— iremo.
— erete.
— erete.
— irete.
— eranno.
— eranno.
— iranno.
Pi
ithtre Peat (Futuro Perfetto).
I shall have spoken,
I shall have believed,
I shall have nourished
Ac.
Ac
Ac
AVTd
t
Avrai
Avra
Avremo
►parlato
creduto
nutrtto.
A .
ATranno
j
Gmdthot
utl Present (Condizionale Presente).
I should or wouli
I should or would
I should or wouJo
speak, Ac.
believe, Ac.
nourish, Ac
Parl-erei.
Cred-erei.
Nutr-irei.
— eresti.
— eresti.
— iresti.
— erebbe.
— erebbe.
— irebbe.
— eremmo
— eremmo.
— iremmo.
— ereste.
— ereste.
— ireste.
— erebbe
ro
— erebbero
— irebbero
180
EIGHTY-FIFTH LESSON.
Conditional Past (Condizionale Passato).
I should or would have
I should or would have
I should or would bin
spoken, &c.
believed, Ac.
nourished, Ac.
ivrei t
Avresti
Avrebb
Avremrao
► parlato,
creduto,
nutrito
Avreste
Avrebbero
Present of the Subjunctive (Congiuntivo Presente).
That I may speak, Ac. That I may believe, Ac. j That I may nourish,
Ch' io parl-i.
cred-a.
nutr-a (i$ca).
— i.
— a.
— a (i*co)-
— L
— a.
— a (i»co)
— iamo.
— iamo.
— iamo.
— late.
— iate.
— iate.
— ino.
— ano.
— ano (ucano)
Imperfect of the
Subjunctive (Imperfetto del Congiuntivo).
If I spoke, Ac.
If I believed, Ac
If I nourished, Ac.
S' io pari-assi.
cred-essi.
nutr-issi.
— assi.
— essi.
— issi.
— asse.
— esse.
— isse.
— assimo.
— essimo.
— issimo.
— aste.
— este.
— iste.
— assero.
— essero.
— issero.
Preterperfcct of the S
ubjunctive (Passato Prossi
mo del Congiuntivo).
That I may have
That I may have
That 1 may have
spoken, Ac.
believed, Ac.
nourished, Ac
CW io abbia
,
Che tu abbia
Ch' egli abbia
Che noi abbiamo
par-
lato.
creduto,
nutrito.
Che voi abbiate
Ch' essi abbiano.
Pluperfect of the
Subjunctive (Trapassato d
el Congiuntivo;.
If 1 Had spoken, Ac.
If I had believed, Ac
If I had nourished, 4
8' io avessi
Se tu avessi
S' egli avesse
parla-
creduto
nutrito.
Se nol avessimo
to,
Se voi aveste
6' essi av«tsscro
EIGHTY-FIFTH LESSON.
481
IMPERATIVE (Imperativo).
Speak (thou),
see
Dote 3,
Believe (thou),
Nourish (thou),
p. 476, Ac
Ac.
Ac.
Parl-a.
Cred-i.
Nutr-i.
frci.)
- L
— a.
— a.
(isca.)
— iamo.
— iamo.
— iamo.
— ate.
— ete.
— ite.
— too.
— ano.
— ano
(tNtM,
III. CONJUGATION OF THE PASSIVE VOICE.
06*. To form the passive voice the Italians use to place before the past par
ticlple of the active verb the auxiliary essere, but often also, and more elegantly
one of the verbs, venire, to come ; andare, to go ; restore, to rest ; rimanare, to
remain ; stare, to stop, stay, to express with more emphasis a continuance oi
action0 (See Lesson XLII. and XLIX.)
Present of the Infinitive (Infinite Presente).
Essere amato or amata, to be loved.
Past of the Infinitive (Infinito Passato).
Essere stato amato or stata amata, to have been loved.
Present Participle (Participio Presente).
Easendo amato, amata, amati, amate, being loved.
Past Participle (Participio Passato).
Stato amato, stata amata, stati amati, state amate, been loved.
INDICATIVE (Indicativo).
Present (Presente).
lo sono
or
vengo
amato,
fern, a,
T am loved.
Tusei
ii
vieni
amato,
" a,
thou art loved.
Eglie-
(<
viene
amato,
he is loved.
Ellae"
(i
viene
amata,
she is loved.
Noi siamo
(C
veniamo
amati,
" e,
we are loved.
Vol siete
il
venite
amati,
" e,
you are loved
Essi sono
M
vengono
amati,
I
they are loved.
Esse sono
Ii
vengono
amate,
9 bxamplks :
Vim lodato da tzdti,
Venne accusats,
Vt. » anno biasimate,
Questa voce va posta prima,
Ne restai (or rimasi) maravigliato (in-
stead of nefui maravigliato),
Essa non ne restb (fu) persuasa,
> cavalli sUm.no \xmo) attacati alia car-
roxxay
He is praised by every body
She was accused.
They will be blamed.
This word must be placed at the head
I was quite surprised at it.
She was not convinced oi it.
The horses are put to the carriage
482
EIGHTY-FIFTH LESSON.
Imperfect (Imperfetto).
Io era or veniva
amato, /
57JT
a,
I was loved.
Tueri •
4 renivi
amato,
((
a,
thou wert loved.
Egli era '
' veniva
amato,
he was loved.
Ella era •
1 veniva
■mate,
she was loved.
Noi eravamo '
' venivamo
amati,
M
e,
we were "]
Voi eravate ■
1 venivate
amati,
((
e,
you were I \oyy&
Essi erano '
' venivano
amati, )
amate >
they were j
Esse erano '
' venivano
Preterite
definite (Passato Rimoto).
lofui
or venni
amato,
fem.
a, I was *
Tufosti
" venisti
amato,
ct
a, thou wert
Eglifu
" venne
amato,
he was
EUa fu
" venne
am at a,
she was
► 1
Noi fummo
" venimmo amati,
u
e, we were
Voi teste
41 veniste
amati,
u
e, you were
Essi furono
Esse furono
" vennero
M vennero
amati,
amate,
\
•
. . they were
Preterperfect (Passato Prosaimo).
Io aono state amato } j haw heeQ loved> ^
Io aono stata amata >
Noi siamo stati amati ) we haye ^ 1<m^ ^
Noi siamo state amate >
Pluperfect (Trapassato).
Io era stato amato, Ac. I had been loved, Ac
Ob*. The Preterite Anterior of the passive voice : io fid stato with a pad
participle, is not used in Italian
Future (Future).
T» sard r verrd amate or a, Ac. I shall be loved, A*
Future Pad (Futuro Perfetto).
Io sard stato amato, Ac I shall have been loved, <fcc
Conditional present (Condizionale presente).
Io sarei or verrei amato or amata, I should be •»
Tu saresti " verresti amato " amata, thou wouldst be
Egli sarebbe " verrebbe amato, he would be
EUa sarebbe verrebbe amata, &c. she should be i
Conditional Past (Condizionale Passato).
Io sarei stato amato, Ac. I should have been loved.
»k>red, £i
KIGHTY -FIFTH LESSON.
483
Preterit of the Subjunctive (Congiuntivo Presente).
She io sia or venga amato or amata, that I may be
— tu sia " venga amato " amata,
— egli sia " venga amato "
— ella sia " venga amata "
— noi siamo " veniamo amati " amate,
— voi siate " veniate amati " amate,
— essi siano " vengano amati
— esse siano " vengano amate
that thou mayst be
that he may be
that she may be
that we may be
that you may be
that they may be
Moved
Imperfect of the Subjunctive (Imperfetto del Congiuntivo).
Se io fossi
— tu fossi
— egli fosse
— ella fosse
— noi fossimo
— voi foste
— essi fossero
— esse fossero
or
venissi
venissi
venisse
venisse
amato
amato
amato,
amata,
or
amata,
amata,
► If I were loved, Ac
/rhat I may have been roved
Ac.
venissimo amati " amate,
veniste amati u amate,
venissero amati,
venissero amate,
Perfect of the Subjunctive (Passato Prossimo del Congiuntivo).
Ch' io sia stato amato,
Ch' io sia stata amata, Ac.
Che noi siamo stati amati,
Che noi siamo state amate, Ac.
Pluperfect of the Subjunctive (Trapassato del Congiuntivo).
Se io fossi stato amato, Ac If I had been loved, Ac.
iV. MODEL OF THE CONJUGATION OF A REFLECTIVE
VERB GOVERNING THE ACCUSATIVE (See Lessons XLIII.
and XLIV.).
Infinitive Present (Infinito Presents).
Difendersi, to defend one's self.
Infinitive Past (Infinito Passato).
Essersi difeso, to have defended one's self.
Present Participle (Participio Presente).
Difendentesi 6, defending one's self.
* The participle, joined to the different pronouns, would be thus :
Present. Perfect
Present
Difendendomi, defending myself
Difendendoti,
Difendendoai,
Duendendoci,
Difendendovi.
Diiendendosi,
thyself.
himself or
herself.
ourselves.
yourselves.
themselves.
Perfect
Essendomi '
o-
Essendoti
EssendoBi
Essendoci
Essendovi 1 k;
Essendosi
having defended
myself,
having defended
thyself,
having defended
. himself or herself
having defended
ourselves,
having defended
yourselves,
having defended
themselves
484
EIGHTY-FIFTH LESSON.
Mi difendera
Ti difendevi.
Si difendeva.
Mi difesi.
Ti difendesti
Sidifese.
Participle Pott (Participio Passato).
Difesosi. "*
Difesasi, Ldefended one»8 ^
Difesisi,
Difesesi, J
INDICATIVE (Indicativo).
Present (Presente).
Io mi difendo,
Tu ti difendi,
^gIi I si difende,
Ella ) '
Noi ci difendiamo,
Voi vi difendete,
Essi
Esse
> si difendono,
I defend myself.
thou defendest thysec
i he defends himself
1 she defends herseli
we defend ourselves.
you defend yourselves.
they defend themselves
Imperfect (Imperfetto).
I defended myself, &c.
j Ci difendevamo.
Vi difendevate.
Si difendevano.
Preterite Definite (Passato Rimoto).
I defended myself, &c.
Ci difendemmo.
Vi difendeste.
Si difesero.
Hi sono i
Ti sei > difeso ; fern, difesa7
Sic S
Preterperfect (Passato Prossimo).
I have defended myself, Ac.
Ci siamo i
Vi siete > difesi ; fern, difese.
Si sono j
Hi era i
Ti era ' difeso j fern, difesa
Pluperfect (Trapassato).
I had defended myself, &c.
Ci eravamo
Si era )
Vi eravate
Si erano
> difesi ; /cm. difeoe
Hifui *
Ti fosti > difeso ; fern, difesa.
Sifu S
Preterite Anterior (Passato Rimoto composto).
I had defended myself, &c.
Ci fummo »
Vi foste
Si furono
difesi if em difese.
* The reflective verbs in Italian being considered as passive, take in theii
compound tenses the auxiliary e*serer which agrees in gender and number wit>
die person
BIGHTY-FIFTH LESSON.
485
Hi difenderd.
ri difenderai
5i difendera
Mi sard
Future Present (Futuro Imperfetto).
I shall defend myself, Ac.
Ci difenderemo
Vi difenderete.
Si difenderanoo
Future Past (Futuro Perfetto).
ft sarai > difeso , fern, difesa.
Si sara »
I shall have defended myself, <ftc.
Ci saremo )
Vi sarete > difesi ; fern, difese
Si saranno j
Mi difenderei.
Ti difenderesti.
Si difenderebbe.
Mi sarei
Ti saresti > difeso ; fern, difesa.
Sisarebbe )
Conditional Present (Condizionale Presented
I should defend myself, &c.
Ci difenderemmo.
Vi difendereste.
Si difenderebbero.
Conditional Past (Condizionale Passato).
I should have defended myself, <fcc.
Ci saremmo \
Vi sareste
Si sarebbero '
Present of the subjunctive (Congiuntivo Presente).
That I may defend myself, &c.
Che io mi difenda. Che noi ci difendiamo
difesi ; fern, difesa
— tu ti difenda.
~~ e£U I si difenda.
— ella 3
— voi vi difendiate.
~ essi I si difendano.
— esse >
Imperfect of the Subjunctive (Imperfetto del Congiuntivo),
If I defended myself, &c.
Se mi difendessi. i Se ci difendessimo.
— ti difendessi. — vi difendeste.
— si difendesse. ' — si difendessero.
Preterperfect of the Subjunctive (Passato Prossimo del Congiuntivo)
That may have defended myself, &c.
Che mi s*3 , Che ci siamo
— ti sia > difeso ; fern, difesa. — vi siate
— si sia y — si siano
> difesi ; fern, difeae.
Pluperfect of the Subjunctive (Trapassato del Congiuntivo).
If I had defended myself, &c.
Se mi fossi \
— ti fossi > difeso ; fern, difesa.
~ si fosse j
Se ci fossimo
— vi foste
— si fos8ero
V
difesi ■, fern, difem
IMPERATIVE (Imperativo).
Difenditi, Defend thyself.
Non ti difenderej do not defend thyself.
Si difenda egli, let him defend himself.
486
EIGHTY-FIFTH LESSON.
Difendiamoci,
Difendetevi,
Si difendano esai,
let us defend ourselves.
defend yourselves.
let them defend themselves.
MODEL OP THE CONJUGATION OF A REFLECTIVE VEUt
GOVERNING THE DATIVE (See Lesson LIV.y.
Infinitive Present (Infinito Presente).
Procurarse/o, to get, procure it.
Infinitive Past (Infinito Passato). .
Essersfi/o procurato, to have got it
Present Participle (Participio Presente).
Procurandoseto, getting it.
Participle Past (Participio Passato)
Procuratoseto, got it.
INDICATIVE (Indicativo).
Present (Presente).
I get it, &c.
Noi celo procuriamo.
Voi ve lo procurate.
Io me lo procuro.
Tu telo procuri.
so to procure.
JToai )
Esse N ** k ProcuraI10
I got it, 4c.
I got it, Ac.
Io me lo sono
TuUloaei
l»fc« j
procurato
Imperfect (Imperfetto).
| Io me lo procurava, Ac
Preterite Definite (Passato Rimoto).
| lo me lo procurai, Ac.
Preterperfect (Passato Prossimo).
I have got it, Ac.
Noi ce lo siamo
Voi ve lo siete
g*j«l»«W
►procurai:
Pluperfect (Trapassato).
I had procured it, Ac. | Me lo era procurato, Ac.
Preterite Anterior (Passato Rimoto composto).
I had procured it, Ac. | Me lo fui procurato, Ac
Future Present (Futuro Imperfetto).
I ■hall procure it, Ac. | Me lo procurer^, Ac
Future Past (Future Perfetto).
1 shall have procured it, Ac. I Me lo sard procurato, Ac.
IIGHTY-FIFTH LESSON. 487
Conditional Present (Condizionale Presents),
l should procure it, Ac. | Io me lo procurers!, Ac
Conditional Past (Condizionale Passato).
. should have procured it, Ac | Me lo sarei procurato, Ac
Present of the Subjunctive (Congiuntivo Presente).
That I may procure it, Ac.
Che io me lo procuri.
— tu te lo procuri.
Che noi ce lo procuriamo.
— voi ve lo procuriate.
- efS \" to ProcurL - ell I " fa ProcnrtM.
Imperfect of the Subjunctive (Imperfetto del Congiuntivo).
If I procured it, Ac. \ S' io me lo procurassi, Ac.
•
Preterperfect of the Subjunctive (Passato Prossimo del Congiuntivo)
That I may have procured it, Ac.
The io me lo sia
-tutetosia J. procurato.
Che noi ce lo siamo
— voi ve lo siate
— essi ) , .
- esse$w/o8iano j
► procurato
Pluperfect of the Subjunctive (Trapassato del Congiuntivo).
If I had procured it, Ac | S' io me fo fossi procurato, Ac
IMPERATIVE (Imperativo).
Procuraiefo, Procure (thou) it.
Non telo procurare do (thou) not procure it.
Se lo procuri egli, let him procure it.
ProcuriamoceZo, let us procure it
Procuratevefo, procure (ye) it.
Se lo procurino essi, let them procure it
OBSERVATIONS ON THE CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR
VERBS. •**
A . The final e of the infinitives in are, ere, and ire, may be dropt before a
rowel as well as before a consonant (except before * followed by a consonant)
vuaout an apostrophe being put in its stead. Ex.
Egli vuol far questo.
Voglio legger questo libro.
Non d&rmir punto.
He wishes to do this.
I wish to read this book.
Not to sleep at all.
B. The dropping of the final vowel may also take place before a cc nsonant
jq those persons of the verbs which end in 7710, and have the accent on the la*
syllab e but one. Ex,
188
EIGHTY-FIFTH LESbON
Siam liberi {instead of siamo).
Eravam contenti (instead of eravamo).
Sarem lodati (instead of saremo).
Amiam sinceramente (instead of aniia-
■ mo).
But when the accent rests on me last syllable but two the last i owei cann*
oe dropped. We could not say :
Fo8sim,for fussimo colpevoli.
Avessim,for avessimo veduto.
Amas8i7n} fv amassimo tutti.
We are free.
We were satisfied.
We shall be praised.
We love sincerely.
Were we guilty.
Had we seen.
Did we love all.
C. The abbreviation may further take place in all the third persona plural
that have no or ro for their ending, as :
Aman, they love ; senton, they feel ; instead of amano, sentono.
Amavan, they loved ; aniaron, they loved ; instead of amavano, amarono.
Amasser, did they love; potrebbe, they could; avrebber, they would have;
instead of amassero, protrebbero, avrebbero.
D. The third person plural of the perfetto rimoto is often abridged in mare
than one manner, as :
Instead of andarono, they went; you will find: andaron, andaro, andar.
" " furono, they were ; ,l " furon, furo, fur.
E. The *hird person singular of the present tense of verbs in ere often lo&et
the final e when it is preceded by /, r, or n, as :
Si suol dire, they use to say,
Si duol di questo, they are sorry for it,
Cid vol molto, this is worth much,
Vxtol fare, he will do,
Also,
Par, 3rd pers. sing, of parere, to appear,
Pon, " " porre (ponere), to put,
TTcn, " M tenere, to hold,
Vieiu, M " venire, to come,
Riman, " " rimanere, to remain,
Son, 1st pers. sing, and 3rd pers. plur. of estere to be,
< i. on the vebbb in are.
1. Verbs whose infinitives end in care or gare insert an h as often as g or «
meets with e or t. Ex.
Present. — Cereo, I seek; cerchi (not cerci), thou seekest ; ccrchiamo, we
seek, Ac.
Future. — Cercnerd, I shall seek ; cercherai, thou wilt seek ; cerchera, he will
seek ; cercheremo, we shall seek, Ac.
Present Subj. — Ch' io cerchi, that 1 may seek, Ac. ; cerchiamo, that we may
seek ; cerchiate, that you may seek ; cerchino, that they may seek.
2. When the infinitive ends in dare, giare, gliare, and xriare, the letter <
must oe left out as often as it meets with t or e. Ex
instead of mole.
(( (<
duole.
i« it
tale.
ii it
vuole.
Instead of jx
(i
'' fhltl*
u
" liene.
(i
" tien\
it
" rimcne
re to be,
$ono.
EIGHTY- FIFTH LESSON.
489
To threaten, to eat, to advise, to leave.
Thon threatenest, eatest, advisest,
leavest.
I shall threaten, eat, advise, leave.
1 should threaten, eat, advise, leave.
Minacciare, mangiare, conxigliare, lot-
dare.
7\i minacci, mangi, consigli, load.
Jo minaccerb, mangerb, conriglierd9
lascerb.
lo minaccerei, mangerei, coruigliereiy
lascerei.
3. But in verbs whose first person singular of the present tense indicative
oas the accent upon the letter i, the second person singular must be writte»
with ii. Ex.
I send, I spy.
Thou sendest, thou splest
Invio, spio.
Tu invii, tu spii.
II. ON THE VERBS IN ere.
1. The greatest irregularity in the verbs in ere takes place in the perfetto ri-
moto, and the past participle. Very few verbs in ere have in this tense the re-
gular ending in ei, and even those that have it, may take also the irregular ending
in etti, as may be seen above in the conjugation of credere, which has credei
and credetti*.
2. To know, therefore, the perfetto rimoto of those verbs which have not
ihe regular ending ei, it is only necessary to know the first person singular.
That once known, the third person singular is formed from it by changing i
into e ; and from this again the third person plural is formed by joining to it ro.
The remaining three persons are always formed regularly. Ex*
7)7 pUaie. Preterite definite : I pleas-
ed.
He pleased, they pleased.
Thou pleasedst, we pleased
You pleased.
To write. Pret def. I wrot3.
He wrote, they wrote.
Tnou wrotest, we wrote.
You wrote.
Piaeere. Perf. rimoto : piacqut,
3rd pers. sing, piacque : 3rd. pers. plu»
piacquero.
2nd pers. sing, piacesti; 1st pers. plur.
piacemmo.
2nd pers. plur. piaceste.
Scrivere. Perf. Rimoto : scrissi.
3rd pers. sing, scrisse; 3rd pers. pirn,
scrissero.
2nd pers. sing, scrivesti , 1st pers. plur
scrivemmo.
2nd pers. plur. scriveste
3. a) Of the verbs in ere the following have the double form in the perfetto r\
nolo, i. e. the regular in ei, and the irregular in etti.
■ Here the pronunciation renders the letter i again necessary.
In Tuscany the ending in etti seems to be preferred.
490
EIGHTY-FIFTH LESSON.
InJirMtvo.
Perfetto Rir.voto.
X&tfarm.
assistei,
2ndform.
assistetti,
Participio Parnate
assistito
Assistere, to assist,
Desistere, to desist.
Esistere, to exist,
fnsistere, to insist.
Resistere, to resist.
Sussistere, to subsist
Battere, to beat,
Combattere, to fight.
Compiere, to accomplish, compiei,
Empiere, to fill.
Credere, to believe,
Esigere, to exact,
Fendere, to split,
Fremere, to roar,
to shudder,
Gemere, to groan,
Mietere, to mow,
Pendere, to hang,
Perdere, to lose,
Premere, to press,
Ricevere, to receive,
Serpere, to creep,
Solvere, to dissolve,
Splendere, to shine,
Stridere, to creak,
Vendere, to sell,
The following with the accent on the last syllable but one have also tbt* t*i
fctto rimoto in ei and ctti:
cadei, cadetti, caduto.
dovei, dovetti, dovuto.
godei, godetti, goduto
potei, potetti, potuto.
scdei, sedetti, seduto.
temei, temetti, temuto.
Ob$. Some have, besides the two mentioned forms in ei and ctti, a third forrr
In #t. Of these three forms sometimes the one, sometimes the other, is em-
ployed. They are the following :
battel,
battetti10,
battuto.
compiei,
compietti,
corapiuto
credei,
credetti,
creduto.
esigei,
esigetti,
esatto.
fendei,
fendetti,
fenduto (fesso ■
fremei,
fremetti,
fremuto.
•
gemei,
gemetti,
gemuto.
mietei,
mietetti,
mietuto.
pendei,
pendetti,
penduto.
perdel,
perdetti,
perduto.
premei,
premetti,
premuto.
ricevei,
ricevetti,
ricevuto.
serpei,
serpetti,
serputo.
solvei,
solvetjti,
soluto.
splendei,
splendetti,
splenduto.
stridei,
stridetti,
striduto.
vendei,
vendetti,
venduto.
Cadere, to fall,
Dovere, to owe,
Godere, to enjoy,
"Potere, to be able (can),
Sedere, to sit,
Temere, to fear,
Assolvere, to absolve, assolvei,
Risolvere, to resolve.
Ohiudere, to shut,
chiudei
assolvetti and
assolei,
chiudetti and
chiusi,
( assoluto,
( assolto.
chiuso.
10 The ending in ctti is generally, for the sake of euphony, avoided in verba
laving in their radicals one or two t's. N. B. The greatest part in ctti are now
quite obsolete.
SIGHT Y-FIFTH LESSOIt.
49]
JtyffUMW*
Perfdto Rimoto.
1 *.
Part. Pan.
Istform.
2ndfarm.
Cedere, to yield,
cedei,
cedetti and
< ceduto,
I cesso.
cessi,
Concedere, to grant
Lucere, to shine,
lucei,
lucetti and lussi,
luciuto.
Perdere, to lose,
perdei,
perdetti and
( perduto,
f perso.
persi,
Persuadere, to persuad
e, persuadei,
tersuadetti and
persuasi,
persuaao.
Dissuadere, to dissuade, iissuadei, &c.
Presumere, to presume, presume!,
presumetti and
presunto.
presunsi,
Rendere, to render,
rendei,
rendetti and
( renduto,
( reso.
resi, #
Spendere, to spend,
spendei,
spendetti and
spesi,
speso.
«evere I to drink,
Bere > '
bevei,
{ bevetti and
(. bewi,
1 bevuto.
b) The following five, and their compounds, have the perfeito Hmoto in cqtu
Piacere, to please,
piacqui,
piaciuto.
Giacere, to lie, to be situate, giacqui,
giaciuto
Tacere, to be silent,
tacqui,
taciuto.
Nuocere, to hurt,
nocqui,
nociuto
Nascere, to be born,
nacqui,
nato.
c) The following three in bbi :—
Avere, to have,
ebbi,
avuto.
Conoscere, to know,
conobbi,
conosciutc
Crescere, to grow,
crebbi,
cresciuto.
d) The following two in ddi : —
Cadere, to fall,
caddi,
caduto.
Vedere to see,
i vidi,
( veddi, (antiqi
veduto,
utted)
visto.
e) The following two in ppi : —
Rompere, to break,
ruppi,
rotto.
Sapere, to know,
seppi,
saputo.
f) The following two in vi :—
Bere or bevere, to drink, bewi,
bevuto.
Parere, to appear,
parti,
< paruto,
c parso.
g) The following two in li and ni:—
Volere, to be willing,
volli,
voluto.
to wish,
Tenere, to hold, tenai,
492
EIGHTY-FIFTH LESSON.
h) All the other verbs in ere have tne perfetto rimoto in si or sri, and the pas
participle in so, to, or sto. The following is an alphabetical list of them.
Obs. Derivative and compound verbs follow the same conjugation as then
simple. It is further to be observed that the monosyllabical particles a, o, da.
fra, ra, so, su, double the following consonant, when it is not s impura (i. e. t
followed by a consonant), as : accorrere, to run up ; opporre, to oppose ; dabbene
honest ; frammettere, to put between ; raggiungere, to rejoin ; socchiudere, tc
shut up ; suddividere, to subdivide, <fec.
Prima persona
Infinitivo. delT Indicativo Perfetto
Presente. rimoto.
Accendere, to light, accendo, accesi,
Riaccendere, to re-kindle (See above Obs.).
Accorgersi, to perceive, accorgo, acoorsi,
Scorgere, to notice (See the above Obs.).
Affliggere,1 to afflict, affliggo, afflissi,
Appendere, to hang up, appendo, appesi,
Sospendere, to delay (See the above Obs.).
Ardere, to burn, ardo, arsi,
Ascondere, to conceal, ascondo, ascosi,
Nascondere, to hide (See the above Obs.).
Assolvere, to absolve, assolvo, assolsi,
Risolvere, to resolve (See the above Obs.).
Assorbere, to absorb, assorbo, assorsi,
issumere, to assume, assumo, assunsi,
Presumere, to presume (See the above Obs.).
Riassumere, to re-assume (See the same).
Chiedere, to ask, chiedo, chiesi,
Richiedere, to demand (See the above Obs.).
Chiudere, to shut, chiudo, chiusi,
Conchiudere (or Concludere), to infer, "*
Escludere, to exclude,
Inchiudere (or Includerej, to inclose,
Racchiudere, >toencI
Richiudere, >t0 includ
Rmchiudere, J
Schiudere, to open, to exclude,
Socchiudere, to shut up,
Cingere or > tQ ^ < cingo,
Cignere, ) ( cigno,
Participio
passato.
acceso.
accorto.
afflitto.
appeso.
arso.
c ascoso,
( ascosto
assolto.
assorto
assunto
c hies to.
chinao.
(See the above Obs.)
cinsi.
cinto.
1 Verbs having a vowel before gert, double the letter g, as : leggere, to read
Uggo, I read ; leggi, thou readest ; legge, he reads ; leggiamo, we read ; leggete,
vou read leggono, they read, &c. There is further to be remarked that verbs
ending il ggere,vere, and arre, as: affliggere, to afflict; scrivere, to write <
trarre, to draw, double in the perfetto rimoto the latter *, and have in the pas<
oarticiple tt, e. g. afflissi, scrissi, trassi ; afflitto, scntto. ttatto
EIGHTY-FIFTH LESSON.
4»J
Infiniiivo
Prima "persona
dtlF Indicativo
presente.
Accingersi or accignersi, to prepare
one's self (See the above Obs.).
ogliere,*orj j coglio,
Corre, > < colgo,
Accogliere or accorre, to receive,
Kaccogliere or raccorre, to collect, to pick up,
Perfetto
rimoto.
ParticipU
passato.
colsi,
t (See the atove
colto.
Obs.).
1
connetto,
corro,
(See the above Obs.).
cuoco,
deludo,
•onnettere, to connect,
Jurrere, to run,
Accorrere, to run up,
Concorrere, to concur,
Discorrere, to discourse,
Incorrere, to incur,
Percorrere, to run over,
Ricorrere, to have recourse,
Cuocere, to boil, to cook,
Deludere, to delude,
Alludere, to allude,
Illudere, to delude,
Difendere, to defend,
OfTendere, to offend (See the above Obs.).
Discutere, to examine, discuto,
Distinguere, to distinguish, distingo,
F.stinguere, to extinguish (See the above Obs.).
Dividere, to divide, divido,
Suddividere, to subdivide (See the above Obs.).
Dolere.toache, \ Jg*
Erigere, to erect, erigo,
Espellere, to expel, espello,
Impellere, to impel (See the above Obs.).
connessi,
corsi,
cossi,
delusi,
t (See the above Obs.)
difesi,
difendo.
Rsprimere, to express,
Opprimere, to oppress,
Comprimere, to compress,
Deprimere, to depress,
Imprimere, to impress,
Sopprimere, to suppress,
flggere, to fix.
Affiggere, to post up,
Crocifiggere (or crucifig-
gere), to cruciiy,
Prefiggere, to prefix,
Sconfiggere, to conquer,
Trafiggere, to pierce,
espnmo,
1
discuss!
distinsi,
divisi,
dolsi,
eressi,
espulsi,
espressi,
(See the above Obs.)
figgo,
► (See Obs. above )
fissi.
connesso
corso.
cotto.
deluso.
difeso.
discusso
distinto.
diviso.
doluto.
eretto.
espulso.
espresso
fisso,
fitto.
* Verbs in gliert change this ending in the perfetto rimoto into **t, and in th«
oasi participle into Uo, e. g. sciogliere, to untie — sciolsi, scvolto; iogliere, to lay
hold of — tolti. tolto, <fce.
494
Infinitivo.
> to arrive,
^ > to happen,
Fingere, to feign,
Fondere, to melt,
Confondere, to confound,
Diffondere, to pour out,
Infondere; to infuse,
Rifonderj, to restore
Trasfondere, to pour from one
vessel to another,
Frangere, to break,
Infrangere, to break to pieces,
Rifrangere, to reflect,
Friggere, to fry,
Giungere, or
Giugnere,
Aggiungere, to add,
Congiungere, to join,
Disgiungere, to disjoin,
Raggiungere, to rejoin,
Soggiungere, to add, reply,
Sopraggiungere,
Sovraggiungere,
lncidere, to make an incision,
Circoncidere, to circumcise,
Decidere, to decide,
Recidere, to cut,
Intridere, to knead,
Leggere, to read,
Eleggere, to elect,
Rileggere, to read over again,
Mergere, to plunge,
Immergere, to immerge,
Sommergere, to submerge,
Ifettere, to put,
Ammettere, to admit,
Commettere, to commit,
Compromettere, to compromise,
Dimettere, to discontinue,
Dismettere, to dismiss,
Frammettere, )
Inframmettere, S
Intromettere, to let in,
Ommettere, to omit,
Permettere, to permit,
Premettere, to put before,
Promettere, to promise,
Rimettere, to remit,
Scoraroetteie, to 'ay a wager,
EIGHTY-FIFTH LESSON.
Prima persona
deW lndvxitivo
presente.
fingo,
fondo,
Perfetto
rimoto.
finsi,
fusi,
Partictpk
passato.
finto.
fUBO.
►(See Obs. above.)
frango, fransi,
(See Obs. above.)
friggo, frissi,
giungo, giunsi,
n (See Obs. above.)
incido, incisi,
> (See Obs. above.)
intrido, intrisi,
leggo, lessi,
> (See Obs. above.)
mergo, mersi.
{ (See the above Obs.)
metto, mifli,
franto.
fritto.
giunt*
inclso.
intriso
letto.
merso
meeno
S (See Obs. above.)
KIOHTY-FIFTH LESSON.
4D8
Infbiit&o.
Mettero, to put,
Smettere, to dismiss,
Sommettere, )
Sottomettere, S
Trasmettere. to transmit,
Mordere, to bite,
Mungere and )
Mugnere. 5 t0 milk>
Muovere, to move,
Commuovere, to disturb,
Dismuovere, to stir up,
Promuovere, to promote,
Rimuovere, to remove,
Smuovere, to pervert,
Prima persona
delP Indicativo
presentc.
metto,
*>erfttto
rimoto.
misi,
► (See Obs. above.)
mordo,
mungo,
mugno,
muovo,
K mungOj )
( mugno, 5
* (See Obs. above.)
Deridere, to deride (See Obs. above).
Rimanere, to remain, rimango,
Rispondere, to answer. rispondo,
Corrispondere, to agree with (See Obs. above)
Participu
passato.
messo.
morsi,
mono.
munsi,
munto.
mossi,
mosso.
Negligere, to neglect,
mjgligo,
neglessi,
negletto.
Opprimere, to oppress,
opprimo,
oppressi,
oppresso
Percuotere, to strike,
percuoto,
percossi,
percosso
Scuotere, to shake, ? (See 0bfi
Riscuotere, to exact, )
. above).
■
Piangere, to weep,
piango,
piansi,
pianto.
Pingere and Pignere, to paint,
pingo,
pinsi,
pinto.
Dipingere, to depict (See Obs. above).
Porgere, to reach,
porgo,
porsi,
porto.
Prendere, to take,
prendo,
presi,
preso.
Apprendere, to learn, to hear, '
Comprendere, to comprehend,
Intraprendere, to undertake,
► (See Obs. above.)
Riprendere, to retake,
Sorprendere, to surprise,
Proteggere, to protect,
proteggo,
protessij
protetto
Pungere, to sting,
pungo,
punsi,
punto.
Radere, to shear,
rado,
rasi,
raso.
Redimer?. to redeem,
redimo,
redensi,
redento
Reggere, to reign, to govern,
reggo,
ressi,
retto
Correggere, to correct, "1
Ricorreggere, to correct again, |
► (See Obs. above.)
Dirigere, to direct,
Erigere, to erect, J
Ridere, to laugh,
rido,
risi,
riso
Rodere, to gnaw,
Corrodere, to fret (See Obs. above).
rodo,
rimasi,
risposi,
rosi
nmasto
rimaso.
risposto
roso
496
A1GHTY-FIFTH LESSON.
Prima persona
delT Indicative)
presente.
{ Bcelgo,
Scerre, > c sceglio,
Prescegliere, to select (See Obs. above).
InfinUtco.
Bcegliereor ?tochoo8ej
Scerre. >
Scendere, to descend,
Ascendere, jo ascend,
Condiscendere, to condescend,
Discendere, to descend,
Trascendere, to exceed.
Sciogliere,or;tounti
Sciorre, )
scendo,
Ptrfetto
rimoto.
Participit
paaaato.
scelsi,
scelto-
scesi,
sceso
(See the above Obs.)
sciolgo,
sciogli
o, )
sciolsi,
Disciogliere or disciorre, to dissolve (See Obs. above).
to rise,
Scrivere, to write, scrivo,
Ascrivere, to ascribe,
Descrivere, to describe,
Inscrivere, to inscribe,
Prescrivere, to prescribe,
Rescrivere, to transcribe,
Soprascrivere, to superscribe,
Sottoscrivere, to subscribe,
Trascrivere, to copy,
Sorgere or
Surgere,
Ri sorgere, to resist,
Insorgere, to rise against,
Spargere, to spread,
Spendere, to spend,
Spergere, to waste,
Aspergere, to sprinkle,
Cospergere, to besprinkle,
Dispergere, to disperse,
Sringere or KQ ^
Spignere, )
ResPineerM to repulse,
Respignere, J
Sospingere, ) tQ push away>
Sospignere, )
Str inhere or } _ a„„aMr„
> to squeeze,
Strignere, >
' Aetringere, ?toforcej
Costringere, )
Restringere, ? t0 re8traini
Ristringere, >
Struggere, to dissolve,
Distruggere, to destroy (See Obs. above)
Srellere, to pull out, { 8Ve!10'
5 svelgo,
scrissi,
► (See Obs. above.)
sorgo, ( sorsi,
surgo, ( sursi,
> (See Obs. above.)
(See Obs. above.)
stringo,
(See Obs. above.)
struggo,
atrinsi,
atrussi,
BveW,
sciolto.
scntto
sorto
spargo, sparsi,
sparso
spendo, spesi,
speso.
spergo, spersi,
sperso
(See Obs. above.)
spingo, spins!,
spinto
■tretto
struts
svelto
EIGHTY-FIFTH LESSON.
401
InfiniHvo
fefldere, to tend,
Attendere, to wait,
Contendere, to contend,
Estendere, to stretch,
Intendere, to understand,
Pretendere, to pretend,
Soprintendere, to superintend,
Sottintendere, to understand,
Tergere, to wipe,
Tingere or)tJ ,
Tignere,5t0dye'C°l0Ur'
Prima persona
deW Indicativo
present*.
tendo,
(See above Obe.)
Perfetto
rimoto.
teal,
Participu
tergo,
tingo,
(See Obs. above.)
C tolgo, )
l toglio, f
> (See Obs. above.)
torco,
J (See Obs. above.)
valgo,
Intingere, to steep,
Attingere, to reach,
Ritingere, to die again,
Togliere or }
Torre, Jt0 "***
Distogliere or distorre, to divert
from,
Ritogliere or ritorre, to retake,
Torcere, to twist,
Contorcere, to wring,
Ritorcere, to twist again,
Vaxere, to be worth,
Prevalere, to prevail (See Obs. above).
(Jccidere, to kill, uccido,
Ancidere (poetical), to kill (See Obs. above)
Urigere, to anoint, ungo,
Vincere, to vanquish, vinco,
Convincere, to convince (See Obs. above.)
Vivere, to live,
Rivivere, to revive,
Sopravvivere, to survive,
Volgere, to turn,
Avvolgere,
Ravvolgere, £ to wrap up,
Rinvolgere,
Sconvolgere, to invert,
Stra volgere,
Travolgere
vivo,
> (See Obs. above.)
:•?
e, t<
e )
' ' > to overturn,
h J
volgo,
terd,
tinsi,
tolri,
torsi,
valsi,
uccisi,
unsi,
vinsi,
vissi,
void,
► (See Obs. above.)
terso.
tinto.
totto.
torto.
i valso,
l valuto
ucciso
unto,
vinto.
C vivu*o,
( viss*'*
volU
.
OBSERVATIONS.
A. Verbs ending in ncere, gliere, nere, acre, are contracted in the infinitive,
that they have two infinitives, i. e. the ancient Latin, as • a*ditcere, to ad*
108
BIOHTY-FIFTH LESSON.
iuce ; eoglisre, to gather j ponere, to put ; traere (and iraggere), to draw ; and
the modern contracted infinitive, as : addurre, corre, porre, trarre. The second
contracted infinitive is generally used • from it are formed the future and the
present conditional, as : addurrd, ccrrd, porro, trarro, and addurrei, correi
porrei, trarrei. All the other tenses are formed from the ancient infinitive, as
from conducere, Pres. conduco, conduci, conduce, &c 3mDeriect : oonduceva, &c
lmperf subj. conducessi, &c.
In the following verba the infinitive is contracted, and the contraction main
tained for the future and present conditional : —
Infinitivo. Presente. Perfetto Participio Fhtiuro.
rimoto. passaic.
Addurre, to adduce. adduco, addussi, addoito, addurr3
instead of adducere.
Condurre, instead of conducere, to conduct.
deducere, to deduce,
introducere, to introduce,
producere, to produce,
riconducere, to reconduct
riducere, to reduce,
riproducere, to reproduce
seducere, to seduce,
traducere, to translate.
bevo,
pongo,
Dedurre,
Introdurre,
Produrre,
Ricondurre,
Ridurre,
Riprodurre,
Sedurre,
Tradurre,
Bere, to drink, in-
stead of bevere,
Porre, to put, tn-
tUad of ponere.
And so all those compounded from it, as :
Anteporre, to prefer.
Apporre, to impute.
Comporre, to compound.
Contrapporre, to oppose.
Deporre, to depose.
Disporre, to dispose.
Esporre, to expose.
Frapporre, tc interpose.
Trarre, to draw, in-
stead of tr'aere
And so:
Astrarre to abstract.
Attrarre to attract.
Contrar e, to contract.
Corre* or )
bewi,
posi,
bevuio, ierrd.
posto,
porj,
traggo,
Imporre, to impose.
Opporre, to oppose.
Posporre, to postpone.
Preporre, to prefer.
Proporre, to propose.
Soprapporre, to put upon.
Sottoporre, to subdue.
Supporre, to suppose,
trassi, tratto,
Detrarre, to detract.
Estrarre, to extract.
Sottrarre, to deliver.
trarnl
/ to gather,
coglierr, >
Scerre or
scegher
fcolgo, >
lioj
to choose,
\ coglic
C scelgo,
( sceglio,
colsi,
scelsi,
colto,
scelto,
corro or
coglierd
scerrd or
sceglierd
1 In the verbs in g'iere the contracted form is generally preferred in poem
EIGHTY-FIFTH LESSON.
4 op
sciorro or
scioglicrd.
torn) or
togliero.
Obs. B. Besides these, there are those verbs in ere that have (like avert) tht
accent on the last syllable but one; they are not contracted in the infinitive,
&ut in the future and conditional, where they reject the letter e of the last
lyllable but one, as :
Puturo.
byftnitivo.
Presente.
Perfetto
Partictpio
Iciorreor ? to unti6)
sciogliere, >
{ sciolgo,
c scioglio,
rimoto.
i sciolsi,
passato.
sciolto,
Vox^or ?to*ke,
togliere, >
< tolgo,
( toglio,
I tolsi,
tolto,
Avere, to have.
Dovere, to owe.
Potere, to be able (can).
Sapere, to know.
Vedere, to see.
Parere, to appear.
Avrd,
Dovrd,
Potrd,
Sapro,
Vedrd,
Parrd,
Condizionale.
avrei.
dovrei.
potrei.
saprei.
vedrei.
parrei.
Obs. C. But when the verbs in ere (with the accent on the last syllable but
one), end in nere and lere, the letter n or / is in the contraction changed intc
aa
Rimanere, to remain.
Tenere, to hold.
Dolere, to hurt
Valere, to be worth
Volere, to be willing.
Fviuro.
Rimarrd,
Terrd,
Dorrd,
Varrd
Vorrd,
Condizix*iaM
rimanw
terrei.
dorrei
varrei.
▼orrei.
CONJUGATION OF A VERB WITH TWO INFINITIVES
Present of the Infinitive, Present Participle
Addurre, to allege ; formerly adducerc
Past of the Infinitive.
Avere addotto, to have alleged.
Adduc-o,
Adduc-i,
Adduc-e.
Adduc-eva
Adduc-evi
Adduc-eva
Adduas ,
Adduc-esti
fl^lunac.
Adducendo, alleging.
Past Participle
Addotto, alleged.
Present of the Indicative.
I allege, Ac.
Adduc-iamo,
Adduc-ete,
Adduc-ono.
Imperfect.
I alleged, <fcc.
Adduc-evamo
Adduc-evate,
Adduc-evano
i
Passato Rimoto.
I alleged, &c.
Adduc-emnii
Addue-este
j Addusseiu
100
EISHTY-FIFTH LESSON.
Preterperfcct.
Ho addotto, <fcc. I have alleged, 4c.
Pluperfect.
Aveva addotto, &c I had alleged, Ac
Preterite Anterior (Passaio Rvmoto Composts,
Ebbi addotto, &c. I had alleged, &c.
Future Present or Simple.
I shall allege, 4c.
Addurr-d, ■ Addurr-emo,
Addurr-ai, Addurr-ete,
Addurr-a, Addurr-anno.
Future Past. (Futuro Perfetto).
Avro addotto, &c. I shall have alleged, Ac
Conditional Present.
I should allege, 4c.
Addurr-ei, Addurr-emmo,
Addurr-esti. , Addurr-este,
Adaurr-ebbe. Addurr-ebbero.
Past Conditional.
Avrei addotto, &c. I should have alleged, 4«
Present of the Subjunctive.
That I may allege, Ac.
Adduc-a,
Adduc-a,
Adduc-a
Adduc-iamo,
Adduc-iate,
Adduc-ano.
Adduc-essi
Adduc-essi,
Adduc-esse
Imperfect of V
If I alle;
it Subjunctive.
jed, 4c.
Adduc-essimo,
Adduc-este,
Adduc-essero.
Preterperfcct of the Subjunctive.
Che abbia addotto, 4c. That I may have alleged, 4c
Pluperfect of the Subjunctive.
S' io avewi addotto, &c. If I had alleged, 4c
Imperative.
adduc-i, allege (thou).
Son addurre, do not allege
Adduc-a, let him alleg*
Adduc-iamo, let us allege.
Adduc-ete, allege (ye).
Adduc-ano, let them altegn
BIGHT Y-FIFTH LESSON.
III. ON THE VERBS IN ire.
Of the verbs in ire only the following are entirely regular .
Infinitivo.
Presenie.
Perfetto rimoto.
Participio passatc
ipure, to open,
apro,
aprii (apersi),
aperto.
Bollire, 10 boil,
bollo,
boilii,
bollito.
Convertire, to convert,
converto,
convertii,
sonvertito.
Coprire, to cover,
copro,
coprii (copersi),
coperto.
Cucire, to sew,
cucio,
cucii,
cucito.
Dormire, to sleep,
dornio,
dormii,
dormito.
Puggire, to flee,
faggo,
fuggii,
fuggito.
Partire, to depart,
parto,
partii,
partito.
Pentirsi, to repent,
mi pento,
mi pentii,
pentito.
Seguire, to follow,
seguo,
seguii,
seguito.
Sentire, to feel,
sento,
sentii,
sentito.
Servire, to serve,
servo,
servii,
servito.
Sotfrire, to suffer,
soffro,
soffrii (soffersi),
sofferto.
Sortire, to choose,
sorto,
sortii,
sortito.
Vestire, to clothe,
vesto,
vestii,
vestito.
The remaining verbs in ire differ from the above regular form in so mucl
that they end in the present tense in isco. This irregularity also takes.place in
the present of the subjunctive and imperative, as has been shown heretofore in
the conjugation of nutrire (p. 477).
There is, however, still some doubt existing with respect to the first and
second persons plural of these verbs ; for in conversation, as well as in some
Italian authors, Jinischiamo, nutrischiamo^ &c, as well as : finiamo, nutriamo,
are employed. M< iern authors, however, seem to incline for the regular form
in the first and second persons plural (as in nutrire, p. 477), except, notwith-
standing, where a double meaning is to be avoided ; as in the verbs : ardire, to
dare; atterrire, to frighten; jnarcire, to rot; smaltire, to digest; &c. where
ardiamo, atterriamo, marciamo, smaltiamo, are avoided, not to mistake them for
the first person plural of ardere, to burn ; atterrare% to throw down ; marciaret
to march ; smaltare, to enamel.
The following verbs and their compounds terminate almost always in isco.
Those marked with a cross (t) have also the regular form, as : abborrire — abbor-
risco, abborro : but the form in isco is preferred in conversation, the other in
poetry and the didactic style.
Infinitivo.
Aoolire, to abolish
Abborrire, to abho •,
Arricchire, iO enrich,
\rrossire, to blush,
Bandire, to banish,
Cupiie, to understand,
Colpire, to strike,
Compatire, to pity,
Concepire, to conceive,
Digerirc, to digest,
Presenie.
Perfetto rimoto.
Participio passaic
abolisco,
abolii
abolito.
abborrisco,
abborrh,
abborrito
arricchisco,
arricchii,
arricchito.
arrossisco,
arrossii,
arrossito.
bandisco,
Dandii,
bandito.
capisco,
capii,
capito.
colpisco,
colpii,
colpito.
compatisco,
compatii,
compatho.
concepisco,
concepii,
concepito,
diger.'aco,
digerii,
digerito
502
InflnUho.
Eseguire, to execute,
Piorire, to blossom,
Gradire, to approve,
Mmpazzire, to grow mad,
Incrudelire, to grow cruel
tLanguire, to languish,
Patire, to suffer,
Perire, to perish,
Spedire, to dispatch,
Tradire, to betray,
Ubbidire, to obey,
Unire, to unite,
Obs. The verbs aprirc, to open ; coprire, to cover ; ricoprire, to cover again
tcoprire> to uncover; qfferire, to offer ; as also differire, to differ; profferire, U.
utter ; sqfferire, to suffer ; have a double perfetto rimoto, viz. the regular, as
zpriiy qfferii, &c, and an irregular, as apersi, qffersi, &c. Ex.
April or apers% apristi, aprl or
aperse.
EIGHTY-FIFTE
[ LESSON.
Present*.
Perfetto rimoto
Partidpio pat
eseguisco,
eseguii.
eseguito.
fiorisco,
fiorii,
fiorito.
gradisco,
gradii,
gradito.
impazzisco,
impazzii,
impazzito.
, incrudelisco,
incrudelii,
incrudelito,
languisco,
languii
languito.
patisco,
patii,
patito.
perisco,
perii,
perito.
spedisco,
spedii,
spedito.
tradisco,
tradii,
tradito.
ubbidisco,
ubbidii,
ubbidito
unisco,
unii,
unito.
I opened, thou openedst, he opened,
We, you, they opened,
Aprimmo, awiste aprirono, cr aptT'
$ero.
Obs. A. Injhare (also m/lucre), to influence, has in the perfetto rimoto only
injlussi.
Obs. B. The verb apparire, to appear, and its compound comparire, to appear,
lave in the perfetto rimoto, besides the regular form in ii, another in ui,4 as :
[ appeared, thou appearedst, he ap
peared.
We, you, they appeared.
Apparii and apparvi, apparisti, ap-
pari, and apparve.
Apparimmo, appariste, apparironc
and apparvero.
Obs. C. Of the verbs in ire the following three are contracted in the future
wad conditional :
To die, morire, future morrb, conditional morrei.
To ascend, salire, " sarrd, " sarrei (poetical).
(in prose) saliro, " salirei.
To come, venire, verrd, " verrei.
Obs. D. The only one of the verbs in ire that has a contracted infinitive it
lire, formerly dicere} to say.
I. IRREGULAR VERBS IN are.
There are only four irregular verbs of the first conjugation, viz.—
Andare, to go ; fare (formerly./acer«), to make, to do ; dare, to give ; stars, o
rtNsa.
* This double form in the perfetto rimoto is to be attributed to the double
Infinitive of the verbs ; for we find also apparere, comparere} though the attar
be not used.
N. B. The Italian language is very rich in the verbs in isco.
KOHTY-F1FTH LBSSON.
503
They are conjugated in the following manner :
Imdaab, to go.
£saere andato, to
have gone.
tadando, going.
Andato, gone.
I go, Ac.
Vado (or to),
rai,
va,
andiamo,
andate,
▼anno,
I went, Ac
And-ava,
and-avi,
and-ava,
and-avamo,
and-avate,
and-avano.
( went, did go,
Ac.
And-ai,
and-asti,
and-d,
and-aramo,
and-aste,
and-arono.
f have gone,
Ac
Sono andato, Ac.
I bad gone, Ac
Bra andato, Ac.
Infinitive Present.
Fare, to do. Dark, to give.
Infinitive Past.
Aver fatto, to Aver dato, to
have done. have given.
Participle Present.
Facendo, doing. Dando, giving.
Participle Past.
Fatto, done. Dato, given.
Present Indicative.
I do, Ac.
Faccio (or fo),
fai,
fa (face),
facciamo,
fate,
fanno.
I give, Ac.
Do,
dai,
da,
diamo,
date,
danno.
Imperfect.
I did, Ac.
Fac-eva (fea),
fac-evi,
fac-eva (fea)t
fac-evamo, .
fac-evate,
fac-evano.
I gave, Ac.
Da-va,
da-vi,
da-va,
da-vamo,
da-vate,
da-vano.
°reterite Definite ( Passato Rimoto).
I did, did do, I gave, did give,
Ac. Ac.
Feci (/«), Diedi (dettx),
fac-esti, desti,
fece(/«', feo), diede (die, dette),
fac-emmo, demmo,
fac-este, deste,
fecero (fenno, diedero (dierono,
fertmo). dettero).
Pretet perfect (Passato Prossimo).
I have done I have given,
(made), Ac Ac.
Ho fatto, Ac. Ho dato, Ac.
Pluperfect.
[ had done I had given, Ac.
(made), Ac.
Aveva fatto, Ac. Aveva dato, Ac
Stabs, to ■tand.
Essere etato, ta
have stood.
Stando, standing
Stato, stood.
I stand, Ac
Sto,
stai,
■ta,
atiamo,
state,
stanno.
I stood, Ac
Sta-va,
sta-vi,
sta-va,
sta-vamo,
ata-vate,
sta-vano.
I stood, did stan*.
Ac.
Stetti,
stesti,
stette,
atemmo,
steate,
atettero.
I have stood, Ac
Sono stato, Ac
I had stood, Ac
Era stato, Ac
M)4
EIGHTY-FIFTH LESSON.
■
Preterite Anterior (Passato Rimoto Composto).
had gone, Ac.
I had done, &c.
I had given, Ac.
I had stood, Ac
"*ui andato. Ac
Ebbi fatto, Ac.
Ebbi dato, Ac.
Fui stato, S z.
Future.
shall go, Ac.
I sha.» do or
I shall or will
I shall or w'J
make, &c.
give, Ac.
stand, «tc.
And-rd,
Fa-rd,
Da-rd,
Sta-rd,
and-rai,
fa-rai,
da-rai,
sta-rai,
and-ri,
fa-ra\
da-rd,
sta-ra,
and-remo,
fa-remo,
da-remo,
sta-remo,
and-rete,
fa-rete,
da-rete,
sta-rete,
and-ranno.
fa-ranno.
da-ranno.
sta-ranno.
Fvture Past.
I shall have
I shall have
I shall have
I shall have
gone, Ac.
done, Ac.
given, &c.
stood, &c.
Sard andato,
Avro fatto, &c.
Avro dato, Ac.
Sard stato, stata
andata, &c.
Ac.
Conditional Present.
1 should go, Ac.
I should do, Ac.
I should give, &c.
I should stand, Ac
And-rei,
Fa-rei,
Da-rei,
Sta-rei,
and-resti,
fa-resti,
da-resti,
sta-resti,
and-rebbe,
fa-rebbe (id),
da-rebbe,
sta-rebbe,
and-reramo,
fa-remmo,
da-remmo,
8ta-remmo,
and-reste,
fa-reste,
da-reste,
sta-reste,
and-rebbero.
fa-rebbero (iano).
da-rebbero.
sta-rebbero.
Conditional Past.
I should hcve
I should have
I should have
I should have
gone, &c.
done, Ac.
given, &c.
stood, Ac.
Sarei andato, an-
Avrei fatto^&c.
Avrei dato, Ac
Sarei stato, stt>i
data. Ac.
Ac.
Present of the Subjunctive.
That I may go,
do or make,
give,
stand,
Ac.
Ac
4&C.
Ac.
Che io vada,
faccia,
dia,
stia, *
che tu vada,
faccia,
dia,
stia,
che egli vada,
faccia,
dia,
stia,
she noi andiarao,
facciamo,
diamo,
stiamo,
che voi andiate,
facciate,
diate,
stiate,
ehe essi vadano.
facciano.
diano (dieno)
stiano (stuno)
Imperfect of the
Subjunctive.
If I went, Ac.
made, Ac.
gave, Ac.
stood, Ac
Se io and-assi,
fac-essi,
d-essi,
st-essi,
se tu and-assi,
fac-essi,
d-essi,
st-essi,
s'egli and-asse,
fac-esse,
d-esse^
st-esse,
se noi and-assimo,
fac-essimo,
d-essimo,
st-essimo,
se voi and-aste,
fac-este,
d-este,
dt-este,
•'esrHno and-assero
fae-esMiio
d-essero.
st-essera
EIGHTY-FIFTH LESSON.
GC5
that I may have
gone, Ac.
She io »ia andato,
andata, Ac.
if 1 had gone,
Ac.
Be fossi andato,
andata, Ac.
Va, go (thou),
nop andare, go
(thou) not,
vada, let him
go.
andiamo, let us
go,
and ate, go (ye),
vadano, let them
go-
Perfect of the Subjunctive.
may have done, may have given,
Ac. Ac.
abbia fatto, Ac. abbia dato, Ac.
Pluperfect of the Subjunctive.
had gone, had given,
Ac. Ac.
avessi fatto, Ac. avessi dato, Ac.
Imperative.
Fa, do (thou),
non fare, do
(thou) not,
faccia, let him
do,
facciamo, let us
do,
fate, do (ye),
facciano, let them
do.
Da, give (thou),
non dare, give
thou (not),
dia, let him
give,
diamo, let us
give,
date, give (ye),
diano, let them
give.
mav have stood
Ac.
sia stato, tt&ta,
Ac.
nad stood,
Ac.
fossi stato, stata,
Ac.
Sta, stand (thou),
non istare, do (thou)
not stand,
stia, let him stand,
stiamo, let us stand,
state, stand (ye),
stiano, let them
stand.
Ob$. A. Verbs compounded of dare and stare, such as: secondare, to assist;
xrcondare, to encompass ; — accostare, to approach ; contrastare, to resist ; ostare,
to oppose ; costare, to eost ; restore, to rest, are regular ; except, ridare, to give
again, which is conjugated like dare, to give ; and soprastare or sovrastare, to
superintend, to threaten, which is conjugated like stare, to stand.
Obs. B. Verbs compounded of fare, as : disfare, to undo ; rifare, to repair ;
soddisfare, to satisfy ; sopraffare, to overpower, Ac. are always irregular like
fixe, to do.
II. IRREGULAR VERBS IN ere.
Preliminary Observations. — If the learner has studied well all that we said on
.i.e irregularity of the Italian verbs, he has in the following irregular verbs only
to make himself acquainted with the present of the indicative and subjunctive
and in order to know this he has only to remark the following : —
When an irregular verb has in the first person singular of the present tense
»ther consonants than those of the infinitive, as — in potere, where it has posse
instead of poto, it retains those consonants also in the first and third persons plu-
ral, as : po8siamo, we can ; possono, they can, and in all the persons of the pre-
sent of the subjunctive, as: possa, I may be able; posei, thou mayest be able-
vossa, he may be able ; possiamo, possiate, possano. The imperfect of the indira
dve and that of the subjunctive are always regularly formed from the infinitive
Ex. inf. pot-ere; imperf. ind pot-eva • imperf. subj. pot-essL, Ac.
506
EIGHTY-FIFTH LESSON.
f 'UISULAB VERBS HAVING THK ACCENT ON THE LAST SYLLABLE Bin OKB
1.
Inf. pres. PotSre, to be able (can).
Inf. past. Aver potuto, to nave been
able.
Preterit indie.
Posso, I can, Ac.
Puoi.
Pud (puote).
Possiamo.
Potete.
Possono ( panno).
Imperf. Poteva, Ac. I could, Ac.
Perfetto rimot. Potei (potettt), potesti, poid, potemmo, poteste, poterono ( potei
tero), I could, Ac.
Imperf. subj. Se potessi, Ac. If I could, Ac.
Future. Potro, potrai, Ac. I shall be able, Ac.
Cond. pres. Potrei (potria), potresti, Sec. I should be able, Ac
Pre*, part. Potendo, being able.
Past part. Potuto, been able.
Present subj.
Ch' io possa, that I may be able, &i
Che tu possa (possi).
Ch' egli possa.
Che noi possiamo.
Che voi possiate.
Ch' eglino possano.
Inf. pres. Dovere, to be obliged
(must).
Inf. past. Aver dovuto, to have been
obliged.
Present ind.
Devo (debbo, deggio), I must,
Ac.
Devi (dei).
Deve (debbe, dee).
Dobbiamo (deggiamo).
Dovete.
Devono (debbor), deggiono).
Imperf. Doveva, Ac. I was obliged, Ac.
Perf. rim. Dovei (dovetti), dovesti, dove* (dovette), dovemmo, doveste, dove*
tero, I was obliged, Ac.
Imperf. subj. Dovessi, Ac. If I were obliged, Ac.
Future. Dovro, dovrai, Ac. I shall be obliged, Ac.
Cond. pres Dovrei, Ac. I should be obliged, Ac.
Pres. part. Dovendo, being obliged
Past part. Dovuto, been obliged.
Pres. subj.
Ch* io debba (deggia), that I may o*
obliged, Ac.
Che tu debba (deggia).
Ch' egli debba (deggia).
Che noi dobbiamo (deggiamo).
Che voi dobbiate (deggiate).
Ch' eglino debbano (deggiono).
Inf. pres. Volere, to be willing. Pres. part. Volendo, being willing
Inf. past. Aver voluto, to have been Past part. Voluto, been willing,
willing.
Pre*, ind. Voglio (vo'\ ruoi, vuole, vogliamo, volete, vogliono, I i
willing, Ac.
EIGHTY-FIFTH LESSON. 501
Pre*, subj Che io voglia, tu voglia, egli voglia, vogliam j, vogliate, vogoano
that I may be willing Ac5
Imperf. Voleva, Ac. I was willing, Ac.
Per/, rim. Volli, volesti, voile, volemmo, voleste, vollero. I was willing Ac
Imperf. aubj. Se volessi, Ac, if I were willing, Ac.
Future. Vorro, vorrai, Ac. I shall be willing, Ac.
Cond. pres. Vorrei, vorresti, Ac. I should be willing, Ac
4.
Inf. pre* Sol6re, to be accustomed.
Inf. past. Essere solito, to have been
accustomed.
Pres. part. Solendo, being accus-
tomed.
Past part. Solito, been accustomed.
Pres. ind. Soglio, suoli, suole, sogliamo, solete, sogliono, I am accus-
tomed, Ac
Pres. subj. Ch' io soglia, che tu soglia, ch' egli soglia, sogliamo, sogliate,
sogliano, that I may be accustomed, Ac.
Imperf. Soleva, solevi, soleva, Ac. I was accustomed, Ac.
Imperf. subj. Se io solessi, tu solessi, egli solesse, Ac If I was accus-
tomed, Ac.
Obs. This verb is defective, and the tenses wanting are generally made up
£>y means of the past participle with essere, as : io sono, io era, io fui, io sard
■olito, Ac.
Pres. pari. Sapendo, knowing.
Past part. Saputo, known.
5.
Inf. pres. Sapere, to know.
inf. past. Aver saputo, to have
known.
Pres. indie. So, sai, sa, sappiamo, sapete, sanno, I know, Ac
Pres. subj. Ch' ic sappia, tu sappia, egli sappia, noi sappiamo, voi sappiate,
essi sappiano, that I may know, Ac.
Imperf. Sapeva, sapevi, Ac. I knew, Ac.
Perf. rim. Seppi, sapesti, seppe, sapemmo, sapeste, seppero, I knew, Ac
Imperf. subj. Se io sapessi, tu sapessi, egli sapesse, Ac. If I knew, Ac
Future. Saprd, saprai, Ac. I shall know, Ac.
Cond. pres. Saprei, sapresti, saprebbe, Ac. I should know, Ac.
Imperative. Sappi, sappia, sappiamo, sappiate, sappiano, know thou, Ac
b.
Inf. pres Ved6re, to see.
Inf. past. Aver veduto, to nave seen.
Pres. part. Vedendo (veggendo), see-
ing.
Past part. Veduto (vista), seen.
• The inegular verbs in lere (with the accent on the last syllable but one), as
polere; dolere, to grieve ; valere, to be worth, and their compounds, take in the
first person g, which is retained in the persons mentioned in the Preliminary
Observations (p. 505). In dolere and volere g may precede or follow the letter L
except in the first and second persons plural, where the soft sound, dogliama
dogliate, in preferred to the hard, dolgfiiamo, dolghiate.
boa
EIGHTY-FIFTH LESSON.
Pres. ind. Vedo (veggo, veggio), vedt, vede, vediamo (veggiamo), vedets
vedona (veggono, veggiono), I see, &c.
Pres. svbj. Ch' io, tu, egli veda (veggo, veggia), noi vediamo {veggiamo), Ac.
that I may see, Ac.6
Imperf. Io vedeva, tu vedevi, Ac. I saw, Ac.
Per/, rim. Vidi, vedesti, vide, vedemmo, vedeste, videro, I saw, Ac.
Iriperf. subj. Se io vedessi, tu vedessi, Ac. If I saw, Ac.
F*uiure. Vedro, vedrai, Ac. I shall see, Ac.
Cond. pres. Vedrei, vedresti, vedrebbe, &c. I should see, Ac.
Imperative. Vedi, veda (vegga), vediamo (veggiamo), vedete. vedano (veggano),
see thou, Ac.
7.
Inf. pre: Sedere, to sit.
Inf. past. Aver (or essere) seduto, to
have sax.
Pres. part. Sedendo (seggendo), tit
ting.
Past part. Seduto.
Pres. ind. Siedo (seggo, seggio), siedi, siede, sediamo (seggiamo), sedeto, sie
dono (seggono, seggiono), I sit, Ac.
Pres. subj. Ch' io, tu, egli sieda (segga, seggia), sediamo (seggiamo), sediate
(seggiate), siedano (seggono, seggiano), that I may sit, Ac.
Imp. Sedeva, sedevi, Ac. I sat, Ac.
Perf. rim. Sedei (sedetti), sedesti, sed& (sedette), sedemmo, sedeste, sederon«
(sedettero), I sat.
Imperf. svbj. Se io sedessi, tu sedessi, Ac. If I sat.
Future. Sedero (poet, sedrb), Ac. I shall sit, Ac.
Cond. pres. Sederei, &c. I should sit, &c.
Imperative. Siedi, sieda (segga), sediamo (seggiamo), sedete, siedano (seggono^
sit thou, &c.
Parendo, appearing.
Paruto (parso), appeared.
8.
Inf. pres. Parere, to appear. Pves. part.
Inf. past. Aver paruto (oarso), to Past part.
have appeared.
Pres. ind. Paio, pari, pare, paiamo (pariamo), parete, paiono, I appear, &c.
Pres. subj. Ch' io paia, tu paia, egli paia, pariamo, pariate, paiano, that I ma;
appear, &c.
Imperf. Pareva, parevi, &c. I appeared, &c.
Perf. rim. Parvi, paresti, parve, paremmo, pareste, parvero, I appeared, Ac
Imperf. subj. Se paressi, &c. If I appeared, &c.
FSiture. Parro, parrai, parra, &c. I shall appear, &c.
Cond. pres. Parrei, parresti, &c. I should appear, &c.
• Verbs in dire (with the accent on the last syllable but one) may in the firs*
person of the present take instead of d the letter g, which is doubled between
two vowels, and pronounced either hard, as in go, or soft, as the English j.
Only there is to be observed, that, as here above (note5), in the first and 860004
oersons plural, the soft sound, as veggiamo, veggiate, is to be preferred tn th«
aard : vegghiamo, vsgghiate.
EIGHTS' -FIFTH LESSON. bd%
9.
mf. pre*. Dole" re (see note 8, p. 507), Prea. -port. Dolendo, grieving
to grieve.
hif. -post. Essere doluto, to have Past port Doiuto, grieved.
grieved.
Pres. ind. Doglio (dolgo) duoli, duole, dogliamo (dolghiamo), dolete, dogUone
(dolgono), I grieve, &c.
Pres. subj. Ch, io' tu, egli doglia (dolga), dogliamo (dolgntamo), dogltoto «4W
ghiate), dogliano (dolgano), that I may grieve, &c.
Imperf. Doleva, dolevi, &c. I grieved, &c.
Perf. rim. Dolsi, dolesti, dolse, dolemmo, doleste, dolsero, I grieved, Ac
Imperf. subj. Se dolessi, &c. If I grieved, &c.
Future. Dorro, dorrai, &c. I shall grieve, &c.
Cond. pres. Dorrei, dorresti, &c. I should grieve, &c.
brf. pres. Valere (see note 5, p. 507),
to be worth.
Inf. past. Aver valuto, to have been
worth.
10.
Pres. part. Valendo, being worth.
Past part. Valuto (valso), been worth.
Pres. ind. Vaglio (valgo), vali, vale, vagliamo (valgkiamo), vaiete, vaglion:
(valgono), I am worth, &c.
Pres. subj. Ch' io, tu, egli vaglia (valga), vagliamo (valghiamo), vagliate, vag
liano (ralgano), that I may be worth, &c.
Imperf. Valeva, valevi, &c. I was worth, &c.
Perf. rim. Valsi, valesti, valse, valemmo, valeste, valsero, I was worth, Ac
Imperf. subj. Se io valessi, &c. If I was worth, Ac.
Future. Varrd, varrai, varra, &c. I shall be worth, &c.
Cond. pres. Vartcl, varresti, &c. I should be worth, &c.
Imperative. VaU, vaglia, vagliamo, vaiete, vagliano, be thou worth, Ac
11.
Pre*, part. Cadendo, falling.
Past part. Caduto. fallen.
Inf. pres. Cadere (see note 8, p. 508),
to fall.
Inf. past. Essere caduto, to have
fallen.
Pres. ind. Cado (caggio, poet.), cadi, cade, cadiamo (caggiamo), cadete, oado
no (caggiono), I fall, &c.
Pres. subj. Ch' io, tu, egli cada (caggxa), cadiamo (caggiamo), Ac, that I raaj
fall, Ac.
Imperf. Cadeva, cadevi, Ac. I fell, &c.
Perf. rim. Caddi, cadesti, cadde, cademmo, cadeste, caddero, I fell, Ac
It also has : cadei or caaetti, &c.
Imperf. subj. Se io cadessi, &c. If 1 fell, &c.
Future. Cadrd, cadrai, cadra, cadremo, cadrete, cadranno (better than caderd)
Ac. I shall fall, &c.
Cond. pres. Cadrei, cadresti, Ac. I should fall
610 EIGHTY-FIFTH LESSON.
12.
*nf. pres. Tenere, to hold. I Pres. part. Tenendo, holding.
htf. pott. Aver tenuto, to have held. | Past part. Tenuto, held.
Pres. ind*. Tengo, tieni, tiene, .eniamo (tenghiamo), tenete, tengono, I hold, <k<
Pres. subj. Ch1 io, tu, egli, tenga, teniamo (tenghiamo), teniate (tenghiate), ten
gano, that I may hold, &c.7
Imperf. Teneva, tenevi, &c. I held, &c.
Perf. rim. Tenni, tenesti, tenne, tenemmo, teneste, tennero, I held &c.
Imperf. subj. Se io tenessi, &c. If I held, &c.
Future. Terrd, terrai, terra, terremo, terrete, terranno, I shah hold, &c
Cond. pres. Terrei, terresti, terrebbe, &c. I should hold, <&c
Imperative. Tieni, tenga, teniamo, tenete, tengano, hold thou, Ac.
.3.
Pres. part. Rimanendo, remaining.
Past part. Rimasto or rimaso, remain
ed.
Inf. pres. Rimanere (see note 7,) vO
remain.
Inf. past. Esser rimasto (rimaso), to
have remained.
Pres. ind. Rimango, rimani, rimane, rimaniamo (rimanghiamo), rimanete, ri
mangono, I remained, &c.
Pres. subj. Ch! io, tu, egli rimanga, noi rimaniamo (rimanghiamo), voi rima
niate (rimanghiate), essi rimangano, that I may remain, &c.
Imperf. Rimaneva, &c. I remained, &c.
Perf. rim. Rimasi, rimanesti, rimase, rimanemmo, rimaneste, rimasero, 1 re-
maned, &c.
Imperf. subj. Se io rimanessi, &c. If I remained, &c.
FrJars. Rimarrd, rimarrai, &c I shall remain, &c.
Cond. pres. Rimarrei, rimarresti, rimarrebbe, &c. I should remain, Ac.
Imperative. Rimani, rimanga, rimaniamo, rimanete, rimangano, remain thoo,
Ac
14.
h\f. pres. PiacSre, to please. j Pres. part. Piacendo, pleasing.
Inf. past. Aver piaciuto,to have pleased, j Past part. Piaciuto, pleased.
Pres. ind. Piaccio, piaci, piace, piacciamo, piacete, piaeciono, I please, &c
Pres. Bubj. Ch' io, tu, egli piaccia, piaccimo, piacciate, piacciano, that I may
please, &c.
Imperf Piaceva, piacevi, &c. I pleased, &c.
Perf. rim. Piacqui, piacesti, piacque, piacemmo, piaceste, piacqusro, I plead-
ed, &c.
Imperf. subj. Se io piacessi, &c. If I pleased, &c.
Future. Piacero, piacerai. &c. I shall please, &c.
Cond. pres. Piacerei, &c. I should please, &c.
i Verbs in nere (with the accent on the last syllable but one), as tenere, tt
Hold rimanere (also venire, to come), may take in the first person of the pres-
ent tense after n the letter g, which is retained in the persons mentioned in the
Preliminary Observations. In the first and second persons plural, teniamo, ve-
%iamo, ieniate, veniate, are preferred to tenghiamo, tenghiamo, tenghiate, venghiaU
EIGHTY-FIFTH LESSON. 5U
Obs. In the same manner are conjugated taccre, to be silent, and giacire, tc
ie (be situate). The letter c is always doubled when it is followed by two vow
els, except in the past participle.
II. IRBEGULAR VERBS, HAVING THB ACCENT ON THE LAST SYLLABLE BCI TWO
15.
Pres. part. Ponendo, putting.
past part. Posto, put.
Inf. pre*. Porre (formerly ponere), to
put.
bif. past. Aver posto, to have put.
Pres.ind. I'ongo, poni, pone, poniamo ( ponghiamo), ponete, pongono, I put,
&c.
Pre*, subj. Ch' io, tu, egli ponga, poniamo (ponghiamo), poniate (ponghiate),
pongano, that I may put, &c.
Imjtcrf. Poneva, ponevi, poneva, &c. I did put, &c
Perf. rim. Posi, ponesti, pose, ponemmo, poneste, posero, 1 did put, &c.
Imperf. subj. S' io ponessi, &c. If I put, &c.
Future. Porro, porrai, &c. I shall put, &c.
Cored pres Io porrei, tu porresti, egli porrebbe, &c. I should put, &c.
Imperative. Poni, ponga, poniamo, ponete, pongano, put thou, &c.
Obs. In the same manner are conjugated all its compounds, as : comporre^ u
compound ; preporre^ to prefer, &c. (See Obs. 492, and Obs. A. 498.)
16.
Inf. pre*. Dire (formerly dicere), to say. J Pres. part. Dicendo, saying.
Inf. past, Aver detto, to have said. j Past part. Detto, said.
Pres. indie. Dico, dici, dice, diciamo, dite, dicono, I say, &c*
Pres. subj Ch' io, tu, egli dica, diciamo, diciate, dicano, that I may lay, Ac
Imperf. Diceva, dicevi, &c. I said, Ac.
Perf. rim. Dissi, dicesti, disse, dicemmo, diceste, dissnro, I said, 4c
Imperf. subj. Se io dicessi, Ac. If I said, Ac.
Future. Diro, dirai, Ac. I shall say, Ac.
Cond. prt3. Direi, diresti, Ac. I should say, Ac.
Imperative. Di\ dica, diciamo, dite, dicano, say thou, Ac
17.
Inf. pres Bevere or bere, to drink. I Pres. part. Bevendo, drinking.
Inf. past. Aver bevuto, to have drunk, j Past part. Bevuto, drunk.
Pres. ind. Bevo, bevi, beve, beviamo, bevete, bevono, I drink, Ac.
Pres subj. Ch' io, tu, egli beva, beviamo, beviate, bevano, that I may di ink, fcc,
Imperf. Beveva (bevea), bevevi, Ac. 1 drank, Ac.
Perf. rim. Bevetti (bewi), beve»ti, bevette (bevve), bevemmo, teveste, bevetterr
(bevvero)9) I drank, Ac.
Imperf. subj. Se io bevessi, Ac. If I drank, Ac.
Future. Berd, berai, bera (better than beverd), Ac. I shall drink, Ac
Cond. pres. Berei, beresti, Ac. I should drink, Ac.
imperative. Bevi, beva, beviamo, bevete, bevano, drink thou, Ac.
* The perf. rim. bebbi, bebbe, bebbero, is used in poetry.
b\2 EIGHTY-FIFTH LESSON.
18.
Inf. pres. Spegnere, to extinguish. i Prea. part Spegnendo extinguish
Inf. past. Avere spento, to have extin- ing.
guished. I Past part. Spento, extinguished.
Pres. ind. Spegno (spengo), apegni, spegne, spegniamo (9penghiamo), s[
nete, spegnono (spengonc), I extinguish, &c.
Pres. subj. Ch' io, tu, egli spegna (spenga), spegniamo (spenghiamo), spqgmati
(spenghiate), spegnano (spengano), that I may extinguish, &c
Imperf. Spegne va, &c. I extinguished, &c.
Pre/, rim. Spensi, spegnesti, spense, spegnemmo, spegneste, spensero, I ex
tinguished, &c.
Imperf. subj. Se io spegnessi, &c. If I extinguished, &c.
Future. Spegnero, spegnerai, &c. I shall extinguish, &c.
Cond. pres. Spegnerei, spegneresti, &c. I should extinguish, &c.
Imperative. Spegni, spenga, spegniamo, spegnete, spengano, extinguish thou,
&c.
Obs. In the same manner are conjugated : cingere, to gird ; spingere} to push;
$tringeret to squeeze ; tingere, to dye (colour) ; and their compounds.
19.
Pre*, part. Scegliehdo, choosing.
Past part. Scelto, chosen.
Inf. pres. Soegliere (or scene), to
choose.
Inf. past. Aver scelto, to have chosen.
Pres. ind. Sceglio (scelgo), scegli, sceglie, scegliamo, scegliete, soegliono
(scelgono), I choose.
Pres. subj. Ch'. io, tu, egli sceglia (scelga), scegliamo, scegliate, sceglianu
(scclgano), that 1 may choose, &c.
Imperf. Sceglieva, &c. I chose, &c.
Per/, rim. Scelsi, scegliesti, scelse, scegliemmo, sceglieste, scelsero, I
chose, &c.
Imperf. subj. Se io scegliessi, &c. If I chose. &c.
f-\Uure. Scegliero (and scerrd,) &c. I shall choose, &c.
Cond. pres. Sceglierei and scerrei, &c. I should choose, &c.
Imperative. Scegli, scelga, scegliamo, scegliete, scelgano, choose thou, &c.
Obs. In the same manner are conjugated : sciogliere or sciorre, to untie
togliere or torrs, to take away ; cogliere or corre} to gather, and their compounds
as : distorre, to remove : raecorre, to pick up ; disciorre, to dissolve, &c.
20.
Inf. pres. Trarre, formerly traere, to
draw.
Inf. past. Aver tratto, to hare drawn.
Pres. indie. Traggo, trai (fraggi), trae (tragge), traiamo (traggiamo\ traete
traggono, I draw, &c.
Pres. subj. Ch' io, tu, egli tragga, traiamo (traggiamo), traiate (traggiaU), traf
gano, that 1 may draw, &c.
Imperf. Traeva, traevi, &c. I drew, &c.
Perf. rim. Trassi, traesti, trasse. traemmo, traeste, trassero, I drew,
hmpsrf. subj. Se io trae&si, &c. If I drew, Ac.
Pres pari. Traendo, drawing.
Past part. Tratto, drawn.
EIGHTY-FIFTH LESSON. 518
f\Uure. Trarrd, ttarrai, trarrii, &c. I shall draw, &c.
Vond.pres. Trarrei, trarresti, trarrebbe, &c. I should draw, cVc.
'mperative. Trai, tragga, traiamo Jraggiamo), traete, traggano, draw thou, dfce
Obs. In the same manner are conjugated: attrarre, to attract; sontrarr^ U
contract; detrarre, to detract
III. IRREGULAR VERBS IN ire.
21.
h\f. prta. Apparire, to appear sud- 1 Pre*, part. Apparendo, appearing.
aenly.
Inf. past. Essere apparito or apparso, i Past part. Apparito and apparso, ap
to have appeared. peared.
Pres. indie. Apparisco (appaio), apparisci (appari), apparisce (appare)
appariamo, apparite, appariscono (appaiono), I appear, &c.
Pres. subj. Ch' io, tu, egli apparisca (apjjaia), appariamo, appariate, apparisca
no (ajrjtaiano), that 1 may appear, &c.
Imperf. Appariva, apparivt, &c. I appeared, &c.
Perf. rim. Apparii (apparvi), apparisti, appari (apparve), apparimmo, apparistw
apparirono (apparrero), I appeared, &c
Imperf. subj. Se iu apparissi, &c. If I appeared, &c
Future. Appariro, &c. 1 shall appear, &c.
Cond. pres. Apparirei, &c. I should appear, &c.
Imperative. Apparisci, apparisca, appariamo, apparite, appariscano, appeal
thou, &c.
Obs. In the same manner are conjugated its compounds : comparire, to ap-
pear trarvarirt, to be transparent ; sparire, to disappear, &c.
22.
Pres. part. Venendo, (aleo venente)
coming.
Past part. Venuto, come.
Inf. pres. Venire, to come.
Inf. past. Essere venuto, to have come.
Pre*, vnd Vengo, vieni, viene, veniamo (venghiamo), venite, vengono, I comes,
&c.
Pres. subj. ?h' io, tu, egli venga, veniamo (venghiamo), veniate (venghiate)
vengano, that I may come, &c.
Imperf. Veniva, venivi, &c. I came, &c.
Perf. rim. Venni, venisti, venne, venimmo, veniste, vennero, I came, Ac.
Imperf. subj. Se io venissi, &c. If I came, &c.
Future. Verro, verrai, verra, verremo, verrete, verranno, I shall come, dfce.
Cond. pres. Verrei, verresti, verrebbe, &c. I should come, &c.
Imperative. Vieni, venga, veniamo, venite, vengano, come thou, &c.
23.
Inf. pres. Morire, to die (expire). Pres. part. Morendo, dying.
Inf. past. Essere mono, to have died. Past part. Morto, died.
Pres. ind. Muoio (jnuoro), muori, muore inoriamo (rnuoiamo), morite, muoio
no (muorono), I die, &c
514
EIGHTY-FIFTH LESSON.
Prea. subj. Ch' io, tn, egli muoia, moriamo (muoiamo), moriate imxutiaU). muo
iano, that I may die, Ac.
fmperf. Moriva, &c. I died, Ac.
Per/, rvm. Morii, moristi, Ac. I died, Ac
Imperf. rubj. Se io morissi, Ac. If I died, Ac.
Future Morrd (morirb), morrai, morra, morremo, morrete, morranno, I at
die, Ac. ,
Cond. prea. Morrei (mortrat), morresti, Ac. I should die, Ac.
Imperative. Muori, muoia, muoiamo, morite, muoiano, die thou, Ac.
24.
Salendo, ascending.
Salito, ascended.
Inf. prea. Satire, to ascend. Prea. port.
Inf. past. Essere salito, to have as- Past part.
cended.
Prea. ind. Salgo (aaglio, saliaco), sali (aalisci), sale (aaliace), sagliamo (aalghia
mo), salite, salgono (aagliono, saliscono), I ascend, Ac.
Prea. subj. Ch' io, tu, egli saiga {aaglio^ aalisca), sagliamo (8alghiamo), sagliaU
(salghiate), salgano (sagliano, saliscano), that I may ascend, Ac
Fmperf. Saliva, Ac. I ascended, Ac.
Perf. rim. Salii, Ac. I ascended, Ac.
imperf subj. Se io, salissi, Ac. If I ascended, Ac
Future. Saliro, Ac. I shall ascend, <ftc.
Cond. pree. Salirei, Ac. I should ascend, <&c.
Imperative. Sail, saiga, sagliamo, salite, salgano, ascend thou, Ac
25.
Inf. pre*. Udire, to hear.
Inf. past. Aver udito, to have heard
Prea ind.
Prea. subj.
Prea. part. Udendo, hearing.
Pad part. Udito, heard.
Odo, odi, ode, udiamo, udite, odono, I hear, &c.
Ch1 io, tu, egli oda, udiamo, udiate, odano, that I may huai, Ac
Imperative. Odi, oda, udiamo, udite, odano, hear thou, &c.
Oba. The remaining tenses are regular.
26.
Prea. part. Uscendo {eaeendo), going
out.
Post part. U8cito (escito), gone out.
Inf. prea. U scire, olao escire, to go
out.
Inf. post. Essere uscito (eacito) to have
gone out.
Prea. ind. Esco, esci, esce, usciamo (esciamo), uscite (eactte), escono, I go out
Ac. i
Prea. subj. Ch' io, tu, egli esca, usciamo (eaciamo), usciate (esciaU), escanc
that 1 may go out, Ac.
Imperative. Esci, esca, usciamo, uscite, escano, go thou out, Ac.
Oba The remaining tenses are regular.
Oba. Some verbs are only irregular in the perfetto rimoto and past partiripk
ft*
EIGHTY-FIFTH LESSON.
515
btf.
Aprire, to open.
Coprire, to cover.
Offerire, to offer.
Influire, to influence.
Dire, to say.
Perf. rim.
Aprii and apersi.
Coprii and copersi
Offerii and otfersi.
Influii and influssi
Dissi.
. (obs.) ^
Pad part
Aperto.
Coperto.
Offerto.
Influito.
Influsao.
Detto.
DEFECTIVE VERBS {Verbi difcttivi).
They are so called, because they are not used in all tenses and persons, but
wily in those which are met with in good authors. They are the following :
inf. prea. Gire, to go (only used in [ Past. part. Gito, gone.
poetry). I
Prea. indie. Gite, ye go.
Imperf. Giva (gia), I, thou, he went; givamo, we went; givate, you went;
givano (giano), they went.
Perf. rim. Gisti, thou wentest; gi (#u>), he went; gimmo, we went; giste,
you went ; girono, they went.
Imperf. subj. Se io gissi, tu gissi, egli gisse, gissimo, giste, gissero, if I went,
Ac.
t\Uure. Giro, I shall go ; girai, thou wilt go ; gira, he will go ; giremo, girete,
giranno, we, you, they will go.
Cond. prea. Girei, giresti, girebbe, giremmo, gireste, girebbero, I should go <&c.
Imperative. Gite, go ye.
Inf. prea. Ire, to go. Post. port. Ito, gone.
Prea. ind. Ite, ye go. Imperf. Iva, he went.
Future. Iremo, we shall go ; irete, you will go ; iranno, they will go.
Imperative. Ite, go ye.
Inf. prea. Riedere, to return. | Prea. part. Riedendo, returning.
Prea. ind. Riedo, I return ; riedi, thou returnest ; riede, he returns.
Imperf. Riedeva, I returned, &c.
imperative. Riedi, return thou ; rieda, let him return ; riedano, let them return
Inf. prea. Olire, to smell.
Imperf. Oli i, J smelt; olivi, thou smeltest; oliva, he smelt; olivano, then
smelt.
fnf prea. Calere, to care.
Pr*ia. ind. Mi cale, I care.
Prea. aubj. Che mi caglia, that I may
care.
tmperf. aubj. Se mi calesse, if I cared.
Past pari. Caluto, cared.
Imperf. Mi caleva, ) j cared
Perf. rim. Mi raise, >
Cond. prea. Mi calerebbe or carrel ie,
I would care.
Licere or lecere, to be permitted,
This verb has only lice and lece, it is permitted. Past part lectio and Ht
fermltted. Even ! ts infinitive is never used.
516 EIGHTY -FIFTH LESSOH.
EXERCISK.
253.
THE FOUR LANGUAGES.
A TALE.
We have all read in the Holy Scriptures the miracle oi
tongues of fire which descended from heaven upon the disciples
of Christ, and immediately communicated to those men, who
were complete strangers to all human learning, the knowledge oi
the several idioms they required in order to preach the gospel to
the world.
What a miracle then did for the apostles, let us now do for our.
selves by our own labour: for the study of languages is certainly
a most useful study ; k enables us to hold communication with all
nations ; it renders the whole world, as it were, our home.
Such was the opinion of young Edmund de Grancey's parents,
who, some fifty years ago, possessed one of the finest estates in
Dauphine. Though unacquainted with foreign languages them-
selves, they were nevertheless sensible of the importance they
might be of to their son. " No man on earth," would the Baron
de Grancey frequently say, " knows what may be his future
destiny. I therefore wish, should Edmund have occasion to
travel, that he may never find himself a stranger in any country.
I remember well how much I was embarrassed for want of know-
ing the German whei I was a prisoner in Prussia during the
seven years' war."
Endowed with a happy facility, Edmund made rapid progress
under the able masters that were called in to instruct him. At
the age of twelve, he was already able to read the charming
fables of Lessing in German, the History of England by Hume,
the beautiful lyric tragedies of Metastasio, that Italian poet whose
language is so harmonious. He could already express himsell
with tolerable accuracy in these three idioms ; and, not to men-
tion his maternal tongue, which he knew very well, he could
write a letter, almost without a mistake, in Italian, German, anr
English
EIGHTY- FIFTH LESSON. 511
Meantime the revolution broke out. The Baron de Grancey
whose fortune had always been employed in doing good, nevei
suspected that the political tempest could at all concern him ; but
the event soon proved that he was labouring under a fatal illusion.
He received information that sentence of proscription had been
pronounced against him, and orders issued for his being thrown
into prison. The baron was therefore obliged to fly with his wife
end son, and to gain with all speed the frontiers of Piedmont.
The fatal news reached him at a moment when he was visiting a
farm at some distance from his castle ; so that he could only carry
with him the little money he had on his person, which amounted
to about twenty-five louis. They had not even the consolation ol
bidding adieu to their native abode.
At Edmund's age, we feel a lively pleasure in hurrying for
the first time along the public roads ; we look with amazement at
the new objects that present themselves on every side; after hav-
ing gone a few leagues, we think we have reached the utmost
extremities of the earth. Edmund would, however, have enjoyed
this pleasure with greater relish had it not been accompanied with
the exile of his family.
The Baron and Baroness de Grancey had at first betaken them-
selves to Turin. After having received a supply of money which
their friends had contrived to send them from France, they left
that city in order to go and settle at Rome, until better times.
But in order to do this, it was necessary to traverse a great part
of Italy. As their resources were but scanty, the exiles took the
ordinary conveyances from one town to another; a means of
travelling which is neither elegant nor expeditious, but which is
accompanied with but little expense. During this journey, ae
well as on every other occasion since their arrival in Italy
Edmund served as interpreter to his parents. It was an interest
hg spectacle to see this child of thirteen thus repaying his father
and mother for the education he had received from tnem. —
Edmund frequently heard those around him saying : " Do you
see that French lady and gentleman, with their son? They have
reason to congratulate themselves on having such a child. Pooi
?xiles! they do not understand a word of our language
without him they would be much embarrassed — it is reallj
518 EIGHTY-FIFTH LESSON.
admirable !" This importance, which events had given him, wai
far from rendering Edmund proud ; but he congratulated himseli
every moment on his having studied the Italian with so mucb
attention, and to such purpose.
The sort of car in which our emigrants were journeying, con-
tained, besides two other travellers, a composer of music, wh:
was going to Florence in order to get an opera represented ; h(
was a good-natured juvenile maestro, and equally skilled in tl
oulinary as in the musical art : the other was an abbe, who, though
m excellent man and very pious to boot, loved music to the full
is much as his neighbour the maestro. The coachman kept singing
on his box, endeavouring from time to time to mend the sluggish
pace of his horses : it was, as you may observe, a sort of musical
caravan. The sun was about to disappear from the horizon, and
the maestro, who had received from nature a vigorous appetite,
was beginning to long for supper, when the travellers perceived
the wished. for inn where they were to sup and pass the night.
it was already so full that the master and mistress found great
aifficulty in answering all their guests. The arrival of the coach
increased their difficulties. The maestro in particular called
loudly for supper ; but finding that they were not preparing it
quick enough to answer his impatience, he took possession of the
stove, threw off his coat, tucked up his sleeves, and set about
preparing himself the classic macaroni.
Madame de Grancey, who till lately had lived so comfortably
in her own castle, served by numerous domestics, surrounded by
all the accommodations which usually accompany riches and
security, had more difficulty than her husband in bringing her
mind to so sudden and so complete a change. But as she did not
want courage, she soon became resigned, and sat down with a
good grace to the homely supper of the inn. The most conspicu-
ous dish was the macaroni prepared by the musician, who received
on that occasion almost as many compliments as he had ever done
for the best of his operas.
When the repast was finished, a still greater difficulty awaited
fche host ; this was to find beds for so many guests : the first
comers had bespoke all the rooms in the house ; the maestro and
ihe abbe installed themselves the best way they could in tlw
EIGHTY-FIFTH LESSON. 61*
.ravellers' room ; so that the French emigrant*, weie obliged to
take up their lodgings for the night in a small building; attached
to the inn, where «ome sorry beds had been hastily prepared, the
matresses of which contained more straw than wool.
The room, in which the baron with his wife and son were
lodged, was separated from the neighbouring one by a very thin
partition. Scarcely had our travellers gone to bed when they
heard some talking in the next room. They distinguished the
voices of two men conversing together ; but M. and Madame do
Grancey, fatigued by their journey, and besides not understanding
what was said, soon fell asleep. Edmund, on the contrary, lost
not a word ; and some expressions he heard uttered by those in
the neighbouring room sufficiently arrested his attention to keep
him awake.
. . . . " Don't speak too loud, Jacomo," said one of them to hid
companion.
" Poh !" replied the other, " what does it signify ? the French
ravellers whom we have for neighbours don't understand a word
of Italian ; of that I am quite certain ; for, finding myself in the
court with the old gentleman and his wife, I asked them, merely
by way of conversation, where they came from ; they made me
a sign that they did not understand me. Set your mind at ease,
then, Battista ; we may talk over our intended expedition with
perfect freedom."
Edmund remained in bed quite motionless, and listened with an
attentive ear. He had guessed the intentions of these men from
the very first. He took care, however, not to give way to any
feeling of terror. Instead of crying out, and calling for assistance,
he commanded himself with a coolness above his years, being aware
of the signal service he might render, not only to his parents, but
to all that were in the inn. A noise of pots and bottles, which
accompanied their conversation, announced that they had had re
course to the glass in order to heighten their courage ; in propor-
tion as they drank, their voices became louder and their expres-
sions less guarded.
" Hah ! " replied one of them, " to-morrow morning, by break
of day, the >ach sets off again ; before reaching the next village
there is a b« J in the road quite close upon the wood : we could
620 EIGHTY -FIFTH LESSON.
the*
ts
I
not have a better place for taking our stand. — But shci'Id the)
defend themselves ? . . . ."— " Poh ! they have no arms,
besides, though they had, they will be taken by surprise — our pis.
tols are double charged ; we shall send in two or three shots
amongst them, which will settle the business. — And then all wi
be ours ' . . . . what a glorious windfall ! "
The two robbers ceased speaking; one of them lay dowr. an
fell asleep ; the other began to walk about the room. Edmund
returned thanks to God that he had been able to understand the
conversation of these two wretches, and supplicated his aid in ihis
important crisis. He then groped his way to his father's bedside
and awoke him — " Father," said he, in a low voice, " in that room
close by, there are two robbers ; they are to await our coach in
order to rob and murder us." — "-What! child, are you sure of
that? " — " Yes, yes, father, I am quite certain of it; not a word
of what they said has escaped me ; they did not know that I
understood Italian, so that they spoke without any disguise. It
is at a turn of the road, near some wood that they are to lie in
wait for us."
M. de Grancey thought for a moment, in order to consider what
plan it would be necessary to adopt ; then, without awaking his
wife, who might have been seized with terror, he got up. — "Come
with me, my dear child," said he ; " yor :iave saved us all ; come,
and make as little noise as possible."
The baron and his son directed their steps towards the inn, and
knocked at tho door : the host, after having opened it, asked what
they wanted by coming and disturbing people in the middle of the
night. Edmund, who performed the part of interpreter, told him
all he had heard. — " Good God, sir ! " cried the host, terrified at
the idea of having robbers in his house, " I could wager that these
are the very irdividuals who plundered one of my cousins,- some
three weeks ago." — " Is there not," asked M. de Grancey, " a
troop of horse in the neighbourhood ? " — " Yes, sir, about two miles
from this." — " Well, then, cause some one to mount on horseback,
or rather ride yourself full speed, in order to give notice to the
armed force."
Some minutes after, the innkeeper galloped on* tor the nearest
own, and M . de Grancey returned with Edmund to his apartment
EIGHTY-FIFTH LESSON. 521
Doth of them observing the strictest silence. About an hour after,
they heard their neighbours go down stairs. The two robbers
met the landlord in the court just as he returned from his journey ;
and, having discharged their bill, they set ofT.
Dawn at last appeared ; the coachman ordered the travellers to
get ready. He was just going to put the horses to, when the
tramp of horse was heard upon the road ; on looking in that direc-
tion, they saw four dragoons, who were conducting two men with
their hands bound, both of whom were wounded. In these two
prisoners they recognized Jacomo and Battista. Before reaching
their place of ambush, they had fallen into the midst of the armed
force which had been previously posted there. The soldiers im
mediately seized them, and discovered in their persons two robbers
whom thay had long been in search of, but had hitherto been un-
able to find.
The travellers had all learned from the landlord the name ol
their deliverer. Madame de Grancey embraced her son with
great emotion : the good abbe" called him a new Daniel : the maes-
tro struck up, in honour of the little French boy, a song of tri-
umph, which he took from his new opera. In the midst of ah
these congratulations, Edmund thought only of the happiness he
felt in having saved his father and mother.
Some days after, the emigrant family entered the states of the
Church, where every step gives rise to recollections of former
greatness ; at last they descried, while yet at a great distance, the
cupola of St. Peter's, which announced to them their approach tc
the ancient capital of the world.
During his stay at Rome, Edmund laboured with renewed zeai
in order to perfect himself in the knowledge of English and Ger
man. His grammars and dictionaries, works which in our youth
frequently appear to us so dull and so dry, pleased him more than
books of the most amusing nature ; for he recollected how much
he was indebted to that sort of study.
&. was while he was thus employed that an old companion of M.
de Grancey, who had taken refuge in Dresden, wrote in order tc
nduce him to come and settle in that city, giving him hopes that
ae would be able to procure for him an honourable employment.
M.de Grancey decided upon going: his resources were dimin
522
EIGHTY -FIFTH LESSON.
idhing ; his estates in France had been confiscated, and the futurt
gave no signs of any favourable change. Having collected all hU
remaining property, he left Rome, and set out on his journey to
Saxony. The exiles every where met with the most cordial rp
ception ; for there is nowhere to be found a better or more hospita
ble people than the Germans. But, for want of knowing th*
idiom of those that were speaking around them, M. and Madanu
de Grancey would again have, found themselves in the utmos
embarrassment, had it not been for their Edmund, their dear
nterpreter.
From his very first entrance into Germany, he could make him-
3elf perfectly understood. Constant practice soon rendered him
quite familiar with the language of Goethe and Schiller, which is
reckoned so difficult. He, too, when he first began to study it,
was a little frightened at the strangeness of its Gothic characters,
and the apparant harshness of its words, which are, however, very
agreeable in the mouth of one who knows how to pronounce them ;
but he now perceived that the belief of its impossibility, which
then alarmed him, was altogether groundless.
At his arrival in Dresden, M. de Grancey experienced a cruel dis-
appointment ; that person high in office, upon whom his friend had
courted, was no longer in place ; the friend himself had been sent
to another town in Saxony ; so that, after many useless endeavours,
M. de Grancey was obliged to give up all hope of success. This
was a terrible blow for the poor exiles : their resources were now
quite exhausted by their long journey ; and of the town in which
they found themselves they knew not a single individual. The
health of Madame de Grancey began to give way under so manv
fatigues ; and M. de Grancey, who would have submitted with
courage even to manual labour, now felt the first symptoms of a
painful disease. By little and little the exiled family had sold for
their subsistence the few jewels that fortune had left them ; the
crot>3 of Saint Louis, which M. de Grancey had gained by a heroic
action, was the only article of value which he wished to preserve
to the last When walking with his lady, more than one head
was uncovered on seeing the noble decoration which sparkled on
the threadbare coat of the French emigrant. Edmund saw bu.
too well the situation of his parents ; more than once he had sur
IIGHTY-7IFTH LESSON. 52J
prised his mother with tears in her eyes ; his inability to assist
that mother, that father whom he loved so dearly, overwhelmed
him with grief; he was constantly trying to find out some moans 01
being useful to them, and this state of continual anxiety rendered
him sad and thoughtful. Meantime the poverty of the exiles was
increasing every day.
Things had come to this extremity, when one evening, Edmund,
who had been allowed by his parents to take a turn through the
town, entered as thoughtful but less sad than usual. He seemed
to be absorbed by some important idea which every now and then
presented some rays of hope. When he embraced the baron, he
said to him, with a tone of greater animation than usual : " O fa-
ther, if I could but be useful to you ! "
Next morning he went out earlier than usual, and directed his
steps towards one of the principal streets of Dresden, in which
was the shop of Mr. Petrus Meyer, a bookseller well known in
the town. Edmund entered the shop, which contained an im-
mense collection of works in all known languages. He asked il
he could speak to the master of the house. A clerk having re-
ceived permission, introduced him into the private room of Mr.
Petrus Meyer. He was a man of about fifty, rather stout, wrapt
in a large dressing-gown, with a cloth cap on his head, and
seated before a table covered with ledgers. In one hand he held
a pen with which he was writing, and in the other an enormous
pipe, which surrounded him with a dense atmosphere of smoke.
Through the midst of that cloud Mr. Petrus cast his eyes upon
the youth, and was immediately struck with his fine features, and
the modest confidence with which he presented himself. Edmund
had stopped near the door, with his hat off; the bookseller hav-
ing taken the pipe from his mouth :
" Well, child," said he to him in the language of the country,
" what is it you want 1 "
" Sir," replied Edmund, " you will, I hope, excuse me for call,
mg upon you, thougn 1 have not the honour of either knowing 01
being known to you."
" Certainly, certainly . . . you are a foreigner, I presume ; are
vou a Frenchman ?"
B24 EIGHTY-FIFTH LESSON.
" Why, I am. Ah, sir, do you find my German bad ? Have
[ made any mistakes ?"
" Not at all, my child .... only a slight accent .... row ol«
are you ?"
" Fourteen . . . ."
" There are few so young who can speak a foreign language
io well as you do ours."
" Oh, how happy I am to hear you say that !"
" Why so ?"
" Because, sir, as I was passing yesterday before your house,
an idea struck me ; I said to myself: Perhaps they may want
some one who can translate into German books written in French,
or else to draw up some letters of commerce .... and I have
taken the liberty to come and speak to you about it, sir."
Edmund's face, and the manner in which he expressed himself,
quite captivated Mr. Meyer's attention.
" Who are you, then, my child ? Are you alone in Dresden ?"
M No, sir, I am here with my father and mother; my father
is called the Baron de Grancey, knight of Saint Louis, and a
gentleman from the province of Dauphine ; he is an emigrant :
we were once rich ; but are so no longer. I am sure that my
parents are in difficulty; and I wish, young as I am, to gain some
money for them. You can make inquiry about us of Madame
Krantz, at the sign of the Golden Eagle, where we lodge.
" You are a noble youth, and God will bless you," said Mr.
Petrus Meyer, taking Edmund by the hand vith an emotion
which belied his habitual phlegm : " ye» . . . . ! wi3 give you
employment.'
" Oh, sir," cried Edmund, embracing him with ardour, " and
will you really give me employment ? Could I but gain any
thing, however little, I would be so obliged to you for it."
" Well, well, . . . return to-morrow, don't forget, do you hear
me, don't forget . . . ."
After repeated thanks, Edmund left him, so delighted, that m
returning to the Golden Eagle, he bounded rather than walked.
He arrived quite out of breath, ran up stairs, and entering,
embraced his father and mother repeatedly, shedding tears of joy,
of which they could not comprehend the cause.
EIGHTY -FIFTH LESSON. 52$
" My dear parents," said he, " now f can labour, now 1 can be
»f some use to you."
"Yon, child, in what way ?"
" Yes, father, yes, mother ; thanks to the German which you
caused me to learn, I shall gain some money for you ; I have
found here a bookseller, an excellent man, who has promised to
employ me ... . oh, how happy, how happy I am !"
Next day Edmund did not fail to call on Mr. Meyer : that
bookseller dictated to him several letters on commercial business,
which Kdmund turned into French as fast as he heard them.
Besides this, he gave him an elementary French work to translate,
which he wished to publish in German. For these different
abours, he allowed him a salary of one hundred florins a month:
ilia was quite sufficient to place his parents above want, and even
10 enable them to save something. You may guess what was
Edmund's delight: scarcely a day passed on which he did not
exclaim with transport: "How fortunate it is that I learnt
German!"
At the end of ten months, this means of subsistence was over-
turned. Mr. Meyer fell ill and died, lamented by all his friends,
and particularly by Edmund, who looked upon him as a second
father. His commercial house was dissolved. So that with him
the exiles lost the only resource which enabled them to subsist;
and Edmund could not find another. What was now to be done ?
What was to become of them ? Madame de Grancey was tor-
mented by an insupportable malady ; this was the continual, the
ardent desire of visiting France, or at least of getting near to it ;
that sort of slow fever, in short, which is called the home sickness.
Their native land was shut against the exiles ; they could not
even think of settling near its frontiers, which were at that time
the theatre of war between France and the allied powers. Madame
de Grancey sometimes thought that if she could but live in
England, in that country so near to their native land, she should
Ind herself better. Her imagination, acting upon her already
enfeebled body, rendered this belief with her what might truly be
sailed a fixed idea.
The baron yielded to the desires of his wife ; they set off, em
barked at Hamburgh, and soon arrived in London. They haa
526 EI3HTY-FIFTH LESSON.
been but a few days in that capital when one morning Edmund
and his father were passing through a populous quarter of the
town, where there were in particular a great number of sailors.
At that time there was a certain degree of agitation among the
people. The war between France and England was then at the
hottest. Spies sent by the French republic were said to be at
.hat time in London. This rumour, commented upon and exagger-
ited by the common people and sailors, produced a general excite.
ment. It appears that on that day, a man, pointed out as a
French spy, had been pursued, but in vain, by the infuriated
populace. M. de Grancey and his son knew nothing of this cir-
cumstance. They soon, however, remarked that the multitude
were looking at them and pointing to them with a threatening air.
They quickened their pace, but the crowd increased around them
until their path was completely stopped. The word, " A spy !
spy ! " rang in their ears : four men started out from the multi-
tude, and advanced towards the baron with the intention of strik-
ing him. Some one had thought that he recognized in him that
French spy who had been pursued in vain. This was quite
enough to excite the blind fury of the populace against M. de
Grancey, who could neither understand nor speak their language.
Had he been alone, it would probably have ended fatally with
him ; fortunately, however, he was accompanied by his son. At
the terrible word " spy," Edmund, who understood well what ii
meant, threw himself before his father. " What do you want ? '
cried he. — " To throw the French spy into the Thames/' was
the reply from hundreds of voices. Edmund, transported by al
most supernatural energy, covered his father's body by holding
him closely embraced. He then began in English to harangue
the furious populace. This he did with such energy, such logic,
as nothing but imminent peril could have inspired. He told them
who his father was, and where he lived. The people stopped, and
became uncertain. Some constables with truncheons, which are
the ensigns of those appointed to maintain order, had time to reach
the scene of tumult; they then extricated M. de Grancey, and he
and his son at last got home in safety. This time it was, when
lis mother was not present, for fear of alarming her, tha* Edmund
BIOHTY-FIFTH L1SSON. 527
•aid, as h* embraced his father : " Oh ! how I thank you for caus
ing me to learn English ! "
But the trials of our exiles came at last to a close. A mildei
rule was established in France, and his friends had at last been
able to get the name of M. de Grancey erased from the list of emi-
grants. He received this happy information about a month after his
last adventure. They wrote to him at the same time that he
would recover a great part of his property which had not been
sold. We may imagine the joy of the whole family. They were
at last about to revisit their native country, after so many sufferings
and disappointments. The exiles returned all three to France, the
soil of which they trod with rapture. The baron and baroness
were never weary of telling again and again, how their son had
been their interpreter, their supporter, their deliverer ! — Edmund
did not grow vain on that account, but we have been assured that,
at an after period, when married, and the father of a family, 'n
his turn, whenever his children became disheartened by the diffi-
culties they met with in the study of languages, he took tleasurt
in *elating his history to them in order to renew their o^m ^ge.
INDEX,
LIST OF TABLES
CONTAINED IN THIS VOLUME.
k>»CLENs:ow of the definite article in
iiie singular masculine, 1 ; when the
word begins with 8 followed by a con-
sonant (or z), 2 ; when the word be-
gins with a vowel, 3 ; in the plural,
26 ; when the word begins with s, fol-
'owed by a consonant, or with a vowel,
27 ; in the singular and plural ftmi-
'»ine, 279 ; contraction of the definite
c>rtic'J masculine, 210 ; feminine, 279.
Declension of the indefinite article
masculine. 42 ; feminine, 286 ; of the
partitive article masculine, 37 ; femi-
nine, 286.
Declension of the personal pro-
nouns, 80 ; <vf the demonst ative pi
nouns, queslo (cotesto), queilo, 22.
Declension of the interrogative ^;o
nouns, 83.
Conjugation of the auxiliaries
Avere and Essere,473 ; of the regular
verbs, 477 ; of the passive voice, 481 ;
of a reflective verb governing th
cusative, 484 ; of a refleotiv<
governing the dative, 486 ; ol a verb
with two infinitives, 499 ; of the irre-
gular verbs in are, 502 ; of the irregu-
lar verbs in ere, 505 ; of the irregular
verbs in ire, 513 ; of the defective
verbs, 515.
A, to, 111, 125, 173. Obs. B. 435.
Accents. The grave accent ( ' ),
357 ; the acute accent ( '), 398.
Adjective agrees with its noun or
pronoun in number, Obs. A. B. 92.
Feminine adjectives, and their forma-
tion from masculine adjectives, C. D.
285,286. Abridgment of the adjectives,
uno, buono, hello, grande, santo, queilo,
Obs. G.H.I. 34,35. 459. Comparison
of adjectives, Obs. A. B. 128. Adjec-
tives that are irregular in the forma-
tion of the comparatives and superla-
tives, Obs. F. 129 ; Obs. G. 129.
Adverbs of quantity, 58,59,60. 128.
180. 192. 295. Adverbs of place, 69.
*2, 73. 95. 153, 154. 160. 164. 173.
227. 239. 244. 407. Adverbs of qua-
lity and manner, 365. 404. 420. 430.
436. 439. 450,451. Adverbs of num-
ber, 142. 371. Adverbs of time, 89.
96. 105. 121. 132, 133. 138. 142 164,
165. 168. 200. 227. 410. Comparative
adverbs, 59, 60 121. Comparison of
adverbs, 130. Formation of superla-
tive adverbs, Obs. H. ibid.
Advice to professors, Note 1,1; to
pupils, Note 7, 4.
Affinity between the Latin, Italian,
and French languages, Note 4, 6.
Apostrophe, 458.
Article (definite) : its declension
in the singular masculine, when the
word begins with any consonant, ex-
cept s followed by another consonant,
1 ; when the word begins with 8 fial*
INDEX.
5*2fe
owed by a consonant 'or with >, 2 ;
nrhen the word begins with a vowel,
Obs. A. 3 ; in the plural when the
word begins with a consonant, except
s followed by a consonant, 26 ; when
the word begins with s followed by a
consonant, or with a vowel, 27; femi-
nine, 279 ; contraction of the definite
article with certain prepositions, mas-
culine, 210 ; feminine, 279. In Italian
the definite article precedes the pos-
tessive pronoun, except when it is
immediately followed by a noun of
quality or kindred, Obs. B. 3 ; Rule,
12. Indefinite article : its declension
masculine, 42 ; feminine, 286. — Par-
titive article: masculine, singular and
plural, 37, 3b ; feminine, singular and
plural, 266. — Use of th^ article before
oroper names, 442.
Augmentations, 460.
AuGMENTATIVES, 32.
Avere, to have ; avuto, had, U",
141. To fee, rendered by (were, 8, 9
Aver bisogno, to be in want of, 96,
97. Aver paura, vergogna, torto, ra-
gioi.e tempo, coraggio. desiderio or vo-
glia, to be afraid, ashamed, wrong,
right, to have time, courage, a mind,
a wish, 63. Aver hello, in vain, 425.
Conjugation of avere, 473 et seqq.
B
Be (to), translated by avere :* Are
yon hungry '? Ha Ella fame ? Avete
fame ? 8. I am thirsty, ho sete ; I am
Bleepy, ho sonno, 8. I am afraid, ho
paura ; I am warm, ho caldo ; I am
cold, hofrcddo, 10. Are you ashamed ?
Ha Ella vergogna ? Avete vergogna ? I
am wrong, ho tor to ; You are right,
Ella ha ragtime, Avete ragione, 15.
Bello, fine, handsome, or beautiful.
Before a consonant (not before s, fol-
'©jrsd by a consonant,) bel is used,
Note 2, 5.
Bttono, good, Note 1, 5.
C.
Coitti, u quale (or che), quelh, il
tumle (or :he), him who Plur Coloro, \
i quali (or eke), quelle i quali (or che),
those who. When ought colui, coloro,
and when quello, quelli, to be employ-
ed? Obs. 190.
Conditional tenses ; their forma-
tion, and when they are employed.
387 et seqq.
Conjunctions which govern the sub-
junctive, lie /parks, 378 et' seqq. Con-
junctions expressing certainty require
the indicative, Bern. E. 379 et seqq.
Conjunctions with the preterite ante-
rior, 329.
Construct un, or Syntax, 468.
D.
Da, from, Obs. C. 23 ; Obs. C 85 ;
Notes 1. 2. 68. 181. 197. 244. 255
353. 308 ; Obs. A. 434.
Di, of, Obs. A. 6. Di, to, 63 Di
qua della via, on this side of the road ;
di la della via, on that side of the roadj
174. Dirhnpetto, opposite to, 415
Obs. A. 434 ; Obs. 454.
Diminutives, 33.
Elision, 458 et seqq.
Ella, she. See Way of Addressing
a person in Italian.
Essere*, to be, stato, fern, statu,
been, Obs. 137. Essere impaziente di
{tar dare), to long for; essere agiato
{comodo), to be comfortable; essere
mal comodo, rum et we agiato, to be
uncomfortable, 424 Conjugation o*
essere, 473.
Expletives, 469.
Futvuf, its formation ; first or 8im
pie future, Rule, 220 Obs. A. 221.
Compound or past future ; its forma-
tion, 306. The future is used in Ita-
lian when th.*; present is employed in
English, Obs. 309. The conditional
conjunction ?e, if, mav in Italian b<
followed by the fumrt, Oba. 269.
580
INDEX.
H.
Hour, ora. What o'clock w it ? and
nmilar expressions, 96.
I.
Il (definite article, masculine sin-
gular, when the word begins with a
consonant, except s followed by an-
other consonant), the, 1.
Imperative : its formation, and
when it must be employed, Obs. A.
394. Obs. B. C. 395. 446; 447. The
personal pronouns and the relative ne
are joined to the imperative. Obs. B.
C. 395.
Imperfect (the) of the Indicative :
its formation, Note 1,314: when it
must be employed, Obs. 314. Imper-
fect of the Subjunctive : its formation,
Obs. A. 385 ; when it must be em-
ployed, Rem. H. 385 et seqq.
Is, in, 68, 69. 85. 89. Obs. A. 133.
In luogo di, invece di, instead of,
followed in Italian by the infinitive,
110.
Infinitive: means to distinguish the
infinitive of each conjugation, 63. The
personal pronouns and the relative ne
are joined to the infinitive, Obs. 64.
The infinitive, preceded by the prepo-
sition di, 63, Obs. 110. 125; by the
preposition a, 111. Obs. A. 133 ; by
per, 76. The infinitive without a pre-
position, Obs. B. 134.
L.
La, she. See Way of Addressing
a person in Italian.
Licences, 469,470,471.
Legno (il), the wood, and la legna,
the wood for fuel, Note 3, 5.
Lei, you. See Way of Addressing
a person in Italian.
Lo (definite article, masculine sin-
gular, when the word begins with *
followed by a consonant, or with x),
the, 2. Before a vowel the same ar-
ticle is changed into I', Obs A. 3.
When the wotq beginning with * fol-
lowed by a consonant or with *, ii
preceded by another word, the articl«
is no more lo, but il, Obs. C. 3. I*
(pronoun), it, 5.
Mine, il mio ; of mine, del mm
from mine, dal mio, 11.
N.
JNe, some of it, of it, some of them,
of them. Place of the relative ne,
with regard to the personal, pronouns,
Obs. A. 78. Obs. B. 79 : in conjunction
with the infinitive, Obs (>4 ; with the
present participle, Obs. C. 300 . .in
conjunction with the imperative, Obs
B. C. 395. Ne, from it, from there,
thence, 164.
Neither — nor, nnn — vi, ul, 13.
No, no, 5. Not>, not, ibid. Non—
ne, ne, neither — nor, 13. Non — niente,
non — nulla (or simply nulla, befoie a
verb), nothing or not any thing, Obs.
A. 8 14. Non — niente di buono, no-
thing good, Obs. B. 9.
No, no; not, non, 5. Nothing, or
not any thing, non — niente, non — nulla
(or simply nulla before \h* verb), Obs.
A. 8. 14. Nothing, or not any thing
good, niente di buon>, Obs B. 9
Numbers (Cardinal), 43. 47. 51.
The cardinal numbers are employed
when speaking of the days of the
month, 51. Ordinal numbers, 51, 52.
Distributive numbers, pnmieramente,
in primo Iriogo, firstly ; secundaria-
mente, in secondo lw>go, &c. 371.
The English ordinal number rendered
in Italian by the cardinal : I received
your letter on the fifth, on the sixth.
&c. Ho ricevuto la di Lei letter* il
cinque, il sei, &c. 440
Of, dt, Obs. A. 6.
Of the, del (before a consonant
dello (before *, followed by a eons*
nant), delV (before a vowel), 10.
INDEX.
6251
Om purpose, appcst* a heUa posta,
490.
Oft, o, 11
Participle past ; its formation,
Notes 1, 2, 3, Obs. 137, 138. It agrees
with its object in number, O3 141.
13=239. Obs. E. 287. 0*304. It
serves tc form the passive voice, 196.
0*239.
Participle present ; its formation
and use, 299. The pcsonal pronouns
and the relative ne are joined to the
present participle, Obs. C. 300.
Passato rimoto (or remoto) the
preterite definite ; its formation, Note
1, Obs. A. 318 ; Notes 2,3,4, Obs. B.
319. When it is employed, 320.
Per, to (in order to), 76. Per lo
spazio di, during, 165 Per timnre
{^er lima), for fear of, 369. Pel corso
di, all along, 40 7. Per mezzo, through,
457.
Plural : its formation in nouns and
adjectives, Rule, 26, 6f seqq., Obs. and
Rules, 279, ft{ seqq.
Pl jperfect (the) of the Indicative ;
its formation and its use, Obs. D. 320,
321. Pluperfect of the Subjunctive :
its formation, Obs. B. 385 ; its use,
388.
Prepositions, which in Italian are
followed by the infinitive, whilst in
English they are followed by the pre-
sent participle, O" 184, Obs. C. 276.
The English preposition for with the
verbs to ask, domandare, chiedere ; to
nay, pagare, is not rendered in Italian,
O" 185. Use of the preposition a,
111. 124. 173. Obs. B. 435: of the
preposition da, Obs. C. 23 Obs C. 85,
Notes 1, 2, 68. 181, 182. 197. 244,
245. 353. 368. Obs. A. 434 : of the
preposition di, Obs. A. 6. 63. Obs. A.
434. Obs. 454: of the preposition in,
68, 69. 85. 89. Obs A 133: of the
preposition per, to (meaning in order
Is), 76 ; (meaning during), 165 ;
'meaning for fear of), 369 ; (meaning
til along), 407 ; (meaning through),
457. The infinitive without a prepo-
otion, Obs B. 134^
Present (the) tense Indicative : its
formation, Note 1, 100. Obs. A. 101
There is no distinction in Italian be
tween I love, do love, am loving, Obs
B. 102. Verbs whose infinitive end*
in care or gare insert an h as often at
g or c meets with i or e, Obs. C. 103.
489. Present of the Subjunctive: its
formation, 377. When it must be
employed, Bern. A. B. C. 378. e\
seqq.
Preterite (the) definite. See Pa»~
sato rimoto (or remoto). Preterite an-
terior : its formation and its use, 321
322.
Preterperfect of the indicative :
its formation and use, 146. Preter-
perfect of the Subjunctive : its forma-
tion and its use, Obs. B. 385 et seqq.
Prima di, innanzi di (che), avant*
di, before, 125.
Pronoun : Personal pronouns, 80,
283. Order of the personal pronouns
in the sentence, 79. Place of the rela-
tive ne with regard to the persona'
pronoun, 79. Joining of the personal
pronouns and the relative ne to the
infinitive (See Infinitive) ; to the pre-
sent participle (See Participle) ; to the
imperative (See Imperative). Thi
personal pronouns are joined to ecco,
Obs. A. 325. Absolute possessive
pronouns, 29, 30. 92. 284. In Italian
the article precedes the possessive pro-
nouns, whether conjunctive or absolute,
Obs B. 3. 29, 30. 92. 229. 273. 284.
292. Obs. 348. In Italian the qualifi-
cations of Signore, Mr., Signora, Mrs.,
Signorina, Miss, usually follow the
possessive pronouns, Obs. B. 273.
Demonstrative pronouns, 10. 16. Obs.
A. 22. Obs.B. 23. 29. 33,34. 147. 285.
287. Determinative pronouns, 33. 109.
190. Interrogative pronouns, 3. 9. 16.
18. 29. 83. 97. 181. 229. 285. 347,348
Relative pronouns, 23. 33. 41. 109.
190. 216, 217, 218. 287. Indefinite
pronouns, Obs. 20. 50. 56. 58, 59, 60.
Obs. C. 148. Use of the indefir. -e
pronoun si, they, the people, any one,
or one, 169, 170. Indefinite pronouns
requiring the subjunctive, Obs. P. R
390. Obs S. 391. Pronouns of reflec-
tive verbs, Obs A. 203. The reflec-
tive pronouns myself, thyself, &e
582
INDEX.
rendered by io stesso or v medesimo, J pressed before * followed by a
tu stesso, or tu medesimo, &c, 356. 1 nant, ibid. See Elision.
Pronouns of address, tu, Ella, Lei,
Vossignoria, and when they are used,
90 et seqq. T.
That, quel, quello, quell' ; use of
each of these pronouns, Obs. 10. Thai
or the one, quello, ibid.
The, definite article, il, lo, la, i, glti
le, 1,2. See Artiols.
There or thither, vi or ci, 72, 73.
There is, c'e) vi 6 (vi ha avvi). Then
are, ci sono or vi sono, 160. 227.
Tu, thou. See Way of Addressing
a person in Italian.
Qualche cosa (alcuna cosa), some-
thing or any thing, 7. Qualche cosa
di buono, something, or any thing good,
Obs B 9.
Quale 1 or che 1 (interrogative pro-
noun), which or what. When is quale
and when che (plural qual't che) to be
employed? Obs. D. 3. Note 6, 4.
Quel, quello, quell', that, Obs. 10.
Quello, that, or the one, ibid.
QuESTO (cotesto), this one ; quello,
that one. When must quest o, when
cotesto, and when quello Se ased ? Obs.
B. 23.
8k, if, 193 ; requires the imperfect
of the subjunctive, 385. Se may be
followed by the future, Obs. B. 269.
Si, they, the people, any one, or one,
169, 170.
Skjnorb, Sir. When ought this
word to be written with an e at the
end, and when not 1 Note 3, 2.
Something or any thing, qualche
cosa, or alcuna cosa, 7. Something,
or any thing good, qualche cosa di
buono, Obs B. 9.
Subjunctive, 377 et seqq., 384 et
seqq. See Present, Imperfect, &c.
Substantive : formation of the plu-
ral, 26 et seqq., 280 et seqq Gender
of substantives, Notes and Obs. 28, 29.
280 et seqq. Substantives having a
distinct form for individuals of the
female sex, Obs. 293, 294.
Suo, his. See Way of Addressing
a person in Italian.
Suppression of vowels. When two
words finish with the same vowel, that
of the first word is generally sup-
pressed, Note 1,5. No vowel is sup-
V.
Verbs : the three conjugations, 66.
Verbs requiring the preposition di be-
fore the infinitive, 63. Obs. 110. 125.
Verbs requiring the preposition a (ad)
and those requiring the preposition in,
110. Obs. A. 133. Verbs requiring
*h* nreposition per, 76. Verbs which
io» »iot require a preposition before
tne infinitive, Obs. B. 134. Treatise
of the Italian verbs, 473 et seqq
Compound and derivative verbs are
conjugated like their primitives, Obs.
158. Auxiliary verbs (see Avere*,
Essere*). Verbs which require essere
for their auxiliary, 208. Obs. F. 30J.
The past participle of such verbs must
agree in gender and number with the
nominative of the verb essere, O* 304
Active verbs, 146. Their conjugation,
477 et seqq. Neuter verbs, 152. Pas-
sive verbs, 196, (TJ* 239. Their con-
jugation, 482 et seqq. Reflective verbs,
203. 208. Their conjugation, 483 et
seqq., 486 et seqq. Impersonal verbs,
191. 199 215 Way of rendering in
Italian the English interrogatives do
and am, 124. Irregular verbs: in are,
502 et seqq. ; in ere, 505 et seqq. ; in ire
513 et seqq. Defective verbs, 515.
Voi, you See Way of Add 'basing
a person in Italian.
Vossionobia (V. S), your worship,
Vossignoria IUusirissima, your lord
ship Sep Way of Addressing a per>
son in Italian.
iftD&X.
58*
Vcwnu Altezza. your Highness.
— — — Eccellenza, your Excel-
lency.
Maesta, your Majesty. See
Way of Addressing a person In Ita-
lian.
W.
Watcb : to wind up, to regulate the
**toh, and similar expressions, 409.
Wat (to ask one's), 407.
of Addressing a person in Ita-
ian, Note 2, 1, 2. Note 2 90 et seqq.
What? che? che cosa? cosa 9.
Which or What 1 quale or che (plu-
ral quali, che) ? When is quale, and
when che, to be employed ? Obi. D. 3,
Note 6, 4.
Yours, il vostro, il suo, il di Let
of yours, del vostro, del suo, del di Lei
from yours, dal vostro , dal suo, dal i
Lei, 11.
THE BIfD.
BINDING SECT. JUN 1 3 !963
PC Ollendorff, Heinrich Gottfried
I109 Ollendorff's new method
*6 of learning to read, write,
and speak the Italian language
PLEASE DO NOT REMOVE
CARDS OR SLIPS FROM THIS POCKET
UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO LIBRARY
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11